Nisus Writer

Pro

Users Guide

DISCLAIMER
Nisus Software, Inc. makes no warranties as to the contents of this manual or accompanying software and
specifically disclaims any warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Nisus Software,
Inc. further reserves the right to make changes to the specifications of the program and contents of the manual
without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Nisus Writer Pro includes portions of the following software: LibreOffice 3.4.2 by The Document Foundation and
copyright 2000, 2010 LibreOffice contributors and/or their affiliates, Oniguruma by K.Kosako (2002-2006)
used for regular expression based find and replace, code by Omni Development (1997-2003) used for utility
functions, code by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto (1997-2002) used for random number generation,
UKFileWatcher by M. Uli Kusterer (2005-2006) used to detect file system changes.
For full copyright information and licensing terms please use the menu Help > License Agreement.
We wish to thank all those who contributed to these projects for their generous donations to the development
community.

COPYRIGHT
This software package and manual are copyrighted 1988-2015 by Nisus Software, Inc. All rights reserved,
worldwide. Under the copyright laws of the United States of America and the laws of other countries, neither this
manual nor the software may be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Nisus Software Inc.
other than for backup protection. This exception does not allow copies to be made for others whether sold or
not. Under the law, copying includes translating into another language or format.
Nisus and its logos are registered trademarks of Nisus Software Inc.
Copyright 1988-2015 Nisus Software Inc.
P.O. Box 1302
Solana Beach CA 92075, USA
(858) 481-1477 (voice)
(858) 764-0573 (FAX)

http://www.nisus.com
info@nisus.com
All products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their manufacturers.
Except where otherwise stated, names, addresses and dates used as illustrations in example files and this
manual are fictitious or used fictitiously and any resemblance to actual names and addresses is entirely
coincidental. This manual was written using Nisus Writer Pro 2.1 eta in Mac OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) and Mac
OS X 10.10.1 on a 15" 2.2 GHz Intel Core i7 MacBook Pro with 8 GB 1333 MHz DDR3 of RAM. The headings are
in Optima while the body is in Bookman Old Style. This version of the Users Guide matches Nisus Writer Pro 2.1.
Total words: 182758. Total physical pages 553.
Last saved March 5, 2015 3:43:47 PM EST.
PDF created March 5, 2015 at 3:45:03 PM EST.

Contents
Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro ...................... i

Nisus Writer Pro a Grand Tour .............. 5

Before You Begin ............................................ i

Windows, Bars, Buttons, Pointers and Drawers 5

Using the Mouse and/or the Trackpad ............... i

About Nisus Writer Pro .................................... i

The Nisus Writer Pro window ............................. 6

The Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock ............... 7
The Menu Bar .................................................... 7
The Title Bar ....................................................... 8
Nisus Writer Pro windows ................................ 10
Nisus Writer Pro pointer variations ................... 10
Keyboard shortcuts in Nisus Writer Pro ............ 11
Nisus Writer Pro dialogs ................................... 11
The Nisus Writer Pro Toolbar ............................ 11

64-bit runtime ..................................................... i

Sandboxed .......................................................... i

About the Nisus Writer Pro Documentation .... ii

Using the Documentation ............................... ii
Getting Help .................................................. iii
Get online help ................................................. iii

Getting Set Up ............................................... iii

Installing Nisus Writer Pro .............................. iii
From where did you purchase Nisus Writer Pro? iii

Purchasing Nisus Writer Pro from the Apple App

Store ..................................................................... iii
Purchasing Nisus Writer Pro from Nisus Software,
Inc. ........................................................................ iv
Install Nisus Writer Pro on your Macintosh ............ v

First Startup ....................................................... vi

Designate where Nisus Writer Pro supplemental

tools are stored ...................................................... vi

Enter your license number ............................... viii

Make sure your copy of Nisus Writer Pro is up to
date .................................................................... x
What? Another version? How did that happen? ... x
Subscribe to the Nisus Newsletter ...................... xi

Getting Started ............................................ 1

Quick Start ................................................... 1
Open or Start Nisus Writer Pro ........................... 1

Open a New or Existing File ............................ 1

Open a new file ................................................. 1
Customize your new document template ............ 1

Open an existing file .......................................... 1

Enter Text in Your New or Existing File ............. 2

Write in a language other than American English 2
Enter right to left text .......................................... 2

Modify the Appearance of Your File ................. 3

Save Your File .................................................. 3
Save files in Nisus Writer Pro .............................. 3
Explicitly save your file the first time and give it a
name .................................................................. 3
Save your file after you have made some changes
to it .................................................................... 3
Save your file with a new name and/or in a new
location .............................................................. 3
Prevent new changes from being saved to your file
........................................................................... 4
Save your file automatically ................................ 4

Print Your File .................................................. 4

Print an open document ..................................... 4
Create a PDF file of your Nisus Writer Pro
document ........................................................... 4

Quit Nisus Writer Pro ...................................... 4

Turn on/off the display of the Toolbar ................... 11

Rotate through the various sizes of the icons and text
of the Toolbar display ........................................... 12

The Nisus Writer Pro rulers ............................... 12

The Nisus Writer Pro Statusbar ......................... 14
The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer ...................... 16
Modify the Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer ............... 17
Display/hide the Tooldrawer ..................................... 17
Open/close a palette in the Tooldrawer ..................... 17
Move a palette in the Tooldrawer .............................. 17
Remove a palette from the Tooldrawer (so that it does
not display at all) ...................................................... 17
Return a floating palette to the Tooldrawer ................ 17
Display a different group of palettes in the Tooldrawer
................................................................................. 17

Using the Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer ................. 17

Change the palettes that display in the Tooldrawer 18
Display a different group of palettes in the
Tooldrawer ........................................................... 18

How clicking in the palettes of the Tooldrawer

affects your document ...................................... 18
The Character palette ........................................... 19
Change the font ........................................................ 19
Scroll through a longer list of fonts ............................ 19
Change the typeface or color .................................... 19
Change the size ........................................................ 20

The Paragraph palette ........................................... 20

Change the alignment ............................................... 20
Change the direction text flows (for right to left
languages) ................................................................ 20
Change the space between lines of text (leading) ... 21
Multiple/Fixed .......................................................... 21
Change the amount of space that appears above
(before) a paragraph .................................................. 21
Change the amount of space that appears below (after)
a paragraph .............................................................. 21
Set the indents (line wrap area) ................................. 21
Control for widows and orphans ............................... 21
Prevent a paragraph (or paragraphs) from splitting
across page or column breaks ................................... 21
Keep one paragraph with the one that follows it ....... 21

The Statistics palette ............................................. 21

The Page palette ................................................... 22
Show the Page palette ............................................... 22
Magnify, or, zoom in and out of your document ....... 22
Show the maximum width of your document within the
window Page View .................................................... 22
Show the maximum width of your document including
the margins in Page View .......................................... 22
Show the entire width and height of your document in
Page View ................................................................. 22

Table of Contents
The Columns palette ............................................ 22
The Headers and Footers palette .......................... 22
The Indexing palette ............................................. 22
The Language palette ........................................... 22
The Line Numbers palette .................................... 22
The Lists palette ................................................... 22
The Margins palette .............................................. 22
The Page Borders palette ...................................... 22
The Paragraph Borders palette .............................. 22
The Paragraph Shading palette ............................. 23
The Section palette ............................................... 23
The Shape Fill palette ........................................... 23
The Shape Metrics palette .................................... 23
The Shape Shadow palette ................................... 23
The Shape Stroke palette ...................................... 23
The Shape Wrap palette ....................................... 23
The Shapes palette ............................................... 23
The Special Characters palette ............................. 23
The Styles palette ................................................. 23
The Table palette .................................................. 23
The Table Cell Borders palette .............................. 23
The Table Cell Shading palette ............................. 23
The Table Cells palette ......................................... 23
The Table of Contents palette ............................... 23

Creating Documents ................................. 25

Writing and Editing ..................................... 25
Entering (Typing) Text .................................... 25
Enter special characters into your text .............. 25
Working with the Special Characters palette ........ 26
Customizing the Special Characters palette ............... 27
Add characters to a set ........................................ 27
Add your own set to the palette and menu .......... 28
Remove characters from a set or an entire set ...... 28

Writing in Multiple Languages ...................... 29

Set up language support in Nisus Writer Pro ..... 29
Choose a language in which to write ................... 37
Write in a different language (to switch languages)39
Enter right to left text in your document ............... 39
Mix right to left and left to right text some
common errors and fixes ...................................... 40
Have an exclamation point appear correctly in a left to
right string of right to left text .................................... 41
Have the period appear correctly in a left to right
sentence that ends with a right to left word ............... 41
Insert a right to left table in a left to right section ....... 42

Selecting Text ................................................ 43

Select text using the mouse or trackpad ............ 43
Select a column of text (rectangular selection) .. 43
Select text from different places in the document
(multipart selection) .......................................... 43
What you can (and cannot) do with text of a
multipart selection ............................................... 43

Select all the text in your document ................. 43

Select everything in your document ................. 43
Select everything not selected .......................... 43
Select using the keyboard ................................. 44
Other methods of selection .............................. 45
De-select text from a selection ...................... 45

Copying Text ................................................. 45

Copy text .......................................................... 45
Copy text only, without its attributes ................. 45
Copy attributes only, without its text ................. 45

Drag and Drop .............................................. 46

Cutting Text ................................................... 46
Cut text ............................................................ 46

Pasting Text .................................................... 46

Paste text .......................................................... 46
Paste text only, without its attributes ................. 47
Paste attributes only, without their text .............. 47

Moving, Deleting, and Replacing Text ........... 47

Using the Clipboards ..................................... 47
Display the contents of a Clipboard .................. 47
Choose which Clipboard to use ........................ 47
Add text or images to the current Clipboard ..... 47
Edit the contents of the Clipboard ..................... 47
Add a Clipboard ............................................... 48
Change the name of a Clipboard ...................... 48
Copying and pasting styled text ........................ 48
Copying and pasting rulers ............................... 48

Creating Lists ................................................. 48

About lists ........................................................ 49
Insert a bulleted list .......................................... 50
End a bulleted list ............................................. 50
Apply bullets to a series of paragraphs .............. 50
Insert an automatically incrementing list .......... 51
Begin using the next level of a list .................... 51
Return to a higher level of a list ........................ 52
Restart numbering ............................................ 52
Resume numbering .......................................... 52
Automatic number formats supported in Nisus
Writer Pro ............................................................ 52

Create numbered lists that may have a component

missing ............................................................. 53
Create numbered list that aligns along the period
......................................................................... 54
Modify list styles ............................................... 55
Use list styles to automatically number figures,
tables, etc. ........................................................ 55

Recovering From Mistakes ............................. 57

Undo an action ................................................ 57
Redo an action ................................................. 57

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files 59

Saving Files ................................................... 59
Formats of saved files ....................................... 59
Save As ............................................................. 59
Export As PDF .................................................. 60
Export As .......................................................... 60

Save files automatically in the Nisus Writer Pro

Document Manager ......................................... 60
Save an untitled file as a Nisus Writer Pro file ... 61
Rename and save an existing file .......................... 61

Table of Contents
Save a file in a different format ............................. 61

Opening Files ................................................ 61

Managing Files .............................................. 61
Reintroducing the Document Manager ............. 61
Display the Document Manager ....................... 63
Set up the Document Manager using the Doc
Manager preferences ........................................ 64
Determine the location of your Document Manager
folder ................................................................... 64
Choose file listing options for the Document
Manager window ................................................. 64
Choose whether or not to show file extensions in the
Document Manager window ............................... 64

Work with your files so that the Document

Manager can help you manage them ................ 64

c
Prevent widows and orphans ............................... 89
Keep selected paragraphs together ....................... 90
Keep one paragraph with the one that follows it ... 90

Set tabs ............................................................. 91

Set a tab visually .................................................. 91
Set a tab using the menus ..................................... 92
Use leader tabs .................................................... 92
Set the type of leader before placing a tab ............ 93
Move a tab indicator using the mouse or trackpad 94
Move a tab indicator using the keyboard .............. 94
Edit a tabs location numerically ........................... 94
Remove a tab Indicator ........................................ 95

Selecting paragraphs with different formatting .. 95

Set the same format for a group of differing
paragraphs ........................................................... 95

Save all your files automatically to the Document

Manager .............................................................. 65
Save your file (as needed/desired) to the Document
Manager .............................................................. 65
Save your file to the Document Manager with a new
name ................................................................... 65
Move your file to the Document Manager ............ 65
Add your file to the Document Manager .............. 67
Display and sort files managed by the Document
Manager .............................................................. 68
Create special groups of files ................................ 69

Format Characters ......................................... 96

Add a Custom Group ................................................ 69

Add a Folder Group .................................................. 70
Add a text based Filter Group ................................... 71
Add a date based Filter Group .................................. 73
Remove a filter group from the Document Manager . 73
Rename a filter group in the Document Manager ...... 74

Change the attributes of characters ................. 100

Change the attributes of characters using the
Dropper ...................................................... 100
Manually overriding formatting ...................... 100

Find a particular file or files among those listed in

the Document Manager ....................................... 75
See a preview of your file ..................................... 76
Open a file using the Document Manager ............ 77
Additional features of the Document Manager ..... 77
Using the buttons of the Document Manager window77
Using the contextual menus of the Document Manager
window .................................................................... 77

Formatting Documents ............................... 79

Structuring Paragraphs ................................... 81

Set the indent or outdent (hanging indent)

position of the first line of a paragraph ............. 81
Create a normal indent ........................................ 81
Create a hanging indent ....................................... 81

Quickly indent or outdent a selected range of

paragraphs ....................................................... 82
Set the text wrap area ....................................... 83
Set the text wrap area numerically .................... 85
Set the text wrap area using the keyboard ......... 85
Set the text wrap area using the Paragraph palette
......................................................................... 85
Justify align text ............................................. 86
Set spacing between lines ................................. 88
Keep your lines from spreading when using
superscript or footnotes/endnotes ......................... 88
Allow your lines to spread when using superscript or
footnotes/endnotes ............................................... 89

Set spacing between paragraphs ....................... 89

Control how paragraphs split and stick together 89

Font substitution ............................................... 96

Add a font to your System ................................ 96
Change the font of characters ........................... 97
Scroll through a longer list of fonts ....................... 99

Change the size of characters ........................... 99

Change the size of characters to a size not listed on
the menu ........................................................... 100
Increase or decrease the size of characters by a
specific amount ................................................. 100

Example 1 .......................................................... 101

Example 2 .......................................................... 101
Example 3 .......................................................... 101

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets ... 102

An introduction to Style Sheets ....................... 102
See the Style Sheet associated with a document
....................................................................... 104
Understanding the difference between the various
kinds of styles ................................................. 106
Apply a style to your text ................................ 106
Modify a style ................................................. 107
Select more than one style ................................. 107
Change the name of a style ................................ 107
Have one style inherit the attributes of another .. 107
Determine the style of the next paragraph of your
text automatically .............................................. 108
Assign a keyboard shortcut to your style as you edit
it ........................................................................ 108
Remove a keyboard shortcut to your style as you
edit it ................................................................. 109
Change the sample text that illustrates your style 109
Quickly remove attributes that define your style . 109
Add or modify attributes associated with your style
.......................................................................... 110

Create a new style .......................................... 110

Select a range of text with a particular style .... 111
Select all the text in your document with a
particular style ................................................ 111
Select the next instance of text in your document
with the selected style .................................... 112

Table of Contents
Remove a styles attributes from selected text . 112
Remove a character attribute from your text ... 112
Remove a style from your document .............. 113
Resolve conflicts between styles ..................... 113
Maintain a Style Library .................................. 114
Create a style library .......................................... 115
Import styles from an existing file ............................ 115
Save a file with styles you want to the Style Library
folder of the Document Manager ............................ 116
Add styles to an existing Style Library file ............... 118
Save specific styles from an existing file to a Style
Collection ............................................................... 119

Use styles saved in a Style Library ...................... 122

Import a style the attributes of which you know ...... 122
Import a style the attributes of which you do not know
............................................................................... 122
Open a Style Collection to copy text with style for
pasting in another document .................................. 122

Setting Up a Documents Page .................. 123

What Happens When You Choose New From
the File Menu .............................................. 124
Setting Paper Size and Margins .................... 124

Set the preferred paper size for all your

documents ..................................................... 124
Reduce or enlarge the printed area ................. 126
Determine the orientation of the printed page 126
Set different orientations for different portions of
your document ................................................... 126

Use a custom paper size ................................. 127

Set the margins of the sections of your document
....................................................................... 127
Set the margins visually ...................................... 128
Set the margins numerically ............................... 128
Set the margins by stepping through pre-set
increments ......................................................... 129

Mirror page placement ................................... 130

Set the Number of Columns ........................ 131

Set column line .............................................. 131
Set column and gutter width ........................... 131
Balance column text ....................................... 132
Use the Page Borders palette to put a line around the
edge of your page .............................................. 132
Determine around which portion of the pages
perimeter the border appears .................................. 133
Set the distance from the edge or margin the border
should appear ......................................................... 133

Headers and Footers ................................. 135

Creating Headers and Footers ...................... 135

Insert the same header and/or footer for all pages

....................................................................... 136
Insert a header and/or a footer for even numbered
pages .............................................................. 137
Insert a header and/or footer for odd numbered
pages .............................................................. 138
Have your header and/or footer appear on the
second and succeeding pages of your document
and no number appear on the first (First Page
Special) ......................................................... 138

Add a title page to a document and have the

numbering appear and begin at 1 on the third
page ............................................................... 138
Insert a different header or footer for each section
in the document ............................................. 138

Editing Headers and Footers ........................ 138

Display headers and footers as they appear in the
document ....................................................... 138
Edit headers or footers .................................... 138
Find the header or footer for a particular section of
your document ................................................... 139

Include images in a header or footer .............. 139

Move a header or footer higher or lower on the
page ............................................................... 139
Move a header or footer higher or lower in
relation to the text of your document .............. 139

Deleting Headers and Footers ..................... 140

Hide headers and footers ................................ 140

Numbering Pages ........................................ 141

Insert the current page number (once) on a
specific page .................................................. 141
Display the current page number on every page
....................................................................... 141
Restart page numbering for a new section ...... 142
Restart page numbering at 1 ........................... 142
Display the current page number and the total
number of pages in the section (or document) on
every page ...................................................... 143
Determine the format of page numbers .............. 143

Using Automatic Numbers, Date & Time Variables

and Document Properties in Headers and Footers
....................................................................... 143
Update stale automatic content ................... 143
Update all stale content ..................................... 143
Update only selected stale content ..................... 144
Set automatic content update policies ................ 144
Determine the display and highlight color of stale
content .............................................................. 144

Convert automatic content to static text .......... 144

Graphics: Images and Shapes ................... 147

Working with Various Types of Graphics ...... 148
Inline images .................................................. 148
Floating images .............................................. 149
Shapes ............................................................ 149

Importing Images ........................................ 150

Import an image using the Clipboard .............. 151

Resize an Image .......................................... 152

Crop an Image ............................................ 153
Edit an Image .............................................. 154
Adjust the opacity of an image .................... 155
Working with Floating Images ..................... 156
Deleting shapes and floating images ............... 156
Using the Shape Wrap palette ........................ 157
Make an inline image into a floating image ........ 157
The Shape Anchor .................................................. 158
The contextual menu for floating images ................ 158

Table of Contents
The Shape Bounding Box ........................................ 160
Align a floating image ............................................. 160
Cause text to wrap around an image ....................... 161
Bounding Box of lines ............................................. 162
Set the padding the text leaves around an image ..... 162
Cause text to appear on top of, or behind an image 163
Cause images to appear around text; create a screen
behind text ............................................................. 163

Make a floating image an inline image ........... 165

Working with Shapes .................................. 167

Inserting shapes .............................................. 167
Add a shape to your document .......................... 167
Using the Shapes palette .................................... 167
Text and Callout boxes ....................................... 168
About Text and Callout Boxes ................................. 168
Add a text or callout box to your document ............ 169
Link multiple text or callout boxes .......................... 171
Add a caption to your images ................................. 172

Drawing lines and arrows .................................. 173

Using the Shape Stroke palette ................................ 173
Make a line into an arrow, or an arrow into a line
.......................................................................... 174
Block Arrows ..................................................... 174

Geometric type shapes ....................................... 175

Enter a shape in your document .............................. 175

Modifying shapes ........................................... 176

More tools on the Shapes palette ....................... 176
Select floating shapes without selecting text ............ 177
Rearrange the front to back order of various floating
shapes .................................................................... 179
Bring selected shape(s) to the front .................... 179
Send selected shape(s) to the back ..................... 179
Cause selected objects to function as a single unit .. 180
Cause grouped objects to function as a individual items
............................................................................... 180
Working with multiple selected shapes ................... 180

Using the Shape Fill palette ................................ 180

Using the Shape Shadow palette ........................ 181
Using the Shape Metrics palette ......................... 182
Move selected shapes by precise, designated amounts
............................................................................... 182
Resize selected shapes by precise, designated amounts
............................................................................... 183
Rotate selected shapes ............................................ 183
Determine the values by which floating shapes and
inline images adjust ................................................ 183

The Canvas ........................................................ 184

Working with a Canvas ........................................... 184
The Shape Paste Spot ......................................... 184

Additional tools for working with shapes ........ 185

Set a preferred appearance for future drawn shapes
.......................................................................... 185
Copy the appearance of one shape to apply to a
different shape ................................................... 186
Duplicate shapes ............................................... 187

Book Tools ................................................ 189

Creating Sections in Your Document ........... 191
Insert a new section in your document ........... 191

Numbering Sections .................................... 191

Insert a section number .................................. 191
Restart section numbering .............................. 191

Footnotes and Endnotes ............................... 192

Insert a footnote or endnote ............................ 192

e
Return to the document from the notes ........... 192
Return to a specific note from its marker in the
document ....................................................... 192
Edit a footnote or endnote .............................. 192
Determine the appearance of note markers .... 192
Use an asterisk or other custom symbol to mark
several footnotes and or endnotes ...................... 193
Edit a custom symbol that marks footnotes and or
endnotes ............................................................ 194

Determine the appearance of note text ........... 194

Remove a footnote or endnote ....................... 195
Change endnotes to footnotes or the reverse .. 195
Change a footnote to an endnote
Change an endnote to a footnote
Change all footnotes to endnotes
Change all endnotes to footnotes

....................... 195
....................... 195
....................... 195
....................... 195

Continue footnote or endnote numbering across

consecutive files ............................................. 196
Restart footnotes or endnotes at an assigned page
number .............................................................. 196
Restart footnotes or endnotes at an assigned note
number .............................................................. 196
Restart endnotes at an assigned endnote page
number .............................................................. 196

Find the next footnote in your document because

it shares the selected style .............................. 196
Determine whether or not a document has
footnotes ........................................................ 196

Tables .......................................................... 197

What is a table? .............................................. 197
Types of tables ................................................... 197

Insert/create a table ........................................ 198

Determine the size (number of rows/columns) of a
table ............................................................... 198
Enter text in a table ......................................... 199
Create a table with pre-existing text ................ 199
Enter images in a table ................................... 200
Navigate among the cells of a table ................ 200
Select cells, or portions of or the entire table
....................................................................... 200
Determine the alignment (position) of a table in
the document ................................................. 201
Determine the alignment (position) of text in a
table ............................................................... 201
Align text in table cells along the decimal point . 203

Add cells to a table ......................................... 204

Remove cells from a table .............................. 204
Sort rows of a table ......................................... 205
Merge cells ..................................................... 206
Split cells ........................................................ 207
Resize a cell ................................................... 208
Equalize column widths ................................. 209
Equalize row heights ...................................... 210
Cause the table to resize to fit its contents (and
settings) .......................................................... 211
Cause the table to resize to fit the full extent of the
page ............................................................... 212
Create table headers ....................................... 212

Table of Contents
Create a title for a table ...................................... 213
Create a row header ........................................... 213

Adjust the padding around the contents of a cell

....................................................................... 214
Make your tables stand out! ........................... 214
Modify the lines (edges, borders, etc.) of a table . 215
Clear the selection of lines to modify ...................... 215
Select which lines to modify ................................... 215
Determine the thickness of the lines ....................... 216
Determine the style (pattern) of the lines ................. 216
Determine the color of the lines .............................. 217

Set the shading (color) of cells ............................ 217

Determine the pattern of cells ............................ 217
Set the color of the foreground and background of a
cell pattern ......................................................... 218

Remove a table .............................................. 219

Copy, cut and paste a table ............................. 219
Copy the contents, but not the tableness of a
table ............................................................... 219
Find and/or replace text in a table .................. 219

Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references

.................................................................... 221

Set a Bookmark .............................................. 221

Set a bookmark as something other than selected
text .................................................................... 221
Display the bookmarks Navigator pane .............. 221

Edit an automatically named bookmark .......... 222

Edit the name of a Bookmark as bookmark
....................................................................... 222
Jump to Bookmarked Text ............................... 224
View bookmarks in alphabetical order ............... 224
View bookmarks according to their location in the
document .......................................................... 224

Display the table of contents Navigator pane ..... 231

Jump to a heading in the table of contents ......... 232
Jump to the next or previous heading in the table of
contents ............................................................ 232
Move about in the Navigator ........................ 232
Highlight text marked for the table of contents
.................................................................... 232
Remove an entry from the table of contents ............ 232
Set the various headings of your document so that they
automatically appear in the table of contents .......... 232
Insert a table of contents into your document ......... 233
Update the table of contents you have inserted into
your document ....................................................... 233
Remove a table of contents from your document .... 234
Format the text of your table of contents ................. 235
Determine whether page numbers appear or not 235
Determine whether numbers follow a tab or not 235
Set what appears when line breaks or tab characters
appear in marked text ........................................ 235
Set the paragraph style associated with each level of
the table of contents .......................................... 235
Set the leader that appears between the table of
contents text and the page number .................... 236
Modify the appearance of the text in the table of
contents ............................................................ 236
Add highlight color to your inserted table of contents
............................................................................... 236
Create a new table of contents ................................ 236
Determine which table of contents is active ............ 237
Quickly add text to the table of contents of your choice
............................................................................... 237
Maintain a running table of contents ....................... 238

Outlines ......................................................... 238

What is an outline? ............................................ 238
Using the Table of Contents Navigator as an outline 238
Modifying the structure of your document using the
Table of Contents Navigator .................................... 239
Moving portions of your document ................... 239
Demoting portions of your document ................ 241
Promoting portions of your document ............... 241

Move a Bookmark .......................................... 225

Remove a Bookmark ...................................... 225

Indexes ........................................................... 242

See bookmarked text .......................................... 225

Create an index .................................................. 242

Add Cross-References to Your Text .................. 225

Designate text to appear in the index ...................... 242

Index one thing as something else index as ......... 242
Emphasize the page of a particular occurrence of an
item in the index ............................................... 243
Emphasize a particular term in the index ........... 244
Index multiple terms as one term using the Find/
Replace tool ...................................................... 244
Use the index to refer to other entries ................ 245
Index all occurrences of the word in the Index as
topic box ......................................................... 245
Add an additional Index As reference to indexed
text .................................................................... 245
Create a hierarchical index ..................................... 246
Create an index entry which references all text of a
given font, size and/or style (or language) ............... 247
Index overlapping entries ........................................ 247
Automatically index your document using a word list
............................................................................... 248
Create a word list as a tool for preparing an index
.......................................................................... 248
See what text has been included in the index ......... 249
Remove an entry from the index ............................. 249
Insert an index into your document ........................ 249
Update the index you have inserted into your document
............................................................................... 249
Remove an index from your document ................... 249
Format your index ................................................... 250

Adding other links in your text ........................... 229

Add a hyperlink to any content available in the
bookmark dialog ..................................................... 229
Add a hyperlink to any file on your connected hard
drive(s) .................................................................... 229
Add a hyperlink to a location on the World Wide Web
............................................................................... 229

Find the Original Bookmarked Text to Which

the Cross-Reference Refers ............................. 229
Have cross-referenced text hyperlinked when saving
your file as a PDF ............................................... 229
See cross-referenced text .................................... 229

Jump to Any Page in Your Document .............. 230

Jump to any page using the menus ..................... 230
Jump to any page using the page number display in
the Statusbar ...................................................... 230

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and

Indexes ....................................................... 231
About Tables of Contents and Indexes ............ 231
Tables of Contents .......................................... 231
Create a table of contents ................................... 231
Designate text to appear in the table of contents ..... 231
See what text has been included in the table of contents
............................................................................... 231

Table of Contents
Determine the appearance of what separates the
various sections of your index ........................... 250
Determine what separates the index entry from its
reference ........................................................... 250
Determine what leader separates the index entry
from its reference .............................................. 251
Determine the characters that separate page
numbers in the index ......................................... 251
Have all sub-levels of the index appear on the same
line (space permitting) ....................................... 251
Set the paragraph style associated with each level of
the index ........................................................... 251
Modify the appearance of the text in the index .. 251
Create a new index ................................................. 252
Determine which index is active ............................. 252
Quickly add text to the index of your choice .......... 253
Quickly remove text from the index of your choice 253
How Nisus Writer handles consecutive page numbers
in an index ............................................................. 253

Working with Bibliographic Reference Tools 255

Link Bookends to Nisus Writer Pro ................. 255
Add a citation from your references database to
your document ............................................... 256
Find a particular reference to add to your
document ....................................................... 257
Insert a formatted bibliography into your
document ....................................................... 257
Set the location of your bibliography .................. 257
Scan your document for bibliographic references258
Restore the full text citations to your document .. 259

Polishing & Managing Documents .......... 261

Moving Around in Your Documents .......... 261
Moving the Insertion Point Using the Keyboard
.................................................................... 261
Moving the Insertion Point Using the Select
Commands .................................................. 261
Moving the Insertion Point Using the Go To
Commands .................................................. 262
Go to page ..................................................... 262
Go to or from comments ................................ 262
Go to header/footer ........................................ 262
Go to or from footnote/endnote to the text ..... 262

Moving the Insertion Point Using the Table of

Contents Navigator ...................................... 262
Moving the Insertion Point Using the
Bookmarks Navigator .................................. 262
Moving the Insertion Point Using the Find Tool
.................................................................... 262
Moving the Insertion Point Using Macros .... 262
Moving Between Nisus Writer Pro documents
.................................................................... 262

Proofing Documents ................................. 263

How to Check Spelling ................................ 265

Check your spelling using the Language palette

....................................................................... 265
Have Nisus Writer Pro correct your typos as you
type ................................................................ 265
Set your dictionary preferences ...................... 266

g
Correct your spelling using the keyboard and
without calling up the Spelling window ......... 266
Correct your spelling using the mouse or trackpad
and without calling up the Spelling window ... 266
Correct your spelling using the mouse or trackpad
and without calling up the Spelling window and
add the word to your QuickFix abbreviations . 266
Start the spelling checker ................................ 267
Set the starting point of the spelling checker ... 268
Activate the Spelling floating window ............. 269
Replace a misspelled word using the spelling
checker .......................................................... 269
Skip words flagged by the spelling checker ..... 269
Skip all instances of a particular word ................ 269
Add a word to the Dictionary ............................. 269
Remove a learned word to the Dictionary ....... 269
Find the next error .............................................. 270

Stop the spelling checker ................................ 270

User Dictionaries ........................................ 270

Edit the Dictionary ......................................... 270
Remove words from the dictionary ..................... 270

Using the Nisus Thesaurus ........................... 270

Using the Nisus Thesaurus in the Language palette
....................................................................... 270
Using the Nisus Thesaurus as a free standing
application ..................................................... 270
Using the Nisus Thesaurus from the contextual
menu .............................................................. 271

Using Multiple Language Dictionaries ......... 273

Alternative spelling checker dictionaries ......... 273

Hyphenating your text ................................. 274

Turn hyphenation on ...................................... 274
Turn hyphenation off ...................................... 274
Make hyphenation more frequent ................... 274
Turn hyphenation off for particular paragraphs 274
Prevent a compound word from breaking on its
hyphens ......................................................... 274
Use a soft hyphen ........................................... 274

Word count, text analysis, document properties

& statistics ................................................... 275
Keep a running count of the characters, words
and/or paragraphs of your document in your
header or footer .............................................. 276
Text analysis ................................................... 276
Document properties ...................................... 277

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and

More ........................................................ 279
Pagination ................................................... 280
Set where page breaks appear ........................ 281
Display a document as a continuous scroll ..... 282
See where page breaks appear ........................... 283

Find page breaks in your document ................ 284

Table of Contents

Line Numbering .......................................... 285

Cleaning Up Documents ............................. 298

Number lines ................................................. 285

Change the case of alphabetic characters ....... 298

Number lines continuously throughout the entire

document .......................................................... 285
Number lines for particular sections ................... 285
Number lines so that they continue from the
previous section ................................................. 285
Number lines so that they restart numbering on each
page ................................................................... 285
Prevent line numbers from displaying ................ 285
Change the way in which line numbers display .. 285
Display the Line Numbers palette ........................... 285
Set the starting number of line numbers .................. 286
Determine the interval at which the line numbers
display .................................................................... 286
Determine the format of the numbers displayed ...... 286
Determine the size of the gutter, (the space between the
numbers in the margin and your text) ..................... 286
Determine the font/face/size/color, etc. of the numbers
displayed ................................................................ 286

Number lines for legal documents (Pleading Pages

or Pleading Paper) ........................................... 287
Set up your Pleading Page or Pleading Paper .... 287

Alphabetizing (Sorting) Paragraphs .............. 288

Sort paragraphs .............................................. 289
Jumble paragraphs .......................................... 289

Special Styles ........................................... 289

Plain Text ........................................................ 289
Remove style attributes from text .................... 289
Change the height of text in relation to the
baseline .......................................................... 289
Return raised or lowered text to the baseline .. 289
Increase or decrease the height by a specific amount
.......................................................................... 289

Cause letter pairs to use ligatures .................... 290

Prevent letter pairs from using ligatures .......... 290
Cause letter pairs to display closer together or
further apart ................................................... 290
Increase or decrease the amount of kerning by a
specific amount ................................................. 290

Prevent letter pairs from displaying closer together

or further apart ............................................... 290
Color text ....................................................... 291
Highlight text ................................................. 291
Highlight text using a color other than the current
color .................................................................. 291
Remove highlight color from your text ............... 291

Background color ........................................... 292

Remove background color from your text .......... 292

How highlight color and background color differ

....................................................................... 292
Use Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading to
set off your text and create screens .............. 293
Draw a border around paragraphs ...................... 293
Create a screen behind paragraphs ..................... 295

Using the Mac OS Colors panel ..................... 296

Save colors for later use ..................................... 296
Remove saved colors ......................................... 296

Make all selected characters UPPERCASE .......... 298

Make all selected characters lowercase .............. 298
Capitalize all selected words .............................. 298
Make all selected words appear in SMALL CAPS 298
Reverse the case of selected text ........................ 298

Change the appearance of quotation marks .... 298

Make all selected quotation marks smart ........ 298
Make all selected quotation marks "plain" .......... 298

Finding and Replacing Text ....................... 299

Using Normal Find ...................................... 299
Enter something into the Find box .................. 299
Enter something into the Replace box ............. 300
Either find or find and replace text .................. 300
Find the next occurrence of the Find expression
....................................................................... 300
Limit the search .............................................. 300
Limit the replace ............................................ 301
Reusing find and/or replace expressions ......... 303
Use a recently used find or replace expression ... 303
Save a find or replace expression ....................... 304
Using a saved find or replace expression ............ 306
Deleting a saved find or replace expression ....... 306
Creating a macro from a set of Find, Replace and or
Find/Replace expressions ................................... 307

Using PowerFind ......................................... 308

About PowerFind ............................................ 308
PowerFind terminology .................................. 308
PowerFind example ........................................ 309
Using the Find what and Replace with menus
....................................................................... 309
Using the PowerFind Browser ......................... 310
Open the PowerFind Browser ............................. 310
Resize the PowerFind Browser ........................... 310
Find capitalized words (a PowerFind example) ... 311
Select all instances of a found expression at once
.......................................................................... 312
Convert a PowerFind expression to a PowerFind Pro
expression .......................................................... 312
PowerFind guidelines ......................................... 312
Match set ........................................................... 313
Repeat set .......................................................... 314
Scripts / Blocks set .............................................. 315
Finding and/or replacing non-Roman characters ..... 316

Special Characters set ........................................ 316

Special Positions set ........................................... 317
Wild Card set ..................................................... 318
Transform set ...................................................... 319

Examples of putting PowerFind to use ............ 319

Remove extra blank lines ................................... 319
Remove page breaks .......................................... 320
Change the sequence of a pattern ...................... 320
Find two neighboring duplicate paragraphs ........ 321
Change the wording of a repeated phrase containing
a variable ........................................................... 321
Convert Styles to HTML Code ............................ 321

Table of Contents

Using PowerFind Pro ................................... 324

Exercises, or examples of putting PowerFind Pro to
use ..................................................................... 324
Find a seven-digit phone number ............................ 324
Find any number of trailing spaces in a document or
tabs at the end of paragraphs .................................. 324
Find the invisible null (ASCII (Unicode) 0) character 324
Find repeated groups of characters .......................... 324
Find any set of characters ........................................ 325

Characters with special meaning ........................ 325

Receiving commented files from others ....... 342

Add your comments to the comments of others
.................................................................... 343
Review comment histories .......................... 343
Display comments of a particular author .. 344
Create your own Comment style for your Nisus
New File ..................................................... 344
Printing comments ...................................... 344

Modifier characters ................................................. 326

Parenthesized expressions ....................................... 326

Tracking Changes to Your Documents ....... 345

Pre-defined wild cards ....................................... 327

Start tracking changes .................................. 345

User-defined wild cards .......................................... 328

[] (any character from a set excluding Return) ... 328
[^] (any character not from a set ) ...................... 328
Characters with a unique match ............................. 328
Repeat characters ................................................... 328
Match characters .................................................... 329
PowerFind Pro find expressions .............................. 329
PowerFind Pro replace expressions ......................... 329
Definitions in Nisus Writer Pro ............................... 329

Advanced exercises, or more examples of putting

PowerFind to use ................................................ 330
Swap the sequence of words ................................... 330
Find any and/or all words that begin and end with
specified characters ................................................ 330
Change multiple periods to ellipses ........................ 330

Advanced exercises, or more examples of putting

PowerFind to use ................................................ 330
Swap the sequence of words ................................... 330
Find any and/or all words that begin and end with
specified characters ................................................ 331
Change multiple periods to ellipses ........................ 331
Make sure your spaces follow the punctuation ....... 331
Make sure your punctuation appears inside quotation
marks ...................................................................... 331
Make sure your spaces follow the punctuation ....... 331
Make sure your punctuation appears inside quotation
marks ...................................................................... 331
Replace two or more spaces with one space ........... 332
Find ten-digit phone numbers ................................. 332

Stop tracking changes ..................................... 347

Copying and pasting text with tracked changes
....................................................................... 347

View and review tracked changes ............... 347

Hide and show only the Track Changes pane . 347
Hide and show only the highlighted changes in
the text ........................................................... 348
Additional controls for the display of tracked
changes .......................................................... 348
Determine the kinds of changes Nisus Writer Pro
tracks ................................................................. 348
Display changes of a particular author ............... 348
Determine how Nisus Writer Pro displays the
changes .............................................................. 350

Selecting the next or previous change to your

document ....................................................... 351
Collapsing or expanding the change annotations
in your document ........................................... 352

Accept or reject changes made to your

document .................................................... 352
Accept changes .............................................. 352
Reject changes ............................................... 352
Review, accept and/or reject changes in one
window .......................................................... 353

Using Comments in Your Documents ........ 333

Working with Multiple Documents ........... 358

Add comments ............................................ 333

Remove comments ...................................... 334
Copy and paste commented text ................. 334
Move to and from comments ....................... 335
Select the next or previous comment in your
document .................................................... 335

Window basics ............................................ 358

Select all text within comments ...................... 335

Collapse or expand the comments in your

document .................................................... 335
Hide and show, or turn off and on the display of
all the comments in your document ............ 336

Hide and show all vestiges of comments in your

document ....................................................... 336
Hide and show only the comments pane ........ 336
Hide and show only the highlighted comments in
the text ........................................................... 336
Additional controls for the display of comments
....................................................................... 336
Minimizing the comments in your document . 341

Close a window ............................................. 358

Minimize, or, put a window in the Dock ........ 358
Redisplay a window that has been in the Dock
....................................................................... 358
Open a window to its full size ........................ 358

Using the Window menu and working with

multiple windows ....................................... 358
Choose which window displays in front ......... 358

About Merging Documents ......................... 359

Creating a host document ............................... 359
Prepare the template document ...................... 359
About data documents ................................... 361
Creating a data document .............................. 361
Merging documents & displaying or printing the
results ............................................................. 362
Deciding the source of the data to be merged .... 362
Deciding what to do with the new merged
document .......................................................... 364
Saving the merged document to individual files ...... 364

Table of Contents
Saving the merged document to one file ................. 364
Printing the merged document ................................ 365
Seeing a preview of your merged document ........... 365

Printing Documents .................................. 366

Print an open document .............................. 366
Determine how many copies to print .......... 367
Determine which pages of the document print
.................................................................... 367
Determine aspects of how your document prints
.................................................................... 367
Print page guides and invisibles .................. 367
Print pages in reverse order ............................ 367
Print odd pages, then even pages ................... 368

Add a watermark to your document ......... 368

Create a PDF file of your Nisus Writer Pro
document .................................................... 370
Create a PostScript file of your Nisus Writer Pro
document .................................................... 370

Customizing & Automating Solutions ...... 371

Setting Preferences .................................... 371
Set Defaults for the Application ................ 371

Using the General Preferences to Control the

Application .................................................... 371
Determine what happens at launch or activation 372
Determine a variety of settings regarding your
palettes. ............................................................. 372

Set Defaults for New Files ........................ 374

Understanding Template (Stationery) Documents

....................................................................... 376
Make any file a template file .............................. 377
Edit your Nisus New File .................................... 377
Create a template for plain text documents ........ 378
Create a template for macro files ........................ 378
See the Nisus New File or Plain Text, or Macro
Template in the Finder ....................................... 378
Use an existing file as a Nisus New File ............. 379
Choose a different file for your Nisus New File .. 379
Create a Nisus New File ..................................... 380
Restore the factory settings of your Nisus New File
.......................................................................... 381

Determine the Way the Document Manager

Works ......................................................... 381
Choose the Way in Which Files Save ........... 383

Have Nisus Writer Pro notify you whenever you

save a file ....................................................... 383
Learn when Nisus Writer Pro has finished saving a
file you explicitly save ........................................ 383
Learn when Nisus Writer Pro has finished saving a
file automatically ............................................... 384
Save an additional copy in another location ....... 385
Set the preferred format and encoding for saved files
.......................................................................... 386

Save files automatically and never see the Save As

dialog, unless you choose it from the menu .... 386
Open automatically saved and closed files ..... 387
What gets saved with a file ............................. 387
Determine the way in which files open .......... 387

Open any document as new or Untitled .. 387

Choose Various Display Options for Your

Documents ................................................. 388
Invisibles ........................................................ 388
Customize the color of your Invisibles ................ 390

Page guides .................................................... 391

Customize the color of your Page Guides ........... 391

Insertion point (caret, I-beam) width ............... 392

Change the width of the insertion point ............. 393
Determine whether or not the insertion point blinks
.......................................................................... 393
Change the color of the insertion point .............. 393

WYSIWYG Font menu .................................... 394

WYSIWYG Styles palette ................................ 394
Set the font used in the Navigator pane .......... 394
Determine the suffix of automatically named
bookmarks ..................................................... 395
Determine the color of various aspects of your
Nisus Writer Pro working environment ........... 395
Highlight marked text ........................................ 398
Change the color of the highlight associated with the
text marked for the table of contents .................. 398
Hide the highlight color of text marked for the table
of contents ......................................................... 398

Choose Measurement Display Options for New

Documents ..................................................... 399
Determine the unit of measurement in any Nisus
Writer Pro document ......................................... 399

Customize Your Clipboards399 ................... 399

Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands ....... 400
Remove an existing keyboard shortcut ........... 401
Find whether a key combination has been
assigned to a command .................................. 401

Set Your Language Preferences .................... 401

Determine What QuickFix Fixes .................. 402
Various QuickFixes ........................................ 402
Enter smart quotes as you type ........................... 404
Superscript ordinals as you type ......................... 404
Capitalize the first word of sentences as you type404
Fix typos as you type .......................................... 404
Add or subtract, or modify a typo that gets fixed
.......................................................................... 405

Working with Glossaries and the Mac OS X

System-Wide Replacements ........................... 405
Create a new Glossary ....................................... 406
Add or remove an entry to or from a Nisus Writer
Pro Glossary file ................................................. 407
Activate a Nisus Writer Pro Glossary file ............ 407
Enable automatic expansion of Nisus Writer Pro
Glossary file abbreviations ................................. 408
Create a new glossary abbreviation, or edit an
existing abbreviation in an existing Glossary ...... 408
Import a Nisus Writer Classic Glossary file ......... 408
Delete a Nisus Writer Pro Glossary file .............. 408

Advanced Preferences ................................. 408

Load import files when Nisus Writer Pro starts 408
Choose which import files are used for different
file formats ..................................................... 409

Table of Contents

Customize Your Toolbar ............................... 410

Change the Display of the Toolbar .................. 410
Add your own custom Toolbar item ................ 410
Remove your own custom Toolbar item .......... 412

Create Your Own Group of Palettes for the

Tooldrawer .................................................. 413
Save Preferences ......................................... 414
Return All Preferences to Their Original
(Shipped) Settings ........................................ 414

Macros, Skimming the Surface .................. 415

About Macros ............................................. 415
Use existing macro files and their commands . 415

Running Macros .......................................... 415

Open (load) a macro file ............................. 416
Run a macro ................................................... 416
Stop a macro .................................................. 416

Editing Macros ............................................ 416

Edit a macro ................................................... 416
Rename a macro ............................................ 416

Saving a Macro ........................................... 416

Deleting Macros .......................................... 416
Remove a macro file from the menu ............... 416
Delete a macro ............................................... 416

Undoing a Macro ........................................ 416

Working with Macro Files ........................... 417
Before Creating a Macro ............................. 417
Typing Menu Commands ............................ 417
Create a new macro file ................................. 417
Save the current macro file under a different name
....................................................................... 417
Case sensitivity in Menu Command Dialect
macros ........................................................... 417
A simple to do list ........................................... 417

Writing an invalid command in a macro ........ 417

Working with Menu Commands .................. 418

Looping and Accessing Other Macros ......... 418
Call one macro from another .......................... 418

Macros, the Deeper Workings ................... 419

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language ........ 419
Old and New Macros .................................. 419
Menu Command Dialect ............................. 419
Using menu commands .................................. 420
Using parameters with menu commands ........ 420
Examples ........................................................... 421
Variables ............................................................ 421
Flow of control .................................................. 422
Conditional branches .............................................. 422
Looping command .................................................. 422

Comparison warning .......................................... 423

Document operations ........................................ 423
Environment properties ...................................... 423
Macro document values ......................................... 423

k
Current document values ........................................ 424
Current Nisus Writer application values .................. 424
Current System version ........................................... 424
Current Home folder ............................................... 424

Modifying text .................................................... 424

Changing the selection ....................................... 425
Clipboards ......................................................... 426
User interaction ................................................. 426
Find and replace ................................................ 427
The list of find options ............................................ 427

Embedding Perl .................................................. 427

Useful blocks for data entry ................................ 428
Advanced macro notes ....................................... 429
Included macros ................................................ 430

Writing Perl Scripts ...................................... 435

The recommended way, to structure Perl Macros
....................................................................... 435
Learn more about Perl .................................... 435
Components of a Perl script header ................ 435
#nisus macro block ............................................ 435
#source ( front | next | none | clipboard) ............ 436
#destination ( front | next | none | clipboard | new)
[replace] ............................................................ 436
#(send text as rtf | send rtf | rtf | text as rtf) .......... 436
#before execution .............................................. 436
#after execution ................................................. 436
#end nisus macro block ..................................... 436

Writing AppleScripts ................................. 437

Integrate AppleScript with Nisus Writer Pro . 437
Write AppleScripts for use in Nisus Writer Pro 437
Have AppleScripts open a new file ................. 437
Have AppleScript open a file and perform some
tasks ............................................................... 437
See a list of all the AppleScripts commands that
Nisus Writer Pro recognizes ........................... 437
Get/set text ......................................................... 437
Examples ................................................................ 438
Do Menu Macro ..................................................... 438
Examples ................................................................ 438
Other examples ...................................................... 438

Putting It All Together .............................. 439

Nisus Writer Pro and the Community of
Connected Applications ............................ 439
The Services Menu ...................................... 439
Using LinkBack ........................................... 439
What applications support LinkBack .............. 440
Goals and non-goals ...................................... 440
How you might use LinkBack ......................... 440
Use LinkBack with a drawing application .......... 440

Nisus Writer Pro and the Internet .............. 440

Insert a Link to a Location on the World Wide
Web ............................................................ 440
Open a Document on the Web ................... 440
Copy a Link to a Document on the Web ...... 441
Remove an Inserted Link ............................. 441
Edit an Inserted Link .................................... 441

Table of Contents

Save a Nisus Writer Pro Document as an HTML

Document ................................................... 441
Edit an HTML Document in Nisus Writer Pro
.................................................................... 441
Handling Communications ......................... 441
Email your Nisus Writer Pro files .................... 441
Send the active document as an RTF file ............ 441
Send the active document as a PDF file .............. 442

Standardizing Your Correspondence Stationery

................................................................. 442
Format and Print Envelopes ......................... 442

Afterword ............................................... 445

Send Feedback to Nisus Software Inc. ....... 445
May All Your Writing nisus Be a Pleasure with
Nisus Writer Pro .......................................... 448

Appendices ............................................ 449

Appendix I ................................................ 449
The Nisus Writer Pro Menus ........................ 449
Conventions ................................................... 449
Nisus Writer Pro menu ................................... 449
File menu ....................................................... 450
Edit menu ....................................................... 453
Insert menu .................................................... 458
View menu ..................................................... 461
Format menu .................................................. 464
Table menu .................................................... 472
Tools menu .................................................... 473
Macro menu ................................................... 479
Window menu ............................................... 480
Help menu ..................................................... 480

Appendix II ............................................... 481

Glossary of Useful Terms ............................. 481

Appendix III .............................................. 485

Displaying Fonts and Text ............................ 485
About Displaying Fonts .................................. 485
How Nisus Writer Pro Displays Your Text ........ 485
Typing on a Computer .................................... 485
Typing Unusual Characters ............................. 486
Turn on display of the Input (keyboard flag) menu
.......................................................................... 486
Enter a character using the keyboard .................. 488
Type special Yiddish characters ....................... 490
Set up language support on your Macintosh ....... 491
Enter Unicode text ............................................. 492

Appendix IV ............................................. 493

From Nisus Writer Classic to Nisus Writer Pro
.................................................................... 493
The Nisus Men of the Past .............................. 493
Making the Transition ..................................... 493
Open Multilingual Nisus Writer Classic Files in
Nisus Writer Pro ............................................. 493
Open a Nisus Writer Classic Document with the
esreveR style ................................................... 493

Open a Nisus Writer Classic Document with a

Table .............................................................. 494
More Classic .................................................. 494

Indexes ................................................... 495

Subject Index ............................................ 495
Commands & Screen Messages ................. 507
Index of Figures and Tables ....................... 519

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Nisus [(nice us): L., noun of action f. niti, to strive, endeavor.] Effort, endeavor.
<http://dictionary.reference.com/search?q=nisus>
The Nisus Writer Pro icon, illustrated in Figure 5 on page v, shows a picture of Hermes a Greek god
who served as the herald and messenger of other gods, identified by the Romans with Mercury and
generally pictured with winged hat, carrying a caduceus (a winged staff with two serpents); he was
also the god of science, eloquence, and cunning. In the original Nisus Writer Startup screen
illustrated in Figure 454 on page 493, he held a pen instead of the caduceus and had a floppy disk
at his right elbow with pin feed paper flowing out behind him. The current version alters the style of
the pen and removes the disk and paper.
Writer: One who writes, especially as an occupation.
<http://dictionary.reference.com/search?q=writer>
Pro: [short for professional] following an occupation as a means of livelihood or for gain.
<http://dictionary.reference.com/search?q=professional>
Nisus Writer Pro is designed for you, the serious writer, in mind, whether you are a student who
writes term papers, a professional academic who writes complex articles and books, a novelist
whose creation will win the Pulitzer prize or, enjoys writing and appreciates a tool that enables
you to pursue your craft without distractions.
We hope that this Nisus Writer Pro will help you eloquently convey your messages.

Before You Begin

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro the word processor that makes writing, editing, and managing
documents easy!

Using the Mouse and/or the Trackpad

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to use both the mouse and/or the trackpad. If you have a Macintosh
with a multi-touch capable trackpad, you can use pinch gestures to zoom the document in/out as
well as a three-finger swipe gesture should scroll up/down by a whole page in Page View.
Nisus Writer Pro also supports a large number of contextual menus. These are visible when you
press 6 or right click your mouse or secondary click your trackpad. If a particular portion of
the application has a contextual menu, the documentation will indicate its availability.

About Nisus Writer Pro

Beginning with Nisus Writer Pro version 2.1 the application is converted to 64-bit runtime and it is
sandboxed.

64-bit runtime

This makes Nisus Writer Pro in harmony with OS X and current Apple technology. For example:
Apples developer tools and frameworks all prioritize 64-bit apps, there are certain OS X
features an application cannot use unless it is 64-bit. In addition, the new computer chips are
natively 64-bit.
As a 64-bit application, Nisus Writer Pro is now less likely to exhaust the memory space when
working on documents with large embedded images.
These changes should be totally transparent to you as a user. You can learn more about 64-bit
computing here.

Sandboxed
Sandboxing is all about security. This ensures an application only does exactly what it says it will
do (via entitlements) and can only access data to which you, the user, has granted permission (for
example files selected in an Open dialog).
New Nisus Writer Pro users will be asked to designate a folder for supplemental tools, as explained
on page . Users who are upgrading will notice that their special files have been moved to the Nisus
Documents folder (unless you have designated other locations):

Backups
Glossaries

ii

Getting Help

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Macros
Recovered [files]1
Style Library
Templates
You can learn more about sandboxing here.

About the Nisus Writer Pro Documentation

The Nisus Writer Pro documentation consists of this manual and help available online:
The Nisus Writer Pro manual introduces you to the package and its many features. It reviews basic
Macintosh operations and Nisus Writer Pro conventions, shows you how to install the package. In
addition to a:

Table of Contents where each task you might want to accomplish with Nisus Writer Pro is
listed, pages a-j;
Index of subjects discussed, beginning on page 495;
Index of menu commands and screen messages beginning on page 507
if you encounter a command or a message you want to learn more about, this is a good place to
start to learn more about it;
Index of Figures and Tables (where every aspect of the application and its dialogs is identified)
beginning on page 519;
The document is organized as follows:
a short Quick Start section for those who do not read manuals beginning on page 1;
a description of the Nisus Writer Pro working environment (windows, buttons, dialogs, toolbar,
tooldrawer, etc.) beginning on page 5;
step-by-step procedures that show you how to complete tasks professional writers frequently
perform beginning on page 25.
Appendices. These include:

a description of each of the menu commands referred to from left to right and top to bottom
(including submenus); this is a good place to start if you have a question about what a
command accomplishes beginning on page 449
a glossary of useful terms beginning on page 481
Because certain tasks require the interaction of a variety of aspects of the application, crossreferences to additional information appear throughout the document.
The screenshots in the documentation present Nisus Writer Pro as it has been used in various
versions of the Nisus Writer Pro Mac OS X from as early as 10.2 Jaguar through 10.10 Yosemite
and, therefore, differ in minor ways.

Using the Documentation

Be aware of these conventions as you follow the instructions in the manual:

Text in this style: Command identifies a menu command or dialog option to choose including
buttons that appear in dialogs.
Some menus are represented by images not words. In those few cases:

the word Gear represents this item:

the Plus (+) button is referred to as in this line
the Minus (-) button is referred to as in this line.
When you are to press certain keys on the keyboard, they appear in a special Keys font.
Text in Courier font identifies text to type or select in the various instructions.
Text in Monaco font identifies a path to a specific file, folder or URL.
Bullets: indicate lists of related items that generally do not require a sequence.
Wedges: indicate instructions (or, in the section that describes what each menu command
does, a commands presence in a submenu). If you need to follow a series of steps, they are
numbered.
Youll notice that some steps instruct you to choose a menu command while at other times, to
complete the same operation you press keys or choose options from various palettes. You can
configure Nisus Writer Pro to suit your working style. Try both methods to see which one you like.
1

The recovered folder only exist if it was created by Nisus Writer Pro version 2.0.x. It is now obsolete. If you are
interested in keeping a clean house you should retrieve whatever files you want from that folder and then delete it.

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Installing Nisus Writer Pro

Because a palette or keyboard option may at one or another time not be immediately visible, most
often, instructions are given referring to the menus, which do not change.

Getting Help
All of us at Nisus Software are proud of our commitment to offer you quality software. Aside from
this manual we have included both Tool Tips and Electronic on-line help available from the Help
menu. We also offer email technical support from our offices.
Send email with you question, please be sure to include your Macintosh model name and number,
Nisus Writer Pro version and registration number, the version of the Macintosh Operating System
you use, and your question or description of your problem. E-mail us at (support@nisus.com).

Get online help

Choose the menu command Help > Nisus Writer Pro Help.
Point to an item to show Tool Tips, a short description of what that tool does.
Choose the menu command Help > Get Support to contact our online users forum and
friendly support staff.

Getting Set Up
Make sure your System meets these minimum requirements:

Macintosh with a hard drive running Mac OS X Lion (10.7.5) or later.

Approximately 520 Megabytes of space on your hard drive (for the application).

Installing Nisus Writer Pro

Installing Nisus Writer Pro is a simple process, but it differs depending on how you purchased it.

From where did you purchase Nisus Writer Pro?

You can purchase Nisus Writer Pro directly from our online store, or, from the Apple App Store
application.

Figure 1

The Apple App Store application icon

Purchasing Nisus Writer Pro from the Apple App Store

Start your App Store application and search for Nisus Writer Pro using the search field in the upper
right corner of the window.

iii

iv

Figure 2

Getting Help

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Nisus Writer Pro at the Apple App Store

When you buy Nisus Writer Pro from the Mac App Store you never see or enter a license key. The
application is automatically placed in your Applications folder. The validity of the application is tied
to your AppleID. You will not see an End User License Agreement when you first start the
application; all that is handled at time of purchase. Automatic updating is not handled inside Nisus
Writer Pro (via Sparkle), but by the Mac App Store and OS X instead.
The Mac App Store version has access to iCloud. The version you purchase from the nisus.com
store cannot access iCloud, except under OS X 10.10 Yosemite.

Purchasing Nisus Writer Pro from Nisus Software, Inc.

Nisus Writer Pro is available from the Nisus Software Store. Various purchase options are available
there including Family Packs available only to individuals, families, and SOHO customers;
students as well as discounts for our partners (such as Bookends users).
If you downloaded the application from the Web it probably first appeared in your Downloads folder
as a Package as illustrated in Figure 3.

Figure 3

The Nisus Writer Pro installer package

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Installing Nisus Writer Pro

You will need to open the .pkg file and follow the instructions of the installer. When installation is
complete, you will need your license key to unlock Nisus Writer Pro from its demo mode, as
explained in Enter your license number on page viii.

Install Nisus Writer Pro on your Macintosh

1.
2.
3.

Figure 4

The installer requires your administrator password

4.
5.

Figure 5

When installation is complete, open your Applications folder to find the Nisus Writer Pro
application.
Drag the Nisus Writer Pro icon to your Dock. In that way it will be no more than one click away.

The Nisus Writer Pro application icon

6.

Make sure your Macintosh runs Mac OS X Lion (10.7.5) or later.2

Download the package or insert the DVD.
Double-click the package icon and follow the instructions. You will need to enter your
computers administrator password as illustrated in Figure 4.

Start Nisus Writer Pro.

The current version as of this release it 10.10 (Yosemite).

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Enter your license number

First Startup
When you first start Nisus Writer Pro (depending on whether you are new to Nisus Writer Pro or
updating) you will see a variety of windows:

Designate where Nisus Writer Pro supplemental tools are stored

As Nisus Writer Pro starts you will be prompted, as illustrated in Figure 6, to designate a folder
where the application keeps its supplemental tools.

Figure 6

The Choose Document Manager folder dialog

The various items kept in the Document Manager include folders for your

Templates. These consist of the files that open when you choose the menu commands File >
New or New Plain Text File, as explained in the section Understanding Template (Stationery)
Documents beginning on page 376.
Glossaries. These enable you to expand abbreviations as explained in the section Working with
Glossaries beginning on page 405.
Macros. These tools enable you to extend the capabilities of Nisus Writer Pro by automating
tedious or time-consuming tasks like: removing accidentally repeated words, sentences or
paragraphs, reversing the order of phrases or reorganizing the content of tables. Macros are
explained further in the section About Macros beginning on page 415.
In addition, the Document Manager also contains the Style Library subfolder.
The Document Manager can also contain the secondary Backups folder, but thats up to you.
You would need to chose that location in the Saving preferences.

vi

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Figure 7

Figure 8

Enter your license number

The default location of the Nisus Documents folder

The permission to access the Nisus New File for an existing Nisus Writer Pro user.

vii

viii

Enter your license number

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

If you purchased Nisus Writer Pro from the Nisus Software Store, as it continues to open, another
window appears displaying the license agreement. Feel free to read this standard agreement. You
must click Agree in order to proceed. You can always re-read the agreement by choosing the menu
command Help > License Agreement of Nisus Writer Pro.

Figure 9

The Nisus Writer Pro License Agreement

Enter your license number

If you downloaded Nisus Writer Pro from the Nisus Store, Nisus Writer Pro runs for fifteen (15)
individual days in Demo mode. You can leave the program running in the background for a week
and so long as you do not open a file, that week is considered one day of use. However, each time
you open a file on any day, that day gets counted as one of the 15. In addition, if all you do is open
the application and quit it, without doing anything else, that is considered one day of use. So,
number your days.
No aspect of the application is disabled. However the words Printed with a Demo of Nisus Writer
Pro appear as a watermark on the last page of every document.
1. Click the Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock.
2. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Licenses.

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Enter your license number

Figure 10
The Licenses dialog
3.

If you have used up your demo time

and have not yet purchased the program, click Buy License.
This opens your Web browser and takes you to the Nisus Software Inc. online store where
you can purchase a license.

and have already purchased the program, click Enter License.

Figure 11
The Add License dialog
4.
5.

Enter your name as the Owner.

Press @ and enter your License Number.
If you have purchased Nisus Writer Pro online you should have the license number in your
email. Copy it to the Clipboard and paste it into this dialog.
If you have purchased Nisus Writer Pro from a reseller you should have a copy of the CD and/or
a card with installation instructions and a sticker on it that has the license number.

6.

Nisus Writer Pro is licensed on a per user basis. If other users of the computer want to have
access to Nisus Writer Pro through their account you should purchase a Family Pack for three
(3) licenses. Each user will need to enter his or her own license number.
Click Add.

If you purchased your copy of Nisus Writer Pro online from the Nisus Software Inc. store we already
have your registration information. However if you purchased it via the Mac App Store, or from a
reseller as part of a promotional bundle, please register your copy so that you can be eligible for
technical support, notified of updates and to receive the Nisus Newsletter which includes additional
tips and hints about how you can use the program.

ix

Enter your license number

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Thank you for purchasing and registering Nisus Writer Pro.

Make sure your copy of Nisus Writer Pro is up to date

The second time you start Nisus Writer Pro, you are asked if you want the application to check for
updates (new versions).

Figure 12
The check for updates on startup dialog
If your working environment includes a persistent and fast Internet connection you should click
Yes. This enables you to automatically receive each new update as it is released. What you choose
here determines the preference set in the General preferences of Nisus Writer ProNisus Writer Pro
illustrated in Figure 400 and described on page 372. If, later you wish to change this notification,
you can do so in the preferences.

What? Another version? How did that happen?

Some of us have more software applications than we know what to do with. We see something of
interest and download it hoping to test it later. Or we download a version of Nisus Writer Pro and
leave it in the Downloads folder, or perhaps we moved it onto the Desktop and have been running it
from there. Then we learn of an update and download that putting it in another folder. Some time,
later, we may become so involved with our writing that we lose track of what were doing. We may be
struggling with a difficult thought and need a break, or need to research something on the Web or,
in a book. We may need to eat a meal and then, when we return to our computer we do not notice
that Nisus Writer Pro and its document windows are hidden in the background. When this happens
it is possible to forget that Nisus Writer Pro may be running at all. We seek out the application icon
in our Applications folder and double-click it.
If this second version of Nisus Writer Pro is version 2.x or later, an alert appears as illustrated in
Figure 13 warning you that you are juggling two versions at once. You may Continue but that is
not recommended.

Welcome to Nisus Writer Pro

Enter your license number

Figure 13
Another version of Nisus Writer is already running
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click Quit.
Check in the Dock for the currently running application.
Click and hold your mouse or trackpad down on the icon in the Dock, as described in The
Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock on page 7.
Choose Show in Finder.
At this point you will need to determine which version of Nisus Writer Pro is the one you want
to keep. We advise using the most current version. You can always find older versions on the
Nisus Software Inc. Web site:
<http://www.nisus.com/pro/versions.php>

Subscribe to the Nisus Newsletter

Learn about the latest Nisus news, receiverelevant tips and hints about how to maximize your use
ofNisus Writer Pro and get great Nisus deals. Subscribe today.
1. Go to the Nisus Software Inc. home-page
<http://www.nisus.com>
2. Enter your email address in the little box in the lower right corner
3. Click Subscribe.

xi

Getting Started
For those who dont believe in reading manuals, this Quick Start offers the bare minimum of what
you need to know to start the application, create and/or open a file, write and edit some text, then
save and print it.
Nisus Writer Pro a Grand Tour is where you learn about Nisus Writer Pro menus, dialogs, and
tools. Review this section to learn more about the Nisus Writer Pro working environment and its
features. A list with each menu command with a short description of what it does appears in
Appendix I beginning on page 449.
If you have questions about your Macintosh or other computer equipment, refer to the
manufacturers manuals.

Quick Start ................................................................................................. 1

Nisus Writer Pro a Grand Tour ............................................................ 5

Quick Start
Heres how to open or start Nisus Writer Pro:

Open or Start Nisus Writer Pro

Click the Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock.
A Nisus Writer Pro document window labeled Untitled displays, ready for typing.

Open a New or Existing File

Nisus Writer Pro can create new files, open text documents, .RTF, .RTFD, and .DOC
documents, many WordPerfect documents. It can even enable you to read (and edit) the
PostScript text of .PDF documents.

If you try to open a file, the format of which is not known to Nisus Writer Pro, the application
displays an alert asking if you want to open the file as plain text.

Open a new file

Choose the menu command File > New to open a new file.
If you have the Document Manager open you can click the New button to create a new file.
The file that appears is based on a file called the Nisus New File. You can modify most aspects of
this file to suit your needs and desires.

Customize your new document template

You can learn more about the Nisus New File and how to arrange your start-up preferences in the
section Set Defaults for the Application beginning on page 371. You can use the defaults for
new files to create all kinds of stationery that you use regularly.

Different applications use different terms for the same phenomena. You might find them
called templates, stationery, or default documents.

Open an existing file

There is a variety of ways you can open an existing file.

Figure 9

There are often as many as three ways to do almost anything in Nisus Writer Pro.
You can locate and open any text document on your hard drive(s) using the Finder.

Double-click any Nisus Writer Pro document icon.

The Nisus Writer Pro document icon

1.
2.

Use the Open command.

Choose the menu command File > Open.
From the Open dialog that appears navigate to the location of your file.

Quick Start
When you see it in the list, double click the name of the file you want to open (or click once to
select the file and then click the Open button).
You can open any file you have saved in your Nisus Documents folder.

Use the Document Manager.

1. Choose the menu command Window > Document Manager.
2. Scroll through the list of files that appears there.
3. When you see it in the list, double click the name of the file you want to open (or click once to
select the file and then click the Open button).
You can use the Document Manager to manage all your Nisus Writer Pro documents. Detailed
instructions on how to use the Document Manager begin on page 386.
3.

You can open any recently opened file from the menu File > Open Recent.

Choose the file you want from the list that appears in the menu File > Open Recent.
You can determine how many files appear in the Open Recent menu in the General Preferences of
Nisus Writer Pro.

Add a hyperlink to any file on your hard drive(s). Choose Add Link to File, locate and select a
file on any of your connected hard drives and click Insert Hyperlink. When you click the link in
your document, the linked file opens in the original application.
For example:

If it is a .jpg or other common graphic format, it will likely open in Preview.app.

If it is a .mp3 it will open in iTunes.app.
If it is an equation, it will likely open in MathMagic or MathType.
You can also drag a file from the Finder while pressing 6 to add a hyperlink to that file in
your document.
When you add a hyperlink to your text, Nisus Writer Pro adds a Hyperlink character style to
your document, that is by default blue and underlined, and applies that style to the linked text.
You can modify the appearance of the style, or remove it altogether in the Style Sheet view.
If you do not want your text to show the Hyperlink style but still be visible as a hyperlink, you
can use the Hyperlink Marked text color in the Nisus Writer Pro Appearance preferences as
explained in Determine the color of various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working
environment beginning on page 395.
The link and style information is preserved when you save or print your file as a PDF and the
link is clickable in the PDF document. The text marking assigned in the Appearance
references is not.
The contextual menu that appears when you press 6 or right click your mouse or
secondary click your trackpad enables you to Show Linked File in Finder as well as Open
Link, Copy Link, Remove Link and Edit Link.

Enter Text in Your New or Existing File

Your new or existing file opens ready to receive your text. The insertion point in an existing file
appears where it was when you saved the file. You can either

Type your text, or

Choose the menu command Edit > Paste to enter whatever you have stored on any of Nisus
Writer Pros Clipboards, or

Drag a selection from another Nisus Writer Pro document or other application into your Nisus
Writer Pro document window, or

Drag a file into your Nisus Writer Pro document window from the Desktop, or

Drag the icon of another Nisus Writer Pro document from its Title Bar into your Nisus Writer
Pro document window.

Write in a language other than American English

In order to type text in a language other than English (Nisus Writer Pro is already set up and ready
to go to write in American English) see the section Writing in Multiple Languages on page 29.

Enter right to left text

In order to type text in a language other than English (for which Nisus Writer Pro is already set up
and ready to go) see the section Writing in Multiple Languages on page 29.

Getting Started

Modify the Appearance of Your File

Using the many tools of Nisus Writer Pro you can modify the appearance of the text in your file in a
variety of ways. You can change the font (family), size, style (typeface) and color of text, you can
change the margins of the page and the shape of paragraphs with various indents, line wrap areas,
tab settings, line spacing and alignment options.

To control the overall appearance of a longer document, your best solution is to use Styles.
These are explained in the section Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets beginning on
page 102.
The Nisus New File that comes with Nisus Writer Pro has a number of Styles.
To modify Styles to fit your own needs and desires see the section Modify a style which begins
on page 107.

However if all you want to do is make a quick and simple change to a small area of your text you
can do that as well.

To quickly change the appearance of only a little bit of your text use the appropriate control in
the Character palette (or the associated menu). To learn more about the Character palette see
Using the Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer on page 17 and The Character palette on page 19.

To change the shape of your paragraphs you modify the ruler that displays at the top of the
document window and use the settings that appear in the Paragraph palette as explained in
The Paragraph palette on page 20 and Structuring Paragraphs beginning on page 81.

To change the margins of the document drag the Page Guides that appear in Page View or set
them numerically as explained in Set the margins of the sections of your document on page
127.

Save Your File

Nisus Writer Pro offers you a number of ways to save your work. The application can do this
automatically or you can do it manually.

Save files in Nisus Writer Pro

Note: Mac OS X handles all saving of your files. If you open a new file and start typing the OS will save
the contents as Untitled (#) until you close the file. When you do close the file you will be prompted
to save the file in a particular location and give it a name.

Explicitly save your file the first time and give it a name
1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command File > Save As.

Type the name you want to use for the file in the Save As text edit box at the top of the
document.
Navigate through your folders to find the location where you want to save the file.
(Optionally) choose the file format in which you want to save the file from the pop-up menu at
the bottom of the dialog. (The standard and preferred format is Rich Text Format (RTF). You
can learn more about the various formats in which Nisus Writer Pro can save your files in the
section Set the preferred format and encoding for saved files on page 386.

Save your file after you have made some changes to it

Nisus Writer Pro files are automatically and regularly saved by the OS. When, and how frequent this
saving occurs is handled entirely by the OS, not Nisus Writer Pro. In addition, you can also initiate
saving a file yourself.

Choose the menu command File > Save.

Save your file with a new name and/or in a new location

Nisus Writer Pro files can be renamed and moved from the Title bar.
1. Click the files name in the Title bar.
A small pane opens as illustrated in Figure 14.

Quick Start

Figure 14
Renaming the novel Black Bounty to its new working title Black Beauty
2.
3.
4.
5.

Enter the name you want to use in the Name field.

Add a tag if you want in the Tags field.
If you also wish to move the file, choose a location from the pop-up menu in the Where field.
Press T or < or click anywhere outside the pane to close it and accept the changes.
As an alternative, follow the instructions in Explicitly save your file the first time and give it a
name.

Prevent new changes from being saved to your file

Beginning with Mac OS X 10.9 (Mavericks), Nisus Writer Pro files can be renamed and moved from
the Title bar.
1. Click the files name in the Title bar.
A small pane opens as illustrated in Figure 14.
2. Click the Locked box in the lower right corner of the pane.
3. Press T or < or click anywhere outside the pane to close it and accept the changes.

Save your file automatically

You should not have to worry about saving your work. Nisus Writer Pro works with the System to
save your files automatically.
For more information about automatic and backup saving of files in Nisus Writer Pro see the
section Choose the Way in Which Files Save on page 383.
If you save your file in this manner, the first time it is saved, Nisus Writer Pro assigns a name for
the file based on the content at the beginning of the document and saves it in the Nisus Documents
folder inside your Users Documents folder:
~Documents/Nisus Documents/automatically named file

Print Your File

When you are satisfied with the appearance of your document and ready to store it on paper or
share it with someone in a Portable Digital Format (PDF), Nisus Writer Pro is at your service.

Print an open document

Choose the menu command File > Print and enter your choices in the dialog that appears.

Create a PDF file of your Nisus Writer Pro document

You may want to save your document as a PDF.
1. Choose the menu command File > Export as PDF.
2. Name the file and navigate to the location in which you want to save it.
3. Click Save in the Save As dialog.
You can learn more about printing on page 366.

Quit Nisus Writer Pro

You can leave Nisus Writer Pro open in the background all the time. You can keep a journal page
open all the time, dragging in snippets of text, images from other applications and URLs directly off
the Web bookmarking them, then easily jumping to or finding what you have stored there.
However, if you insist
Choose Quit Nisus Writer Pro from the bottom of the Nisus Writer Pro menu.

Nisus Writer Pro a Grand Tour

Have you ever entered a new building or travelled to a new land and stood bedazzled by what lay
before you? What were all those buttons and knobs? Why were all the street signs and address
markers different from what you knew before? Even cars, which are all pretty standard in their
tools, put the light and windshield wiper controls in different locations.
So it is, also, with software. To help you understand and use the many tools that are all within the
reach of your mouse or trackpad, read on.

Windows, Bars, Buttons, Pointers and Drawers .......................................... 5

Windows, Bars, Buttons, Pointers and Drawers

This portion of the manual describes the graphical elements you see on screen for controlling Nisus
Writer Pro. Features of Nisus Writer Pro windows, palettes and the buttons they contain, are fully
explained. Also included is a description of the various pointers you see when you perform different
tasks. Finally, you can learn about how Nisus Writer Pro allows you to manipulate dialog boxes.

The Nisus Writer Pro window ..................................................................... 6

The Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock ....................................................... 7
The Menu Bar ............................................................................................ 7
The Title Bar ............................................................................................... 8
Nisus Writer Pro windows ........................................................................ 10
Nisus Writer Pro pointer variations ........................................................... 10
Keyboard shortcuts in Nisus Writer Pro .................................................... 11
Nisus Writer Pro dialogs ........................................................................... 11
The Nisus Writer Pro Toolbar .................................................................... 11
The Nisus Writer Pro rulers ....................................................................... 12
The Nisus Writer Pro Statusbar ................................................................. 14
The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer .............................................................. 16
Modify the Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer ......................................... 17
Using the Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer ........................................... 17
Display a different group of palettes in the Tooldrawer ................... 18
How clicking in the palettes of the Tooldrawer affects your document
....................................................................................................... 18
The Character palette .............................................................. 19
The Paragraph palette .............................................................. 20
The Statistics palette ................................................................ 21
The Page palette ...................................................................... 22
Magnify, or, zoom in and out of your document ............................. 22

The Nisus Writer Pro window

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro window

Nisus Writer Pros window resembles those of other Macintosh applications.

Not all screenshots depicting the Toolbar show the default item set. To customize your own Toolbar
see Customize Your Toolbar on page 410.

Figure 15
The Nisus Writer Pro window when first opened

Figure 16
The Nisus Writer Pro window opened to full height

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock

The Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock

Figure 17
The Nisus Writer Pro icon, and its menu, in the Dock
The Nisus Writer Pro Dock icon also has a special menu that appears when you press 6 or right
click your mouse or secondary click your trackpad. From it you can choose any of your open
windows.
The menu also indicates:

which document window is active (the check mark)

which is in the Dock (the diamond).
From this menu you can also use commands to open a new document or show the Document
Manager (along with the standard Dock commands).
If you click and hold your mouse or trackpad down the Mac OS X displays the open windows (as if
using Expos. The menu offers the opportunity to Quit Nisus Writer Pro, Hide Nisus Writer Pro and
additional Options including Keep in Dock/Remove from Dock, Open at Login and Show in
Finder. Press 4 to choose Hide Others and Force Quit.

The Menu Bar

Figure 18
The Nisus Writer Pro Menu Bar
The menu bar lists the menus available in Nisus Writer Pro. Click your pointer on a menu title to
display the list of available commands.
The list below reviews the menus available in Nisus Writer Pro and briefly describes when to use
which menu. Each menu command is described in more detail in Appendix I beginning on page
449.
Nisus Writer Pro
Use the Nisus Writer Pro menu to access commands that control the entire
application, not one portion of it: Preferences, Services, Hide/Show, Quit. A
complete listing and description of the commands of this menu begins on page
449.
File

Use File to open, close, save, merge and print files. A complete listing and
description of the commands of this menu begins on page 450.

Edit

Use Edit to change text as well as undo or redo actions and use Cut Copy, Paste,
Clear, Select All, Convert, Sort, Find, Spelling, Clipboards. A complete listing and
description of the commands of this menu begins on page 453.

Insert

Use Insert to put Page Break, Column Break, Section Break, Automatic Numbers,
Styles, Footnotes and Endnotes, Images and Hyperlinks. A complete listing and
description of the commands of this menu begins on page 458.

The Title Bar

Getting Started

View

Use View to alter the manner in which Nisus Writer Pro displays your document
and its window. A complete listing and description of the commands of this menu
begins on page 461.

Format

Use Format (with its many submenus) to change the way your text appears in
your document. A complete listing and description of the commands of this menu
begins on page 464.

Table

Use Table to insert and modify tables. A complete listing and description of the
commands of this menu begins on page 472.

Tools

Use Tools to insert and work with comments, track changes to your document,
develop tables of contents, indexes and bibliographies, maintain automatic
content, insert a watermark and create and modify images and shapes. A
complete listing and description of the commands of this menu begins on page
472.

Macro

Use Macro to write and run Perl scripts and Command menu macros. A complete
listing and description of the commands of this menu begins on page 479.

Window

Use Window to choose among active windows and manage the Palette Library and
the Document Manager. A complete listing and description of the commands of
this menu begins on page 480.

Help

Use Help to get Nisus Writer Pro Help which gives you extensive explanations and
hints regarding all of the features found in Nisus Writer Pro. A complete listing
and description of the commands of this menu begins on page 480.

The Title Bar

The Title Bar, which appears across the top of every document window consists of three parts. The
left side contains three buttons. Click to close (red/left), minimize (to the Dock) (amber/center), and
zoom (green/right). Drag the Title Bar to move a window.
When using Mac OS X 10.8 and earlier, clicking the button on the right side of the Title Bar hides
or shows the Tool Bar.
When using Mac OS X 10.10 click the green button to cause Nisus Writer Pro to switch into Full
Screen mode. Press 4 as you click the green button to maximize the window without entering Full
Screen mode.

Figure 19
The Nisus Writer Pro Title Bar (Untitled, Saved) Mac OS X 10.8

Figure 20
The Nisus Writer Pro Title Bar (Untitled, Saved and Edited) Mac OS X 10.10
When you save a file the Nisus Writer Pro document icon appears to the left of the documents name
in the Title Bar. As you work on the document, the icon dims (OS X, 10.9), becoming bright once
again on saving, or the word Edited appears to the right (OS X, 10.10) which disappears once
again on saving.
Other things you can do with the documents icon in the Title Bar

You can press A and click the icon (or area of the of the files name) to see a pop-up menu
indicating the files location on your computer.

Getting Started

Nisus Writer Pro pointer variations

You can drag the documents icon to any location on your hard drive, creating an alias that
leads back to the file.
You can drag the documents icon into another Nisus Writer Pro document causing its content
to appear there.
You can drag the documents icon into a Mail.app email message causing it to be sent as an
attachment.
In OS X 10.10, Yosemite, you can click any portion of the text on the Title Bar to open a sheet
as illustrated in Figure 21 that enables you to:

Give the file a new Name.

Add Tags to the file.
Determine Where the file should be saved.
Set whether the file is Locked or not

Figure 21
Renaming a Nisus Writer Pro document from the Title Bar

10

Nisus Writer Pro Windows

Getting Started

Nisus Writer Pro windows

As you work with multiple windows

The pointer is an arrow

in all window regions not allowing text entry. Exceptions to this
include when the pointer hovers over one of the gray lines that determine the margins or the
size of the headers or footers.
Dialog sheets apply to the window. in which they appear.
Press 4 and click the Maximize button to maximize all open Nisus Writer Pro windows.
Press 4 and click the Minimize button to minimize all open Nisus Writer Pro windows.
Press 4 and click the Close button to close all open Nisus Writer Pro windows.
Press 4 and click the Show/Hide Toolbar button to show/hide the Toolbar in all open Nisus
Writer Pro windows.
Press A ` (tilde) to circulate through open Nisus Writer Pro windows.
To control an inactive window, press A. You can press A and click the show/hide Toolbar
button to rotate through the various display options of the Toolbar in all open Nisus Writer Pro
windows. You can, scroll, move and resize inactive windows in this way without activating
them. You cannot click inside the text editing area of the window without activating it.
The Nisus Writer Pro document window displays either as it would appear on paper (Page View),
as a continuous scroll (Draft View (or Full Screen, in which the window covers everything on the
monitor)), or the various styles in the document (Style Sheet).

Nisus Writer Pro pointer variations

The pointer changes shape to give you feedback as you complete different tasks. You should be
familiar with some of these from your previous activities on the Macintosh. The list that follows
describes Nisus Writer Pro pointer shapes.
Arrow Pointer

The left-slanting arrow points to images, icons, menu commands and

buttons you can choose or click. It also indicates that you have text to drop
elsewhere. Select what you want to move then click and drag the pointer.

Arrow Pointer with Plus

I-Beam

or

Margin Mover

This variant of the Arrow Pointer points to images, or text you can choose or
click. It appears after you begin to drag something and press 4 to indicate
that you have something to duplicate elsewhere. Select what you want to
move then click and drag the pointer, then press 4.

The I-beam indicates where you can enter text. When you click in the text it
changes to an insertion point.
When your pointer hovers over one of the margin lines or lines that separate
the header or footer from the writing area, or the lines of a table or an image.

Cross Hairs

When your pointer hovers over the handle of a selected image the cross
hairs indicate that you can resize the graphic.

Grabbing Hand

When your pointer hovers over a selected image the grabbing hand indicates
that you can move the image.

Paste Spot

When in a shape Canvas, the paste spot indicates where a pasted images
upper left corner will appear.

Macro in Progress

While a macro is running, the mouse pointer turns to a macro or script

icon.

Getting Started

Keyboard shortcuts in Nisus Writer Pro

11

Keyboard shortcuts in Nisus Writer Pro

You can use the keyboard for more than entering text and numbers. You can use it to give
instructions to the computer to perform certain tasks.
Macintosh keyboards include a variety of modifier keys and function keys. The four modifier keys
are A (Command), 1 (Shift), 4 (Option), and 6 (Control).
You can assign almost any key to any command in the menus of Nisus Writer Pro. Each time you
look at the menus you can see the menu key shortcut along the right column opposite the
command. As you become familiar with the commands you can also learn the shortcuts. To learn
more about this see Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands on page 400.

Nisus Writer Pro dialogs

Dialogs are used to get information from you. Dialogs in Nisus Writer Pro appear from the Title Bar
of the window to which they refer.
Dialogs can have a variety of controls, including checkboxes, buttons, pop-up menus & text boxes.

A checkbox (
) is referred to as checked when there is a a check mark in it (
). You
click a checkbox to check or uncheck it. It is possible to check multiple checkboxes in a dialog.
A radio button (
) is referred to as selected when there is a a dot in it (
). You can only
select one radio button in any single portion of a dialog. Click a button to select it; click an
alternate button to deselect the first one and select the other.
Pop-up menus, indicated by a menu name and an arrow, list options in the form of a menu.

or
Figure 22
Pop-up menu indicators
Click and hold to display the menu, then choose an option.

Text boxes, indicated by a rectangular box, allow you to enter text in a dialog.
To type in a text box, click in the box and begin typing. To move between text boxes, press @.
Nisus Writer Pro allows you to copy, cut and paste in all the dialog text boxes.

The Nisus Writer Pro Toolbar

Figure 23
The Nisus Writer Pro Toolbar

Turn on/off the display of the Toolbar

Choose the menu command View > Toolbar > Show Toolbar or click the Show Toolbar button
in the upper right corner of the Title Bar of the active window.
Using the capabilities of Macintosh OS X, Nisus Writer Pro keeps all the tools you need to control
your text close at hand. Nisus Writer Pro opens with the Toolbar visible at the top of each window
(immediately below the Title Bar) and the Tooldrawer (see page 11) opens on the right side of the
window. From the Toolbar you can

Switch from Page View to Draft View or Style Sheet view and back to Page View.
For more information on Page and Draft View see pages 81, 138, and 282. For more information
on Style Sheet view see page 102.

Move your insertion point to its earlier or following location.

For more information on moving the insertion point see Select using the keyboard on page 44.

Change the language of your text.

For more information on writing in multiple languages see the section beginning on page 29.

12

The Nisus Writer Pro rulers and Statusbar

Getting Started

Highlight selected text with a click, and/or change the clickable highlight color with a click and
a drag.
For more information on highlighting text in your documents see page 291.

Create a list and modify its style.

For more information on creating lists see page 48.

Toward the right side of the Toolbar are buttons you can use to

Insert a table with a click and a drag.

For more information on inserting tables in your documents see the section beginning on page
197.

Insert a shape in your document.

For more information on inserting shapes in your documents see the section beginning on page
167.

Insert a text box in your document.

For more information on inserting text boxes in your documents see the section beginning on
page 168.

Turn on or off display of the Navigator pane on the side of your document to see your
bookmarks or table of contents entries and see the structure of your document.
For more information on bookmarks and tables of contents see the page 221 for bookmarks and
for tables of contents, page 231.

Add a comment to your document.

For more information on comments see the section beginning on page 333.

Track the changes made to your document.

For more information on tracking changes see the section beginning on page 345.

Open and close the Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer with one click.
For more information on using the Tooldrawer see page 17.

Rotate through the various sizes of the icons and text of the Toolbar display

Press A as you click the Show Toolbar button in the upper right corner of the Title Bar of the
active window.

Not all screenshots in this document depicting the Toolbar show the default item set. To customize
your own Toolbar see Customize Your Toolbar on page 410.

The Nisus Writer Pro rulers

Immediately beneath the Toolbar and above the text editing area the Horizontal Ruler appears.

Figure 24
The Nisus Writer Pro Horizontal Ruler in Page view showing inches
The Horizontal Ruler is explained in detail in the section Structuring Paragraphs beginning on
page 81.
A Vertical Ruler displays along the left edge of the document window.

When in Page View, the ruler counts from zero at the top of the page through to the full length
of the page. It scrolls with each page beginning anew at the top of each page.
When in Draft View and Style Sheet view, the ruler counts from zero at the top and counts to
the bottom of the displayable area much the same way the horizontal ruler displays in draft
view.
No rulers display in Full Screen view.
You can turn the display of the rulers on or off at any time when in Draft View, Page View or Style
Sheet view.

Click the Rulers button on the Toolbar if it is available.

Check, that is: choose the menu command View > Rulers > Show Rulers. This command
toggles on and off.
You can display either the horizontal or vertical ruler, or both by checking the one(s) you want
in that submenu.

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro rulers and Statusbar

Check the menu command View > Rulers > Horizontal Ruler to display the horizontal ruler.
Check the menu command View > Rulers > Vertical Ruler to display the vertical ruler.
These commands toggle on and off. Only the ruler checked displays when you turn on Show
Rulers.

Figure 25
Paragraph formatting icons
You can also display Paragraph Formatting Icons which include a ruler icon that contains the
information related to the shape of your paragraph, in the gutter or (depending on the alignment)
closest margin of your document as illustrated in Figure 25. To do so, choose the menu command
View > Show Paragraph Formatting Icons. You can drag and drop these icons elsewhere in your
document thereby applying the relevant formatting elsewhere. Clicking the icon displays the same
menu as clicking its matching icon on the Statusbar which is explained on page 14.
The paragraph style icon (

) appears next to a paragraph only if both:

The applied paragraph style is not the "Normal" paragraph style.

The preceding paragraph has a different paragraph style.
The ruler icon (
) appears next to a paragraph only if both:

The paragraph formatting differs from (overrides) that of the applied paragraph style.
The preceding paragraph has different paragraph formatting.

13

14

The Nisus Writer Pro rulers and Statusbar

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro Statusbar

At the bottom of the document window (except in Full Screen view) Nisus Writer Pro displays a
Statusbar. This bar gives you information (displayed in tags) about the document and any
selection within the document. In addition it gives you easy access to a variety of formatting tools.

Figure 26
The Nisus Writer Pro Statusbar

The far left of the Statusbar indicates the current (displayed) page number of the total pages of
the document. When in Draft View this is blank as there are no pages.
When running a macro the words Running macro and the macros name appear in this area.
When the document is automatically saved a progress bar appears in this area.
Jump to a particular page by clicking the display and typing the page number you want in the
text box that appears. If you have multiple sections in your document or you have begun your
page number counting at something other than 1, you can choose to Show Physical Page
Numbers or Show Logical Page Numbers from the pop-up menu that appears there.

The right side of the Statusbar displays a number of tags that tell you about your selection and
your file.

To the left of the vertical dotted line the tag (visible when your insertion point or selection is in
an area of text that contains these attributes (from right to left).

The List Tag

This has two states (if a list style is absent from the selection, the tag is dimmed (
);
Click to select (the current range or all text with the current list attribute(s)) modify or
remove the current list attributes.

The next two tags represent the presence of Character ( ) and Paragraph ( ) styles in
your selection. They have two states (if a style is absent, the tag is dimmed (
or
); if
present, it is bright as illustrated in Figure 26). See the section Apply a style to your text
on page 106 for more information on how to use the tags.
If you are in the footnotes or endnotes text portion of your document window you will see a
Notes tag with similar capabilities
.
For more information about styles in your documents see the section beginning on page 102.
The remaining tags represent other attributes of your selection. These also have two states. (If
an attribute is present the tag appears; if absent, it not appear.) By using the tags (and their
respective pop-up menus) you can remove the attribute from selected text, extend the range of
the selection to select all contiguous text that shares the attribute, extend the range of the
selection to select all text in the document that shares the attribute.

The Ruler Tag

Click to select (the current range or all paragraphs governed by this ruler) copy, paste
or remove the current rulers attributes.
For more information about using the ruler and shaping the paragraphs in your documents see
the section beginning on page 81.

The Font/Character Attributes Tag

Click to select (the current range or all text with the current attribute(s)) copy, paste or
remove the current font/character attributes.
For more information about font and character attributes in your documents see page 289.

The Color Tag

Indicates the current text color at the insertion point. Click to select (the current range
or all text with the current color attribute) copy or remove the current color attribute.
For more information applying color to the text of your documents see page 291.

The Highlight Tag

Indicates the current highlight color at the insertion point. Click to select (the current
range or all text with the current highlight color attribute) or remove the current

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro rulers and Statusbar

15

highlight color attribute.

For more information on highlighting text in your documents see page 291.

The Background Color Tag

Indicates the current background color at the insertion point. Click to select (the
current range or all text with the current color attribute) copy or remove the current
color attribute.
For more information on background color in your documents see page 292.
Visible to the right of the vertical dotted line the tag (from left to right)

The flag (Language Tag)

Indicates the language of the document (and offers quick access to the Language
menu).
For more information on writing in multiple languages see page 29.

The flag implies no political allegiance or association. The flag is of the entire people (and it represents
the language of that people), not a particular party. This is an Apple convention. (The International
System Preference lists many more flags (and other symbols) that attempt to iconographically
represent a linguistic group.) OS X 10.10, Yosemite sometimes uses a character from the relevant
language to represent that language.

The Comments
Appears whenever your document has comments and gives you easy access to
controlling your comments from the mouse. The commands available include Show
Comments, Go To Next Comment, Go To Previous Comment, Add Comment and
Remove Comment. For more information on using Comments in your documents see
page 333.

The Clipboard
Offers quick access to the Clipboard related commands of the Edit menu. When the
pointer hovers over the Clipboard tag a tool tip appears indicating which Clipboard is
active as well as a sample of its contents (in plain text).
For more information on using the Clipboards see page 47.

The Tracked Changes

Appears whenever your document has changes that are tracked (whether they are
currently being tracked or not) and gives you easy access to controlling your changes
from the mouse. The commands available include Show Changes, Track Changes, Go
To Next Change, Go To Previous Change, Accept Tracked Changes in Selection and
Reject Tracked Changes in Selection. For more information on using tracked changes
in your documents see page 345.

The magnifying glass

Displays the current percentage of magnification of your document (and offers quick
access to change the zoom).
For more information on magnifying the view of your documents see page 22.

16

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer holds a number of palettes to ease the manipulation of your text.

Almost all of the tools available in palettes of the Tooldrawer have counterparts on the menus.
However there are more tools that are available in the menus that do not have counterparts in
the palettes of the Tooldrawer.

Figure 27
The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer at first startup
The Tooldrawers palettes hold most of the tools available in Nisus Writer Pro to work on your
document.
Dark gray title bars of palettes indicate that they have operators you can use in the particular
aspect of your document that is active, palettes with no enabled or useful information appear light
grey. You can change the tint in the Document Views portion of the Appearance preferences as
explained beginning on page 395.
The Tooldrawer opens either on the right or the left side of your document window depending on
your setting in Preferences. For more information on Nisus Writer Pros General Preferences, see
Using the General Preferences to Control the Application page 371. You can override the choice on
a document basis by turning the menu command View > Tooldrawer > Attach on Left Side on or
off.
The palettes are designed to give you an uncluttered working environment, while, at the same time
giving you quick access to information about your document and the tools to manipulate it.

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

The Tooldrawer is not available in Full Screen view though individual palettes removed from the
Tooldrawer are.

Modify the Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer holds a number of palettes to ease the manipulation of your
document and its text.
Palettes are grouped according to task. You can switch among the various groups using the five
buttons and the right-pointing chevron (or guillemet ) at the top of the Tooldrawer. You can
rearrange the layout of the palettes by dragging them around within the Tooldrawer. You can drag
any or all palettes out of the Tooldrawer creating floating palettes that you can place anywhere you
like on your screen. When you close a floating palette it returns to its original location in the
Tooldrawer.

Display/hide the Tooldrawer

Choose the menu command View > Tooldrawer > Show Tooldrawer, or click the Tools button
on the Toolbar.

Open/close a palette in the Tooldrawer

Click the Reveal triangle on the left edge of the palettes title.

Move a palette in the Tooldrawer

Grab the palettes title and move it above or below its current location or out onto the desktop.

Remove a palette from the Tooldrawer (so that it does not display at all)

Click the X on the right edge of the palettes title.

Return a floating palette to the Tooldrawer

Click the X close button on the right edge of the palettes title bar.

Display a different group of palettes in the Tooldrawer

Choose the palette group you want from the four Palette Group buttons at the top of the
Tooldrawer.

Figure 28
The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer palette group selection buttons
The buttons are, from left to right

Writing
Formatting
Table
Drawing Tools
Sections
Additional Palette Groups Menu

Using the Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawers palettes offer point and click access to tools.
When you start Nisus Writer Pro, the Tooldrawer opens with the Writing group of palettes visible.

Writing

Styles
enables you to change the font, size, options and color of the characters of your text using
Styles;
Language
checks spelling and definitions of words you use with the built-in dictionary and the Nisus
Thesaurus, and change the language in which you write (with all its associated dictionaries
and keyboard input methods);
Stats
maintains a continuous count of the characters, words and paragraphs of your document.

17

18

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

Getting Started

Change the palettes that display in the Tooldrawer

You can rearrange the palettes that appear in any particular group. You can have a palette appear
in multiple groups, thereby making those tools available in more contexts.
Other sets and their default palettes available include

Formatting

Tables

Section (#)
Margins
Columns
Header/Footer

Reference Tools

Table
Table Cells
Borders
Shading

Sections

Character
Lists
Paragraph

Table of Contents
Indexing

Drawing Tools

Shapes
Shape Wrap
Shape Stroke
Shape Fill
Shape Shadow
Shape Metrics
Other palettes that are not part of groups include

Line Number
Page Zoom
Page Borders
Paragraph Borders
Paragraph Shading
Special Characters
You can display these at any time by choosing them from the menu Window > Palettes. You
can also add these to existing palette groups or create a special group with the palettes of
your choosing.

The Headers and Footers palette and the drawing tools palette group appear automatically whenever
you click your insertion point in a header/footer or select an image in your document (unless you
have added the palette to a set in the Tooldrawer in which case that group displays if the
Tooldrawer is open).

Display a different group of palettes in the Tooldrawer

Click the palette group you want from the display at the top of the Tooldrawer.
You can modify the palettes and their groups to your hearts delight. See Create Your Own
Group of Palettes for the Tooldrawer on page 413 for a thorough explanation.

How clicking in the palettes of the Tooldrawer affects your document

The following briefly describes using various palettes to alter the appearance of your text. These
capabilities are discussed in much greater detail in the section Formatting Documents beginning
on page 79. Each palette controls a variety of aspects of your document. The following describes a
few actions you can do with the Character, Paragraph, Stats and Page palettes.

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

19

The vast majority of actions in the palettes (especially when you input text) require confirmation by
pressing Tab @, Enter: T, or Return <. Each of these keys results in a slightly different behavior
by Nisus Writer Pro as illustrated in Table 1.

Result of pressing various

confirm keys in Nisus Writer Pro palettes
Key

Action

Focus

Tab @

Ifthe field value has

been edited then
apply/enforce it,
otherwise no change

shift the focus to the

next palette field.

Enter: T

Always apply/enforce
the current field
value

keep the focus in the

same palette.

Return <

Always apply/enforce
the current field
value

return the focus to the

document area.

Table 1
Result of pressing various confirm keys in Nisus Writer Pro palettes
On keyboards with only a single Enter: T, or Return < key (eg. MacBooks) you can

augment the keys capability by holding down Function: _.

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value

uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

The Character palette

The Character palette, illustrated in Figure 108, Figure 109 and Figure 110 on page 97, indicates
the font family, typeface, options, color and size of selected text. It also presents the tools to modify
each of those attributes.

Change the font

1.
2.
3.

Select the text you wish to change.

Choose the set of fonts you want from the Font pop-up menu in the Character palette. This is
usually set to display All Fonts, but you can narrow this down using one of the other sets.
Click the arrow to the right of the font Family display and choose the font you want from the
menu that appears.
If you have many fonts available, a scroll bar appears. You can drag this scroll bar to display
additional fonts.

Scroll through a longer list of fonts

Drag the resize tab at the bottom of the Character palette down to display a longer list of
available fonts.
If you know the name of the font you want, you can click and select the font name in the Family
display and type the first few characters. Nisus Writer Pro uses auto-fill to sense which font
you want, displaying the closest match (in alphabetical order). When you see the font you want,
press < to confirm your choice.

To learn more about using fonts (where they belong in your System, etc.) see pages 466 and
(for non-Roman text) 29.
If you want to change the typeface and/or size, you can press @ to confirm and select the next
field in the palette.

Change the typeface or color

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Click the arrow to the right of the face display (beneath the Font pop-up menu) and choose the
typeface you want from the menu that appears.
Not all fonts have all typefaces (for example Geneva does not support italic). In that case,
Nisus Writer Pro can achieve this effect if you click one or more of the Options buttons
available.

20

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

Getting Started

If you know the name of the typeface you want, you can click and select the typeface name in
the display and then type the first few characters. Nisus Writer Pro uses auto-fill to sense
which typeface you want, displaying the closest match (in alphabetical order). When you see the
typeface you want, press T or to confirm your choice.
The options available include

Bold
Italic
Underline
Subscript
Superscript
Strikethrough (Single)
Strikethrough (Double)
Shadow
Small Caps
Color is an aspect of Options. Click the Color Picker to open the Systems Colors panel.
If you want to move on to change the size of your characters, you can press @ to confirm and
select the next field in the palette.

Change the size

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Click and drag the Size slider to the size you want.
The Size box updates to display the actual size of the characters.
If you know the size you want, you can click and select (or double-click) the size display and
type the size you want. Nisus Writer Pro uses only whole number sizes. When you are satisfied,
press T or @ to confirm your choice.
While the slider goes up to 128 pt., you can enter any size you like in the size display text box,
or increase the size by one point at a time using the stepper as illustrated in Figure 29.
Press A when you click the palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown

value uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

Figure 29
The stepper in the Size portion of the Character palette

The Paragraph palette

The Paragraph palette, illustrated in Figure 91 on page 86 enables you to modify the alignment, text
direction, the space between lines and paragraphs, the indents (line wrap area) as well as offering
controls for widows and orphans and whether paragraphs are permitted to break across pages or
separate from each other.

Change the alignment

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Click the alignment button that illustrates the effect you want in your document.
Possible alignments are (from left to right) left justified, center justified, right justified and full
justified.

Change the direction text flows (for right to left languages)

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Click the direction button that illustrates the effect you want in your document.

Text direction is a function of the language selected. Each language has a natural or normal
direction of its own. You can override this direction of a paragraph within a section of text designated
as being in a particular language (and flowing in a particular direction) by using this control.
Possible directions are (from left to right)

left to right
normal

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

21

right to left.
For more information on right to left text editing see Enter right to left text in your document on
page 39.

Change the space between lines of text (leading)

1.
2.
3.
The

Click the Spacing tab in the Paragraph palette.

Select the text (lines or paragraphs) you wish to change.
Click the stepper to the space you want.
Size box updates to display the actual size of the space.

If you know the size you want, you can click and select (or double-click) the size display and type
the size you want. When you are satisfied, press T or @ to confirm your choice.

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value uniformly to
all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

Multiple/Fixed
The Multiple/Fixed pop-up menu refers to the vertical distance between the top of one line and the
top of the following line. To prevent the lines of paragraphs from spreading, regardless of the height
of the characters, choose Fixed from the menu. To permit the lines of paragraphs to spread choose
Multiple from the menu.

Change the amount of space that appears above (before) a paragraph

1.
2.

Select the text (lines or paragraphs) you wish to change.

Click the stepper to the right of Before till you arrive at the space you want.
The Size box updates to display the actual size of the space.

If you know the size you want, you can click and select (or double-click) the size display and type
the size you want. When you are satisfied, press T or @ to confirm your choice.

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value uniformly to
all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

Change the amount of space that appears below (after) a paragraph

1.
2.

Select the text (lines or paragraphs) you wish to change.

Click the stepper to the right of After till you arrive at the space you want.
The Size box updates to display the actual size of the space.

If you know the size you want, click and select (or double-click) the size display and type the size.
When you are satisfied, press T or @ to confirm your choice.

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value uniformly to
all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

Set the indents (line wrap area)

1.
2.
3.

Click the Indents tab in the Paragraph palette.

Select the text (lines or paragraphs) you wish to change.
Click the various steppers to the settings you want.

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value uniformly to
all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

Control for widows and orphans

1.
2.

Click your insertion point in the paragraph (or select a range of paragraphs).
Click Prevent widow/orphan.

Prevent a paragraph (or paragraphs) from splitting across page or column breaks
1.
2.

Click your insertion point in the paragraph (or select a range of paragraphs).
Click Keep together.

Keep one paragraph with the one that follows it

1.
2.

Click your insertion point in the paragraph.

Click Keep with next .

The Statistics palette

The Stats palette keeps constant count of the number of characters, words and paragraphs (Return
characters) in the text portion (not the header/footer) of your document.

If you select text, the Stats indicates the count within the selection.
To get a count of the characters, words and paragraphs in your tables, footnotes and/or
endnotes, you need to select that text.

22

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

Getting Started

The Page palette

While it does not appear in any of the default sets, the Page palette is very useful. As with the
Statusbar at the bottom of each Nisus Writer Pro document window, it indicates (when in Page
View) the page number of the currently displayed page (not the location of the insertion point), and
the total number of pages in your document. It also indicates the percentage to which you have
zoomed your window. It also offers additional tools relating to the magnification of your documents
display.

Show the Page palette

Choose the menu command Window > Palettes > Page Zoom.

Magnify, or, zoom in and out of your document

Click and drag the slider in the Page Zoom palette.

Double-click in the percent zoom text box and type the percent you want to increase or
decrease the display.
You can have a different zoom percentage for Page View or Draft View. The percent set in Draft View
is maintained in Full Screen view.

When in Page View Nisus Writer Pro can display your page in a variety of manners.

Show the maximum width of your document within the window Page View

Click Show Text Width in the Page palette of the Tooldrawer.

This displays your document in such a way so that a portrait orientation of your page requires
scrolling to see all the contents of the page.

Show the maximum width of your document including the margins in Page View

Click Show Page Width in the Page Zoom palette of the Tooldrawer.
This displays your document in such a way so that a portrait orientation of your page requires
scrolling to see all the contents of the page.

Show the entire width and height of your document in Page View

Click Show Entire Page in the Page Zoom palette of the Tooldrawer.
This displays your document in a format similar to Page (or Print) Preview. It is, however, fully
editable.

The other tool palettes will be described as they are needed for the specific tasks they control. In
alphabetical order (the way they appear in the menu Window > Palettes) they are:

The Columns palette

The Columns palette is described on page 131.

The Headers and Footers palette

The Headers and Footers palette is described beginning on page 135.

The Indexing palette

The Indexing palette is described on page 253.

The Language palette

The Language palette is described on pages 38 through 42 and 265 through 270.

The Line Numbers palette

The Line Numbers palette is described beginning on page 285.

The Lists palette

The Lists palette is described on page 50.

The Margins palette

The Margins palette is described on page 128.

The Page Borders palette

The Page Borders palette is described on page 133.

The Paragraph Borders palette

The Paragraph Borders palette is described on page 293.

Getting Started

The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer

The Paragraph Shading palette

The Paragraph Shading palette is described on page 295.

The Section palette

The Section palette is described on pages 130, 142 and 191.

The Shape Fill palette

The Shape Fill palette is described on page 180.

The Shape Metrics palette

The Shape Metrics palette is described on page 182.

The Shape Shadow palette

The Shape Shadow palette is described on page 181.

The Shape Stroke palette

The Shape Stroke palette is described on page 174.

The Shape Wrap palette

The Shape Wrap palette is described on pages 149, and 157 through 165.

The Shapes palette

The Shapes palette is described on page 167.

The Special Characters palette

The Special Characters palette is described on page 26.

The Styles palette

The Styles palette is described on page 103.

The Table palette

The Table palette is described on pages 200 through 204.

The Table Cell Borders palette

The Table Cell Borders palette is described on pages 215 through 217.

The Table Cell Shading palette

The Table Cell Shading palette is described on pages 217 through 218.

The Table Cells palette

The Table Cells palette is described on pages 202, 203 and 214.

The Table of Contents palette

Table of Contents palette is described on page 237.

23

Creating Documents
Now that youve had a grand tour and a brief description of the menu commands of the Nisus Writer
Pro working environment you are ready to begin creating and editing your documents.
This is the major portion of the documentation. It describes all the tools you need to create basic
printable documents.

Writing and Editing .................................................................................. 25

Formatting Documents ............................................................................. 79
Setting Up a Documents Page ................................................................ 123
Headers and Footers ............................................................................... 135
Graphics: Images and Shapes ................................................................. 147
Book Tools ............................................................................................. 189

Writing and Editing

This portion of the manual introduces you to Nisus Writer Pro and shows you basic word processing
tasks. Review the information here to get a feel for the application and how easy it is to learn and
use. The sections include

Entering (Typing) Text ............................................................................... 25

Writing in Multiple Languages ................................................................. 29
Selecting Text ........................................................................................... 43
Copying Text ............................................................................................ 45
Drag and Drop ......................................................................................... 46
Cutting Text .............................................................................................. 46
Pasting Text ............................................................................................... 46
Moving, Deleting, and Replacing Text ...................................................... 47
Using the Clipboards ................................................................................ 47
Copying and pasting styled text ................................................................ 48
Creating Lists ............................................................................................ 48
Recovering From Mistakes ........................................................................ 57
Managing Saving and Opening Your Files ............................................. 59

Entering (Typing) Text

At first blush, the Macintosh seems a little like a typewriter (if you can remember what that was)3. It
has a keyboard that looks pretty much like that of a typewriter and it enables you to put letters
together to put words on paper. However, there the metaphor ends.
On a computer you type letters and spaces, numbers and punctuation marks, combining them into
recognizable, meaningful configurations. The keyboard sends electronic signals to the central
processing unit (CPU) which then sends the signals further on to become images that appear in
thousands of points of light on the monitor in front of you.

When you type, words that do not fit on one line automatically wrap to the beginning of the
next line.

Press < only to begin a new paragraph, not when you come to the end of a line.

Indent the beginnings of your paragraphs using the tools on the ruler (as explained in
Structuring Paragraphs beginning on page 81). Do not press @ or the space bar.
For detailed information that explains how fonts work and how Nisus Writer Pro displays your text
on opening a file see Appendix III - Displaying Fonts and Text on page 485.

Enter special characters into your text

While the vast majority of the characters you are likely to use in a document are available easily
from the keyboard, there are a variety of others that are more unusual and it can be hard to
remember what keys to press to have them display. Access to many of these characters is explained
3

Certain aspects of the typewriter still affect the way we do and conceive of word processing.

26

Entering (Typing) Text

Writing and Editing

in Appendix III - Typing Unusual Characters on page 486. You can, however, enter most of these
characters in a more direct fashion.

Choose the character desired directly from the menu Insert > Special Character, or

Choose the character desired directly from the menu Edit > Special Characters.
All of the special characters available from the menus are listed beginning on page 456.

Click the characters as they appear in the Special Characters palette.

You can modify the Special Characters submenus and palette to suit your needs.

Figure 30
The Special Characters palette displaying the Misc (miscellaneous) set

Working with the Special Characters palette

The Special Characters palette, illustrated in Figure 23 above, is not part of any group in the
Tooldrawer. You can open it from three different locations on the menus.

Choose the menu command Edit > Special Characters > Show Special Characters Palette.

Choose the menu command Insert > Special Character > Show Special Characters Palette.

Choose the menu command Window > Palettes > Special Characters.
The Special Characters palette has two menus. The pop-up menu on the left offers the different sets
of characters that appear in the menu Insert > Special Character and the menu Edit > Special
Characters. Their contents are listed in alphabetical order beginning on page 456. They are:

Arabic
Currency
Dashes and Hyphens
Greek
Hebrew
Math
Misc (short for miscellaneous)
Quotes
Spaces
Writing
As with all other palettes, you can leave this open wherever you like on your monitor and click the
characters you want on an as-needed basis.
The Gear menu on the right of the Special Characters palette enables you to change the display
from Characters & Name to grids of various sizes:

Characters Only (small size)

Characters Only (medium size)
Characters Only (large size)

Creating Documents

27

Customizing the Special Characters palette

You can also edit existing special character sets, remove existing sets and even add new ones.

Add characters to a set

If you know how to type the character:
1. Choose Customize Special Characters from the bottom of

the menu Insert > Special Character, or

the menu Edit > Special Characters, or
the Gear menu in the Special Characters palette.
The Edit Special Characters window appears as illustrated in Figure 24.

Figure 31
The Edit Special Characters window
Click the Plus (+) button at the bottom left corner of the window.
Type the character you want in place of the two question marks that appear.
Press @ and type the name of the character.
If you have more than one character you wish to add at one time, repeat step 2. You can even
switch to a different set and continue to add characters to those as well using step 2.
5. When you are satisfied with your entries click Save to close the dialog.
If you do not know how to type the character, begin with step 1 above, then, instead of continuing
with step 2,
6. Click Show Character Catalog at the bottom of the window.
7. Find the character you want in the Characters panel.
8. Drag the character you want from the Characters panel into the Edit Special Characters
window as illustrated in Figure 32.
Dragging the character places it in the Character field and the Unicode value appears in the
Name field.
9. Double-click the Name field and either type over the Unicode value that appears there or add
the name of the character (in the case of the illustration in Figure 32: Per Ten Thousand
Sign).
You can even copy the name from the Characters panel.
10. When you are satisfied with your entries click Save to close the dialog.
2.
3.
4.

Clicking Cancel forfeits all your work in that session of editing special characters.

28

Entering (Typing) Text

Writing and Editing

Figure 32
Customizing the Special Characters palette

Add your own set to the palette and menu

You can even create you own personal set of special characters that you tend to use most often.
1. Choose Customize Special Characters from the bottom of

2.
3.
4.
5.

the menu Insert > Special Character, or

the menu Edit > Special Characters, or
the Gear menu in the Special Characters palette.
The Edit Special Characters window appears as illustrated in Figure 24.
Click the Plus (+) button in the upper right corner of the window.
Give your new group of characters a name.
Click OK.
Enter the characters you want in this group as explained in Add characters to a set on page
27.

Remove characters from a set or an entire set

Click the Minus (-) button in the lower left corner of the Edit Special Characters window to
delete a character from a set.
Click the Minus (-) button in the upper right corner of the Edit Special Characters window to
remove a set from the palette and menus.
An alert appears asking you to confirm your choice. This action is undoable (though you can
reconstruct your work).

Creating Documents

29

Writing in Multiple Languages

Though it is invisible, Language is an attribute of your text. If applied correctly, changing the
language of a portion of the text changes the

input method (keyboard),

dictionary and/or thesaurus (if there is one for that language),
font (if appropriate),
QuickFix typo and related corrections (if you have set them).
While Nisus Writer Pro is set up out of the box to write in American English, it supports writing in
any version of English (or other European romanic4 and Cyrillic languages), or in a mixture of these
languages. It supports writing in languages where the shape of the alphabetic character changes
depending on its position in relation to other characters (Devanagari, Thai, etc.similar in concept
to script in romanic handwriting where letters following the b, o, v and w have slightly different
shapes because these letters end above the baseline). It also supports writing in languages where
writing is syllabic or ideographic rather than alphabetic such as Chinese, Japanese and Korean.
Due to limitations in Bidirectional text handling in Panther, full Bidirectional text manipulation
(Arabic, Hebrew, Ladino, Pashtun, Persian, Urdu, or Yiddish) is available in Nisus Writer Pro only
when run in Mac OS X 10.4.x (Tiger) and above.
The Macintosh uses the concept of "script" to refer to a variety of phenomena:

instructions for the computer to follow (as in the script of a play or a movie)
the shape of certain romanic fonts (as in the word "script" above
methods of writing

left to right such as English (or other European Romanic languages)

right to left such as Arabic, Aramaic, Hebrew, Ladino, Persian, Syriac, Yiddish
where the shape of the alphabetic character changes depending on its position in relation to
other characters such (Arabic and Thai, as well as with a few characters in English
where writing is syllabic or ideographic rather than alphabetic such as Chinese, Japanese
and Korean.
Nisus Writer Pro supports Unicode which is explained in the Glossary of Useful Terms on page
481. It can mix and match characters from any language in any document, page, paragraph,
sentence and/or word.

Set up language support in Nisus Writer Pro

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to edit your text in any language the Macintosh supports.
This allows you to use specialized dictionaries, thesauri (if available), a localized keyboard (input
method) and a specific font for characters unique to that language if the primary font (the one you
have set in that document (or the Nisus New File)) does not have them. This also enables you to use
the QuickFix Preferences you set in relation to that language. For more information about QuickFix
see Determine What QuickFix Fixes on page 402.
You will achieve best results in writing in the language of your choice if you take a few minutes to
set the Languages preference of Nisus Writer Pro in advance.

Remember, Language is an attribute of your text.

1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Languages at the top
of the dialog.

Romanic refers to those languages that use the Latin alphabet regardless of their linguistic relationships.

30

Writing in Multiple Languages

Figure 33
The Languages portion of the Preferences dialog

Writing and Editing

Creating Documents

Figure 34
The + (plus) portion of the Languages Preferences
Along the left column you will see those languages you have enabled in the International panel in
the System Preferences. You can add or subtract your own designer language (Tok Pisin5, Jawi6,
Syriac7, Klingon8 for example). If a language you would like to use is missing from the list, click +
(Plus) or Add Custom (for a designer language) and add it to the list.

Figure 35
Text in Klingon
5
6
7
8

The creole language spoken in northern mainland Papua New Guinea.

The nearly extinct Australian Aboriginal language of Western Australia.
An Eastern Aramaic language that was once spoken across much of the Fertile Crescent.
The constructed language spoken by Klingons in the fictional Star Trek universe.

31

32

Writing in Multiple Languages

Writing and Editing

You can choose a custom language icon as illustrated in Figure 35 for your Nisus Writer Pro
Languages preferences. Just drag (or paste) an image into the flag icon image well as
illustrated in Figure 36.

Figure 36
Using a custom language icon in the Nisus Writer Pro Languages preferences
You can set the language of the interface of Nisus Writer Pro by choosing it from the Interface
Language (menus, dialogs, etc.) pop-up menu. The languages listed are those for which we have
translators/localizers. There is no correlation between these languages and any other language
settings.
The changes take place immediately.
2. Select any language in the column of available languages to customize its behavior in Nisus
Writer Pro.
3. From the Spelling pop-up menu choose the appropriate spelling checker dictionary.
Nisus Writer Pro supports many spelling dictionaries: all those supported by Apple/OS X. If you
install a new spelling dictionary for OS X, just restart Nisus Writer Pro and it should
automatically appear in Nisus Writer's Languages preferences.
As of Mac OS X 10.6 (and later, Nisus Writer Pro 2.1 requires Mac OS X 10.7.5) you can install
Hunspell dictionary files directly and OS X will automatically make them available in Nisus
Writer Pro.
a. If Nisus Writer Pro is running, quit it.
b. Download a Hunspell dictionary from the Internet.
There are many places that offer Hunspell dictionaries, but you might check the LibreOffice
dictionary repository or OpenOffice extension repository. Some Hunspell dictionaries there
can be downloaded directly, while most will download as OpenOffice Extension .oxt files.
Once a .oxt file is downloaded, rename it to .zip, extract it, and look inside the
dictionaries folder. It will contain the necessary .dic and .aff Hunspell files. Keep those
handy, as youll need to move them later in the installation process.
c. In the Finder locate one of your Library folders (either your home or root Library).
Because Apple decided to start hiding Library folders from users, you may need to take
some special steps to reveal the Library folder. The easiest is to use the Finders menu.
Press 4 click Go and choose Library as illustrated in Figure 37.

Creating Documents

33

Figure 37
The Go menu in the Finder with 4 pressed enables access to the users Library folder
d.
e.

In the Library folder, find the Spelling subfolder. If no such folder exists you can create it.
From the Hunspell materials you downloaded and extracted in step b above, find both the
.dic and .aff files and move them into the Spelling folder:

34

Writing in Multiple Languages

Writing and Editing

Figure 38
The Spelling folder in the Finder with alternate (ancient Greek, Hebrew and Latin) dictionary (and hyphenation) files added
That completes the process. When you relaunch Nisus Writer Pro you will see the installed
dictionary in your Nisus Writer Pro Languages preferences.

4.
5.
6.
7.

8.

Note: Nisus Writer Pro supports any spelling dictionary available to OS X. That means other
alternatives are also possible such as: Cocoa Aspell, which also has its own extendible set of
free dictionaries, and Spell Catcher X.
Check Count words in this language if you want Nisus Writer Pro to count the words in your
document that are written in that language (displayed in the Statistics palette).
If you want you can set the QuickFix preferences for this language by clicking Go to QuickFix
Preferences. The QuickFix preferences are describe in detail beginning on page 402.
From the Thesaurus pop-up menu choose an appropriate thesaurus (if available).
From the Hyphenation pop-up menu choose an appropriate hyphenation file (if available).
a. Set the minimum number of characters from the beginning of the word that are required
before a hyphen is automatically inserted (Minimum before hyphen).
b. Set the minimum number of characters required after a hyphen is entered for the hyphen
to appear (Minimum after hyphen).
Set the secondary font options.
The options here are many and varied. Your choice depends, in part, on the nature of the
languages you use.
Independent of what you choose here, if your second (third, or additional) language has
characters that do not appear in your primary languages preferred font (almost any font other
than Lucida Grande if you use a language other than romanic languages), Nisus Writer Pro will
switch to the secondary font to display those characters.

Do not change the font

If your second language uses the same characters as your primary language (the vast
majority of European (romanic) languages), you would have minimal reason to change the
font.

Switch to last used font

If your second language has multiple fonts that can display its characters, you might want
Nisus Writer Pro to use the font you had most recently used when you last entered text in
that language.

Switch to secondary font

Nisus Writer Pro will use the designated secondary font whenever you choose that
particular language.

If you want your Arabic text to be in Al Bayan, after selecting Arabic in step 2 above
choose Al Bayan in the Fonts panel.

Creating Documents

35

If you want your Hebrew text to be in New Peninim MT, after selecting Hebrew in step
2 above choose New Peninim MT in the Fonts panel.

Repeat this process for each of the languages in which you wish to type if they require
different fonts.
Not all fonts in the same point size are the same size visually. This is particularly so in fonts
that display characters in different script systems. In order to help keep your texts
appearance check Also switch font size and set the secondary fonts size as illustrated in
Figure 39 when in the Font panel.

36

Writing in Multiple Languages

Writing and Editing

Figure 39
Match the secondary fonts size to that of the primary font

Because standard European style Arabic numerals (1, 2, 3, etc.) are almost always available in all
fonts; these will display in your primary font even if you choose Do not change the font, and your
second language needs to display the majority of its characters in the secondary font.
9. Click the button beneath the Secondary font pop-up menu to choose a secondary font if

Creating Documents

37
appropriate for writing in that language. This opens the Fonts panel illustrated in Figure 403
on page 375. Choose the font and size you want then close the Fonts panel.
Most European languages do not need a different font for their display. However if writing in
German you might want to use a Blackletter, (or Gothic script or Gothic minuscule) font.
Some languages are pre-set to use a secondary font. In that case (and when you choose a font)
the fonts name appears on the button.

You can learn more about what Unicode fonts are available for your particular language needs
on the Web, in particular Alan Woods Unicode Resources.
10. Choose the appropriate keyboard options from the Keyboard Layout pop-up menu.
Once again, the options are varied and your choice depends, in part, on the nature of the
languages you use and the kind of writing you do.

Do not change the keyboard

If you write in two romanic languages, but use a secondary language intermittently, you
can use the U.S. Extended keyboard, illustrated in Figure 449 on page 488, to enter any
character in that extended set.

Switch to last used keyboard

If the different languages you use have multiple input methods and you switch among
those various methods you can have Nisus Writer Pro use the most recently used method.

Switch to chosen keyboard

If the different languages you use have multiple input methods and you prefer to use a
specific method you can have Nisus Writer Pro use the particular one you designate.

Switch to chosen keyboard enables another pop-up menu from which you can choose any of
the keyboards you have enabled through the International System Preferences as explained in
Turn on display of the Input (keyboard flag) menu on page 486. Choose the keyboard you
want to use from this menu.

Once you have set up your Languages preference, you can have your New file open in that language.
For more information on this task, see Set Defaults for the Application on page 371.

Choose a language in which to write

If you have set up your languages, you can change the language in which you enter text in your
document by choosing the appropriate language from the:

Language button on the Toolbar at the top of your document window

Figure 40
The Language button on the Toolbar

Language tag on Statusbar at the bottom of the document window

Figure 41
The Language tag on the Statusbar

38

Writing in Multiple Languages

Writing and Editing

The flag or icon displayed implies no political allegiance or association. The flag is of the entire people
(and it represents the language of that people), not a particular party. This has been an Apple
convention. (Beginning in Mac OS X 10.10, the Language & Text System Preference lists additional
flags (and other symbols from the various languages writing systems) that attempt to iconographically
represent a linguistic group.)

Language pop-up menu in the Language palette of the Tooldrawer

Figure 42
The Language pop-up menu in the Language palette (shows the Thesaurus when a word is spelled correctly)

the menu Format > Language.

For quick access to any of your languages you can assign a keyboard shortcut as explained in
Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands on page 400.

Creating Documents

39

Write in a different language (to switch languages)

1.
2.
3.

Make sure that you have set your International System Preferences and your Nisus Writer Pro
Language Preferences as indicated in Appendix IV - Set up language support on your
Macintosh on page 491 and Set up language support in Nisus Writer Pro on page 29.
Choose the language you want to type in from the Language palette (or the Language button on
the Toolbar at the top of the window, or the menu Format > Language, or from the Language
tag on the Statusbar at the bottom of the document window).
Begin typing.

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to set the language in four different locations as explained above. If you
have set your Languages preferences in Nisus Writer Pro so that switching the language also changes
the keyboard, you will see a changed icon on the right side of the Menu Bar. This icon has nothing to
do with causing a change of the language in Nisus Writer Pro. This changes the Input Source or
Input Method only (there may be more than one input method for any particular language).

Figure 43
The Input Menu showing two input methods (keyboards) for the current language in Nisus Writer Pro

Enter right to left text in your document

Once you have set your Nisus Writer Pro Languages preference appropriately (as explained in Set
up language support in Nisus Writer Pro on page 29), typing in right to left (or Bidirectional)
languages (such as Arabic, Hebrew, Ladino, Pashtun, Persian, Urdu, or Yiddish) is the same as in
any other language.
However, in order to get you started quickly the following information deals with matters explained
in more detail later in the documentation.
1. Choose the language you want to type in from the Language palette (or the Language button on
the Toolbar at the top of the window, or the menu Format > Language, or from the Language

40

Writing in Multiple Languages

Writing and Editing

tag at the bottom of the document window).

If this is a new document that has no text in it, a dialog appears asking if you want the
document to be primarily right to left.

Figure 44
The change direction of document dialog
2.

Choose the option you want. In either case, Nisus Writer Pro will switch the display of the ruler
as well as the indent and outdent buttons on the Toolbar.
The Indent and Outdent buttons are available if you customize your Toolbar, as explained in
the section Customize Your Toolbar on page 410.

Figure 45
The right to left ruler and Indent/Outdent buttons
3.

Type your text.

Mix right to left and left to right text some common errors and fixes
If your insertion point is inside a left to right paragraph (of a left to right document) and you want to
write something in a right to left language, all you need do is choose the language you want to write
in from the Language palette (or the Language button on the Toolbar at the top of the window, or
the menu Format > Language, or from the Language tag at the bottom of the document window).
Nisus Writer Pro keeps the direction of the paragraph but switches the keyboard and the font based
on your preferences.
If you have text that includes part numbers or addresses or similar mixtures of right to left and
left to right characters, you can assure the correct flow of the text by choosing the menu command
Insert > Directionality Marker > Reverse Direction Marker. Insert the character as soon as you

Creating Documents

41

need to switch the directionality, or the direction will not switch. These characters do not display,
nor do they have any other semantic effect.
Be sure to turn on Show Invisibles (near the bottom of the View menu).

Have an exclamation point appear correctly in a left to right string of right to left text

The problem the exclamation point appears at the beginning of the English phrase, not at its
end:

(!Be Careful)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Solution
Type the Hebrew text.
Choose the menu command Insert > Directionality Marker > Left to Right Marker.
Type the English text.
Once again, choose the menu command Insert > Directionality Marker > Left to Right Marker.

(Be Careful!)

Have the period appear correctly in a left to right sentence that ends with a right to
left word

The problem as received by technical support:

First I write English then . the comes out on the wrong side of the period.

Solution
In areas of mixed languages, you might switch the Keyboard input method rather than change
the actual language associated with that text as explained in step 2 of Write in a different language
(to switch languages) on page 39.

Figure 46
Hebrew text written in English
In Figure 46 above, the two Hebrew words are selected and yet the flag below, in the Statusbar,
indicates that the language set for the two words (and the period and space) is English.

Corrected
First I write English then . the comes out on the wrong side of the period
1. Type:
First I write English then
2. Choose Hebrew from the Language tab on the Statusbar or the Language button on the
Toolbar or the Language pop-up menu in the Language palette (not simply the input method
from the flag at the top of the menu bar, but Hebrew inside Nisus Writer Pro) and type the
word:

3. While still in Hebrew, choose the menu command Insert > Directionality Marker > Reverse
Direction Marker
4. Type the period:
.
5. Type the space and the word:

42

Writing in Multiple Languages

6.

7.
8.

Writing and Editing

Choose English from the Language tab on the Statusbar or the Language button on the Toolbar
or the Language pop-up menu in the Language palette (not simply the input method from the
flag at the top of the menu bar, but English inside Nisus Writer Pro) and type the word:
the
Switch back again to Hebrew (again using the methods inside Nisus Writer Pro as explained in 2
above) and type:

Switch back again to English (again using the methods inside Nisus Writer Pro as explained in 6
above) and type:
comes out on the wrong side of the period.

Insert a right to left table in a left to right section

You can adjust the direction of the tables using the Paragraph palette.

New tables derive their direction from the direction you have set for your section (or the document if
you only have one section). Therefore, if you insert a table while in right to left text of a left to right
section or document, the insert table pop-up menu and the actual table display in left to right.
1. Select all the cells in the table.
2. Choose the right to left language you want to use from the Language tab on the Statusbar or
the Language button on the Toolbar or the Language pop-up menu in the Language palette (not
simply the input method from the flag at the top of the menu bar.
Nisus Writer Pro presents a dialog asking if you want to change the direction of the table.

Creating Documents

43

Selecting Text
Select text using the mouse or trackpad

Drag across text to select it.

Double-click to select a word.
Triple-click to select a sentence (also selects a following note character, if present).
Quadruple-click to select a paragraph.

Select a column of text (rectangular selection)

1.
2.

Press 4.
Drag across the text to select it.

Select text from different places in the document (multipart

selection)
1.
2.

Drag across the text to select it.

Press A as you select each additional character or passage.9

What you can (and cannot) do with text of a multipart selection

Almost anything you can do with contiguously selected text you can do with a multipart selection.
When you copy text of a multipart selection, Nisus Writer Pro inserts newlines between the copied
parts.
Certain commands and actions are disabled for practical reasons. (Which selection should the
command affect the most recent selection or the first selection, the selection closest to the top of the
document, or closest to the bottom?)

Commands disabled in the Edit menu (and its submenus) are

Paste
Complete
All the Commands in the Insert menu except for the commands in the New Style submenus
(these commands base their functioning on the attributes of the first selection in the sequence)
and Add Bookmark.
You cannot enter text from the keyboard when you have multipart selection.

Select all the text in your document

You can select all the text (including the images and tables) in your document
Choose the menu command Edit > Select > Select All.
This, however, does not select the text in your headers/footers or footnotes/endnotes or comments.
If your insertion point is in the comments, choosing Select All will select all the text in that
comment; choose Select All a second time to select all the text in all the comments.

Select everything in your document

You can select all the text (including the images and tables) in all areas of your document (which
includes also the text in the headers/footers as well as footnotes/endnotes)

Choose the menu command Edit > Select > Select All Document.
This, however, does not select anything in the Comments, which (for this purpose) are not
considered part of the text of your document, but external to it.

Select everything not selected

Suppose you have selected a certain series of words or characters. But, now you want to modify
everything that is not that series of words:

Choose the menu command Edit > Select > Invert Selection.

Nisus Writer Classic introduced this feature in version 3 in the early 90s when the application was still called
simply Nisus. At that time, and until now, it was called noncontiguous selection. Because various forms of the
term are now in use, we have decided to change the term to multipart which seems a bit simpler and clearer.

44

Selecting Text

Writing and Editing

Select using the keyboard

You can use your keyboard to select various amounts of text.

Selecting teCt Asing the keDboard

one character

1 .

one word

To select
forward

14 .

press
one line

1 -

to end of line

1 A .

one character

1 ,

one word

To select
backward

1 4 ,

press
one line

1 +

to beginning of line
the word in which the insertion
point appears
the sentence in which the
insertion point appears

1 A ,

choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro >

Preferences, click Menu Keys and assign any
keyboard shortcut you like to the commands of
the menu Edit > Select:
Select Word
Select Sentence
Select Paragraph
Invert Selection

the paragraph in which the

insertion point appears

To select

everything not currently selected

the entire document

a A

text in all regions of the

document except the comments

6 4 a A

press
the previous selection

A [ (open bracket)

(after selecting the previous)

the next selection

A ] (close bracket)

Table 2
Selecting text using the keyboard

Creating Documents

45

Other methods of selection

Nisus Writer Pro enables a variety of other selection methods. When you find a text selection using
the Find/Replace tool Nisus Writer Pro selects what you find. When you click Find All in the Find/
Replace window, Nisus Writer Pro creates a multipart selection of all instances of what it finds.

De-select text from a selection

This is not to be confused with removing/deleting selected text from your document, but, when you
have a lot of text selected and you want to de-select some of that text.

Press A and double-click (or double-click and drag) over the text you want to remove from the
selection. This creates a multipart selection of the previously selected area.

When you save your document, Nisus Writer Pro saves the current selection or insertion point
position.

Copying Text
Copy text
Nisus Writer Pro automatically copies text with all its attributes.
1. Drag across the text to select it.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Copy, or from the Clipboard menu on the Statusbar, or,
click the Copy button on the Toolbar.
Nisus Writer Pro enables you to append selections of text to the Clipboard. Using this capability you
can collect a variety of snippets of text to paste at another place in your document, or in another
document.

Choose the menu command Edit > Copy > Append Copy (or as you press 4 from the
Clipboard menu on the Statusbar) to insert a copy of the current selection at the end of
whatever is stored in the current Clipboard.
Choose the menu command Edit > Copy > Copy Text Only (or from the Clipboard menu on
the Statusbar) to copy only the text, but no formatting information. This is useful for
transferring text from Nisus Writer Pro to other applications where you want the text to appear
with the current attributes in those applications.

Figure 47
The Clipboard menu on the Statusbar without, then with the Option key (4) pressed

Copy text only, without its attributes

You can copy the selected text to paste into another application in which you do not want the
attributes associated with it in Nisus Writer Pro to appear.
1. Drag across the text to select it.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Copy > Copy Text Only or from the Clipboard menu on the
Statusbar.

Copy attributes only, without its text

You can copy the attributes of selected text to paste into another location in the current document,
or another Nisus Writer Pro document.
1. Drag across the text to select it.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Copy > Copy Character Attributes.

46

Selecting Text

Writing and Editing

Drag and Drop

With Nisus Writer Pro you can drag any selection and drop it somewhere else in any Drag and Drop
compatible application.
1. Select the characters (either text or images, either contiguous or as a multipart selection) which
you want to move.
You can use Drag and Drop to move selections into another Nisus Writer Pro document (or text
editable window (the Clipboard or the Find/Replace window)), to the desktop as clippings or
into other Drag and Drop compatible applications.
2. Move the pointer over the selected text.
3. Click and drag the text to where you want it.
4. Release the mouse or trackpad button.

Press 4 as you drag your selection to place a copy of your selection where you drop it.

You can also drag and drop the little paragraph formatting icons that display in the gutter. These
small ruler and paragraph icons similar to those that appear on the Statusbar contain all the
formatting information of the current ruler or paragraph level style. You can also drag and drop the
shape anchors that appear when you select any floating image. For more information on paragraph
formatting icons see The Nisus Writer Pro rulers, on page 12. For more information on shape
anchors see The Shape Anchor on page 158.

Cutting Text
Cut text
Drag across the text to select it.
Choose the menu command Edit > Cut, or from the Clipboard menu on the Statusbar, or, click
the Cut button on the Toolbar.
Nisus Writer Pro enables you to append selections of text to the Clipboard, if you

Choose the menu command Edit > Cut > Append Cut (or as you press 4 from the Clipboard
menu on the Statusbar) to remove the current selection and insert it at the end of whatever is
stored in the current Clipboard.
As explained in the section on Drag and Drop, you can simply drag a selection from one location to
another in the current document or across documents. Because this removes your selection from
one place, you must drop the selection into another portion of your document.
1.
2.

When you choose the menu command Edit > Cut you actually place a copy of that text on the
Clipboard. However, if you just want to delete the text

Choose the menu command Edit > Delete to remove a selection

Press x to remove the characters to the left of your insertion point (or the selection)

Press x to remove the characters to the right of the insertion point (if your keyboard has such
a key).

Pasting Text
Paste text
You can paste text at your insertion point or in place of a selection.
1. Cut or copy the text to paste.
2. Put your insertion point where you want to have the text appear.
3. Choose the menu command Edit > Paste or from the Clipboard menu on the Statusbar, or,
click the Paste button on the Toolbar.

As explained in the section on Drag and Drop on page 46, you can simply drag a selection from one
location to another in the current document or to another document. If you press 4 as you drag you
can put a copy of the selection in the new location.
Just as Nisus Writer Pro enables you to append text to the Clipboard, you can also swap what you
have in the Clipboard with what you have selected in your document.

Choose the menu command Edit > Paste > Swap Paste (or as you press 4 from the Clipboard
menu on the Statusbar) to swap the current selection with the contents of the current
Clipboard.

Creating Documents

47

Paste text only, without its attributes

You can paste text at your insertion point or in place of a selection and have the text assume the
surrounding attributes, not those already associated with the copied text.
1. Cut or copy the text to paste.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Paste > Paste Text Only or from the Clipboard menu on
the Statusbar.

Paste attributes only, without their text

You can paste the attributes of text you have copied elsewhere in your document. This causes the
selection to assume those distant attributes without altering the selected text.
1. Select the text with the attributes you want.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Copy > Copy Character Attributes.
You can apply character attributes using the Dropper on the Toolbar as well. See Change the
attributes of characters using the Dropper on page 100 for an explanation.

Moving, Deleting, and Replacing Text

See the sections on Drag and Drop, Cutting Text, and Pasting Text on this and the preceding page.

Using the Clipboards

Clipboards temporarily store copied (or cut) text and/or images.
You can

Place a single character or an entire document on the Clipboard

Edit text you have put on your Clipboard

Transfer text or images from another application into Nisus Writer Pro.
Nisus Writer Pro offers you as many Clipboards as you like. On these you can store different
materials. You can choose which Clipboard you want to use from the Clipboards submenu at the
bottom of the Edit menu or from the Clipboard tag on the Statusbar, or from the Clipboards
Preferences of Nisus Writer Pro.

While you can store many different items on the various Clipboards, only one Clipboard is active for
cutting and pasting at a time. This Clipboard is called the Current Clipboard. When copying and
pasting from other applications, Nisus Writer Pro uses the current Clipboard.

Display the contents of a Clipboard

Press A and choose that Clipboards name from the menu Edit > Clipboards or from the
Clipboard menu that appears from the Clipboard tag on the Statusbar.
Choose Edit Current Clipboard from the Clipboard tag on the Statusbar.

When the pointer hovers over the Clipboard tag a tool tip appears indicating which Clipboard is active
as well as a sample of its contents (in plain text).

Choose which Clipboard to use

Choose the Clipboards number from the menu Edit > Clipboards, or from the Clipboard menu
that appears from the Clipboard tag on the Statusbar, or from the Clipboard Preferences of
Nisus Writer Pro.

Add text or images to the current Clipboard

Select what you want to add (not replace) to the current Clipboard, then choose Append Copy
or Append Cut from the Copy or Cut submenus of the Edit menu respectively.
You can also show the Clipboard and add text by typing or dragging items into the Clipboards
window.

Edit the contents of the Clipboard

1.
2.

Press A and choose that Clipboards name from the menu Edit > Clipboards, or choose the
menu Clipboard > Edit Current Clipboard that appears from the Clipboard tag on the
Statusbar.
Complete your editing tasks.
You can do almost anything on the Clipboard that you can do in any Nisus Writer Pro
document.

48

Selecting Text

3.

Enter text
Drag and drop text (this allows you to copy and paste on the current Clipboard)
Use most of the commands of the Edit menu and the Convert submenu
Change the font, size and style of your text using the commands of those menus and the
palettes.
Close the Clipboard window.

Warning!
Nisus Writer Pro only transfers the contents of the Current Clipboard to the System Clipboard when
you quit the application. Anything you have on any other clipboards is eliminated.
To be sure you do not lose any material that may be on your clipboards you may want to paste it into
one or more documents before quitting Nisus Writer Pro.
Nonetheless, Nisus Writer Pro comes with a set of macros designed to help you work with, and even
save, your Clipboards. You can learn more about them on page 431.

Add a Clipboard
Nisus Writer Pro allows you to have as many Clipboards as you like.

See Customize Your Clipboards on page 399.

Change the name of a Clipboard

Nisus Writer Pro allows you to name your Clipboards anything you like. This allows you to use
dedicated clipboards for specific tasks.

See Customize Your Clipboards on page 399.

Copying and pasting styled text

When you copy formatted text and then paste it into an area with other formatting Nisus Writer Pro
pastes in the text with the attributes as it existed in that texts original location. To override this
behavior choose the commands Copy Text Only or Paste Text Only as explained above.

Copying and pasting rulers

You can copy and paste the shape of a paragraph with all the settings related to that paragraph as
they display on the ruler and in the Paragraph palette.
1. Click your insertion point in the paragraph the ruler of which you wish to copy.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Copy > Copy Ruler.
3. Click your insertion point in the paragraph where you want this formatting to appear.
4. Choose the menu command Edit > Paste > Paste Ruler.
If a ruler icon appears on the Statusbar or in the gutter, you can choose the appropriate
command from the pop-up menu that appears there.

Creating Lists
Nisus Writer Pro enables you to create various kinds of lists that automatically appear and/or
increment.
Six list styles come built into Nisus Writer Pro. You can use these out of the box.
You can modify, or add to the list styles supplied, whenever you want.
The appearance of the list, its indents, the format of the numbers, starting number, increment
value, etc. are all controlled by the Lists palette and the List Styles portion of the Style Sheet view.
See Modify list styles on page 55 for instructions on how to modify the List Styles.
You can combine List Styles and other Styles of Nisus Writer Pro to create a wide variety of listing
capabilities. All of the figures, tables, numbered (and unnumbered) instructions, and bulleted lists
in this document are controlled by the list and style tools of Nisus Writer Pro. Details of how to
develop these more complex tools are discussed in the section Formatting Documents Using Style
Sheets beginning on page 102.
Nisus Writer Pro offers numerous methods for creating your numbered lists, from the standard
menus (the menu Format > Lists), the Toolbar, and the Lists palette of the Tooldrawer. In addition,
you can use the keyboard if you assign keyboard shortcuts to the standard menu commands. When
your insertion point is in a range of text that is part of a list you can modify that lists format from
the List (number) tag at the bottom of the document window, the Toolbar, or the Lists palette of

Creating Documents

49

the Tooldrawer. In addition, you can use the keyboard if you assign keyboard shortcuts to the
standard menu commands.

The List button on the Toolbar is probably the easiest way to insert a list, but, because it may not
always be visible, the following instructions explain how to use lists by referring to the standard
menus. All the other methods can be used interchangeably.

About lists
As a rule, list item numbers (if they appear (bullets are not numbers)), appear in an increasing
sequence.
A particular list item gets its number from the previously used number of the same list style and
the same list level.
Each list style can have the option Continue Throughout Document turned on or off in the Style
Sheet view.

If Continue Throughout Document is turned on, all list items on the same level in the entire
document appear numbered consecutively (regardless of whatever content may appear between
them, including other lists).

If Continue Throughout Document is turned off, all list items would restart after each
interruption in the list.

Figure 48
The Lists submenu of the Format menu

Figure 49
The List button on the Toolbar

50

Creating Lists

Writing and Editing

Figure 50
The Lists palette

Insert a bulleted list

1.
2.

Choose the menu command Format > Lists > Bullet List.
Begin typing.
Each time you press <, your new paragraph will begin with a bullet.

End a bulleted list

Choose the menu command Format > Lists > None.

Apply bullets to a series of paragraphs

1.
2.

Select the paragraphs you want to have bulleted.

Choose the menu command Format > Lists > Bullet List.
If you put your insertion point inside the series of bullets, each time you press <, your new
paragraph will begin with a bullet.
Nisus Writer Pro supplies a variety of bullet styles.

Creating Documents

51

Figure 51
The Bullet pop-up menu in the Lists palette

Insert an automatically incrementing list

The remainder of the supplied list styles automatically increment each time you press <.

Headings
Uses (European) Arabic numerals (1, 1.1, 1.1.1, etc.) to number and causes the numbers to
appear at the far left (or right in right to left sections), i.e. along the margin. Designed to be
used in conjunction with the Heading 1, etc. styles.
This style (as supplied) continues numbering throughout the document. You can associate
this list style to the Headings styles (Heading 1, Heading 2, etc.) to automatically increment
all the headings in your document.

1.
2.

Lettered List
Numbered List
Outline
Tiered List
Choose your desired list style from the menu Format > Lists.
Begin typing.
Each time you press <, your new paragraph will begin with a bullet or whatever your selected
list style has determined as appropriate.

Begin using the next level of a list

Each list style begins at whatever number or letter you have determined in the Lists palette. The
numbers (or letters) increment every time you press <. Each list style consists of a cascading
series of numbers as illustrated in the Style Sheet view in Figure 54 on page 54.
1. When your insertion point is at the end of a paragraph which is part of an automatically
incrementing list, press <.

52

Creating Lists
2.

Writing and Editing

Press @.
Pressing @ actually causes the display to change to the next lower level number.

You can select multiple paragraphs and cause them all to change to the next lower level (demote)
them all at once.

Return to a higher level of a list

After you begin numbering paragraphs at a lower level of the list, you can return to a higher level.
1. When your insertion point is at the end of a paragraph which is part of an automatically
incrementing list, press <.
2. Press x.
Pressing x actually causes the display to change to the next higher level number.

You can select multiple paragraphs and cause them all to change to the next higher level (promote)
them all at once by pressing 1 @.

Restart numbering
You can interrupt the natural flow of a numbering sequence (or restore that flow).
1. Select at least one character in the paragraph you want to have begin the new numbering
sequence.
2. Choose the menu command Format > Lists > Restart Numbering.

Resume numbering
If you interrupt the natural flow of a numbering sequence you can resume that sequence.
1. Select at least one character in the paragraph where the numbering sequence was restarted.
2. Choose the menu command Format > Lists > Continue Numbering from Previous.

The commands Restart Numbering and Continue Numbering from Previous toggle, depending on
the state of the paragraph you have selected.
The contextual menu that appears when you select a list item and 6 click displays the commands
Restart Numbering, Continue Numbering from Previous, Increase List Level and Decrease List
Level.

Automatic number formats supported in Nisus Writer Pro

Every area where Nisus Writer Pro enables the use of automatic numbering (lists, footnotes/
endnotes, page numbers, section numbers, line numbers,) A wide variety of number formats are
available. These include:

10

Arabic (1,2,3,4)
Arabic (01,02,03,04)
Circle Numbers (,,,)
Footnote Symbols (*,,,)10
Lowercase Alphabetical (a,b,c,d)
Lowercase Roman (i,ii,iii,iv)
Uppercase Alphabetical (A,B,C,D)
Uppercase Roman (I,II,III,IV)
Arabic - Abjad (,,,)
Arabic - Indic (,,,)
Arabic - Indic Eastern (,,,)
Hebrew (,,,)
Kanji ( ,

Kanji - decimal ( ,

Kanji - formal ( ,

Katakana ( ,

Katakana - iroha ( ,

The Footnote Symbols are available only in footnotes and endnotes

Creating Documents

53

Figure 52
The Number Format pop-up menu

Create numbered lists that may have a component missing

You may need to create a list that skips a level. For example, it may need to have a number like
3.2.0.a or 3.2 a when a component is missing (an item in level 4 without a corresponding entry
in level 3).
For the first example 3.2.0.a you need to customize the tiered list style so that it starts numbering
at 0 by default, instead of 1.
1. Switch to the stylesheet view.
2. From the list on the left, select your list style.
3. From the preview on the right, select a single list level.
4. From the Lists palette, change the "number" to 0.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 above for all list levels you intend to use.
6. Next, customize your heading paragraph styles so they enforce not only the list style, but also a
starting number of 1.
7. Switch to the stylesheet view.
8. From the list on the left, select your paragraph style (e.g.: Chapter).
9. Using the Lists palette, apply your list style.
10. Also in the Lists palette, change the Number to 1.
Now when you are working in your main document, just apply your paragraph style to enforce
the list style and regular 1-based numbering.
For the second example 3.2 a you want your list styles default starting number to remain at 1.
However youll want to customize the level numbering format enforced by your paragraph styles.
1. Switch to the Stylesheet view.
2. From the style list on the left, select your paragraph style, e.g.: Data - No Subsection.
3. Using the Lists palette, apply your list style.
4. Also in the Lists palette, adjust the list level as needed, i.e.: increase the list level to 4.
5. Also in the Lists palette, customize the numbering format:
6. Switch to the custom format by clicking the tab labelled #.
7. Edit the Level Format field to cut out the list level numbers you are not interested in showing.
To achieve 3.2 a you would want to replace the level number bubble (3) with a space.
Now when you are working in your main document, just apply your Data - No Subsection
paragraph style to enforce the list format that does not show any sub-section number.

[Bookmark "Creating Documents" is missing.]

54

Create numbered list that aligns along the period

Numbered or lettered lists (with periods) can align along the period rather than the left edge.
Set the alignment in the Lists palette to right as illustrated in the list in the right column
below:

Aligned along the left edge of the number:

7.
this
8.
that
9.
another
10. more
11. again

Figure 53
Left and right (along the period) aligned lists

Figure 54
List Styles explained

Aligned right, along the period:

7. this
8. that
9. another
10. more
11. again

Creating Documents

55

Modify list styles

You can modify list styles in the same way you modify any other styles in Nisus Writer Pro as
explained in Modify a style on page 107.
You can use any of the palettes to modify the font, size and style of the number. In addition you can
use the Lists palette to modify the type of number, its horizontal location , its format, the starting
number, the amount by which it increments as well as any characters that appear in front of or
following it. You determine whether or not the number sequence continues throughout the entire
document using the checkbox in the Style Sheet view.

Figure 55
The List Style portion of the Style Sheet view (with the Lists palette)

Use list styles to automatically number figures, tables, etc.

In Nisus Writer Pro you can have as many automatically numbered items as you like. All you need
do is create a new list style for each set of numbered objects (as in this document, which has
figures and tables as well as numbered instructions).
1. Display Style Sheet view of your document as explained in See the Style Sheet associated with
a document on page 104.
2. Choose the menu command Insert > New Style > List Style.
3. Give your new style a meaningful name for example: Caption Figure or Caption Table.
4. Choose Numbered from the Kind pop-up menu.
5. Check (turn on) Continue numbering across document content.
6. Click Create.

56

Creating Lists

Writing and Editing

Figure 56
Creating a numbered list style
7.
8.
9.

You would probably want to apply some identifying text to appear before the number.
Select the Level 1 item in the List styles hierarchy.
Open the Lists palette and type
Figure
in the Before Text text edit box.
Press @ or < to confirm your entry as illustrated in Figure 57 below.

Figure 57
Assigning text to appear before a numbered list style
You can now cross-reference to these automatically numbered items as explained in Add CrossReferences to Your Text on page 225.
You can also use the shapes tools of Nisus Writer Pro to add captions to floating images as
explained in Add a caption to your images on page 172.

[Bookmark "Creating Documents" is missing.]

57

Recovering From Mistakes

Undo an action

Choose the menu command Edit > Undo.

You can undo an unlimited number of actions!

Redo an action
Choose the menu command Edit > Redo.
Not only can you undo your previous actions, you can also redo them. Redothe opposite of
Undo(believe it or not) undoes your undo. It puts your commands back into effect. You can
continue redoing all the commands in the undo list until it is empty. Nisus Writer Pro remembers
the Redo list as long as you do not make any editing changes to your text. You can Undo and Redo
any number of times, but as soon as you resume editing your document, Nisus Writer Pro clears the
Redo list. The Undo list continues to accumulate the new commands you make.

To help you visualize these Undo and Redo lists, imagine that the process of preparing your
document is like a walk across an open field with many branching paths. As illustrated in Figure
58, you can take any path you like. Having gone a certain distance along the green path ABCD in
the figure, you change your mind and want to go back to the point B (Undo Bold) which you passed.
That is what multiple undos allow you to do.

Figure 58
The Undo and Redo paths
Imagine now that you have undone everything from changing the margin to bolding your selection,
you find that you have gone back too far and want to retrace your original path to redo the Bold and
redo the Delete (to point C having redone part of the original path) and start on the new red path
CEF (by making changes to your document). Immediately, Nisus Writer Pro forgets the rest of the
original green path CD (including the margin change). Nisus Writer Pro clears the Redo list before
the path to E begins. The new undo list, however, can get you back along any portion of the path
ABCEF.

Creating Documents

59

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

When the Macintosh was first released in 1984 you needed to save your files on 400K floppy disks.
An old one-page plain text file would take up about 4K, so you might be able to store nearly 100
files on a single disk. Keeping track of a couple hundred files on a few floppy disks did not seem a
hardship then. Now, more than 30 years later, a Macintosh comes with a hard drive of at least
60GB and, even allotting for the space of the OS and many applications, songs downloaded to
iTunes and digital images organized in iPhoto, you probably still have many gigabytes of space
remaining for the thousands of files you have created in the intervening years. Numerous
applications have been released recently that attempt a solution for tracking files. Using the
Document Manager of Nisus Writer Pro you can pay less attention to saving and locating your files
and more attention to their contents. The Document Manager is discussed in detail in
Reintroducing the Document Manager beginning on page 61.

Saving Files
Using Nisus Writer Pro 2.1 you never need to concern yourself with saving your work. All this is
handled by the OS.
Nonetheless, Nisus Writer Pro offers you several ways to save a document.
Completely ignore saving documents. Nisus Writer Pro (with the Keep all new documents without
asking me Saving preference on) automatically names them, based on any text in a heading or title
style at the top of the document, and, unless you change this in the Saving preferences, Nisus
Writer Pro stores the file in the following folder
~/Documents/Nisus Documents

You can easily find and open these documents using the Document Manager illustrated in Figure 62
on page 63. (Choose the menu command Window > Document Manager and open the file you want.)
In addition, you can explicitly save your files by choosing the menu command File > Save As.
When you save your file for the first time by choosing the menu command File > Save As, Nisus
Writer Pro opens the Save As dialog and places the first few words of the document in the filename
field at the top of the dialog. This also enables you to rename or save your file in a variety of formats
and encodings. The following alternatives explain the various methods of saving your files

Save
saves changes to the selected drive;

Save As
saves changes as a new file and allows you to continue editing that file with a new name
(leaving the original file with its original name);

Save in Document Manager

saves the changes to the Document Manager folder you have designated.

Some files that Nisus Writer Pro creates can only be read (opened) by Nisus Writer Pro as text files (for
example a PDF file). Nisus Writer Pro opens HTML files as they would appear in a Web browser. You
can, however, also edit these HTML files in Nisus Writer Pro. For instructions see Save a Nisus Writer
Pro Document as an HTML Document on page 441.

Formats of saved files

Nisus Writer Pro makes a slight distinction between saving and exporting files.

Save As should always preserve document content. Any format under Export As cannot be
trusted to fully preserve document information. No export format will preserve all the important
informationeven if the document looks right, important things, such as styles, may not persist.
You can save a Nisus Writer Pro document (in order of preferred format):

Save As

a Rich Text Format (RTF) file. This is the preferred format, so others can read your files.

a Microsoft Word Format (97 and later also known as .doc) file.

a Document Template (DOT). When saved in this manner, every time you open the file, it opens
as Untitled with all the text and formatting present when you saved it as a .dot.
a Rich Text Format Directory (RTFD) file. This is similar to RTF, but saves any images in the
file in a separate folder from the text of the file. This file format is generally not recognized by
non-Macintosh computers.

60

Saving Files

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

a Nisus Compressed Rich Text (a gzipped RTF) file to save space, with the extension .zrtf.
This reduces the size of files that Nisus Writer Pro saves. No other application understands this
format, but it reduces file size by a large amount. You can rename a file from FileName.zrtf to
FileName.rtf.zip and the Finder will expand the file into a normal RTF file.

a Plain Text file (no formatting is saved).

If you try to save a file with Rich Text Formatting as Plain Text, Nisus Writer Pro alerts you
with the dialog illustrated in Figure 59. Be sure you know what you want to do before you
click.

Figure 59
The discard document formatting warning

as a Nisus Macro file.

as a Nisus Perl Macro file.
You can set your preferred format for saved files in the Saving preferences of Nisus Writer Pro
as explained in Set the preferred format and encoding for saved files on page 386.

Export As PDF

a PostScript file as explained in Create a PostScript file of your Nisus Writer Pro document on
page 370. This is actually a print format and not a save format. Therefore the option does
not appear in the Save as dialog.

a PDF (Portable Document Format) file as explained in Create a PDF file of your Nisus Writer
Pro document on page 370. This is actually a print format and not a save format. Therefore
the option does not appear in the Save as dialog.

Export As

Microsoft Word Format (binary)

Microsoft Office 2007 XML (Office Open XML) explained on the Microsoft Web site.

an HTML file.
an EPUB file for distribution on electronic readers, as explained on the Wikipedia.
If one or more of the above formats does not mean anything to you, you probably do not need it.

OpenOffice.org XML (OASIS Open Document)

a Rich Text Format (for older applications), such as AppleWorks file.
Plain Text
Unlike saving a file as Plain Text, if you export a file as plain text, Nisus Writer Pro does not
warn you with the dialog that appears in Figure 59. Any formatting that may have been in the
file is removed.

Save files automatically in the Nisus Writer Pro Document Manager

1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Saving.
2. Check Keep all new documents without asking me.
Mac OS X keeps track of how long you work on your files. At unspecified times, the OS will save
your file with a name based on the contents of the file and place it in the Nisus Documents folder
inside your Documents folder. The original location of the Document Manager folder is:
~Documents/Nisus Documents
You can change the name and location of the Document Manager folder using the Doc Manager
Preferences. this is explained in Set up the Document Manager using the Doc Manager
preferences on page 64.

Creating Documents

61

You can see a sortable list of (and open) any of these files in the Document Manager by choosing the
menu command Window > Document Manager as shown in Figure 62 on page 63.

Save an untitled file as a Nisus Writer Pro file

1. Choose the menu command File > Save.
2. Type the document name in the Save document as box.
3. Choose the location in which you want to save the file.
4. Click Save.
Nisus Writer Pro automatically chooses RTF as the preferred format for your file.

Rename and save an existing file

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command File > Save As.

Enter the documents new name in the Save document as box.
Choose the location in which you want to save the file.
Click Save.

Save a file in a different format

1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command File > Save As.

In the dialog that appears select the file format you want from the pop-up menu at the bottom
of the dialog.
Save the file in the standard manner

Opening Files
There are a wide variety of methods for opening your files. Often simply double-clicking a file in the
Finder will open it in Nisus Writer Pro. Or, if you have opened the file recently in Nisus Writer Pro
and the application is active, you can choose that files name from the menu File > Open Recent.
And, as explained in the section Open an existing file on page 1 choose the menu command File >
Open, navigate to your file and click the Open button.
Beginning in Mac OS X 10.6.x Apple made a change that causes all .rtf files, when double-clicked
in the Finder to open in TextEdit. There is no way from within Nisus Writer Pro itself to change this.

The solutions are to be found external. We explain the situation on the Nisus Software Inc. blog. It is
discussed in detail elsewhere. One preferred solution is to compress the TextEdit application in the
Applications folder, drag the original application itself to the trash and empty the trash. Then, if you
ever need TextEdit you can expand the compressed file and use it (but remember to decompress and
trash it when you are done).

Managing Files
Nisus Writer Pro enables you to automatically save files and then easily find and open your files
using the Document Manager.

Reintroducing the Document Manager

If you are new to Nisus Writer Pro or Nisus Writer Express (and have never used the Document
Manager in either of these applications) the first time you display the Document Manager it will
appear empty as illustrated in Figure 60.
The Document Manager window resembles an iPhoto or iTunes window as illustrated in Figure 51.
Various groups appear in the pane on the left, a list of files in those groups display in the main
pane. A search field is available in the upper right corner of the window. At the bottom, instead of
Cover Flow the Document Manager presents a preview of the contents of your document.

62

Saving Files

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

Figure 60
An empty, unused, Document Manager

Figure 61
An empty, unused, iTunes
The Document Manager can help you find and open a file you are working on in much same way as
iTunes can help you find a song you want to listen to. However, instead of taking you to Apples
iTunes Music Store, the Document Manager shows you (at least, and initially) a list of the contents
of the Nisus Documents folder inside the Documents folder in your Home directory (as illustrated in
Figure 52), in much the same way as iTunes displays a list of all the music files you have in your
iTunes Music folder.

Creating Documents

63

Display the Document Manager

Choose Document Manager from the Window menu.

Figure 62
The Document Manager showing All Managed Files
You can display and sort your files by a wide variety of categories. Initially, those available are

Icon (the icon represents simply the icon of the file as it appears in the Finder)
File name
Date Created (as illustrated in Figure 66)
Date Modified
Size
You can resize the columns. You can also rearrange their sequence by dragging their headings
around in the window.
The Doc Manager preferences, illustrated in Figure 53, show that you can also sort by:

Folder (the folder in which the file resides)

Path (the full path to the file)
Kind (this is File Type, i.e. rtf, pdf, tiff, etc.)
Last Accessed (The Mac OS accesses files in odd ways and at odd times. You may want to test
this option before using it as a category for sorting.)
Press @ to move the focus from the File List to the Group List (and then to edit the name of a
selected Group List item).
Choose the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find to open the Advanced Search
capability in the Document Manager, explained beginning on page 71 through page 73. (This
does not open the Find/Replace window.)

64

Saving Files

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

Figure 63
The Doc Manager preferences

Set up the Document Manager using the Doc Manager preferences

Determine the location of your Document Manager folder
As illustrated in Figure 63, the default location of the Document Manager folder is the Nisus
Documents folder inside the users Documents folder. You can set any location you want. In fact,
you can set the Shared folder on the computer so that other users each have access to the files
saved and managed by the Document Manager.
1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Doc Manager at the
top of the Preferences window.
2. Click Choose.
3. Navigate to the location you want to use as the Document Manager folder and select it.
4. Click Choose Folder.

Choose file listing options for the Document Manager window

As explained at the very end of this section, on page 78, you can choose to show or hide any files
that are missing from the Document Manager window. Whether or not they display by default you
can set in the Doc Manager preferences.
1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Doc Manager at the
top of the Preferences window.
2. Check Shows files that are missing or located in the Trash.

Choose whether or not to show file extensions in the Document Manager window
As explained at the very end of this section, on page 78, you can choose to show or hide any file
extensions (this is File Type, i.e. rtf, pdf, tiff, etc.) in the file listing of the Document Manager
window.
1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Doc Manager at the
top of the Preferences window.
2. Check or uncheck Hides file extensions (as desired).

Work with your files so that the Document Manager can help you
manage them

The heading of this section is worded oddly because there are three distinct verbs that we use to get
files into the Document Manager. Each one has a slightly different function and result. These verbs
are:

Save
Move
Add
There are many ways that you can get your files into the Document Manager.

Creating Documents

65

Save all your files automatically to the Document Manager

Perhaps the easiest is simply to use the Document Manager as a your default Save as location as
explained in Save files automatically in the Nisus Writer Pro Document Manager on page 60.

Set your Saving preferences to Keep all new documents without asking me.
Each and every file you create gets saved to the Document Manager unless you purposely and
consciously save the file elsewhere.

Save your file (as needed/desired) to the Document Manager

You may be working on a new, untitled file, or on an existing file that is saved in some other folder
on your hard drive. You can save this file in the Document Manager without Nisus Writer Pro
interrupting your work, and asking for a name, or where to keep the file with the Save as dialog.
This can also keep the original copy of the file in its existing location.

Choose the menu command File > Save in Document Manager.

Nisus Writer Pro automatically gives your file a name and saves the file in the top level of the folder
you have designated as your Document Manager folder. This is the same as if you had chosen the
menu command Save in Document Manager > All Managed Files.
The Save in Document Manager command has a submenu with a number of commands. You can
choose any of these commands to save the file to either the

Style Library
This makes any styles in the saved file available to any other files. Maintaining a Style Library is
explained in detail beginning on page 114.

Templates
This makes the entire file available as a template (.dot). You can then open a copy of this file,
with all its current content, and it will open as Untitled. You can learn more about the Nisus
New File and other template documents in the section Understanding Template (Stationery)
Documents beginning on page 376.

Custom Group or Folder Group

If you have set up any custom or folder groups, as explained in Create special groups of files,
on page 69, you can move your file to any of those.

Save your file to the Document Manager with a new name

You may be working on a new, untitled file, or on an existing file that is saved in some other folder
on your hard drive. You can save this file in the Document Manager and give it a new name (if you
want). This will keep the original copy of the file in its existing location.

Choose the menu command File > Save As in Document Manager.

Nisus Writer Pro opens the Save as dialog at the top level of the folder you have designated as your
Document Manager folder ready for you to name the file. It suggests a name based on the first few
words of the document.
The Save As in Document Manager command has a submenu with a number of commands. You
can choose any of these commands to save the file to either the

Style Library
This makes any styles in the saved file available to any other files. Maintaining a Style Library is
explained in detail beginning on page 114.

Templates
This makes the entire file available as a template (.dot). You can then open a copy of this file,
with all its current content, and it will open as Untitled. You can learn more about the Nisus
New File and other template documents in the section Understanding Template (Stationery)
Documents beginning on page 376

Custom Group or Folder Group

If you have set up any custom or folder groups, as explained in Create special groups of files,
on page 69, you can save a copy of your file to any of those.

Move your file to the Document Manager

You may have a file in one or another folder on your hard drive. You can move this file into the
Document Manager. The original file will no longer appear in its former location. You cannot use
this command on files that reside on external drives, as this would not move, but copy them.

Choose the menu command File > Move to Document Manager.

66

Saving Files

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

Nisus Writer Pro moves the active file to the top level of the folder you have designated as your
Document Manager folder.
The Move to Document Manager command has a submenu. You can choose to move the file to the
All Managed Files group or the Style Library or a Folder Group

Style Library
This makes any styles in the moved file available to any other files. Maintaining a Style Library
is explained in detail beginning on page 114.

Folder Group
If you have set up any custom or folder groups, as explained in Create special groups of files,
on page 69, you can save your file to any of those.
Open the Document Manager.
Select either the All Managed Files or the Style Library group or a Folder Group in the left
pane.
press 6 and click your mouse or trackpad inside the Document Manager window as
illustrated in Figure 66.
Choose Move Files to Group from the contextual menu that appears.
Select the files you want to move to the Document Manager from the variant of the Open dialog
that appears.
Click Move Files.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

This action actually physically moves the active document from its current location on disk to the
designated folder where it can be managed by the Document Manager as illustrated on page 66 in
Figure 64 (before) and Figure 65 (after).

Figure 64
Moving a file to the Document Manager (before)

Creating Documents

67

Figure 65
Moving a file to the Document Manager (after)

Add your file to the Document Manager

You may have a file in one or another folder on your hard drive. You can add an alias to this file into
the Document Manager. The original continues to exist in its former location.

Choose the menu command File > Add to Document Manager.

Drag a file from any folder in the Finder into the Document Manager window.
Nisus Writer Pro creates an alias to the file on the top level of the folder you have designated as your
Document Manager folder, or into the custom group you may have added it.
The Add to Document Manager command has a submenu. You can choose to add an alias for the
active file to the All Managed Files group or the Style Library to a Folder Group or to a Custom
Group.

Style Library
This makes any styles in the moved file available to any other files. Maintaining a Style Library
is explained in detail beginning on page 114.

Templates
This makes the entire file available as a template (.dot). You can then open a copy of this file,
with all its current content, and it will open as Untitled. You can learn more about the Nisus
New File and other template documents in the section Understanding Template (Stationery)
Documents beginning on page 376.

Custom Group or Folder Group

If you have set up any custom or folder groups, as explained in Create special groups of files,
on page 69, you can add your file to any of those.
Open the Document Manager.
Select either the All Managed Files, the Templates group a Folder Group or a Custom Group
in the left pane.
press 6 and click your mouse or trackpad inside the Document Manager window as
illustrated in Figure 66.
Choose Add Files to Group from the contextual menu that appears.
Select the files you want to add to the Document Manager from the variant of the Open dialog
that appears.
Click Add Files.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

68

Saving Files

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

Display and sort files managed by the Document Manager

Once you have saved, moved and/or added your files to the Document Manager, you can display,
sort and group them to make your files easier to find, open and edit. In addition to the categories
you can sort by, listed in the section Display the Document Manager beginning on page 63, the
Document Manager lists a set of default groups in its left pane, as illustrated in Figure 66.

Figure 66
The Document Manager sorted by date created with the contextual menu options showing

All Managed Files

This refers to any file in any of the Document Manager sub-groups, whether they are resident in
the folder designated as the Document Manager folder or if they only have aliases to those files.
This group acts as a file sponge. It includes:

All files physically residing in the Document Manager folder.

Any file that has been saved to the Document Manager folder, even if it has been moved
somewhere else in the meantime.
All files in non-special groups. Special groups are the built-in groups like Currently Open,
so non-special groups are those custom or folder-backed groups you may have added, for
example: Current Projects.
Currently Open
As it implies, this lists any and all files opened by Nisus Writer Pro, regardless of where the file
might be stored on disk.
Recently Opened
As with Currently Open, this lists any and all files opened by Nisus Writer Pro, regardless of
where the file might be stored on disk. The number of files listed here is determined by the
number you set in the General preferences of Nisus Writer Pro: Keep x documents in Open
Recent menu.
Recently Saved
Once again, as with Currently Open and Recently Opened, Recently Saved lists and and all
files saved by Nisus Writer Pro regardless of where the file might be stored on local or external
hard drives, nor does it matter whether the file was saved as a Nisus Writer Pro .rtf file or in
some other proprietary format. The number of files listed here is determined by the number you
set in the General preferences of Nisus Writer Pro: Keep x documents in Open Recent menu.
Style Library
Lists all the files you have saved to the Style Library making any styles in them available to use
in other documents. The Style Library is explained in detail in the section Maintain a Style
Library beginning on page 114.

Creating Documents

69
Templates
Lists all the files you have saved to the Templates group, making any of those files available to
open with all their existing content and attributes as Untitled. You can learn more about the
Nisus New File and other template documents in the section Understanding Template
(Stationery) Documents beginning on page 376.
Backups
If you set your Saving preferences to Save duplicate copy of each file to another location,
Nisus Writer Pro adds a Backups folder group to the groups available in the left panel of the
Document Manager, as is visible in the background of Figure 67.

Create special groups of files

You may have a special hobby with various files associated with it scattered around your hard drive,
or collected in the All Managed Files group of the Document Manager. Perhaps you are an amateur
chef. You have recipes in one folder, lists of and receipts for tools you have or wish to purchase in
another folder, locations of farmers markets within a 20 mile radius of your home in a third folder.
These folders and their files might even be on different hard drives or with the recipes saved in the
computers shared folder so various users have access to them. Or, you may have files spread
throughout your hard drive that deal with various correspondence, but each has a hint that it is a
letter. The Document Manager can help you keep these together.

Add a Custom Group

A Custom Group is a way to keep track of diverse files in different locations on your hard drive(s)
which may be related to each other in a special way.
1. Choose the menu command Window > Document Manager.
2. Click the Plus (+) button in the lower left corner of the Document Manager window.
3. In the dialog that appears, click Add Custom Group
4. Type the name you want to use in the Group Name field as illustrated in Figure 67.
5. Click Add Group.
As explained in the dialog, a Custom Group will display any files that you add to it. You
cannot move files to a Custom Group, you can only add (aliases to these) files. The Custom
Group you create keeps track of the files added to it, regardless of where the files may be
(moved) on your hard drive(s).
Because only an alias to the file appears in the Custom Group, the same file can appear in
more than one Custom Group.

Figure 67
Adding a custom group to the Document Manager

70

Saving Files

Add a Folder Group

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

Choose the menu command Window > Document Manager.

Click the + button in the lower left corner of the Document Manager window.
In the dialog that appears, click Add Folder Group
Click Choose and navigate to and select the folder you want to add.
Click Choose Folder in the variant of the Open dialog that appears
The path to the folder will appear in the text field in the dialog as illustrated in Figure 58.
Click Add Group.
As explained in the dialog, a Folder Group will display only those files that are currently in the
designated folder. You can move files to a Folder Group, you can also add (aliases to these)
files. The Folder Group tracks only those files (and aliases) actually in the designated folder.
Because you can add an alias to a Folder Group, the same file can appear in more than one
Folder Group, but only if it is added, not moved.
One useful Folder Group on a computer used by different people would be the Shared folder.
That way all users could keep their files available to each other.

Figure 68
Adding a folder group to the Document Manager

Creating Documents

71

Add a text based Filter Group

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to create a variety of filter groups using various criteria.
1. Choose the menu command Window > Document Manager.
2. Click the + Plus button in the lower left corner of the Document Manager window.
3. In the dialog that appears, click Add Filter Group.
4. Click Add Group.
The Document Manager window changes to display additional Advanced Search criteria as
illustrated in Figure 59.
Using "double quotes" around a search phrase will only match content that contains exactly
that quoted phrase. If you do not surround the phrase with double quotes the words in the
phrase are always split at the white spaces before any matching is done.

Figure 69
Adding a filter group using a file name criterion to the Document Manager
5.

From the Match All/Any of the following criteria pop-up menu you can choose from either:

Any
All
Choose the criteria you want from the two pop-up menus available.
The first pop-up menu offers:

In Group
Content
The Document Manager uses the Mac OS X Spotlight tool to search file content. Files not
indexed by Spotlight will not have their content searched.
File Name
File Type
File Size
Date Created
Date Modified
Date Opened
Author
This is based on what you have entered in the dialog available when choosing the menu
command File > Properties.
Keywords
This is based on what you have entered in the dialog available when choosing the menu
command File > Properties.

6.

72

Saving Files

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

Document Properties
This is based on what you have entered in the dialog available when choosing the menu
command File > Properties.
Anywhere
The second pop-up menu offers:

Contains
Contains Word
Does Not Contain (works on any text search: file name, author, content, etc though only on
Leopard, not Tiger)
Is Exactly
Starts With
Ends With
7. Enter the term you want to search for in the text field provided.
8. If there is more than one possible term separate them and designate whether the search should
be for one OR the other, or one AND the other, using the little arrow pop-up menu on the right
edge of the text field, as illustrated in Figure 71 on page 73.
9. If you have additional sets of criteria you want to use, click the Plus (+) button on the right side
and continue from step 6 as illustrated in Figure 71.
You can later remove any of these criteria by clicking the corresponding the Minus (-) button.
10. You can choose to force Nisus Writer Pro to sort the resulting list. The options available are:

Name Ascending (A-Z)

Name Descending (Z-A)
File Size, largest first
File Size, smallest first
Date Created, newest first
Date Created, oldest first
Date Modified, newest first
Date Modified, oldest first
11. You can limit the resulting list to a number you designate in the Limit to x documents portion
of the dialog.
12. When you are satisfied with your selections, click Save Search As Group.
13. Give the search group a name in the sheet that appears, as illustrated in Figure 70.

Figure 70
Naming a Document Manager search filter
14. Click OK.
Your newly named search group appears in the left pane of the Document Manager identified by
name and a magnifying glass indicating its type of group as illustrated in Figure 71.

Creating Documents

73

Figure 71
Adding a filter group using content criteria to the Document Manager

Add a date based Filter Group

Choose the menu command Window > Document Manager and follow steps 2 through 14. Use
Figure 72 as a model.

Figure 72
Adding a filter group using a date criterion to the Document Manager

Remove a filter group from the Document Manager

A time may come when you no longer need a particular filter group. You can remove any group from
the Document Manager except for All Managed Files.
1. Select the filter groups name in the left pane of the Document Manager.
2. press 6 and click the selected groups name.
3. Choose Remove Group from the contextual menu that appears.

74

Saving Files

4.

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

An alert appears, illustrated in Figure 63, which asks if you are certain you want to remove the
filter group:
No files will be deleted from your hard drive; they will simply no longer be accessible through
the removed Document Manager group. This operation is not undoable.
Continue with caution and choose either Cancel or Remove.

Figure 73
The remove filter group alert

Rename a filter group in the Document Manager

You may decide that you want to change the name of the groups you have in the left pane of the
Document Manager.
1. Either:

Double-click the name of the filter group in the left pane of the Document Manager, or

Select a filter groups name, press 6 and click in the left pane of the Document Manager
and choose Rename from the contextual menu that appears.
2. Type the text you want as illustrated in Figure 75 and Figure 74.
3. Press < or T.

Figure 74
The contextual menu in the Groups pane of the Document Manager

Creating Documents

75

Figure 75
Editing the name of a group in the Document Manager

Find a particular file or files among those listed in the Document Manager
Once you have created a particular listing of files, you still might want to narrow the list further to
find the precise file you need to open.

Type the search term you need in the field in the upper right corner of the Document Manager
window.
Note, however that there are, even here, additional options available.

Filename
Finds the file with the search term only if the term appears in the name of the file.

Document Content
Finds the file with the search term only if the term appears in the content of the file, as
illustrated in Figure 76. The Document Manager uses the Mac OS X Spotlight tool to search
file content. Files not indexed by Spotlight will not have their content searched.

Either
Finds the file with the search term if it appears in the name or in the content of the file

Advanced Search
Opens the Document Manager window to display the advanced search capabilities
illustrated in Figure 69, Figure 71 and Figure 72. When you choose Advanced Search
Nisus Writer Pro automatically selects all the groups in the left pane. You can de-select
those you do not wish to search in.

76

Saving Files

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

Figure 76
Searching in a filter group of the Document Manager for specific text

See a preview of your file

Select any file in the Nisus Writer Pro Document Manager.

The first few lines of text appear in the pane at the bottom of the window
If the file is a graphic file or a PDF, the preview displays the contents (or in the case of the PDF,
the first page) of the file as illustrated in Figure 78.

If you click Open, Nisus Writer Pro will open a graphic file and display the image as a
character in a newly created Nisus Writer Pro file. It will open a PDF file and display the first
page of that file as an image. Or, if you choose Open in Default Application from the
contextual menu, Nisus Writer Pro will open the file in the originating application (as if you
had double-clicked the file in the Finder).

Figure 77
The Preview portion displays the first few lines of text

Creating Documents

77
Note that the Document Manager displays the total number of files and the selected number
of files in the upper left area above the file list as illustrated in Figure 77 along with the first
few lines of text of the first of any selected documents.

Figure 78
The Preview portion of the Document Manager with a graphic file selected and the contextual menu showing

Open a file using the Document Manager

1.
2.

Select any file in the Nisus Writer Pro Document Manager.

Either:
double-click the file in the Document Manager window
or
click Open at the bottom right corner of the Document Manager window.
If you press 4 as you do either of the above actions, Nisus Writer Pro closes the Document
Manager window as it opens the file.

Additional features of the Document Manager

Using the buttons of the Document Manager window
In addition to the Open button at the bottom of the Document Manager window:
You can also use the available buttons to

Delete a file.
Save a file under a different name and/or in a different location by clicking Save As.
Open a New file.
Select any item(s) in the Document Manager and choose the menu command Edit > Copy to
put the path to the file on the Clipboard.
Select any item(s) in the Document Manager and choose the menu command Edit > Copy >
Copy Text Only to put whatever details of the file you have set the Document Manager to
display on the Clipboard.
Select a file and you can then select and copy the preview text.
If a file is selected in the Document Manager and it is already open, the Open button reads
Activate instead. If multiple files are selected and even one of them is not already open, the
button reads Open and not Activate.

Using the contextual menus of the Document Manager window

Depending on what you have selected and what is active a number of commands appear on a
contextual menu when clicking 6 and the mouse or trackpad in the Document Manager window:

When clicking in the left, Groups pane you can:

78

Saving Files

Rename a selected group or filter.

if you select any particular group you can choose Show in Finder to display that folder in the
Finder.
if you select the All Managed Files group or the Style Library group you can Move Files to
Group.
if you select the All Managed Files group or any group other than the Style Library group you
can Add Files to Group.
if you select any particular group(s) you can Remove Group.
No files will be deleted from your hard drive; they will simply no longer be accessible through
the removed Document Manager groups. This operation is not undoable.
When clicking in the right, File List pane you can

depending on which group of filter is listed, and,

whether or not you select a file, or,
click in an area where no file is listed:

Managing Saving and Opening Your Files

Rename a selected file.

Show in Finder a selected file.
Open in Default Application a selected file.
Remove File (or files) selected from the Recently Opened and Recently Saved groups.
if the displayed files are from the All Managed Files group or the Style Library group
you can Move Files to Group.
if the displayed files are from the All Managed Files group or any group other than the
Style Library group you can Add Files to Group.
you can Show File Extensions (or not).
You can Show Missing & Trashed Files (or not).
Missing and trashed files (and folders) have their own icon (a dotted box indicating nothing is
there) and the files names appear in red.

Formatting Documents
This portion of the manual describes how to define the way your document looks. There are four,
concentric, levels of control over the various limits that control the format of what appears on a
page (from outer to inner):

the paper size set in the Page Setup dialog explained in Setting Paper Size and Margins on
page 124,

the margins set in Page View by dragging the margin line or using the Sections palette
explained in Set the margins of the sections of your document on page 127,

the line wrap area (indents) set by moving the indent markers on the ruler explained in Set
the indent or outdent (hanging indent) position of the first line of a paragraph on page 81,

the contents of a table set by using the tools of the Table menu and its related palettes which
is explained in Tables on page 197.
The majority of users are satisfied with the paper size and margin dimensions of the file opened
when you choose the menu command File > New, this documentation begins with an explanation of
how to modify the shapes of your paragraphs.

Formatting Documents ............................................................................. 79

Structuring Paragraphs .................................................................... 81
Set the indent or outdent (hanging indent) position of the first line of a paragraph
....................................................................................................... 81
Quickly indent or outdent a selected range of paragraphs .............. 82
Set the text wrap area ..................................................................... 83
Set the text wrap area numerically ................................................. 85
Set the text wrap area using the keyboard ...................................... 85
Justify align text ........................................................................... 86
Set spacing between lines .............................................................. 88
Set spacing between paragraphs ..................................................... 89
Set tabs .......................................................................................... 91
Use leader tabs .............................................................................. 92
Set the type of leader before placing a tab ...................................... 93
Move a tab indicator using the mouse or trackpad ......................... 94
Move a tab indicator using the keyboard ........................................ 94
Edit a tabs location numerically ..................................................... 94
Selecting paragraphs with different formatting ................................ 95
Add a font to your System .............................................................. 96
Change the font of characters ......................................................... 97
Change the size of characters ......................................................... 99
Change the attributes of characters ............................................... 100
Change the attributes of characters using the Dropper ............... 100
Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets .............................................. 102
An introduction to Style Sheets ..................................................... 102
See the Style Sheet associated with a document ........................... 104
Understanding the difference between the various kinds of styles 106
Apply a style to your text .............................................................. 106
Modify a style .............................................................................. 107
Assign a keyboard shortcut to your style as you edit it .................. 108
Create a new style ........................................................................ 110
Select a range of text with a particular style .................................. 111
Select all the text in your document with a particular style ........... 111
Remove a styles attributes from selected text ............................... 112

80
Remove a character attribute from your text ................................. 112
Remove a style from your document ............................................ 113
Resolve conflicts between styles ................................................... 113

Creating Documents

81

Structuring Paragraphs
This section describes the different ways you can define the appearance of paragraphs. When in
page view, all paragraphs appear within the margins you set (outlined as the gray line around the
area of the page). When in Draft View and Full Screen view, Nisus Writer Pro allows your text to run
as far to the right of the document window as you wish. (For right-to-left languages text flows as far
to the left as you wish.) The four blue paragraph definition droplets appear on the ruler at the top
of the window (though not when in Full Screen view).
Select the paragraph(s) you want to modify before making any changes to the ruler.

The markers (droplets) you see on the rulers are called indents. They are measured from the edge of
the margin.
The actual indent used for right to left text switches based on the direction of the paragraph.

Set the indent or outdent (hanging indent) position of the first line
of a paragraph
All the numbered and bulleted instructions in this document use a hanging indent.

Create a normal indent

Examine the highlighted area at the bottom of Figure 80 below.
Drag the First Line In/Outdent maker across the ruler and release the mouse button or
trackpad at the position where you want the first character of your paragraph to appear.

Create a hanging indent

Examine the highlighted area at the bottom of Figure 81 below.
Drag the Left Indent marker across the ruler and release the mouse button or trackpad at the
position where you want the text to wrap.

For right to left text, do the reverse: drag the Right Indent marker.

Figure 79
The First Line In/Outdent marker relative to the Tail Line Wrap Indicator (flush)

Figure 80
The First Line In/Outdent marker relative to the Tail Line Wrap Indicator (indented)

82

Structuring Paragraphs

Formatting Documents

Figure 81
The First Line In/Outdent marker relative to the Tail Line Wrap Indicator (outdent or hanging indent)

Quickly indent or outdent a selected range of paragraphs

Select the range of paragraphs you wish to modify and click the Indent or Outdent button on
the Toolbar or choose Increase Both Left Indents or Decrease Both Left Indents from the
menu Format > Paragraph Indents.

Figure 82
A range of paragraphs with the indents set at the far left, along the margin

Figure 83
A range of paragraphs after clicking the Indent button

The Indent and Outdent buttons are available if you customize your Toolbar, as explained in the
section Customize Your Toolbar on page 410.
If you have a list style applied, the list level will increase/decrease with each indent/outdent.

Creating Documents

83

Set the text wrap area

Drag the First Line Indent and/or the Right Indent marker across the ruler and release the
mouse button or trackpad where you want the lines of your paragraph to wrap.

Figure 84
The First Line Indent in various positions relative to the Left Indent marker
You can drag the First Line Indent marker independently of the Left Indent marker. If you drag the
larger (upper) Independent Drag droplet, when you release the mouse button or trackpad, the
smaller, lower Conjoined Drag droplet bounces into position. The First Line In/Outdent does not
move.

Figure 85
The Independent Drag First Line Indent marker
If you drag the smaller, lower Conjoined Drag droplet, when you release the mouse button or
trackpad, the larger (upper) the Independent Drag droplet bounces into position and the First Line
In/Outdent moves the same distance as you moved the Conjoined Drag droplet.

Figure 86
Moving the Conjoined Drag First Line Indent marker

Figure 87
The Right Indent marker

You can select any combination of the four indent markers by pressing 1 or A as you click each
one.

84

Figure 88
The Text Wrap area

Structuring Paragraphs

Formatting Documents

Creating Documents

85

Set the text wrap area numerically

1.
2.

Double click any of the indent markers.

Enter the settings you want in the Edit Line Wraps and Indent dialog that opens.
You can display the values either as they appear

from the edge of the paper: choose Position on Ruler

or from the margin: choose Inset from Margin.

You can display the units either as they are preset on the ruler (Ruler Units), or any of the other
units supported: Centimeters (cm), Inches (in), Millimeters (mm), Picas (pc) or Points (pt).

Figure 89
The Edit Line Wraps and Indent dialog in a left to right section

Figure 90
The Edit Line Wraps and Indent dialog in a right to left section
3.

Click OK.

Set the text wrap area using the keyboard

1.
2.

Select any of the indent markers (either individually, or more than one by pressing A or 1).
Press the right or left arrows on the keyboard to move the markers a short distance to the right
or left respectively.

You can move the left indent marker and first line indent of selected text by pressing 4 .. This
moves the left indent marker and first line indent in one-half and one-quarter inch increments
(respectively) to create a hanging indent.
Alternatively, press 4 , to move the left indent marker and first line indent out one-half and onequarter inch increments (respectively) (until both are flush left).

Set the text wrap area using the Paragraph palette

1.
2.
3.

Click the Indents tab in the Paragraph palette as illustrated in Figure 91.
Select the text (lines or paragraphs) you wish to change.
Click the various steppers to the settings you want.

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value uniformly to
all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

86

Structuring Paragraphs

Formatting Documents

Figure 91
The Paragraph palette with Indents selected
All of the indent controls are also available from the menu Format > Paragraph Indents. However,
they use preset amounts to increase and decrease the indents. You can have better control using
the Paragraph palette, or manipulating the ruler directly.

Justify align text

Use the Paragraph palette in the Tooldrawer to set paragraph justification and specify how lines in a
paragraph line up based on the left and right line wrap indicators. The choices are left, center, right,
and full justification. Fully justified type causes uneven word spacing with even line widths, while
unjustified (or ragged) type causes even word spacing with uneven line widths. You can also
access these commands by choosing them from the menu Format > Paragraph Alignment.

Figure 92
The Paragraph palette with Spacing selected

Click alignment buttons on the Paragraph palette.

Alignment BAttons on the Character )alette

Left justify
Center justify
Right justify
Full justify

Click to align text along the left indent marker.

Click to center text around the midpoint between
the first line indent and the right indent for the
first line of a paragraph and between the two
indent markers for all subsequent lines.
Click to align text along the right indent marker.

Click to cause text to justify the edges of text at

both the right and left indent markers.

Table 3
Alignment buttons on the Character palette

Creating Documents
The following examples show how the different types of justification affect your text.

Figure 93
Example of Left Justification (with show invisibles turned on)

Figure 94
Example of Center Justification (with show invisibles turned on)

Figure 95
Example of Right Justification (with show invisibles turned on)

87

88

Structuring Paragraphs

Formatting Documents

Figure 96
Example of Full Justification (with show invisibles turned on)
All of the alignment controls are also available from the menu Format > Paragraph.

Set spacing between lines

Line height, known to typesetters as leading (because of the pieces of lead placed between the lines
of type) refers to the vertical distance between the top of one line and the top of the following line.
Use options of the Spacing portion of the Paragraph palette illustrated in Figure 97 below to change
the spread between lines, above paragraphs and below selected paragraphs.

Click the steppers to apply varying amounts of spacing you want between lines and
paragraphs or type the number of lines or points appropriate in the text edit box to the left of
each stepper.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

Figure 97
Change Line Height (with show invisibles turned on)

The unit of measurement in the Line height edit box changes by .1 line increments to a maximum of
four lines. You can select the text in the Line height edit box and type the number you want.

Keep your lines from spreading when using superscript or footnotes/endnotes

If you use superscripted ordinal numbers (Nisus Writer Pro can maintain these for you
automatically as explained in Determine What QuickFix Fixes on page 402) or footnotes/endnotes,
you can keep your line spacing from spreading.

Select the paragraph(s) you want to prevent spreading and choose Fixed from the Multiple/
Fixed pop-up menu in the Paragraph palette.

Select the paragraph(s) you want to prevent spreading and choose the menu command Format
> Paragraph Spacing > Fixed Line Spacing. The command toggles on and off.

Creating Documents

89

Allow your lines to spread when using superscript or footnotes/endnotes

Select the paragraph(s) you want to permit to spread and choose Multiple from the Multiple/
Fixed pop-up menu in the Paragraph palette.

Set spacing between paragraphs

The space Before (above) paragraph stepper affects the space between the first line of the selected
paragraph(s) and the last line of the preceding paragraph.

Figure 98
Space Before (Above) Paragraph (with show invisibles turned on)
Click the steppers to apply varying amounts of spacing you want between paragraphs or type
the number of points appropriate in the text edit box to the left of each stepper.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
The space After (below) paragraph stepper affects the space below the last line of each selected
paragraph and the first line of any succeeding paragraph.

Figure 99
Space After (Below) Paragraph (with show invisibles turned on)
All of the spacing controls are also available from the menu Format > Paragraph Spacing. However,
they use preset amounts to increase and decrease the spaces. You can have better control using the
Paragraph palette.

Control how paragraphs split and stick together

If you use Nisus Writer Pro to put text on paper, you will probably want to make sure that the
printed version of your file looks good. Among the concerns are whether headings remain with the
paragraphs they introduce and other, similar issues.

Prevent widows and orphans

There is some disagreement as to the exact meaning of the word widow in a typesetting context:

90

Structuring Paragraphs

Formatting Documents

the last line or word of a paragraph appearing at the top of a page, with the remainder
appearing on the preceding page

a single word or syllable (some say 7 characters or less) left alone at the bottom of a paragraph.
There is, however, general agreement about what constitutes an orphan:

1.
2.

a heading or the first line of a paragraph or verse at the foot of a page.

Click your insertion point in the paragraph (or select a range of paragraphs).
Either

click Prevent widow/orphan in the Paragraph palette, or,

choose the menu command Format > Paragraph > Prevent Widows & Orphans.

This only controls for the first definition of widow but also controls for orphans. This prevents them
from splitting to another page or column by themselves. The first or last line of a paragraph can still
appear on another page or column (away from the majority of the paragraph) so long as they have
company.

Keep selected paragraphs together

Use this set of commands to make sure that an entire paragraph appears on the same page or
column.
1. Click your insertion point in the paragraph (or select a range of paragraphs).
2. Either

click Keep together in the Paragraph palette, or,

choose the menu command Format > Paragraph > Keep Paragraph Together.

Keep one paragraph with the one that follows it

Use this set of commands to make sure that headings stay with the text that follows, or to
guarantee that a caption stays on the same page or column as the illustration to which it is
associated.
1. Click your insertion point in the paragraph (or select a range of paragraphs).
2. Either

click Keep with next in the Paragraph palette, or,

choose the menu command Format > Paragraph > Keep With Next Paragraph.

This keeps the selected paragraph on the same page as the first line of the next paragraph. How that
first line is placed is determined by whether or not it is controlled by either (or both) Keep together
or Prevent widow/orphan.
You can use these commands to create styles that control the overall shape of your document.
When you do this you do not need to concern yourself each time you have a potential layout
problem. This procedure is explained in Modify a style beginning on page 107.

Creating Documents

91

Set tabs
Use tabs to align columns of text. Pressing @ lines up the text that follows at the next tab
indicated above the ruler. Nisus Writer Pro offers four types of tabs you can place on the ruler. The
tabs differ in the manner in which they align text.
Automatic tabs appear every half inch after the last manually set tab.

Figure 100
Preset tabs above the ruler (with show invisibles turned on)

Set a tab visually

1.

2.

Choose the desired tab indicator from the Tab pop-up menu at the right edge of the ruler above
the Vertical Scroll Bar.
The options available are:

Left
Center
Right
Decimal
Leader
Click above the ruler where you want your tab to appear.
Any preset tabs that existed to the left of your tab disappear. The pre-set tabs that follow the
ones you insert remain.

Figure 101
The Tab menu

92

Structuring Paragraphs

Formatting Documents

Set a tab using the menus

1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command Format > Paragraph Indents > Add Tab Stop.
Choose the settings you want from the Edit Tab sheet that appears as illustrated in Figure 102.
Click OK.

Figure 102
The Edit Tab sheet

Figure 103
Tab stop justification (with show invisibles turned on; with and without leader)
Nisus Writer Pro places no limit to the number of tabs you can set on a ruler.
If you do not set any tabs, you can use the built-in tab feature. Built-in tabs are left aligned.

Use leader tabs

In tables of contents, indexes and columns of numbers you may want to have something to lead the
readers eyes from one part of tabbed text to the next. These guides are called Leader Tabs. You can

Creating Documents

93

either set a series of Tab Indicators as Leader Tabs or change a plain tab to a Leader Tab at a later
time.

Choose the menu command Tab > Leader and click on the ruler the same as with any other
tab.

Set the type of leader before placing a tab

1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command Tab > Default Leader Tab Settings.
Choose the kind of leader you want from the sheet that appears.
Click any one of the following

None
Dotted ()
Dashed(---)
Custom character(s) (and enter the character(s) you want to use)
Underline (and choose the style of line you want from the pop-up menu)

Figure 104
The Default Leader Tab Settings sheet
You can choose from a wide variety of graphic underline options from the Leader Tab Settings sheet.

94

Structuring Paragraphs

Formatting Documents

Figure 105
Default Leader Tab underline pop-up menu
4.

Click OK.

Move a tab indicator using the mouse or trackpad

Drag the Tab Indicator to its new location.

You can select multiple Tab Indicators then move them simultaneously if you press 1 or A as
you click the Tab Indicators.

Nisus Writer Pro displays a vertical line to indicate where the tab will align the text.

Move a tab indicator using the keyboard

1.
2.

Select any of the tab indicators (either individually, or more than one by pressing 1 or A).
Press the right or left arrows on the keyboard to move the indicators a short distance to the
right or left respectively.

You can select any combination of the tab indicators and the four indents and line wrap indicators by
pressing 1 or A as you click each one.

Edit a tabs location numerically

1.

2.

Double-click the Tab Indicator.

The Edit Tab dialog indicates what kind of tab you have clicked and allows you to change it
using the pop-up menu presented.
Enter the value for the location you want.You can display the values either as they appear

3.

from the edge of the paper: choose Position on Ruler

or from the margin: choose Inset from Margin.
You can display the units either as they are preset on the ruler (Ruler Units), or any of the other
units supported: Centimeters (cm), Inches (in), Millimeters (mm), Picas (pc) or Points (pt).
Click OK.
You can paste a numerical value into the dialog. This enables you to match a tabs location in
one part of your document with that from another part of the document.

Creating Documents

95

Remove a tab Indicator

Drag the Tab Indicator off the ruler, or, select the ones you want to remove and press (the
delete key). Select multiple Tabs by pressing 1 or A as you click the tab, or select them all by
pressing 4 as you click any tab.
Choose the menu command Format > Paragraph Indents > Remove Tab Stops to remove all
the tab stops controlling the selected paragraph(s).

Selecting paragraphs with different formatting

When you select paragraphs with different ruler formatting, the Ruler at the top of the document
window and the Paragraph palette display the line wrap and indent, line height and paragraph
spacing of the first selected paragraph. Other formats that are common to all selected paragraphs,
such as Tab Indicators, also display. If you change format attributes to selected paragraphs with
different rulers the new attributes affect all the selected text.

Set the same format for a group of differing paragraphs

1. Select the paragraphs

2. Change the format by modifying the ruler.
If the indentation differs for selected paragraphs, the Ruler at the top of the document window and
Paragraph palette reflect the settings of the first selected paragraph. Changing an indent affects all
selected paragraphs.

The head and tail text wrap indicators determine the physical length of your line on the page. These
markers determine where the lines of your paragraphs will wrap. Drag these indicators along the
Ruler to change their settings.

96

Format Characters

Formatting Documents

Format Characters
You can add font, size, and style characteristics to text.
Nisus Writer Pro lists all the fonts you have that your version of the OS can display. These are
generally in any of the following folders
/Library/Fonts
~/Library/Fonts
/Network/Library/Fonts
/System/Library/Fonts
and any fonts in the Classic
System Folder/Fonts
so long as they are not being managed by a Classic (pre OS X) font management tool.

You can cause the menu Format > Font to display the fonts available in their own font (WYSIWYG) by
turning on Font menu shows previews in the Appearance preference pane of Nisus Writer Pro. See
Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents on page 388 for more information.
Displaying your fonts WYSIWYG can cause Nisus Writer Pro to respond sluggishly.

Font substitution
If a font does not have a particular character Nisus Writer Pro presents an alert and displays the
character in the secondary font or another font that does have that character. In that case, when
you select the missing character, Nisus Writer Pro also displays the font name in red in the menu
Format > Font and in Character palette.

Figure 106
The font substitution alert
You can cause those characters that have had their font substituted in a special highlight color in
the Appearance preference pane of Nisus Writer Pro. See Determine the color of various aspects of
your Nisus Writer Pro working environment on page 395 for more information.

Add a font to your System

After you have purchased a font and you have it on your hard drive, or you have a CD of your fonts
loaded in to your computer you can add these fonts to your System.

Double-click the fonts icon.

Figure 107
A font file icon
Apples application Font Book opens and presents you with a dialog offering to install the font.

Creating Documents

97

Change the font of characters

Whenever you change the font of characters in your text from its underlying style as set in your Nisus
New File or an applied style sheet, as explained in Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets on
page 102, the
, the Font/Character Attributes Tag appears on the Statusbar at the bottom of your
document window. This is considered a manual override of the formatting of your document, as
explained in detail on page 100.
1. Select the text you wish to change.
2. Using the Character palette in the Writing group inside the Tooldrawer, choose the font you
want from the Family pop-up menu.
Or
1. Select the text you want to have a different font.
2. Choose the font you want from the menu Format > Font.
You can choose from any font you have loaded in your System. The selected text appears in the
chosen font.

Figure 108
The Character palette in its smallest format
You can enlarge the Character palette by dragging the enlarge corner (if the palette is outside the
Tooldrawer) or, the drag bar (if it is inside the Tooldrawer).

Figure 109
The Character palette enlarged
If you have many fonts available, a scroll bar appears. You can drag this scroll bar to display
additional fonts.

98

Format Characters

Formatting Documents

Figure 110
The Character palette showing the Font pop-up menu
Nisus Writer Pro groups your fonts as they are organized in the Font Book application. You can
choose to display:

1.
2.

All Fonts
Document Fonts (only and all those appearing in the active document)
English (those fonts designated as English, or whatever language is the primary language
you have set for the Mac OS)
whatever fonts you designate as your Favorite Fonts using the Fonts panel
Favorite Fonts is a collection of fonts that you maintain.
Choose the menu command Format > Font > Show Fonts.
From the Gear menu in the lower left corner of the Fonts panel choose Add to Favorites or by
dragging and dropping their names from the Typeface or Family column to Favorites in the
Collection column as illustrated in Figure 111.
You can also add your own named collections to gather certain categories of fonts, for example,
Hebrew, Arabic, etc. and they will also appear under that named collection in the Fonts menu
in Nisus Writer Pro. To accomplish this press the Plus (+) button.

Creating Documents

99

Figure 111
The Gear menu in the Fonts panel

your Recent Fonts (which displays the 10 most recent fonts you have used).

Scroll through a longer list of fonts

Drag the resize tab at the bottom of the Character palette down to display a longer list of
available fonts.
If you know the name of the font you want, you can click and select the font name in the Font
display and type the first few characters. Nisus Writer Pro uses auto-fill to sense what font
you want, displaying the closest match (in alphabetical order). When you see the font you want,
press T to confirm your choice.
If you want to move on to change the typeface and/or size, you can press @ to confirm and
select the next field in the palette.

Change the size of characters

Whenever you change the size of characters in your text from its underlying style as set in your Nisus
New File or an applied style sheet, as explained in Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets on
page 102, the
, the Font/Character Attributes Tag appears on the Statusbar at the bottom of your
document window. This is considered a manual override of the formatting of your document, as
explained in detail on page 100.
1. Select the text you wish to change.
2. Click and drag the Size slider to the size you want.
The Size box updates to display the actual size of the characters,

100

Format Characters

Formatting Documents

If you know the size you want, you can click and select (or double-click) the size display and
type the size you want. Nisus Writer Pro uses only whole number sizes. When you are satisfied,
press T or @ to confirm your choice.
The slider only goes up to 128 pt., you can enter any size you like in the size display text box.
Or
1. Select the text you want to have a different size.
2. Choose the size you want from the menu Format > Size.
You can choose from a variety of sizes or you can increase or decrease the size of your text by
designated increments. The selected text appears in the selected size.

Change the size of characters to a size not listed on the menu

1.
2.
Or
1.
2.

Select the text you want to have a different size.

Click and drag the Size slider to the size you want.

Choose the menu command Format > Size > Other.

Type the number for the size you want and Click OK.
You can set the size to decimal fractions as well as whole numbers.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the text you want to have a different size.

Choose Increase By or Decrease By from the menu Format > Size.
Type the number for the amount you want the size to change.
Click OK.

Increase or decrease the size of characters by a specific amount

Change the attributes of characters

Whenever you change the attributes of characters in your text from its underlying style as set in your
Nisus New File or an applied style sheet, as explained in Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets
on page 102, the
, the Font/Character Attributes Tag appears on the Statusbar at the bottom of
your document window. This is considered a manual override of the formatting of your document, as
explained in detail on page 100.
1. Select the text you want to have a different attribute.
2. Choose the attribute you want from the Format menu.
The selected text appears with the chosen attribute.

For more information about special attributes in Nisus Writer Pro see page 289.

Change the attributes of characters using the Dropper

1.

Select the text with the attributes you wish to apply elsewhere.

Figure 112
The Dropper with nothing in it (before clicking in text), then with something in it (after clicking in text)
2.
3.
4.
5.

Click the Dropper on the Toolbar.

The dropper has absorbed the attributes. You are now in attribute duplication mode.
While the Dropper is full, click and drag your pointer to select the text to which you want to
apply the attributes.
Repeat step 3 until you no longer want to duplicate attributes.
Click anywhere in your text, or click the dropper button.
You have now left the attribute duplication mode.

The Dropper absorbs and drops highlight color and any attributes of Styles (though not the Styles
themselves). The underling Style remains but the new attributes have been laid on top of the Style;
they override the Style.

Manually overriding formatting

All the above sections from Change the font of characters on page 97 through Change the
attributes of characters using the Dropper refer to the act of manually overriding the formatting

Creating Documents

101

of your document. Manual formatting is any formatting (attributes) applied to text directly, not
through Styles. Applying a Heading 1 paragraph style may change the texts font and size, but that
is not manual formatting. That is formatting by way of Styles. On the other hand, if you select some
text and change the Font, Face, Size or Color using the Character palette, that is manual
formatting.
The Font Tag (the little black underlined a icon
on the Statusbar) represents all manual fontlike formatting applied to the selection. When you choose Select All command from the Font Tags
menu, it selects only all text in the document that has all of the manual formatting applied. What
the font tag selects will depend on where the selection rests in your document.

Example 1
You may have some text in your document where only the Normal style is applied. If you select that
text, the font tag wont appear at all, because there is no manual formatting applied.

Example 2
If you again select that text where only the Normal style is applied, and then add an Underline by
choosing the menu command Format > Underline > Single, the Font Tag will appear. The text now
has some manual formatting applied, specifically an underline attribute. If you then choose Select
All command from the Font Tags pop-up menu, all text in the document with a manual single
underline attribute will be selected. But only text with manual underlines will be selected; if the
underline was enforced via a Style, it would not be selected.

Example 3
Continuing with the text we have so far (Normal style + single underline), lets now change the font
family as well. Say we change the font to Cochin, then the selected text now has manual formatting
of (single underline + Cochin font family). If we then choose Select All from the Font Tag, this time only
text in the document with both an underline and Cochin will be selected. And again, only if those
attributes were manually applied, and were not enforced via Styles.

102

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

An introduction to Style Sheets
Nisus Writer Pro has multiple ways of handling the various possible combinations of fonts, sizes,
colors and paragraph formats, languages and other character attributes. While the vast majority of
word processors allow you to define styles that apply to entire paragraphs, in Nisus Writer Pro you
can also apply a collection of attributes to a single character. This offers you much greater control
over the final look of your document as well as the manner in which you can modify it. A Style
Sheet is a collection of styles associated with your document. Each style can consist of a variety of
attributes and be as precise as you want, so as to define thefont, size, underline attributes, color,
spacing, line wrap, tablocations, and language. Or, a style can consist of as little as one attribute.

Please note we use the word style to refer to the user defined styles (whether shipped with Nisus
Writer Pro or created by you, the individual user) which appear in the Style Sheet view of Nisus Writer
Pro, in the Character Style and Paragraph Style submenus of the Format menu and in the Styles
palette. We use the word attributes to refer to those other means of altering the appearance of your
characters which you choose directly from the Format menu and apply individually.
Style Sheets can provide a variety of functionalities:

Styles can help you to automatically format document content including text and rulers, with a
single click or keystroke using sets of predefined formats you, the user define.

Styles can help you to automatically re-format your document as you the user change any style
definitions.

Styles enable you to store that formatting in a way that can be reused in other documents.
Nisus Writer Pro comes with a Nisus New File that includes a number of predefined styles. These
appear in the Styles palette as well as in the Character Style and Paragraph Style submenus of the
Format menu, and in the Style Sheet view of your untitled document.

You can modify these styles, or add more styles which meet your writing needs. Any attributes you
can apply to text using the Format menu and its submenus you can use to create a paragraph style,
while those that do not affect entire paragraphs you can use to create a character style. In addition a
number of the tools in various palettes are also available.
In order to have these styles available to you at any time, each time you open a New (Untitled) file
you need to add them to your Nisus New File. Instructions on how to modify yourNisus New File are
explained in Create a Nisus New File on page 380.
In addition, you can create any number of unique named template files with different Style Sheets in
them, each one for a different purpose. You can learn more about the Nisus New File and other
template documents in the section Understanding Template (Stationery) Documents beginning on
page 376
As an alternative, you can manage your styles using the Style Library of the Document Manager. The
Document Manager is explained in detail in the section Managing Saving and Opening Your Files
beginning on page 59. The Style Library is explained in detail in the section Maintain a Style Library
beginning on page 114.
Working with styles makes it easy for you to experiment with the appearance of your document.
Changing a style only affects the attributes that are specifically linked to that style. Once you
change a style, all text of that style in the document changes to match the modifications.

Creating Documents

103

Figure 113
The Styles palette enlarged with its menus showing formatted and unformatted previews; compare Figure 420 on page 394
The styles present in the shipped Nisus New File consist of three types character level, paragraph
level and note level styles. They appear in the Styles palette (except for the note styles) and in the
menu sorted alphabetically by level. Many of these supplied styles use standard names and
formatting common in HTML documents.
The name of the style of the current selection is highlighted in gray.

Block Quote

Use for indented blocks of quoted text;

Footer
footer;

Use for text in the footer. This style is already present when you click in the

Header
header;

Use for text in the header. This style is already present when you click in the

Heading 1

Use for top level headings;

Heading 2

Use for second level headings;

Heading 3

Use for third level headings;

Heading 4

Use for fourth level headings;

Heading 5

Use for fifth level headings;

Heading 6

Use for sixth level headings;

Normal

Use for your basic flowing paragraphs of text;

Title

Use for your documents title;

Emphatic

Use to emphasize smaller amounts of your text with italics;

Footnote Reference
Used for your footnotes;

Strong

Endnote Reference
Used for your endnotes;

Use to emphasize smaller amounts of your text with bold;

Endnote
Use to determine the display of the text of your endnotes. This is the style
already present when you insert an endnote and your insertion point is in the endnote area;

Footnote
Use to determine the display of the text of your footnotes. This is the style
already present when you insert a footnote and your insertion point is in the footnote area.
Comment
Created by Nisus Writer Pro when you add a comment to your document.
Table Cell
Created by Nisus Writer Pro when you add a table to your document.
The text and icons in the Styles palette display

104

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

name of the style;

the keyboard shortcut associated with that style (if any);

whether it is a paragraph level

or character level
style;
If the current selection consists of both a character level style and a paragraph level style both
icons are highlighted. Clicking one or the other icon scrolls the list to display that styles name.
The style of selected text in your document is highlighted in the palette using the inactive text
selection color set in your Appearance preferences as explained on page 398.
the Plus (+) button pop-up menu enables you to quickly insert a new style in your document
(all of which are also available from the menu Insert > New Style):

Based on Selection
Character Style
Paragraph Style
Import from Style Library

the Gear pop-up menu gives you quick access to the following commands (all of which are also
available from the Format menu):

Formatting Documents

Remove Character Style

Remove Paragraph Style
Select Range With Style
Select All With Style
Redefine Style From Selection
Remove Attributes Except Styles
Edit Styles
Show Style Library
Save to Style Library

and, the styles name appears in the font, size, other character attributes, color and
alignment associated with it.
You can display the Styles palette without the formatting as explained on page 394.

See the Style Sheet associated with a document

You can see (and edit) all the details of all the styles in your document, using any of the following
methods.

This changes the view of your document. It momentarily (while in that view) hides the text of your
document.

Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet.

Click the Style Sheet portion of the View button on the Toolbar.

Figure 114
The Styles Sheet portion of the View button

Choose the menu command Gear > Edit Styles at the bottom of the Styles palette in the
Tooldrawer.
Choose Edit Styles from the tag menus on the Statusbar at the bottom of the document
window to display the style in which your insertion point appears.
Double-click the active styles name in the Styles palette to display the style you double-clicked.

Creating Documents

105

Figure 115
The Style Sheet view
The Style Sheet view lists all the styles of the document in a panel along the left side of the window
(that you can hide or reveal) in alphabetical order grouped by Character Styles followed by
Paragraph Styles and then Note Styles and, finally, List Styles. You can display all styles or a subset of them by clicking the chevron to the right of that section. You can view two or more styles that
are not contiguous by pressing A as you click each style name.
Each style has its own portion of the Style Sheet view. When you select a style, its controls activate.
The upper left area displays the styles name and opposite that a sample of text as it would appear
in the document. (You can modify either, or both, of these.)
At bottom of the window, below the style definition area, two buttons enable you to save the active
styles to a library of styles, or import an existing style from a library of styles.

106

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Figure 116
The Normal style in Style Sheet view
Beneath the sample text, in clearly readable bubbles, are all the attributes that make up that
style. You can click to select and delete any of the attributes you do not want as part of the style.
You can use the tools of the Character and Paragraph palettes (among others) to make the changes
you want.
To the left are controls you can use to

determine on what other style in the document this should style be based;
assign a keyboard shortcut to the style;
determine the style automatically assigned to the next paragraph (when you press <).

Understanding the difference between the various kinds of styles

This version of Nisus Writer Pro supports four kinds of styles

Paragraph Styles
Apply the associated attributes to the entire paragraph.

Character Styles
Apply the associated attributes to selected text only (and it can overlay the attributes of a
Paragraph Style). These include those that determine the appearance of the footnote or endnote
reference character in the document. Character Styles toggle on or off the same way that
choosing individual attributes (such as Bold, Italic, Outline or Shadow).

Notes Styles.
Apply to the notes areas of your document.

List Styles
Apply to the lists you insert in your document.

Apply a style to your text

Applying styles to your text is easy. Rather than choosing a font, then a size, then a style and
possibly a color, when you choose a style, all the attributes associated with it are applied at once.
1. Select the text to which you wish to apply the style.
2. Apply the style

Choose the styles name from the Character Style and/or Paragraph Style submenus of the
Format menu.

Click that styles name once in the Styles palette.

Choose the styles name from the Character or Paragraph tag pop-up menu on the
Statusbar.
When you apply a paragraph style Nisus Writer Pro removes certain attributes that may already be
associated with the text and substitutes the attributes of the style you are applying.

Creating Documents

107
Paragraph attributes are always removed (for example); only one paragraph style can be
associated with any string of text at one time

line spacing (leading)

paragraph spacing
indents/outdents
alignment

Character attributes are removed only if the applied paragraph style defines a setting for that
attribute (for example)

font
color
italics

List attributes are removed only if the applied paragraph style defines a setting for that
attribute.
When you apply a character style (for example Emphatic) Nisus Writer Pro removes all character
attributes that may already be associated with the text (except language)

font
color
italics

Nisus Writer Pro only removes a language attribute if the applied style has a different language
associated with it.

Modify a style
You can edit all the details of all the styles in your document.
1. Display Style Sheet view of your document as explained in See the Style Sheet associated with
a document on page 104.
2. Select the style (or styles) you want to modify.
Or

Double-click a styles name in the Styles palette to display the style you double-clicked.

Select more than one style

Press A as you click a style.

When you have more than one style selected you can only change those attributes that they currently
share. Changing any of the non-shared attributes will automatically deselect those styles that do not
share the attribute.

Change the name of a style

1.
2.

Click in the name area of the selected style.

Select or delete the text there and type the name you want as illustrated in Figure 120 on page
111.

Have one style inherit the attributes of another

Choose that styles name from the Based on pop-up menu.

Depending on the style you choose, both Paragraph and Character (as well as the various Note) Styles
are available here. However, the only style names that appear in the pop-up menu are those that are
available. If Heading 3 is based on Heading 2 and Heading 2 is based on Heading 1 which is based on
Title, which is based on Normal, the Normal style cannot (logically) be based on Title, Headings 1, 2,
nor 3.
For example
Normal style has the paragraph attributes (listed in alphabetical order)

First Line Indent 0

Font Size 12 pt
Font Times
Left Indent 0
Line Spacing 1 lin
Paragraph Spacing After 6
Paragraph Spacing Before 0
Text Alignment Left
Text Color Black

108

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Heading 1 style is based on Normal. To distinguish it from Normal you only need to designate

Bold
Font Size 14 pt
Font Lucida Grande
Paragraph Spacing After 0
Paragraph Spacing Before 6
All other attributes will remain the same as those for Normal.
Heading 2 style is based on Heading 1. To distinguish it from Heading 1 we only want to make
it a bit smaller

Font Size 13 pt
All other attributes will remain the same as those for Heading 1.
You can base Paragraph Styles on other Paragraph Styles and have different Character Styles
underlying them. You cannot base a Character Style on a Paragraph Style.

Determine the style of the next paragraph of your text automatically

Generally, when you type descriptive text, each new paragraph shares the same formatting as the
one that preceded it. Headings are exceptions to this. Usually a heading is immediately followed by
normal text. The styles of Nisus Writer Pro take this into account. You can determine the style of
the following paragraph.
1. Choose Style Sheet view from the View menu.
2. Select the style you want to modify
3. Choose the style for the next paragraph from the Next Style pop-up menu.

Normal style is already set to follow the various Heading styles and the Title style.
4. Return to the Draft or Page view.

Assign a keyboard shortcut to your style as you edit it

Nisus Writer Pro allows you to assign keyboard shortcuts to any command of the program. You can
set your keyboard shortcuts in the Preferences as explained in Assign Menu Keys to Menu
Commands on page 400. However, while you are busy working on your styles, Nisus Writer Pro
allows you to assign the shortcuts right in the Style Sheet view.
1. Click your insertion point in the Shortcut box.
2. Press A and type the key you want for your shortcut.

Figure 117
Assigning a Menu Key shortcut in the Style Sheet view

Creating Documents

109

Remove a keyboard shortcut to your style as you edit it

1.
2.

Click your insertion point in the Shortcut field.

Press the x key.

Change the sample text that illustrates your style

The right side of the Style Sheet view has a window with a string of text. While one line of text is
usually sufficient for illustrating your Title and Heading styles, for your Normal style you would
probably want at least three paragraphs of text to be able to see not only the leading (line spacing)
but the space allocated before and after paragraphs.
1. Click your insertion point to select the style you want to modify.
2. Click your insertion point in the sample text field and select all the text there (type A a).
3. Paste any text you have on the Clipboard or type in the text you want as illustrative.

Figure 118
Changing the text and paragraph formatting in Style Sheet view

Quickly remove attributes that define your style

Beneath the string of text on the right side of the Style Sheet view indicators appear in little
bubbles. Each bubble represents a different attribute associated with that style.
1. Click your insertion point to select the style you want to modify.
2. Click to select the attribute you wish to remove.
3. Press x to remove that attribute.

When you delete any of these attributes, the style assumes the reigning attribute of the style upon
which it is based. If it is not based on any particular style, it assumes the attribute set in the Format
portion of your New File preferences (the Nisus New File) as illustrated in Figure 402 on page 375.

Figure 119
The attribute bubbles of the Style Sheet view illustrated in Figure 118 above with Line Spacing selected

110

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Add or modify attributes associated with your style

1.
2.

Click the name of the Style you want to modify in the panel on the left of the window.
Make the changes you want using the appropriate menus or palettes.

If you change your font family by typing the name of the font in the Character palette, you must press
T to confirm your selection.

You can add any of the Highlight colors to your Style by choosing the one you want from the Highlight
button on the Toolbar.

Create a new style

Your writing needs may differ from those of others. You may need various kinds of numbered lists
or block-quoted text, or sections of computer code. You can create a new style to control these or
any other block of text you want to format.
1. Choose

the menu command Insert > New Style > Character Style Based on Selection to create
a style that inherits the character formatting of the text in which your insertion point
appears.

the menu command Insert > New Style > Paragraph Style Based on Selection to create
a style that inherits the character and paragraph formatting of the text in which your
insertion point appears.

the menu command Insert > New Style > Character Style to create an entirely new
style that has no relationship to the text in which your insertion point appears.

the menu command Insert > New Style > Paragraph Style to create an entirely new
style that has no relationship to the text in which your insertion point appears.

the menu command Insert > New Style > List Style to create an entirely new style that
has no relationship to the text in which your insertion point appears.

The same commands appear if you click the Plus (+) button pop-up menu in the Styles palette.

Creating Documents

111

Figure 120
The new paragraph style based on the selection
1.
2.

Give the style a unique name.

Modify the styles attributes as explained in Modify a style on page 107.

Select a range of text with a particular style

You may have your insertion point in a string of text of a particular style and you want to assign a
different style to that. Ordinarily, if it is a character based style you would have to find and select
the entire string of text by guessing where it began and ended. However Nisus Writer Pro offers a
special tool for doing this.
1. Click your insertion point inside the area of text the style of which you wish to select.
2. Choose

Select Style Range from the Paragraph Style, Character Style, or Lists submenu of the
Format menu or

Select Range from the Character Level

, Paragraph Level
or List
Statusbar or
Select Range With Style from the Gear pop-up menu in the Styles palette.

style tag on the

If you have non-contiguous text selected, this extends the non-contiguous selection.

Select all the text in your document with a particular style

You may have your insertion point in a string of text of a particular style and you want to assign a
different style to that text. Ordinarily, if it is a character based style you would have to find and
select the entire string of text by guessing where it began and ended. However Nisus Writer Pro
offers a special tool for doing this.
1. Click your insertion point inside the area of text the style of which you wish to select.
2. Choose

112

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Select All Style from the Character Style, Paragraph Style, Notes Style or Lists submenu
of the Format menu or

Select All from the Character Level

, Paragraph Level
or List
Statusbar or

Select All With Style from the Gear pop-up menu in the Styles palette.
This selects all text in your document which shares that style.

style tag on the

Select the next instance of text in your document with the selected
style
You may have your insertion point in a string of text of a particular paragraph or note style, or
selected some text in a specific character style, and you want to find the next bit of text in your
document that shares that style. Ordinarily, if it is a character based style you would have to find
and select the entire string of text by guessing where it began and ended. However Nisus Writer Pro
offers a special tool for doing this.
1. If it is a character style select some of that text, or, if it is a paragraph style, click your insertion
point inside the area of text the style of which you wish to select.
2. Choose

Select Next in Same Style from the Character Style, Paragraph Style, Note Style or Lists
submenu of the Format menu or
Select Next in Same Style from the Character Level
, Paragraph Level
style tag on the Statusbar.
This selects next instance of text in your document which shares that style.

or List

Remove a styles attributes from selected text

You may have a document with styles associated with text that you no longer want. You can easily
remove that Style from the text.
1. Click your insertion point inside any area of text of the Paragraph Level Style which you wish to
remove.
2. Choose

the menu command Format > Paragraph Style > Remove Style,
or
Remove Style from the Paragraph Level
style tag at the bottom of the document
window, or

Remove Paragraph Style from the Gear pop-up menu in the Styles palette.
If it is a Character Level style, select the range of text from which you wish to remove the style
and choose

the menu command Format > Character Style > Remove Style, or

Remove Style from the Character Level

style tag on the Statusbar or
Remove Character Style from the Gear pop-up menu in the Styles palette.

Remove a character attribute from your text

Removing attributes from your text is easy.
1. Click your insertion point in the area of text which has attributes you wish to remove.
2. Choose Select Range or Select All from the Character Attributes tag on the Statusbar.
3. Choose Remove Font from the Character Attributes tag on the Statusbar.
When you remove these character attributes ,any underlying paragraph style attributes appear.
If no paragraph style is assigned to the text, whatever you have set in the Format portion of the
New File preferences, as illustrated in Figure 402 on page 375 will appear.

Figure 121
The Select/Remove Character Attributes tag on the Statusbar

Creating Documents

113

Remove a style from your document

You may have received a document with styles that do not match the way in which you do your
work. You can remove all vestiges of that style from your document (both the styles name and the
fact that it is applied to text in your document).
1. Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet.
2. Click the name of the style you wish to remove.

Be sure not to click inside the styles name or the sample text area or on any of the attributes that
make up the style.
3. Either:

Press x, or

If the Navigator pane is open and shows the list of styles, click the Minus (-) button.
If your style is not applied to any text you will see the following dialog:

Figure 122
The style is not currently used dialog
If, however, your style is applied to text you will see the following dialog, which states that This
style is currently used in the document. Deleting it may change the formatting of your
document.:

Figure 123
The style is currently used dialog
You should consider carefully how you want to proceed.

Resolve conflicts between styles

You can copy and paste text with its associated styles from one document to another.
Depending on what you have set in your General preferences of Nisus Writer Pro (as explained in
Set Defaults for the Application on page 371) you have a variety of choices. The default is set to
Always ask me what to do.
If a Style with the same name already exists in a new document, but it has different attributes,
Nisus Writer Pro presents a sheet that offers a series of choices.

114

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Figure 124
The Style conflict sheet
As explained in the dialog sheet that appears, the options have these effects

Use Existing Styles

The documents existing styles will be used for the pasted text.

Add Pasted Styles

The styles in the pasted text will be renamed (by appending a numeral in sequence) and
added to the styles of the document.

If you are secure in your decisions you can check:

Do not ask again for this document as long as it remains open.

If you are not sure what you want to do:

Click Cancel.

Maintain a Style Library

As explained in the beginning of this section on pages 102 and 103, Nisus Writer Pro displays all of
the styles that exist in a particular document in the Style Sheet view and in the Styles palette as
well as on the Character Style, Paragraph Style and Note Style submenus of the Format menu.
The Nisus New File comes with a variety of styles built in, as explained on 103. You can add as
many styles as you want to the Nisus New File, but that might make it hard to find just the few
styles you regularly use.
The solution is to create a number of files, each containing styles specific to one particular kind of
project and save them in the Style Library folder of the Document Manager. You can then import
any styles you want on an as-needed basis into your current document.
The Document Manager is described in depth on pages 61 - 78.

Creating Documents

115

Create a style library

Creating a style library is simple. There are a variety of methods.

Figure 125
The Document Manager showing the Style Library windows with nothing in it

Import styles from an existing file

Open a document that has styles you want to add to a Style library.
Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet.
Select the style(s) you want to add to the Style Library from the list in the Styles pane on the
left side of the document window.
4. Either

choose the menu command Gear > Save to Style Library at the bottom of the styles list in
Style Sheet view, or,

click Save to Style Library in the style previews area of the Style Sheet view.
1.
2.
3.

Figure 126
The Save to Style Library button in the define styles area of the Style Sheet view
5.

A sheet appears. Type the name you want to use in the Add styles to a new style collection
field.

116

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Figure 127
The Add styles to a new style collection sheet
6.

Click Save.

Figure 128
The Document Manager with a Style Collection and its associated styles

Note that even though only Heading D was selected in the Styles List and saved to the Style Library,
because it is based on Heading C which is based on Heading B, etc. all the based on styles are also
added to the library.

Save a file with styles you want to the Style Library folder of the Document Manager
You may already have created a document that has a collection of styles you want to add to your
Style Library.
1. Open a document that has styles you want to add to a style library.
2. Choose Style Library from the

the menu command File > Save in Document Manager to save the file in the Style Library;

the menu command File > Save As in Document Manager to save a copy of the file (with,
perhaps a new name) in the Style Library;

the menu command File > Move to Document Manager to actually move the file from its
current location into the Style Library;

the menu command File > Add to Document Manager to place an alias that points to the
file into the Style Library;

Creating Documents

117

Figure 129
Saving a file to the Style Library of the Document Manager
The file and its styles appear in the Style Library portion of the Document Manager.

118

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Figure 130
A document with styles saved to the Style Library of the Document Manager

Add styles to an existing Style Library file

Once you have created a Style Collection in your Style Library, you can add styles to it.
1. Open a document that has styles you want to add to a style library.
2. Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet.
3. Select the style(s) you want to add to the Style Library from the list in the Styles pane on the
left side of the document window.
4. Either

choose the menu command Gear > Save to Style Library at the bottom of the styles list in
Style Sheet view, or,

click Save to Style Library in the style previews area of the Style Sheet view.

Figure 131
Selecting a style to add to a Style Collection
5.
6.

A sheet appears. Click Add styles to an existing style collection.

If you have more than one collection be sure to select the appropriate collection.

Creating Documents

119

Figure 132
Selecting a Style Collection to which to add styles
7.

Click Save.

Figure 133
A Style Collection with added styles
Your new styles appear in the selected Style Collection.

Save specific styles from an existing file to a Style Collection

You may already have created a document that has a collection of styles you want to add to your
Style Library.
1. Open a document that has styles you want to add to a style library.
2. Either choose Save to Style Library

from the Gear menu at the bottom of the Styles palette, or,

from the menu command Insert > New Style.

A sheet appears from which you can Choose the styles to save to the style library.
3. Select the styles you want to add and click Save.

120

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Figure 134
Choosing styles to add to a Style Collection with the Styles palette open
4.

A variant of the sheet illustrated in Figure 120 on 111 appears.

Select the style collection to which you want to add the styles and click Save.

Figure 135
Selecting a particular Style Collection to which to add styles
Your styles are added to the collection and ready for you to use in additional documents as
illustrated in Figure 136.

Creating Documents

Figure 136
Multiple style collections with many styles

121

122

Formatting Documents Using Style Sheets

Formatting Documents

Use styles saved in a Style Library

Once you have your Style Library set up you can easily take styles from it to use in different
documents.
Suppose that you are busy working on a new document that has a minimum number of styles in it.
You come to a point where you realize that you need a style that you have saved to your style
library.

Import a style the attributes of which you know

Choose the menu command Insert > New Style > Import From Style Library.
A sheet appears that lists all the styles available in the various Style Collections in your Style
Library.
2. Scroll through the list and check the styles you want to import.
3. Click Import.
The style now appears in the Styles palette of the active document. You can select text and apply
the style.
1.

Import a style the attributes of which you do not know

As an alternate method, especially if you do not remember the various attributes of the different
styles, you can:
1. Choose the menu command Window > Document Manager (and select Style Library in the left
pane) or choose the menu command Gear > Show Style Library of the Styles palette, or choose
the menu command Insert > New Style > Show Style Library.
This opens the Document Manager with the Style Library selected along the left pane.
2. Select any of the Style Collections you have in your Style Library from the top pane on the right.
The associated styles appear (in their attributes) in the bottom pane.
3. Drag the style(s) you want from the the list at the bottom into any open window.
The style now appears in the Styles palette of the active document. You can select text and apply
the style.

Open a Style Collection to copy text with style for pasting in another document
If the styles name displayed in its own attributes does not give you enough of an idea of how the
style appears, you can also open a particular Style Collection directly and copy styled text from it.
1. Choose the style collection you want from the menu File > Open from Document Manager >
Style Library.
This opens the actual Nisus Writer Pro document with the style in it. If you have text displaying
that style in the document you can see how it appears as illustrated in Figure 129 on page 117.
2. Copy some text in the style(s) you want to have in the new document.
3. Paste the text into your new document.
The style now appears in the Styles palette of the active document. You can select text and apply
the style.

Once styles are copied from the Style Library and used in another document they lose all connection
to the original Style Library file. If you make changes to the style in the Style Library file, these
changes do not appear in any of the files to which the style has been imported or copied.

Setting Up a Documents Page

This portion of the manual describes how to set up your document, using the options in the
Preferences and the Page Setup dialog.

Setting Paper Size and Margins ............................................................... 124

Set the preferred paper size for all your documents ...................... 124
Reduce or enlarge the printed area ............................................... 126
Determine the orientation of the printed page .............................. 126
Use a custom paper size .............................................................. 127
Set the margins of the sections of your document ......................... 127
Mirror page placement ................................................................. 130
Set the Number of Columns ................................................................... 131
Set column line ............................................................................ 131
Set column and gutter width ........................................................ 131
Balance column text .................................................................... 132

124

Setting Paper Size and Margins

Setting Up a Documents Page

What Happens When You Choose New From the File Menu
A new Untitled document window appears each time you choose the menu command File > New.
Where did this come from?
We, the nice people at Nisus Software Inc. supply you with a versatile tool, the Nisus New File.
This file is variously called (in different applications) a stationery, template or master
document.
Apple uses the phrase Stationery pad in the Finder. You can turn any file into a Stationery
pad by clicking the appropriate check box in the window that appears when you choose the
menu command File > Get Info in the Finder. The stationery pad is like one of those little pads
your physician has for his or her prescriptions, or those pads of paper you get from your local
realtor with his or her photograph and contact information at the top of each page and room for
you to make your own to do list or shopping list or simply doodle to your heart's content.
So it is in Nisus Writer Pro. You can create any number of stationery documents. Each one
can have whatever name, text and/or formatting (even window shape and location) you want.
Every time you open that stationery document the information you've saved in it appears and
the file is called Untitled ready for you to add new content and save as a unique document.
The Nisus New File shipped with Nisus Writer Pro illustrated in Figure 15 on page 6 represents little
more than a blank sheet of paper with area for headers/footers and a number of embedded styles.
If you want to modify your Nisus New File, for example change the margins or add information
(such as the page number variables) you need to make these alterations in the actual file.

Setting Paper Size and Margins

While an increasing amount of documents are distributed electronically, without paper, and read on
screen, periodically you may need to commit your document to paper. The dimensions of your
paper are determined in the Page Setup dialog and the margins of the document within the limits of
that page are determined on a per section basis using the tools of Nisus Writer Pro.
Page Setup dialog you see is entirely dependent on the printer you have. The following explanation
uses an HP Photosmart C6100 as the default printer driver. The11
When the Page Setup dialog appears, the dialog displays information and choices specific to the
printer to which you have connected your Macintosh. Use this to customize specific printer options.

Set the preferred paper size for all your documents

In Mac OS X 10.4 (Tiger) and later you can set the paper size for all your documents.
1. Choose the menu command Apple > System Preferences.
2. Click Print & Fax (or Printers & Scanners) in the second row.
3. In the Printing portion of the panel, choose the format you want from the Default paper size
in Page Setup pop-up menu.

11

The Operating System offers US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, ROC 16K, JB5, B5, #10 Envelope, DL
Envelope, Choukei 3 Envelope, Tabloid, A3, Tabloid Extra, and, Super B. Be aware that your printer
may not have these available, even if you can choose them in Page Setup.

This printer is used as the example, not because it is better than any other, nor because it may, or may not be
comparable to the vast majority of printers, but because it happens to be available.

Creating Documents

125

Figure 137
The Printing portion of the Print & Fax System Preference pane of Yosemite

You can override these settings for any document you want in the Page Setup dialog in Nisus Writer
Pro.
As a convenience Nisus Writer Pro will at first pick up the paper size set in this preference. If you
want to customize the paper size of new documents, you should edit your Nisus New File as explained
in Edit your Nisus New File on page 377. In either case you set the paper size in the Page Setup
dialog illustrated in Figure 138.

Figure 138
The default page setup dialog

126

Setting Paper Size and Margins

Setting Up a Documents Page

Reduce or enlarge the printed area

The number you type in the Scale box of the Page Setup dialog scales only the text not the page.

Enter the value you want in the Scale text edit box and click OK.

Determine the orientation of the printed page

1.

Choose the menu File > Page Setup.

Click portrait for standard letter formatting.

Figure 139
Portrait orientation

Click landscape for greater width than height.

Figure 140
Landscape orientation
2.

Click OK.

Your document can have multiple orientations, one for every section. These will print (to PDF or
paper) appropriately.

Set different orientations for different portions of your document

You can rotate any particular page 90 for printing. However you will have to set that page apart as
a distant section in your Nisus Writer Pro document.
1. Put your insertion point above the page you want to have rotated and choose the menu
command Insert > Section Break > Next Page. (You may want to make sure it is an odd page
and not the back of the current page your choice.)
2. Put your insertion point in the new page and choose the menu command File > Page Setup.
3. Set the orientation the way you need it and click OK.
4. Put your insertion point at the end of the text that needs to print rotated and choose the menu
command Insert > Section Break > Next Page. (You may want to make sure it is an Odd page
and not the back of the current page your choice.)
5. Put your insertion point in the new page and choose the menu command File > Page Setup.
6. Set the orientation the way you need it and click OK.
If your document has multiple sections and you choose Page Setup a sheet appears illustrated in
Figure 141 asking for which section(s) you want to have the settings in Page Setup apply.

Figure 141
The Multiple Sections Page Setup sheet
Your choices are:

Selected Sections
This refers to as many or few sections in which your insertion point appears.

Creating Documents

127
All Sections
This refers to all the sections of your document whether or not your insertion point appears
there.
Cancel
This gives you a chance to return to your document and reflect on your options.

Use a custom paper size

Most paper in the United States comes in either legal or letter size. However you may want to
produce a book or some other item with a custom paper size.
1. Choose the menu command File > Page Setup.
2. Choose Manage Custom Sizes from the bottom of the Paper Size pop-up menu.
3. Follow the interface in the dialog and enter the values you want.
4. Click OK.

Figure 142
The Custom Paper Size dialog of the Page Setup dialog
Your custom paper size then appears at the bottom of the Paper Size pop-up menu.

Set the margins of the sections of your document

You can set the margins of your each separate section of your Nisus Writer Pro document in a
variety of ways visually, numerically or by stepping through pre-set increments.

All controls of your margins are set on a per-section basis. If you have many sections in your
document and want to change the margins of the entire document (or a number of sections), either
select the entire document and make the changes or select some text in those sections you want to
alter before making the changes.

The minimum allowed document margin is 2 points (about 0.03 inches). However, your printer may
not be able to print the document as illustrated in Figure 396 on page 366.

128

Setting Paper Size and Margins

Setting Up a Documents Page

Set the margins visually

Changing the margins of your document is as easy as dragging the line that appears around the
printed area to the location you want.
1. Choose the menu command View > Page View (if your document is not already displayed as a
page).
Paper size, margins and line wrap areas are meaningless in Draft View and Full Screen view.
2. Choose the menu command View > Page Guides > Show Page Guides (if you do not already
have the page guides displayed).
To prevent accidentally changing the margins by dragging the page guides choose the menu
command View > Page Guides > Lock Page Guides.
You can change the margins with the Page Guides turned off, but having them on is much
easier.

3.

4.

You can print these guides as explained in Print page guides and invisibles on page 367.
Place your pointer over the Page Guide representing the margin you wish to move.
Your pointer changes to a margin mover as illustrated in Nisus Writer Pro pointer variations
on page 10.
Click and drag your pointer (and the Page Guide with it) so that the margin is where you want
it.
tooltip appears to let you know where your margin is in relation to the edge of the paper. A

Figure 143
Setting the margins visually

Set the margins numerically

You can change the location of the margins by typing the precise locations you want in the Margins
palette of Nisus Writer Pro. Because you make these changes numerically and not visually, you do
not need to have your document displayed in Page View to proceed so you can see the result.
1. Open the Tooldrawer and select the Sections palette group from the icons at the top, or, choose
the menu command Window > Palettes > Margins.

Figure 144
The Margins palette showing the margins for the shipped Nisus New File

The terms Inner and Outer refer to the edge of the paper closest to the binding and to the outer
edge (if there would be a binding).

The terms Top and Bottom refer to the margins of the body of the document, that is the
distance from the actual top or bottom of the page, independent of the header or footer (if they
should appear).

The terms Header and Footer refer to the outermost edge at the top and bottom of your page
that your printer will support.

Creating Documents

129
Choose Show Header Heights and think of the footer as starting at the bottom of the main
body text area, and the height expanding downward from there. For the header, and this is
somewhat counterintuitive, the header starts at the top of the main body area, and expands
upwards from there. Put another way, the bottom of the header is its start point as far as
measuring its extent (height) goes.
Choose Show Header Insets and the same thing happens: the bottom of the header is locked to
the top of the main body area, and the top of the footer is locked to the bottom of the main body
area. It's merely the opposing edge whose inset you are choosing (e.g.: you control the inset for
the top edge of the header).
As an example, illustrated in Figure 145 below, this document has a header height of 0.41
inches and a footer height of 0.28 inches. However, its header inset is 0.15 inches and footer
inset is 0.22 inches.

Figure 145
The Margins palette showing the header and footer heights and insets for the current section of this document

2.
3.

Gutter refers to the inside margins or blank space between two facing pages of a magazine or
book. This space is allowed due to the area lost in binding.
Double-click your insertion point inside whichever field you want to change and enter the value
required.
Press @ to continue to the next field or 1 @ to reach the preceding field.

This sets the margins of all selected sections to the actual figures entered in the various fields.

Set the margins by stepping through pre-set increments

You can change the location of the margins by clicking the steppers in the Margins palette of
Nisus Writer Pro. Because you make these changes numerically, but by increments, you might
want to have your document displayed in Page View before you proceed so you can see the result.
1. Open the Tooldrawer and select the Sections palette group from the icons at the top, or, choose
the menu command Window > Palettes > Margins as explained in Set the margins
numerically on 128.
2. Click the stepper as illustrated in Figure 29 on page 20 until you arrive at your desired value.
Steppers increase and decrease in increments of the measurement Units you set in the View
portion of your New File preferences:

.10 cm
.10 inches
.10 mm
.10 pc
.10 pt

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value uniformly to
all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

130

Setting Paper Size and Margins

Setting Up a Documents Page

Mirror page placement

You may want to print your document for binding so that the text appears on both sides of a piece
of paper. In that case you would probably want your margins to mirror or reflect depending on
whether they are on the odd or even page.
1. Open the Tooldrawer and select the Sections palette group from the icons at the top, or, choose
the menu Window > Palettes > Section as explained in Set the margins numerically on 128.
2. Click Use Facing Pages.

Figure 146
The Section palette showing Page, then Section numbering options

Creating Documents

131

Set the Number of Columns

Nisus Writer Pro can display your text in columns. All of Nisus Writer Pro columns are what are
known as snaking columns. This means that the column text continues from the bottom of one
column to the top of the next (i.e. not independent).
Columns are set on a per-section basis. The Nisus New File is a one-column document. Each
section of a document can have only one column format. Therefore, if you want a document that
begins with one column then has two columns and at the end has one column once again, your
document must have three sections.

Columns only display in Page View, not Draft View, Full Screen, or Style Sheet view.

Figure 147
The Columns palette
1.
2.

Open the Columns palette.

Type the number of columns you want your document, or section, to have in the Columns field
at the top and press T, or, click the Minus (-) button or the Plus (+) button to decrease or
increase the number of columns.

Set column line

Nisus Writer Pro can draw a line between your columns.
1. Open the Columns palette.
2. Click Line Between Columns.

Set column and gutter width

Nisus Writer Pro allows you to set a different column width as well as gutter width between each
column.
1. Click the forward or backward button to decide which column you want to modify.
The number of the column appears at the top of the bottom half of the Columns palette. This is
not the column in which your insertion point appears.
2. Click the up-pointing or down-pointing triangle in the stepper to the right of Width or Gutter
to increase or decrease those settings accordingly.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

132

Set the Number of Columns

Setting Up a Documents Page

Figure 148
Column text balanced

The gutter controlled is that to the right of the column indicated in the palette. So, in the document
illustrated in Figure 148 above the .25 inch gutter refers to the space between the second and third
columns.

Balance column text

Nisus Writer Pro can balance the amount of text in the columns of the last page of your document
as illustrated in Figure 148 above.
1. Open the Columns palette.
2. Click Balance Column Text.

Use the Page Borders palette to put a line around the edge of your page
The Page Borders palette illustrated in Figure 149 below functions essentially the same as the
Paragraph Borders palette discussed in Draw a border around paragraphs beginning on page 293,
except that it has one fewer edge it can modify (between paragraphs, there is no control for between
pages) and controls the borders of the entire page. You can determine where the border should
appear. Its buttons are identified in Table 4.

)age Border )alette BAttons

Multiple Line Controls
Deselect All

Select All

Top Edge

Bottom Edge

Left Edge

Right Edge

Horizontal
Individual Line Controls
Vertical
Table 4
The Page Border palette buttons

Creating Documents

133

Figure 149
The Page Borders palette

Determine around which portion of the pages perimeter the border appears

Page Edge illustrated in Figure 150

Text Margin illustrated in Figure 151
Header Margin illustrated in Figure 152

Set the distance from the edge or margin the border should appear
In addition, you can set the distance the border appears from the edge or margin chosen by clicking
the stepper at the bottom of the palette or entering the number of points you want directly into the
text edit field available.

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
The borders only appear in Page View.

Figure 150
Page Border set at Page Edge

134

Figure 151
Page Border set at Text Margin

Figure 152
Page Border set at Header Margin

Set the Number of Columns

Setting Up a Documents Page

Headers and Footers

This portion of the manual contains step-by-step instructions that explain how to include headers
and footers in your document, and how to use automatic numbering to display page numbers in
your documents. These sections include

Creating Headers and Footers ................................................................. 135

Insert the same header and/or footer for all pages ......................... 136
Insert a header and/or a footer for even numbered pages ............. 137
Insert a header and/or footer for odd numbered pages .................. 138
Have your header and/or footer appear on the second and succeeding pages of your
document and no number appear on the first (First Page Special)138
Add a title page to a document and have the numbering appear and begin at 1 on the third
page ............................................................................................. 138
Insert a different header or footer for each section in the document138
Editing Headers and Footers ................................................................... 138
Display headers and footers as they appear in the document ....... 138
Edit headers or footers .................................................................. 138
Include images in a header or footer ............................................ 139
Move a header or footer higher or lower on the page ................... 139
Move a header or footer higher or lower in relation to the text of your document
..................................................................................................... 139
Deleting Headers and Footers ................................................................ 140
Hide headers and footers ............................................................. 140
Numbering Pages ................................................................................... 141
Insert the current page number (once) on a specific page ............. 141
Display the current page number on every page ..................................... 141
Restart page numbering for a new section .................................... 142
Restart page numbering at 1 ......................................................... 142
Display the current page number and the total number of pages in the section (or document)
on every page .............................................................................. 143
Using Automatic Numbers, Date & Time Variables and Document Properties in Headers and
Footers ......................................................................................... 143

Creating Headers and Footers

You can use all the tools available for developing a document to create headers and footers. To
return to your document from the Header or Footer click in the primary document area of the
window.
Especially useful in headers and footers are

cross-references to bookmarked headings

automatic numbers
date and time variables
document property variables

Headers and Footers only display in Page View, not Draft View, Full Screen or Style Sheet view.
Most of the following illustrations show the Tooldrawer open with the Sections group of palettes
displayed. The documentation refers to the possibilities relevant to the Sections group of palettes
beginning on page 127.

136

Creating Headers and Footers

Headers and Footers

Insert the same header and/or footer for all pages

1.

2.

Click your insertion point in the Click for Header/Footer areas of the Nisus Writer Pro window.
Whenever you click inside a header or footer area, Nisus Writer Pro automatically opens the
Header/Footer palette.
Enter the contents of the header or footer in the window or choose appropriate variables such
as page and/or section numbers from the menu Insert > Automatic Number.
These automatic numbers (as contrasted with automatically numbering lists) are explained in
Numbering Pages on page 141.

Figure 153
The Click for Header/Footer areas of the Nisus Writer Pro window

Figure 154
The Header/Footer palette appears when you click in the header or footer area

The Header/Footer palette resides in the Sections group of palettes by default. If your document
opens and the Tooldrawer is open, when you click in a header or footer the Sections palette becomes
active and the Header/Footer palette is visible at the bottom. However, if the Tooldrawer is closed,
when you click in a header or footer the Header/Footer palette appears floating.

Creating Documents

137

Figure 155
The Header/Footer palette
3.

Use the various tools available in the Tooldrawer to position the contents of the header or
footer.

Figure 156
The Header area of the Nisus Writer Pro window activated with the Tooldrawer open

Insert a header and/or a footer for even numbered pages

1.

2.
3.
4.

If you have not already prepared your document for reflected margins as explained in Mirror
page placement on page 130, open the Tooldrawer and select the Sections palette group from
the icons at the top, or, choose the menu command Window > Palettes > Headers and Footers
as explained in Set the margins numerically on 128.
Click Odd & Even Pages.
Checking Odd & Even Pages automatically turns on Use Facing Pages in the Section palette.
Click your insertion point in the Click for Header/Footer areas of an even numbered page of the
Nisus Writer Pro window.
Enter the contents of the header or footer in the window and/or choose appropriate variables
from the various submenus of the Insert menu.

138

Creating Headers and Footers

Headers and Footers

Insert a header and/or footer for odd numbered pages

1.

2.
3.
4.

If you have not already prepared your document for reflected margins as explained in Mirror
page placement on page 130, open the Tooldrawer and select the Sections palette group from
the icons at the top, or, choose the menu command Window > Palettes > Headers and Footers
as explained in Set the margins numerically on 128.
Click Odd & Even Pages.
Checking Odd & Even Pages automatically turns on Use Facing Pages in the Section palette.
Click your insertion point in the Click for Header/Footer areas of an odd numbered page of the
Nisus Writer Pro window.
Enter the contents of the header or footer in the window and/or choose appropriate variables
from the various submenus of the Insert menu.

Have your header and/or footer appear on the second and

succeeding pages of your document and no number appear on the
first (First Page Special)

Click Different First Page in the Header/Footer palette of the Sections group of palettes.

If you have multiple sections of your document and want to have a first page special for each section
you must first insert the section break and then click Different First Page for each section you want
to have appear in this manner. You can learn more about creating multiple sections in your document
in Creating Sections in Your Document on page 191.

Add a title page to a document and have the numbering appear and
begin at 1 on the third page
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Type your title on the first page of the document.

Choose the menu command Insert > Page Break immediately following your title.
Choose the menu command Insert > Section Break > Next Page immediately after the page
break following the title page.
Place your insertion point on the title page and, using the Header/Footer palette in the
Sections group of palettes, click (check, turn on): Hidden Headers and Hidden Footers.
Put your insertion point in the second section (the primary text area) and, similarly, using the
Header/Footer palette from the Sections group of palettes, click (un-check, turn off): Different
First Page, Hidden Headers and Hidden Footers.
Click your insertion point inside the Click for Header (or Click for Footer) area and choose
the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Page Number.
Using the Section [2] palette, be sure that Page is active in the Numbering portion, and click
(check, turn on) Restart At: and set the number in the text edit box there to 1.

Insert a different header or footer for each section in the document

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose either Next Page, Odd Page, or Even Page from the menu Insert > Section Break
Click your insertion point in the Click for Header/Footer areas of the Nisus Writer Pro window.
In the Header/Footer palette check Different Headers and/or Different Footers.
Type the contents of the header or footer in the window and/or choose appropriate variables
from the menu Insert > Automatic Number.

If inserting a section break causes a blank page to appear in your document and you have Show Page
Guides turned on, Nisus Writer Pro displays an Empty Page indicator on the blank page. Any
information you have in your headers and/or footers does not appear.

Editing Headers and Footers

Once you have added headers and/or footers to your document you may want to edit them. Some
people like to work in Draft View or Full Screen view which allows the text to flow across the full
width of the monitor without regard to margins, line wraps and page breaks. Without visible page
breaks, headers and footers (which are, by definition, aspects of pages) do not appear in Draft View
or Full Screen view.

Display headers and footers as they appear in the document

Choose the menu command View > Page View.

Edit headers or footers

Click in the header or footer area and make the changes you want.

Creating Documents

139

Find the header or footer for a particular section of your document

You can easily move your insertion point to the header or footer of the current section of your
document.

Choose Go to Header or Go to Footer from the View menu.

This method is especially useful if your document is in Draft View. Nisus Writer Pro will
automatically switch to Page View and activate the header or footer area.

Include images in a header or footer

1.
2.
3.
4.

Click in the header or footer.

Paste the image.
Set the alignment the way you want.
Click back into the document.

Move a header or footer higher or lower on the page

The headers and footers hug the top and bottom of the document window respectively. You can
move headers and footers in relation to their physical position on the page.
1. Click in the header or footer.
2. Drag the top margin line higher or lower on the page.
The pointer changes shape to indicate that it moves the margins and a tool tip appears
indicating the distance from the margin to the edge of the paper.

Figure 157
Moving the outer edge of the header margin
3.

Click back into the document.

Move a header or footer higher or lower in relation to the text of

your document
1. Click in the header or footer.
2. Drag the inside line of the header or footer higher or lower on the page.
The pointer changes shape to indicate that it moves the margins and a tool tip appears indicating
the distance from the margin to the edge of the paper.

140

Deleting Headers and Footers

Headers and Footers

Figure 158
Moving the inner edge of the footer margin
3.

Click back into the document.

Deleting Headers and Footers

You cannot completely delete a header or footer. You can, however, hide them.

Hide headers and footers

1.

2.

Click your insertion point inside the header or footer for the section of which you do not want
them (the headers and/or footers) to appear.
The Header/Footer palette opens.
Click Hidden Headers and/or Hidden Footers (depending on which you need).
This expands the text editing area to include the area that would have been used by the
headers and/or footers.

The headers and footers do not display when in Draft View or Full Screen view.
Choose Draft View or Full Screen from the View menu.

Creating Documents

141

Numbering Pages
When in Page View, Nisus Writer Pro keeps track of the page numbers of your documents and
displays them (the current out of the total) in the left edge of the Statusbar.

Figure 159
Page number display and its menu
Nisus Writer Pro also provides customizable tools for automatically numbering objects. The most
common form is page numbering. You will find these automatic numbering features in the menu
Insert > Automatic Number.
Headers and Footers are those parts of your document where you most often place information that
is likely to vary. These may include such items as:

the current page of your document

Section number
the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Section Number

Pages in Section
the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Pages in Section
Pages in section always displays the actual physical number of pages independent of what
value you set in the Increment text box of the Sections palette. If the document begins on
page one and you have the increment set to 3 and there are only 5 pages in the section, the
last page of the section could display page 13 of 5.

the current section of your document

the total number of pages in the current section (or the entire document if it is all one section).
Most documents contain variables such as page numbers. Heres where to find the variables used
in headers and footers:

Page number
the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Page Number

Most aspects of page numbering utilize headers and/or footers; see Headers and Footers beginning
on page 135.

Insert the current page number (once) on a specific page

Choose the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Page Number.
The current page number appears at your insertion point.

Display the current page number on every page

1.
2.

Click your insertion point in the area indicated Click for Header or Click for Footer as
illustrated in Figure 153 on page 136.
Choose the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Page Number.
You can click and insert the automatic page number in any of the header or footer areas and
the consecutive number will appear on all pages.

142

Numbering Pages

Headers and Footers

Figure 160
Aligning text inside the footer area

Restart page numbering for a new section

Place your insertion point at the end of the paragraph immediately before where you want the
new section to begin.
2. Choose either Next Page, Odd Page, Even Page or Same Page from the menu Insert > Section
Break.
3. Make sure your insertion point is in the new section.
4. Open the Section palette.
5. Click the Page tab in the Section palette.
6. Click Restart At and choose the numbering format you want from the Format pop-up menu in
the Section palette.
The various number formats available are detailed in Automatic number formats supported in
Nisus Writer Pro on page 52.
7. Enter the number you want to have as the first page number of this section in the Section
palette.
8. If you want the page numbers to increment at something other than 1, enter that value in the
Increment box in the Section palette.
9. Click your insertion point either in the header or the footer (depending on where you want the
number to appear).
10. Choose the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Page Number.
11. Format the number any way you like (align right, left or center, change the font, etc.).
1.

Restart page numbering at 1

The following instructions presume that you already have page number in your header or footer as
explained in Display the current page number on every page on page 141.
1. Put your insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph where you want the page numbering
to restart.
2. Choose the menu command Insert > Section Break > Next Page.

Figure 161
Pages from two sections spanning a section break
3.

Put your insertion point in the header or footer of the section you want to change (either on the
page before or after the section break).

Creating Documents
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.

143
Open the Section palette.
Click the Page tab in the Section palette.
Choose the numbering format you want from the Format pop-up menu in the Section palette.
The various number formats available are detailed in Automatic number formats supported in
Nisus Writer Pro on page 52.
Click Restart At and enter a 1.
If you want the page numbers to increment at something other than 1, enter that value in the
Increment box in the Section palette.

Be careful not to delete the Return character above the section break unless you want to remove the
section divider.

Display the current page number and the total number of pages in
the section (or document) on every page
In addition to the instructions immediately above
1. Put your insertion point in the header or footer of your document.
2. Choose the menu command Insert > Pages in Section.
In the illustrations here, the shaded numbers are the automatic numbers that Nisus Writer Pro
keeps track of. You can turn this shading on or off in Preferences. The Pages in Section number is
the actual number of pages in that section.

Determine the format of page numbers

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to display the section and/or page numbers of your document in a
wide variety of formats (these are maintained throughout the document , even though you may
have section breaks).
1. Open the Section palette.
2. Put your insertion point in the section of your document where you want to change the format
of the automatic number.
3. In the Numbering portion of the Section palette, choose the format you want from the Format
pop-up menu for either or both Section Number and/or Starting Page.
The various number formats available are detailed in Automatic number formats supported in
Nisus Writer Pro on page 52.

Using Automatic Numbers, Date & Time Variables and Document

Properties in Headers and Footers
The Nisus New File shipped with Nisus Writer Pro in Figure 15 on page 6 is simple. It includes a few
standard styles, margins at 1" on either side and a .5" at the top and bottom with room for a header
and footer of .75" each. It is little more than a blank piece of paper. When you write and print a
variety of multiple-page-documents, it may be difficult to know at a glance what page of which
document follows another page. Nisus Writer Pro can help you keep track of your documents and
when printed, easily identify which document and version you have in hand.
As explained in Edit your Nisus New File on page 377, you can customize the file that opens when
you choose the menu command File > New. The Nisus New File illustrated in Figure 163 displays
(in the footer) the files location as well as the date it was created, last saved and printed in addition
to (in the header) the files name and the current and total number of pages. Adding these
variables to your Nisus New File, Nisus Writer Pro can automatically keep the information current
and accurate as illustrated in Figure 164. However, because this information is continuously in flux
as you edit your document, such automatic content (page numbers, cross-references, etc.) is
updated only on demand and before printing, instead of live during editing. Stale automatic
content is displayed in the document with a rectangular (red) border that you can change in the
Appearance preferences as explained in Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents on
page 388.

Update stale automatic content

As you edit your document, your automatic content can become stale (outdated). All this
information is updated when you choose the menu command File > Print. However you can cause
it to update whenever you wish.

Update all stale content

Choose the menu command Tools > Automatic Content > Update All Stale Content.

144

Numbering Pages

Headers and Footers

Update only selected stale content

1. Select a range of text that has automatic content you wish to update.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Automatic Content > Update Selected Stale Content.
While all content is always updated before printing (or saving as a PDF), you can set the frequency
of some of these, on a per-document basis, in the Automatic Content Update Preferences dialog.

Set automatic content update policies

Choose the menu command Tools > Automatic Content > Automatic Content Update
Preferences.
The various options available are illustrated in Figure 162. They include:

List Items / Bullets

set to update immediately.

Footnote & Endnote References

set to update immediately.

Generated TOCs and Indexes

set to update when printing or saving to a PDF
The remainder:

Cross-References
Automatic Numbers
Information Stamps (such as those items inserted into your document using the Date and
Time and Document Property submenus of the Insert menu)
can be set to update either:

Immediately
Sooner
As Performance Allows
When Printing / Saving PDF

Figure 162
The Automatic Content Update Preferences dialog
The more often Nisus Writer Pro updates this information, the more time it spends on these tasks
instead of paying attention to your keystrokes and/or editing actions.

Determine the display and highlight color of stale content

While you can specify whether or not stale content displays a highlight, and set its color in the
Appearance preferences of Nisus Writer Pro explained on page 395, you can also make that choice
in the Automatic Content Update Policy dialog.

Check Highlight stale content on screen using color: to display the highlight.

Uncheck Highlight stale content on screen using color: to turn off the display highlight.

Click the color swatch to open the Colors panel and choose a different color.

Convert automatic content to static text

You may need to send a portion of a document to someone. The part of the document in question
has cross-references to elsewhere in the document you are not sending. It may also include other

Creating Documents

145

automatic content such as a variable date, or the number of total characters in the document. If
you simply copy that text out and paste it into an email message or another Nisus Writer Pro
document your automatic content will be replaced by:
[Referenced content is missing.]
You can prevent this happening by converting the automatic content to static content before
copying the text and then undoing the action immediately following the copy action.
1. Select the range of text you want to copy and send or put in a new document.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Automatic Content > Convert to Fixed Content.
3. Choose the menu Edit > Copy (or, if you want, Edit > Cut) to put your selected text on the
Clipboard.
4. Choose the menu command Edit > Undo.
Choosing Undo does not affect what is on the Clipboard, but it does restore the automatic
nature of the text in your document.
5. Switch to the window in which you wish to paste the text and choose the menu command Edit
> Paste.

Figure 163
Date & Time Variables and Document Properties in headers and footers

Figure 164
Date & Time Variables and Document Properties in headers and footers filled in

146

Numbering Pages

Figure 165
Stale cross-references and other automatic content displaying their borders

Headers and Footers

Graphics: Images and Shapes

This portion of the manual shows you how to work with graphic images and shapes. The sections
include

Working with Various Types of Graphics ................................................ 148

Importing Images ................................................................................... 150
Resize an Image ..................................................................................... 152
Crop an Image ....................................................................................... 153
Edit an Image ......................................................................................... 154
Deleting shapes and floating images ...................................................... 156
Working with Floating Images ................................................................ 156
Using the Shape Wrap palette ...................................................... 157
Make an inline image into a floating image ........................... 157
The Shape Anchor ........................................................... 158
The contextual menu for floating images ......................... 158
Align a floating image ..................................................... 160
Cause text to wrap around an image ............................... 161
Set the padding the text leaves around an image ............. 162
Cause text to appear on top of, or behind an image ........ 163
Cause images to appear around text; create a screen behind text
....................................................................................... 163
Make a floating image an inline image .................................. 165
Working with Shapes ............................................................................. 167
Inserting shapes ............................................................................ 167
Add a shape to your document .............................................. 167
Text and Callout boxes .......................................................... 168
About Text and Callout Boxes ......................................... 168
Add a text or callout box to your document .................... 169
Add a caption to your images ......................................... 172
Drawing lines and arrows ...................................................... 173
Geometric type shapes .......................................................... 175
Modifying shapes ......................................................................... 176
More tools on the Shapes palette ........................................... 176
Select floating shapes without selecting text .................... 177
Rearrange the front to back order of various floating shapes
....................................................................................... 179
Cause selected objects to function as a single unit .......... 180
Cause grouped objects to function as a individual items . 180
Working with multiple selected shapes ........................... 180
Using the Shape Fill palette ................................................... 180
Using the Shape Shadow palette ........................................... 181
Using the Shape Metrics palette ............................................ 182
Move selected shapes by precise, designated amounts .... 182
Resize selected shapes by precise, designated amounts .. 183

148

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Rotate selected shapes .................................................... 183
The Canvas ............................................................................ 184
Working with a Canvas ................................................... 184
Additional tools for working with shapes ...................................... 185
Set a preferred appearance for future drawn shapes ............... 185
Copy the appearance of one shape to apply to a different shape186
Duplicate shapes ................................................................... 187

Working with Various Types of Graphics

Nisus Writer Pro handles two kinds of graphic images: those that flow along with a line of text we
call inline. Other images, while attached to a particular paragraph, float independently are called
floating. In addition you can create various shapes, from lines and arrows to complex geometric
forms and (linked) text boxes that can float with your text.

Inline images
As explained in further detail in Importing Images on page 150, you can place an Inline image in
your text either by:

copying and pasting an existing image

choosing the menu command Insert > Image

dragging an image file into your document from the Finder.

selecting a floating image and

choosing (uncheck; turn off) the menu command Tools > Shapes > Wrap Text Around
Shape

choosing Inline with text from the Placement pop-up menu in the Shapes Wrap palette.
When an inline image first appears in your document, Nisus Writer Pro treats it as though it were a
character in your text.
As you work with inline images, keep these guidelines in mind

You can copy, paste, as well as drag and drop images like any other character in your text.

You can select more than one inline image at a time while pressing A or 1.
If you include an inline image in a sentence, the height of the line in which it appears will likely
increase. This means that a 12-point image inserted next to 9-point text increases the
sentences line height. The results of clipping an image to the line or not are illustrated in
Figure 166.

You can prevent an inline image from drawing over or behind surrounding text.
This would only be necessary if the image height happens to exceed your line height, or if you
wanted some special effect.
Select the inline image.
Choose Multiple from the Spacing portion of the Paragraph palette (or increase the line height).
Click (turn on) Clip drawing to line in the Shape Wrap palette.

1.
2.
3.

Nisus Writer Pro can use Find with Attribute Sensitive turned on and Replace with Replace
Attributes turned on to locate and replace inline images of the same width and height
respectively.

Creating Documents

149

Figure 166
An inline image with Clip drawing to line turned on, then off

Floating images
Any image you can display in your document you can cause to float so that it appears above,
behind, or alongside the text. You can also have the text wrap around the image in various ways.
Floating images are explained in more detail in Working with Floating Images beginning on page
156; briefly, you can cause an inline image to float by selecting it and:

choose (check; turn on) the menu command Tools > Shapes > Wrap Text Around Shape

choose Moves with Paragraph or Position on page of from the Placement pop-up menu in
the Shape Wrap palette.
Once the image is floating, rather than inline, a number of additional tools become available. You
can always convert a floating image into an inline image, but the effects applied to it when it was
floating will be removed.
As you work with floating images, keep these guidelines in mind

You can copy, paste, as well as drag and drop floating images like any other object in your text.
Nisus Writer Pro cannot use Find and Replace tools to locate and replace floating images,
though it can find and replace text in floating text boxes.
You can select numerous floating images and modify them all at once.

Shapes
Nisus Writer Pro also supports the ability to create different shapes. These range from various lines
and arrows, to brackets and braces as well as assorted geometric forms that you can modify. In
addition you can create a variety of text and callout boxes and fill them with text that links from
one to the next.
The tools for working with shapes are explained in Working with Shapes beginning on page 167;
briefly, you can place a shape in your document by any of the following methods (in this context, a
text box is a shape):

choose any of the shapes or text boxes available from the menu Tools > Insert Shape

choose any shape available from the Shape button or the Text Box button on the Toolbar

choose any shape available from the three Draw Floating Shape buttons at the top of the
Shapes palette.
Once you have a shape in your document, a number of additional tools become available. You can
always convert a shape from a floating image into an inline image, but some of the effects applied to
it when it was floating may be removed.
As you work with floating images, keep these guidelines in mind:

When you insert a shape

you enter a special mode and cannot enter text in the normal text area of your document;
a banner appears across the top of your document instructing you to Click and drag to
draw the new shape.

150

Graphics: Images and Shapes

a banner appears across the bottom of your document instructing you to Press the
escape key (ESC) to cancel.
Undoing and redoing are disabled.

Nisus Writer Pro can use Find and Replace tools to locate and replace text in floating text and
callout boxes but not the shapes themselves.

You can select numerous shapes at any one time and apply the same attributes to them all at
once.

Importing Images
You can import any normal image format including PDF, EPS, JPEG, PNG and PICT images directly
into Nisus Writer Pro.

Mac PICT images are not supported by Windows applications. Microsoft Word for Mac will actually
show PICT images inserted into Nisus Writer Pro documents, but Word on the PC will not. Switching
to any widely supported image file format (eg: JPEG, PNG, etc) will allow Word (on the PC or Mac) to
show images inserted into Nisus Writer Pro documents.

You can simply drag an image in from the Desktop.

Or
1. Choose the menu command Insert > Image.
2. Locate the image file you want.
3. Check Link to File in the variant of the Open dialog that appears as illustrated in Figure 167 to
link inserted image to original file path.
These linked images update automatically if the file changes on disk. Double-clicking a linked
image opens the original file in an external application. Mac OS X opens the image. The
application it uses is dependent on the type of image file it is, and the file type associations you
may have set in the Finder (e.g.: Open With settings).

Figure 167
The Image variant of the Open dialog with Link to File checked
4.

Check Include copy of Image in document to store image data itself in the Nisus Writer Pro
file which is used as a backup.
Checking Include copy of image in document creates a larger Nisus Writer Pro file.
If you uncheckInclude copy of image in document, the Nisus Writer Pro rtf file stores only
the original images file path. That means no image will be displayed if:

5.

the original image file has been deleted, moved, or otherwise goes missing
you send the document to another machine where the path is not valid.
Click Open.

You can link an inserted image to its original file path. These linked images update automatically if
the file changes on disk. Double-clicking a linked image opens the original file in an external
application. See also Using LinkBack on page 439 to learn about editing your images in their
original applications.

[Bookmark "Creating Documents" is missing.]

151

LinkBack (normally) embeds information inside an image that lets you edit the original
image. This depends on your having the originating application, not necessarily a file on
disk somewhere.
On the other hand, Link to File embeds a file path in the inserted image (or just a file path
and no image data). This depends on your keeping the original image on disk.

Import an image using the Clipboard

1.
2.

Select the image in another application, and choose the menu command Edit > Copy.
Open your Nisus Writer Pro document and choose the menu command Edit > Paste.

152

Edit an Image

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Resize an Image
1.

Select the image by clicking on it.

When you have Show Invisibles turned on (as explained on 388), your images display a perimeter box
the color of your invisibles. When you select the image, the box disappears and is replaced by the
selection lines with handles inside the corners. If you make the image a floating image, the handles
appear outside the corners. These variations are illustrated in Figure 168.

Figure 168
An image, inline, not selected with Bounding Box shown; then selected; then floating & selected with Show Invisibles turned
on
2.
3.

Drag any of the four blue square handles that appear (on the corners) so that the image
acquires the size and shape you want.
Press 1 as you drag one of the corners to force the image to retain its aspect ratio.

Figure 169
The image in Figure 168 resized (smaller) with aspect ratio maintained; then (larger) without aspect ratio maintained

When you select a resized image and 6 Click, or Right-Click a contextual menu appears with the
commands: Restore Original Size, Restore Original Proportions and Add Caption To Image.

You can also use the Shape Metrics palette to adjust the width and height of selected inline
images. This is explained in detail beginning on page 182.

[Bookmark "Creating Documents" is missing.]

153

Crop an Image
1.
2.

Select the image by clicking on it.

Drag any of the four perimeter lines connecting the corner resize handles that appear so that
the image acquires the size and shape you want.

Figure 170
The resized image in Figure 169 cropped from two vertical sides

When you select a cropped image and 6 Click, or Right-Click a contextual menu appears with the
commands: Restore Original Size, Remove Cropping, (if it is an inline image) Wrap Text Around
Image, and Add Caption To Image.

154

Edit an Image

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Edit an Image
As mentioned in Importing Images above, if you check Link to File when you insert an image,
Nisus Writer Pro can display an updated version of the image whenever it has been updated and
saved to disk.
1. Double-click the image in your Nisus Writer Pro document as illustrated in Figure 171.
2. Edit your image in the application that opens it as illustrated in Figure 172.
3. Return to your Nisus Writer Pro document and you will see the image updated in the file as
illustrated in Figure 173.
In addition, if you use a LinkBack enabled graphics application to create your image, you can
double-click that image in your Nisus Writer Pro document and the image will open for editing in
the originating application, as explained in Using LinkBack on page 439.

Figure 171
A Linked to File image in a Nisus Writer Pro document

Creating Documents

155

Figure 172
Editing a Linked to file image in Preview.app

Figure 173
The updated Linked to file image in the Nisus Writer Pro document

Adjust the opacity of an image

You can adjust the opacity of any inline or floating image in Nisus Writer Pro.
1. Select the image or images you want to adjust.
2. In the Shape Fill palette, drag the Opacity slider or enter the percentage of opacity you want as
explained on page 180.

156

Working with Floating Images

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Working with Floating Images

You can change any inline image so that it floats with the text. You can make text wrap around
floating images, or you can make text appear in front of or behind them. You can fix a floating
image to stay on a particular place on a specific page, or you can make them move with a
paragraph.

Floating images only appear when in Page View and only in the main portion of your documents text:
not in footnotes, endnotes, headers, footers, nor comments. If your document is set to Draft View and
you cause an inline image to float, Nisus Writer Pro switches to Page View.

Deleting shapes and floating images

You can select one or more shapes or floating images and delete them using the delete key.
However, it is possible to inadvertently delete shapes if you remove the text to which they are
attached. Displaying the Shape Anchor as explained in The Shape Anchor on page 158 can help
you be more aware of where your shape is attached.

Shapes are attached to the entire paragraph, not the first character, nor the newline
character at the end.

You must delete the entire paragraph in order to delete the floating image.

If you delete only the newline character that separates one paragraph with floating images
from the one above it, the images are not deleted, their anchors are merely reassigned to
the new paragraph.
If you happen to delete a paragraph that has a floating shape anchored to it the alert illustrated in
Figure 174 appears, asking:
Are you sure you want to delete the anchored shapes? One or more shapes are anchored to the
paragraphs of text that you are about to delete. Deleting those paragraphs will also delete the
associated shapes.
You can check the Do not show this message again box if you are secure in your decision.

You can press the Delete key when a floating shape is selected to remove it, without deleting the
anchoring paragraph.

Figure 174
Deleting a paragraph with an anchored shape

Creating Documents

157

Using the Shape Wrap palette

You can make any inline image into a floating image. When you do this, an entire range of
additional tools become available.

Make an inline image into a floating image

1.

Click the image to select it.

If the Tooldrawer is open, the drawing tools palette group appears.

Figure 175
The Shape Wrap palette default options when set to Position on page of
Choose either Moves with paragraph or Position on page of . from the Placement pop-up
menu in the Shape Wrap palette.
Choosing Position on page of enables all the options for image alignment and text wrap.
However, choosing Moves with paragraph, because the image retains its vertical position relative
to a particular paragraph of text, does not enable the vertical alignment controls.
2.

As an alternative, you can 6 Click, or Right-Click an inline image and a contextual menu appears
with the commands Wrap Text Around Image and Add Caption To Image. Each of these commands
cause the image to float. Adding captions to images is discussed further on page 172. You can also
select an inline image and choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Wrap Text Around Shape.

Figure 176
The contextual menu with an un-resized or cropped inline image selected

158

Working with Floating Images

Graphics: Images and Shapes

The Shape Anchor

Figure 177
A selected floating image selected showing its anchor
When you select a floating image its anchor appears in the upper left corner, overlaying the first
character(s) of the paragraph to which it is attached, as illustrated in Figure 177.
If the floating image is attached to a right to left paragraph the anchor appears in a corresponding
position in the upper right corner.
If you have checked (turned on) Show Invisibles, a similar anchor, the color of your invisibles,
appears. You can see it at the end of the paragraph (before the paragraph symbol ) to which the
floating image is attached. This anchor indicates that the paragraph has a floating image attached,
even if the floating image is not selected and the Shape Anchor does not show. The two different
anchor symbols are illustrated in Figure 178.

Figure 178
The Shape Anchor: on the left, at the beginning of the paragraph and, to its right, at the end

For images/shapes set to move with paragraph, if the anchored paragraph changes its position,
the shape moves by the same vertical distance. The shape always keeps the same relative
distance from its anchor.
For images/shapes set to be fixed on the page, the shape always appears on the same page as
the anchored paragraph. If the anchored paragraph changes pages, so does the shape.

You can drag the anchor to any other location in the same document part thereby moving the image
itself. However, you cannot drag the anchor from one document part to another, for example from the
main body of the document into the header/footer or footnotes.
You can choose to display the anchor and a dashed line from the anchor to the upper left corner of
the image or not, depending on how you set your Appearance preference for Invisibles & Guides the
Shape anchor, as explained on 397. When you select more than one floating shape in your
document, only a single selected shape shows its Shape Anchor.

The contextual menu for floating images

When you select a floating image and 6 Click, or Right-Click, a contextual menu appears with
quick access to a number of additional commands

Send to Back and Bring to Front alter the sequence of images placing one in front or behind
another.

You can Copy Shape Appearance. This copies the images border stroke, thickness, color, etc.,
those attributes that are controlled by the Shape Stroke and Shape Shadow palettes.
Once you have copied the shapes appearance, you can apply those attributes to any other
shape you like by choosing Paste Shape Appearance.
You can also set that shapes appearance as the default for future shapes you create by
choosing Use Selected Shape Appearance As Default.

Creating Documents

159

If you check (turn on) Adjust Anchor When Shape Repositioned, the shapes anchor will be
automatically moved whenever you move the shape to a different paragraph. This is illustrated
and it affect on how you work with your document in Select floating shapes without selecting
text on page 177.

If you have resized or reshaped the image you can also choose to Restore Original Size and
Restore Original Proportions respectively.
You can add descriptive text to your image by choosing Add Caption To Image. This places the
image at the top of a floating text box with some text Image Caption selected, ready for you to
add your text.
Additional commands may appear at the bottom of the menu depending on what services and
additional software applications you have available.

Figure 179
The contextual menu with a resized but not cropped floating image selected

160

Working with Floating Images

Graphics: Images and Shapes

The Shape Bounding Box

Every shape and image, regardless of whether or not it is a rectangle, has a rectangular bounding
box that draws around the furthest extent of the graphics image. When the image is selected,
Nisus Writer Pro displays it as a dotted rectangle. In addition, when not selected, you can choose to
display the Shape bounding box (and set its color) depending on how you set your Appearance
preference for Invisibles & Guides as explained on page 397. This box coincides perfectly with the
image-selected box and is the invisible indicator that there is an image.

Figure 180
The Shape Bounding Box with shapes selected and text wrapped around the bounding box, wherever it is transparent, then
text behind shape

Align a floating image

You can nudge a selected floating image one pixel at a time, using the arrow keys on the keyboard,
so that it appears where you want it. You can also align floating images horizontally and vertically.
While you can set the basic alignment of an image using the buttons of the Shape Wrap palette, as
soon as you adjust the image by nudging it using the arrow keys or drag it using the mouse or
trackpad, the Alignment buttons indicate that it is no longer considered set as far as the
Alignment buttons are concerned.
1. Select the image you want to align.
2. Click the Alignment option that represents what you want from the buttons in the Shape Wrap
palette as explained in Table 5 below.

Creating Documents

161

Floating Image Alignment (ptions

Horizontal
left

Image Alignment

center

right

Vertical
(available only
with Position on
page of )

top

center

bottom

Table 5
Floating image alignment options
You can mix the options available so that an image is in the bottom right corner as illustrated
in Figure 177 on page 158.
The alignment buttons on the Shape Wrap pallet correspond to the commands Align Left, Align
Center, Align Right; Align Top, Align Middle, the menu Tools > Shape Metrics > Align Bottom.

Cause text to wrap around an image

You can have text wrap around a floating image.
1. Select the image around which you want the text to wrap.
2. Click the Text wrap option that represents what you want from the buttons in the Shape Wrap
palette as explained in Table 6.

Floating Image TeCt Wrap (ptions

Text Wraps
Around
Bounding
Rectangle of
the Image

Text Placement
Not Affected
by Shape

Text Never
Appears Beside
the Image

Text Never
Appears to Left
of the Image

Text Never
Appears to
Right of the
Image

Text Wraps
Tight around
the Shape
Wherever it Is
Transparent

Table 6
Floating image text wrap options
You can mix the alignment and wrap options available so that an image which is in the bottom
right corner can have its wrapped text hug the space it holds as illustrated in Figure 177 on
page 158.
The floating image text wrap buttons on the Shape Wrap pallet correspond to the commands
Wrap Box, Text Behind Shape (text placement not affected by shape, as illustrated in Figure
183), Shape Behind Text (text placement not affected by shape, as illustrated in Figure 183), No
Text on Either Side, No Text on Left Side, No Text on Right Side, the menu Tools > Shape
Metrics > Wrap Tight.

The center star in Figure 180 on page 160 has text wrap set to inside whatever is transparent.
Nonetheless, the base of the star and its inside do not have text.
Nisus Writer Pro does not allow placing text inside the shape itself. Text can only flow in from the
left or right of the shape bounds, but it cant jump over any part of the shape to appear in the
middle of the shape.
The

162

Working with Floating Images

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Bounding Box of lines

As with all other shapes, a line has a bounding box as explained in The Shape Bounding Box
on page 160. However, the bounding box does not draw if you set the text to wrap around the
actual shape of the image as illustrated in Figure 181. The options, described in Cause text to
wrap around an image on page 161, illustrated here are:

Figure 181
The bounding box drawn around lines with various text wrap options

First row:

Text Placement Not Affected by Shape, or Text Behind Shape and Shape Behind Text
Text Wraps Around the Actual Shape of the Image tight, or Wrap Tight

Second row:

Text Wraps Around Bounding Rectangle of the Image, or Wrap Box

Text Never Appears Beside the Image, or No Text on Either Side

Third row:

Text Never Appears to Left of the Image, or No Text on Left Side

Text Never Appears to Right of the Image, or

Set the padding the text leaves around an image

If you have text wrap around a floating image you can set both the horizontal and vertical amount
of space (padding) that appears between the image and the text. In addition, depending on the text
wrap option you use, you can have the padding affect the bounding rectangle, or appear to hug the
actual shape of the image as illustrated in Figure 182.
1. In the Padding portion of the Shape Wrap palette, click the steppers (or enter a particular
value) in the Horizontal and/or Vertical fields.
You can set these to negative values causing the text to appear on top of the image.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
2. In the Text wrap portion of the Shape Wrap palette click:

the upper left button, or choose Wrap Box (text wraps around bounding rectangle of the
image) from the menu Tools > Shapes > Text Wrapping.

the bottom right button, or choose Wrap Tight (text wraps around the actual shape of the
image) from the menu Tools > Shapes > Text Wrapping.

Creating Documents

163

Figure 182
Star shape settings from left to right: box wrap and no padding, box wrap and 22 pts padding, wrap tight and no padding,
wrap tight and 22 pts padding

Cause text to appear on top of, or behind an image

If you choose to have the text placement not affected by the floating image, you can have the text
display on top of (over) or behind (hidden) by the image.

Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Text Wrapping > Text Behind Shape to cause
the text to hide behind the image.

Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Text Wrapping > Shape Behind Text to cause
the text to appear on top of the image.
Or

Use the controls of the Shape Wrap palette as illustrated in Figure 183.

Figure 183
Floating image drawn behind and in front of text

Cause images to appear around text; create a screen behind text

Every now and then you may need a bit of text to stand out from the rest. One way is to use a
block-quote and create a screen that appears behind the text.

Nisus Writer Pro has additional tools to create a screen. You can learn more about these in Use
Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading to set off your text and create screens on page 293.

164

Working with Floating Images

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Visit Florence!
(Oregon)

Figure 184
A photographic image screen behind text
You can place an image behind your text to help portions of it stand out as illustrated in Figure
185.

Every now and then you may need a

bit of text to stand out from the rest.
One way is to use a block-quote
and create a screen that appears
behind the text.
Figure 185
A plain colored screen behind text
1.

2.

Enter the text with the attributes you want (especially the ruler (line wrap) area).
Make sure you have left room around the text for the image. You may need to have a blank
paragraph above the text to which to attach the image.
Paste the image into the paragraph above the text.
Use the settings as illustrated in Figure 186 to place the image correctly.

Creating Documents

165

Figure 186
The Shape Wrap palette with settings for a screen behind text
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Choose Moves with paragraph from the pop-up menu inside the Shape Wrap palette that
appears.
In the Alignment portion of the Shape Wrap palette click the horizontal center button.
In the Text wrap portion of the Shape Wrap palette click the behind the text button.
Check (turn on) Draw behind text.
You may need to select and nudge the image to the precise location you need with the arrow
keys.
If you use a image tool that supports LinkBack, as explained on page 439, you can edit the
image and not have to worry about pasting in a new one.

As an alternative you can use a Text Box and group it with an image then set the new image to be
Inline with text as illustrated in Figure 184 above. You can learn more about text boxes beginning
on page 168.

Make a floating image an inline image

Just as an inline image can be made to float, a floating image can be made to flow as a character in
your text.
1. Select the floating image or images you want to make inline.
2. Choose:

Inline with text from the Placement pop-up menu in the Shape Wrap palette or

(uncheck) the menu command Tools > Shapes > Text Wrap Around Shape.

An alert appears illustrated in Figure 187 warning that Placing the selected content inline will change
the nature of that content in a way that cannot be restored by again adjusting the placement (though
the placement change is undoable in the normal way). All shapes will lose their individual identities,
properties, and placements; only a single fixed image will remain. You can choose not to see a similar
message if you change other shapes by checking the box at the bottom of the alert.

166

Working with Floating Images

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Figure 187
The move shape from floating to inline alert
The images will appear in the paragraphs to which they were anchored as illustrated in Figure
188.

Figure 188
The floating image of Figure 177 on page 158 changed from floating to inline

Creating Documents

167

Working with Shapes

You can create a wide variety of shapes to highlight and/or illustrate aspects of your document.

Inserting shapes
You can place a shape in your document by any of the following methods (in this context, a text
box is a shape).

Add a shape to your document

Nisus Writer Pro supports three kinds of shapes. These are illustrated in the various Shapes menus
themselves, as is seen in Figure 192 on page 169. They are:

Text and Callout Boxes

Lines and Arrows
Geometrical forms and Brackets

Figure 189
The Text Box and Shape buttons on the Toolbar

Using the Shapes palette

Figure 190
The Shapes palette

Nisus Writer Pro also lets you insert a Canvas, a fourth kind of shape, which enables you to work on
a number of shapes together.
You can insert a shape in your document by any of the following methods:

choose any of the shapes or text boxes available from the menu Tools > Insert Shape

choose any shape available from the Shape button or the Text Box button on the Toolbar as
illustrated in Figure 189.

choose any shape available from the three Draw floating shape buttons at the top of the
Shapes palette as illustrated in Figure 190. The Tools buttons are explained in detail in the
section Modifying shapes beginning on page 176.

If you are in any view other than Page View when you insert a shape, Nisus Writer Pro automatically
switches to Page View. Floating images only appear when in Page View and only in the main portion of
your documents text: not in footnotes, endnotes, headers, footers, nor comments.
While there are default appearances for shapes (stored by shape type: Text or Callout Box, Lines,
geometric type shapes), you can change them using the available menus. If you select an existing
shape before drawing a new one, the new shape will use the selected existing shape as a template.
As you work with shapes, keep these guidelines in mind:

When you insert a shape

168

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

you enter a special mode and cannot enter text in the normal text area of your document
a banner appears across the top of your document instructing you to Click and drag to
draw the new shape.
a banner appears across the bottom of your document instructing you to Press the
escape key (ESC) to cancel.
Undoing and redoing are disabled.
Once you draw the new shape it is selected in your document and ready for you to
manipulate.

Text and Callout boxes

Use text and callout boxes to add free-floating blocks of text to your document.

About Text and Callout Boxes

Almost anything you can do in normal Nisus Writer Pro text you can do in a Text or Callout Box.

type, copy, paste and drag & drop text

undo and redo
modify any character based attributes
modify ruler and other paragraph attributes
apply any styles associated with the document
use the list tools of Nisus Writer Pro
use the table tools of Nisus Writer Pro
check your spelling
use the Nisus Writer Pro QuickFix features
add hyperlinks, bookmarks and cross-references and other automatically updating content
If you bookmark text in a Text or Callout Box and add a cross-reference to that elsewhere,
location-type cross-references will not display correctly.
paste inline images
add comments
track changes
There are a few things you cannot do.

add footnotes/endnotes
mark text for an index or table of contents
nest Text or Callout Boxes
Every Text and Callout Box has a Link button

The Link button, the smaller red rectangle in Figure 191, is a small blue arrow that
appears just outside and to the right of the box. Its use is explained in step b on page 170.

If the text inside the box is too large to fit inside the currently set size of the box, an
Expand button appears in light gray in the lower left corner of the box as illustrated the
larger red rectangle in Figure 191. Its use is explained in step 3 on page 170.

Figure 191
The ruler indents of a text box showing Expand and Link buttons

Creating Documents

169

Add a text or callout box to your document

1.

Choose either:

Text Box
Callout
Callout, Accent Edge
Callout, Speech Box
Callout, Rounded Speech Box
from the menu Tools > Insert Shape or the Text Box button on the Toolbar, or the Text Box
button in the Draw floating shape portion of the Shapes palette.

Figure 192
The Text Box menu as it appears from the Text Box button on the Shapes palette
The box appears ready for you to enter text as illustrated in Figure 192. Three of the five
available styles of Text and Callout Boxes are illustrated in Figure 193.

Figure 193
A Text Box ready for text
2.

Type or paste the text you want into the Text or Callout Box.
When you create a Text or Callout Box, Nisus Writer Pro creates a new style for your document
called Shape Text based on the paragraph and character attributes of the Normal style of your
document. If you have already created a Shape Text style as part of your Nisus New File, Nisus
Writer Pro uses the attributes of that style. You can modify both the ruler and character
attributes as illustrated in Figure 191 on page 168 and Figure 196 on page 171.

170

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Figure 194
Text and Callout Boxes
3.

You have two alternatives:

Click the Expand button to enlarge the Text or Callout Box.
or:
a. Create a new Text or Callout Box.
b. Click the Link button in the first box.
Nisus Writer Pro displays a banner across the top of the document as illustrated in Figure
195: Click the destination text box where text should flow. In addition a banner across
the bottom of the document appears that states: Press the escape key (ESC) to cancel.

Undoing and redoing are disabled.

Figure 195
Creating a linked Text Box
c.

Click the Text or Callout Box to which you want the text to flow as illustrated in Figure
195.
You can have text flow from one to a second and third or more Text or Callout Boxes. If you
have more than one available Text or Callout Box you can choose from any available box.
If the Text or Callout Box to which you are linking already has some text in it, the overflow of
the linked Text or Callout Box appears ahead of whatever text was there.

Creating Documents

171

Figure 196
Linked text boxes with altered ruler and font
When you link the Text or Callout Boxes a flow arrow appears from the first Text or
Callout Box to each succeeding box containing linked text when any of text boxes are
selected as illustrated in Figure 196. The arrows appear in the color set for the Invisibles
that display when you choose the menu command View > Show Invisibles. You can set
this color in the Appearance preferences as explained on page 388.

Link multiple text or callout boxes

You may have a number of Text or Callout Boxes in your document and want to change the way the
text flows from one to another.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Enter Text Box Linking Mode.
A message displays: Click the source text box.
When you hover your pointer over one of the text boxes it is identified as the source by
displaying a 1.
If you click outside of any text box, Nisus Writer Pro returns to normal text editing mode.

2. Choose your box.

Message displays: Click the destination text box where text should flow.

3.

When you hover your pointer over any of the remaining text boxes they are each identified as
the destination by displaying a 2.
Choose your box.
The flow arrow illustrated in Figure 195 appears, connecting the two boxes and the overflow
text hidden in the first box appears in the second. The first box and all its text is highlighted.
Text Box Linking Mode is ended.
If there is more text still hidden, you need to enter text box linking mode once again and
repeat the procedure.
When you do repeat the process, what had been box 1 is no longer available to choose and
what had been box 2 is now box 1.

Using floating, linked Text or Callout Boxes you can create very complex documents as illustrated
in Figure 197.

172

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Figure 197
Using linked Text Boxes to create a document with a form of marginalia

Add a caption to your images

Nisus Writer Pro has always had the ability to add automatically incrementing numbered captions
to figures consisting of inline images. This procedure is explained in Use list styles to automatically
number figures, tables, etc. on page 55. You can add captions to floating images as well.
1. Select an inline image to which you want to add a caption.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Add Caption to Image.
Adding a caption in this manner to an inline image causes it to float.

3.

The image is placed, centered, at the top of a Text Box with the text: Image Caption beneath
it, selected, ready for you to add your description as illustrated in Figure 197.
Type the description of your image.
The text box expands, horizontally, as needed.
Anything you can do with other text boxes, explained in About Text and Callout Boxes on
page 168, you can also do with a caption text box.
While you cannot add a caption to a floating shape, you can convert it to an inline image and
then add a caption to that,. causing it to float once again.

Creating Documents

173

Figure 198
The inline image of Figure 166 on page 149 with a caption added

Drawing lines and arrows

You can draw a variety of lines and/or arrows in your document.
1. Choose any one of the arrows available from the arrows and lines portion of the menu Tools >
Insert Shape illustrated in Figure 199.

Figure 199
The Lines menu as it appears from the Lines button on the Shapes palette
2.

Click and drag where you want the line or arrow to appear.
a. Press 1 as you draw to constrain the line or arrow to a 45 angle.
b. For a single-headed arrow, draw from any location to where you want the arrow to point.

Using the Shape Stroke palette

In the Shape Stroke palette illustrated in Figure 200 you can determine:

the kind of line from the pop-up menu at the top. These lines are the same lines illustrated in
Figure 246 on page 216,
Some line strokes cannot be used with certain shapes. For example multiple line strokes
cannot be used around circles though dashed strokes can.
the lines color using by clicking the Color swatch to open the Colors panel,
the lines Thickness and Opacity,
the shape of the end-point of the line.
At the bottom of the palette two pop-up menus offer a variety of arrowheads from which you
can choose for either end. This is illustrated in Figure 201 which has a point on the upper end

174

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

and a ball on the lower. While you might have considered editing your image in Preview.app as
illustrated in Figure 172 on page 155, Nisus Writer Pro likely has the tools you need.

Figure 200
The Shape Stroke palette

Make a line into an arrow, or an arrow into a line

You can transform any line into a single or double-headed arrow (or the reverse).
Choose from the various arrowheads available at the bottom of the Shape Stroke palette.

Figure 201
Creating a colorful double-headed arrow using the Shape Stroke palette

A couple of issues to be aware of:

Arrows and Lines do not have fill.

Arrows and Lines do not curve.
You can use the Rotate tools of the Shape Metrics palette as well as the menu commands Tools
> Shape Metrics > Rotate Counterclockwise or Rotate Clockwise to aim your arrows in any
direction.
All of the controls of the Shape Stroke palette are also available (with limited options) on the
Shape Stroke submenus of the Tools menu. These are listed on page 479.
One of the values of having all these commands on the menus as well as the palette is that
you can assign keyboard shortcuts to them as explained in Assign Menu Keys to Menu
Commands on page 400, as well as use the commands in automating tasks using macros as
explained in Macros, Skimming the Surface on page 415.

Block Arrows
While the block arrows are, indeed, arrows, they function more as the other geometrical shapes
than they do as lines and line arrows. You can learn more about these features in the following
section Geometric type shapes.

Creating Documents

175

Geometric type shapes

Nisus Writer Pro can create a variety of geometrical and quasi geometrical shapes in your
document.

Enter a shape in your document

You create a shape in your document using essentially the same method as explained for entering a
Text or Callout Box or a line or arrow.

Figure 202
The Shapes menu as it appears from the Shapes button on the Shapes palette
1.

2.

3.

Choose whatever shape you want from the menu Tools > Insert Shape illustrated in Figure
192 on page 169.
a banner appears across the top of your document instructing you to Click and drag to
draw the new shape.
a banner appears across the bottom of your document instructing you to Press the
escape key (ESC) to cancel.
Undoing and redoing are disabled.
Click and drag to create the shape wherever you want on the page.
When you draw a new shape, press 1 to create create a uniform shape with a 1:1 aspect
ratio (for example a perfect circle or square or an equilateral triangle).
Resize the shape using the four handles and or the four perimeter lines as needed.

176

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

The pointer changes to a cross hair when over the handles and the margin mover or when
over the perimeter lines. As you change the shapes size the four resize handles are hidden.

4.

If you resize the shape, you can press 1 when you continue, the shape's current proportions
will always be maintained.
If you change the proportions and want to restore them 6 Click, or Right-Click the shape
and choose Restore Original Proportions from the context menu that appears.
Move the shape wherever you want on the text portion of your document.
The pointer changes to the grabbing hand when it is over the interior of the shape.

When you create a shape, its initial Placement is set to Position on Page of and it is set for
the text of the document to wrap around it as illustrated in Figure 211 which shows a
Canvas.

Modifying shapes
Once you have created a shape in your document, there are a wide variety of things you can do
with it. When you select a shape the drawing tools palette group becomes active (if you have the
Tooldrawer open and have not changed the preferences).
The drawing tools palette group has all the controls available for manipulating shapes in Nisus
Writer Pro. It consists of five palettes:

Shapes, explained in Using the Shapes palette beginning on page 167 and More tools on the
Shapes palette below
Shape Wrap, explained on page 149 and in detail in the section Using the Shape Wrap palette
beginning on page 157
Shape Stroke, explained on page 173
Shape Fill explained on page 180
Shape Shadow explained on page 181
Shape Metrics explained on page 182
Each of these has commands that match commands on the Tools menu. However, because some
controls are unique to the palettes the following instructions will refer to them, with some reference
to the commands if their names differ and when additional commands are available on the menus.

More tools on the Shapes palette

The Shapes palette, illustrated in Figure 189 on page 165 has three pop-up menu buttons that
enable you to draw shapes such as Text or Callout Boxes, geometric type shapes and arrows. The
five buttons in the Tools section of the palette enable you to manipulate those objects.

Shapes palette Tools bAttons

Enter\Exit
shape selection
mode.

Bring selected
floating shapes
to the front.

Send selected
floating shapes
to the back.

Group together
selected
floating shapes.

Ungroup
selected
floating shapes.

Table 7
The Tools buttons on the Shapes palette
From left to right:

Enter floating shape selection mode.

This is the same as choosing the menu command Tools > Shapes > Enter Shape Selection
Mode.
Similar to when you insert a shape or a Text or Callout Box, Nisus Writer Pro enters a mode in
which:

a banner appears across the top of your document instructing you to Click and drag to
select shapes.

Creating Documents

177

a banner appears across the bottom of your document instructing you to Press the
escape key (ESC) to cancel.
You can also click the same button to exit the mode.

Bring selected floating shapes to the front.

This is the same as choosing the menu command Tools > Shapes > Bring to Front.
If you have two or more shapes in your document (or in a Canvas), it brings the selected
object(s) in front of all the others, regardless of their previous sequence, though it maintains
the sequence of the objects selected.
For example, if you have 7 objects and select three which happen to be (in sequence) #3, 4, & 6.
When you bring them to the front, they will now be objects 1, 2, 3 followed by objects 1, 2, 5 &
7.

Send selected floating shapes to the back.

This is the same as choosing the menu command Tools > Shapes > Send to Back.
If you have two or more shapes in your document (or in a Canvas), it sends the selected
object(s) behind all the others, regardless of their previous sequence, though it maintains the
sequence of the objects selected.
For example, if you have 7 objects and select three which happen to be (in sequence) #3, 4, & 6.
When you send them to the back, they will now be objects 5, 6 and 7 after objects 1, 2, 5 & 7.

Group together selected floating shapes.

This is the same as choosing the menu command Tools > Shapes > Group Shapes.
If you select two or more shapes in your document, it groups the selected objects so that they
move as one unit.

Ungroup selected floating shapes.

This is the same as choosing the menu command Tools > Shapes > Ungroup Shapes.
If you have grouped two or more shapes in your document, it causes those grouped shapes to
revert to their ungrouped state so they can be manipulated individually.

Select floating shapes without selecting text

The sequence of which shape is selected can seem complex. Keep these rules in mind.
When you create your shapes, each new object you create is placed in front of the preceding ones.
Their sequence, however, for the purpose of selection by the commands Select Next Shape or Select
Previous Shape is determined not by the order in which they were created or last manipulated, nor
is the sequence determined by which appears to be laying on top of another. The sequence is based
on which shapes are anchored closest to the top of the document, followed by which are its position
in that paragraph.

178

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Figure 203
Sequence of shapes in multiple paragraphs each shape anchored to the paragraph in which it appears

Figure 204
Sequence of shapes in multiple paragraphs each shape anchored to the paragraph in which it appears in Figure 203

Click the Enter floating shape selection mode button from the Tools section of the Shapes
palette.
Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Enter Shape Selection Mode.
Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Select Next Shape to select the closest shape
following the location of your insertion point.
Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Select Previous Shape to select the closest
shape above the location of your insertion point.

Creating Documents

179
All shapes anchored to paragraph one come those before those anchored to paragraph two,
regardless of the shapes visible position to one another.
With those shapes that are all anchored to the same paragraph, the highest shape, in its
vertical distance from the top of the page, is first.
This is illustrated in In Figure 205 and the explanation following it.

Figure 205
The sequence of shapes in one paragraph

Green Star #5 is in front of

Brown Circle #1 which is in front of
Purple & Pink Right Angle Triangle #3 which is in front of
Triple Yellow & Green Rectangle #4 which is in front of
Pink & Red Isosceles Triangle #2.
However, the shape closest to the top of the document is the Triple Yellow & Green Rectangle
#4. So, if your insertion point is in the word regulari or above in Figure 205 when you choose
Select Next Shape, the first shape selected is #4, then #5, #1, #3, and finally #2.
Conversely, if your insertion point is in the word facilisi or below in Figure 205 and you
choose Select Previous Shape the sequence of shapes selected is #2 then #3, #1, #5, and
finally #4.

If you alter the vertical offset, the sequence of highest changes, and thereby the sequence of
which is selected using the commands Select Next Shape and Select Previous Shape is
changed.

Rearrange the front to back order of various floating shapes

The sequence of floating shapes is determined by their distance from the top of the document.
However, as illustrated in Figure 204, different shapes can be set one atop another so that they can
appear to be layered. You can change the which one lays atop another.

Bring selected shape(s) to the front

1.
2.

Choose one or more shapes.

Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Bring to Front.
If you have multiple shapes selected and bring them to the front their relative stacking order is
maintained.

Send selected shape(s) to the back

1.
2.

Choose one or more shapes.

Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Send to Back.

180

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

If you have multiple shapes selected and send them to the back their relative stacking order is
maintained.

Cause selected objects to function as a single unit

1.
2.

Select two or more shapes and/or images.

Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Group Shapes or click the Group button in the
Tools portion of the Shapes palette.
This groups the selected objects to be affected as if they move as a unit.
A group is like any other shape. It has its own border, fill, etc. Changing the metrics of grouped
shapes do not directly affect all the shapes in the group. Rather, the metrics of the group are
changed, which means all shapes inside the group are along for the ride; a group scales the
shapes inside it.
Grouping shapes, creates a new bounding box that surrounds the grouped graphics. When you
select a set of shapes that have been grouped, any changes made in the

Shape Wrap palette causes the text wrap options to wrap around the bounding box, not the
individual shapes. When you choose to have text wrap around the actual shape of the
image, the text wraps around what would be the bounding box of the ungrouped shapes.
Shape Stroke palette affect the groups bounding box and not the individual shapes.
Shape Shadow palette affect the groups bounding box and not the individual shapes.
Shape Metrics palette affect all the shapes in the group proportionately.
Shape Fill palette affect the groups bounding box and not the individual shapes that do not
already have a fill.
You can also work on multiple floating shapes that are selected, but not grouped. In this case
whenever you change an attribute using any of the palettes, all selected objects are affected.

Cause grouped objects to function as a individual items

1.
2.

Select grouped shapes and/or images.

Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Ungroup Shapes or click the Ungroup button in
the Tools portion of the Shapes palette.
This ungroups the selected objects so they can be dealt with individually.
If you have a group selected, click again on a shape inside that group. This selects a shape
inside that group with a single shape selected (that can be individually manipulated).

Working with multiple selected shapes

You can also work on multiple floating shapes that are selected, but not grouped. In this case
whenever you change an attribute using any of the palettes, all selected objects are affected.

Using the Shape Fill palette

Every shape can have its own fill using the Shape Fill palette illustrated in Figure 206. This fill
functions much the same way as table cell shading, explained in Set the shading (color) of cells on
page 217, with the additional ability to change the opacity of the shape.
This pop-up menu corresponds to the commands found on the Style submenu of Shape Fill submenu of the Tools menu. The default colors available are listed on page 478.

1.
2.

One of the values of having all these commands on the menus as well as the palette is that
you can assign keyboard shortcuts to them as explained in Assign Menu Keys to Menu
Commands on page 400, as well as use the commands in automating tasks using macros as
explained in Macros, Skimming the Surface on page 415.
Select the shape(s) you want to change.
Drag the Opacity slider in the Shape Shadow palette or enter the percentage of opacity you
want.
As an alternative, you can choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Fill > Opacity to
set the opacity of the fill of selected shapes. The available options appear in 10% increments
from 0% (Clear) to 100% (Solid).

Creating Documents

181

Figure 206
The Shape Fill palette

Using the Shape Shadow palette

Every shape can have a shadow, as illustrated in Figure 205 on page 179 using the Shape Shadow
palette illustrated in Figure 207.

Figure 207
The Shape Shadow palette
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.

7.

Select the shape(s) you want to have a shadow.

Check (turn on) Shadow in the Shape Shadow palette.
Click the color swatch to open the Colors panel if you want a shadow in a color other than
black.
Drag the Opacity slider in the Shape Shadow palette or enter the percentage of opacity you
want.
The less opaque (the lower the percentage), the less visible the shadow.
Drag the Blur slider in the Shape Shadow palette or enter the amount of blur (in points) you
want.
The slider only goes up to 50 pts, but you can enter higher numbers using the keyboard. The
higher the number, less visible the shadow.
Determine the Offset by using the stepper or entering a value using the keyboard.
The higher the number the further the shadow is from the shape.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
Set the light source by turning the dial.
The little circle in the dial indicates the point opposite the light source.
As an alternative, you can choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Fill > Shadow to
set the shadow of selected shapes. The available options are limited to None, Glow, Normal
and Hard.

If you give your group a solid fill or stroke, you can give it a shadow too.

182

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Using the Shape Metrics palette

You can determine the precise size and location of your shapes using the Shape Metrics palette
illustrated in Figure 208.

Figure 208
The Shape Metrics palette with the Width and Height dimensions linked and highlighted

Shapes Metrics palette link bAttons

Width Link button

Height Link button

Off

Off

On

On

Aspect Ratio Link button

Off

On

Table 8
The Shape Metrics palette link buttons
1.
2.

3.

Select the shape(s) you want to change.

Choose the measuring units you want to use from the Units pop-up menu in the Shape Metrics
palette.
You can display the units either as they are preset on the ruler (Ruler Units), or any of the
other units supported: Centimeters (cm), Inches (in), Millimeters (mm), Picas (pc) or Points
(pt).
Determine whether the horizontal and vertical alignment should be measured

from the edge of the paper: choose Inset From Page

or from the paragraph to which it is anchored: choose Inset from Paragraph.

Move selected shapes by precise, designated amounts

1.
2.

Select the shape(s) you want to change.

Use the steppers or enter a value using the keyboard to move the selected shape(s) to the Left,
Right, towards the Top, or Bottom.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
a. Click (turn off) to un-link the Left and Right and/or the Top and Bottom controls so that
moving one side does not move the other. This enables the shape to change its size.
b. Click (turn on) to link the Left and Right and/or the Top and Bottom controls so that
moving one side also moves the other. This maintains the shapes size, but changes its
location.
These buttons correspond to the commands Shift Left, Shift Right, Shift Up and Shift
Down found on the Shape Metrics sub-menu of the Tools menu.
You can move a floating image so that it prints beyond the margins, but within the printer
limits, as illustrated in Figure 209 below.

Creating Documents

183

Figure 209
A selected floating image beyond the margin

Resize selected shapes by precise, designated amounts

1.
2.

Select the shape(s) you want to change.

Use the steppers or enter a value using the keyboard to alter the Width and/or Height of the
selected shape(s).
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
a. Click (turn off) to un-link the Width and Height controls so that changing the value for one
does not alter the other. This enables the shape to change its proportion (from the upper
left corner).
These buttons correspond to the commands Increase Width and Decrease Width as well as
Increase Height and Decrease Height found on the Shape Metrics sub-menu of the Tools
menu.
a. Click (turn on) to link the Width and Height controls so that changing the value for one
changes the other. This maintains the shapes aspect ratio as it grows or shrinks from its
upper left corner.
These buttons correspond to the commands Increase Size and Decrease Size found on the
Shape Metrics sub-menu of the Tools menu.

Rotate selected shapes

1.
2.

Select the shape(s) you want to change.

Rotate the shape by

turning the dial

clicking the steppers or

entering a value using the keyboard.

Choosing the commands Rotate Clockwise and Rotate Counterclockwise found on the
Shape Metrics sub-menu of the Tools menu.

Determine the values by which floating shapes and inline images adjust
The Shape Metrics palette offers precise, step by step, control of the values used to modify your
shapes. The menu commands are preset to larger amounts. You can change these settings.
1. Choose Set Adjustment Amounts from the Shape Metrics sub-menu of the Tools menu.
The Adjustment Settings dialog appears as illustrated in Figure 209.
2. Enter the values you want.
The options available are for:

3.

Shift Position By
Resize By
Change Height/Width By

Rotate By
Click OK.

184

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Figure 210
The Adjustment Settings dialog

The Canvas
Nisus Writer Pro also lets you insert a Canvas, which enables you to work on a number of shapes
together, unencumbered by your text.

Working with a Canvas

1.

Choose the menu command Tools > Insert Shape > Canvas.
a banner appears across the top of your document instructing you to Click and drag to
draw the new shape.
a banner appears across the bottom of your document instructing you to Press the
escape key (ESC) to cancel.
Undoing and redoing are disabled.
Click and drag a rectangular Canvas wherever you want on the page.
Resize the Canvas using the four handles and or the four perimeter lines as needed.
The pointer changes to a cross hair when over the handles and the margin mover or when
over the perimeter lines.
Move the Canvas wherever you want on the text portion of your document.
The pointer changes to the grabbing hand when it is over the interior of the Canvas.

2.
3.

4.

When you create a Canvas, its Placement is set to Position on Page of and it is set for the

text of the document to wrap around it as illustrated in Figure 211.

5.

Click in the Canvas.

The Shape Paste Spot

When you click inside a Canvas, Nisus Writer Pro grays out everything but the Canvas and displays
a flashing corner
where you click the pointer. This, illustrated in Figure 212, is the location
where a pasted images upper left corner will appear.
You can choose to display the paste spot or not and determine its color, depending on how you set
your Appearance preference for Invisibles & Guides the Shape paste spot, as explained on 397.

Creating Documents

185

Figure 211
A Canvas ready for shapes

Figure 212
The Paste Spot
6.

Any shape you draw on top of a Canvas using various tools explained in this section will
automatically be captured inside the Canvas.
A Canvas can contain Text or Callout Boxes, lines and arrows, geometrical shapes and pasted
images.
You cannot group or ungroup objects inside a Canvas.

Additional tools for working with shapes

Set a preferred appearance for future drawn shapes
Nisus Writer Pro displays the appearance of the shape it will insert when you choose that from the
various Insert Shape submenu or any of the other similar menus. The menus as illustrated in
Figure 192 on page 169 (Text or Callout Boxes), Figure 199 on page 173 (Lines), and Figure 202 on
page 175 (Shapes) indicate their appearance when you first start the application.

Select a shape with the appearance you want for the next shape as illustrated in Figure 213
where the rectangle (shape #4) is selected then the triangle (shape #2).

186

Working with Shapes

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Figure 213
Selected shape determines appearance of inserted shape
You may decide that you want to use a particular shapes appearance as the standard for a number
of future shapes.
1. Select the shape with desired appearance.
2. Choose Use Selected Shape Appearance As Default from the Insert Shape or Shapes
submenus of the Tools menu.
You can change this at any time using the same method.

Copy the appearance of one shape to apply to a different shape

1.
2.

3.
4.

If you have a shape in your document the appearance of which you want to apply to another
shape, but you do not remember how your arrived at all of its settings, you can copy its
appearance.
Select the shape the appearance of which you want.
Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Copy Shape Appearance.
You cannot copy the appearance of grouped shapes.
Select the shape(s) the appearance of which you want to change.
Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Paste Shape Appearance.

Creating Documents

187

Duplicate shapes
You may need to have a number of identical copies of a particular shape.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Shapes > Duplicate Shape.
The Duplicate sheet appears as illustrated in Figure 213.

Figure 214
A shape ready to duplicate
2.

Determine how many Total Rows and Total Columns you want from the Duplication portion of
the sheet.
You can use the steppers or type or paste in the number you want.

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
In the Expansion portion of the sheet, determine the direction: either to the lower right (the
default), lower left, upper left, or upper right.
Set the Spacing between duplicates.
You can use the units either as they are preset on the ruler (Ruler Units), or any of the other
units supported: Centimeters (cm), Inches (in), Millimeters (mm), Picas (pc) or Points (pt).

3.
4.

5.

Set the Width and Height using the steppers or type or paste in the values you want
Click Duplicate.
The result of the default settings is illustrated in Figure 214.

188

Working with Shapes

Figure 215
The shape of Figure 214 after a default duplication

Graphics: Images and Shapes

Book Tools
Nisus Writer Pro supplies some special tools for creating larger, more complex documents. These
include the ability to separate the document into various sections, and the use of certain variables,
footnotes, and tables.

Creating Sections in Your Document ...................................................... 191

Numbering Sections ............................................................................... 191
Footnotes and Endnotes .......................................................................... 192
Insert a footnote or endnote ......................................................... 192
Return to the document from the notes ........................................ 192
Return to a specific note from its marker in the document ............ 192
Edit a footnote or endnote ............................................................ 192
Determine the appearance of note markers .................................. 192
Determine the appearance of note text ......................................... 194
Remove a footnote ....................................................................... 195
Change endnotes to footnotes or the reverse ................................ 195
Tables ..................................................................................................... 197
What is a table? ............................................................................ 197
Insert/create a table ...................................................................... 198
Determine the size (number of rows/columns) of a table .............. 198
Enter text in a table ...................................................................... 199
Create a table with pre-existing text ............................................. 199
Enter images in a table ................................................................. 200
Navigate among the cells of a table .............................................. 200
Select cells, or portions of or the entire table ............................ 200
Determine the alignment (position) of a table in the document .... 201
Determine the alignment (position) of text in a table .................... 201
Add cells to a table ...................................................................... 204
Remove cells from a table ............................................................ 204
Merge cells .................................................................................. 206
Split cells ..................................................................................... 207
Resize a cell ................................................................................. 208
Equalize column widths ............................................................... 209
Equalize row heights .................................................................... 210
Cause the table to resize to fit its contents (and settings) ............... 211
Cause the table to resize to fit the full extent of the page .............. 212
Create table headers ..................................................................... 212
Adjust the padding around the contents of a cell .......................... 214
Make your tables stand out .......................................................... 214
Modify the lines (edges, borders, etc.) of a table ........................... 215
Set the shading (color) of cells ...................................................... 217
Determine the pattern of cells ...................................................... 217
Remove a table ............................................................................ 219
Copy, cut and paste a table .......................................................... 219
Find and/or replace text in a table ................................................ 219
Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references ...................................... 221
Set a Bookmark ............................................................................ 221
Set a bookmark as something other than selected text .................. 221

190

Footnotes and Endnotes

Book Tools

Edit an automatically named bookmark ....................................... 222

Jump to Bookmarked Text ............................................................. 224
View bookmarks in alphabetical order ......................................... 224
View bookmarks according to their location in the document ...... 224
Move a Bookmark ........................................................................ 225
Remove a Bookmark .................................................................... 225
Add Cross-References to Your Text ................................................ 225
Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes ................................. 231
About Tables of Contents and Indexes .......................................... 231
Tables of Contents .................................................................................. 231
Create a table of contents ............................................................. 231
Designate text to appear in the table of contents .......................... 231
See what text has been included in the table of contents .............. 231
Remove an entry from the table of contents ................................. 232
Set the various headings of your document so that they automatically appear in the table of
contents ....................................................................................... 232
Insert a table of contents into your document ............................... 233
Update the table of contents you have inserted into your document
..................................................................................................... 233
Remove a table of contents from your document .......................... 234
Format the text of your table of contents ....................................... 235
Add highlight color to your inserted table of contents .................. 236
Create a new table of contents ..................................................... 236
Determine which table of contents is active ................................. 237
Quickly add text to the table of contents of your choice ............... 237
Indexes .................................................................................................. 242
Create an index ............................................................................ 242
Designate text to appear in the index ........................................... 242
Index one thing as something else index as ............................... 242
Index multiple terms as one term using the Find/Replace tool ...... 244
Use the index to refer to other entries ........................................... 245
Index all occurrences of the word in the Index as topic box ...... 245
Add an additional Index As reference to indexed text ................ 245
Create a hierarchical index ........................................................... 246
Automatically index your document using a word list .................. 248
Create a word list as a tool for preparing an index ........................ 248
See what text has been included in the index ............................... 249
Remove an entry from the index .................................................. 249
Insert an index into your document .............................................. 249
Update the index you have inserted into your document .............. 249
Remove an index from your document ......................................... 249
Format your index ........................................................................ 250
Determine the appearance of what separates the various sections of your index
..................................................................................................... 250
Determine what separates the index entry from its reference ........ 250
Determine what leader separates the index entry from its reference
..................................................................................................... 251

Creating Documents

191
Determine the characters that separate page numbers in the index
..................................................................................................... 251
Have all sub-levels of the index appear on the same line (space permitting)
..................................................................................................... 251
Set the paragraph style associated with each level of the index .... 251
Modify the appearance of the text in the index ............................. 251
Create a new index ...................................................................... 252
Determine which index is active .................................................. 252
Quickly add text to the index of your choice ................................ 253
Quickly remove text from the index of your choice ...................... 253
How Nisus Writer handles consecutive page numbers in an index
..................................................................................................... 253
Working with Bibliographic Reference Tools ................................ 255

Creating Sections in Your Document

You can separate portions of your Nisus Writer Pro document into different sections with varying
locations of margins, number of columns, and numbering formats. These sections can begin on the
following page, the next odd page, the next even page or even on the same page.

Insert a new section in your document

1.
2.

Place your insertion point where you want the new section to begin.
Choose

the menu command Insert > Section Break > Next Page to have the section begin on the
following page, whether it is odd or even.

the menu command Insert > Section Break > Odd Page to have the section begin on the
following odd page.

the menu command Insert > Section Break > Even Page to have the section begin on the
following even page.

the menu command Insert > Section Break > Same Page to have the section begin on the
same page.

You can now modify various aspects of the format of your new section using the palettes of the
Sections group in the Tooldrawer.

Numbering Sections
Insert a section number
1.
2.

Put your insertion point where you want your new section to begin.
Choose the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Section Number.

Section numbers appear in both Page View, Draft View and Full Screen view.

Restart section numbering

You can restart your section numbers and increment have them increment by any full, positive
number you want.
1. Open the Section palette.
2. Click the Section tab in the Section palette.
3. Click Restart At and choose the numbering format you want from the Format pop-up menu in
the Section palette.
The various number formats available are detailed in Automatic number formats supported in
Nisus Writer Pro on page 52.
4. Enter the number you want to have as the first section number of this portion of your
document.
5. If you want the page numbers to increment at something other than 1, enter that value in the
Increment box in the Section palette.

192

Footnotes and Endnotes

Book Tools

Footnotes and Endnotes

Use footnotes and/or endnotes to refer readers to reference notes. Nisus Writer Pro automatically
renumbers footnotes and endnotes when you add, move, or delete them. Footnotes appear at the
bottom foot of the page on which you insert them. Endnotes appear at the end of the document.

Insert a footnote or endnote

1.
2.
3.

Put the insertion point where you want the footnote number to appear.
Choose Footnote or Endnote from the Insert menu.
Type the note text.

If you work in Draft View or Full Screen view and choose Footnote or Endnote from the Insert menu,
Nisus Writer Pro automatically switches your view to Page View and displays your insertion point in
the notes area of your document, ready to enter the note text.
When you point to a footnote or endnote marker in your text Nisus Writer Pro displays a tooltip with
the contents of the footnote or endnote text.

Return to the document from the notes

When your insertion point is in the footnote or endnote text it is easy to get back to the notes
marker location in the document.

Choose the menu command View > Go to Note Reference or from the Notes tag on the
Statusbar.

Press 6, click the text of the note and choose Go to Note Reference from the contextual
menu that appears, or choose the menu command View > Go to Note Reference.

Double-click the note marker.

This selects the note marker of the note in which your insertion point had been.

Return to a specific note from its marker in the document

When your insertion point is in the document text you can easily move to the footnotes or endnotes.
Select the note marker, or put your insertion point immediately to the right or left of the note
marker, press 6, click the text of the note and choose Go to Note Text from the contextual
menu that appears or choose the menu command View > Go to Note Text.

Double-click the note marker.

This selects the text of that note.

Edit a footnote or endnote

Put your insertion point in the notes area and edit the text.

Determine the appearance of note markers

Note markers are controlled by Styles.
You modify the note marker using Styles the same way you modify any other Style as explained
in Modify a style on page 107.

Creating Documents

193

Figure 216
The Notes Reference Styles area of the Style Sheet
In this portion of the Style Sheet view, you can control the

Style on which the notes text are Based on;

Keyboard shortcut used to apply the Style.

Use an asterisk or other custom symbol to mark several footnotes and or endnotes
In addition to using numbers sequentially for footnotes and endnotes, you can use an asterisk or
other custom character to mark several or all footnotes or endnotes with the same symbol.
1. Select the note reference(s) in the body of the document.
Use non-contiguous selection to select a range of text and affect number of notes at once.
2. Click and hold your mouse or trackpad on the Footnote tag on the Statusbar.
3. Choose Set Custom Note Reference from the pop-up menu as illustrated in Figure 217.

Figure 217
The Footnote tag pop-up menu
4.

Enter (type or paste) an asterisk or any other character you wish to use in the pane that
appears as illustrated in Figure 218.

Figure 218
The Custom Footnote Character sheet
Click OK.
The command Set Custom Note Reference is also available from the menu Format >
Note Style.
5.

194

Footnotes and Endnotes

Book Tools

Edit a custom symbol that marks footnotes and or endnotes

You can change the symbol you have used at any time
1. Select the note reference(s) in the body of the document.
Use non-contiguous selection to select a range of text and affect number of notes at once.
2. Click and hold your mouse or trackpad on the Footnote tag on the Statusbar.
3. Choose Edit Custom Note Reference from the pop-up menu as illustrated in Figure 217
above.
4. Enter (type or paste) an asterisk or any other character you wish to use in the pane that
appears as illustrated in Figure 218.
5. Click OK.
The command Edit Custom Note Reference is also available from the menu Format >
Note Style.

Determine the appearance of note text

The appearance of note text is controlled by Styles.
You modify the note text style the same way you modify any other Style as explained in Modify
a style on page 107.

Figure 219
The Footnote area of the Style Sheet in its shipped state
In this portion of the Style Sheet view, you can control a wide variety of options including:

the style on which the notes text are Based on;

the keyboard Shortcut used to apply the style;
the Place where the note appears
if the notes are endnotes you can choose between

End of Document
End of Section
if they are footnotes your only choice is

Bottom of Page;

the notes can appear One Note Per Line, or, if there is room, they can cluster;
if the notes are long and their text extends beyond the page on which the reference
appears, you can determine their Multi-page Threshold, that is the minimum number of
points and/or lines that the notes must contain before they can split between pages;
the Starting Number that the sequence of notes begins at;

Creating Documents

195

the Number Format illustrated in Automatic number formats supported in Nisus Writer
Pro on page 52;

the Number Restart: whether the Notes restart on each page, each section or are
continuously numbered;
the Doc Reference Style: the character style that is automatically applied to note
references when they appear in the main document;
the Note Reference Style: the character style that is automatically applied to note
references when they appear in the note area;
the Default Note Text: the text that every newly inserted note starts with (that which
separates the reference number and the text of the note);
You can enter a Tab by pressing 4 @. The sample text field at the top updates when
you move your insertion point out of the current field.

the Gutter Height: how tall the gutter between the main document and the note should be;
In addition you can control a variety of the attributes of the Divider line that separates the
notes from the text of the document. These include:

the lines available in the pop-up menu are those illustrated in Figure 105 on page 94;
the lines thickness using the pop-up menu to the right of the line pop-up menu;
The display is dependent on the gutter height.

the color of the line(s) using the Color Picker which opens the Colors panel as illustrated in
Figure 404 on page 376;
where the divider line appears in relation to the gutter using the Align in Gutter pop-up
menu;
Your options are Top, Center or Bottom.

the Length of the line on the first page where the footnotes appear (the default is set to 25%
of the width);
the length of the lines where footnotes extend beyond one page using the Multi-page
Length text edit box (where the default is set to 75%);

Remove a footnote or endnote

Select the footnote or endnote reference marker (or put your insertion point after it) in the
document and press .

Change endnotes to footnotes or the reverse

You can change the location of any and/or all of your notes at any time.
While in the primary text area of your document:

Select the footnote or endnote reference you wish to change, press 6 and choose Convert to
Endnote or Convert to Footnote (depending).
While in the notes areas of your document:

Change a footnote to an endnote

1.
2.

Click your insertion point anywhere in the text of that footnote

Choose Endnote from the Notes tag
on the Statusbar.

Change an endnote to a footnote

1.
2.

Click your insertion point anywhere in the text of that endnote

Choose Footnote from the Notes tag
on the Statusbar.

Change all footnotes to endnotes

1.
2.
3.

Click your insertion point anywhere in the text of the footnotes.

Choose the menu command Edit > Select All.
Choose Endnote from the Notes tag
on the Statusbar.

Change all endnotes to footnotes

1.
2.
3.

Click your insertion point anywhere in the text of the endnotes.

Choose the menu Edit > Select All.
Choose Footnote from the Notes tag
on the Statusbar.

You can change specific notes by selecting (even as a multipart selection) those notes you want to
change.

196

Footnotes and Endnotes

Book Tools

Continue footnote or endnote numbering across consecutive files

Suppose you have a document that is more than 1000 pages long. For the sake of facilitating use,
you have decided to break the text up into several files. You can have your footnotes and/or
endnotes continue numbering from one section to the next, or, restart at any assigned page number
using any footnote or endnote number you want.

Restart footnotes or endnotes at an assigned page number

Accomplishing this task uses a combination of sections and note styles. As explained in Restart
page numbering at 1 on page 142 youll see that in the Sections palette you can type in whatever
number you want that portion of your document to use as its first page.
1. Set the Restart At page number in the Sections palette as desired for the beginning of the new
section or document.
If the new document is a continuation of another document, it can begin at the number of the
final page of the preceding document, plus 1.
2. In the Style Sheet view of the document enter the Starting Number that continues from the
last footnote of the previous section or document and set the Number Restart option at
Continuous as illustrated in Figure 220.

Figure 220
Continuing footnote or endnote numbering across consecutive files

Restart footnotes or endnotes at an assigned note number

This process is essentially the same as the one for Restart footnotes or endnotes at an
assigned page number, specifically step 2 above.

Restart endnotes at an assigned endnote page number

Because endnotes appear at the end of each particular document there is no way to have the
endnote pages numbered appropriately sequentially other than adding a section break between the
end of your text and the beginning of the endnotes and setting the start page number of those
sections as needed.

Find the next footnote in your document because it shares the

selected style
You may have your insertion point in a particular footnote on one page and want to find the next
footnote of your document.

Choose the menu command Format > Note Style > Select Next in Same Style or

Choose Select Next in Same Style from the Notes tag

on the Statusbar.
This selects next instance of text in your document which shares that style.

Determine whether or not a document has footnotes

You might receive a document from a friend or colleague and not know at first glance whether or
not it has footnotes. To quickly check:
1. Select all the text in the document by choosing the menu command Edit > Select All.
2. Take a look in the View menu to see if Go to Note Text is enabled.
If the command is enabled, your document has at least one footnote.

Creating Documents

197

Tables
What is a table?
A table is a means of presenting a group of related data in a coherent, structured form. Tables are
used to

summarize large amounts of data

compare data for two or more cases
group complex data so that relationships are clear
convey statistics about the underlying data

list a full matrix of related data.

Tables have a wide variety of uses and, because of the divergent uses, they may take on many
different styles as well. There is no right or wrong way to organize and format a table.

Types of tables
The simplest possible table is one that has at least two entries (and usually has corresponding
headers that define the data within the table).

win
15

Tycho

loss
1

Table 9
A very simple table
Tables can grow as big as youd like, although there is a practical limit to their sizeusually what
will fit onto a single page. Huge tables that sprawl over several pages are extremely difficult to
understand at a glance, and the relationships between the data become less distinct when you
build, multi-page tables. Nevertheless, you will find that big tables are useful when your ultimate
goal is to compile an organized reference to a large, underlying database.

One important distinction to make in creating a table is whether or not the table is a summary of
information in an unseen database, or an exhaustive listing of the entire data in the database. The
former tends to result in small, concise tables that tell a story or highlight a particular point or
statistic. The latter are often long, multi-page tables that are only consulted as references. Nisus
Writer Pros table capability can handle both.

When To Use Tables

Tables should
be used when:

The information is
not suitable for
graphing

The actual data

values are more
important than a
graphical
summary.

Tables should
not be used if:

The data clearly

lends itself to a
visual
representation
(graphs, for
example).

The data cannot

be organized into
meaningful
groups.

Table 10
When to use tables

The information
can clearly be
broken into
related parts and
groups.

The data contains

extensive text that
must be read
rather than
scanned.

It is important to
see the
relationship
between to or
more pieces of
data.

198

Tables

Book Tools

Insert/create a table
1.
2.

Put your insertion point where you want the table to appear.
Either click the Insert Table button on the Toolbar

Figure 221
The Insert Table button

Or, Choose the menu command Table > New Table.

When you insert a table Nisus Writer Pro creates a new style in your document (if one does not
already exist in your Nisus New File) called Table Cell. If the table you insert has either a column
header and/or a row header, Nisus Writer Pro creates a style called Table Header. The Table Cell
style is based on the Normal style in your document and the Table Header style is based on the
Table Cell style. You can modify these styles using the Style Sheet view of your document.

Determine the size (number of rows/columns) of a table

When you choose New Table from the menus Nisus Writer Pro presents a sheet in which you
determine how many rows and columns your table will have. You can increase and/or decrease the
number whenever you need.

Figure 222
The Insert Table sheet
1.
2.

Choose the menu command Table > New Table.

Click to choose the type of table you want from the options at the top of the dialog:

3.

4.
5.
6.

no headers
row and column headers
column headers only
row headers only.
Type the number of columns you want, or, use the stepper to the right of the number of
Columns field to increase or decrease the number.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
When you are satisfied with the number of columns you want press @ or click in the number
of Rows field.
Type the number of rows you want, or, use the stepper to the right of the number of Rows
field to increase or decrease the number.
When you are satisfied with the number of columns and rows you want press T or < or click
Insert to confirm your choice and display the table in the document.

Or
1. Click the Insert Table button on the Toolbar.
2. Drag your pointer in the Style area to choose the type of table you want

no headers

Creating Documents

199

3.

4.

row and column headers

column headers only
row headers only
Continue to drag your pointer in the Size area to increase or decrease the number of columns
and rows.
Your pointer (in a left to right environment) indicates the lowest right cell of the table.
When you are satisfied with the size (and shape) of the table, release your mouse button or
trackpad.

Figure 223
Creating a table from the Insert Table button

In right to left documents or sections of documents, the primary tools relevant to tables appear for
right to left editing.

Figure 224
A right to left table
You can add or subtract rows and/or columns at any time once you have inserted the table as
explained on page 204.

Enter text in a table

Click your insertion point in the appropriate field and type or paste your text or image.
Press 4 @ to enter a tab character into any cell (otherwise, pressing @ moves your
insertion point to the next cell).

Create a table with pre-existing text

You can create a table with two kinds of pre-existing tab-delimited text that may be on your
Clipboard (copied from another application), or text that may be in your document.
1. Click where you want the table to appear and choose the menu command Edit > Paste.

200

Tables
2.

Book Tools

Select the text you want to have appear in table form and choose the menu command Table >
Convert to Table.

Enter images in a table

Click your insertion point in the field in which you wish to have your image appear and paste
your image.
Many images can appear in one cell.

Table )alette BAttons

Table
Alignment

left

center

right

Table 11
A table with images

Navigate among the cells of a table

When you edit text inside a table cell, you can use the keyboard to move your insertion point

The , and . keys move the insertion point into the cells on the left and right respectively.
The + and - arrow keys move the insertion point into the cells above and below respectively
Press @ to move the insertion point into the next cell.

If you are in the last cell of a table pressing @ inserts a new row.

Press 1 @ to move the insertion point to the preceding cell.

Select cells, or portions of or the entire table

You can select portions of your table using the mouse or trackpad or the keyboard.

Using the mouse or trackpad

Click your insertion point inside any cell and drag to select additional cells.

Click your insertion point inside any cell and choose the menu command Table > Select >
Cells.

If you have a multipart selection in more than one cell, this selects all cells in which you have
selections. (To create a multipart text selection press A as you select additional text.)

Click your insertion point inside any cell and choose the menu command Table > Select >
Columns.
This selects all cells contiguous with the one in which your insertion point appears, even if
they are merged with other columns.

Click your insertion point inside any cell and choose the menu command Table > Select >
Rows.
This selects all cells contiguous with the one in which your insertion point appears, even if
they are merged with other rows.

Click your insertion point inside any cell and choose the menu command Table > Select >
Table.
This selects all the cells of the table.

Using the keyboard

Click your insertion point inside any cell and type A a (lowercase a).

This selects the entire contents of the cell.

Click your insertion point inside any cell and type 1 followed by any arrow key. When all
text in any particular direction has been selected Nisus Writer Pro selects the entire cell
(not just the text).
Click your insertion point inside any cell and type A 1 a.
This selects all cells contiguous with the one in which your insertion point appears, even if
they are merged with other columns.

Click your insertion point inside any cell and type A 4 a.

This selects all cells in the column contiguous with the one in which your insertion point
appears, even if they are merged with other rows.

Creating Documents

201
Click your insertion point inside any cell and type A a a.
This selects all the cells of the table.

Determine the alignment (position) of a table in the document

Tables align independently of the text of your document.

Click the alignment you wish to have using the appropriate button in the Table palette.

Choose the appropriate alignment (Align Left, Center or Align Right) from the Table menu.

Figure 225
The Table palette indicating the table alignment options with left selected and center and right beside it

Determine the alignment (position) of text in a table

Text and images in the cells of a table can be aligned both horizontally and vertically. If a cell has
multiple paragraphs, each paragraph in the cell can have its own alignment.

Table Cells )alette BAttons

Horizontal
aligned
left

Text
Alignment
Vertical

top

center
aligned

middle

aligned
right

bottom

Table 12
The table cell alignment buttons
Determine which cell or cells you wish to alter:
click your insertion point in the cell

drag across the cells

create a multipart text selection

2. Click the appropriate alignment button in the Table Cells palette.
1.

text fully
justified

202

Tables

Book Tools

Figure 226
The text alignment buttons of the Table Cells palette
Or

Choose Align Left, Align Right, Center, or Justified for horizontal alignment or Top,
Bottom, or Middle for vertical alignment.

Creating Documents

203

Align text in table cells along the decimal point

Numbers often need to be aligned along a decimal point.

You would probably want to follow this procedure with Invisibles turned on (choose the menu
command View > Show Invisibles).
1. Create your table.
2. Click your insertion point in the top cell of the column to be aligned by the decimal point.
3. Make sure the Ruler displays and choose the menu command Tab > Decimal.
4. Click on the ruler at the location you want the tab to appear (you can always adjust this later if
you need).
5. Press 4 @ to enter a tab character into the cell where you have set the tab.
6. Select the contents of that cell (the tab character).
7. Select the other cells that you want to have share that decimal tab formatting.
This can be either a single cell or multiple columns or rows of cells.
8. Choose Align Left or Justified from the menu Table > Align Cells, or click the appropriate
button on the Table Cells palette.
9. Choose the menu command Edit > Paste.
10. Enter the text you want in each cell being sure to add the text following the tab character.
Figure 227 below, is a composite to show multiple insertion points on the ruler. It illustrates
columns of numbers with decimal points aligned by decimal point (from left to right), left,
center, right and justified. The decimal point is highlighted in each column.

Aligning the cells either by center or right causes poor alignment.

Figure 227
Text aligned by decimal points (color coded) in a table

204

Tables

Book Tools

Add cells to a table

If, as you work on your table, you determine that you need additional cells, either as rows or
columns, you can add them at any time.

Click your insertion point in the cell beside which you want to add cells and click the
appropriate button in the Table palette.

Figure 228
The insert and delete buttons of the Table palette

Or
Click your insertion point in the cell beside which you want to add cells and choose Column to
the Left, Column to the Right, Row Above, or Row Below, from the menu Table > Insert.

Table )alette BAttons

Insert
Column

to the left

to the right

above

below

column

row

Insert Row

Delete
Table 13
The insert and delete buttons

Remove cells from a table

Click your insertion point in the row or column (or select the rows or columns or cells) you
wish to remove and click the appropriate button in the Table palette.
Or
Click your insertion point in the row or column (or select the rows or columns or cells) you
wish to remove and choose Rows, Columns, or Cells from the menu Table > Delete.

Creating Documents

205

Sort rows of a table

You can sort the rows of a table either in ascending or descending order. You can reverse the
sequence or randomize it.
1. Click your insertion point in any cell of the column by which you wish to sort.
2. Choose either Sort By Selected Column Ascending (A-Z) or Sort By Selected Column
Descending (Z-A), depending on the sequence you want.
Ascending sorting based on selected cells is illustrated in Table 14 through Table 16.

Name
Hair Color
Where Living Now
City Of Birth
Went To School In
Eye Color

Anne

Betty

Cathy

Doris

Evelyn

Faye

Gladys

Black

Blond

Blond

Brown

Brown

Red

Red

Italy

Israel

Latvia

England Germany

France Andorra

Atlanta Annapolis Bismarck Albany

Augusta Baton Rouge

Alaska Delaware Georgia Florida California

Austin

Arkansas

Colorado

Blue

Blue

Brown

Brown

Green

Hazel

Hazel

Anne

Betty

Cathy

Doris

Evelyn

Faye

Gladys

Black

Blond

Blond

Brown

Brown

Red

Red

Table 14
Original table

Name
Hair Color
City Of Birth
Went To School In
Eye Color
Where Living Now

Atlanta Annapolis Bismarck Albany

Augusta Baton Rouge

Alaska Delaware Georgia Florida California

Blue

Blue

England Germany

Brown

Brown

France Andorra

Austin

Arkansas

Colorado

Green

Hazel

Hazel

Italy

Israel

Latvia

Table 15
Original table after selecting the four vertical cells beginning with Italy (yellow or Evelyn column); note the sequence in the
Row Headers

Name
Hair Color
City Of Birth
Eye Color
Where Living Now
Went To School In

Anne

Betty

Cathy

Doris

Evelyn

Faye

Gladys

Black

Blond

Blond

Brown

Brown

Red

Red

Atlanta Annapolis Bismarck Albany

Blue

Blue

England Germany

Brown

Brown

France Andorra

Augusta Baton Rouge

Austin

Green

Hazel

Hazel

Italy

Israel

Latvia

Arkansas

Colorado

Alaska Delaware Georgia Florida California

Table 16
Original table after selecting the four cells beginning with France (pink or Cathy column); note the sequence in the Row
Headers

206

Tables

Book Tools

Merge cells
You can merge multiple, contiguous, cells into one.
Select the cells you wish to merge and click the Merge Cells button in the Table Cells palette.

Figure 229
The Merge Cells button on the Table Cells palette

Or
Select the cells you wish to merge and choose the menu command Table > Merge Cells.

The illustrations that follow may not represent anything you would want to do, but, they are here to
indicate simply what does happen.
The text here is from The Frozen Logger by James Stevens (long out of copyright)
<http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Frozen_Logger>

Figure 230
Cells selected to merge

Figure 231
Merged cells

Note that when you merge cells Nisus Writer Pro does not maintain the normal flow of the text. Be
careful what you ask for.

Creating Documents

207

Split cells
Merging cells merges all selected cells into one, splitting cells offers a variety of options.

Figure 232
The split cells sheet

Put your insertion point inside the cell you wish to split (or select the cells (rows or columns)
you wish to split) and click the Split Cells button on the Table Cells palette.

Figure 233
The Split Cells button on the Table Cells palette

Or
Put your insertion point inside the cell you wish to split (or select the cells (rows or columns)
you wish to split) and choose the menu command Table > Split Cells.

208

Tables

Book Tools

Resize a cell
You can make a table smaller than is useful:

! Or make a table span multiple pages.

The tiny one-celled table in the sentence following Resize a cell above cannot be used for
anything. You can resize any cell in a Nisus Writer Pro table.
1. Place the pointer over the line you want to adjust. Your pointer will change from an I-beam to a
line with arrows pointing in opposite directions.
2. Click and drag the line down to make the cell larger, or, up to make it smaller.

Figure 234
A very long table

Creating Documents

209

Figure 235
Expanding the height of a cell in a table

The way in which you align your table determines the way in which cells expand and contract
horizontally.

The cells of left aligned tables expand to the right.

The cells of right aligned tables expand to the left.
The cells of center aligned tables expand from the center out.

Equalize column widths

You may have a variety of cells of varying widths, to equalize them:
1. Select the cells you wish to equalize.
2. Click the Balance Cell Widths button on the Table Cells palette or choose the menu command
Table > Distribute Columns Evenly.

Figure 236
A table with unequal cell widths before equalizing

Figure 237
A table with cell widths equalized (notice the words words and common)
Equalized, or balanced, means precisely that. If you select cells in which one of the words extends
the width of the cell and then balance the cells, the text in the wider cell will wrap.

210

Tables

Book Tools

Figure 238
A table with a wide cell due to a longer word (notice the words common and but)

Figure 239
The same table with cell widths equalized (notice the word common)

To Equalize cells in which you have text that should not wrap (as in the illustrations Figure 238 and
Figure 239 above), use the Fit to Contents tool as explained in Cause the table to resize to fit its
contents (and settings) on page 211.

Equalize row heights

You may have done something to cause the height of a variety of rows to differ. You can equalize
them.

As

sat

within

one

evening

small

caf,

old

waitress

forty

to

words
me these
see
that
you are

did

say:

logger,

and

not

common

bum,

Cause

nobody

but

logger

stirs

his

his

thumb.

year

down

just

coffee with

Table 17
The table of Figure 239 above with pronouns made larger (taller)
1.
2.

Select the cells you wish to equalize.

Click the Balance Cell Heights button on the Table Cells palette or choose the menu command
Table > Distribute Rows Evenly.

Creating Documents

As

211

sat

within

down

one

evening

small

caf,

forty

year

old

waitress

to

me

words

did

say:

see

these
that
you

are

logger,

and

not

just

common bum,

Cause

nobody

but

logger

stirs

his

with

his

thumb.

coffee

Table 18
Table 17 above with cells heights distributed evenly

Cause the table to resize to fit its contents (and settings)

You can resize any column to have its contents fit the cells by dragging the appropriate line.

Figure 240
Dragging a line to cause the cell to fit the contents
However, to cause the entire table to hug its contents (based on the size (amount) of the text and
its padding (as explained on page 214), Nisus Writer Pro offers a special tool.
1. Click anywhere in the table to activate it.
2. Click the Fit to Contents button on the Table Cells palette or choose the menu command Table
> Fit to Contents.

As

sat

down one

within
A
forty

year

a
old

to

me

these

words did

see

that

and
not
just
Cause nobody
stirs his
coffee

you are
a
but
with

evening

small
caf,
waitress
a

say:
logger,

common bum,
a
logger
his
thumb.

Table 19
Result of choosing Fit to Contents
This command affects the height of rows as well as their width.

212

Tables

Book Tools

Cause the table to resize to fit the full extent of the page
You can cause the table and its contents to resize to fit the width of the page.
1. Click anywhere in the table to activate it.
2. Click the Fit to Page button on the Table Cells palette or choose the menu command Table >
Fit to Page.

Figure 241
Result of choosing Fit to Page
As with Fit to Contents, Fit to Page does not affect the height of rows unless it causes some
wrapped text to unwrap.

Create table headers

Tables can have row and/or column headers. However, there is nothing unique about them they are
simply either rows at the top that have no (or fewer) cells, or columns at the side that have no (or
fewer) cells.
1. Put your insertion point in the top row.
2. Click the Insert Row Above button on the Table palette (as illustrated in Table 13 on page 204),
or choose the menu command Table > Insert > Row Above.
3. Select the cells in the row that you want to make into the header and click the Merge Cells
button on the Table Cells palette (as illustrated in Table 13 on page 204), or choose the menu
command Table > Merge Cells.

As
within
A
to
I
and
Cause
stirs

sat

forty
me
see
not
nobody
his

year
these
that
just
coffee

you

down
a
old
words
are
a
but
with

one
small
waitress
did
a
common
a
his

evening
caf,
say:
logger,
bum,
logger
thumb.

Table 20
A table with a row added at the top
You can do a variety of things to make the header stand out. You can learn more about this in the
section Make your tables stand out on page 214.

Creating Documents

213

Create a title for a table

A column header at the top of your table makes a perfect location for a table title.
1. Create a column header as explained above.
2. Merge the cells.
3. Set the area off with some border or color.

The FroEen Logger

bD James SteBens
As
within
A
to
I
and
Cause
stirs

sat

forty
me
see
not
nobody
his

year
these
that
just

down
a
old
words
are
a
but
with

you

coffee

one
small
waitress
did
a
common
a
his

evening
caf,
say:
logger,
bum,
logger
thumb.

Table 21
Shows Table 20 above with row made into a header (in this case the title)

Create a row header

1.
2.
3.

Put your insertion point in the row furthest to the right or left (depending on where you want
the header to appear).
Click the Insert Column on Right (or Insert Column on Left) button on the Table palette (as
illustrated in Table 13 on page 204), or choose Column to the Right or Column to the Left
from the menu Table > Insert.
Select the cells in the row that you want to make into the header and click the Merge Cells
button on the Table Cells palette (as illustrated in Table 13 on page 204), or choose the menu
command Table > Merge Cells.

The FroEen Logger

bD James SteBens
1
stanza
st

2
stanza
nd

As
within
A
to

sat

forty
me

year
these

I
and
Cause
stirs

see
not
nobody
his

that
just
coffee

you

down
a
old
words

one
small
waitress
did

evening
caf,

are
a
but
with

a
common
a
his

logger,
bum,
logger
thumb.

Table 22
Shows Table 21 above with a column made into a header (in this case row headers)

say:

214

Tables

Book Tools

Adjust the padding around the contents of a cell

You may want a certain minimum of space between the contents of a cell and the lines that define
that cell.
1. Put your insertion point in the cell you want to modify.
2. Click the Padding stepper to increase or decrease the amount of padding.
or
3. Select the contents of the Padding field.
4. Enter the value you want.
5. Press T to confirm your choice.

Figure 242
The Padding portion of the Table Cells palette

)adding IllAstrated
Now is the time for all
good people to come to
the aid of Nisus Software
Inc.

Now is the time for

all good people to
come to the aid of
Nisus Software Inc.

The above cell is fully

justified with zero
padding.

The above cell is fully

justified with 14 points
of padding.

Table 23
A padded cell

Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value uniformly to
all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

Make your tables stand out!

You can do a variety of things to cause the contents of your table to stand out. You can modify the
lines by changing their thickness, style and/or color. You can change the shading of the inside of
the cells by modifying their patterns and colors.

Creating Documents

215

Modify the lines (edges, borders, etc.) of a table

Every line of a cell can have its own thickness, style and/or color. Whenever you click your
insertion point inside a table, the buttons on the Table Cell Borders palette which represent the
existing lines of that cell are highlighted. Other buttons, representing the lines that you can add to
that cell (or group of cells) are indicated as enabled (dark black). Buttons that represent lines that
you cannot add to the cell (or group of cells) are subtly grayed.

And one button to rule them all illustrated in Figure 243 below,
The Deselect All button!

Clear the selection of lines to modify

Click the Deselect All button.

Figure 243
The Deselect All button

Use the button in the upper left of the Table Cell Borders palette to clear all selected buttons.

Figure 244
The Table Cell Borders palette

Select which lines to modify

1.
2.

Put your insertion point in the cell (or select the cells) you want to modify.
Click to select the buttons of the lines you wish to modify.

Table Cell Border )alette BAttons

Multiple
Line
Controls

All
Deselect All

Groups
Perimeter

Select All

Internal

Perimeter &
Vertical

Perimeter &
Horizontal

Left Edge

Right Edge

Between Cells

Top Edge

Bottom Edge

Between Cells

Vertical
Individual
Line
Controls

Horizontal

Diagonal
Table 24
The Table Cell Borders palette buttons

Upper Left to
Lower Right

Upper Right to
Lower Left

216

Tables

Book Tools

The edges that will be modified by subsequent actions (for example changing their color) are only
those represented by buttons that are selected (turned on: appear blue). The first two buttons
Deselect All and Select All work to change the other buttons.

Determine the thickness of the lines

1.
2.
3.

Put your insertion point in the cell (or select the cells) you want to modify.
Click to select the buttons of the lines you wish to modify.
Choose the thickness you want from the Thickness pop-up menu of the Table Cell Borders
palette
You can choose between None, Hairline, 1/2 pt (point), 3/4 pt up to 8 pt thick lines.

Figure 245
The Thickness pop-up menu of the Table Cell Borders palette
When these lines do not appear (if you have set their thickness to None), Nisus Writer Pro
displays Table Guides the color of which you can customize in the Appearance preferences as
explained in Determine the color of various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working
environment on page 395.

Determine the style (pattern) of the lines

1.
2.
3.

Put your insertion point in the cell (or select the cells) you want to modify.
Click to select the buttons of the lines you wish to modify.
Choose the style you want from the Style pop-up menu of the Table Cell Borders palette
You can choose between none, and a wide variety of styles.

Figure 246
The style pop-up menu of the Table Cell Borders palette

Creating Documents

217

Determine the color of the lines

1.
2.
3.

Put your insertion point in the cell (or select the cells) you want to modify.
Click to select the buttons of the lines you wish to modify.
Click the Color Picker tool and choose a color from the Colors panel as illustrated in Figure
404 on page 376.

Figure 247
The Color Picker tool of the Table Cell Borders palette

Set the shading (color) of cells

Every cell can have its own shading, style and/or color.

Using Gradients and Shading

There

Less

Here

More

Table 25
A table showing horizontal and vertical gradients as well as shading
Whenever you click your insertion point inside a table the Pattern pop-up menu and the Colors
buttons on the Table Cells Shading palette become enabled.

Figure 248
The Table Cells Shading palette in its most simple form
1.
2.

Put your insertion point in the cell (or select the cells) you want to modify.
Click the Color Picker tool on the left for the foreground and/or on the right for the background
and choose a color from the Colors panel as illustrated in Figure 404 on page 376.

Determine the pattern of cells

Every cell can have its own pattern. Each pattern is an RTF pattern which gets saved and
preserved for display in Microsoft Word.
1. Put your insertion point in the cell (or select the cells) you want to modify.
2. Choose the pattern you want from the Pattern pop-up menu in the Table Cells Shading palette.

A cell with a Pattern set to None can have no color.

218

Tables

Book Tools

Figure 249
The Pattern menu of the Table Cells Shading palette (in three parts) set for the bottom row, fourth column of Table 25 above
(More)

Set the color of the foreground and background of a cell pattern

Every pattern has a foreground and a background. You can choose the color of each of these.
1. Put your insertion point in the cell (or select the cells) you want to modify.
2. Choose the Pattern you want.
In this context pattern may mean density of background and foreground.
3. Click the Color Picker tool on the left for the foreground and/or on the right for the background
and choose a color from the Colors panel as illustrated in Figure 404 on page 376.

The Color of the Foreground and Background of a Cell Pattern

background
(at 50% with white foreground)

foreground
(at 50% with white background)

Trellis Pattern
(at 100% blue foreground
& 100% green background)

Table 26
Setting the background and foreground colors

You can reverse the meaning of the foreground and background color pickers by clicking the doublepointed arrow button that appears between them.

Creating Documents

219

Remove a table
Nisus Writer Pro supports a variety of methods for removing a table from your document. You can
use the keyboard, or the mouse or trackpad with the menus. These are described in Table 27
below.

To Delete a Table
Using the
menus

Using the
Keyboard

Step 1

Step 2

Click anywhere in
the table.

Choose Table from the Delete

submenu of the Table menu

Put your insertion

point immediately
following the table.
Put your insertion
point immediately in
front of the table.
Select the range of
paragraphs before
and after the table.

Press the forward delete key.

Click anywhere in
the table.

Type 4 A to select that cell

Step 3

Step 4

Press the delete key.

Press the delete key.

Type 4 A to
Press the delete
select the entire
key.
table.

Table 27
Methods for removing a table

Copy, cut and paste a table

You can cut, or copy and then paste a Nisus Writer Pro table anywhere in your document, or in
another document.
1. Select the table you want to copy, cut or paste as explained in Select cells, or portions of or
the entire on page 200.
2. Choose Copy or Cut from the Edit menu.
3. Put your insertion point where you want the table to appear and choose the menu command
Edit > Paste.

You can put a table anywhere in your document: in your header and footer, as well as in your
footnotes and endnotes. You cannot, however, put a table inside another table, nor can you put a
footnote or endnote in a table.

You can remove the contents of any cell by selecting the characters and pressing x or by choosing
the menu command Edit > Delete, or by choosing the menu Table > Delete > Clear Cell Content.
The Clear Cell Content command functions exactly the same as x, except under one situation: when
you have selected an entire row or column. x removes the whole row or column, contents and all,
whereas Clear Cell Content will only remove the content from the selected cells, retaining the
structure of the table.

Copy the contents, but not the tableness of a table

1.
2.

Select the contents of the table you want to copy, cut or paste as explained in Select cells, or
portions of or the entire on page 200.
Choose the menu command Table > Copy Table Text.

Find and/or replace text in a table

You can find text in your table the same way as in any other portion of your document.

If you want to find text only in the table, select the contents of the table, and then, in the Find/
Replace window, choose In Selection before doing your find and/or replace.

Creating Documents

221

Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references

Use bookmarks in your document as you would use a bookmark for quick access to a specific page
in a book or a location on the World Wide Web.
You can also use bookmarks to insert See also cross-references in your document which Nisus
Writer Pro keeps current for you.

Set a Bookmark
Select the text you want to mark.
Choose the menu command Insert > Bookmarks > Add Bookmark or from the contextual
menu that appears when you press 6 or right click your mouse or secondary click your
trackpad.
Nisus Writer Pro automatically uses the selected text as the bookmarks name.

1.
2.

When you add a bookmark automatically Nisus Writer Pro appends the word (Automatically) to
distinguish it those you set with text other than that selected. You can modify that appended
term in the Appearance preferences of Nisus Writer Pro as explained on page 395.

Set a bookmark as something other than selected text

Select the text you want to mark.

Choose the menu command Insert > Bookmarks > Add Bookmark As.
Enter the text you want to use in the sheet that appears.

1.
2.
3.

Figure 250
The Add Bookmark As sheet
4.

You can type or paste copied text into the Bookmark Name box.
Click Add Bookmark.
Add Bookmark and Add Bookmark As bookmarks differ in one significant way. You can
edit the bookmarked text of either.

The name of an automatic bookmark changes as you edit it.

The name of a bookmark as bookmark (what appears in the list of bookmarks in the
Navigator and in the Cross Reference dialog) does not change.
The text each of them represents in any cross-reference where it appears in the document
changes as you type.
You can also add a bookmark to selected text using two additional methods.
Press 4 and choosing Add Bookmark or Add Bookmark As from the contextual menu
that appears.
When the Navigator is open and set to Bookmarks, click the + in the lower left corner of the
document window and choose Add Bookmark or Add Bookmark As from the pop-up
menu that appears.

Display the bookmarks Navigator pane

Choose Show Bookmarks in Navigator from the Bookmarks submenu of the Insert menu.
Nisus Writer Pro lists all the bookmarks in your document.

At the top of the Navigator pane, when the list is scrolled to the top, Nisus Writer Pro displays either
Bookmarks or Table of Contents. You can click that label to switch the display.
You can close the Navigator by choosing the menu command Gear > Hide Navigator at the bottom
of the Navigator pane.
You can modify the appearance of the Navigator pane.

By default it appears on the left side of your document. To display Navigator pane on the right
side of your document:

Choose (uncheck) the menu command View > Navigator > Attach on Left Side.
The text of the Navigator pane displays on a white background in Lucida Grande 12 pt. You can
change the color of the background and the font to any other font and size you want in the

222

Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references

Book Tools

Appearance preferences of Nisus Writer Pro as explained in Set the font used in the Navigator
pane on page 394.

You can select a range of bookmarks in the Navigator and copy them for use in any document.

Edit an automatically named bookmark

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.

Place your insertion point at least one character in from either the end or the beginning of the
bookmarked text.
Add whatever text you want to add to the marked text.
Remove the leading or trailing character.
For example, suppose you have marked the word word but you want to change it to read
sword and still have it all marked so that you can cross-reference to the text.
Put your insertion point to the right of the w
w|ord
type sw
wsword
delete the w at the beginning of the word
sword
Conversely to change word into words and still have the entire word marked
Put your insertion point to the left of the d
wor|d
type ds
wordsd
delete the d at the end of the word
words

Edit the name of a Bookmark as bookmark

1.
2.
3.

Make sure that the Navigator pane is open and set to Bookmarks.
Select any part of the bookmarked text.
Choose Rename Bookmarkfrom the Gear menu at the bottom of the Navigator pane.
A sheet appears in which you can rename the bookmark. Note that because the current name
is in the text edit field, the dialog indicates that a bookmark with that name already exists.

Figure 251
The rename bookmark dialog
4.

Type the name you want to use.

As soon as you start typing your bookmarks new name, the Rename Bookmark button
becomes enabled as illustrated in Figure 252.

Creating Documents

223

Figure 252
Renaming a bookmark
5.

Click Rename Bookmark.

Your bookmark appears, renamed in the Navigator window.

Figure 253
Renamed bookmark

224

Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references

Book Tools

Jump to Bookmarked Text

1.

Be sure that the Navigator is showing.

Choose either the menu command View > Navigator > Show Navigator or Insert >
Bookmarks > Show Bookmarks in Navigator.
Click the bookmark name in the Navigator.
If the Navigator pane is already open, displaying the Table of Contents, you can choose the
menu command Gear > Show Bookmarks at the bottom of the pane.
At the top of the pane, when the list is scrolled to the top, Nisus Writer Pro displays either
Table of Contents or Bookmarks. You can click that label to switch the display.

2.

You can close the Navigator by choosing the menu command Gear > Hide Navigator at the
bottom of the Navigator pane.

View bookmarks in alphabetical order

Choose the menu command Gear > View by Name at the bottom of the Navigator pane.

Figure 254
The Gear menu of the Navigator pane displaying bookmarks by name

View bookmarks according to their location in the document

Choose the menu command Gear > View by Location at the bottom of the Navigator pane.

You can jump back and forth to any marker in the footnotes/endnotes and the main portion of your
document. You cannot bookmark text in your headers and/or footers.
If you add a bookmark by selecting text and choosing the menu command Insert > Bookmarks > Add
Bookmark and later change the text of the bookmark (as explained above), Nisus Writer Pro
automatically updates the name of the bookmark in the Navigator. However, if you add a bookmark
using Add Bookmark As Nisus Writer Pro does not update the name of the bookmark in the
Navigator.

Creating Documents

225

Move a Bookmark
Select and cut the bookmarked text.
Paste the passage in another part of the document.
You can even paste bookmarked text into another document making the marker available in the
second document.

1.
2.

Remove a Bookmark
Select any portion of the bookmarked text
Choose the menu command Insert > Bookmarks > Remove Bookmark.
If you have multiple bookmarks associated with the same string of text, a sheet appears

1.
2.

Figure 255
The Remove Multiple Bookmarks sheet
3.
4.

Select the bookmark(s) you want to remove (or deselect the one(s) you want to retain).
Click Remove.
You can also easily delete a bookmark from selected text when the Navigator pane is open and
set to Bookmarks.

click the - in the lower left corner of the document window.

See bookmarked text

Nisus Writer Pro can highlight text marked for various purposes. It can distinguish between
bookmarked text and cross-referenced text.

See Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents on page 388.

Add Cross-References to Your Text

Nisus Writer Pro automatically keeps track of all the list items you create in your document and
makes them available for cross-referencing. In addition, you can add a cross-reference to any
bookmark you have added to the document.

You can also add a hyperlink, a form of cross reference to any

file on your connected hard drive(s) as explained in Add a hyperlink to any file on your
connected hard drive(s) on 229,

content available in the bookmark dialog as explained in Add a hyperlink to any content
available in the bookmark dialog on page 229.
This allows you to keep your thoughts on the writing while Nisus Writer Pro keeps track of where
certain discussions and illustrations appear. Cross-references are used extensively throughout this
document.
1. Put your insertion point where you want the cross-reference to appear.
2. Choose the menu command Insert > Cross-reference.

226

Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references

Book Tools

Figure 256
The Cross-reference dialog; bookmarks sorted by location in the Navigator pane and by display text in the Cross-reference
sheet
You have many options. The dialog opens listing your bookmarks. You can show them by
location in the document or sort them alphabetically by their text. The cross-reference display
the page number on which the marked text appears or in a variety of other ways.

3.

In Figure 256 above, clicking Insert will place the page number where John Manlys Talk was
bookmarked at the end of the parenthesized phrase that appears at the bottom of the screen
(where the pointer appears).
Choose the kind of item to which you want to refer from the Insert Reference to pop-up menu
at the top of the dialog.
The various options include:

Bookmark
Or, if they exist in the document, any of the following:

List Item
A List Item is any paragraph in a List style such as those available from the List button
on the Toolbar (as explained in Creating Lists on page 48) or others you may have created
(such as, in this document all of the Figure and Table numbers as well as bulleted items
and instruction lists). These appear in the list by their List Item (bullet, number or
figure, etc.) followed by the text of paragraph.

Table
Any table inserted using the Table tools of Nisus Writer Pro. The reference displayed in the
list is the first text that appears in the upper-left-most cell of the table (that has any text).

Footnote
Any footnote inserted into your document. The reference displayed in the list is the number
and its text.

Endnote
Any endnote inserted into your document. The reference displayed in the list is the number
and its text.

Text in TOC
Any text marked for a Table of Contents inserted into your document.

Creating Documents
4.

227
Locate and select the item to which you want to refer.
Click Location to display the items in the order as they appear in the document.
Typing the first few characters of the item scrolls the list to that point. In Figure 256 above,
typing
jo
would select John Manlys Talk.

Or:
Click Display text to display the items alphabetically.
Typing the first few characters of the item scrolls the list to that point. In Figure 256 above,
typing
jo
would select Joe Green.

Based on the type of item to which you want to refer, you have a variety of options available for
what appears as the cross-reference.
5. Choose what you want to have appear as the cross-reference text from the Display text pop-up
menu (depending on which option you chose (in step 3 above) from the Insert Reference to
pop-up menu).

Bookmark

Page Number
displays the number of the page where the marker appears.

Paragraph Number
displays the number of the paragraph where the marker appears.

Line Number
displays the number of the line where the marker appears.

Section Number
displays the number of the section where the marker appears.

List Item Number

you might bookmark a bit of text that begins with an automatic list number; you can
use this to refer to that number without mentioning the text; if you then add a return
character before the bookmarked text, the cross-reference will reflect the new number.

Bookmarked Text
displays the actual text you marked.

Above or Below
if your reference is nearby (within sight of the bookmark you can simply indicate that it
is above or below).
List Item

Page Number
displays the number of the page where the list item appears.

Paragraph Number
displays the number of the paragraph where the marker appears.

Line Number
displays the number of the line where the list item appears.

Section Number
displays the number of the section where the list item appears.

List Item Number

displays the number (the digit only, not any following punctuation) of the list item as in
the parenthetical statement of 5 above.
If the list item is a bullet, or some other text, that bullet or other text appears.

Paragraph Text
displays only the text of the list item, not its number as (using instruction 5 above)
illustrated here:
Choose what you want to have appear as the cross-reference text from the Display text
pop-up menu (depending on which option you chose (in step 3 above) from the Insert
Reference to pop-up menu).

Above or Below
for use in conjunction with any of the other options, when you do not want to refer to
the text or number directly.

228

Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references

Book Tools

Table

Page Number
displays the number of the page where the first line of the table appears.

Paragraph Number
displays the number of the paragraph where the marker appears.

Line Number
displays the number of the line where the first line of the table appears.

Section Number
displays the number of the section where the first line of the table appears.

Above or Below
for use in conjunction with any of the other options, when you do not want to refer to
the text or number directly, or when the referent is obvious.
Footnote or Endnote

Page Number
displays the number of the page where the footnote or endnote appears.

Paragraph Number
displays the number of the paragraph where the marker appears.

Line Number
displays the number of the line where the footnote or endnote appears.

Section Number
displays the number of the section where the footnote or endnote appears.

Note Number
displays the number of the note.

Above or Below
for use in conjunction with any of the other options, when you do not want to refer to
or display the text or number, or when the referent is obvious.
Text in TOC

Page Number
displays the number of the page where the footnote or endnote appears.

Paragraph Number
displays the number of the paragraph where the marker appears.

Line Number
displays the number of the line where the footnote or endnote appears.

Section Number
displays the number of the section where the footnote or endnote appears.

Marked Text
displays the actual text you marked for the Table of Contents.

Above or Below
for use in conjunction with any of the other options, when you do not want to refer to
or display the text or number, or when the referent is obvious.
6. Determine whether or not you want the text above or below to appear in relation to the text
and check:

Append above or below after number.

Certain options in the Display Text popup menu enable you to append above or below
directly to the cross-reference these include

Page Number
Paragraph Number
List Item Number

Note Number.
Determine whether or not you want the hyperlink maintained if and when you save your file as
a PDF document:

Click Hyperlink to target when saved as PDF.

After you save your file as a PDF, when you open the file in Adobe Acrobat Reader or Apples
Preview applications you will be able to click the cross-references and select the bookmarked
text or page.
8. Click Insert.
Your cross-reference appears at the location of the insertion point. It is one character in your
document, even though it may consist of an entire paragraph of text.
7.

Creating Documents

229

Adding other links in your text

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to add a variety of links into your text.

Add a hyperlink to any content available in the bookmark dialog

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

Select the text to which you want to add the link.

Choose the menu command Insert > Hyperlink > Add Link to Bookmark.
Choose the kind of item to which you want the link to point as explained in step 3 on page 226.
Locate and select the item to which you want to link as explained in step 4 on page 227.
Because only a link is added to the selected text and nothing is inserted in the text of the
document the steps explained in 5 on page 227 through 7 on page 228 do not apply.
Click Insert.

Add a hyperlink to any file on your connected hard drive(s)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the text to which you want to add the link.

Choose the menu command Insert > Hyperlink > Add Link to File.
A variant of the Open dialog appears
Locate and select the item to which you want to link.
Click Insert Hyperlink.
More information about these kinds of links is available in the discussion about how to open
various files on page 2.

Add a hyperlink to a location on the World Wide Web

This feature and how to use it is explained in detail in the section Insert a Link to a Location on
the World Wide Web on page 440.

Find the Original Bookmarked Text to Which the Cross-Reference

Refers
You may have marked a section of your document and then inserted a cross-reference to that
marker. It often happens, in longer documents, that you forget where figure 318 appears.

Double-click the cross-reference.

Nisus Writer Pro selects the original bookmarked text.

Have cross-referenced text hyperlinked when saving your file as a PDF

Click Hyperlink to target when saved as PDF. as indicated in step 7 above.
After you save your file as a PDF you will be able to click the cross-references and have Adobe
Acrobat Reader or Apples Preview select the bookmarked text or page

See cross-referenced text

Nisus Writer Pro can highlight text marked for various purposes. It can distinguish between
bookmarked text and cross-referenced text.

See Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents on page 388.

230

Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references

Book Tools

Jump to Any Page in Your Document

You can quickly jump to any page in your document. There are two methods.

Jump to any page using the menus

1.

Choose the menu command View > Go to Page, or, when in Page View the Page pop-up
menu in the lower left corner of the Statusbar as illustrated in Figure 257.

Figure 257
The Page pop-up menu
2.
3.

Enter the page number to which you wish to jump.

Choose either Logical Page Number or Physical Page Number from the pop-up menu in the
dialog.

Figure 258
The Go to Page sheet and its pop-up menu
4.

Click OK.
You can use this method even if your document is in Draft View. Nisus Writer Pro will
automatically switch to Page View.
If you have multiple sections in your document or you have begun your page number
counting at something other than 1, you can choose Logical Page Numbers from the pop-up
menu. Logical refers to the page number as it would appear on the printed document,
whereas Physical refers to the actual physical number of pages from the beginning of the
document.

Jump to any page using the page number display in the Statusbar
1.
2.

Click your pointer in the page number display on the lower left corner of the Statusbar.
Type the page number to which you wish to jump.

Figure 259
The Go to Page field on the Statusbar
Nisus Writer Pro displays the page numbers as you type, either the physical or logical page
number whichever you have chosen to display on the Statusbar.

You can use this method only if your document is in Page View, as the Statusbar does not
display any page information while in Draft View.
If you have multiple sections in your document or you have begun your page number
counting at something other than 1, you can choose to Show Logical Page Numbers instead
Show Physical Page Numbers from the pop-up menu that appears. Logical refers to the
page number as it would appear on the printed document, whereas Physical refers to the
actual physical number of pages from the beginning of the document.
In this document the current logical page is 230 while the physical page (shown and
controlled here by using a Custom Property) is 258.

Creating Documents

231

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to create both tables of contents and indexes. Your document can
have multiple tables of contents and indexes and each of these can have multiple levels. Nisus
Writer Pro also, using the tools of the table of contents, enables you to simulate many of the
features of using an outline.

About Tables of Contents and Indexes

Nisus Writer lists items in the table of contents in the same order as they appear in the document.
All index entries display in alphabetical order.
Creating a table of contents or an index involves selecting entries and then choosing the
appropriate command to mark that text for inclusion in the table of contents or index. Nisus Writer
automatically inserts both the table of contents and index at the insertion point when you create
that item.
Here are some guidelines for creating a table of contents and an index

Always select text before marking it.

Marked text displays in the table of contents and index (except for index as text) as it does in
the document (though not with its font, size or style attributes).

Tables of Contents
A table of contents is a list of headings related to specific portions of your document with page
numbers that indicate where discussion of that subject begins. It is usually placed at the beginning
of a document. It is possible to have various tables of contents one for text and another for
illustrations, tables, equations, authorities, etc. Items in a table of contents are listed in the order
in which they appear in the document.

Create a table of contents

You can create a table of contents at any time as you edit your text. However, if you add and/or
remove text marked for inclusion in a table of contents, you will need to manually update the table
of contents as explained in Update the table of contents you have inserted into your document on
page 233. Page numbers are always updated automatically when you print your document.

When you do print your document, if it is as a PDF, the entire table of contents heading is clickable
for navigation in the document, not just the page number.

Designate text to appear in the table of contents

Select the text you want to appear in the table of contents.
Choose the appropriate level (Level 1 - Level 9) from the menu Tools > Table of Contents >
Include in TOC or from the contextual menu that appears when you press 6 or right click
your mouse or secondary click your trackpad.
3. Complete steps 1 and 2 for each entry you want the table of contents to include.
When the Navigator pane is open, you can also designate selected text to appear in the table
of contents:

Click the Plus (+) button at the bottom of the Navigator pane and choose the appropriate
level (Level 1 - Level 9).
1.
2.

See what text has been included in the table of contents

Nisus Writer Pro offers two ways to see what you have included in the table of contents. You can
highlight the text in your document, or, you can display the Navigator which lists all entries in the
table of contents in a pane along the left side of your document window.

Display the table of contents Navigator pane

Nisus Writer Pro can display a (resizable) pane on the left side of your document window that lists
all the bookmarks or table of contents entries in the document.
1. Choose the menu command View > Show Navigator.
2. In the Navigator pane choose the menu command Gear > Show Table of Contents at the
bottom of the pane.
Nisus Writer Pro lists all the table of contents entries in a hierarchy (if there is one).
At the top of the Navigator pane, when the list is scrolled to the top, Nisus Writer Pro displays either
Table of Contents or Bookmarks. You can click that label to switch the display.
You can close the Navigator by choosing the menu command Gear > Hide Navigator at the bottom
of the Navigator pane.

232

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

You can modify the appearance of the Navigator pane.

By default it appears on the left side of your document. To display Navigator pane on the right
side of your document:

Choose (uncheck) the menu command View > Navigator > Attach on Left Side.

The text of the Navigator pane displays on a white background in Lucida Grande 12 pt. You can
change the color of the background and the font to any other font and size you want in the
Appearance preferences of Nisus Writer Pro as explained in Set the font used in the Navigator
pane on page 394.

You can select a range of table of contents entries in the Navigator and copy them for use in any
document. This does not maintain any existing hierarchy.

Jump to a heading in the table of contents

Click the headings text in the Navigator. Nisus Writer Pro displays that portion of text in the
document.
This moves the focus of the document to the Navigator pane.

Once a heading is selected you can move up and down the list.

Jump to the next or previous heading in the table of contents

Choose Select Next in TOC or Select Previous in TOC from the menu Tools > Table of
Contents, depending on which direction you wish to move in your document.
Nisus Writer Pro selects the next or previous heading.

Move about in the Navigator

Type the first few characters of your heading to select it.

Press the up and down arrow keys to move up or down in the list respectively.
As with list view in the Finder, you can collapse or expand the hierarchy.
Click the reveal triangle to the left of a heading to collapse and (then again) to expand the
hierarchy.

Press 4 as you click the triangle expands or collapses all child items as well.

Clicking the triangle will not move the display of the document.
Press the right and left arrow keys to collapse and expand the hierarchy.
Press T or < to shift the focus back to the text area of your document.

Highlight text marked for the table of contents

Nisus Writer Pro can highlight text marked for the table of contents so that you can see that text as
you scroll through the document.

See Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents on page 388.

Remove an entry from the table of contents

1.
2.
3.

Select the text you want to remove from the table of contents.
Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Remove from TOC or from the
contextual menu that appears when you press 6 or right click your mouse or secondary
click your trackpad.
Complete steps 1 and 2 for each entry you want removed from the table of contents.
You can apply this to a range of text and remove all selected entries from the table of
contents.

Set the various headings of your document so that they automatically appear in the
table of contents
You can apply any level of a table of contents to any Paragraph Style in your document. This makes
marking text for the table of contents automatic.
1. Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet.
2. Select the level of heading you want to have automatically included in the table of contents.
3. Choose the appropriate level (Level 1 - Level 9) from the menu Tools > Table of Contents >
Include in TOC.
4. Complete steps 2 and 3 for each level of heading you want the table of contents to include.

Creating Documents

Tables of Contents

233

Figure 260
Heading styles indicating that they are automatically included in the table of contents In Default TOC, Level #

Insert a table of contents into your document

1.
2.

Put your insertion point where you want the table of contents to appear.
Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Insert TOC.

Update the table of contents you have inserted into your document
When you insert a table of contents into your document you can see at a glance the overall
structure of your document. The table of contents you have displayed in your document is not
live. You might, change sections, either modifying the text of your headings or moving portions of
your text to a different location in the document. When this happens the information in the
displayed table of contents is no longer accurate.
1. Select any of the text of the inserted table of contents.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Rebuild TOC or from the
contextual menu that appears when you press 6 or right click your mouse or secondary
click your trackpad in the table of contents area.

234

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Figure 261
The Basic setting of the Rebuild Table of Contents dialog
3.

In the dialog that appears you have a variety of options.

On the Basic level you can

Choose Only update the page numbers. Or

Choose Update all content.

For more options, click the Advanced tab.

Figure 262
The Advanced setting of the Rebuild Table of Contents dialog
Choose Update page numbers. And/or
Choose Add new entries and remove stale entries. And/or

Choose Synchronize existing entries.

Choosing all of the options in the Advanced portion of the dialog is the same as choosing
Update all content in the Basic setting.
4. When you are satisfied with your choices, click Update.
You can also rebuild a table of contents by pressing 6 while in the table of contents area and
choosing Rebuild TOC from the contextual menu that appears.

Remove a table of contents from your document

Select the range of text that makes up the table of contents and choose Cut or Delete from the
Edit menu.

Creating Documents

Tables of Contents

235

Format the text of your table of contents

The format (appearance) of the table of contents is controlled by two tools of Nisus Writer Pro.

The settings in the Configure TOCs dialog as explained and illustrated in Figure 263 below).
The Paragraph Styles of your documents Style Sheet explained in Modify a style on page 107.

Figure 263
The Configure TOCs dialog

Determine whether page numbers appear or not

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Configure TOC Styles.
Choose the table of contents style you want to modify in the Style Name pop-up menu in the
Configure TOCs dialog.
Check or uncheck Include page numbers.
Click Apply Changes.

Determine whether numbers follow a tab or not

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Configure TOC Styles.
Choose the table of contents style you want to modify in the Style Name pop-up menu in the
Configure TOCs dialog.
Check or uncheck Use tabs to align page numbers.
Click Apply Changes.

Set what appears when line breaks or tab characters appear in marked text
It might occur that line breaks and/or tab characters appear in text marked for the table of
contents. generally you would not want these characters in the table of contents itself.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Configure TOC Styles.
2. Choose the table of contents style you want to modify in the Style Name pop-up menu in the
Configure TOCs dialog.
3. Check or uncheck Use tabs to align page numbers.
4. Click Apply Changes.

Set the paragraph style associated with each level of the table of contents
When you first generate a table of contents by choosing Insert TOC, Nisus Writer Pro generates
nine new Styles that were latent in your document. By default each of these styles is associated
with the corresponding level of your table of contents. You can modify the attributes of these styles
called TOC 1 though TOC 9. in the Style Sheet view of Nisus Writer Pro.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Configure TOC Styles.
2. Choose the table of contents style you want to modify in the Style Name pop-up menu in the
Configure TOCs dialog.
3. Type or paste the character you want to appear in the table of contents in either or both of the
the text edit boxes to the right of

Replace line breaks in marked text with

236

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

4.

Replace tab characters in marked text with

Click Apply Changes.

Set the leader that appears between the table of contents text and the page number
1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Configure TOC Styles.
Choose the table of contents style you want to modify in the Style Name pop-up menu in the
Configure TOCs dialog.
Click any one of the following

4.

None
Dotted ()
Dashed(---)
Custom Character(s) (and enter the character(s) you want to use)
Underline (and choose the style of line you want from the pop-up menu)
Click Apply Changes.

Modify the appearance of the text in the table of contents

1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet

Select the TOC Style you want to modify.
Modify the Style as explained in Modify a style on page 107.

Add highlight color to your inserted table of contents

You can highlight the table of contents in your document to distinguish it from normal text as
explained in Determine the color of various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working environment
on page 395.

Create a new table of contents

You can create any number of tables of contents for your document.

Table of Content headings

Table of Figures
Table of Tables
Table of Equations
Table of Authorities
Each unique table of contents has its own Style.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Table of Contents > Configure TOC Styles.
2. Click New.
3. Name the style appropriately for your needs.
4. Reconfigure the attributes as you wish as explained in Format the text of your table of
contents on page 235.

If you want to use a special paragraph style, you need to have created that style before you can
choose it in Configure TOCs dialog.

Creating Documents

Tables of Contents

Figure 264
The Configure TOCs dialog reconfigured for a new table of contents
5.

Click Apply Changes.

Determine which table of contents is active

The command checked beneath Configure TOC Styles indicates the name of the current table of
contents among those that exist in the document. This is the table of contents that is active,
highlighted (in the text), and will be inserted when you choose Insert TOC. The active Table of
Contents is the one to which text will be included when you choose one of the various levels of the
submenu Include in TOC.

Choose the name of that table of contents from the bottom of the menu Tools > Table of
Contents.

Quickly add text to the table of contents of your choice

You can use the Table of Contents palette to add text to the table of contents without using the
menus.
1. Choose the menu command Window > Palettes > Table of Contents.

Figure 265
The Table of Contents palette
2.
3.
4.

You can allow the window to float wherever it is most comfortable for you.
Select text you want to include in the table of contents.
From the Active Style pop-up menu choose the table of contents in which you wish to have
this text appear.
From the Include Text at pop-up menu choose the level in the table of contents at which the
text should appear.

237

238

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Maintain a running table of contents

You can also use markers and cross-references (see pages 221 and 225) to create a running table of
contents that constantly updates itself as illustrated at the top of each section in this document.
After you have thoroughly marked your document, place your insertion point near the top of a
chapter.
1. Create a Style (as explained in Create a new style on page 110) that has the attributes you
want for the contents.

Figure 266
A style for a table of contents
Place your insertion point where you want the contents to appear and choose the menu
command Insert > Cross-reference.
3. Choose Bookmark from the Insert Reference to pop-up menu at the top of the dialog.
4. Scroll to the bookmark for the heading of the specified portion of your document.
You can display the list either in alphabetical order, or, in the sequence they appear in your
document.
5. Choose Bookmarked Text from the Display Text pop-up menu at the bottom of the dialog and
click Insert.
6. Press @ to separate the heading from its page number.
7. Choose the menu command Insert > Cross-reference.
The marker name you just used is still selected.
8. Choose Page Number from the Display Text pop-up menu at the bottom of the dialog and
click Insert.
9. Repeat this process for each of the headings of the section.
Nisus Writer Pro keeps the page numbers in this list current at all times.
2.

Outlines
Nisus Writer Pro also enables you to simulate many of the features of using an outline.

What is an outline?
The Wikipedia has an excellent and simple description of an outline:
An outline is a hierarchical way to display related items of text to graphically depict their
relationships.

Using the Table of Contents Navigator as an outline

As explained above in Display the table of contents Navigator pane on 231, Nisus Writer Pro can
display a (resizable) pane on the left side of your document window that lists all the table of
contents entries in the document. If your table of contents is hierarchical, the view in the Navigator
reflects that hierarchy as illustrated in Figure 267 where we have taken liberties with Anna Sewells
novel Black Beauty.

Creating Documents

Outlines

Figure 267
The Table of Contents Navigator displaying a hierarchical outline

Modifying the structure of your document using the Table of Contents Navigator
You can modify the structure of your document, moving a portion higher or lower in the text,
promoting or demoting various portions using the Table of Contents Navigator.

Moving portions of your document

1.
2.

Click the heading for the portion of your document you wish to move in the Table of Contents
Navigator.
Drag and drop the heading where you want the material to appear.
As illustrated in Figure 268, if there are sub headings these are automatically selected and
moved as well.

239

240

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Figure 268
Moving a portion of a document using the Table of Contents Navigator
If you use the automatic numbering systems of Nisus Writer Pro (and have them set to Continue
Numbering from Previous) Nisus Writer Pro will automatically renumber appropriately as
illustrated in Figure 269.

Figure 269
Automatic renumbering in the Table of Contents Navigator

Creating Documents

Outlines

241

Demoting portions of your document

You can easily demote a heading in the hierarchy of your documents table of contents.
1. Click the heading for the portion of your document you wish to move in the Table of Contents
Navigator.
2. Press @ or click the Indent button on the Toolbar or choose the menu command Format >
Increase List Level.
As contrasted with moving portions of your document, explained above, this only demotes the
actual heading(s) selected (whether contiguous or multipart).

Promoting portions of your document

You can easily promote a heading in the hierarchy of your documents table of contents.
1. Click the heading for the portion of your document you wish to move in the Table of Contents
Navigator.
2. Press 1 @ or click the Outdent button on the Toolbar or choose the menu command Format
> Decrease List Level.
As contrasted with moving portions of your document, explained above, this only promotes the
actual heading(s) selected (whether contiguous or multipart).
Nisus Writer Pro cannot hide or fold text under a heading in the body of your document.

242

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Indexes
An index is an alphabetical list of terms (words, numerals, symbols, and/or phrases) that may
appear in your document. These are related to key topics discussed in your text. The terms are
followed by page numbers that indicate where these ideas are discussed. An index is usually placed
at the end of a document. It is possible to have various indexes; for example subjects, proper
names, foreign words, etc.

Create an index
Though you can create an index (and certainly mark text for the index) at any time as you edit your
text, you should not create your final index until you finish the final formatting of your document
and every character is on the page where you want it to print.

Designate text to appear in the index

1.
2.
3.

Select the text you want to appear in the index.

Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index.
Complete steps 1 and 2 for each entry you want the index to include.
Nisus Writer Pro distinguishes between Uppercase and lowercase variants of the same words
when creating the index and lists each occurrence separately.
You can index items contained in the footnotes. The page number associated with the indexed
text is that on which that text appears in the footnotes, not the page on which the footnote first
appears.

Index one thing as something else index as

The simple method of marking words for an index would index the words fish and fishing
individually. Both words will appear as separate entries in the index.

fish 2-4, 7, 149

fishing 4-6
Similarly, you may have one term in your document and want to refer to it using a more general
term in the index. In this case you index one thing as something else. For example you may have
horse, mare or colt all appearing in your document and want to have them all referred to in the
index as Horse.
Using Index As allows you to index the selection as any key word or phrase you specify.
(You can, depending on the emphasis of your document, index fish as fishing or fishing as
fish so that the example above would have only one entry:

fish 2-7, 14

fishing 2-7, 149

You can use Index As to change the uppercase words in the document so they appear as
lowercase in the index. Using this feature, you can also select a paragraph of text and index it as a
single word.
1. Select the text you want to index.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index As.

Figure 270
The Index As dialog
3.

The currently selected text appears in the Index As box.

Type the text you want to appear in the index into the Index as topic box.

Creating Documents
4.

Indexes

243

Check the commands you want in the dialog then click Mark.

Of course, if you index a word as the same word, it is equivalent to choosing Index.
Internally, however, Index As and Index are different. This internal difference is important under
the following circumstances:

When you want to create overlapping index entries (as explained on page 247)
When you edit the entries.
If you change the text in the document with the attribute Index, what appears in the index
changes also.
But only if any text you add is not at the end of the indexed text. This process is similar to
adding text to a bookmark as explained in Edit an automatically named bookmark on page
222.
If you change the Index As text in the document, the text in the index does not change.

Emphasize the page of a particular occurrence of an item in the index

You might have a document that deals with the same subject in many locations but one of them is
more important than the rest. You can make this page (or range of pages) stand out.
So, for example, the word race (as in horse race appears a number of times in the novel Black
Beauty. It appears as races on page 5 and then again as race on pages 42, 63 and 105. However
the word appears twice on page 63 suggesting that this is the primary instance. You can cause page
63 to appear highlighted in the index:
race, 42, 63, 105
races, 5

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the word, on the page that is to be highlighted.

Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index As.
Make sure that Automatically generate topic from text and List page number are selected.
Check the Listing formatting you want to use (either bold or italic, or both)
Click Mark.

Figure 271
Highlight a page occurrence in the index

244

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Emphasize a particular term in the index

You might have a document that deals with a wide variety of subjects that have similar spellings.
You can make any one of those terms stand out.
1. Select the word, or phrase to be emphasized.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index As.
3. Select either Automatically generate topic from text or Use the following topic and make
sure the text is as you want it to appear in the index (you can have it appear as a sub-topic and
you can add bold and/or italic to the text portion of the listing).
4. Click either List page number or List cross-reference to have the listing refer to a particular
page in the document or to another term in the index.
5. Check the Listing formatting you want to use (either bold or italic, or both)
6. Click Mark.

Index multiple terms as one term using the Find/Replace tool

You can use the Find/Replace window to index text. In this way you can use PowerFind (or, if you
wish, regular expressions and PowerFind Pro) to find the text you want to index.
PowerFind is explained on page 308. PowerFind Pro is discussed at length beginning on page 324. A
discussion of the Or metacharacter appears on page 313.
For example, as described above, you may want to index the subject horses in your document.
Horses may be discussed wherever the words horse, horses, mare or colt are used. Use the Find/
Replace window to enter the following PowerFind expression illustrated in Figure 272 below.

Figure 272
Using Or to index multiple terms as one
This will find all occurrences of the words. Note that the Or is not typed but entered by choosing
the menu command Gear > Match > Or of the Find what text edit box of the Find/Replace window.
7. Find (and select) the terms you want to index as one as illustrated in Figure 272 above.
8. Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index As.
The dialog appears with all the selected text in the Index as topic text box.
9. Type the word you want to have appear in the index.
10. Click Mark.

Creating Documents

Indexes

245

Use the index to refer to other entries

If you want to index fish as fishing (have fishing appear in the index) and refer to the actual
pages in your document (where the word fish appears), the instructions in Index one thing as
something else index as on page 242 suffice. However, if you do not want the page numbers to
appear but rather have the reader refer to a different subject in the index, Nisus Writer Pro offers a
different tool. You may be writing a technical text about various animals and, rather than have the
reader find numerous entries for different subsets of those animals you want them to refer to a
more technical, or higher level term. This method also permits referencing other index entries. You
can refer readers to other entries with the text you type into List cross-reference box.
1. Select the text you want to index.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index As.
The currently selected text appears in the Index as topic box.

Figure 273
The Index As dialog set for a cross-reference
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.
9.

Type the text you want to appear in the index into Index as topic box.
Check one or both of the Topic formatting options, if you want.
Click List cross-reference.
Click in the text box to the right to activate it. Horse
Type the secondary index entry in the text edit box.
You can leave the See: text that is already in the List cross-reference text edit box or type
over it.
Check one or both of the Listing formatting options, if you want.
Click Mark.

Index all occurrences of the word in the Index as topic box

You may want to index all occurrences of the word in the Index as topic box.
Click Mark All.

Add an additional Index As reference to indexed text

1.
2.

3.

Select the indexed as text to which you want to add an additional reference in the index.
Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Additional Index As.
The dialog illustrated in Figure 157 above appears as if this was the first time you were adding
the selected entry to the index.
Complete steps 1 and 2 in the section Index one thing as something else index as on page
242 for each entry you want the index to include.

246

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Create a hierarchical index

1.
2.

Select the text you want indexed.

Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index As.

Figure 274
Sub-topics for a hierarchical index
3.
4.
5.

In the Index as topic text box enter the text you want to appear in the index.
In the Sub-topic(s) text box enter the sub-topic(s) you want to appear in the index.
If you want more than one level of sub-topics, separate each level of the hierarchy with a colon
( : ).
Figure 274 above will cause the following to appear in the index
Bidirectional
Arabic, Hebrew, Ladino, Pashtun, Persian, Urdu, Yiddish, ii, 44, 48

6.

Click Mark.
Nisus Writer Pro supports nine (9) levels in the hierarchy.

You can create a text string with what you want to use and then paste this into the Index as topic
text box.

Creating Documents

Indexes

247

Create an index entry which references all text of a given font, size and/or style (or
language)
Similar to the instructions on Set the various headings of your document so that they
automatically appear in the table of contents which appear on page 232, you can apply the index
attribute to any Paragraph or Character Style in your document. This makes marking text for the
index automatic. Suppose you are writing a specialized document in which all the text in a
particular language should appear in the index.
1. Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet.
2. Select the Style you want to have automatically included in the index.
Creating new styles is explained in Create a new style on page 110.
3. Select the sample text.
4. Choose the appropriate index from the bottom of the menu Tools > Index.
Creating a new index is explained in Create a new index on page 252.

Figure 275
A special language Character style set for inclusion in an index
5.

Complete steps 2 through 4 for each separate style you want included in its own index.

This documents Index of Commands and Screen Messages is created in this manner.
You can use the Find/Replace capability of Nisus Writer Pro to select text patterns that you want to
index.

Index overlapping entries

You must use two different methodsIndex and Index As, and/or Additional Index As. For
example, if you wish to index dogs, cats, birds, and iguanas as Pets in the following sentence The
pet store sells dogs, cats, birds, and iguanas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

The pet store sells dogs, cats, birds, and iguanas.

Select dogs, cats, birds, and iguanas as shown above,
Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index As.
Type Pets in the Index as topic box and click Mark.
Select iguanas.
The pet store sells dogs, cats, birds, and iguanas.
Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index.
By doing this, you have added two overlapping entries to the index Pets and iguanas.

248

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Automatically index your document using a word list

You may want to automatically search through your document to find all occurrences of a
particular set of terms that should be indexed. To do this Nisus Writer Pro requires a word list file.
Such a file consists of a list of terms, each associated with a particular indexing topic. This word
list file should should contain a single table the word in your document to index on the left
followed by a tab then the text that should represent that word in the index on the right.
dogs
cats
birds
iguanas
horse
mare
Colt

Pets
Pets
Pets
Pets
Horse
Horse
Horse

Table 28
An example of a index word list table
1.
2.
3.

Select the portion of your document you want to index using the word list file you have created
using the Create Word List (v4) macro, as explained in Create a word list as a tool for
preparing an index on page 248.
Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Index Using Word List.
A variant of the Open dialog appears.
Locate your word list file, select it and click Auto Index.
The command Index Using Word List selects each paragraph (that is each line in the word
list document consisting of anything from a character to a lengthy phrase ending in a Return)
then searches the document for that text and marks it for the index.
Nisus Writer Pro indexes every occurrence of every character/word/phrase in the word list and
distinguishes between Uppercase and lowercase characters in the list and indexes each
occurrence separately.
While for most texts indexing every instance of a particular word would be superfluous, this
tool would make sense for certain technical texts.

Create a word list as a tool for preparing an index

The Create Word List (v4) macro supplied with Nisus Writer Pro works on a selection of your
document and creates a new document with an alphabetical list of all the words in that selection.
Another useful tool is the Create Word Frequency List macro. This command works on a selection of
your document and creates a new document containing a word list sorted with the most frequently
used word at the top (with the number of its occurrences) and the least frequently used word at the
bottom.
1. Select that portion of your document from which you want to create a word list.
2. Choose Create Word List (v4) or Create Word Frequency List from the Macro menu.
If you do not have a selection Create Word List (v4) presents a prompt illustrated in Figure 276
that asks you to decide whether the macro should scan the entire document or if you want to
stop the macro and make a selection.

Figure 276
The create word list on entire file? Macro Prompt
Nisus Writer Pro creates a new Untitled file with an alphabetical list (one word per paragraph)
of all the words in the selection. While you can create a word list of your document for any
purpose, these should be saved in a location and with a name associated with the document
you wish to index.

Creating Documents

Indexes

249

Eliminate the terms you do not want to index.

When Nisus Writer Pro indexes a document using a word list file it requires that the word list
consist of a table. The word (or phrase) in the left column is the word to find in the document.
The word (or phrase) in the right column is what should appear in the index. The two columns
must be separated by a tab. You can use colonsto separate sub-topics, as explained inCreate
a hierarchical index on page 246:

3.

Bidirectional
Arabic, Hebrew, Ladino, Pashtun, Persian, Urdu, Yiddish, ii, 44, 48

If you are working from the file created by Create Word List (v4),
place your insertion point after the word (or phrase) you want to index, press @ then add
the word (or phrase) you want to appear in the index.
If you are working from the file created by Create Word Frequency List, this macro places the
frequency to the left of the word. You can reverse this sequence by selecting the text in the
document and choosing the menu command Macro > Swap Columns.

Select the number that represents the occurrences in the file and replace that with the
word (or phrase) you want to appear in the index.
5. Save the file. You can always change it at another time.
4.

See what text has been included in the index

Nisus Writer Pro can highlight text marked for the index. It can distinguish between text
automatically indexed by selecting it and choosing Index from the Index submenu of the Tools
menu and the text you have indexed as by selecting and choosing the menu command Insert >
Index > Index As (or by using a word list). This is explained in Determine the color of various
aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working environment on page 395.

Remove an entry from the index

1.
2.
3.

Select the text from which you want to remove the indexed attribute.
Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Remove Indexing.
Complete steps 1 and 2 for each entry you want removed from the index.
The command Remove Indexing removes all kinds of indexing (auto, Index As and
Additional Index As).

Insert an index into your document

1.
2.

Put your insertion point (at the end of your document) where you want the index to appear.
Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Insert Index.

Once you have inserted your index you can double-click a page number there to jump to that page
and select the indexed text. This is an excellent way to double-check the quality of your index. This
click-ability is preserved in the document created when you save or print your file as a PDF.

Update the index you have inserted into your document

When you insert an index into your document you can see at a glance the important subjects
discussed in your document. The index you have displayed in your document is not live. You
might, change sections, either modifying the terms in your text or moving portions of your text to a
different location in the document. When this happens the information in the displayed index may
no longer be accurate.
1. Select any of the text of the inserted index, or simply place your insertion point there.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Rebuild Index.
You can also rebuild an index by pressing 6 while in the index area and choosing Rebuild
Index from the contextual menu that appears.

Remove an index from your document

Select the range of text that makes up the index and choose Cut or Delete from the Edit menu.

250

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Format your index

The format (appearance) of your index is controlled by two primary tools of Nisus Writer Pro.

The settings in the Configure Indexes dialog as explained below.

The Paragraph Styles of your documents Style Sheet explained in Modify a style on page 107.

Figure 277
The Configure Indexes dialog

Determine the appearance of what separates the various sections of your index
You can put any character you want in the Heading format text edit box. However none of these
will increment except for an "Uppercase A".
1. Click your insertion point in the Heading format text edit box and type the character(s) you
want to have appear between each alphabetical section of the index.
You can use dingbats (any character you can find in the Special Characters palette) to set off
the alphabetic headings so that they can appear as (for example)
A

2.
3.

You can use any Paragraph style that appears in your document to determine the attributes of
the header. Nisus Writer Pro creates a new style called Index Heading and chooses that as the
default style for these headings. You can modify that style in the Style Sheet view of Nisus
Writer Pro, or, you can
Choose the Paragraph style you want from the Heading paragraph style pop-up menu.
Click OK.

Determine what separates the index entry from its reference

1.
2.

3.
4.

Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Configure Index Styles.
Choose the index style you want to modify in the Style Name pop-up menu in the Configure
Indexes dialog.
The default character is a tab.
Enter the character(s) you want to have appear in the Before page number text edit box.
Click OK.

Creating Documents

Indexes

251

Determine what leader separates the index entry from its reference
If you use a tab to separate the index entry from its reference you can display any one of a variety of
items in the space that appears.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Configure Index Styles.
2. Choose the index style you want to modify in the Style Name pop-up menu in the Configure
Indexes dialog.
3. From the Leader portion at the bottom of the dialog click any one of the following

4.

None
Dotted ()
Dashed(---)
Custom Character(s) (and enter the character(s) you want to use)
Underline (and choose the style of line you want from the pop-up menu)
Click OK.

Determine the characters that separate page numbers in the index

If a subject is discussed in your document on more than one page and you refer to those pages in
the index Nisus Writer Pro offers a number of ways of setting these off from each other. You can
customize each one of them by entering the character you want in the text edit box associated with
each option.

Page number separator

Use when a subject appears on more than one page and they are not contiguous.

Page number range mark

Use when a subject appears on more than one page and they are contiguous.

Cross-reference separator
Use when one subject has a related subject in the index to which you wish to refer.

Have all sub-levels of the index appear on the same line (space permitting)
You can have all sub-levels of the index appear on the same line (space permitting), or, you can
have each sub-level indented on a separate line.

Click (check) Run together all topic sub-entries on the same line.
If you decide to have your sub-levels run together, you can determine the characters that set
them apart. The default characters are a colon between the primary indexed term and the sublevel and a semicolon between each sub-entry.

If you want to use a character other than the defaults already present, enter those
character(s) in the text edit boxes:

Run together topic suffix

Run together sub-entry separator

Set the paragraph style associated with each level of the index
When you first generate an index by choosing Insert Index, Nisus Writer Pro generates new Styles
(one for each level of indexing you have assigned) that were latent in your document. By default
each of theses styles is associated with the corresponding level of your index. You can modify the
attributes of these styles called Index 1 through Index 9. in the Style Sheet view of Nisus Writer
Pro.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Configure Index Styles.
2. Choose the Index style you want to modify in the Style Name pop-up menu in the Configure
Index Styles dialog.
3. Choose the level and the corresponding Paragraph style from the Formatting for and Use
paragraph style pop-up menus.
You can create a new style while in this dialog by clicking the + (plus) button beside the Use
paragraph style pop-up menu.
4. Click OK.
If you use a tab to separate the index entry from its reference you can display any one of a variety of
items in the space that appears.

Modify the appearance of the text in the index

1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet

Select the Index Style you want to modify.
Modify the Style as explained in Modify a style on page 107.

252

Creating Tables of Contents, Outlines and Indexes

Book Tools

Create a new index

You can create any number of indexes for your document.

Subject Index
Index of Specialized Terms
Index of Foreign Language Terms as described in Create an index entry which references
all text of a given font, size and/or style (or language) on page 247.
Index of References
Table of Authorities (which, while it has the name table is actually an index)
Each unique index has its own Style.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Index > Configure Index Styles.
2. Click New.

Figure 278
The Configure Indexes dialog with a new index style
3.
4.
5.

Name the style appropriately for your needs.

Reconfigure the attributes as you wish as explained in Format your index on page 250.
Click OK.

Determine which index is active

The command checked beneath Configure Index Styles indicates the name of the current index
among those that exist in the document. This is the index that is active, highlighted (in the text),
and will be inserted when you choose Insert Index. The active index is the one affected when you
choose any of the various commands of the menu Tools > Index.

Choose the name of that index from the bottom of the menu Tools > Index.

Creating Documents

Indexes

253

Quickly add text to the index of your choice

You can use the Indexing palette to add text to the index without using the menus.
1. Choose the menu command Window > Palettes > Indexing.

Figure 279
The Indexing palette
You can allow the window to float wherever it is most comfortable for you.
Choose the index to which you want to add an entry.
Select text you want to include in the index.
Click the + at the bottom left corner of the palette.
The selected word appears in the palette with Use topic selected.

Either type a word you want to use if you want to index this as something else or

Click Automatic topic to have the word indexed as it appears in the document.
6. Make any other choices you want as if this were the Index As dialog.
7. Continue adding other words by repeating steps 3 through 6.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Quickly remove text from the index of your choice

You can use the Indexing palette to remove text from the index without using the menus.
Follow steps 1 through 4 in the section Quickly add text to the index of your choice except
where it indicates to click the Plus (+) button click the Minus (-) button instead.

How Nisus Writer handles consecutive page numbers in an index

Nisus Writer Pro checks to see whether you have indexed the same term on consecutive pages. If
so, the application automatically concatenates all the numbers of these pages and displays them in
the index as a unit with the page number of the first instance followed by a hyphen then the page
number of the last instance.

Creating Documents

Working with Bibliographic Reference Tools

Nisus Writer Pro 2.x includes tools for managing your Bookends references database.
Once you have created your database in Bookends you can use the tools of the menu Tools >
Bibliography to enter your references into your document and generate your appropriately
formatted bibliography.

Link Bookends to Nisus Writer Pro

Before you start your work with Bookends make sure that the application is running. You will see
the Bookends icon in the Dock.

Figure 280
The Bookends application icon
There are two ways of linking Bookends with Nisus Writer Pro.
In Bookends, choose the menu command File > Link To > Nisus Writer Pro.

As illustrated in Figure 281, in Bookends, choose the menu command Bookends >
Preferences, click the General tab in the upper left area of the dialog, then, in the Word
processor portion in uppermost area of the dialog click Choose. Locate Nisus Writer Pro
using the Open dialog that appears and click Open.

Figure 281
The Bookends Preferences dialog

255

256

Working with Bibliographic Reference Tools

Book Tools

Add a citation from your references database to your document

There are two primary methods for inserting citations into your document. One from within Nisus
Writer Pro, the other from within Bookends. This first method, even though it begins in Bookends,
explains how to insert the citation from within Nisus Writer Pro.
1. In Bookends, select the reference(s) you want to cite in the Nisus Writer Pro document.
2. Place your insertion point where you want the citation(s) to appear in your Nisus Writer Pro
document.
In Figure 282, the insertion point is at the end of the sentence that ends with hu. three lines
above the Bookends window.
3. Choose the menu command Tools > Bibliography > Insert Citation.
Nisus Writer Pro inserts the reference you had selected in Bookends, as illustrated in Figure
283.

Figure 282
Selecting the reference to cite in the Nisus Writer Pro document

Creating Documents

257

Figure 283
A citation {Coll, 1998, etc.} entered from Bookends into a Nisus Writer Pro document (selected after insertion)

As an alternative, you can put your insertion point where you want the citation to appear in
the Nisus Writer Pro document, and then in Bookends, select the appropriate reference(s) and
choose the menu command Edit > Copy Selected Citations.
This only works if you have, linked Bookends to Nisus Writer Pro, as explained on page 255.
Otherwise the menu does only what it says, it copies the citation to the clipboard without
inserting it in your Nisus Writer Pro document.

Find a particular reference to add to your document

While writing your document in Nisus Writer Pro, you may need to find a particular citation in your
Bookends database. You may be able to scroll through a small list of references. However, if you
have hundreds of references you can search in the database.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Bibliography > Find Reference.
2. Nisus Writer Pro switches to Bookends which opens a Search database window.
3. Enter the search criteria you want and click Find.
For more detailed instructions regarding searching in your Bookends database, please refer to
the Bookends documentation.
4. Once you have found and selected a particular reference, you can insert it into your Nisus
Writer Pro document using the instructions in Add a citation from your references database to
your document on page 256.

Insert a formatted bibliography into your document

Bookends can format your bibliography to match a wide variety of publications and standards. Be
sure to read its documentation to learn what you need for your document. When you are ready to
insert the appropriately formatted bibliography into your Nisus Writer Pro document you follow a
two-step process: setting the location of the bibliography and scanning the document for the
citations.

Set the location of your bibliography

You can place your bibliography anywhere you like in your document. However, your document can
only display one bibliography, regardless of how many sections (chapters, etc.) it has.

Click your insertion point wherever you want the bibliography to appear and choose the menu
command Tools > Bibliography > Insert Bibliography Placeholder.

258

Working with Bibliographic Reference Tools

Book Tools

Figure 284
A document ready for bibliographic scanning
If you do not set a particular location, Nisus Writer Pro will place the bibliography at the very
end of the document.

Scan your document for bibliographic references

Once you have determined the preferred location of your bibliography, as described in Set the
location of your bibliography on page 257 you can scan your document for its citations. Nisus
Writer Pro and Bookends will work together to replace the detailed citation information with the
appropriately formatted references, and place the formatted bibliography at the location you
have set.

While the default setting in Bookends has it scan your Nisus Writer Pro documents text for
plain text citations enclosed in {curly braces}, you can change this in the Scan & Bib portion of
the Bookends preferences. Be sure to refer to the Bookends documentation to learn all of what
Bookends can do.
Choose the menu command Tools > Bibliography > Scan Document.

Creating Documents

Figure 285
The same document as in Figure 284 above with the bibliography inserted

Restore the full text citations to your document

As you continue working on your document you may want to display the full citations rather than
the references. This also removes the formatted bibliography from the document, restoring
everything as illustrated in Figure 284 on page 258.

Choose the menu Tools > Bibliography > Unscan Document.

259

Polishing & Managing Documents

This part of your Nisus Writer Pro documentation contains information that helps you manage and
fine tune documents. It also gives you some ideas on how to use Nisus Writer Pro effectively.
Once, and even while you are in the process of writing, and especially once you have written your
document you will probably want to take a closer look at different portions of it. The various ways to
do this are highlighted in Moving Around in Your Documents Proofing Documents deals with
checking your spelling. Finding and Replacing Text explains the details of Nisus Writer Pros
unmatched find/replace tools. If you work in a collaborative environment, or simply want to make
notes to yourself in the document, you will want to study the section Using Comments in Your
Documents. Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More shows you how to use the special
tools of Nisus Writer Pro to make sure that your text is clean of extraneous characters. Working
with Multiple Documents shows you how to keep track of open Nisus Writer Pro documents. In
addition you see how Nisus Writer Pro handles working with multiple windows (and multiple
monitors) as well as automatically merging the contents of one document with anther. When you
are satisfied with the contents and appearance of your document, Printing Documents explains
how to transfer what you have written from electronic form to paper.

Moving Around in Your Documents ........................................................ 261

Proofing Documents .............................................................................. 263
Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More ...................................... 279
Finding and Replacing Text ..................................................................... 299
Using Normal Find ....................................................................... 299
Using PowerFind .......................................................................... 308
Using PowerFind Pro .................................................................... 324
Using Comments in Your Documents ..................................................... 333
Tracking Changes to Your Documents ..................................................... 345
Working with Multiple Documents ........................................................ 358
About Merging Documents .......................................................... 359
Printing Documents ............................................................................... 366
Create a PostScript file of your Nisus Writer Pro document ........... 370
Create a PDF file of your Nisus Writer Pro document ................... 370

Moving Around in Your Documents

Nisus Writer Pro is an excellent tool for working with large documents. However, once a document
gets beyond a certain, undefined size, it becomes a bit more difficult to find your way around in it.
Nisus Writer Pro has a number of tools to assist you in doing just that. Many of these tools have
been discussed in other parts of the Users Guide. The subjects are collected here with crossreferences to where you can learn more about them.

Moving the Insertion Point Using the Keyboard

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to select text using the keyboard with 1 pressed. If you do not press
1 the insertion point moves to the end of what would have been the selection without making the
selection. For more information see Select using the keyboard on page 44.
When in a comment, press 0 to return to the body of your document, selecting the commented
text.

Moving the Insertion Point Using the Select Commands

Nisus Writer Pro offers a number of select commands in the menu Edit > Select. While these are
mentioned in the section Select using the keyboard on page 44, some people prefer to use the
mouse or trackpad. The relevant commands available there enable you to track backward and
forward to other locations in your document where you might have been working.
These commands appear on the default version of the Nisus Writer Pro Toolbar as Back and
Forward arrows.

Previous Selection

262

Moving Around in Your Documents

Next Selection

Moving the Insertion Point Using the Go To Commands

Nisus Writer Pro offers a number of go to commands in the View menu.

Go to page
See Jump to Any Page in Your Document on page 230.

Go to or from comments
See Move to and from comments on page 335.

Go to header/footer
See Find the header or footer for a particular section of your document on page 139.

Go to or from footnote/endnote to the text

See:

Return to the document from the notes on page 192

Return to a specific note from its marker in the document on page 192

Moving the Insertion Point Using the Table of Contents

Navigator
See:

Move about in the Navigator on page 232

Jump to a heading in the table of contents on page 232

Moving the Insertion Point Using the Bookmarks Navigator

See Jump to Bookmarked Text on page 224.

Moving the Insertion Point Using the Find Tool

See the entire section on finding and replacing text between pages 299 and 332.

Moving the Insertion Point Using Macros

See Changing the selection on page 425.

Moving Between Nisus Writer Pro documents

See:

Nisus Writer Pro windows on page 10

Working with Multiple Documents on page 358

Polishing & Managing Documents

263

Proofing Documents
This portion of the manual contains instructions for using the tools supplied by Nisus Writer Pro to
make sure you use the correct words in your documents.

How to Check Spelling ........................................................................... 265

Check your spelling using the Language palette ........................... 265
Have Nisus Writer Pro correct your typos as you type .................. 265
Set your dictionary preferences .................................................... 266
Correct your spelling using the keyboard and without calling up the Spelling window
..................................................................................................... 266
Correct your spelling using the mouse or trackpad and without calling up the Spelling
window ........................................................................................ 266
Start the spelling checker .............................................................. 267
Set the starting point of the spelling checker ................................. 268
Activate the Spelling floating window .......................................... 269
Stop the spelling checker ............................................................. 270
Replace a misspelled word using the spelling checker .................. 269
Skip words flagged by the spelling checker .................................. 269
User Dictionaries ................................................................................... 270
Edit the Dictionary ....................................................................... 270
Using Multiple Language Dictionaries .................................................... 273
Alternative spelling checker dictionaries ...................................... 273
Word count, text analysis, document properties & statistics .................... 275
Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More ...................................... 279
Finding and Replacing Text ..................................................................... 299
Using Normal Find ................................................................................. 299
Enter something into the Find box ................................................ 299
Enter something into the Replace box .......................................... 300
Either find or find and replace text ............................................... 300
Find the next occurrence of the Find expression ........................... 300
Limit the search ............................................................................ 300
Using PowerFind .................................................................................... 308
About PowerFind ......................................................................... 308
PowerFind terminology ................................................................ 308
PowerFind example ...................................................................... 309
Using the Find what and Replace with menus ........................ 309
Using the PowerFind Browser ...................................................... 310
PowerFind guidelines ................................................................... 312
Examples of putting PowerFind to use .......................................... 319
Using PowerFind Pro .............................................................................. 324
Exercises, or examples of putting PowerFind Pro to use ................ 324
Advanced exercises, or more examples of putting PowerFind to use
..................................................................................................... 330
Using Comments in Your Documents ..................................................... 333
Add comments ............................................................................. 333
Remove comments ....................................................................... 334
Select the next or previous comment in your document ............... 335
Collapse or expand the comments in your document ................... 335

Polishing & Managing Documents

264

Hide and show, or turn off and on the display of all the comments in your document 336
Receiving commented files from others ........................................ 342
Add your comments to the comments of others ............................ 343
Review comment histories ........................................................... 343

Polishing & Managing Documents

265

How to Check Spelling

The spelling checker checks for more than misspelled words.

Check your spelling using the Language palette

Nisus Writer Pro can check the spelling of the word where your insertion point appears whenever
you pause to think.

Keep the Language palette visible (either in the Tooldrawer or on your Desktop) the Language
palette unobtrusively interacts with your text.

If the word is misspelled the Language palette suggests corrections.

Figure 286
The Language palette in check spelling mode

If the word is spelled correctly the Language palette switches to search in the Nisus Thesaurus
(English only) and may suggest alternative words.

Figure 287
The Language palette in Nisus Thesaurus mode

You can open the complete Nisus Thesaurus by clicking its icon, which appears in the Language
palette, illustrated in Figure 287 above, when in thesaurus mode.

Have Nisus Writer Pro correct your typos as you type

Nisus Writer Pro can correct the spelling of many commonly misspelled words as you type.
1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix.
2. Click Fix typos.
To learn more about the various items QuickFix can fix see Determine What QuickFix Fixes on
page 402.

266

How to Check Spelling

Proofing Documents

Set your dictionary preferences

1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click New Document.
2. Click View.
3. (Un)Check Check Spelling As You Type as you prefer.
This applies only to new documents. You can change this on a per-document basis by choosing the
menu command Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling As You Type.

Misspelled words appear with a red squiggly line beneath them. You can change the color of this
squiggly line using the Appearance preferences of Nisus Writer Pro as explained in Determine the
color of various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working environment beginning on page 395.

Correct your spelling using the keyboard and without calling up the
Spelling window
You can correct your spelling without removing your hands from the keyboard.
1. Type A 4 ; (Command-Option-Semicolon).
This selects the next misspelled word and draws a menuoid with possible corrections.

Figure 288
The correct spelling menuoid
2.

Press . or , to replace the misspelled word with the selected word in the list or - to select
another word from the list, then press . or , to use that word.

If the spelling checker has only one suggestion it will replace the word immediately (without offering a
menu).

Correct your spelling using the mouse or trackpad and without

calling up the Spelling window
1.

2.

press 6 and click the misspelled word.

If the Apple system-wide dictionary recognizes the word as related to one in its database, a
number of possibilities will appear in a contextual menu. In addition, if you have the Language
palette open, the dictionary will display the same words if your insertion point pauses in or
immediately beside the word.
Choose the word that matches your choice from the list that appears in the Correct Spelling
submenu as illustrated in Figure 289 below.
If the word is correctly spelled, you can have the dictionary Learn the word or Ignore it
during this session. Choose Ignore Spelling or Learn Spelling from the contextual menu.

Correct your spelling using the mouse or trackpad and without

calling up the Spelling window and add the word to your QuickFix
abbreviations
1.

2.

Press 6 and click the misspelled word.

If the Apple system-wide dictionary recognizes the word as related to one in its database, a
number of possibilities will appear in a contextual menu. In addition, if you have the Language
palette open, the dictionary will display the same words if your insertion point pauses in or
immediately beside the word.
Choose the word that matches your choice from the list that appears in the Correct Spelling &

Polishing & Managing Documents

267

Add to QuickFix submenu.

The same words appear at the top of the contextual menu and the Correct Spelling & Add To
QuickFix submenus as illustrated in Figure 288.
The Correct Spelling & Add To QuickFix submenu also has a command to Open QuickFix
Preferences. The QuickFix preferences are explained in the section Determine What QuickFix
Fixes beginning on page 402.

Figure 289
The correct spelling (and much more) contextual menu

Start the spelling checker

1.
2.
3.

Open the document in which you want to check the spelling.

Choose menu command Edit > Spelling > Spelling Window.
Click the button that corresponds to the operation you want.

268

How to Check Spelling

Proofing Documents

Figure 290
The Check Spelling dialog
As the spelling checker window opens, it automatically searches for and selects the first misspelled
word following the current insertion point.

You can change the color or the selection highlight in the Appearance pane of the Nisus Writer Pro
preferences, as explained in Set Defaults for the Application on page 371.
Nisus Writer Pro checks the words between the insertion point and the end of the document, and
then checking continues from the beginning of your document to the starting point. When the whole
document has been checked, the spelling checker beeps.
When Nisus Writer Pro finds an unknown word it presents you with a list of correctly-spelled
suggestions. The spelling checker also flags words it does not recognize. It ignores lowercase letters
at the start of a sentence, and repeated words.
When the spelling checker finds a word not in the Apple system dictionary, it suggests alternatives
and allows you to correct it, ignore it, or learn the word.

Set the starting point of the spelling checker

1.
2.

Click at any point in your document where you want the spelling checker to begin.
Click Find Next in the Spelling window.
The Spelling window acts as a floating window. Even though it is visible above the document
window and you can click any of its buttons, if it is not active as illustrated in Figure 290 typing
enters text in the document window.
When the window is active one of its text windows has a highlighted edge as in Figure 291. In
this state typing enters text in the Spelling window.

Figure 291
The Spelling window when it is not active does not have a highlighted edge

Polishing & Managing Documents

269

Figure 292
The Spelling window when it is active has a highlighted edge (in this case beside the Correct button)

Activate the Spelling floating window

Click your insertion point in the Correct text edit box.

You can then type alternative spellings in it or select various words from the Guess list using
the arrow keys of your keyboard.

Replace a misspelled word using the spelling checker

When the spelling checker finds a word which is not in its dictionary, it suggests alternatives and
allows you to correct it. The suggestions given are based upon both the actual characters and the
phonetic sounds of the unknown word.
1. Use the scroll list to view suggestions for misspelled words.
2. Click one of them to place it in the Correct box.
3. To replace the word in your document with the word in the Replace with box

click Correct or Correct All, or

if the Spelling window is the active window, press < or T.

If you cannot find the word you want in the suggestion list, select the unknown word in the text
edit box at the bottom of the Spelling window and edit it, then click Correct or press < or T.

Skip words flagged by the spelling checker

You can make the spelling checker skip words that it might otherwise flag in a number of different
ways.

Skip the word in a session.

Mark the word while a particular file is open.
Add the word to the Dictionary (by clicking Learn).
If the spelling checker comes to a word that it does not recognize, yet is accurately spelled.
Click Ignore to leave all instances of the unknown word unaltered in the file during that
session.
Click Find Next to leave the unknown word unaltered.

Skip all instances of a particular word

Click Ignore.

Add a word to the Dictionary

There are three ways you can add a word to the dictionary so that the spelling checker does not flag
it again in any document or application.

Click Learn when the Check Spelling dialog displays a word not in its dictionary that you want
to add to your Dictionary.

Select the word and choose the menu command Edit > Spelling > Learn Spelling.

Select the word, press 6 and choose Learn Spelling from the contextual menu that appears.

Remove a learned word to the Dictionary

There are three ways you can remove a learned word from the dictionary so that the spelling
checker begins to flag it again in any document or application.

Type or paste the learned word into the Spelling Window and click Unlearn.

Select the word and choose the menu command Edit > Spelling > Unlearn Spelling.

Select the word, press 6 and choose Unlearn Spelling from the contextual menu that
appears.

270

How to Check Spelling

Proofing Documents

Find the next error

Nisus Writer Pro can find the next spelling error in your document without opening the Check
Spelling window.

Choose the menu command Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling.
Nisus Writer Pro selects the word that the Check Spelling dialog would find if it were open.

Stop the spelling checker

Click the Spelling windows Close box.

User Dictionaries
You can increase the vocabulary of the spelling checker by adding words to the Dictionary. When
you add a word to the Dictionary it is learned for all applications that use the spelling checker.
The words in the spelling checker are User dependent. If other Users have login rights to the
same computer, each User has his or her own dictionary available in all applications.

Edit the Dictionary

You can add to and/or subtract words from your Dictionary any time the Spelling window is open.

Click Learn if the spelling checker finds a word not in its list but which you want to include.

Type words directly into the Replace With box and click Learn.

Remove words from the dictionary

There are three ways you can remove a word from the dictionary so that the spelling checker will
resume flagging it in any document or application.

Type the word directly into the Replace With box of the spelling checker and click Forget.

Select it in the document and choose the menu command Edit > Spelling > Unlearn Spelling.

Select the word, press 6 and choose Unlearn Spelling from the contextual menu that
appears.

Remember that all words in the User Dictionary are not case sensitive.
Using the Nisus Thesaurus
The Nisus Thesaurus which is included as part Nisus Writer Pro gives you a fast electronic
thesaurus integrated with your word processor.
Nisus Thesaurus knows the English language. Using the WordNet lexical reference database,
Thesaurus includes over 120,000 words and knows how they relate to each other. When you lookup
a word in Nisus Thesaurus, it will show you related words in six categories. With its built-in
dictionary, Thesaurus knows that sometimes the same word means different things. So it will never
confuse the related words for an orange and the color orange.

Using the Nisus Thesaurus in the Language palette

As illustrated above in Figure 287 on page 265, the Language palette alternates between a spelling
checker and the Nisus Thesaurus.

Using the Nisus Thesaurus as a free standing application

In addition to the Language palette, you can open the complete Nisus Thesaurus, illustrated in
Figure 293 by clicking its icon in the Language palette, visible when it is in thesaurus mode, or by
choosing it using the menu command Edit > Spelling > Thesaurus Window. This gives you
access to more words, and their definitions.

Polishing & Managing Documents

271

Figure 293
The Nisus Thesaurus

Using the Nisus Thesaurus from the contextual menu

1.
2.

Press 6 and click, or Right-Click. A contextual menu appears.

Drag down to Thesaurus and, as illustrated in Figure 294 choose whatever word you want from
the submenu that appears.

272

Using the Nisus Thesaurus

Figure 294
The Thesaurus (and much more) contextual menu

Proofing Documents

Polishing & Managing Documents

273

Using Multiple Language Dictionaries

Nisus Writer Pro offers you access to all the dictionaries that come with OS X. Check your Apple
documentation to confirm how to turn on these various capabilities. Other dictionaries are available
on the Internet.
These dictionaries are best used as an attribute of the Language style which you apply to your
text. To learn more about using Nisus Writer Pro for writing in multiple languages see Writing in
Multiple Languages on page 29.

Alternative spelling checker dictionaries

If you have turned on the ability to check spelling in various languages you will see a pop-up menu
at the top of the Spelling window. You can choose an alternative language from that menu at any
time. If you have set your Languages preferences in Nisus Writer Pro and assigned different
dictionaries to different languages and then chosen those languages as you entered text, Nisus
Writer Pro will automatically switch the language as it scans your document for misspelled words.

274

Hyphenating your text

Proofing Documents

Hyphenating your text

According to the Apple text engine used in hyphenation is a view of your document, not a function
of editing or spelling. You turn the display of your text as hyphenated or not.

You can, however, determine how various languages hyphenate their text when you set up your
Languages preferences in Nisus Writer Pro, as explained in Set up language support in Nisus Writer
Pro instruction item number 7 on page 34.

Turn hyphenation on

Choose the menu command View > Hyphenation > Automatic - Normal.

Turn hyphenation off

Choose the menu command View > Hyphenation > Disabled.
Nisus Writer Pro does, however offer a few additional controls.

Make hyphenation more frequent

Choose the menu command View > Hyphenation > Automatic - More Often.

Turn hyphenation off for particular paragraphs

While you cannot turn hyphenation on for particular paragraphs, if you have hyphenation turned to
on, you can turn it off for particular paragraphs
1. Select the paragraph(s) for which you want to turn hyphenation off.
2. Choose the menu command Format > Paragraph > Prevent Hyphenation.

Prevent a compound word from breaking on its hyphens

You might have a complex or compound word such as not-to-be-denied that you do not want to
have break at certain designated locations.
1. Select the existing hyphen, or place your insertion point where you want the non-breaking
hyphen to appear.
2. Choose the menu command Special Characters > Dashes and Hyphens > Non-Breaking
Hyphen (or click Non-Breaking Hyphen in the Dashes and Hyphens set of the Special
Characters palette).

Use a soft hyphen

If you use Nisus Writer Pro with Leopard (Mac OS X 10.5.x) or later you can enter a soft hyphen.
This causes the word to break (if needed) at the designated location.
1. Place your insertion point where you want the word to break.
2. Choose the menu command Insert > Special Characters > Dashes and Hyphens > Soft
Hyphen (or click Soft Hyphen in the Dashes and Hyphens set of the Special Characters palette).
If you have hyphenation turned off your word will break at the appropriate spot, but a hyphen
character will not appear. However, if you have hyphenation turned on the word may or may
not break at the location of the soft hyphen.
The four series of illustrations in Figure 294 depicts these various phenomena. In the text
illustrated, the word not-to-be-denied has two non-breaking hyphens and the word
anthropologists has a soft hyphen. If you wish to practice with it:

Based on the premise that some word processor other than Nisus Writer
Pro might represent the established (though more clumsy) manner of
writing on a computer, there are those who, like yourselves, nonetheless,
use Nisus Writer Pro as their writing tool of choice. Nonetheless, believe
it or not there actually are people who seem able to reject, this, our
not-to-be-denied elegant, powerful and pleasurable word processing tool.
I am told among some academicians (most of whom I have learned
happen to be anthropologists), there are some people who seem to have
even gone as far as to study this strange movement or ideology that
opposes the disestablishment of that other word processor (which shall
remain, at least in this venue, nameless).
These people (and we wish them well, as they may enlighten us with a
window of opportunity to increase the usage of Nisus Writer Pro) might
be considered to be involved in the field of
antidisestablishmentarianismology.

Polishing & Managing Documents

275

Figure 295
Hyphenation illustrated: (from upper left to lower right) Disabled; Automatic - Normal; Automatic - More Often; prevented in
the last paragraph

Word count, text analysis, document properties & statistics

Nisus Writer Pro continually keeps track of the number of characters, words and paragraphs in
your document or selection. This information is visible in the Statistics palette. You can keep the
drawer open to display a selection of palettes that includes the Statistics palette or, if all you want
to do is keep track of your documents statistics, you can keep that palette open anywhere you want
on your monitor.
1. Choose the menu command View > Show Tooldrawer.
2. Click the pencil (Writing) button from the display at the top of the drawer.
3. Drag the Statistics palette out of the drawer to any location you want.
Or

Choose the menu command Window > Palettes > Statistics.

To get a count of the characters, words and paragraphs in your footnotes, endnotes, headers or
footers, you need to select that text.
To get a count of the characters, words and paragraphs in the entire document chose the menu
command Edit > Select > Select All Document.

To close the Statistics palette click the x in the upper right corner of the windoids title bar.

276

Word count, text analysis, document properties & statistics Proofing Documents

Keep a running count of the characters, words and/or paragraphs of

your document in your header or footer
Headers and footers, as explained on page 143 are an excellent place for displaying variable data
that describes your document. In addition to the automatic numbers, date & time variables and
document properties described there, you can also display:

the total number of characters in the document.

Choose the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Character Count.
This document has 1087308 characters.

the total number of words in the document.

Choose the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Word Count.
This document has 182758 words.

the total number of paragraphs in the document.

Choose the menu command Insert > Automatic Number > Paragraph Count.
This document has 15447 paragraphs.

Because this information constantly changes as you manipulate your text, Nisus Writer Pro does not
continuously update the display of the numbers associated with character, word and paragraph
count. This information can become stale. To indicate that it is out of date, Nisus Writer Pro draws a
red line around such text. You can update the display whenever you want.

To update only some content, select a range of text that has stale information and choose the
menu command Tools > Automatic Content > Update Selected Stale Content.

To update all information in your document, choose the menu command Tools > Automatic
Content > Update All Stale Content.

You can turn the display of the line surrounding stale text on or off, as well as change its color,
in the Appearances preferences of Nisus Writer Pro as explained in Determine the color of
various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working environment on page 395.

Text analysis
Nisus Writer Pro uses the Flesch Reading Ease scale to evaluate the reading level of documents. The
scores range from a low of 0 to a high of 100. A high Flesch Reading Ease score means your
document should be easy to understand. Nisus Writer Pro also calculates the reading grade level of
the document in addition to many other details about your file. This information as well as the
number of sentences and the number of words per sentence and the total number of words, is
available in the Text Analysis sheet illustrated in Figure 296 which displays the scores for the
Gutenberg Project edition of Black Beauty, with the first chapter selected.

Choose the menu command File > Text Analysis.

Figure 296
The text analysis sheet
You can learn more about the Flesch Reading Ease scale and the FOG Index in the Appendix on
page 481.

The information displayed includes all the text not in footnotes/endnotes nor headers/
footers.
You can copy the information in the sheet to paste elsewhere. Everything displayed in the sheet
is copied in table form.

Choose the menu command Edit > Copy.

Polishing & Managing Documents

277

Document properties
Nisus Writer Pro enables you to enter a wide variety of meta information that you can insert in your
document. A complete listing of these properties which you can insert appears in the menu
commands portion of the documentation on page 460. To enter specific information into your
document for later insertion:
1. Choose the menu command File > Properties.
2. Type or paste the information you want associated with your document into the sheet that
appears, as illustrated in Figure 297 and Figure 298.
You can add or subtract custom properties by clicking the Plus (+) button or Minus (-) button
available.
3. Click OK.

Figure 297
The Standard Properties portion of the Properties sheet

278

Word count, text analysis, document properties & statistics Proofing Documents

Figure 298
The Custom Properties portion of the Properties sheet
Entering this information as variables in your document is explained in Using Automatic Numbers,
Date & Time Variables and Document Properties in Headers and Footers on page 143.

Polishing & Managing Documents

279

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

This portion of the manual shows you how easy it is to give your documents a polished, professional
look. The sections include

Pagination .............................................................................................. 280

Line Numbering ..................................................................................... 285
Number lines continuously throughout the entire document ........ 285
Number lines for particular sections ............................................. 285
Number lines so that they continue from the previous section ...... 285
Number lines so that they restart numbering on each page .......... 285
Prevent line numbers from displaying ........................................... 285
Change the way in which line numbers display ............................ 285
Display the Line Numbers palette ................................................ 285
Set the starting number of line numbers ....................................... 286
Determine the interval at which the line numbers display ............ 286
Determine the format of the numbers displayed ........................... 286
Determine the size of the gutter, (the space between the numbers in the margin and your
text) .............................................................................................. 286
Determine the font/face/size/color, etc. of the numbers displayed 286
Number lines for legal documents (Pleading Pages or Pleading Paper)
..................................................................................................... 287
Alphabetizing (Sorting) Paragraphs ......................................................... 288
Special Styles ...................................................................................... 289
Plain Text ..................................................................................... 289
Remove style attributes from text .................................................. 289
Change the height of text in relation to the baseline ..................... 289
Cause letter pairs to use ligatures ................................................. 290
Cause letter pairs to display closer together or further apart .......... 290
Color text ..................................................................................... 291
Highlight text ............................................................................... 291
Background color ......................................................................... 292
Use Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading to set off your text and create screens
..................................................................................................... 293
Using the Mac OS Colors panel ................................................... 296
Cleaning Up Documents ........................................................................ 298
Change the case of alphabetic characters ..................................... 298
Change the appearance of quotation marks .................................. 298

280

Pagination

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

Pagination
Nisus Writer Pro comes preset for your new files to display with pagination turned on, ready to print
your file on paper.

Figure 299
The automatic page break in Nisus Writer Pro
Periodically you may want to enter and edit your text without concern for its formatting. In this
context, you might prefer to display your document as though it were a continuous scroll rather
than individual pages. This enables Nisus Writer Pro to scroll through your document faster. To do
this turn pagination off.

Polishing & Managing Documents

281

Set where page breaks appear

1.
2.

Click your insertion point where you want the page break to appear.
Choose the menu command Insert > Page Break.

An inserted page break

Figure 300
An inserted page break

282

Pagination

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

Display a document as a continuous scroll

Choose Draft View or Full Screen view from the View menu.

When you use Draft View or Full Screen view, Nisus Writer Pro does not display headers and/or
footers, columns or line numbers. Floating palettes continue to display.

Figure 301
The Draft View in Nisus Writer Pro

Polishing & Managing Documents

283

Figure 302
The Draft View in Nisus Writer Pro with an inserted page break
You can see how to have the appropriate page number appear on each page of your document by
choosing the menu View > View > Page and see Numbering Pages on page 141.

See where page breaks appear

Choose the menu command View > Page View.
In Draft View or Full Screen view Nisus Writer Pro draws a color-customizable line indicating the
location of the page break. When you choose Print Nisus Writer Pro automatically paginates your
document.

284

Pagination

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

Find page breaks in your document

1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find.
Choose the menu command Gear > Special Characters > Any Break in the Find/Replace
window.
Click Next.

Figure 303
The Draft View in Nisus Writer Pro with an inserted page break found

Polishing & Managing Documents

285

Line Numbering
Nisus Writer Pro can display line numbers or paragraph numbers down the left edge of the
document window (outside the margin) to the left of each line of text, and print them on your paper.
If you dont want to print line or paragraph numbers, be sure to turn them off before you choose
Print.

Number lines
You can have your lines numbered throughout your document or restart at the beginning of every
page or every section of the document. The commands of the Line Numbers submenu are each
exclusive of one another. Line numbers are meaningful and, therefore, display only in Page View.
As there are no hard lines in Draft View and Full Screen View, line numbers do not display there.
You can, however, display paragraph numbers in Draft View.
Line numbers do not display in footnotes, endnotes, headers or footers.
You can accomplish all the following five tasks (displaying or preventing the display of line numbers)
by using the Line Numbers palette or the commands of the menu View > Line Numbers. Because
the Line Numbers palette is not always visible, the instructions refer to the commands in the
menus.
Because numbering lines is more common than numbering paragraphs, the following instructions
deal with numbering lines. Nonetheless, the same procedures apply to numbering paragraphs.
Remember that the relevant commands to begin and restart paragraph numbering are Show
Paragraph Numbers This Section and Restart Paragraph Numbers This Section.

You can cross-reference to line and paragraph numbers as explained in Add Cross-References to Your
Text beginning on page 225.

Number lines continuously throughout the entire document

Choose the menu command View > Line Numbering > Restart This Section.
If you have more than one section in the document you will need to put your insertion point in
each section and:

Choose the menu command Insert > Line Numbering > Continue From Previous Section
for each succeeding section of the document.

Number lines for particular sections

1.
2.

Select some text in those sections you want to show line numbers.
Choose the menu command View > Line Numbering > Restart This Section.
Or, if you have a long document and you want to display line numbers for particular sections as
you come to them:
Place your insertion point in any particular section in which you want to display line numbers
and choose the menu command View > Line Numbers > Restart This Section.

Number lines so that they continue from the previous section

Choose the menu command View > Line Numbers > Continue From Previous Section.
If the immediately preceding section does not display numbers the numbers begin again at the
number designated in the Line Numbers palette.

Number lines so that they restart numbering on each page

Place your insertion point in any particular section in which you want to display line numbers
and choose the menu command View > Line Numbers > Restart Every Page.

Prevent line numbers from displaying

Place your insertion point in any particular section in which you want to prevent line numbers
from displaying and choose the menu command View > Line Numbers > Not Shown This
Section.

Change the way in which line numbers display

You can determine a variety of aspects of how the line numbers display in your document. While
the previous tasks can be accomplished by using the menus or the Line Numbers palette, the
following require the Line Numbers palette.

Display the Line Numbers palette

Choose the menu command View > Line Numbering > Line Numbers Palette.

Or:

Choose the menu command Window > Palettes > Line Numbers.

286

Line Numbering

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

Those aspects of line numbers that can be controlled exclusively by the Line Numbers palette
include

Figure 304
The Line Numbers palette

the number at which they start;

whether each line has a number, or only specific lines at regular determined intervals display;
the format of the numbers (Arabic, Roman, Kanji, etc.);
the space between your text and the numbers;
the font/face/size/color, etc.

Set the starting number of line numbers

1.
2.

Place your insertion point in a section with line numbers.

Type the number from which you want to have the line numbers begin counting in the Start
from text edit box in the Line Numbers palette (or click the stepper till you arrive at the
number you want).
The default is set to 1.

Determine the interval at which the line numbers display

1.
2.

Place your insertion point in a section with line numbers.

Type the number of the interval you want to have line numbers display in the Count by text
edit box in the Line Numbers palette (or click the stepper till you arrive at the desired
number).
The default is set to 1.

Determine the format of the numbers displayed

1.
2.

Place your insertion point in a section with line numbers.

Choose the format you want from the Format pop-up menu in the Line Numbers palette as
illustrated in Figure 52 on page 53.
The default is set to Arabic numerals (1,2,3).

Determine the size of the gutter, (the space between the numbers in the margin and
your text)
1.
2.

Place your insertion point in a section with line numbers.

Type the number of the measurement you want to have the line numbers display in the Gutter
width text edit box in the Line Numbers palette (or click the stepper till you arrive at the
number you want).
The default is set to .17".
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.

Determine the font/face/size/color, etc. of the numbers displayed

1.
2.

Place your insertion point in a section with line numbers.

Make your choices using the Font section of the Line Numbers palette the same way in which
you use the Character palette as explained beginning in the section Change the font of
characters on page 97.

Polishing & Managing Documents

287

Nisus Writer Pro numbers each line of all the columns of a section. If the gutter between the columns
is too narrow to display the numbers, be aware that any following numbers are added to the total and
may not display correctly (immediately following as illustrated in Figure 305 below, or in later
sections).

Figure 305
Line number display problem caused by narrow gutter

Number lines for legal documents (Pleading Pages or Pleading Paper)

Many lawyers require a vertical line that runs down the page between the line numbers and
document body. According to <http://www.courtinfo.ca.gov/rules> Rule 2.108:
Line numbers must be placed at the left margin and separated from the text of the paper by a
vertical column of space at least 1/5 inch wide or a single or double vertical line. Each line
number must be aligned with a line of type, or the line numbers must be evenly spaced
vertically on the page. Line numbers must be consecutively numbered, beginning with the
number 1 on each page. There must be at least three line numbers for every vertical inch on the
page.

Set up your Pleading Page or Pleading Paper

Use the Page Borders palette, explained in Use the Page Borders palette to put a line around the
edge of your page beginning on page 132, along with the Line Numbers and Paragraph palettes to
prepare your document as illustrated in Figure 306 on page 288. You can save the file as a .dot
file (explained in Understanding Template (Stationery) Documents on page 376) so that it is
always available to give you a fresh page of stationery.

288

Line Numbering

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

Figure 306
A Pleading Page or Pleading Paper document

Alphabetizing (Sorting) Paragraphs

It only takes Nisus Writer Pro a few seconds to sort lists consisting of individual paragraphs. (Each
paragraph can be as short as one character.)
Paragraphs can be a blank line, a few words, a block of text, or even an image, followed by a Return
character.

Blank lines are placed first.

Paragraphs beginning with numbers are placed ahead of those beginning with letters.
Any sequence of numbers beginning a paragraph is interpreted as a numeral. Paragraphs are sorted
in order of these numerals. Those beginning with the same numerals are sorted by the remaining
characters.

Paragraphs beginning with alphabetic characters appear last.

Any selection containing part of a paragraph is extended to include the entire paragraph when
sorted.

The Language attribute applied to the first selected paragraph affects the ordering of the sorted
paragraphs. If you have paragraphs in multiple languages and you want to sort them you might want
to sort each set of paragraphs separately. Sorting by language only works in Leopard (Mac OS X 10.5).

Polishing & Managing Documents

289

Sort order can vary depending on:

Your system version and the systems Text & International preferences.
The Language attribute you have applied to the text.

Sort paragraphs
1.
2.

Select the range of paragraphs you want to sort.

Choose Ascending (A-Z) or Descending (Z-A) from the menu Edit > Sort Paragraphs.

Jumble paragraphs
1.
2.

Select the range of paragraphs you want to jumble.

Choose the menu command Edit > Sort Paragraphs > Randomly (shuffle).

You can sort specific cells in a column within a table. You can also sort rows of a table based on a
selected column as explained in Sort rows of a table on page 205.

Special Styles
In addition to the basic styles of Bold, Italic, Underline (both single and double), Superscript and
Subscript (the latter two both in the menu Format > Baseline), Nisus Writer Pro offers
Strikethrough (both single and double).

Plain Text
Remove Attributes and Styles, as its name suggests, is not a style, but a command: Remove
existing style attributes and make this text plain (the attributes set in the New File preferences
your Nisus New File)!

Remove style attributes from text

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Choose the menu command Format > Remove Attributes and Styles.
This removes all style attributes, including color. What remains are the attributes you set in
your Nisus New File in the New File preferences.

This removes all formatting (both character and paragraph, but not List styles) from, and applies the
Normal style to selected text.
This does not remove any language attribute associated with the selected text.

Change the height of text in relation to the baseline

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Choose Superscript or Subscript from the menu Format > Baseline.

You can alter the height of this text in one-point increments by choosing Raise or Lower from the
menu Format > Baseline.

Return raised or lowered text to the baseline

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Choose the menu command Format > Baseline > Use Default Baseline.

Increase or decrease the height by a specific amount

1.
2.
3.

4.

Select the text you want to raise or lower.

Choose the Raise Baseline By or Lower Baseline By from the menu Format > Baseline.
Type the number for the amount you want the height to change.
The amount is cumulative; that is each time you choose this command and enter a number the
amount is added to or subtracted from the height already applied.
Click OK.

290

Special Styles

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

Cause letter pairs to use ligatures

Ligatures (characters in certain fonts (such as fl) consist of two or more letters or characters joined
together). Various fonts support more or fewer ligatures.
For example in the font Apple Chancery, the letters f followed by i and f followed by l appear
differently depending on whether or not ligatures are turned on or off.
Without ligatures turned on the letters are separated:

f [space] i, or without the space:

f [space] l, or without the space:

With ligatures turned on the two characters appear as one glyph. Note how the crossbar of the
f continues to the i and the top of the f appears a bit lower and touches the top of the l:

1.
2.

Each font handles these phenomena in its own way.

Select the text you wish to change.
Choose Use Default or Use All from the menu Format > Ligature.

Prevent letter pairs from using ligatures

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Choose the menu command Format > Ligature > Use None.

Cause letter pairs to display closer together or further apart

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Choose Tighten to squeeze text together, or Loosen to spread text further apart, from the menu
Format > Kern.
Kerning affects all characters selected, that is the inter-character space following the character
to which it is applied.

Not Kerned

Kerning affects all

characters selected.
Audio Visual
abbreviated: AV

Tightened

Tightened More

Kerning affects all characters selected.

Kerning affects all characters selected.

Audio Visual abbreviated: AV

Audio Visual abbreviated: AV

Loosened

Loosened More

Kerning affects all characters selected.

Kerning affects all characters selected.

Audio Visual abbreviated: AV

Audio Visual abbreviated: AV

Table 29
Kerning options compared

Increase or decrease the amount of kerning by a specific amount

1.
2.
3.

4.

Select the text you want to kern.

Choose Tighten By or Loosen By from the menu Format > Kern.
Type the number for the amount you want the size to change.
The amount is cumulative; that is each time you choose this command and enter a number the
amount is added to the amount of kerning already applied.
Click OK.

If you do not have an actual selection, adjusting the kerning alters the spacing between the adjacent
characters.

Prevent letter pairs from displaying closer together or further apart

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to change.

Choose the menu command Format > Kern > Use None.

Polishing & Managing Documents

291

Color text
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the text you wish to color.

Choose the color you want from the menu Format > Text Color.
If one of those colors does not match your desired palette:
Choose the menu command Format > Show Text Colors.
Use the various options to have your text display in the color you want.
Close the Colors panel.
The easiest way to change colored text back to black is to choose Remove Color from the menu
command that pops up from the Color tag on the Statusbar.

Figure 307
The Color tag and its menu

Highlight text
You can highlight sections of your text as with a highlighting marker pen as illustrated in Figure
103 on page 92.
1. Select the text you wish to highlight.
2. Click the Highlight button.

The Highlight button on the Toolbar indicates the current highlight color, that is, the color which will
be applied when you click it (the button), not the highlight color of any selected text. The color of
selected text appears in the Highlight tag in the Statusbar.

Highlight text using a color other than the current color

1.
2.

Select the text you wish to highlight.

Choose the color you want from the Highlight button menu or from the menu Format >
Highlight.

Figure 308
The Highlight button and its menu

Remove highlight color from your text

1.
2.

Select the text from which you wish to remove the highlight.
Choose Remove Highlight Attribute from the Highlight button menu or from the menu Format
> Highlight, or, choose Remove Highlight from the Highlight tag menu on the Statusbar.

Figure 309
The Highlight tag and its menu

292

Special Styles

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

This highlight of text prints. It is different from the selection Highlight Color that you set in the
Appearance pane of your System Preferences and the background Check Spelling and Find/Replace
Highlight Color you set in the Nisus Writer Pro General preferences as explained in Set Defaults for
the Application on page 371.

Background color
You can set a printable background color for any selection of your text. This color also gets saved
and displays in HTML documents.
1. Select the text you wish to add background color.
2. Choose the color you want from the menu Format > Background Color.
Background color only draws in areas actually occupied by characters (excluding indents, line
wraps, etc. though including spaces and tabs).

Remove background color from your text

1.
2.

Select the text from which you wish to remove the background color.
Choose the menu command Format > Background Color > Remove Background Color
Attribute, or, choose Remove Color from the Background Color tag menu on the Statusbar.

How highlight color and background color differ

Highlight color and Background Color differ only slightly

Figure 310
Highlight color, Background Color and Paragraph Borders with Paragraph Shading compared

Each has a slightly different handling of newline/wrapped whitespace (as evident along the
right line wrap areas of the text in Figure 310 above).
Word only recognizes Highlight colors and ignores Background Colors in RTF. It does, however
recognize Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading.

Polishing & Managing Documents

293

TextEdit (and possibly other Apple RTF capable applications) only recognize Background Colors
and ignores Highlight colors in RTF as well as Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading.
Predefined Highlight colors in Nisus Writer Pro can be customized by the user.
Microsoft Word 2004 does not allow arbitrary highlight colors. If a user chooses a non-standard
color Word will show the closest color of those (16 illustrated in Figure 311) it allows.

Figure 311
Highlight color palette in Microsoft Word 2004

Use Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading to set off your text and
create screens
Every now and then you may need to have a bit of text stand out from the rest. One way is to use a
block-quote paragraph style and create a screen using the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph
Shading palettes. While this was possible using the floating images in earlier versions of Nisus
Writer Pro the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes make this much easier and offer
greater control as well as, perhaps, greater versatility.
You can use the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes independently, but together
they offer better results. Similarly, you can use their attributes as part a paragraph style in the
style sheet of any document.

Draw a border around paragraphs

1.

Select the paragraph(s) around which you wish to draw a border.

Figure 312
The Paragraph Borders palette
2.

In the Paragraph Borders palette, illustrated in Figure 312, click the Edges to modify in the
section at the top of the palette

The edges that will be modified by subsequent actions (for example changing their color) are only
those represented by buttons that are selected (turned on: appear blue). The first two buttons
Deselect All and Select All work to change the other buttons.

294

Special Styles

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

)aragraph Borders )alette BAttons

Multiple Line Controls
Deselect All

Horizontal
Top Edge

Individual Line Controls

Select All

Between
Paragraphs

Bottom Edge

Vertical
Left Edge

Right Edge

Table 30
The Paragraph Border palette buttons

3.
4.

you can deselect all at once; use the Deselect All button illustrated in Table 30
you can select all at once; use the Select All button illustrated in Table 30
select individual edges; use the Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Left Edge and/or Right edge buttons
illustrated in Table 30
select the line that appears between paragraphs; use the Between Paragraphs button
illustrated in Table 30
Select an area that contains more than one paragraph.
Choose only the between paragraphs button as illustrated in Figure 313.

Figure 313
Setting the line Between Paragraphs
5.
6.

7.

Adjust settings as indicated in steps 6 through 9 below.

Choose the thickness you want from the Thickness pop-up menu of the Paragraph Borders
palette
You can choose between None, Hairline, 1/2 pt (point), 3/4 pt up to 8 pt thick lines. The same
options are available here as in the Table Cell Borders palette illustrated in Figure 245 on page
216.
Choose the style you want from the Style pop-up menu of the Paragraph Borders palette
You can choose between none, and a wide variety of styles as illustrated in Figure 246 on page
216.

Polishing & Managing Documents

8.
9.

295

Click the Color Picker tool and choose a color from the Colors panel as illustrated in Figure 404
on page 376.
In the Padding portion of the palette, set the amount of space you want between your text and
the border. You can set the Horizontal (the space to the right and left) and Vertical (the space
above and below) padding.
a. Click the steppers to increase or decrease the amount of horizontal and/or vertical
padding.
or
b. Select the contents of either the Horizontal and/or Vertical fields.
c. Enter the value you want.
d. Press T to confirm your choice.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
Any vertical changes made here can override the Before and After settings of the Paragraph
palette as explained in Set spacing between paragraphs on page 89.
You can use negative values in the horizontal borders (on the sides), though not on the
vertical borders (top and bottom).
If a bordered paragraph spreads over a page break, Nisus Writer Pro does not put a horizontal
line either at the bottom of the initial page nor at the top of the succeeding page, indicating
that the paragraph continues.

Create a screen behind paragraphs

1.

Select the paragraph(s) behind which you wish to have shading appear.

Figure 314
The Paragraph Shading palette
2.

Choose the pattern you want from the Pattern pop-up menu in the Paragraph Shading palette
illustrated in Figure 314.

A paragraph with a Pattern set to None can have no color.

The options available here are the same as those for table cells as explained in Determine the
pattern of cells on page 217 and Set the color of the foreground and background of a cell pattern
on page 218.
The padding set in the Paragraph Borders palette determines the padding of the shading, whether
or not a border line appears.
Every now and then you may need to have a bit of text stand out from
the rest. One way is to use a block-quote paragraph style and create a
screen using the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes.
While this was possible using the graphics tools in earlier versions of
Nisus Writer Pro the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes
make this much easier and offer greater control as well as versatility.

Figure 315
A paragraph with a border line thickness set to 5; (yellow of Highlight color HTML EBFF64) padding set to 6 pt all around, but
no shading
Every now and then you may need to have a bit of text stand out from
the rest. One way is to use a block-quote paragraph style and create a
screen using the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes.
While this was possible using the graphics tools in earlier versions of
Nisus Writer Pro the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes
make this much easier and offer greater control as well as versatility.
Figure 316
A paragraph with no border, but shading (yellow of Background color HTML FFFF00; pattern set to 45% shading) padding set
to 6 pt all around

296

Special Styles

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

Every now and then you may need to have a bit of text stand out from
the rest. One way is to use a block-quote paragraph style and create a
screen using the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes.
While this was possible using the graphics tools in earlier versions of
Nisus Writer Pro the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes
make this much easier and offer greater control as well as versatility.
Figure 317
A paragraph with a 5 pt border (yellow of Highlight color HTML EBFF64) & shading (yellow of background color HTML
FFFF00; pattern set to 45% shading) padding set to 6 pt all around
Every now and then you may need to have a bit of text stand out from
the rest.
One way is to use a block-quote paragraph style and create a screen
using the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes.
While this was possible using the graphics tools in earlier versions of
Nisus Writer Pro the Paragraph Borders and Paragraph Shading palettes
make this much easier and offer greater control as well as versatility.
Figure 318
A group of paragraphs with a 5 pt border (yellow of Highlight color HTML EBFF64) & shading (yellow of background color
HTML FFFF00; pattern set to 45% shading) padding set to 6 pt all around and a line between the paragraphs using HTML
color D68A9C
If a paragraph with a border flows over a page break the border only draws around the actual
beginning and end of the paragraph and not the text at the bottom and top of the page where the
paragraph breaks.

Using the Mac OS Colors panel

The Colors panel illustrated in Figure 404 on page 376 is not part of Nisus Writer Pro, but the Mac
OS. The area of little white squares below the color circle is a space where you can store favorite
colors.

Save colors for later use

Drag the color from the large bar of color (in this case a shade of lavender) at the top to any of
the squares below.
You can populate the area with quite a number of little color swatches. However, the trick is:
how do you remove one of the colors if you no longer want it?

Remove saved colors

Drag any one of the white squares of color onto the color you wish to remove, as illustrated in
Figure 319.
Note that the third square in from the upper right corner has a faint outline that is different
from all the others. This is the white square that was taken to drop on the green square in the
corner.

Polishing & Managing Documents

Figure 319
Removing a saved color in the Colors panel

297

298

Special Styles

Paginating Numbering Lines, Sorting and More

Cleaning Up Documents

You may receive e-mail from someone who SCREAMS for sentences on end.

You may need to edit your text and then make sure that your text wraps at the appropriate
column number.
Nisus Writer Pro has the tools to help you out.

Change the case of alphabetic characters

Choose commands from the Convert submenu to change the case of text in a selection.

Make all selected characters UPPERCASE

Choose the menu command Edit > Convert > To UPPERCASE.

Change pleasant conversation to SCREAMING TEXT with one command.

This changes the actual characters in your document, exchanging every lowercase character with its
corresponding UPPERCASE ASCII (Unicode) equivalent.

Make all selected characters lowercase

Choose the menu command Edit > Convert > To lowercase.

CHANGE SCREAMING TEXT TO pleasant conversation WITH ONE COMMAND.

Capitalize all selected words

Choose the menu command Edit > Convert > To Capitalized.

This makes the first letter of every selected word UPPERCASE.

To Capitalized treats hyphenated compound words such as easy-to-find as though they were each
separate words resulting in Easy-To-Find. Similarly, it treats words separated by a slash as two or
more changing find/replace into Find/Replace . If a word has uppercase characters inside it, To
Capitalized makes those lowercase as it capitalizes the word (lowerCase becomes Lowercase).

Make all selected words appear in SMALL CAPS

Choose the menu command Edit > Convert > To SMALL CAPS.
This changes the current selection so that all lowercase characters are reduced by
approximately 75 percent and then exchanged with their equivalent uppercase characters.

This changes the actual characters in your document, exchanging every lowercase character with its
corresponding UPPERCASE ASCII (Unicode) equivalent.

Reverse the case of selected text

Choose the menu command Edit > Convert > To Toggled Case.
Change UPPERCASE to lowercase and lowercase to UPPERCASE wItH OnE ComMaNd.
cHANGE uppercase TO LOWERCASE AND LOWERCASE TO uppercase WiTh oNe cOMmAnD.

Change the appearance of quotation marks

If you have Use Smart Punctuation (Includes curly quotes) turned on in your QuickFix
preferences (see Determine What QuickFix Fixes on page 402 for more information), you can
quickly exchange them for straight quotes (for use in a macro, for instance). If you receive a
document with quotes of the wrong type, you can easily change them all. Choose commands from
the Convert submenu to change Smart Quotes to "Plain Quotes" (or the reverse).

Make all selected quotation marks smart

Choose the menu command Edit > Convert > Plain Quotes to Smart Quotes.

Make all selected quotation marks "plain"

Choose the menu command Edit > Convert > Smart Quotes to Plain Quotes.

Polishing & Managing Documents

299

Finding and Replacing Text

In Nisus Writer Pro, if you can describe a text pattern, you can probably find it. If you can find it,
you can almost definitely change it to any other text pattern you can describe. Nisus Writer Pro
offers three ways to find and replace text Normal Find, PowerFind, and PowerFind Pro (regex). For
the purpose of brevity, PowerFind Pro (regex) will be called PowerFind Pro. Normal Find meets
the needs of most searches for words. Use PowerFind and PowerFind Pro for text patterns, such as
a series of numbers (where you know how many digits, but you dont know what they are).
The resizable Find/Replace window identifies what document it will search in.
The Find/Replace window also indicates its state. Before you start to find and/or replace anything
it indicates in the lower left corner that it is Ready. Once you have searched for something the
Find/Replace window displays the number of items it has found or replaced. This useful
information is also available for various macros (which are explained in the file Nisus Macro
Reference).

Figure 320
The Find/Replace window of an Untitled document
To learn more about PowerFind and PowerFind Pro, see Using PowerFind on page 308 and Using
PowerFind Pro on page 324.

The Find/Replace window is very versatile.

You can choose the menu command View > Show Invisibles when the Find/Replace window is
open to make viewing distinct characters and spaces, etc. easier.
You can resize the window by dragging the lower right corner.
You can magnify the contents of the window by choosing the zoom percentage you want from
the menu View > Zoom.

Using Normal Find

The simplest means of finding things with Nisus Writer Pro is by using Normal Find. You can find
words, sentences, entire paragraphs, individual spaces, tabs, even the Return characters at the end
of paragraphs. You simply tell Nisus Writer Pro what you want to find by entering it into the Find/
Replace window. Nisus Writer Pro offers you a variety of methods to accomplish this.
When you choose the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find Nisus Writer Pro opens the Find/
Replace window.

Enter something into the Find box

Choose the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find and type the text you want to find.
Or
Select the text you want to find in your document, choose Copy to Find from the Copy or Find
submenus of the Edit menu.
Nisus Writer Pro puts the text into the Find box without using the Clipboard.

300

Using Normal Find

Finding and Replacing Text

If you simply press @ Nisus Writer Pro moves the insertion point to the Replace box. If you
press < Nisus Writer Pro searches for what you have in the Find box.

Enter something into the Replace box

Choose the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find press @ and type the text you want to
replace.
Or
Select the text you want to replace in your document, choose Copy to Replace from the Copy
or Find submenus of the Edit menu.

Either find or find and replace text

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Choose the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find.
Make sure Normal Find is the search type in the Using pop-up menu at the top of the dialog.
Enter what you want to find in the Find box.
Enter what you want as a replacement in the Replace box.
Click the appropriate button to start the procedure.

Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the Find expression.
Nisus Writer Pro selects the Find Expression in your document and scrolls to display it in
your window.

Click Find Previous to find the preceding occurrence of the Find Expression.
Nisus Writer Pro selects the Find Expression in your document and scrolls to display it in
your window.

Click Find All to find all occurrences of the Find expression.

Nisus Writer Pro finds and selects them all.

Click Replace & Find to replace the current selection with the Find expression and find the
next occurrence of the Find expression.
Nisus Writer Pro selects the Find Expression in your document and scrolls to display it in
your window, as if you had clicked the two buttons Replace and then Next.

Click Replace to replace the selection in your document with what is in the Replace box.
Nisus Writer Pro places the Replace Expression at the insertion point or replaces the
selection with the Replace Expression.

Click Replace All to find and replace all occurrences of the Find Expression with what
appears in the Replace box.
Nisus Writer Pro replaces the Find Expression with the Replace Expression.

When Nisus Writer Pro finds what you search for, it selects and highlights it with a particular color
that you can modify as explained in Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents on page
388.
6. Click the Close button when you finish or just click back into your document and leave the
Find/Replace window open in the background to use later.

Find the next occurrence of the Find expression

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to find what you are looking for, whether or not the Find/Replace
window is open.

If the Find/Replace window is open, simply click the Next button (illustrated in Figure 320 on
page 299) to find the next occurrence.

If the Find/Replace window is closed choose the menu command Edit > Find > Find Next.

Limit the search

The Find/Replace window opens with Entire File (that is, it will wrap around) as the setting,
however, the check boxes and pop-up menus in the Find/Replace window allow you to limit the
search in a variety of ways.
Ignore Case

When checked, Nisus Writer Pro finds both upper and lowercase occurrences of
the Find Expression.
When unchecked, Nisus Writer Pro finds the exact match of upper and/or lower
case characters in the Find Expression.
Suppose you have the sentence
I hope that the writer in you will blossom with Nisus Writer Pro.
With Ignore Case checked (turned on), Nisus Writer Pro finds both upper and

Polishing & Managing Documents

301
lowercase occurrences of the Find Expression.
I hope that the writer in you will blossom with Nisus Writer Pro.
With Ignore Case turned off and the word writer as a find expression, Nisus
Writer Pro would find only the first instance of the word (the noun not the proper
noun).
I hope that the writer in you will blossom with Nisus Writer Pro.

Whole Word

When checked, Nisus Writer Pro finds the Find Expression only if it forms an
entire word.
When unchecked, Nisus Writer Pro finds the Find Expression even if it makes up
only a portion of a word.
For example, with Whole Word checked, Nisus Writer Pro would not find the word
hat in that.

In Selection

When chosen from the Where pop-up menu and you click any of the Find or
Replace buttons finds or replaces occurrences of the Find or Replace Expression
in the selected area of text only.
You can find or replace all instances simultaneously by clicking Find All or
Replace All.
Click Next to have Nisus Writer Pro select the first instance from the beginning of
the selection (clicking Find Previous starts and the end of the selection).
Additional clicks of Next causes Nisus Writer Pro to step through each instance of
the pattern in the original selection, and beep when you come to the last one. In
other words it remembers the selection, and finds in selection relative to that
original selection.
Click Replace & Find to have Nisus Writer Pro replace the first instance from the
beginning of the selection and select the following instance.

Here to End

When chosen from the Where pop-up menu and you click any of the Find or
Replace buttons finds or replaces occurrences of the Find or Replace Expression
from the insertion point to the end of the document only (does not wrap around).

Here to Start

When chosen from the Where pop-up menu and you click any of the Find or
Replace buttons finds or replaces occurrences of the Find or Replace Expression
from the insertion point to the beginning of the document only (does not wrap
around).

Attribute Sensitive
When checked (depending on which check-box is checked beneath the Find
what and/or the Replace with boxes), Nisus Writer Pro searches for and finds the
Find Expression only if it matches the attributes assigned from the Format menu
and replaces it with the Replace Expression and the attributes assigned to it from
the Format menu.
You can search for an expression with different attributes, if the attributes are
applied to a single contiguous literal region at the start or end of a pattern.
If you remove all attributes from the Find what or Replace with boxes, the
Attribute Sensitive check box automatically turns itself off.
Using the expression: This That Another (if Any Attributes (the second command in the
Format menu when the Find/Replace window is open) is applied to Another)
Nisus Writer Pro can find: This That Another
even though Another has additional attributes associated with it that are not part of the
Find expression.
Similarly, using the expression: This That Another
Nisus Writer Pro will find: This That Another.
The important thing to remember is that this is a literal region with attributes.
This behavior is different for PowerFind and PowerFind Pro searches.

Limit the replace

The commands in the pop-up menus at the top of the Find/Replace window apply to the find and
replace action. However, the check boxes for the Find what and Replace with text boxes relate only
to the fields immediately above them. These check boxes allow you to limit the replace in two ways.
Match Case

When checked, Nisus Writer Pro replaces all the found text (whether uppercase or
lowercase depending on the setting for the Find field and matches the original
case of the Find expression regardless of what appears in the Replace field. If the
found text was uppercase Nisus Writer Pro replaces it with uppercase characters,
if the found text was lowercase Nisus Writer Pro replaces it with lowercase
characters.

302

Using Normal Find

Finding and Replacing Text

When unchecked, Nisus Writer Pro replaces the exact match of upper and/or
lower case characters that appears in the Replace Expression.
Suppose you have the sentence
I hope that the writer in you will blossom with Nisus Writer Pro.
With Match Case checked (turned on), Nisus Writer Pro replaces both upper and
lowercase occurrences of the Find Expression.
I hope that the writer in you will blossom with Nisus Writer Pro.
With Match Case turned off and the word writer as a find expression, Nisus
Writer Pro would replace both instances of the word with a lowercase w.
I hope that the writer in you will blossom with Nisus Writer Pro.
Replace Attributes
When checked, Nisus Writer Pro replaces the Replace Expression with the
attributes assigned from the Format menu and replaces it with the Replace
Expression and the attributes assigned to it from the Format menu.
An example of Normal find using attribute replacement is illustrated in Figure 320 and Figure
321. The Find expression searches for this (Capitalized, UPPERCASE or not; italic, underlined
or not), so long as it is Blue. Leaving all other occurrences of this untouched, the Replace
expression matches the case and attributes already there, and has only one attribute associated
with it, which it adds: Bold.

Figure 321
Normal Find Replace Attributes (before)

Figure 322
Normal Find Replace Attributes (after)
An example of PowerFind (explained beginning on 308) using attribute replacement is
illustrated in Figure 323 and Figure 324. The Find expression searches for and captures

Polishing & Managing Documents

303

AnyText (Capitalized, UPPERCASE or not; of any color or size, and almost any attribute), so
long as it is emphatic. Leaving all other text untouched, the Replace expression matches the
case and attributes already there, and has two attributes associated with it, which it adds:
Underline and 14 point.

Figure 323
PowerFind Replace Attributes (before)

Figure 324
PowerFind Replace Attributes (after)

It may be easier to reformat a large multipart selection than it is to concoct the proper Find/Replace
expression. After finding all the Emphatic text, you could use the commands of the menus and the
tags on the Statusbar to remove one or more styles and apply new ones.

Find/Replace only matches text that is visible in the current document view. To limit a Replace All
action from changing text in the headers/footers and/or footnotes/endnotes, temporarily hide these
portions of the document by choosing the menu command View > Draft View.

Reusing find and/or replace expressions

Nisus Writer Pro makes it easy for you to reuse recent find and replace expressions in your
documents. These expressions are automatically stored in the Recent Find and Recent Replace
sets of the Gear menu in the Find/Replace window and in the PowerFind Browser as explained in
detail on page 310.

Nisus Writer Pro stores recent expressions until you quit the application.

Use a recently used find or replace expression

Once you have defined your expression and used it

304

Using Normal Find

Finding and Replacing Text

Choose the expression you want from the Recent Find or Recent Replace submenu of the Gear
menu in the Find/Replace window.
Nisus Writer Pro places whatever expression you choose in the Find/Replace window dialog as
illustrated in Figure 325.

Figure 325
The Recent Find submenu of the Gear menu in the Find/Replace window

Save a find or replace expression

You can even save any Normal Find, PowerFind or PowerFind Pro expression.
Once you have defined your expression and tested it, for example the complex expression illustrated
in Figure 345 below. You can save it then and there.
1. Choose Save Expression from the bottom of the Gear menu in the Find/Replace window.

Figure 326
The Save Expression sheet
2.

Give your expression a name.

Polishing & Managing Documents

305

Figure 327
Naming a saved expression
3. Click OK.
If, however, you have gone on to other tasks and you later remember that you want to save that
complex expression you can do that.
4. Click Recent Find Expressions or Recent Replace Expressions from the PowerFind column in
the Find/Replace browser.
5. Click the expression you want to save from the Recent Find Expressions or Recent Replace
Expressions column in the Find/Replace browser as illustrated in Figure 328 and click Save.

Figure 328
Saving a recent expression
Once again, the Save Expression sheet appears, as in Figure 326 above. Continue as in steps 2 and
3 above.
When you quit, Nisus Writer Pro automatically saves your Find what and Replace with
expressions.

306

Using Normal Find

Finding and Replacing Text

Using a saved find or replace expression

Choose the saved expression you want from the menu Gear > Saved Expressions inside the
Find/Replace window.
If you choose the command from the Gear menu beside the Find what text edit box Nisus
Writer Pro inserts the expression in the top box; if you choose the command from the Gear
menu beside the Replace with box, Nisus Writer Pro inserts the lower box.

Figure 329
The Saved Expressions submenu

Deleting a saved find or replace expression

1.
2.

Click Recent Find Expressions or Recent Replace Expressions from the PowerFind column in
the Find/Replace browser.
Click the expression you want to delete from the Recent Find Expressions or Recent Replace
Expressions column in the Find/Replace browser as illustrated in Figure 328 and click Delete.

Polishing & Managing Documents

307

Creating a macro from a set of Find, Replace and or Find/Replace expressions

Nisus Writer Pro can automatically create a macro out of any find or find/replace expression you
build in the Find/Replace window. (For an explanation of macros see Macros, Skimming the
Surface and Macros, the Deeper Workings on pages 415 and 419 respectively.) All you need do is
choose the menu command Gear > Macroize in the Find/Replace window. Nisus Writer Pro takes
all the information you have set there and builds expression for your macros. This allows you to
test your find/replace expression thoroughly before adding a line to your macro.
1. Test your find/replace expression. Be sure that the settings in the Find/Replace window are set
appropriately.
The Macroize command takes these settings as the options argument in the macro. (For
more information see The list of find options on page 427.)
2. Choose the menu command Gear > Macroize inside the Find/Replace window.
A sheet appears in the Find/Replace window that offers a variety of choices.

Figure 330
The Macroize sheet in the Find/Replace window
3.

4.

5.

6.

From the pop-up menu inside the sheet you can choose from a number of options.
Choose the appropriate options for your macro command.
Find Next
Finds and selects the next occurrence of the Find what expression.
Find Previous
Finds and selects the previous occurrence of the Find what
expression.
Find All
Finds all occurrences of the Find what expression and selects
them as a multipart selection.
Replace Next
Finds the next occurrence of the Find what expression and
replaces it with the Replace with expression.
Replace Previous
Finds the previous occurrence of the Find what expression and
replaces it with the Replace with expression.
Replace All
Finds and replaces all occurrences of the Find what expression
and with the Replace with expression.
Once you have made your choice you can either save those settings to create a one-line macro
or copy the settings to the Clipboard to either edit or add to an existing macro.
Click Save as Macro.
Nisus Writer Pro presents a variant of the Save as dialog set to the Macros folder. The name of
the file begins with the kind of action you chose in 3 above followed by the first few characters
of the Find what expression in the Save as: field.
Or
Click Copy to Clipboard to put the same information on the current Clipboard so that you can
paste it into whatever macro youre working on. This is for advanced users.
Or
If you decide not to proceed, click Cancel.

An example of using PowerFind and Macroize is detailed in the section Convert Styles to HTML Code
beginning on page 321.

308

Using PowerFind

Finding and Replacing Text

Using PowerFind
PowerFind gives you powerful yet easy-to-use tools that extend the Normal Find and Replace
functions in Nisus Writer Pro. There may be times when you need to find or replace text which
conforms to a complex description or which varies from place to place in your document. For
example, to find and highlight every paragraph that contains a semicolon. Searches of this type
would be impossible using conventional find-and-replace methods, but are quite simple using
PowerFind. In general, anything you can describe in words, you can find with PowerFind.
Everything youve learned about finding and replacing text with Normal Find applies to PowerFind.
In addition, what you learn about PowerFind serves as the basis for the more advanced PowerFind
Pro.
In this part of the documentation, youll learn what types of tasks you can do with PowerFind. Youll
also find complete instructions for using both methods, along with plenty of examples of useful
find expressions for your convenience.
PowerFind is easy to use, and performs all the complex find and replace procedures available in
PowerFind Pro. PowerFind is Menu or Browser driven. You can type real words in the PowerFind
text edit box, but all of the power of PowerFind comes from the Find/Replace menus or Browser,
which are available from the Gear button and the Show PowerFind Browser command at the
bottom of its menu in the Find/Replace window as illustrated in Figure 333 on page 310.
In PowerFind Pro you can enter the same expressions as with PowerFind, but you can also use
the keyboard to enter them.
When the Find/Replace window is in PowerFind mode the expressions of the PowerFind
Browser enter the Find/Replace window as bubbles.
When the Find/Replace window is in PowerFind Pro mode the expressions of the PowerFind
Browser enter the Find/Replace window as text.

About PowerFind
Use PowerFind to increase your productivity and simplify tedious writing and editing procedures.
Here are just a few ways to use PowerFind

find all telephone numbers or addresseseven if theyre not all in the same format
find all UPPERCASE or Capitalized words.
change the sequence of words

to find all underlined words

As you experiment, always remember to back up your document before trying any new procedure.
You may have already used Nisus Writer Pros standard Find and Replace feature to perform simple
substitutionsfor example, replacing one word with another throughout your document.
Sometimes, however, you need more flexibility in what you search for, or you may want to do more
complex substitutions. PowerFind allows you to include variables, and parenthesized expressions in
your Find Expression to narrow the search down to exactly what you want. Should you reach the
limits of PowerFinds flexibility, you can move on to PowerFind Pro for virtually unlimited find and
replace capability.
This section has an example to show you how easy it is to use PowerFind to find phrases that
contain variables. It also explains the parts of a find expression and the logic Nisus Writer Pro
follows to complete a find procedure. In the example, youll also convert the PowerFind expression
that defines the search to a PowerFind Pro expression. This step gives you an idea of the difference
between these two search types.

PowerFind terminology
A good understanding of the terms and concepts described below will help you learn to use
PowerFind (and, later, if you want, PowerFind Pro) more effectively.
metacharacter is a PowerFind command or symbol. A12 Metacharacters denote a specific character
or set of characters and can represent variables, number of repetitions, and so on. PowerFind
displays the metacharacter symbols in a user-friendly manner using natural language words and
phrases in a bubble. You can customize the color of these as explained in the section Determine
the color of various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working environment on page 395.

12

The term metacharacter refers to the character standing for something beyond the normal literal or usual
meaning of the character (similar to the use of the word metaphysics).

Polishing & Managing Documents

309

Figure 331
A PowerFind metacharacter
PowerFind finds literal text exactly as it is entered. Literal text means characters that have no
special meaning on their own (that is, they are not meta characters). The PowerFind mode
considers all text to be literal; it will find exactly what you type.
An expression consists of one or more metacharacters, literal text, or any combination of
metacharacters and literal text used to define or describe what you want to find. Which is why we
say at the beginning of this section that If you can describe it, you can find it, and if you can find
it, you can change it to anything else you can describe.
A wild card is a metacharacter that assumes the identity of one or more characters in a search
expression. For example, the wild card in Figure 330 looks for any digit.
The PowerFind Find expression illustrated in Figure 331 first looks for an open parenthesis, then
the string of characters part number followed by a space and any sequence of one or more digits
then a close parenthesis.

Figure 332
A simple PowerFind expression

PowerFind example
Suppose you want to find all the capitalized words in your document. You can quickly create a
PowerFind expression that will find all words beginning with any capital letter in a single step
regardless of how many letters are in the word or what the letters are. And if you want to be more
specificsay, finding all capitalized words except those beginning with P, you can easily convert
your PowerFind expression to a PowerFind Pro expression and make the needed adjustments. For
instructions on how to convert PowerFind expressions to PowerFind Pro expressions see page 312.

Using the Find what and Replace with menus

The Find what and Replace with menus present all the basic find and replace commands you might
need to combine to create your Find or Replace Expression. In addition they contain submenus
containing recently found and replaced expressions, as well as saved expressions, along with the
tool to save them.

Choose the commands you need from the Find what Gear pop-up menu or the Replace with
Gear pop-up menu.
This puts the metacharacters that represent the expression in the Find what and Replace
with text edit boxes.

310

Using PowerFind

Finding and Replacing Text

Figure 333
The Find/Replace Windows Find What menu

Using the PowerFind Browser

The PowerFind Browser is a floating window. It functions much as the Finder browser window.
When you select from the commands on the left, new options become available in the columns to
the right from which you can select more options.

While it may appear to be a bit unwieldy, the PowerFind Browser is very useful because it can give
you an explanation of what each metacharacter means. As you become more comfortable building
your Find and Replace expressions, you may wish to use the menus as you graduate to PowerFind
Pro.

Open the PowerFind Browser

1.
2.

Open the Find/Replace window by choosing the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find.
Choose Show PowerFind Browser from the Find what Gear pop-up menu or the Replace
with Gear pop-up menu.
In addition to PowerFind Commands (as with the menus), the browser keeps track of Recent
Find Expressions, Recent Replace Expressions and even Saved Expressions that you may
have used at an earlier (no longer recent) session and decided to save.
Nisus Writer Pro groups the PowerFind expressions into five sub-sets Special Positions, Wild
Card, Match, Special Characters, and Repeat. When you choose an option from any of these
columns, Nisus Writer Pro inserts a graphic representation of the corresponding option in the
Find what or Replace with box.

Resize the PowerFind Browser

The PowerFind Browser opens so that you can see all three columns of PowerFind expressions
available. Below these expressions, two other areas appear
Repeat or Found #
These options only appear for two Find expressions (N - M Times and N Times of
the Repeat options) and in the Match expression OtherFound, or in the Replace
expression OtherFound. An example appears in Figure 337 on page 313.
Description

This area displays the selected PowerFind expression both in its PowerFind
"bubble" as well as its PowerFind Pro text form. It also includes a brief description
of what the expression would find.
Drag the lower right corner of the window to make the window larger or smaller.

Polishing & Managing Documents

311

Figure 334
The PowerFind Browser

Find capitalized words (a PowerFind example)

1.

Open the document you need to revise and move the insertion point to the beginning of the
document or type the following into a new document
I went for a walk along the Atlantic City boardwalk and thought about all I
had missed. A few hours earlier she had asked me to join her for a trip
across New Jersey through Pennsylvania, Ohio, Indiana, the great Midwest
and over the Rockies to the Pacific Ocean in California.

2.

3.

Then complete these steps.

Choose the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find, then choose the menu command Gear
> Show PowerFind Browser beneath Find what.
The PowerFind Browser window opens to offer more capabilities.
Select PowerFind Commands from the PowerFind column, then Wild Card from the
PowerFind Commands column and then UppercaseLetter from the Wild Card column to find
strings of characters that begin with a capital letter.
You can double-click UppercaseLetter or select it and click Insert.
Or

Choose the menu command Find what > Wild Card > UppercaseLetter inside the Find/
Replace window to find strings of characters that begin with a capital letter.

As you insert the expression, the Using pop-up menu automatically switches from Normal Find to
PowerFind.
4. Select Wild Card from the PowerFind Commands column and then Select LowercaseLetter
from the Wild Card column to tell PowerFind that the word youre looking for may contain some
lowercase letters after the initial capital letter.
You can double-click LowercaseLetter or select it and click Insert.
Or

5.

Choose the menu command Find what > Wild Card > LowercaseLetter inside the Find/
Replace window.
Select Repeat from the PowerFind column, then 0+ from the Repeat column.
You can double-click 0+ or select it and click Insert.
Or

Choose the menu command Find what > Repeat > 0+ inside the Find/Replace window.
We know that most words have more than one lowercase character.

312

Using PowerFind
6.

Finding and Replacing Text

If it is checked, be sure to uncheck Ignore Case. Otherwise Nisus Writer Pro will find all words
whether they are capitalized or not.

Figure 335
Building the PowerFind expression
7.

Click the Next button to begin the search.

Nisus Writer Pro can find all capitalized words, one at a time.

Select all instances of a found expression at once

Click Find All.

Convert a PowerFind expression to a PowerFind Pro expression

Choose PowerFind Pro (regex) from the Using pop-up menu.

Do this for its learning value. While you can perform many functions with the menus of
PowerFind, the ability to write your expressions directly gives you much greater flexibility.
The expression in the Find what box now looks like this
[[:upper:]][[:lower:]]*
Notice how PowerFind Pro uses symbols in place of the graphic representation of the menu
commands. Youll learn what these and other PowerFind Pro symbols mean in the section
beginning on page 325.

You can convert PowerFind expressions to PowerFind Pro, but, you cannot convert PowerFind Pro
expressions back to PowerFind.

PowerFind guidelines
Here are a few hints to keep in mind when working with PowerFind.

Replace expressions must be unique. Any Wild Card, Repeat or the Space or Tab
metacharacters cannot be used in a Replace with expression, because they are not unique. On
the other hand, a Replace with expression can contain metacharacters like

Or

Because they always mean the same thing.

If the search doesnt work as expected, look over the options selected in the Find/Replace
window (for example, Whole Word and Entire File). Also verify the position of the insertion
point.

Polishing & Managing Documents

313

Match set
Use Match menu commands to match phrases found in Find and Replace expressions.
Or

Any characters on either side of the Or expression

Capture()

Causes the matched text it encapsulates to be available as one of the 'Captured'

items either later in the search string or in the replace string. This expression is
valid only in the search string, not in the replace string.

Found

Appears only in the Replace with variant of the Match menu and represents
whatever have been selected by Capture().

Captured1 - Captured10
Corresponds to that numbered portion of the Find expression (built within
parentheses), use in both Find and Replace expressions.
OtherCaptured
Corresponds to that numbered portion of the Find expression (built within
parentheses), use in both Find and Replace expressions.
FollowedBy() and PrecededBy()
NeitherFollowedBy() nor PrecededBy() capture anything. Think of them as a
nestedexpression (or perhaps a grouped, sub, or contained expression).
These each require that the nested expression be present, but the content itself is
not included (that is captured) in the match. In other words, they are zero-width
and do not contribute to the full match. They function like the start/end of line
anchors ($ and ^) but allow somewhat arbitrary expressions. Only
FollowedBy() allows arbitrary expressions. PrecededBy() requires the
subexpression to be fixed in width, or some combination of fixed width
expressions.
As an example, lets say you want to find the last word in any sentence, but dont
want to select the punctuation mark itself. You could use the expression
illustrated in Figure 336. The FollowedBy() verifies that the word is FollowedBy()
a punctuation mark, but does not include that mark in the match.
PrecededBy() is the same, but it verifies the nested expression exists before the
following expression, rather than after.

Figure 336
The LookAhead PowerFind expression

Figure 337
The OtherCaptured PowerFind expression

314

Using PowerFind

Finding and Replacing Text

NotFollowedBy() and NotPrecededBy()

Similar toFollowedBy() and PrecededBy() neither NotFollowedBy() nor
NotPrecededBy() capture anything. Think of them as a nestedexpression (or
perhaps a grouped, sub, or contained expression). These each require that
the nested expression to not be present. In other words, they are zero-width and
do not contribute to the full match. They function like the start/end of line
anchors ($ and ^) but allow somewhat arbitrary expressions. Only
NotFollowedBy() allows arbitrary expressions. NotPrecededBy() requires the
subexpression to be fixed in width, or some combination of fixed width
expressions.
CharacterInSet[] Any one or more characters, for example: vowels
CharacterNotInSet[]
Any one or more characters, for example: anything not a Tab

Repeat set
Use the Repeat set options to find a character or wild card that appears a specified number of
times. To find parts of strings, be sure to uncheck Whole Word. You cannot use Repeat options in
the Replace expression. To replace something you find with a certain number of items in the
Replace box you must enter them that many times. (Remember, you can cut copy and paste in the
Find/Replace window.)
Repeat menu commands refer to repeated occurrences of a character or wild card. Zero or one
occurrences means that the character or string is either not found or found only once; there is no
repeat. For example, the expression
(find any A followed by any B which may or may not
be there), finds each occurrence of A alone or A preceding any number of Bs.
0 or 1
Zero or one occurrence
The expression illustrated in Figure 337 (find any A or any A followed by any B but only the first
one that appears) finds A in AC and AB in ABB.

Figure 338
The 0 or 1 PowerFind expression
0 or 1 Shortest
Zero or one occurrence, the shortest occurrence
The expression illustrated in Figure 338 (find any A followed by any B which must be there at
least one (or more) time(s), but only the shortest string of them) finds only AB regardless of how
many Bs appear.

Figure 339
The Shortest 0 or 1 PowerFind expression
0+

Zero or more repeated occurrences (It may or may not be there.)

0+ Shortest

Zero or more repeated occurrences (It may or may not be there.), the shortest
occurrence

1+

One or more repeated occurrences

The expression illustrated in Figure 339 (find any A followed by any B which must be there at
least one (or more) time(s)).

1+ Shortest

One or more repeated occurrences, the shortest occurrence

Figure 340
The 1+ PowerFind expression

Polishing & Managing Documents

N Times

315
Exactly N repeated occurrences

N - M Times
Between N and M repeated occurrences
The expression illustrated in Figure 340 (find any A followed by any B which must be there
between 3 and 5 times; using N - M Times) finds ABBB, ABBBB and ABBBBB only.

Figure 341
The N - M Times PowerFind expression

Note that the Repeat refers only to the immediately preceding character or variable.

Scripts / Blocks set

As explained in Finding and/or replacing non-Roman characters below, you can look up the
Unicode blocks for specific scripts in the Characters palette (choose the menu command Special
Characters > Show Character Catalog at the bottom of the Edit menu, choose Code Tables from
the View pop-up menu inside the Characters palette) as illustrated in Figure 342, and enter them
directly in a PowerFind Pro expression.
Block is merely a named contiguous code point range, while a script is a property of each code
point. Often times code points in the same block will have the same script, but there is no hard rule
on this. A
Nisus Writer Pro does, however, include metacharacters for a wide variety of scripts and blocks. If
you are familiar with code blocks, these are all fairly self explanatory and are, thereby, listed here
without much further explanation.
AnyArabic, (including Persian/Farsi) AnyCyrillic (i.e. Russian, Bulgarian, etc.), AnyDevanagari,
AnyGreek, AnyGujarati, AnyGurmukhi, AnyHan (Chinese, both Traditional and Simplified as well
as Japanese Kanji), AnyHangul, AnyHebrew (Any character in Hebrew characters, whether
Hebrew, Ladino, Yiddish or related languages), AnyHiragana, AnyKatakana, AnyLatin (Romanic
script or the vast majority of European languages or transliterations into those languages), AnyThai
Any character in Thai, InAlphabeticPresentationForms, InArabic, InArabicPresentationFormsA,
InArabicPresentationFormsB, InArmenian, InArrows, InBasicLatin, InBengali, InBlockElements,
InBopomofo, InBopomofoExtended, InBoxDrawing, InBraillePatterns, InBuhid, InCherokee,
InCJKCompatibility, InCJKCompatibilityForms, InCJKCompatibilityIdeographs,
InCJKRadicalsSupplement, InCJKSymbolsAndPunctuation, InCJKUnifiedIdeographs,
InCJKUnifiedIdeographsExtensionA, InCombiningDiacriticalMarks,
InCombiningDiacriticalMarksForSymbols, InCombiningHalfMarks, InControlPictures,
InCurrencySymbols, InCyrillic, InCyrillicSupplementary, InDevanagari, InDingbats,
InEnclosedAlphanumerics, InEnclosedCJKLettersAndMonths, InEthiopic, InGeneralPunctuation,
InGeometricShapes, InGeorgian, InGreekAndCoptic, InGreekExtended, InGujarati, InGurmukhi,
InHalfwidthAndFullwidthForms, InHangulCompatibilityJamo, InHangulJamo, InHangulSyllables,
InHanunoo, InHebrew, InHighPrivateUseSurrogates, InHighSurrogates, InHiragana,
InIdeographicDescriptionCharacters, InIPAExtensions, InKanbun, InKangxiRadicals, InKannada,
InKatakana, InKatakanaPhoneticExtensions, InKhmer, InKhmerSymbols, InLao,
InLatin1Supplement, InLatinExtendedA, InLatinExtendedAdditional, InLatinExtendedB,
InLetterlikeSymbols, InLimbu, InLowSurrogates, InMalayalam, InMathematicalOperators,
InMiscellaneousMathematicalSymbolsA, InMiscellaneousMathematicalSymbolsB,
InMiscellaneousSymbols, InMiscellaneousSymbolsAndArrows, InMiscellaneousTechnical,
InMongolian, InMyanmar, InNumberForms, InOgham, InOpticalCharacterRecognition, InOriya,
InPhoneticExtensions, InPrivateUseArea, InRunic, InSinhala, InSmallFormVariants,
InSpacingModifierLetters, InSpecials, InSuperscriptsAndSubscripts, InSupplementalArrowsA,
InSupplementalArrowsB, InSupplementalMathematicalOperators, InSyriac, InTagalog,
InTagbanwa, InTaiLe, InTamil, InTelugu, InThaana, InThai, InTibetan,
InUnifiedCanadianAboriginalSyllabics, InVariationSelectors, InYijingHexagramSymbols,
InYiRadicals, InYiSyllables

316

Using PowerFind

Finding and Replacing Text

Finding and/or replacing non-Roman characters

Specify which Script (language) your text is in by choosing the appropriate language from the
Scripts / Blocks set or:
1. Choose Special Characters from the bottom of the Edit menu to open the Apple-supplied
Characters palette as explained in Enter Unicode text on page 492 to find non-Roman
characters.
2. In step 4 of the instructions there, instead of inserting the character in your document you will
insert it into the Find or Replace window.
This is not the Character palette that is part of Nisus Writer Pro, which has controls for the
font and other character attributes of your text.

Figure 342
The System's Characters palette

Special Characters set

Use options from the Special Characters set to find spaces, tabs and other similar formatting and
other special characters.
Space

Space character; an invisible character that appears when you press the Space
Bar

Tab

Tab character; an invisible character that displays on your screen when you press
the Tab Key (@)

Space or Tab

Space character or a Tab character

Return

The Return character; an invisible character that defines the end of a paragraph

Soft Return

The Soft Return character; an invisible character that defines the end of a line
without beginning a new paragraph

Polishing & Managing Documents

317

Special Positions set

Use options from the Special Positions set to determine the location of the beginning or ending of
the Find expression.
Start of Word
Matches the start of any word.
The expression illustrated in Figure 342 would find any word that begins with a g.

Figure 343
The Start of Word PowerFind expression
End of Word
Matches the end of any word.
The expression illustrated in Figure 343 would find any word the ends with a g.

Figure 344
The End of Word PowerFind expression
Start of Paragraph
Matches the start of any paragraph, except when that paragraph is at the
beginning of a new section.
End of Paragraph
Matches the Return character ((i.e. Carriage Return) from Classic Mac
documents), Newline (Mac OS X/Unix) or carriage Return and Newline (Windows).
While technically the traditional term for this is End of Line, because it does not
select the Soft Return character Nisus Writer Pro uses the laypersons term. End
of Paragraph also matches the end of the document, even if it does not end with a
Return character.
Start of Sentence
Matches the start of any sentence.
End of Sentence
Matches the end of any sentence.
You can see how some of these Special Positions metacharacters function in Figure 345 below.
The expression finds all words that both begin and end with g and appear at the end of a
sentence (going, gag, gong and gang), while ignoring all other words that either begin with but
do not end with a g (got, garage and good), as well as all words that both begin and end with
g but do not appear at the end of a sentence (Greg, as well as other instances of gang, gong
and gag).

318

Using PowerFind

Finding and Replacing Text

Figure 345
Special Positions set of Find/Replace expressions illustrated

Wild Card set

Include a wild card in your expression when you want to find one or more characters. For example,
use the wild card

To look for any number between 0 and 9. If you know you want to find 93, type 9 and 3 in the Find
box. If you just know that your document has a two digit number, but you dont know what it is,
enter

.
Any

Any group of characters (except footnote markers), including the Return character
that defines the end of a paragraph.

AnyText

Any group of characters (except footnote markers), excluding the Return character
that defines the end of a paragraph.

AnyCharacter

Any character including the Return character that defines the end of a paragraph,
only one (can be modified using the options of the Repeat set)

AnyTextCharacter
Any character excluding the Return character that defines the end of a paragraph,
only one (can be modified using the options of the Repeat set)
AnyWordCharacter
Any single alphanumeric character; excluding Returns spaces, punctuation,
characters; this is part of the Unicode specifications
AnyLowercaseLetter
Any lowercase letter from a to z, excluding modified letters (such as , or )
AnyUppercaseLetter
Any uppercase letter from A to Z, excluding modified letters (such as , or )
AnyDigit

Any numeric character that serves exclusively as a digit: 0-9 as well as other
characters from languages with distinctive characters for numbers, e.g.: Arabic: ,
,

AnyLetterOrDigit
Any alphabetic or numeric (alphanumeric) character; this is the old "POSIX"
style character class

Polishing & Managing Documents

319

Any Whitespace
The Space character; a Tab, a Return, a Soft Return and a Page Break
Any Space

Any single space character; a normal space, non-breaking space, etc. including
the Word Joiner (Zero Width Non-Breaking Space) U+2060.

Any Break

The Page Break or Section Break; an invisible character that results from choosing
Page Break or any of the various section breaks from the menu command Insert >
Section Break

AnyWord

Any word

AnySentence

Any group of characters that ends in an end of sentence marker followed by a

space (tab, Return or the end of the file). If a space follows an abbreviation with a
period, Nisus Writer Pro selects up to that period.

AnyParagraph

Any character that occurs one or more times (from the insertion point forward)
except the Return character that defines the end of a paragraph

AnyHTMLTag
Any group of characters surrounded by < and />.
Any Double Quote
Matches any double quote ("), opening or closing, smart or "straight".
Any Single Quote
Matches any single quote ('), opening or closing, smart or 'straight'.
Any Currency

Matches any currency symbol such as $, , , , , , , , , , , .

Any Symbol

Matches any single symbol character (math, dingbats, currency, etc).

Any Punctuation
Matches any punctuation character such as the period, comma, !, ?, [ and
other brackets, etc.
Any Private Use Area
Matches any single character in Unicodes Private Use Area (PUA), which is
reserved for application/domain specific characters. Eg: these character codes are
not standardized and could be used for any purpose.

Transform set
The Transform set of metacharacters available in the Gear submenu of the Replace with portion of
the Find/Replace window enable you to transform captured UPPERCASE characters to
lowercase, captured lowercase characters to UPPERCASE, and Capitalize any captured
expression.
Lowercase{}

Causes any captured text to be transformed to the lowercase version of those

characters

Uppercase{}

Causes any captured text to be transformed to the UPPERCASE version of those

characters

Capitalize{}

Causes any captured text to be transformed so that the first letter of each
captured string of characters is capitalized.
Words with non-alphabetics in them for example guinea-bissau r2d2 find/replace
nisus.com and even possessive forms such as wagners become transformed to: GuineaBissau R2D2 Find/Replace Nisus.Com And WagnerS.

Examples of putting PowerFind to use

In the examples that follow, all instructions assume the Find/Replace window is open and
PowerFind is selected from the Using pop-up menu.

Remove extra blank lines

These steps explain how to find every blank line and remove it.
1. Choose Return twice from the Special Characters set, then 1+ from the Repeat set.
The Find box displays this expression in Figure 345.

Figure 346
The Find 2 or more Returns PowerFind expression

320

Using PowerFind
2.
3.

Finding and Replacing Text

Click in the Replace box and choose Return from the Special Characters set.
Check Whole File and click Replace All to remove all blank lines.

Remove page breaks

You can insert forced page breaks in your Nisus Writer Pro documents by choosing the menu
command Insert > Page Break. You can also find and remove them using PowerFind.
1. Click in the Find box and choose Any Break from the Special Characters set.
2. Leave the Replace box blank.
3. Click Replace All to remove all page breaks created using the menu command Insert > Page
Break.
Beware! This removes all inserted breaks, page breaks as well as section breaks.

Change the sequence of a pattern

These instructions explain how to change all occurrences of a date entered as dd/mm/yy (for
example 23/06/73) to mm/dd/yy. (or 06/23/73).
1. Click in the Find box and insert Capture from the Match column in the PowerFind Browser
window.
2. Type a slash:
/
3. Place your insertion point between the two portions of the Capture metacharacter.
4. Insert AnyDigit twice from the Wild Card column in the PowerFind Browser window.
So far, the Find expression is as illustrated in Figure 347.

Figure 347
The Capture any two digits followed by a slash PowerFind expression
1.
2.

Select what you see in the Find what box, then choose Copy then Paste it in twice.
Delete the final slash / to finish the expression so that it appears as illustrated in Figure 348.

Figure 348
The Capture any two sets of digits separated by slashes PowerFind expression
Here each set of the Capture and AnyDigit represents the two digits of the month followed by
the slash 06/ then the day and slash 23/ and finally the year 73 the three things you want
to find and switch.

3.

Not only can you resize the Find/Replace window, but, if some of the expression is still
hidden, a scrollbar appears.
Click in the Replace box and use the Match column and your keyboard to create the Replace
expression illustrated in Figure 349.

Figure 349
A PowerFind replace expression changing a sequence of captured text
Nisus Writer Pro uses the Captured found text to define the numbered Captured groupings;
that is, the first set of Captured text surrounds what will be produced in Captured1. The
Capture stores the found expression so that it can be recalled when using the numbered
Captured characters in the Match column. In this example, the first Capture defines the two
numbers, found in the text, not the symbols AnyDigitAnyDigit, to be recalled when Captured1
is used.

4.

So, in the example, Captured2 represents the day (now at the beginning) and Captured1
represents the month (now appearing in second place).
Choose Entire File, from the Where pop-up menu then click Find All.

Polishing & Managing Documents

5.

321

Click Replace All.

Find two neighboring duplicate paragraphs

1.
2.
3.
4.

Double-click Capture() from the Match column in the PowerFind Browser window.
Place your insertion point between the two portions of the Capture metacharacter.
Double-click AnyParagraph from the Wild Card column.
Double-click Return from the Special Characters column.
So far, the Find expression appears as illustrated in Figure 350.

Figure 350
The Capture any paragraph followed by a return PowerFind expression
5.
6.

Place your insertion point to the right of the Capture metacharacter.

Double-click Captured1 from the Match column in the PowerFind Browser window so that it
appears as illustrated in Figure 351.

Figure 351
The Capture any paragraph followed by a return repeated once PowerFind expression
7.

Double-click 1+ from the Repeat column so that the final expression appears as illustrated in
Figure 352.

Figure 352
The Capture any paragraph followed by a return repeated once one or more times PowerFind expression
You can use this expression to find and eliminate repeated paragraphs.

Change the wording of a repeated phrase containing a variable

Suppose your document contains multiple entries of the phrase whose widget code number is #,
where # represents any of fifty different widget codes. The Find and Replace expressions below
change this phrase to with widget code # without changing actual numerical values.

Create the Find and Replace expressions illustrated in Figure 353.

Figure 353
A PowerFind expression that changes the wording of a repeated phrase with a variable

Convert Styles to HTML Code

With your document open choose the menu command Edit > Find > Show Find. The following
steps will lead you through the process of creating the Find what and Replace with expressions
illustrated in Figure 354.
1. Choose PowerFind from the Using pop-up menu.
2. Choose the menu command Gear > Match > Capture () inside the Find/Replace window.
3. Choose the menu command Gear > Wild Card > AnyCharacter inside the Find/Replace window
(it will appear inside the parentheses)
4. Choose the menu command Gear > Repeat > 1+ inside the Find/Replace window.
5. Press @ to move your insertion point from the Find what area to the Replace with area of the

322

Using PowerFind

Finding and Replacing Text

Find/Replace window.
Type the opening HTML tag you want.
The tag illustrated is <i>
7. Choose the menu command Gear > Match > Found (this time beside the lower Gear, beneath
Replace with) inside the Find/Replace window.
8. Type the closing HTML tag you want.
The tag illustrated is </i>
9. Press @ once again to select all the text in the Find what area.
10. Apply the attributes you want to find (that match the HTML tags youve entered) from the
Format menu.
11. Test your find/replace expression by clicking Find Next and then Replace a couple of times.
12. Choose the menu command Gear > Macroize (once again, beside the lower Gear, beneath
Replace with) inside the Find/Replace window as illustrated in Figure 354. The Macroize sheet
in the Find/Replace window appears as illustrated in Figure 330 on page 307.
13. Choose Replace All from the pop-up menu as illustrated in Figure 355. The other options are
explained on page 307.
14. Click the Save as Macro button. The Save As dialog appears pointing to the Macros folder of
Nisus Writer Pro as illustrated in Figure 356.
15. Make sure the File Format is set to Nisus Macro, name the file what you want as illustrated in
Figure 357 and click Save.
16. Continue steps 6 through 13 for each of the styles you want to add to the macro and instead of
step 14 click Copy to Clipboard.
17. Paste the new line of code at the end of the existing macro and click Save once again.
18. Repeat steps 16 and 17 as needed.
The name you use to save the file becomes the command name that appears on the Macro menu of
Nisus Writer Pro.
6.

Figure 354
The Find/Replace window with the find and replace expressions created

Figure 355
The pop-up menu in the Macroize sheet

Polishing & Managing Documents

Figure 356
The Save As dialog pointing to the Macros folder of Nisus Writer Pro

Figure 357
Naming a Nisus Writer Pro macro

323

324

Using PowerFind Pro

Finding and Replacing Text

Using PowerFind Pro

Everything youve learned about finding and replacing text with Normal Find and PowerFind also
applies to PowerFind Pro.
PowerFind Pro uses metacharacters13 to represent the wild cards and other specialized feature
characters which are used in the Find/Replace window. While PowerFind used bubbles to represent
the special feature characters, PowerFind Pro uses text which you type from the keyboard (or
choose from the menus) in one, two, and three character combinations to represent these same
special characters and more. PowerFind Pro metacharacters enable even more elaborate Find/
Replace options. When PowerFind Pro is the active method you can still choose any of the
commands from the Find/Replace windows menus, however, Nisus Writer Pro displays them as
actual textual metacharacters, not as the bubble expressions.
The metacharacters Nisus Writer Pro uses for Find and Replace expressions in PowerFind Pro are
based on GREP (often called a Global Regular Expression Parser), a feature of UNIX operating
systems. Even if you do not have a programming background or a familiarity with UNIX, with a little
practice, youll be surprised how easily you can learn to manipulate text with PowerFind Pro and
extend your use of Nisus Writer Pro from an elaborate electronic typewriter to a full featured writing
environment.
You can study the examples already discussed in the section Examples of putting PowerFind to
use beginning on page 319, but here as well, simply choose PowerFind Pro (regex) instead of the
menu command Search Type > PowerFind.
The following examples illustrate some of PowerFind Pros capabilities and provide useful
procedures that you can adapt. The instructions assume the Find/Replace window is open and that
you chose the menu command Search Type > PowerFind Pro (regex).

Exercises, or examples of putting PowerFind Pro to use

Find a seven-digit phone number
This expression finds a seven-digit phone number that includes a hyphen.
Enter \d\d\d-\d\d\d\d in the Find box.

\d

is the metacharacter that represents any numeric (0 through 9) character

represents the - (hyphen) character.

Find any number of trailing spaces in a document or tabs at the end of paragraphs
Use this expression to clean up electronic files that contain extra characters.
Enter [[:blank:]]+$ in the Find box.
[[:blank:]]+$ is a metacharacter statement made up of the PowerFind Pro metacharacters
which signify

[[:blank:]]
space or tab character
+

is equivalent to

(1+ on the Repeat menu).

located at the end of a paragraph character.

Find the invisible null (ASCII (Unicode) 0) character

Enter \0 in the Find box.

\0

is the metacharacter that represents the invisible null character (ASCII (Unicode)
code 0).

Find repeated groups of characters

Heres how to find 121212, as well as 1212 and 12, as in the phrase, Send 12 of part number
121212 to room 1212 at building 412 in Troy, NY 12180. With Whole Word turned on, Nisus Writer
Pro would find the first three numbers, 12, 121212, and 1212. With Whole Word turned off, Nisus
Writer Pro would find the 12 in 412 and 12180 as well.

Enter (12)+ in the Find box.

( and )

13

are equivalent to the parentheses commands in the Match menu.

The term metacharacter refers to the character standing for something beyond the normal literal or usual
meaning of the character (similar to the use of the word metaphysics).

Polishing & Managing Documents

325

12

is the expression that you want to find (you can replace this with any other
expression you want to find)

one or more times character

Find any set of characters

Suppose you want to search your document for all punctuation marks.
Enter [,.;?!]+ in the Find box.

[ and ]

the brackets stand for a user-defined wild card, that is whatever appears within
them. In this case Nisus Writer Pro interprets the punctuation marks literally.

is equivalent to +is equivalent to

(1+ on the Repeat menu).

Characters with special meaning

The characters listed here have special meaning in PowerFind Pro expressions. To use one of these
characters literally in an expression, precede it with a backslash \. This includes the backslash
itself (so if you want to find a backslash, you need to have \\ in the Find box.)

Name

Appearance

Meaning

backslash

Changes character meaning

caret

dollar sign

asterisk

plus

Expression that precedes

occurs one or more times

question mark

Expression that precedes

occurs zero or once

period

Any character not including

the Return

brackets

[ and ]

vertical line
1 backslash

Represents the beginning of

paragraph position
Matches the end of the
paragraph position
Expression that precedes
occurs zero or more times

For enclosing user-defined

wild cards
For finding the character
either before or after this
character Or. By itself it
finds anything, but selects
nothing.

Table 31
Characters with special meaning in PowerFind Pro
As you work with PowerFind Pro, keep in mind that the meanings of most special characters depend
on their context.

326

Using PowerFind Pro

Finding and Replacing Text

Modifier characters
Use the modifier characters backslash and colon to change how Nisus Writer Pro interprets what
follows them.
\

the backslash

In PowerFind Pro, the backslash changes the meaning of the character or characters that follow it.
For example the character n, is not a metacharacter and has no special meaning. However, \n
represents the New Line character in an expression.

Parenthesized expressions
Use parentheses in PowerFind Pro Find expressions in the same manner as you do with PowerFind
with these additional guidelines.
The ( ) characters in PowerFind Pro correspond to the Capture expression found in the Match menu
in PowerFind and explained on page 313. For example, the search for (my expression) (where my
expression represents some text such as the airplane) continues as if the ( and ) were not present.
Nisus Writer Pro then remembers the matched expression, that is, the Found or Captured#
expression that fits the parameters of the expression my expression. To refer to the first
parenthesized expression again in the Find what expression or in the Replace with expression, use
the metacharacter \1, this is the PowerFind Pro equivalent to PowerFinds
.
Use parentheses to include repeated characters in one expression, then append a repeat
metacharacter such as +. For example, the expression (AB)+ finds AB followed by AB repeated one
or more times in succession.
You can refer to strings of text you have found in any Find expression even within that same Find
expression, but you must first place that segment of the Find expression in parentheses in order to
refer to it later. For example the text:
ABCDEFABGHABabcdABabcdEF
has only five patterns repeated in its twenty-four characters.

Figure 358
Repeated text patterns
Nisus Writer Pro can find each of these patterns with the Find expression
(AB)([[:upper:]]+?)(EF)\1([[:upper:]]+?)\1([[:lower:]]+?)\1\5\3
Rearranging the Replace expression (and adding various attribute formatting options):

\2

\2\4\5\1

\2\1\4

\3\3 \1\5\5

arrives at this result:

CD

CDGHabcdAB

EFef

cdABGH

ABabcdabcd

Nisus Writer Pro can ignore, or not capture some of the expressions it finds.
The metacharacters used in the PowerFind expression for AnyWord ((?:\m\w+\M)) (?: and ?)
have the exact same function as ( and ) except that they do not create a replace expression (i.e. \1,
\2, \3, etc.). These allow you to search for a particular string of text without creating a
corresponding Replace with expression. You can use these for grouping other metacharacters
together to apply a single modifier to them. For example in the pattern in Figure 357 above:

Figure 359
Uncaptured text patterns
(AB)(?:[[:upper:]]+?)(EF)\1([[:upper:]]+?)\1([[:lower:]]+?)\1\4\2
Rearranging the Replace expression (and adding various attribute formatting options):

Polishing & Managing Documents

327

\2

\2\4\1

\2\1\4

\3\3 \1

arrives at this result:

EF

EFabcdAB

GHgh

efABabcd

AB

Neither of these tasks may seem particularly useful for normal word processing. However, you can
use Nisus Writer Pro as a text processor to manipulate raw text.

As illustrated here, you can replace a wide variety of attributes in a Replace with expression.
As explained on page 301 you can find literal text with specific attributes.
You can also search for expressions using metacharacters where attributes are assigned to the first
character in the Find what expression.
However, you cannot search for an expression using metacharacters that uses multiple attributes. In
this instance Nisus Writer Pro removes the attributes it cannot search for and then runs the search.

Pre-defined wild cards

The following metacharacters are predefined wild cards. Each metacharacter finds a character from
a given set. You can choose some of these metacharacters from the Wild Card menu available in the
Find/Replace window. Wild cards are only meaningful when you use them to construct the Find
expression. If you enter them in the replacement pattern, Nisus Writer Pro interprets them literally
because they do not represent a unique match.
Wild Card

What it Does

\x00-\xff

Finds any character except Return <.

[\x00-\xff]

Finds any character including a Return; matches any ASCII (Unicode) character
from 0 through 255.

[\x00-\x07\x09-\x0c\x0e-\x1f]
Finds any gremlin; use to clean up database output files or downloaded user
network files; see the Glossary (page 481) for a definition of gremlin.
[\x00-\x0c\x0e-\xif]
A colon followed by a space finds any control character; use this to clean up DOS
files or files downloaded from a network; the ASCII (Unicode) range of the control
characters is from 0 through 31 (except 13, the Return).
[[:alpha:]]

Finds any lowercase or uppercase character; the equivalent of the command

AnyLetter ([A-Za-z])in the Wild Card menu, plus all modified alphabetics typed
using the 4 key. This finds any character Unicode considers an alphabetic.

[[:alpha:]_]

Finds any alphabetic or diacritical modified alphabetic, underscore character

_ (ASCII (Unicode) 95 _). This finds any character Unicode considers an
alphabetic plus the underscore character as used in file_names on DOS
machines.

[^[:alpha:]]

Finds any non-alphabetic character including the underscore character _ (ASCII

95 _).

[^[:alpha:]_]

Finds any non-alphabetic character excluding the underscore character _ (ASCII

95 _).

[[:blank:]]

Finds either a space (ASCII (Unicode) 32) or a tab (ASCII (Unicode) 9); same as [\s
\t].

\d

Finds any digit from 0 through 9; same as menu command AnyDigit ([0-9])from
the Wild Card menu.

[[:xdigit:]]

Finds any digit or alphabetic character from a to f; covers the ranges 0-9 a-f A-F;
use to find hexadecimal numerals.

[[:lower:]]

Finds any lowercase alphabetic character from a to z plus modified alphabetics;

the equivalent of the command LowercaseLetter ([a-z])in the Wild Card menu.

[[:alnum:]]

Finds any alphanumeric character; the equivalent of the command

AnyLetterOrDigit ([A-Za-z0-9]) in the Wild Card menu.

\w

Finds any alphanumeric, underscore character; same as [[:alnum:]] but includes

the underscore character.

[[:upper:]]

Finds any uppercase alphabetic character in the range A to Z; the equivalent of

the command UppercaseLetter ([A-Z])in the Wild Card menu.

328

Using PowerFind Pro

Finding and Replacing Text

\W

Finds any non-alphanumeric character (excluding a Return and an underscore);

opposite of \w.

[[:punct:]]

Finds any punctuation character such as ( [ send text as rtf | send rtf | rtf | text
as rtf; ( _ @ # % & * \ ? ! } ] ).

User-defined wild cards

PowerFind Pro also allows the user to define wild cards.
There are two ways to define wild cards. One way is to list all the characters that the wild card
matches between brackets []. For example, the expression [abc] is a wild card that matches any of
the three letters a, b, or c and nothing else.
Another way is to list all the characters the wild card does not match between brackets and a caret
[^]. Here the caret means not in the set. For example, [^abc] is a wild card that finds any
character that is not a, b, c, or Return. To include the Return character in the set, use the
expression [[^abc]||[\n]].

[]

(any character from a set excluding Return)

[] can define a range, an enumerated set, or a combination of both. To define a range use a
hyphen - between the start of the range and the end of the range. For example, the wild card [a-f]
represents any character in the alphabetic range from a through f. If you use the bracket to define a
set that includes any digit, you cannot use \d, but must type 0-9 between the brackets. The range
assumes the order of increasing ASCII (Unicode) codes. Enter the hexadecimal representation for
space \x20.
Be sure to uniquely define each specified character, which means you cannot use certain wild
cards. A backslash \ preceding any other character causes Nisus Writer Pro to interpret the
character literally. For example, to use the six characters , ], [, -, ^ and \ in a set begin the string
with \. Enter \ twice to include the \ character itself.
Nisus Writer Pro interprets all characters inside the brackets [] literally. For example, a search for
[:a] matches a colon or an a.

[^] (any character not from a set )

[^] finds any character not in the set . For example, [^a-z] finds any character not a lowercase
alphabetic and the pattern [^!-~] finds any character whose ASCII (Unicode) code is not in the
range 33 to 126. A particularly useful application of this metacharacter is for finding columns of
text; the expression [^\t]+\t finds anything that is not a tab (which appears one or more times)
followed by a tab.

Characters with a unique match

These metacharacters usually match a character that does not print. Because these characters are
a unique match, you can use them in Find and Replace expressions.
Character

Finds

\0 (null)

Null character (ASCII (Unicode) code 0)

\b

Backspace character (ASCII (Unicode) code 8)

\t

Tab character (ASCII (Unicode) code 9); press 1 @ to insert an actual tab
character in an expression

\n

Newline (OS X end of line character)

\v

Vertical Tab

\f

Page breaks or a form feed character (ASCII (Unicode) code 12); use \f as a replace
expression to remove all page breaks created by choosing the menu command
Insert > Page Break as well as all the various section breaks inserted using the
menu command Insert > Section Break

\r

Return character (ASCII (Unicode) code 13) press 4 < to insert an actual
Return character in an expression

\s

Any White Space character

Repeat characters
The plus, asterisk, and minus sign + * - signal the repeat of the previous character or
parenthesized expression. Repeat characters follow a character or parenthesized expression.
When searching backward, Nisus Writer Pro finds the shortest sequence.
Character

What it Does

Polishing & Managing Documents

329

Finds one or more occurrences of whatever that character or expression matches;

the equivalent of the command 1+ on the Repeat menu

Finds zero or more occurrences of whatever that character or expression matches;

the equivalent of the command 0+ on the Repeat menu (it may or may not be
there) menu (it may or may not be there)

Finds zero or one occurrence of whatever that character or expression matches;

the equivalent of the command 0 or 1 on the Repeat menu; you can also use
minus inside brackets to signify a range

??, +?, *?

Finds the shortest match allowed from each of the three repeat characters.

Match characters
Matching characters using PowerFind Pro works much like matching characters using PowerFind.
The main differences are the metacharacters used and the added flexibility PowerFind Pro offers.
Character

What it Does

( to )

Defines a replaceable parenthesized expression that can be recalled by numerical

order; the equivalent of the various Capture commands in the Match menu

\1 to \20

Finds parenthesized expressions 1 to 20; the equivalent of the commands

Captured1 through Captured10 and the menu command Match >
OtherCaptured

(?: to )

Defines a parenthesized expression that does not create a back reference.

PowerFind Pro find expressions

Expression

Finds

\(([^(]|\n)+\)
Any text between parentheses
["].+?["]
Any text between quotes
^[[:alpha:]]+
Any alphabetic word at the beginning of a paragraph
\m(\w+)\s\1\M
Any two consecutive duplicate words; which dont have to be alphabetic and can
be separated by a Tab or a Return
([x20\t])\1+

Two or more spaces or tabs in a row; to remove extra blank characters use \1 in
the Replace expression

[\x20\t]+$

Any number of spaces or tabs that end a paragraph; to remove trailing blanks at
the end of a paragraph, leave the Replace box blank

Beginning of a paragraph that contains text or images

(["])([.,])

A quotation mark followed by a period or a comma; conventionally the comma and

the period are enclosed within quotation marksto rearrange these punctuation
marks and the quotation mark use \2\1 in the Replace expression

([;])(["])

A semicolon or a colon followed by a quotation mark; conventionally the colon and

semicolon arent enclosed within quotation marksto rearrange these
punctuation marks and the quotation mark use \2\1 in the Replace expression

[\x020]+\.

Any trailing blanks before a period

[G-Z]

Finds any uppercase character except A through F

PowerFind Pro replace expressions

If a metacharacter or expression has a unique match then it can be used in constructing
replacement patterns. If a metacharacter is not allowed in a particular context, Nisus Writer Pro will
not let you select it from the menu in PowerFind. No such restriction applies when using PowerFind
Pro.

Definitions in Nisus Writer Pro

Item

What it Defines

Alphabetic Characters
All characters in the range Aa through Zz plus all the 4 and 1 4 alphabetics
(all modified alphabetics European languages use). Modified alphabetics are also
called Diacriticals, sometimes called delayed strike characters;

330

Using PowerFind Pro

Finding and Replacing Text

Alphanumeric Characters
All alphabetics and digits 0 through 9, Control Characters, ASCII (Unicode) code
characters 0-12 and 14-31 (these are non-printing characters);
Word

Any combination of alphanumeric characters (from as few as one character to

extremely long strings) surrounded by non-alphanumeric characters.

Advanced exercises, or more examples of putting PowerFind to use

These examples explain useful expressions in PowerFind Pro. You can use them as helpful tools for
preparing documents as well as for developing more complex user-defined expressions.

Swap the sequence of words

Swap any two consecutive words even if they are separated by a Return or a tab, use the Find
expression (\m\w+\M)(\s+)(\m\w+\M) and Replace expression \3\2\1. In this example, report
status replaces status report. Heres what the characters mean
Character

What it Means

(\m\w+\M)

Finds a whole word (as defined above)

(\s+)

Finds any sequence of blank characters such as spaces, tabs, or Returns

\3

Represents the third parenthesized expression which is the second of the two
words found

\2

Finds whatever the second parenthesized expression (\s+) matches

\1

Finds the first parenthesized expression which is the first of the two words

Find any and/or all words that begin and end with specified characters
You can find any or all words that begin and end with characters you specify. For example all words
that share the same prefix and suffix (such as preparation and prestidigitation). The example
\m(a)([^\s]*)(d)\M finds every word that begins with a and ends with d from ad through and
to ampersand.
Character

What it Means

( and )

Expression delimiters, useful if you later want to manipulate the three segments of
the words

\m

Finds the beginning of a word

Not a metacharacter, but here it represents the character or string of characters

that must appear at the beginning of the word

[^\s]*

Finds any string of characters that is not a space (the middle of the word which
doesnt even need to exist)

Not a metacharacter, but here it represents the character or string of characters

that must appear at the end of the word

Change multiple periods to ellipses

The following expressions find a sequences of two or more periods that follow an alphabetic or a
space and replaces them with an ellipsis .
1. In the Find what text box enter: ([[:alpha:]]\s)(\.\.+)
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \1

Advanced exercises, or more examples of putting PowerFind to use

These examples explain useful expressions in PowerFind Pro. You can use them as helpful tools for
preparing documents as well as for developing more complex user-defined expressions.

Swap the sequence of words

Swap any two consecutive words even if they are separated by a Return or a tab, use the Find
expression (\m\w+\M)(\s+)(\m\w+\M) and Replace expression \3\2\1. In this example, report
status replaces status report. Heres what the characters mean
Character

What it Means

(\m\w+\M)

Finds a whole word (as defined above)

(\s+)

Finds any sequence of blank characters such as spaces, tabs, or Returns

\3

Represents the third parenthesized expression which is the second of the two
words found

\2

Finds whatever the second parenthesized expression (\s+) matches

Polishing & Managing Documents

\1

331
Finds the first parenthesized expression which is the first of the two words

Find any and/or all words that begin and end with specified characters
You can find any or all words that begin and end with characters you specify. For example all words
that share the same prefix and suffix (such as preparation and prestidigitation). The example
\m(a)([^\s]*)(d)\M finds every word that begins with a and ends with d from ad through and
to ampersand.
Character

What it Means

( and )

Expression delimiters, useful if you later want to manipulate the three segments of
the words

\m

Finds the beginning of a word

Not a metacharacter, but here it represents the character or string of characters

that must appear at the beginning of the word

[^\s]*

Finds any string of characters that is not a space (the middle of the word which
doesnt even need to exist)

Not a metacharacter, but here it represents the character or string of characters

that must appear at the end of the word

Change multiple periods to ellipses

The following expressions find a sequences of two or more periods that follow an alphabetic or a
space and replaces them with an ellipsis .
1. In the Find what text box enter: ([[:alpha:]]\s)(\.\.+)
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \1
It then removes a space preceding any ellipsis.
3. In the Find what text box enter: (\s)()
4. In the Replace with text box enter: \2

Make sure your spaces follow the punctuation

Fast typists frequently press the Space Bar before typing their punctuation. The next expression
finds one or more spaces that precede any punctuation and places them after the punctuation.
1. In the Find what text box enter: (\s)([[:punct:]])
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \2\1

Make sure your punctuation appears inside quotation marks

Common American practice is to have commas and periods appear inside of quotation marks. The
following expression finds these punctuation marks that appear outside quotes and places them
inside the quotes.
1. In the Find what text box enter: ()(\.|,)
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \2\1
If you want all punctuation to appear inside quotation marks use this expression:
1. In the Find what text box enter: ()[[:punct:]]
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \2\1
3. In the Find what text box enter: (\s)()
4. In the Replace with text box enter: \2

Make sure your spaces follow the punctuation

Fast typists frequently press the Space Bar before typing their punctuation. The next expression
finds one or more spaces that precede any punctuation and places them after the punctuation.
1. In the Find what text box enter: (\s)([[:punct:]])
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \2\1

Make sure your punctuation appears inside quotation marks

Common American practice is to have commas and periods appear inside of quotation marks. The
following expression finds these punctuation marks that appear outside quotes and places them
inside the quotes.
1. In the Find what text box enter: ()(\.|,)
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \2\1
If you want all punctuation to appear inside quotation marks use this expression:
1. In the Find what text box enter: ()[[:punct:]]
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \2\1

332

Using PowerFind Pro

Finding and Replacing Text

Replace two or more spaces with one space

People who learned to type using typewriters learned to type two spaces at the end of each
sentence. This was important because the typewriters characters were in a monospaced font (each
character had the same width). Typing two spaces at the end of each sentence helped the reader to
scan the text. On the computer, most fonts are fractional and the old requirement for two spaces
after a period no longer applies.14
The following expression replaces two or more spaces with one space.
1. In the Find what text box enter: ([\x020][\x020]+)
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \x20
While you may not see them, you may have typed many spaces at the end of paragraphs. Though
this does not affect the meaning of your text, it may affect the formatting. The following expression
removes trailing spaces (those spaces that hang at the end of a line before a Return character
[ASCII (Unicode) 13]).
1. In the Find what text box enter: ([\x20])(\n)
2. In the Replace with text box enter: \2

Find ten-digit phone numbers

You may have received files that have many phone numbers in them in multiple formats and you
need to find them to make them all match. Alternatively, you may have a file with a phone number
in it, but you dont remember what the number is and you need to find it. To find phone numbers,
with or without area codes, use this Find expression:

In the Find what text box enter:

(1[\x20\t]*-?[\x20\t]*)?(\(?\d\d\d\)?)?[\x20\t]*-?[\x20\t]*\d\d\d[\x20\t]*-?[\x20\t]*\d
\d\d\d
The above expression finds phone numbers in any of these forms (notice the presence or absence of
spaces and hyphens)
1-(858) 481 - 1477
1-(858) 481 1477
1-858-481-1477
18584811477
(858)-481 - 1477
(858) 481-1477
858-481-1477
858 481-1477
8584811477
481-1477
481 1477
4811477

14

Williams, Robin. The Mac is not a typewriter. Peachpit Press, Berkeley, CA. 1990.

Polishing & Managing Documents

Using Comments in Your Documents

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to add comments to your document. When you share these
documents with others, they can read your comments and/or add their own. Comments can be
shown whenever you are in Draft View or Page View but not in Style Sheet nor Full Screen view.

Add comments
1.
2.
3.

Select the text to which you want to add a comment.

Choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Add Comment.
Type the text of your comment in the new pane that appears.

Figure 360
A comment added to a document

333

334

Add comments

Using Comments in Your Documents

As illustrated in Figure 360 above:

A new pane opens to the left of the text of your document displaying a PostIt type note
area where you can write your comment.
Nisus Writer Pro draws a line from the comment to the text in the document to which it is
attached and adds a background highlight to the commented text in the same color as the
comment note background.
Nisus Writer Pro is shipped so that the background color of My Comments is set to a soft
pale yellow. You can customize this color in the Appearance Preferences of Nisus Writer Pro
(see Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents on page 388).
Nisus Writer Pro enables an unlimited number of commentators. However, the application
enables customization of the pane background for up to 6.

The User Name of the person who wrote the note appears in the Title Bar of the note along
with local date and time.
Nisus Writer Pro is shipped so that the Title Bars of comments show the authors name.
You can customize this for the application as explained in The View portion of the New File
preferences pane on page 374.
You can also can change this in any individual file to include either:

Author Name, Date and Time

Author Name and Date
Author Name
Date and Time
You may need to widen the Comments pane to see all the information available in the
title bar.

Nisus Writer Pro adds a new style to your document called Comment. This style is automatically
applied to every comment created. If a style called Comment already exists in your Nisus New File,
Nisus Writer Pro uses the attributes of that style. You can add any character formatting you want to
the comment. You can also add images, and tables, but you cannot add footnotes or endnotes. To add
your own Comment style to your Nisus New File see Create your own Comment style for your Nisus
New File on page 344.

When your insertion point is in any particular comment area, Nisus Writer Pro brightens the
corresponding portion of the document to which that comment is applied.
When comments are showing and your insertion point is in a paragraph that has one or more
comments, Nisus Writer Pro brightens those comments. Otherwise comments are dimmed.
All the commands of the menu Tools > Comments are also available from the Gear menu at the
bottom of the Comments page. Add Comment is also available from the contextual menu when you
right-click in your text.

Remove comments
Nisus Writer Pro offers a number of ways to remove comments from your document.
The easiest way to remove a comment is to click the Minus (-) button in the lower right corner
of any comment. The comment does not even have to be active in order to do this.
If you want to remove a number of comments at once.
1. Place your insertion point inside the comment or select any portion of the commented text.
2. Choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Remove Comments in Selection or click the
Minus (-) button in the lower right corner of that comment.
The command Remove Comments in Selection removes all comments associated with the
selection, the Minus (-) button only removes the currently displayed comment.

Copy and paste commented text

Beware.

When you copy text in one document that has comments associated with it, even if the comments
are hidden and you cannot see them, you copy those comments as well.
If you paste the copied text into a document Nisus Writer Pro concatenates all the text.
If you paste the commented text into a new document those hidden comments will remain hidden
until you (or someone else) chooses the menu command Tools > Comments > Show Comments.

Polishing & Managing Documents

335

Move to and from comments

When you are in any particular comment, you do not need to pick up the mouse or move to the
trackpad and click back into the document

Press 0 to return to the body of your document, selecting the commented text.
Choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Go to Marked Text to return to the body of
your document, selecting the commented text.
Chose the menu command Tools > Comments > Go to Comment Text to move from the body
of your document to the comment.
Press 6 or right click your mouse or secondary click your trackpad on commented text to
select its comment, or the reverse to switch from a comment to its associated text in the
document.
The commands Go to Marked Text and Go to Comment Text toggle.

Select the next or previous comment in your document

You may have a multi-page document with a number of comments that don't all refer to text on the
same visible page.

Choose Go to Next Comment or Go to Previous Comment from the menu Tools > Comments.

Click the Go to Next Comment or Go to Previous Comment from the menu Tools >
Comments.

Figure 361
The Next/Previous arrow buttons with the Comment History count in the Title Bar of a comment
This moves your insertion point to the next/previous comment in your document, scrolls the
document to display that page and highlights the commented text.

Select all text within comments

As explained on page 43, in the section Select everything in your document, you can select all the
text in your document. However this does not include the text of your comments.
1. Click your insertion point inside your comment.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Select > Select All.
3. Choose Select All once again from the menu Edit > Select
This has the effect of selecting all the text in all the comments, even those comments that are
hidden by virtue of being part of the history of comments.

Collapse or expand the comments in your document

If your document has many comments in it and you only want to view particular ones, you can
collapse the one in which your insertion point appears, or collapse them all and expand the
particular one you want to deal with.

Choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Collapse Comments to collapse the current
comment.

Choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Collapse All Comments to collapse all
comments.

Choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Expand Comments to expand the current
comment.

Choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Expand All Comments to expand all
comments.
You can also collapse and expand any comment by clicking its title bar.

336

Hide and show comments

Using Comments in Your Documents

Hide and show, or turn off and on the display of all the
comments in your document
There might be a time when you want to work on your document without any of the distractions of
the comments you have added. In that case you can simply close the Comments pane.

Hide and show all vestiges of comments in your document

Choose (uncheck) the menu command Tools > Comments > Show Comments or from the
Gear menu at the bottom of the Comments pane to turn off the display and close the
Comments pane.Hide and show comments
Choose (check) the menu command Tools > Comments > Show Comments to turn on the
display.

Hide and show only the comments pane

You may want to work with the Comments pane closed, but with some indicator that your
document has comments. You can close the pane and retain the highlighted selection of commented
text.

Choose (Uncheck) the menu command Tools > Comments > Show Comments Pane or from
the Gear menu at the bottom of the Comments pane to close the Comments pane but leave the
highlight on.

Choose (Check) the menu command Tools > Comments > Show Comments Pane or from the
Gear menu at the bottom of the Comments pane to open the Comments pane and leave the
highlight on.
When the Comments pane is closed without turning off Show Comments, choosing Show
Comments turns on and off the highlight of commented text in the document.

Hide and show only the highlighted comments in the text

You may want to work with the Comments pane open, with the peripheral awareness that a
particular paragraph has one or more comment, but not see the highlight of commented text in the
document. You can leave the pane open and turn off the highlighted selection of commented text.

Choose (Uncheck) the menu command Tools > Comments > Highlight Comments in Text or
from the Gear menu at the bottom of the Comments pane to turn off the highlight display.

Choose (Check) the menu command Tools > Comments > Highlight Comments in Text or
from the Gear menu at the bottom of the Comments pane to turn on the highlight display.

When the Comments pane is closed Highlight Comments in Text turns on and off the
highlight of commented text in the document.
When the Comments pane is open, Highlight Comments in Text does not affect the
Comments pane.

Additional controls for the display of comments

Choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Comment Display Options to open a
dialog that offers additional commands as well as those that appear on the Comments
submenu. These options are saved on a per-document basis.
Decide whose comments should be displayed in the document. If many people have read and
commented on a document it can become busy with comments, as illustrated in Figure 364 on
page 338.
The fictional Business Letter that Reuben Simons wrote on behalf of William Schraeder,
illustrated in Figure 360 on page 333 shows the comments Reuben Simons added to the
document before sharing it with his colleagues. When it finally returned to him, his coworkers: Mahz Kirah, Minna Hale and Rea Dator had all added their comments. Their names
appear below All Authors in the pop-up menu labeled Show comments made by at the top of
the Comments Options dialog illustrated in Figure 362 and (the pop-up menu) Figure 363.
Figure 365 on page 339 shows the comments of Minna Hale highlighted in text without the
Comments pane displayed followed by the Comments pane open in Figure 366 on page 340.
Figure 367 on page 341 shows the comments of Mahz Kirah with both text and a graphic
when Minna Hale worked on the document.

Polishing & Managing Documents

337

Figure 362
The Comments Options dialog

Figure 363
Reuben Simon and his fictional co-workers in the Show comments made by pop-up menu

If you change the display to show a particular author, Nisus Writer Pro automatically switches each
comment history to show a comment by that author. If that comment history does not have a
comment by the chosen author, all comments in the history are hidden.
When you switch back to show All Authors, Nisus Writer Pro shows all the comments/histories and
leaves their state unchanged. If choosing to show only a particular author triggered a change in the
display, changing back to All Authors won't rescind the automatic change.

338

Hide and show comments

Using Comments in Your Documents

Figure 364
Comments of multiple authors displayed

Decide whether or not to Highlight comments in the document text.

This is essentially the same as the command Highlight Comments in Text explained in Hide
and show only the highlighted comments in the text on page 336.

Decide whether or not to Show comments pane along side the document or not.
This is essentially the same as the command Show Comments Pane explained in Hide and
show only the comments pane on page 336.

Decide whether or not your comments should reposition themselves so that those comments
related to a particular paragraph float near it when the insertion point is present.

Check (turn on) Reposition comments in the pane while working to have the comments
float.

Uncheck (turn off) Reposition comments in the pane while working to have the
comments maintain a static position relative to the text.

Decide whether to show the Comments pane on the Left or Right.

Click Show pane on Left or

Click Show pane on Right

Minna Hale likes to keep her Comments pane on the right. Figure 368 on page 342
illustrates the Business Letter when she read Mahz Kirahs comments.

Decide how much information should appear in the comment Title Bar as explained on page
334.

Decide whether or not inactive comments should fade when your insertion point is not in the
paragraph that has the commented text.

Polishing & Managing Documents

339

Check (turn on) Smart fade out inactive comments while working to have the comments
fade.
Uncheck (turn off) Smart fade out inactive comments while working to prevent the
comments from fading.
Figure 364 illustrates smart fade turned off. Figure 366 and Figure 367 show smart fade
turned on.

Determine the opacity of faded comments.

Drag the slider to the right to increase the opacity as illustrated in Figure 366 and to the
left to decrease the opacity as illustrated in Figure 367.

Figure 365
Comments highlighted in text (light blue) without the Comments pane displayed

340

Hide and show comments

Using Comments in Your Documents

Figure 366
Comments of Minna Hale with the Comments pane displayed and comments highlighted in the text

Polishing & Managing Documents

341

Figure 367
Comments with text and graphic minimal opacity and Comments pane on the right

Minimizing the comments in your document

You can minimize the Comments pane by dragging the vertical line that separates it from the text of
your document. Doing this leaves the highlight markings and lines in the text as illustrated in
Figure 368.

342

Hide and show comments

Using Comments in Your Documents

Drag to minimize/expand
the Comments pane.

Lines draw to indicate the

presence of comments even
when they are minimized.

Figure 368
Minimizing the Comments pane; lines draw to indicate presence of comments

Receiving commented files from others

As explained in the fictional situation described in Additional controls for the display of comments
on page 336, you might receive a document that has comments added by a colleague.

If it is a Nisus Writer Pro document and it arrives with the comments hidden and the Toolbar at
the top not shown so you can see the number of comments badge in the Comments button, you
need to either

show the Toolbar (choose View > Toolbar > Show Toolbar) or

open the Comments pane (choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Show
Comments) in order to check if comments exist.
If you have customized your Toolbar as explained in Customize Your Toolbar on page 410,and
added the Comments button to it as illustrated in Figure 369, the button will display a red
badge indicating how many (if any) bits of text have comments associated with them as
illustrated in Figure 370.

Polishing & Managing Documents

343

Figure 369
The Toolbar customized with the Comments button (indicating the presence of comments in the document)

Figure 370
The Comments button indicating the number of bits of text with comments associated with them

If, however the document with comments comes from an application other than Nisus Writer
Pro, it will always display the Comments pane when you open the document.
When your document is opened by someone else your original comment appears in the color of
Author #1 (which is set by the Appearance preferences of the user receiving the document) as
illustrated in Figure 371. In the situation below, Reuben Simons has sent his file to Rea Dator.

Figure 371
My Comments from Figure 360 on page 333 when opened by another user

Add your comments to the comments of others

As explained in the fictional situation described in Additional controls for the display of comments
on page 336, you might receive a document that has comments added by a colleague and want to
add your comments to those already present. In the following example, Rea Dator has suggested a
possible alteration of the text.
1. Click the Plus (+) button in the lower right area of the comment to add your new comment.
2. Type your comment as illustrated in Figure 372.

Figure 372
Comment added by Author #1 on his/her computer
When a new comment is added to an existing comment back and forth triangles and a number
indicating which comment is currently displayed out of the total appear in the title bar of the
comment.

Review comment histories

If more that one comment has been added to the same snippet of text a comment history has been
established. You can read all the previous comments that have been added by you and/or others to
any specific portion of text.

Click the left-pointing button or choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Go to
Previous Comment to read preceding comments.

Click the right-pointing button or choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Go to Next
Comment to read newer comments.

344

Review comment histories

Using Comments in Your Documents

You cannot circulate through the comments back to the beginning. When you reach the first or
last comment, Nisus Writer Pro will beep, indicating it has reached the beginning or end but it
will not circle back.

Once a comment history has been established (as in in Figure 372) you can only edit the most
recent comment, and only if you are its author.

Display comments of a particular author

If your document has received comments from a number of readers, you may want to display the
comments on only one author at a time.

These options are described in detail in The fictional Business Letter beginning on page 336.

Create your own Comment style for your Nisus New File
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Choose the menu commandNisus Writer Pro > Preferences.

Click New File in the Preferences window Toolbar.
Type some text, select that text and add a comment.
Choose the menu command View > Style Sheet.
Use the tools of the Format menu or the Character and Paragraph palettes to alter the display
of what you see there.
Choose the menu command View > Page View.
Delete the text you entered in the document.
Save and close the file; close the Preferences window.
When you next open a new file, type some text, and add a comment it should appear as you set
in the Style Sheet view.

Printing comments
Printing the comments with a document is a two-step process.
1. Print your file as a PDF.
2. Be sure to check Include comments in PDF as annotations at the bottom of the Nisus Writer
Pro Print dialog as illustrated in Figure 397 on page 367.
3. Print the PDF file in a PDF viewing application that supports printing annotations.

Polishing & Managing Documents

345

Tracking Changes to Your Documents

There are three essential steps to tracking changes:
1. Turn on (and off) track changes, explained in Start tracking changes on page 345.
2. Examine Tracked Changes, explained in View and review tracked changes on page 347.
3. Accept or reject the changes, explained in Accept or reject changes made to your document on
page 352.
Using Track Changes Nisus Writer Pro can monitor the alterations made to any text. These
alterations can include:

additions to the text (including footnotes and/or endnotes as well as text in them)
deletions from the text
alterations of particular words (such as spelling corrections)
formatting of words and paragraphs (indicating the formatting change made)
insertion of

inline images
tables
cross-references (but not bookmarks)
merge placeholders
embedded hyperlinks (showing the URL in the Tracked Changes pane)
page, column and section breaks
all kinds of automatic text
marking for indexing (and to which index, if more than one exists) and table of contents (as well
as to which table of contents, if more than one exists, and its level)
text in text or callout boxes
Tracking changes ignores:

page setup
margins
column modifications
insertion and modification of floating shapes
headers and/or footers
watermarks
Nisus Writer Pro does not monitor any changes to floating shapes, or modifications to inline
images (other than to note that they have been added to your document).
Nisus Writer Pro saves the state of whether or not Track Changes is on or off. When a
document is opened by another user after having been saved with Track Changes on and
begins to edit it, all those changes are tracked, unless the other user turns off Track Changes
first.
Had she been alive to enjoy the use of a personal computer, Anna Sewell would have likely written a
near-final draft of her novel Black Beauty and then sent it off to Jarrold Publishing which would
have one of its editors review the text with track changes turned on. The following instructions use
her fabricated, fictional experience as an example.

Start tracking changes

Choose (check, turn on) the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Track Changes, or
Click the Track Changes button on the Tool bar.
The Track Changes button changes its state from inactive to active as illustrated in Figure 372
and the Tracked Changes pane opens beside your document.

Figure 373
The Track Changes button on the Toolbar inactive, activated, active and indicating the number of changes tracked, then
inactive and indicating the number of changes tracked

346

Start tracking changes

Tracking Changes to Your Documents

Supposing that Anna Sewell had Nisus Writer Pro, she might have made comments in her
manuscript (explained in detail in the section Using Comments in Your Documents beginning on
page 333) before sending it to her publisher. In her comments she might have expressed her
concerns. The document might have looked something like what appears in Figure 374.

Figure 374
Anna Sewell sends her comments to her publisher
On receiving the file, Jarrolds editor opens it, turns on Track Changes and begins to edit the 87word sentence in the paragraph beginning Long strings of young horses out of the country,
breaking it into three, as illustrated in Figure 375. With comments showing on the left, the Tracked
Changes pane appears on the right.
The badge on the Track Changes button on the Toolbar displays the number of changes as they are
made as illustrated in Figure 374.

Jarrolds editor replaced a comma with a period and added the word Their.
The editor also replaced a semicolon and a lowercase t with a period and an uppercase T.
In addition the editor added a comment to Annas regarding the use of the phrase strings of
young horses.

Polishing & Managing Documents

347

Figure 375
Jarrolds changes to Black Beauty

Because what has been added to the document is visible and highlighted, this does not appear in the
Tracked Changes note. Only what has been replaced is noted. The document area always shows the
latest (most recent) version, while the Tracked Changes pane shows text that has been deleted or
replaced. Thus, if some text is added/inserted, it is merely marked as such and there is no old text to
show in the pane.

Stop tracking changes

Jarrolds editor might want to make some changes to the document and not have them tracked.
Choose (uncheck, turn off) the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Track Changes, or

Click the Track Changes button on the Tool bar.

The Track Changes button reverts to its inactive state but continues to indicate how many
changes were made, as illustrated in Figure 372.

When Anna Sewell receives the edited version with the changes made, it is easy for her to review
them and either accept the changes or revert the text back to the way it was. The Track Changes
Toolbar button will indicate the number of outstanding changes (the number of changes that
remain to be accepted or rejected), even if Jarrolds editor had closed the Tracked Changes pane
and saved the file with Track Changes turned off before returning the file.

Copying and pasting text with tracked changes

Beware.
When you copy text in one document that has tracked changes in it, even if the tracked changes are
hidden and you cannot see them, you copy those tracked changes as well.
If you paste the text with tracked changes into a new document those hidden tracked changes will
remain hidden until you (or someone else) chooses the menu command Tools > Track Changes >
Show Changes.

View and review tracked changes

Choose (check, turn on) the menu Tools > Track Changes > Show Changes.
This opens the Tracked Changes pane. Unless you have changed the Tracking and Display
Options this command also checks (turns on) Highlight Changes in Text. so that the display of
your tracked changes appears as illustrated in in Figure 375.

Hide and show only the Track Changes pane

You may want to work with the Tracked Changes pane closed, but with some indicator that your
document has changes. You can close the pane and retain the highlighted selection of changed text.

348

View and review tracked changes

Tracking Changes to Your Documents

Choose (uncheck, turn off) the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Show Changes Pane
or from the Gear menu at the bottom of the Track Changes pane to close the Track Changes
pane but leave the highlight on.
Choose (check, turn on) the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Show Changes Pane or
from the Gear menu at the bottom of the Track Changes pane to open the Track Changes pane
and leave the highlight on.
When the Track Changes pane is closed without turning off Track Changes, choosing Track
Changes turns on and off the highlight of changed text in the document.

Hide and show only the highlighted changes in the text

You may want to work with the Tracked Changes pane open, and have a peripheral awareness that
a particular paragraph has one or more change, but not see the highlight of changed text in the
document. You can leave the pane open and turn off the highlighted selection of changed text.

Choose (uncheck, turn off) the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Highlight Changes
in Text or from the Gear menu at the bottom of the Tracked Changes pane to turn off the
highlight display.

Choose (check, turn on) the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Highlight Changes in
Text or from the Gear menu at the bottom of the Tracked Changes pane to turn on the
highlight display.

When the Tracked Changes pane is closed Highlight Changes in Text turns on and off the
highlight of changed text in the document.
When the Tracked Changes pane is open, Highlight Changes in Text does not affect the
Changes pane.

Additional controls for the display of tracked changes

You can decide which changes deserve your attention.
Choose the menu command Tools > Tracked Changes > Tracking and Display Options to
open a dialog that offers additional commands as well as those that appear on the Tracked
Changes submenu.
These options are saved on a per-document basis.

Determine the kinds of changes Nisus Writer Pro tracks

In the Change Tracking section at the top of the dialog decide what kinds of changes should be
tracked in the document.
Turn on or off:

Track text insertions and deletions

Track formatting changes
Track changes made to styles, eg: in the Style Sheet
These controls have no effect on the display of what changes have already been made, only
what kinds of changes will actually be tracked.

Display changes of a particular author

In the Display Options section, decide whose changes should be displayed in the document. If
many people have read and made changes to a document it can become busy with changes
even with the comments turned off, as illustrated in Figure 376.
In the imaginary situation where Anna Sewell had sent her text to her publisher, the primary
editor left the manuscript on the office server overnight. Two other readers could not control
themselves and their edits were tracked by Nisus Writer Pro. When the text finally returned to
Anna, her editors had all made their changes. She could hardly recognize her novel. One had
made changes to formatting, which was not serious if she was considering publishing an EPUB
version. Nisus Writer Pro could help her with that as explained in the section Export As on
page 60. However, Anna was truly only interested in the textual changes. Jarrolds changes had
been tracked and were illustrated in Figure 375 on page 347. They are displayed in pink in
Figure 376. Opting to examine the changes of the editor who made primarily textual changes,
Anna chose to display only those changes, as illustrated in Figure 377 on page 350.
The other editors names appear below All Authors in the pop-up menu labeled Show changes
made by in the Display options portion of the Track Changes Options dialog illustrated in
Figure 377.

Similar to the way Comment Display Options functions (as explained on page 336), if you
change the display to show a particular author, Nisus Writer Pro automatically switches to
show the edits by that author only.
When you switch back to show All Authors, Nisus Writer Pro shows all the edits.

Polishing & Managing Documents

Figure 376
Black Beauty after having been edited by too many people

349

350

View and review tracked changes

Tracking Changes to Your Documents

Figure 377
Black Beauty displaying the changes of only one editor

Determine how Nisus Writer Pro displays the changes

Turn on/off Highlight changes in the document text.

This is essentially the same as the command Highlight Changes in Text explained in Hide and
show only the highlighted changes in the text on page 348.
Turn on/off Show track changes pane along side the document.
This is essentially the same as the command Show Changes Pane explained in Hide and show
only the Track Changes pane on page 347.
Turn on/off whether changes should reposition themselves so that those changes related to a
particular paragraph float near it when the insertion point is present.

Check (turn on) Reposition changes in the pane while working to have the changes
slide.
Uncheck (turn off) Reposition changes in the pane while working to have the changes
maintain a static position relative to the text.
Click Show pane on:
Left or
Right
to show the Changes pane on the Left or Right
Decide how much information should appear in the comment Title Bar.
Nisus Writer Pro is shipped so that the Title Bars of changes do not show. You can customize
this for the application as explained in The View portion of the New File preferences pane on
page 374.

Polishing & Managing Documents

351

You can also can change this in any individual file. From the Titlebars show pop-up menu
choose either:

Author Name, Date and Time

Author Name and Date
Author Name
Date and Time
You may need to widen the Tracked Changes pane to see all the information available in the
title bar.
Decide whether or not inactive changes should fade when your insertion point is not in the
paragraph that has the altered text.

Check (turn on) Smart fade out inactive changes while working to have the changes fade.
Uncheck (turn off) Smart fade out inactive changes while working to prevent the changes
from fading.
This is similar to smart fade in Comments as illustrated in Figure 364 on page 338 which
illustrates smart fade turned off. Figure 366 on page 340 and Figure 367 on page 341
show smart fade turned on.
Drag the slider to the right to increase the opacity (as in Comments and illustrated in Figure
366 on page 340), and to the left to decrease the opacity (as in Comments and illustrated in
Figure 367 on page 341).

Figure 378
The Track Changes Options dialog

Selecting the next or previous change to your document

If you keep the Tracked Changes pane open you can see the changes in the pane (and highlighted
in the document) as you scan your text. However, if you have a long document it is easier to jump
directly to the changes.

Choose Go to Next Change or Go to Previous Change from the menu Tools > Track Changes.

352

View and review tracked changes

Tracking Changes to Your Documents

Collapsing or expanding the change annotations in your document

If your document has many changes in it and you only want to view particular ones, you can
collapse or expand any one you want.

Click the title bar of any change annotation.

Accept or reject changes made to your document

Once you have found the next change in your document you can either accept it or reject it.

Accept changes
You can accept a specific change: Accept or reject changes
Click the Check mark Accept button to the right side of the change annotation as illustrated
in Figure 379.

Figure 379
A change annotation showing formatting changes with the check to accept highlighted
You can accept all the changes in your selection:
Choose the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Accept Changes in Selection.
You can accept all changes:

Choose the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Accept All Changes.
When you choose either Accept Changes in Selection or Accept All Changes, an alert
appears indicating how many changes will be affected as illustrated in Figure 380.

Figure 380
The Accept Tracked Changes alert

Reject changes
You can reject a specific change:
Click the Reject button to the right side of the change annotation as illustrated in Figure 379.

Polishing & Managing Documents

353

Figure 381
Three change annotations showing text changes with the Reject button highlighted
You can reject all the changes in your selection:
Choose the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Reject Changes in Selection.
You can reject all changes:

Choose the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Reject All Changes.
When you choose either Reject Changes in Selection or Reject All Changes, an alert
appears indicating how many changes will be affected as illustrated in Figure 382.

Figure 382
The Reject Tracked Changes alert

Review, accept and/or reject changes in one window

You can have Nisus Writer Pro help you scan your document for changes. You can do this with
Tracking Changes turned on or off, and with the Tracked Changes pane and/or highlights visible or
not.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Track Changes > Review Changes.
The Review Changes window opens as illustrated in Figure 382.
2. Choose the editor whose changes you want to review.
You can choose All Authors or any of those who have made changes to the document as
explained in Display changes of a particular author on page 348.
3.

You do not need to make any decisions. You can simply review the changes made.
Determine whether Nisus Writer Pro scans your document and displays the changes along with
the sentence or paragraph in which they appear.

Check (turn on) Batch by and choose Sentence to have Nisus Writer Pro select the entire
sentence in which a particular change appears.

Check (turn on) Batch by and choose Paragraph to have Nisus Writer Pro select the entire
paragraph in which a particular change appears.

Uncheck (turn off) Batch by to have Nisus Writer Pro select only the changed text itself.

354

Accept or reject changes

Tracking Changes to Your Documents

Batching does more than select more content. It allows you to see the effect of (and accept or
reject) multiple changes all at once.
4. Click Next or Previous to see each change made.
The change, and (if Batch by is on) the surrounding sentence or paragraph appears in the
Track Changes display box labeled Original with the change indicated.
5. Determine whether or not you want the changes highlighted in the Review Changes window.

Check (turn on; the default) Highlight changes to highlight the changes.

Uncheck (turn off) Highlight changes so that the highlights do not display.
6. Determine whether or not you want to see what change was made, or display only the original
text.

Check (turn on; the default) Markup additions and deletions to display the changes as
indicated in step 4.

Uncheck (turn off) Markup additions and deletions so that the changes, but only the
original text displays.

Text that has been removed appears in red and strike through.
Text that is added appears in blue

Polishing & Managing Documents

355

Figure 383
The Review Changes window scanning the changes made to Black Beauty
7.

When you have reviewed the changes,

Click Accept Changes to accept all the changes in the selection (either the sentence or the
paragraph depending on what you selected in step 3 above).

Click Reject Changes to reject all the changes in the selection (either the sentence or the
paragraph depending on what you selected in step 3 above).
Each time you accept or reject changes the number badge in the Track Changes button on the
Toolbar decreases by however many changes there were in the selection.
When you click Reject Changes or Accept Changes, the warning alert illustrated in Figure 380
on page 352 does not appear. You can, however undo this action.
The following four figures illustrate the different options explained in steps 5 and 6 above.

356

Accept or reject changes

Tracking Changes to Your Documents

Figure 384
Neither Highlight changes nor Markup additions and deletions checked

Figure 384: Neither Highlight changes nor Markup additions and deletions checked; displays
only the modified text.

Figure 385
Highlight changes turned on but Markup additions and deletions unchecked

Figure 385: Highlight changes turned on but Markup additions and deletions unchecked;
displays the modified text in the highlights of the authors who made them.

Polishing & Managing Documents

357

Figure 386
Highlight changes turned off but Markup additions and deletions turned on

Figure 386: Highlight changes turned off but Markup additions and deletions turned on;
displays the original text and changes made. Text that has been removed appears in red and
strike through. Text that is added appears in blue.

Figure 387
Both Highlight changes and Markup additions and deletions checked

Figure 387: Both Highlight changes and Markup additions and deletions checked: displays the
original text and the changes made as well as the highlights of the authors who made them.

358

Window basics

Working with Multiple Documents

Working with Multiple Documents

Window basics
Here are a few guidelines for working with windows

The size of your monitors screen determines the windows size.

To display all windows of all open applications, choose Show All from the Nisus Writer Pro
menu.

To make a window bigger or smaller drag the windows size box.

The window that contains the red yellow and green buttons in its Title Bar is the active window.
To make a window active, click inside its frame, or, choose its name from the Window menu.
To hide windows that do not belong to Nisus Writer Pro, choose Hide Others from the Nisus
Writer Pro menu.

To move a window drag the windows Title Bar.

Close a window

Click the windows red Close button or choose the menu command File > Close.

Minimize, or, put a window in the Dock

Click the windows yellow Minimize button or choose the menu command Window > Minimize.

Redisplay a window that has been in the Dock

Choose the windows (documents) name from the Window menu or click it in the Dock to have
it return to its former location.

Open a window to its full size

Click the windows green maximize button.

Click the windows green maximize button a second time to have it return to its original size
and location.

Using the Window menu and working with multiple windows

Choose commands from the Window menu to manage and position document windows.
The names of open documents appear after the commands. If a document name in the Window
menu has a bullet beside it, the document has been changed since it was last saved (unless it is the
active window).
The active window has a check mark to its left.
The names of all other open Nisus Writer Pro windows but not floating windows or palettes appear
in the Window menu.

Choose which window displays in front

Choose a windows name from the Window menu.

Click any visible portion of that window.

Nisus Writer Pro saves the current selection or insertion point position as well as the window shape
and position in addition to the zoom percentage. If you have set your General preference to do so (as
explained in Determine what happens at launch or activation on page 372) it also will automatically
reopen all windows which were open when you quit the program.

Polishing & Managing Documents

359

About Merging Documents

Merged documents result from combining information from a host or template document with
information from a data document. The host document works like a template and can contain any
kind of content just as any other Nisus Writer Pro document. The data document provides the detail
that makes each merged document different. Its contents replace the merge placeholders in the
host document. You combine one host document and one data document to generate many merged
documents. Merging Documents
Here are some guidelines for merging documents:

Use the same merge placeholder names in both the host/template and the data documents.
Put the host and data documents in the same folder.
While this is not a requirement for merging the information it makes finding the appropriate
data easier.

Make sure the host document is top window before you start the merge.
The procedures that follow explain how to merge a host document (a form letter) with a data
document (a list of people who should receive the letter).

Creating a host document

The host document contains merge placeholders that are replaced with information from the data
document.

Prepare the template document

It is often best to create a specific letter or document, and then convert it into a form letter
afterward. For instance, you might want to send a letter like this:

Figure 388
A standard business letter
But you have several associates with whom you want to share this information. This is a perfect
situation for doing a merge. Start with your letter to Reuben Simons, and alter it.
1. Choose commands of the menu Insert > Merge Placeholder to look something like this:

360

Merging Documents

Working with Multiple Documents

Figure 389
A standard business letter with Merge Placeholders

You will notice that not all the Merge Placeholders in the new letter appear in the menu Insert >
Merge Placeholder. You can create any Merge Placeholder you want.
2. Choose the menu command Insert > Merge Placeholder > Other to enter custom
placeholders and choose from the three available options.

Choose one of the commands from the Placeholder for Address Book contact property:
pop-up menu (as illustrated at the top of Figure 390):
First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, Name Title, Name Suffix, Birthday, Email, Work
Email, Home Email, Phone, Home Phone, Work Phone, Mobile Phone, Home FAX, Work
FAX, Job Title, Department, Organization, Address, Address (city), Address (state),
Address (zip), Address (country), Home Address, Home Address (city), Home Address
(state), Home Address (zip), Home Address (country), Work Address, Work Address
(city), Work Address (state), Work Address (zip), and Work Address (country).
These are the fields available in Apple's Address Book application.

Click Placeholder for the property with the name: and type the name of the placeholder
you want to use in your document.
In addition you can check either or both:

If not blank, then prepend: and add the text you want to have appear before the text
that replaces the Merge Placeholder.
If not blank, then append: and add the text you want to have appear after the text that
replaces the Merge Placeholder.
Click Placeholder that uses the output from the following Perl code: and add your Perl
code in the text box available in the dialog.
This code is run once for each record in the data document to derive the text used during
merging (which should be printed to STDOUT or standard output). All data source
property values are available to this block of Perl code in the special predefined record
hash. A trivial example that constructs a full name:

print $record('First

Name') . ' ' . $record('Last Name');

Polishing & Managing Documents

361

Figure 390
The Other Merge Placeholder dialog
3.

Click Insert.

If you use a placeholder from something other than the Address Book you would need to create a
separate data document as explained in About data documents below.
This is your template document. The next step for you is to set up your data document.

About data documents

Here are some guidelines for creating data documents. Data documents are simply CSV, or Commaseparated values files. You can learn more about them here:
<http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comma-separated_values>

Enter the field names on the first line (paragraph) of the data document.
Enter the data field, the replacement text, in the same order as the field names to which they
refer in the first line (paragraph).
You do not have to use brackets at all in data files.
Separate each field name and data field with a comma.
To include a comma in a field itself (for example, a date), enclose the whole field in straight
quotes.
Nisus Writer Pro sees a comma as separating two fields. So if you put in December 25,1800 It
would be seen as two fields, Dec 25 and 1800. So, if you want it to have a comma, type it in
straight quotes as "December 25, 1800".
To include quotes in a data document the following rule must be followed.

To include a straight double quote in a field value, you actually double-up the quote; you
must enclose the entire value in straight double quote marks.
In order to get the result:
Arthur Herbert "the Fonz" Fonzarelli
using the Merge Placeholders First Name
Last Name you need to have the
following in the data document:
"Arthur Herbert "the Fonz"",Fonzarelli

Creating a data document

Open a new, untitled file.
On the first paragraph of the file, type in the field names that you will be addressing in the file.
For the case in our example, you would type in:
First Name, Last Name, Organization,Department,Address (street),Address
(city),Address (state),Address (zip),feature
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Leading and trailing spaces between the commas are ignored.

The sequence of the fields in the data document does not need to match their sequence in the
template document (one field might be used multiple times).
On all subsequent lines of the file, enter the information for each unique letter in the same
order as the field names on the top line. Remember to use a comma to separate each data field.
Choose the menu command File > Save As.
Give the file a name that fits your project.
Choose Text from the File Format pop-up menu.

362

Merging Documents
7.

Working with Multiple Documents

Click Save.

Figure 391
Saving the data document as Text
For the purpose of our example, the (fictional) text of the data file is:
Reuben, Simons, Loans and Acquisitions,Museum of Asian Art,198 South Bearing
Way,San Francisco, CA,92999,floating graphics
Rea, Dator,Publications,Museum of Asian Art (East Bay),9473 East Seaward
Dr.,Oakland,CA,94736,comments
Minna,Hale,Chairwoman of the Board, Museum of Asian Art,3857 Ewinda Ave.,San
Paolo,CA,93847,bookmarks and cross-references

Merging documents & displaying or printing the results

Once you have your template/host document prepared and have your list of who you want to
receive your letter ready you can merge the two sets of information.
Before you begin, be sure the template document is open.
Choose the menu command from either

File > Merge Document or

Insert > Merge Placeholder.
A dialog box appears and asks you to specify:

what data you wish to use for the merge and

how you want the merged document to be created.

Deciding the source of the data to be merged

The dialog opens ready for you to choose any record in your Apple OS X Address book.

Polishing & Managing Documents

Figure 392
The Merge Document dialog
Press 1 and click to select a range of records or press A to select (or remove from the
selection) specific records.
If you have created a data document as explained in About data documents above,
Click A text (CSV) file.
Click the Browse button.
Navigate to your data document.
Click Open in the lower right corner of the Open dialog that appears.

1.
2.
3.
4.

363

364

Merging Documents

Working with Multiple Documents

Figure 393
Merging a document with a CSV (comma separated values) text file selected

Deciding what to do with the new merged document

You can either save the merged file, print or display it. You might want to display it first to make
sure the file looks as you expected.

Saving the merged document to individual files

1. Click Saved individually to.
2. Click the Browse button.
3. Navigate to the folder where you want the new files saved.
4. Click Open in the lower right corner of the Open dialog that appears.
Nisus Writer Pro offers to name the files according to a File name template consisting of the first
name and the last name records of each new document. You can change that to anything you want.

Saving the merged document to one file

1.
2.
3.
4.

Click Saved to one file.

Click the Browse button.
Navigate to the folder where you want the new file saved.
Give the file a name.

Polishing & Managing Documents

Figure 394
Saving the merged document to one file with records divided by page breaks
5.
6.

Click Save in the lower right corner of the Save As dialog that appears.
Nisus Writer Pro offers to separate each portion of the new document.
From the Divide Records with pop-up menu choose one of the options:

Page Breaks
Section Breaks (Same Page)
Section Breaks (Next Page)

Printing the merged document

Click Printed.
Nisus Writer Pro sends the merged documents directly to the printer.

Seeing a preview of your merged document

Click Preview.
Nisus Writer Pro sends the first of the merged documents to the Preview application which
opens the document as a graphic.

365

366

Determine aspects of how your document prints

Printing Documents

Printing Documents
When you are ready to commit your document to paper choose the menu command File > Print.

Print an open document

Choose the menu command File > Print and enter your choices in the dialog that appears.

Figure 395
The Print dialog in Leopard
When the dialog first appears the options come from the printer driver software you have.
You can choose automatic or manual paper feeding; black and white or color/grayscale
printing; and printing a paper copy of your document or saving it to disk as a PostScript file.
Depending on the printer selected, you may also have other options.
If the documents margins are beyond the printers limits (you might have received a file from
someone with a different printer), Nisus Writer Pro displays the dialog illustrated in Figure 396.

Figure 396
The margins beyond the printer limits dialog
You can:

Click Cancel
to modify the margins yourself,

Click Print As Is
to print the document as is, and take the chance that some of the text may be clipped, or

Click Fix Margins to have Nisus Writer Pro make adjustments and continue the print job

Polishing & Managing Documents

367

Determine how many copies to print

Type the number in the Copies text box.

Determine which pages of the document print

Click All to print the entire document.

Click From and type the number of the first page you want to print.
Press @ to move your insertion point from field to field.

If you type a number in the To box but not in the From box, Nisus Writer Pro prints from the
beginning of the document to the page number specified.

If you type a number in the From box but not in the To box, Nisus Writer Pro prints from the
page number specified to the documents end.

Determine aspects of how your document prints

When you print your document you have a variety of options available in the Nisus Writer Pro
portion of the Print Dialog.

Figure 397
The Nisus Writer Pro portion of the Print dialog

The pop-up menu that reveals the Nisus Writer Pro portion of the Print dialog has no name.
Choose Nisus Writer Pro from the pop-up menu inside the Print dialog beneath where you see
Copies and Pages.

Print page guides and invisibles

You may want examine some of the non-textual details of the document, as explained in Determine
the color of various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working environment on page 395.

Check

Print page guides in the Nisus Writer Pro portion of the Print dialog to print the lines that
define the perimeter of your printed area and the headers and/or footers as explained on
page 391.
Print invisible characters in the Nisus Writer Pro portion of the Print dialog to print the
invisible characters as explained on page 388.
While the preferences dialog allows you to control the color of table guides as well as page guides
and invisibles, these (table guides) do not print.

Print pages in reverse order

Some printers print documents so that the printed side appears up. In other printers the document
comes out of the printer so that the printed side appears down. Because Nisus Writer Pro prints
your document from first page to last, printed side down means that when you pick up your stack
of printed pages they appear in the correct sequence. If the pages of your document emerge from
the printer with the printed side up, the first page of your document will be at the bottom of the
pile.

Check Print pages in reverse order in the Nisus Writer Pro portion of the Print dialog.

368

Determine aspects of how your document prints

Printing Documents

Print odd pages, then even pages

You may want to print your document on both sides of a piece of paper. Make sure your margins
are correct by following the instructions in Mirror page placement on page 130. Make sure your
margins appear as you want them as explained in Set the margins of the sections of your
document on page 127.
1. Choose the menu command File > Print.
2. Choose Paper Handling from the third (un-named) pop-up menu inside the Print dialog.
3. Choose Automatic or Normal in the Page Order pop-up menu.
4. Choose Odd only from the Pages to Print pop-up menu.
5. Click Print.
6. When the print job has completed, reload the stack of paper in the printer for printing on the
other side.
If the total number of pages is odd, leave out the last page.
7. Choose the menu command File > Print.
8. Choose Paper Handling from the third (unnamed) pop-up menu inside the Print dialog.
9. Choose Automatic or Normal in the Page Order pop-up menu.
10. Choose Even only from the Pages to Print pop-up menu.
11. Click Print.

Add a watermark to your document

You may want to share an early version of your document with others and make sure that they
know it is a draft, or confidential. To do this you would want to add a watermark.
Because watermarks appear on a page of paper (or PDF file) they are not visible when working in
Draft View.
1. Choose the menu command Tools > Watermark.
The Watermark dialog illustrated in Figure 397 opens set to No watermark. If you are working
in Draft View and choose the menu command Tools > Watermark, Nisus Writer Pro
automatically switches to Page View until you click Cancel or Apply.

Figure 398
The Watermark dialog when first opened

Polishing & Managing Documents

369

Figure 399
The watermark dialog with settings for the watermark on the Disclaimer/Acknowledgements/Copyright page of this document

2.

Determine in what portion(s) of your document you want to have the watermark appear. You
can apply a watermark to the:

Entire Document
Selected Section(s), All Pages
Selected Section(s), First Page
Selected Section(s), All Pages Except First
And, if you have Use Facing Pages set in the Section palette:

Selected Section(s), Odd Pages

Selected Section(s), Even Pages

Selected Section(s) refers to any section(s) of your document in which you may have made a
selection before choosing the Watermark command. You may need to move the dialog so that it does
not obscure the document.
3. Decide whether you want to put an image in the background as the watermark or use some
text.
4. If you want an image as the watermark, click Watermark from image file:
The the Choose button becomes enabled.
a. Click the Choose button.
b. A variant of the Open dialog appears. Navigate to the image file you want to use and click
Open. The field to the right of the choose button displays a visual representation of the
path to the inserted image file.
c. Set the size of your image using the Size Scaling text box or drag the slider till you see the
image in the size you want it.
5. If you want text as the watermark, click Watermark with text:
a. Type or paste the text you want into the text edit field that becomes enabled.
In the text edit field, you can:

b.

type Returns to have multiple lines of text break where you want.
undo and redo actions.
check your spelling by pressing 6 or right clicking your mouse or secondary
clicking your trackpad.
Click the Font button of your text.
The button displays the current fonts name and size.

370

Add a watermark to your document

Printing Documents

Check Bold and/or Italic to add those attributes

Click the Color swatch to set the color of the watermark text.
Click Stretch text to fit entire page to have the text spread across from edge to edge
independent of the size you set in the Fonts panel.
6. Set the alignment of the watermark.
When it first appears, the watermark is automatically centered on the page in the orientation and
appearance of the original file. You can alter these.
a. Click any of the 9 options in the visual Alignment grid to have the image or text appear
centered in that portion of the page.
b. Enter any positive or negative value in the Horizontal Offset and/or Vertical Offset fields
or click the steppers to achieve a finer position adjustment.
Press A when you click a palette steppers up or down arrow to apply the shown value
uniformly to all selected text, instead of adjusting all selected values independently.
7. Determine the rotation by entering an value between 0 and 359 or turn the Rotation dial to
the desired amount.
8. Set the Transparency of the image or text by entering a value in the available field, or dragging
the slider to achieve the desired effect.
9. Determine whether or not you want the image or text to Draw over text on page or not by
checking the box at the bottom of the dialog.
Depending on the transparency of the watermark, drawing it over the text of your document
may totally obscure the text. On the other hand, drawing the watermark behind the text will
hide it behind any inline images.
10. When you are satisfied, click Apply.
c.
d.
e.

When you add a watermark to your document, Nisus Writer Pro becomes highly modal in its behavior.
This is necessitated because the watermarking needs to take full control of the document window.
Due to this limitation of being unable to scroll the document, Nisus Writer Pro changes the zoom ratio
of your document so that you can see at least one complete page. If you had been in Draft View, Nisus
Writer Pro switches to Page View. However, if your view had been set so that you could see more than
one page of the document, Nisus Writer Pro will not change the zoom ratio.

Create a PDF file of your Nisus Writer Pro document

You may want to save your document as a Portable Document Format.
1. Choose the menu command File > Save as PDF.
2. Name the file and navigate to the location in which you want to save it.
3. Click Save in the Save As dialog.
Any hyperlinks you added to the document, both to the Web and internally (as cross-references and
index entries) are preserved when you print your file as a PDF and the link is clickable in the
resulting PDF document.
Any table of contents entries you created will appear and function correctly in the Contents drawer
in Apples Preview.app and in Adobe Acrobat Reader. The entire table of contents entry is clickable
in the PDF.
Any document properties as explained in Document properties on page 277, are preserved in the
saved PDF files.

Create a PostScript file of your Nisus Writer Pro document

You may want to save your document as a PostScript file for importing or placing in a desktop
publishing application or to create a PDF (Portable Document Format) file.
1. Choose the menu command File > Print.
2. Choose Save PDF as PostScript from the PDF button menu inside the Print dialog.
3. Name the file and navigate to the location in which you want to save it.
4. Click Save in the Save As dialog.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

You can customize almost everything about Nisus Writer Pro to fit your working environment. These
include subjects already described in the manual such as determining how your windows appear.
The searching tools of Nisus Writer Pro allow you to customize the way you find and replace text.
The section beginning on page 301 discusses this capability in detail.
You can combine any Nisus Writer Pro commands (and include Find and Replace activities as well)
to create new commands that automate repetitive tasks. The manual discusses these macros
beginning on page 415.
This portion of the documentation details three aspects of how to customize your version of Nisus
Writer Pro, how to set preferences, how to customize your Toolbar and Tooldrawer (the Palettes),
and how to create macros.
The preferences you choose affect all Nisus Writer Pro documents. Choose preferences that fit your
personal working style. You can set a variety of preferences for Nisus Writer Pro from the commands
in the Preferences dialog.

Setting Preferences ................................................................................. 371

Macros, Skimming the Surface ............................................................... 415
Macros, the Deeper Workings ................................................................ 419
Writing Perl Scripts ................................................................................. 435
Writing AppleScripts .............................................................................. 437

Setting Preferences

This portion describes the various preferences you can set that affect how Nisus Writer Pro works.

Set Defaults for the Application ........................................................... 371

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application ............ 371
Set Defaults for New Files ................................................................... 374
Determine the Way the Document Manager Works ................................ 381
Choose the Way in Which Files Save ...................................................... 383
Choose Measurement Display Options for New Documents .................. 399
Customize Your Clipboards .................................................................... 399
Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands .................................................. 400
Set Your Language Preferences ............................................................... 401
Determine What QuickFix Fixes ............................................................. 402
Change the Display of the Toolbar .......................................................... 410
Create Your Own Group of Palettes for the Tooldrawer ........................... 413
Save Preferences .................................................................................... 414
Return All Preferences to Their Original (Shipped) Settings ..................... 414

Set Defaults for the Application

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to set your preferences for new documents in a variety of ways. To set
any preferences for Nisus Writer Pro choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences.

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Each of the following sets of preferences deals with a certain aspect of Nisus Writer Pro. The General
preferences control how the application functions as a whole.
In this dialog you can determine a variety of options that control the general functioning of Nisus
Writer Pro. Most of these are illustrated in Figure 400.
Nisus Writer Pro saves the document the way in which it appeared (window shape, size and
location) on your monitor the last time you used it and uses those settings the next time you
activate it.

372

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Setting Preferences

Figure 400
The General section of the Preferences dialog
In the General preferences pane you can
determine the author name associated with your documents (This is the default name inserted
in your document when you choose the menu command Insert > Document Property >
Author. You can override this on a per-document basis by entering a different name in the
dialog that appears when you choose the menu File > Properties.)

set a variety of other application-wide behaviors including:

Automatically check for new application versions.

Determine what happens at launch or activation

In addition to these settings, in the General preferences you can set Nisus Writer Pro so that

On application launch restore previously open documents.

On application activation:
When you have been using a different application but Nisus Writer Pro has been running in the
background and you switch from the other application into Nisus Writer Pro).

Do nothing
Create a new document
Show Apple File Browser
Show Nisus Document Manager

Determine a variety of settings regarding your palettes.

set the Tooldrawer Side of your palettes to either Left or Right.

set which palettes or palette groups are automatically associated with particular segments
of the document, so that When the selection changes to:

Customizing & Automating Solutions

373

Main document body

Table cells
Headers or footers
Images
Shapes
Styles in the Stylesheet view
you can have Nisus Writer Pro Take this action either:

Do nothing (dont change the palettes)

Switch to last palette group (use the palette group that was in use the last time the
insertion point was in that portion of the document)
Switch to palette group (choose a specific palette group to associate with this portion of
the document)
Switch to group with palette (if you have rearranged the palettes or created a custom
palette group)
Float the palette (cause a specific palette to become active and allow it to float outside
the Tooldrawer)
If you choose one of the last three options above (those with ellipses), you need to make a
choice from the pop-up menu immediately to the right.

If you choose Switch to palette groups the pop-up menu lists the groups.
If you choose Switch to group with palette or Float the palette the pop-up menu
lists all the palettes of Nisus Writer Pro.
determine a couple of settings regarding text editing.

set happens On Style conflicts: (when you copy text with certain styles from one document
and paste that text into a second document that has styles with the same names, but
different attributes, as explained in Resolve conflicts between styles on page 113).

Always ask me what to do (the default)

Use existing styles in the destination document

Add pasted styles to the destination document

determine how many editing locations for Previous/Next Selection menus Nisus Writer
Pro will Remember.

Other settings you can determine here include:

determine how many documents in Open Recent menu Nisus Writer Pro should Keep.

determine what percentage of your screens width Full Screen view uses.
Other controls here include:

whether or not Nisus Writer Pro automatically checks for new versions when you start the
application (if you are online)

Check Automatically check for new versions

the encoding in which text is saved.

Most of these encoding systems are to maintain compatibility with older file formats). If you do
not understand what this is, you can feel free to ignore it. If you wish to learn more about the
subject, check the Glossary of Useful Terms on page 481.

how Nisus Writer Pro should function when you paste a style of the same name but different
attributes into another file as explained in detail in the section Resolve conflicts between
styles on page 113.

Always ask me what to do

Use existing styles in the destination document
Add pasted styles to the destination document

374

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Setting Preferences

Set Defaults for New Files

Figure 401
The View portion of the New File preferences pane
In the View portion of the New File preferences pane you can:
Choose Draft View, Page View or Style Sheet from the View pop-up menu to determine the
mode in which your new file opens.

Choose Centimeters (cm), Inches (in), Millimeters (mm), Picas (pc), or Points (pt) from the
(measurement) Units pop-up menu to determine what your ruler displays.

Choose Most Recent, Always Open, or Always Closed from the Tooldrawer pop-up menu to
determine whether or not the Tooldrawer appears as you open a new document window.
Most Recent means that, if you have opened a file and displayed the Tooldrawer, the next New
(Untitled) file you open will have the Tooldrawer open. If, on the other hand, you have opened
a file and closed the Tooldrawer, the next New (Untitled) file you open will display without the
Tooldrawer.

Choose whether your Comments show: author name (the default), author name, date and
time, author name and date, date and time, or no titlebar at all.

Choose whether your Tracked Changes show: no titlebar (the default), Author Name, Date
and Time, Author Name and Date, Author Name, or the Date and Time.

Turn on or off Show Paragraph Formatting Icons to have Nisus Writer Pro display the icons
explained in The Nisus Writer Pro rulers on page 12 (or not).

Turn on or off Check Spelling as You Type to have Nisus Writer Pro add the squiggly red line
under misspelled words (or not). You can change the color of this squiggly line using the
Appearance preferences of Nisus Writer Pro as explained in Determine the color of various
aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working environment beginning on page 395.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

375

Figure 402
The Format portion of the New File preferences pane
In the Format portion of the New File preferences pane you can

Choose the Style you want your New file to be in by choosing that Style from the Use Style popup menu.

To learn more about how to use styles in your document see Formatting Documents Using Style
Sheets on page 102.

Choose the language you want your New file to be in by choosing that language from the
Language pop-up menu.
To learn more about how to set the language of your document see Set up language support in Nisus
Writer Pro on page 29.
Nisus Writer Pro determines the direction of your document from the language you select.
Click Font to set the font Family, Typeface and Size of your text as illustrated in 375.

Figure 403
The Font panel
Check any options you want for Bold and/or Italic.
Click Color to open and choose a color from the Colors panel as illustrated in Figure 404 below.

376

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Setting Preferences

Figure 404
The Colors panel

Click the alignment and enter the values you want for line and paragraph spacing in the area
provided.

All New documents will have the formatting you set in this preference.

Understanding Template (Stationery) Documents

Whenever you choose the menu command File > New, Nisus Writer Pro opens a document window
called Untitled.
Where did this come from?
We, the nice people at Nisus Software Inc. supply you with a versatile tool, the Nisus New File.
This file is variously called (in different applications) a stationery, template or master
document.
Apple uses the phrase Stationery pad in the Finder. You can turn any file into a Stationery
pad by clicking the appropriate check box in the window that appears when you choose the
menu command File > Get Info in the Finder. The stationery pad is like one of those little pads
your physician has for his or her prescriptions, or those pads of paper you get from your local
realtor with his or her photograph and contact information at the top of each page and room for
you to make your own to do list or shopping list or simply doodle to your heart's content.
So it is in Nisus Writer Pro. You can create any number of stationery documents. Each one
can have whatever name, text and/or formatting (even window shape and location) you want.
Every time you open that stationery document the information you've saved in it appears and
the file is called Untitled ready for you to add new content and save as a unique document.

Your Nisus New File new uses the system paper size as explained in Set the preferred paper size for
all your documents on page 124 unless you change it here.
As a convenience Nisus Writer Pro will at first pick up the paper size set in your systems Print &
Fax preferences as explained in Set the preferred paper size for all your documents on page 124.
You can customize the paper size of new documents, by editing the Nisus New File.
The Nisus New File is special stationery which opens whenever you choose the menu command
File > New.
In addition to the Nisus New File, Nisus Writer Pro also enables you to create a Plain Text Template,
the file that is used whenever you open a file that is plain text (as identified by the .txt at the end
of the files name).
Creating and using template files for specific tasks saves you time. For example, create different
stationery for letters, memos, reports, and forms. You can create as many template files as you
want. A template file always opens as an untitled file.
You can create and maintain a collection of different template files using the Document Manager.
This is explained in detail beginning on page 59.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

377

There are several tools for creating and modifying stationery (template) files. The first among these
is the Nisus New File which is explained in detail on pages 377 - 381.

Make any file a template file

1.
2.

Choose the menu command File > Save As.

Choose Document Template from the File Format pop-up menu in the Save As dialog.

Figure 405
Saving a file as a document template
3.
4.

5.

Name the file what you want.

Save the file in any location you want (preferably some place where youll remember you left it).
The Document Manager (explained in detail beginning on page 59) can help you keep track of
these files.
Click Save as illustrated in Figure 405.

Edit your Nisus New File

The Nisus New File shipped with Nisus Writer Pro illustrated in Figure 15 on page 6 represents little
more than a blank sheet of paper with area for headers/footers and a number of embedded styles. If
you want to modify your Nisus New File, for example change the margins or add information (such
as the page number variables) you need to make these alterations in the actual file.
1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences.
2. Click the New File button on the Toolbar at the top of the Preferences window.
3. Click the Advanced tab immediately beneath the Toolbar.
4. Choose Nisus New File from the Template File pop-up menu.
5. Click Open For Editing.
6. Make the changes as desired.

Your Nisus New File new uses the system paper size as explained in Set the preferred paper size for
all your documents on page 124 unless you change it here.
As a convenience Nisus Writer Pro will at first pick up the paper size set in your System Preferences
Printers & Scanners as explained in Set the preferred paper size for all your documents on page
124. You can customize the paper size of new documents, by editing the Nisus New File.
7. Save and close the file.

378

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Setting Preferences

Figure 406
The Advanced portion of the New File preferences pane showing default location of the Nisus New File
You can add a wide variety of information to your Nisus New File. For an example of what you might
consider see Using Automatic Numbers, Date & Time Variables and Document Properties in
Headers and Footers on page 143.

Create a template for plain text documents

If you work with many plain text files (files that have no special formatting) you can determine the
basic font, size, etc. of the file that Nisus Writer Pro uses as a template when you open them.
1. Follow steps 1 through 3 above.
2. Choose Plain Text Template from the Template File pop-up menu.
3. Click Open For Editing.
4. Make the changes as desired.
5. Save and close the file.

Create a template for macro files

If you create a number of macros you can determine the basic font, size, etc. of the file that Nisus
Writer Pro uses as a template when you open them.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

You can learn about writing Nisus Writer Pro macros beginning on page 415.
Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 377 above.
Choose Macro Template from the Template File pop-up menu.
Click Open For Editing.
Make the changes as desired.
Save and close the file.

See the Nisus New File or Plain Text, or Macro Template in the Finder
If you have saved and use a version of the Nisus New File and/or the Plain Text Template in a
location on your disk other than the original location illustrated in Figure 407, you can have Nisus
Writer Pro show the files in the finder.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

379

Click Reveal In Finder in the Advanced portion of the New File preferences pane.

Figure 407
Default location of the Nisus New File in the Finder

Use an existing file as a Nisus New File

When you choose the menu command File > New, Nisus Writer Pro looks for a template document
called Nisus New File.dot in the Templates folder inside the Nisus Documents folder which is
in the Documents folder of your User folder. If it is found, it will be opened and named Untitled.
You can, however, use any Nisus Writer Pro readable file on your hard drive as the file opened when
you choose New.

Choose a different file for your Nisus New File

You can designate any Nisus Writer Pro readable file on your hard drive as your Nisus New File.
1. Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 377 above.
2. Click Choose in the Advanced portion of the New File preferences pane.
3. Navigate in the Open dialog to the file you want to use.
4. Click Open.

380

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Setting Preferences

Figure 408
The Advanced portion of the New File preferences pane showing a different Nisus New File selected
Nisus Writer Pro indicates the location of the file in the field at the top of the preferences pane.

Create a Nisus New File

You can create any file you like and save it as your Nisus New File. The Nisus New File is a special
case of a template or stationery file. The Nisus New File is the file that Nisus Writer Pro opens when
you choose the menu command File > New. The easiest way to create a new Nisus New File is to
edit the existing Nisus New File as explained in Edit your Nisus New File on page 377. However,
you can also use the following procedure.
1. Choose the menu command File > New.
2. Give the file all the text, with all the attributes you want for your New file. (Modify the existing
styles if you like).
3. Choose the menu command File > Save As.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

Figure 409
The Save As dialog for a Nisus New File
4.
5.
6.
7.

Name the file Nisus New File.

Choose Document Template from the File Format pop-up menu.
Navigate to the appropriate location on your hard drive
~/Documents/Nisus Documents/Templates
as indicated in Figure 409 above.
Click Save.

Restore the factory settings of your Nisus New File

If, for any reason you want to begin anew (Spring Cleaning, and all that) and, after many
modifications, you want to use the formatting and file which Nisus Writer Pro ships as your Nisus
New File, the process is simple.

Click Restore Factory Settings in the Advanced portion of the New File preferences pane.
Figure 401 on page 374, Figure 402 on page 375 and Figure 406 on page 378 illustrate these
settings.

Determine the Way the Document Manager Works

Nisus Writer Pro enables you to automatically save files and then easily find and open your files
using the Document Manager.
If you are new to Nisus Writer Pro or Nisus Writer Express (and have never used the Document
Manager in either of these applications) the first time you display the Document Manager it will
appear empty as illustrated in Figure 60 on page 62.

381

382

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Setting Preferences

The Document Manager window resembles an iPhoto or iTunes window. Various groups appear in
the pane on the left, a list of files in those groups display in the main pane. A search field is
available in the upper right corner of the window. At the bottom, instead of Cover Flow the
Document Manager presents a preview of the contents of your document.
The Document Manager and its preferences are explained in detail beginning on page 61.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

383

Choose the Way in Which Files Save

Nisus Writer Pro offers you several ways to save a document.
You can ignore saving your documents entirely. Nisus Writer Pro, along with Mac OS X, as
explained in Saving Files beginning on page 59 automatically saves all your work. Nisus Writer Pro
can give your document a name based on a string of text in the file and stores the file (unless you
set it otherwise) in the folder called
~/Documents/Nisus Documents
Nisus Writer Pro keeps track of your files in the Document Manager as explained in Reintroducing
the Document Manager beginning on page 61.

Figure 410
The Saving section of the Preferences dialog

Have Nisus Writer Pro notify you whenever you save a file
You can have Nisus Writer Pro discretely notify you whenever a file is safely stored on disk.

Learn when Nisus Writer Pro has finished saving a file you explicitly save
1.
2.

3.

4.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Saving at the top of
the dialog as illustrated in Figure 410.
Choose the sound you want from the Play a sound whenever a file is saved pop-up menu in
the Saving preferences dialog.
This is initially set at None so you are not notified. However, as an alternative,
Choose Choose from the pop-up menu.
Figure 411 illustrates a sound selected for whenever you explicitly save a file and the pop-up
menu opened, ready to choose Choose.
In the variant of the Open File dialog that appears, navigate to where you want to have the file
saved, as illustrated in Figure 412, select the file and then click Open.

384

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Setting Preferences

You can choose any of the sounds you may have available your computer. This can be any
sound file or any item in your iTunes Library. If you choose something from your iTunes
Library, you may need to restart Nisus Writer Pro for the change to take effect.

Learn when Nisus Writer Pro has finished saving a file automatically
1.
2.

3.

4.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Saving at the top of
the dialog as illustrated in Figure 410.
Choose the sound you want from the Play a sound whenever a file is autosaved pop-up menu
in the Saving preferences dialog.
This is initially set at None so you are not notified. However, as an alternative,
Choose Choose from the pop-up menu.
Figure 411 illustrates a sound selected for whenever you explicitly save a file and the pop-up
menu opened, ready to choose Choose.
In the variant of the Open File dialog that appears, navigate to where you want to have the file
saved, as illustrated in Figure 412, select the file and then click Open.
You can choose any of the sounds you may have available your computer. This can be any
sound file or any item in your iTunes Library. If you choose something from your iTunes
Library, you may need to restart Nisus Writer Pro for the change to take effect.

Figure 411
A sound selected for explicit saves & the pop-up menu open, ready to choose a sound for autosave

Customizing & Automating Solutions

385

Figure 412
The variant of the Open dialog with a sound selected for autosave

Save an additional copy in another location

Check Save duplicate copy of each file to another location from the Backups section of the
Saving portion of the Preferences.
2. Click Choose.
You can save your file to your Dropbox, thereby keeping a second copy of your documents
accessible from any computer with an Internet connection. You can choose a folder on any attached
hard drive. If you choose an external hard drive is not connected at the time of your save, Nisus
Writer Pro alerts you. As illustrated in Figure 413 you can choose to either:
1.

Dont Backup at this time;

Use the moment to plug in the missing drive and Try Again;
Decide to click Choose Folder to save the file in a different secondary location.

386

Using the General Preferences to Control the Application

Setting Preferences

Figure 413
The Missing Backup Folder alert

Set the preferred format and encoding for saved files

You can choose the particular standard format for the files you create and save

From the Default format pop-up menu of the File Formats portion of the Saving preferences,
choose either

Rich Text Format (RTF)

Rich Text Format Directory (RTFD)
Microsoft Word Format
Nisus Compressed Rich Text15
Plain Text
You can override this preference when you save a file if you choose Save As.

From the Plain text encoding pop-up menu of the File Formats portion of the Saving
preferences, choose either

International formats: Automatic; UTF-8 (recommended), UTF-16, ASCII;

Mac OS Only formats: Arabic, Central European, Cyrillic, Greek, Japanese, Hebrew,
Icelandic, Korean, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Turkish, Western (Mac OS
Roman);
Windows Only formats: Arabic (Windows), Central European (Windows Latin 2), Japanese
(Windows, DOS), Korean (Windows, DOS), Latin-US (DOS), Simplified Chinese (Windows,
DOS), Traditional Chinese (Windows, DOS) Western (Windows Latin 1);
ISO Standards formats: Central European (ISO Latin 2), Central European (ISO Latin 4),
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5), Greek (ISO 8859-7), Japanese (ISO 2022-JP), Turkish (ISO Latin
5), Western (ISO Latin 1), Western (ISO Latin 3);
Other formats: Japanese (EUC), Japanese (Shift-JIS), Western (NeXTStep).
You can override this preference when you save a file if you choose Save As.

Save files automatically and never see the Save As dialog, unless you
choose it from the menu
Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Saving at the top of
the dialog as illustrated in Figure 400 on page 372.
2. Check Keep all new documents without asking me.
Nisus Writer Pro will create a title for your document based on the first few words of the document.
The rules Nisus Writer Pro uses to name a file are, in order of priority for naming:
1.

text marked in a Title or Heading style;

text that is centered or larger or bold or marked for the table of contents;
text in longer paragraphs are given the lowest priority.
When you close the window Nisus Writer Pro will not ask if you want to save the file, but, will close
the file and save any changes made as it stores the file in the Document Manager.

15

This is a gzipped RTF file. For more information see Appendix II, the Glossary of Useful Terms beginning on page
481.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

387

In addition, you can explicitly save your files by choosing the menu command File > Save As.
This enables you to save your file in a variety of formats and encodings. For normal use UTF-8
encoding16 is recommended.
For more information about saving files see Saving Files on page 59.

You can open the Document Manager at any time by choosing the menu command Window >
Document Manager.

Open automatically saved and closed files

1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command Window > Document Manager.

Select the file you want to open from the list.
Click Open.

You can have the Document Manager sort your files, in descending or ascending order, by name, date
created or modified, or by size. When you select a file, the Document Manager displays a preview of
the file. For more information on the use of the Document Manager see the section Reintroducing the
Document Manager beginning on page 61.

What gets saved with a file

Aside from all the contents of your file, Nisus Writer Pro also saves the following so that it opens
with

window size and location

show invisibles (on or off)
show page guides (on or off)
correct spelling as you type (on or off)
ruler units
document view (Draft View, Page View, etc.)
selection or insertion point position
Navigator and Comments/Tracked Changes pane settings (right/left, open/closed)
Track Changes state (on or off)

The Toolbar appears or not according to how you had set the most recently opened window. The
Tooldrawer appears or not based on what you choose in the preferences as explained on page 374.

Determine the way in which files open

When you open a window and resize it, the next time you choose New it appears like the preceding
window did when you closed it, with

the same size and shape (to change the size and shape of new documents edit the Nisus New
File as explained on page 380).

the Toolbar displayed or not

the Ruler visible or not.

the Tooldrawer displayed (in the manner you set the New File preferences as explained in Set
Defaults for the Application beginning on page 371).

Open any document as new or Untitled

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command File > Open.

Select the file you want to open in the list.
Check Open as New File in the Open dialog.
Click Open.
The file opens with all its contents and formatting, but, untitled. You can change this file and
save it and it will not overwrite the original file unless you give it the same name and save it
in the same location.
For more information see Set Defaults for the Application on page 371.

16

8-bit UCS/Unicode Transformation Format <http://unicode.org/faq/utf_bom.html#2>, <http://

en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8>

388

Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents

Setting Preferences

Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents

Nisus Writer Pro has a wide variety of options that affect the display of your working environment.
Some of these have been described elsewhere in the documentation. For a quick review and details
on how to use those not explained elsewhere, they are collected here. You can set most of these
display options in the Appearance Preferences of Nisus Writer Pro.

Figure 414
The Appearance Preferences pane
Some of these options take effect on new documents as explained in Set Defaults for the
Application on page 371. These include Invisibles and Page Guides. Other options are applied
immediately and affect all documents.

Invisibles
Turn on or off Invisibles to have Nisus Writer Pro display or hide formatting characters including
a box surrounding any images in your document.

Check Show invisibles (tabs, newlines, page breaks, etc.) to either display of invisibles in all
new documents.

At any time, you can choose the menu command View > Show Invisibles to display

Dots for spaces

Vertical bar with arrows for reverse direction markers for bidirectional text

Tildes ~ for non-breaking spaces (4 spacebar)

Little boxes for the ideograph space (used in East-Asian languages),
Unicode U+3000

Customizing & Automating Solutions

389

Arrows where tabs occur (left to right and right to left, depending on the direction of the text)

Turn around arrows where soft returns appear (left to right and right to left, depending on the
direction of the text)

Inserted page breaks (using the menu command Insert > Page Break)

Paragraph symbols at the end of paragraphs (left to right and right to left, depending on the
direction of the text)

Section breaks (using the commands of the menu Insert > Section Break)
X-ed out boxes for gremlins (see the Glossary (page 481) for a definition of gremlin).
Shape bounding boxes around inline images
Anchors indicating where floating shapes are attached
Some are rather esoteric. You can see all of them illustrated in Table 32.

InBisibles
Character Name

Invisible Mark

Unicode

Space

U+0020

Tab

U+0009

Return

U+000A

Soft Return

U+2028

Page Break

U+000C

Section Break

U+000C

Non-breaking Space

U+00A0

Ideographic Space

U+3000

Zero-width Space

U+200B

Left-to-Right Marker,
Push Left-to-Right

U+200E
U+202D

Right to Left Marker,

Push Right-to-Left

U+200F
U+202E

Pop Direction

U+202C

Zero-Width Non-Joiner

U+200C

Zero-Width Joiner,
Word Joiner

U+200D
U+2060

Gremlin

many

Anchor (appears at the end of

a paragraph to which a floating
shape is attached)
Table 32
Invisibles

390

Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents

Customize the color of your Invisibles

1.
2.
3.

Setting Preferences

Select Invisibles & Guides in the left column at the bottom of the Preferences window.
Select Invisibles in the second column.
Click the Invisibles color swatch and choose the color you want from the Colors panel.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

391

Page guides
Turn on or off Page Guides to have Nisus Writer Pro add (or remove) a color-customizable line
around the area of the page (in Page View) which indicates the pages margins. This also determines
the display of the Click for Header and Click for Footer (and their variants) prompt that appears
at the top or bottom of each page.

Uncheck Show Page Guides to prevent the guides from appearing in new files.

Figure 415
Page Guides (with Click for Header) showing

Figure 416
Page Guides not showing
If the page guides do not show you cannot drag them to alter the margins. If however the page
guides show you can drag them. To prevent accidental dragging choose the menu command View >
Page Guides > Lock Page Guides.

Customize the color of your Page Guides

1.
2.
3.

Select Invisibles & Guides in the left column at the bottom of the Preferences window.
Select Page guides in the second column.
Click the Page guides color swatch and choose the color you want from the Colors panel.

392

Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents

Setting Preferences

Insertion point (caret, I-beam) width

You can change the overall size of the arrow pointer and insertion point (I-Beam, caret or cursor) in
the Mouse & Trackpad portion of the Universal Access System Preference. This affects the pointer
and insertion point in all applications, not only Nisus Writer Pro. In Mac OS X 10.10 (Yosemite)
1. Choose the menu command Apple > System Preferences.
2. Choose Accessibility from the fourth row.
3. Click the Display in the right column.
4. Drag the Cursor Size slider to the desired size as illustrated in Figure 417.
5. Close the System Preferences window.

Figure 417
Cursor Size as an aspect of the Universal Access System Preference
In Nisus Writer Pro, however, you can change the width and/or color of the flashing insertion point.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

393

Change the width of the insertion point

Choose the desired width from the pop-up menu to the right of Insertion point (caret) width in
the Appearance portion of the Nisus Writer Pro Preferences dialog as illustrated in Figure 418.
Your choices are:

hairline
1 pt
2 pts
3 pts
character width
Character width refers to the width of the alphanumeric character closest to the insertion
point.

Figure 418
Customizing the appearance of the insertion point portion of the Appearance preferences

Determine whether or not the insertion point blinks

Some people find the blinking insertion point a distraction. You can turn this off.
Uncheck Caret blinks on/off.

Change the color of the insertion point

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose Selection from the left column.

Choose Selection caret from the second column.
Click the Selection caret color swatch
Select whatever color you want from the Colors panel which opens as illustrated in Figure 404
on page 376.

394

Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents

Setting Preferences

WYSIWYG Font menu

You can make the Font menu WYSIWYG.
Nisus Writer Pro can display your Font menu (and the Family portion of the Character palette when
it is expanded) so that each fonts name appears in that font.

Displaying your fonts WYSIWYG can cause Nisus Writer Pro to respond sluggishly.
Check Font menu shows previews in the Appearance preferences dialog and choose the size
you want them to appear in from the accompanying pop-up menu.
You can have the menu (and the palette) appear in any of four sizes:

small size
medium size
large size
huge size

Figure 419
The Family portion of the Character palette showing fonts WYSIWYG in various sizes

WYSIWYG Styles palette

You can modify the display of the styles in the Styles palette not WYSIWYG.
Nisus Writer Pro generally displays your Styles palette with the attributes of that style so that each
styles name appears with all its character attributes. You can change this. The options are
illustrated in Figure 420.

From the Styles palette shows previews using pop-up menu in the Appearance preferences
dialog choose:

plain text only to remove all formatting,

style formatting to display all formatting including possible extreme height characteristics,
or
style formatting, limited height to display the formatting, but maintain a similar height
for all styles.

Figure 420
The Styles palette showing formatted and unformatted views

Set the font used in the Navigator pane

When you first start using Nisus Writer Pro the Navigator pane displays its list in Lucida Grande 12
pt. You can change the font to any other font and size you want.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

395

Click the button to the right of Navigator pane font.

When the Fonts panel opens, choose whatever font family, typeface and size you want.
The Navigator pane updates as you make your changes so you can see how your choice will
appear.
3. When you are satisfied with your selection, close the Fonts panel.
You can also set the background and/or text color for the Navigator pane. This is explained (with
the setting of other background colors) on page 396.
1.
2.

Determine the suffix of automatically named bookmarks

As explained in the section Working with Bookmarks and Cross-references, on page 221,
automatically named and Bookmark As bookmarks have a very subtle difference. It is important
to distinguish them. You can set the suffix that appears with all automatically bookmarked text.

Type the text you want to have as the suffix in the Automatically named bookmark suffix field
of the Appearance portion of the Preferences dialog illustrated in Figure 414 on page 388.

Determine the color of various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro

working environment
Nisus Writer Pro can colorize a wide variety of aspects of your working environment as well as
highlight text marked for a wide variety of markers you might add to your text. It can distinguish:

Automatic Text
those bits of text that Nisus Writer Pro stores as variables and updates, either automatically
or on command

Automatic Numbers
such as those items inserted from the menu Insert > Automatic Number

Automatic Text
such as those items inserted from the menu Insert > Date and Time that update
automatically (i.e. not Fixed) as well as anything inserted using the menu Insert >
Document Property.
Cross-reference
any of the cross-reference you have inserted in the document using the menu command
Insert > Cross-reference
Indexes
any of the indexes you have inserted in the document using the menu command Insert >
Index > Insert Index
List items
any bullets, numbers or other text that appear when you insert a list in your document
using the List button or the menu Format > Lists
Merge Placeholders
any symbols that appear when you insert a merge placeholder in your document using any
one of the commands from the menu Insert > Merge Placeholder
Note references
any symbols that appear when you insert a footnote or an endnote in your document using
Footnote or Endnote from the Insert menu; this does not affect the corresponding
character in the notes area of your document
PowerFind Bubbles
any metacharacter symbols PowerFind displays using natural language words and phrases
in a bubble as explained in PowerFind terminology on page 308.
Stale automatic text
because Nisus Writer Pro does not continuously update page and other cross-references as
well as other automatic content such as character count and word count, this information
can become stale to indicate that it is not fresh, Nisus Writer Pro draws a box around this
text.
Tables of content
any of the tables of contents you have inserted in the document using the menu command
Insert > Table of Contents > Insert TOC

Comments
Nisus Writer Pro is shipped so that the background color of "My Comments" is set to a soft pale
yellow. You can customize this color. Nisus Writer Pro enables an unlimited number of

396

Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents

Setting Preferences

commentators. However, the application enables customization of the pane background for up
to 6.

Author #1 Comments - Author #6 Comments

the color of the comments of authors #1 through #6.
My Comments
the color of the current user's comments.
Pane Background
the color of the Comments pane.
In addition, choose the menu command Tools > Comments > Comment Display Options to
set how much information appears in the title bar of the comments and other options on a
document by document basis. These features are explained in Additional controls for the
display of comments on page 336.

Document Views
When in draft view you can change the background or for an even more dramatic effect in full
screen view you can make your screen look like a terminal of old (as illustrated in Figure 421
below); none of these have any effect on the filethey are strictly screen phenomena:

Active palette title tint

the color of the titlebar of palettes that have controls that can affect your document
Draft background
the color of the background when in Draft View
Draft text
the color of the text when in Draft view
Full screen background
the color of the background when in Full Screen view
Full screen caret (insertion point)
the color of the insertion point when in Full Screen view
Full screen gutter
the color of the area around the text editing area set in the General preferences of Nisus
Writer Pro as explained on page 373
Full screen text
the color of text when in Full Screen view

Figure 421
Full Screen view in a retro look

Navigator background
the color of the background area of the Navigator

Navigator text
the color of the text of the Navigator

Customizing & Automating Solutions

Page backdrop
the color of the non-paper region when in Page view

Page color
the color of the paper region when in Page view (this does not print, neither to paper nor
PDF)

Page frame
the color of the line that separates the page from the page backdrop.

Highlighters
Nisus Writer Pro comes shipped with a highlighter tool on the Toolbar that match the most
common colors of highlighter pens available commercially. You can, however, change these six
highlighter colors to anything you wish. The Highlight tool is explained in Highlight text on
page 291 and illustrated in Figure 103 on page 92. It is contrasted with Background Color
which is explained on page 292.

Highlight Color #1 - Highlight Color #6

each numbered color matches the one as it appears in the sequence on the Highlight
menu.

Invisibles & Guides

Nisus Writer Pro offers a number of guides you can turn on or off to help you:

397

Invisibles
as explained in Invisibles on page 388
Page guides
as explained in Page guides on page 391
Shape anchor
as explained in The Shape Anchor on page 158
Shape bounding box
as explained in The Shape Bounding Box on page 160
Shape paste spot
as explained in The Shape Paste Spot on page 184
Table guides
as explained in Determine the thickness of the lines on page 216

Marked Text
Nisus Writer Pro has various ways of marking text you can colorize these to make them stand
out:

Bookmarked
any text to which you have added a bookmark using Add Bookmark As from the
Bookmark submenu of the Insert menu
Bookmarked (autoname)
any text to which you have added a bookmark using Add Bookmark from the Bookmark
submenu of the Insert menu
Field code
any text from a document imported from Microsoft Word that uses features not
implemented in Nisus Writer Pro, if these features happen to be saved in RTF via field codes
(for example, a "BarCode" field code that inserts a scannable image of a postal address)
Font missing
If you receive a file that contains a font or fonts that you do not have available in your
System Nisus Writer Pro preserves them when you open and re-save the file. These fonts
appear in the font menu and character palette using a unique highlighting color. Though
Nisus Writer Pro is shipped with this feature turned off, it can also use this color to
highlight text in the document that uses a missing font. You can also search for text in a
missing font by searching for that attribute with Attribute Sensitive turned on in the Find/
Replace window
Font substituted
as explained in Font substitution on page 96
Hyperlink
as explained in Open an existing file on page 2
Include in index
any text you have added to an index using the menu command Tools > Index > Index As
(this only displays the current or active index, the one checked at the bottom of Index
submenu)

398

Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents

Setting Preferences

Include in index (auto)

any text you have added to an index using the menu command Tools > Index > Index (this
only displays the current or active index, the one checked at the bottom of Index submenu)
Include in TOC
any text you have added to a table of contents using one of the levels of table of contents
from the menu Tools > Table of Contents > Include in TOC (this only displays the current
or active table of contents, the one checked at the bottom of Table of Contents submenu)
Misspelled
With Check Spelling As You Type turned on, Nisus Writer Pro indicates misspelled words
with a dotted red line. You can change the color of that line.

Selection
Nisus Writer Pro can help you distinguish between various kinds of selections in your
document:

Active Selection
the color of the highlight of your text when you select it by double-clicking or dragging the
pointer; the default is the color you set in your System Preferences (Appearance)
Find & replace
the color of the highlight of your text when you select it by using the Find & Replace tools of
Nisus Writer Pro
Flash QuickFix
the color of the highlight of your text when you expand an abbreviation using QuickFix
Flash Selection
the color of the highlight of your text when you choose Flash Selection, Pervious Selection,
or Next Selection from the menu Edit > Select, or press T
Inactive selection
the color of the Active Selection highlight of your text when it is in a background window;
the default is the color set by Apple
Rectangular selection
the color of the selection highlight of your text when you select it using Rectangular
selection (as explained on page 43)
Selection caret (insertion point)
The color of the flashing vertical line where you click the I-Beam (as explained on page 10)
Spellcheck
the color of the highlight of your text when you select it by using the Spelling Checker tools
of Nisus Writer Pro
You can alter any of these using a slight variant of the following procedures.

Highlight marked text

This highlight is not to be confused with the highlight color that you can add to your text using the
Highlight tool explained in Highlight text on page 291 and illustrated illustrated in Figure 103 on
page 92. While that highlight color prints, this highlight color is a screen display only and does not
print.
1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click the Appearance
button at the top of the Preference dialog.
2. Choose Marked Text in the Customizable Color column at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Choose Include in TOC in the Marked Text column.
4. Uncheck Hide this highlighting (if it is checked).
5. Close the Preferences window.

Change the color of the highlight associated with the text marked for the table of
contents
1.
2.

Click the Include in TOC color swatch.

Select whatever color you want from the Colors panel which opens as illustrated in Figure 404
on page 376.

Hide the highlight color of text marked for the table of contents
1.
2.
3.

Follow instructions 1 through 3 listed in Highlight marked text above.

Check Hide this highlighting.
Close the Preferences dialog.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

399

Choose Measurement Display Options for New Documents

You can display measurements in either centimeters, inches, millimeters, points, or picas.
Whichever option you choose in the View portion of the New File preferences determines their
display on the ruler and in any dialog in which measurement options display unless you change
the unit of measurement for that particular file.
1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click New File at the top of
the dialog.
2. Choose the unit type you want from the Units pop-up menu in the View Options area at the
top of the dialog as illustrated.
You can change the unit of measurement on a per document basis.

Determine the unit of measurement in any Nisus Writer Pro document

Choose the units you want from the menu View > Rulers.

Figure 422
The various units of measurement options on the ruler

Customize Your Clipboards

As mentioned on page 47, the Clipboards of Nisus Writer Pro are versatile. You can add to and/or
edit the contents of your Clipboards. You can create new Clipboards, choose which should be
active, rename them and delete them.

Information on all the Clipboards not the Current Clipboard is lost as you quit the application.
Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Clipboards at the top
of the dialog to customize the Clipboards.
The green check spot indicates the active Clipboard.

400

Choose Various Display Options for Your Documents

Setting Preferences

Figure 423
The Clipboards section of the Preferences dialog

Click New to create a new Clipboard

You can name a Clipboard anything you like.

Figure 424
Renaming a Clipboard

Double-click a Clipboards name in the Preferences dialog to change its name.

Click a Clipboards name in the Preferences dialog then click Make Active to make it the active
Current Clipboard.
Click a Clipboards name in the Preferences dialog then click Edit Clipboard to open it as
another Nisus Writer Pro window and edit its contents.
Click a Clipboards name in the Preferences dialog then click Delete to delete the selected
Clipboard.

Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands

While studies show that, in general, using the mouse or trackpad is faster than using the keyboard,
in many instances, writers need to keep their fingers on the keys. You can use your keyboard to
choose almost any command available in Nisus Writer Pro.

You can use any number of keys to execute your menu command. This makes the mnemonic device
much easier. For example you can use the standard A c for Copy and extend that with A c t
f for Copy to Find.
1. Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Menu Keys at the top
of the dialog to customize the keystroke sequences to any menu command.
This a menu browser (like the file browser in the Finder).

Customizing & Automating Solutions

401

Figure 425
The Menu Keys section of the Preferences dialog
Choose a command from any menu.
Type the keys you want to use to call that menu command. In addition, you can add any of the
modifier keys to achieve additional combinations.

Check Shift to require 1 to be part of your keyboard shortcut. When assigned, it appears
on the menus as .

Check Option to require 4 to be part of your keyboard shortcut. When assigned, it

appears on the menus as .

Check Control to require 6 to be part of your keyboard shortcut. When assigned, it

appears on the menus as .

The Numbers Keypad (for those who have one) functions the same was as if it were one of
those on the number row (above the qwertyuiop[]\ row). However, you cannot use the
Numbers Keypad keys in conjunction with the alphabetic or numeric keys of the remainder
of the keyboard for a shortcut.
4. Click Set to confirm your keyboard shortcut.
2.
3.

You can type roman characters to call a keyboard shortcut, even if your text entry is set to a
different script keyboard.
You can quickly assign a keyboard shortcut to any of your styles while in the Style Sheet view, as
explained in the section Assign a keyboard shortcut to your style as you edit it on page 108.

Remove an existing keyboard shortcut

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click Menu Keys at the top
of the dialog.
Choose the menu command from which you wish to remove the keyboard shortcut.
Delete what appears in the text edit box.
Click Set to confirm your keyboard shortcut.

Find whether a key combination has been assigned to a command

In the Menu Keys section of the Preferences dialog, choose any command and type a key. If
that key is used for any other command, Nisus Writer Pro will alert you with a bit of text at the
bottom of the dialog stating that there is a conflict.

The System reserves certain keyboard shortcuts for itself. Especially when you are using a keyboard
(input method) other than U.S., be aware that (for example) using "N" (even in combination) is
interpreted as a New File command. You can, however, use the keys of the active input method and
paste them into the text edit box.

Set Your Language Preferences

A complete explanation of using the Language preferences appears in the section Writing in
Multiple Languages which begins on page 29.

402

Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands

Setting Preferences

Determine What QuickFix Fixes

The QuickFix preference of Nisus Writer Pro can fix your typos as you type, it can turn on or off
Smart Punctuation (including curly quotes) and it can automatically superscript ordinal numbers.
Other common terms for QuickFix are text substitution, autocomplete and abbreviation expander.
In addition to these tools QuickFix enables you to create and use Glossary files.
Use the Glossary to save time. A glossary contains abbreviations with corresponding entries. When
you expand an abbreviation, its entry replaces the abbreviation you typed. Glossary entries can
contain both images and text.
You can have many different glossaries for different collections of abbreviations related to specific
tasks. Note that in this context, open really means load (place its contents in the active memory of
the computer).
QuickFix entries are per-language, they are stored along with all other Nisus Writer Pro language
settings. You can edit this list in the Languages preferences.

Various QuickFixes
Each of the following features is language specific. Whenever you apply a language style (as
explained in the section Writing in Multiple Languages which begins on page 29), Nisus Writer Pro
uses the abbreviations appropriate for that language. Similarly whenever you make a change to
one of the options in the top portion of the QuickFix preferences be sure you choose the language to
which you want it to apply from the Language Sensitive QuickFix For: pop-up menu at the top of
the dialog. The languages that appear in the pop-up menu are all those that appear in the Nisus
Writer Pro Languages preferences.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

Figure 426
The QuickFix preferences (lower portion controls the glossaries)

403

404

Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands

Setting Preferences

Enter smart quotes as you type

1.
2.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Check Use Smart Punctuation (Including curly quotes).
Many different quotation symbols and styles are available. They are listed in alphabetical order.
Choose the one you want from the pop-up menu.

International Curly Quotes

Style

example

Czech/Slovak/Lithuanian

sample

Dutch

sample

German

sample

Guillemets

sample

Guillemets with Space

sample

Hungarian

sample

Northeast European

sample

Reversed
Scandinavian

sample

Spanish

sample

Standard (as in U.S. English)

sample

Table 33
International Smart or curly Quotes

You can change all quotes in the current selection to Smart Quotes or "Plain Quotes" by choosing
Plain Quotes to Smart Quotes or Smart Quotes to Plain Quotes from the menu Edit > Convert.

Superscript ordinals as you type

1.
2.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Check Superscript ordinals (1st, 2nd, etc.).
This changes 1st, 2nd, etc. to 1st, 2nd, etc. as you type.

Capitalize the first word of sentences as you type

1.
2.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Check Fix capitalization at the start of sentences.
Any of these characters always signals the end of a sentence:

line break
exclamation point
question mark
horizontal ellipsis (U+2026)
ideographic full stop (U+3002)
halfwidth ideographic full stop (U+FF61)

Fix typos as you type

1.
2.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Check Fix typos.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

Add or subtract, or modify a typo that gets fixed

1.
2.

1.
2.
3.

405

Click the Plus (+) button at the bottom right of the field of typos and corrections to add a typo.
Type the typo in the left column.
Type the correction in the right column.
Select a typo to remove from the correcting list and the Minus (-) button to remove it.
To modify an existing correction,
Double-click the right (correction) portion of the item in the list.
Type what you want it to correct to.
Click your pointer elsewhere.

Be careful, as pressing T causes the next item in the list to be selected for editing.

Working with Glossaries and the Mac OS X System-Wide

Replacements
The bottom portion of the QuickFix preferences are language independent (unless you designate
otherwise in the System Preferences).
Mac OS X Keyboard System Preferences enable a number of text replacements as illustrated in
Figure 427. Among these are customizable text expansions and automatic spelling corrections,
which can be language-specific, and a couple of which duplicate those of Nisus Writer Pro. Nisus
Writer Pro is shipped set to use these replacements.
1. If you do not want to use the system-wide replacements choose the menu command Nisus
Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of the Preferences dialog.
2. Uncheck Expand Mac OS X system-wide text replacements as you type.

406

Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands

Setting Preferences

Figure 427
The Text portion of the Keyboard System Preferences
You can use the Nisus Writer Pro Glossaries to save time. A glossary contains abbreviations of many
more characters than the simple replacements of a QuickFix typo. When you expand an glossary
abbreviation, its entry replaces the abbreviation you typed. Glossary entries can contain both
graphics and text.
You can have many different glossaries for different collections of abbreviations related to specific
tasks.

Create a new Glossary

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Click New Glossary in the upper right area of the QuickFix portion of the Preferences dialog.
This creates an empty New Glossary file.
Double-click the name of the file in the list area on the left and give the new glossary file a
unique name.
Click Edit Glossary.
A Nisus Writer Pro Glossary document window opens. All the tools available in any other Nisus
Writer Pro document are available in this document as well.
At the top of the document the following text appears, explaining how to add glossary entries:

Customizing & Automating Solutions

407

You should edit this file to contain a list of glossary entries. Each entry should be separated
from the others by a glossary break. Choose the menu command Insert > Glossary Entry
Break. Each entry consists of an abbreviation and an expansion. The expansion is
separated from the abbreviation by either a tab or newline character.
5. Type the characters you want to use (something youll easily remember) as the abbreviation.
6. Press @ or <.
7. Type (or paste) the full text to which you want that abbreviation to expand.
8. Choose the menu command Insert > Glossary Entry Break.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 as needed.
10. Save and close the file.
Glossary abbreviations and expansions are stored in a special file on your hard drive located in
the Glossaries folder of the Nisus Documents folder inside your Documents folder:
~/Document/Nisus Documents/Glossaries

Figure 428
Glossary files location
Nisus Writer Pro makes any file of a type .ngloss inside this folder available to use the next
time you restart the application.

Add or remove an entry to or from a Nisus Writer Pro Glossary file

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
2. Select a Glossary file to edit.
3. Click Edit Glossary.
A Nisus Writer Pro Glossary document window opens. All the tools available in any other Nisus
Writer Pro document are available in this document as well.
4. Type the characters you want to use (something youll easily remember) as the abbreviation.
5. Press @ or <.
6. Type (or paste) the full text to which you want that abbreviation to expand.
7. Choose the menu command Insert > Glossary Entry Break.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 as needed.
Or, if you want to remove an entry, delete everything between one Glossary entry break and the
next.
9. Choose the menu command Insert > Glossary Entry Break so that the file is ready to receive
new abbreviations at some later date.
10. Save and close the file.
1.

Activate a Nisus Writer Pro Glossary file

1.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of

408

Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands

2.

Setting Preferences

the Preferences dialog.

Click the check box to the left of the glossarys file name.
If you leave the file checked when you quit Nisus Writer Pro, it will be available to you the next
time you restart the application.

Enable automatic expansion of Nisus Writer Pro Glossary file abbreviations

1.
2.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Check Expand glossary entries as you type at the bottom of the Glossary Files list.

For East Asian and other languages that do not use spaces you can trigger a glossary abbreviations
expansion by assigning a keyboard shortcut to the command Expand Glossary on the Edit menu as
explained in Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands on page 400.

Create a new glossary abbreviation, or edit an existing abbreviation in an existing

Glossary
1.
2.
3.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Click Edit Glossary.
Edit the file following steps 5 through 9 as explained in Create a new Glossary on page 406.

Import a Nisus Writer Classic Glossary file

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Click Import Glossary.
A variant of the standard Open dialog appears, find your old Glossary file and click Open.
Your imported glossary file appears in the list of Glossary Files, checked, enabled, ready to use.

Delete a Nisus Writer Pro Glossary file

1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose the menu command Nisus Writer Pro > Preferences and click QuickFix at the top of
the Preferences dialog.
Click Delete Glossary.
An alert appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the file: The file will be moved
to the trash immediately. This action cannot be undone.
Click Delete.

Nisus Writer Pro moves the file to the Trash where it remains until you choose Empty Trash. You can
retrieve the file returning it to the Glossaries folder as illustrated in Figure 428 on page 407. If you do
this, the next time you restart Nisus Writer Pro the glossary file will once more be available to you.

Advanced Preferences
When you open a document that is not in the native file format of Nisus Writer Pro (.rtf), the
application needs to import the file and convert its formatting. This is required so that Nisus Writer
Pro can display the file correctly and you can work with the document. These different file types,
listed in Figure 429, are:

Microsoft Word 97 (binary .doc)

Microsoft Office 2007 XML (.docx) (also known as Office Open XML)
OpenOffice.org Open Document (.odt)
Nisus Writer Pro uses one of two different file importers to accomplish this task. One is faster at
accomplishing the import, the other offers a more complete import of the features of the imported
file.

Mac OS X (faster)
LibreOffice (more complete)17
In either case, Nisus Writer Pro must load the required file importers in order to accomplish the
task.

Load import files when Nisus Writer Pro starts

You can have Nisus Writer Pro do this at startup, or when you first need to import a file.
Check Load file importers in the background after Nisus Writer starts.
If the importers are loaded in the background, they will likely be ready for use by the time you
want to open a file that requires them. That means, however that the importers will always be
loaded, whether they are used or not. This might waste some your computers resources. If

17

For more information about LibreOffice check their Website.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

409

the importers are not loaded in the background after Nisus Writer Pro starts, they will be
loaded when you first open a file that requires them. This may delay the opening of such files
(the first time you need them).

Choose which import files are used for different file formats
For each of the three file formats listed above, you can choose one or the other two different import
methods, also listed above.

Choose the preferred method from the pop-up menu to the right of each file type listed in the
window as illustrated in Figure 429.

Figure 429
The Advanced preferences of Nisus Writer Pro

410

Customize Your Toolbar

Setting Preferences

Customize Your Toolbar

Many writers like to keep their fingers on the keyboard. For them, Nisus Writer Pro has fully
customizable keyboard shortcuts in the Menu Keys portion of the Nisus Writer Pro preferences (see
Assign Menu Keys to Menu Commands on page 400). Other writers like to use the mouse and/or
trackpad to click buttons, or icons, those little visual representations of commands.
Long ago, back in Classic times (that is the Classic Environment of the pre Mac OS X, not
Classical Antiquity of ancient Greece and Rome), Nisus Writer Classic had a large collection of
buttons, and button bars you could put in various places on your Desktop. Now, in addition to the
standard ability to move icons around on the Toolbar, Nisus Writer Pro, as with most OS X
applications, comes with a number of icons that you can use to customize your Toolbar.

Change the Display of the Toolbar

1.
2.

Choose the menu View > Toolbar > Customize Toolbar.

Choose Icon & Text, Icon Only or Text Only from the Show pop-up menu and/or click Use
Small Icons.

Figure 430
The Customize Toolbar sheet
Drag the icon of the tool you desire from or into the Toolbar to the location you want (or click
and drag the "default set" into the Toolbar)
4. Click Done.
Nisus Writer Pro currently offers a wide variety of icons you can put on the Toolbar including Page
Setup, Save and Customize (the Toolbar), in addition to line and space separators, and others. In
order to save space, some commands names are changed (Back and Forward refer to Previous
Selection and Next Selection respectively).
3.

Add your own custom Toolbar item

You can associate almost any Nisus Writer Pro command with an icon of your choosing and add it
to the Toolbar. This includes commands you create such as those on the Macro menu or the
Window menu. While you cannot add a command from the menu File > Open Recent, you can add
an icon or icons for commands in the Document Manager segment of the File menu. The Document
Manager is explained in detail beginning on page 61.
1. Choose the menu command View > Tooldrawer > Add Custom Toolbar Item.
2. Choose a command from the Add Custom Toolbar Item browser.
3. Give the toolbar item a (shorter) name if you want by typing it into the field labeled The name
of the new toolbar item.
4. Scroll through the available icons (from Nisus Writer Pro and Mac OS X) and select one that
you want.
5. If you do not see an icon that suits your needs, you might have such an image on your hard

Customizing & Automating Solutions

411

drive or on your Clipboard. Click the little Gear menu to the right of Choose an icon for the
toolbar item

Choose Choose Image File and locate the image you want.

Choose Paste From Clipboard.

In either case the new image appears, selected, on the far right edge of the list of icons.
6. Click Add Item.

Figure 431
The Add Custom Toolbar Item dialog with a custom icon added on the right edge
7.

A new icon appears at the far left edge of the Toolbar. The Customize Toolbar sheet appears and
you can drag the new icon to any position on the Toolbar you want as illustrated in Figure 432.
The Add Custom Toolbar Item dialog reappears. This enables you to add more custom icons
before you determine their location on the Toolbar.

412

Customize Your Toolbar

Setting Preferences

Figure 432
Moving the custom icon from the repository to the Toolbar

Beware, that if you assign an icon to a file on the Currently Open, Recently Opened or Recently
Saved submenus of the menu File > Open from Document Manager, that file must appear on the
list. You are probably best served by assigning such files to a special group such as Current Projects
and linking the icon to the files name in that submenu. The Document Manager is explained in detail
beginning on page 61.

Remove your own custom Toolbar item

If you find that you no longer need or want a particular icon on the Toolbar you can remove it.
1. Press 6 or right click your mouse or secondary click your trackpad on that item on the
Toolbar
2. Choose Remove Item from the contextual menu that appears.

Figure 433
The remove icon from toolbar dialog

Click Remove From Toolbar to remove the item but keep it available to restore in the
Customize Toolbar sheet.
Click Delete Permanently to completely remove the icon from your version of the
application.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

413

Create Your Own Group of Palettes for the Tooldrawer

In addition to the ability to remove palettes from the Tooldrawer and move them around within the
various groups supplied by Nisus Writer Pro as explained on page 17, you can add groups as well as
rename or delete groups of palettes.
1. Choose the menu command View > Show Tooldrawer.
2. Click the fifth icon (the right pointing chevrons), the More Palette Groups menus button at
the top of the Tooldrawer and choose New Palette Group from the menu that appears.

Figure 434
The More Palette Groups menu

Figure 435
The Add New Palette Group dialog
3.

Enter the group name you want to use and click OK.

Figure 436
The Palette Library with an empty palette
4.

Choose the menu command Window > Palette Library.

414

Create Your Own Group of Palettes for the Tooldrawer

Setting Preferences

5. Drag the palette(s) you want from the Palette Library into the Tooldrawer.
You can thereafter choose your custom palette group from the top of the Custom Palette Groups
menu inside the Tooldrawer.

Figure 437
Choosing a custom palette group

Save Preferences

Your preferences are saved immediately as you create them. Nisus Writer Pro saves the
Preferences file as you quit the application.

Return All Preferences to Their Original (Shipped) Settings

Mac OS X caches all preferences files in RAM. Changing them on disk has no effect, so deleting the
preferences file will do nothing, Mac OS X will rewrite it from RAM. If you want to reset all your
preferences to their original (shipped) state (except for the Nisus New File which has its own button
in the New File preferences, you must use the Terminal.
1. Quit Nisus Writer Pro.
2. Launch the Terminal.
3. Paste the following command:
defaults delete com.nisus.NisusWriter
4. Press <.
5. Restart Nisus Writer Pro.

Macros, Skimming the Surface

Macros automate repetitive tasks and combine in one command name, a whole collection of tasks
you frequently perform.
It is easy to combine the menu commands of Nisus Writer Pro into your own custom combinations.
These combinations are called Macros. Consider each menu command in Nisus Writer Pro a
micro command. Putting them together, creates a macro.
This portion of the manual describes how to create, run, delete, and save simple macros.

The Nisus Macro Reference is distributed in the download with the application and the User's Guide.
It details all features of the macro language. You can learn more at <http://nisus.com/pro/
macros>.

About Macros ........................................................................................ 415

Running Macros ..................................................................................... 415
Editing Macros ....................................................................................... 416
Saving a Macro ...................................................................................... 416
Deleting Macros ..................................................................................... 416
Undoing a Macro ................................................................................... 416
Working with Macro Files ...................................................................... 417
Before Creating a Macro ........................................................................ 417
Typing Menu Commands ....................................................................... 417
Working with Menu Commands ............................................................. 418
Looping and Accessing Other Macros .................................................... 418

About Macros
Were all familiar with macros on a conceptual level. We know that the directive: Clean up your
room! means to perform a number of smaller tasks:
Clean up Your room
Perform the following tasks in order.
1. Pick books up from floor
2. Put books on shelves
3. Pick clothes up from floor
They may be clean or dirty, Each situation requires a different response. First we evaluate
them, then either continue or do a different task (i.e. another item in the task list).
4. If (the clothes are dirty) then
5. Put clothes in laundry.
6. Else (otherwise),
7. Hang up clothes
You can use Nisus Writer Pro Macros to automate tedious or time-consuming tasks like:

removing accidentally repeated words, sentences or paragraphs

reversing the order of phrases
reorganizing the content of tables of contents.

Use existing macro files and their commands

You can use your macro files if you do any of the following two things:
Keep your macro files in the Macros folder inside the Nisus Writer Application Support folder;
~/Library/Application Support/Nisus Writer/Macros

Or

Choose the menu command Macro > Load Macro.

This copies the macro file to your Macros folder. For more information see Working with Macro
Files on page 417.

Running Macros
Nisus Writer Pro includes a number of ready made macro files. The are available on the Macro
menu.

416

Macros, Skimming the Surface

Open (load) a macro file

1.
2.

Place the macro files you want Nisus Writer Pro to open in the folder called Macros inside the
folder called
~/Library/Application Support/Nisus Writer/Macros
Nisus Writer Pro automatically opens macro files and lists them in alphabetical order in the
Macro menu.
Choose the menu command Macro > Add Macro to Menu from File.
Locate the macro file you want to load using the Open dialog that appears and click OK.

Run a macro

Choose the macro you want to run from the Macro menu.
When running a macro the words Running macro and the macros name appear along the left
edge of the Statusbar.

Stop a macro

Press A . (Command Period) or 0.

Editing Macros
You edit macros just as you edit any other kind of text in Nisus Writer Pro. In fact, you can think of
macros as no more than a to do written list of instructions that you want Nisus Writer Pro to
perform.
As a shortcut, you can press A as you choose a particular macro from the Macro menu to open
the macro file for editing (rather than running) the macro.

Edit a macro
1.
2.

Open the macro you want to edit by pressing A and choosing its name from the Macro menu.
Make any desired changes.

Rename a macro

Use the Finder to rename the file the same way you would rename any other file.
The easiest way to find your Macros in the Finder is to choose the menu command Macro >
Show Macros Folder in Finder.

Saving a Macro
Nisus Writer Pro saves each macro in its own macro file. If you change a macro file and do not
explicitly save it, Nisus Writer Pro asks you whether you want to save it when you quit the program.

Deleting Macros
Remove a macro file from the menu
Use the Finder to move the file to another location on your Hard Drive.
This removes the macros name from the Macro menu. You can restore it (to the menu) by opening
or loading it as explained above.

Delete a macro
Use the Finder to delete the macro file the same way you would delete any other file.
This removes the macros name from the Macro menu, and removes the file from your computer
and it will no longer be available.

Undoing a Macro
You can undo the effects of any macro, even the most complicated one, with a single Undo. Nisus
Writer Pro combines all the actions of a macro into a single Undo command. However, undoing a
macro wont undo operations that are not undoable elsewhere in Nisus Writer Pro, such as closing
or saving a file.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

417

Working with Macro Files

Macros are stored as Nisus Writer Pro documents and have their own icon. Loading a macro makes
Nisus Writer Pro aware of the macro file. It does not automatically open the macro window for
editing.
When you load a macro file, Nisus Writer Pro displays it as a command in the Macro menu.

Before Creating a Macro

Consider these basics before you create a macro

Determine the overall purpose of the macro. Do you plan to use the macro frequently? Or just
once? Will others find the macro useful?

Think of a descriptive name for the macro. Use names that correspond to the operation the
macro performs.

Macro names are not case sensitive.

When writing a macro, the menu items in Nisus Writer Pro should appear as they appear on the
menus. (Neither case nor ellipses () are significant.)

Typing Menu Commands

You can tell Nisus Writer Pro what to do just as you would type out a to do list for yourself.
Anything that Nisus Writer Pro can do by choosing a menu command with the mouse or trackpad
can be done in a macro by typing the name of that command.

Create a new macro file

The following instructions work for either a Perl script or a Nisus Writer Pro command language
macro.
1. Choose the menu command Macro > New Macro.
2. Write the instructions of your macro.
3. Choose the menu command Macro > Save As Macro.
4. In the Save As sheet that appears, notice that the location already points to your Macros folder
~/Library/Application Support/Nisus Writer/Macros
You can save the files elsewhere.
5. Choose Nisus Macro or Nisus Perl Macro from the File Format pop-up menu in the sheet and
click Save.

Save the current macro file under a different name

1.
2.

Press A as you choose a particular macro from the Macro menu to open the macro file for
editing (rather than running) the macro.
Choose the menu command File > Save As to give the macro file a new name.

Case sensitivity in Menu Command Dialect macros

You do not need to be precise about using upper or lowercase characters because Nisus Writer Pro
pays no attention to them. If a menu command appears in a submenu, type only the command of
the submenu. You can ignore ellipses, but be sure to include any spaces in the commands name.

A simple to do list
The two commands that follow, when put together in sequence as a macro will make UPPERCASE
all but the initial letters of every word in a selection no matter what the case of the characters was
before
To Capitalized
To Toggled Case

Writing an invalid command in a macro

If you use a command that does not exist or you spell the name incorrectly, Nisus Writer Pro beeps
and presents an alert informing you that the command does not exist. The alert identifies the line of
the error and lets you choose to stop, continue or open the macro to edit it.

418

Macros, Skimming the Surface

Figure 438
The unknown macro command alert
Menu commands sometimes have the same name but perform different actions and belong to
different menus. This only happens if you create menu commands (macros, file names, or window
names) that conflict with the standard commands (or with other macros). To resolve conflicts in a
macro, precede the command by the menu name followed by a colon. For example you may have a
macro that does something special when you copy selections and have named it Copy. In such a
case, writing Macro:Copy in your instructions will call that macro.

Working with Menu Commands

To use a menu command in a macro, simply type its name on a separate line. For example, the
macro instructions below selects all text in a document, changes the font to Lucida Grande, and the
style to bold
Select All
Lucida Grande
Bold
To include arguments in Menu Command macro instructions see Macros, the Deeper Workings on
page 419.

Looping and Accessing Other Macros

A macro can access any other macro in the Macros menu. Invoking one macro from within another
is like running any other menu command. Write the name of the macro to be invoked on its own
separate line in the macro performing the call.

Call one macro from another

A Nisus Writer Pro macro can call any command on the menus of Nisus Writer Pro. This includes
other macros and open files.

Write the macro name on its own line in the macro (UPPERCASE or lowercase is not significant
when writing a menu commands name).

If your macros name conflicts with another menu command, write this command as
Macro:MacroName.

Macros, the Deeper Workings

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language
Writing macros is a form of programming.

The Nisus Macro Reference is distributed in the download with the application and the User's Guide.
It details all features of the macro language. You can learn more at <http://nisus.com/pro/
macros>.
The Nisus Writer Pro macro language consists of various sets of instructions. Each individual macro
is made up of a list of these instructions that run in sequence (from top to bottom).
The simplest macros are made of Nisus Writer Pro menu commands the actual commands you
see in the menus as illustrated in Working with Menu Commands on 307. While most of these
standard menu commands do exactly, and only, what they do when you choose them individually
from the menus, some can accept arguments that extend their meaning and capabilities.
Additional instructions exist that enable you to assign values (or to use a non-technical term
meanings) to variables. Other instructions offer the ability to direct the macro to branch off in
different directions if certain conditions are met.
Each individual paragraph of a macro file represents one complete instruction.
Nisus Writer Pro ignores any line in a macro that begins with the # character. You can use these
lines as comments to explain what the macro does. So, for example you might write the macro in
Working with Menu Commands on page 418 (of course you can put your comments either before
or after the command they deal with):
#Select the entire document.
Select All
#Apply the font Lucida Grande.
Lucida Grande
#Make it all bold.
Bold
The Nisus Writer Pro macro language has two dialects:

Menu Command Dialect (explained on page 419)

Perl Dialect (explained on page 435).

Old and New Macros

Nisus Writer Pro macros have many new features. These differ from the capabilities of Perl macros
which are also available in Nisus Writer Express (and Nisus Writer Pro). Nisus Writer Pro macros
can include any number of Perl and Menu Command blocks18. Perl macros can only use Nisus
Header blocks to execute some menu command lines, while the remainder must be Perl code.
With the Nisus Writer Pro macro language, the old Nisus Perl macros of Nisus Writer Express are no
longer needed. You can continue to use Perl macros for backward compatibility. It is difficult to
preserve text and paragraph attributes in Perl macros, but Nisus Writer Pro macros, using the
Menu Command Dialect, can easily preserve and control almost all text attributes.

Menu Command Dialect

The Menu Command dialect makes available every command of Nisus Writer Pro. It can extend
certain menu commands with additional options to include parameter arguments which tell the
program how to perform a particular menu commands action.

Many such arguments must be inside quotes (as explained in Using parameters with menu
commands below) unless they are a number, or a string variable.
When these parameters are omitted the menu commands will work just as if you had chosen that
command from the menu using the mouse or trackpad or a keyboard shortcut.
Several other additional instructions, including

18

looping (while)

That is, a statement block or code block, a unique message that tells Nisus Writer Pro what to do. It may be
as short as a one-line paragraph or consist of a collection of nested tasks.

420

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language

Macros, the Deeper Workings

control (if)

variables
are used in the Menu Command Dialect.
The Menu Command Dialect does not currently support any calculations. Any calculations must be
done in Perl blocks with the result returned to the Menu Command Dialect. Nonetheless, Nisus
Writer Pro comes with a folder of calculation macros that you can use and study.

Using menu commands

All menu commands are case insensitive.

Menu commands that are unique you can call as they appear on the menus:
Bold

You can call each menu command using the full menu path with colon separators between its
parts:
Format:Underline:Single
must be distinguished from:
Format:Strikethrough:Single
All the standard menu commands of Nisus Writer Pro function exactly the same as they do if you
had chosen them from the menu using the mouse or trackpad or a keyboard shortcut and require
no further explanation.

Using parameters with menu commands

Many Menu Commands accept a variety of parameters, that limit or definethe scope of that
particular command, as arguments. Arguments must beseparated from one another using commas
and many of them must be insidequotes. An argument can take one of the following forms:

An integer value
eg:7, 49 or 318.
Nisus Writer Pro does not currently support decimal numbers.

A string literal surrounded in single (straight, dumb) quotation marks,

eg:'hello'.
Single-quoted strings are not interpreted or modifiedin any way. The only exception is when
you want to include a single quote inside the string itself. You must escape the quote by
preceding it with a backslash, eg: 'don\'t'.

A variable name, which is always prefixed with a dollar sign,

eg:$myVariable.

An interpolated string literal, which uses double quotes,

eg:"hello $name". Interpolated means that the string is first scanned for special character
sequences which arereplaced before passing the value to the command. The kinds
ofreplacements that occur are similar to those used by Perl and include the following:

Customizing & Automating Solutions

421

Interpolated String Literals

Special Text

Replacement

\n

Newline character.

\t

Tab character.

\\

Single backslash character (eg: "\").

\x

The next two characters are treated as a Unicode code point (in hexadecimal).

\u

The next four characters aretreated as aUnicode code point(in hexadecimal).

\U

The next eight characters aretreated as aUnicode code point(in hexadecimal).

$varName

Current value of the named variable.

Table 34
Interpolated String Literals
Some controlling instructions (like While loops) can also take another commandas an argument.
However, these are special cases, so commands generally cannotbe used as arguments.

Examples
New '~/Documents/template.rtf'
This is equivalent to the following two lines:

$pathToTemplateFile = '~/Documents/template.rtf'
New $pathToTemplateFile
The following selects the cell which is the third down and the fourth across in a table:

Select Table Cell 3, 4

The next three lines replace the word NAME (case insensitive, which is the default) with Arthur
Jones:

$firstName = 'Arthur'
$secondName = 'Jones'
Find and Replace 'NAME', "$firstName $lastName"

Variables
You define variables in menu-command macros simply by assigning them a value. For instance:

$age = 24
Such variables are treated as pre-defined Perl Globals in every Perl block within the same macro.
Variables can also be assigned by using an instruction, for example:

$name = Prompt Input 'What is your name?'

More about instructions to follow.

422

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language

Macros, the Deeper Workings

Flow of control
Conditional branches
Very simple conditionals are supported in the menu command dialect. The following is the if
construct:

If expression1
code1
elsif expression2
code2
...
elsif expressionN
codeN
else
codeFinal
end
Explained in English:
If expression1 is true, then do code1.
If it is false (elseif) check to see if there is an expression2 and possibly do code2 (or
some other task expressionN.
Or else, if no expression matches, do codeFinal.
All the blocks are optional.
The Boolean equality testing operators are the same as those that Perl uses for numeric values.
Therefore Nisus Menu Command Dialect must implicitly distinguish between numeric compares
and string compares. Thus if both strings are numbers, comparison is numeric, otherwise it is
string comparison. In the menu command dialect:
==

checks to see if the two values are equal

!=

checks to see if the two values are not equal

<

means less than

<=

means less than or equal to

>

means greater than

>=
means greater than or equal to
If either value given to the operator is a string, then a case sensitive string comparison is made.
Here's an example:

$name = Prompt Options "What is your name?", "", "OK", "Bob", "Greg",
"Dan", "Victor"
if $name == "Bob"
Prompt "Hello Bob."
elsif $name == "Greg"
Prompt "Hello Greg."
else
Prompt "Never heard of you."
end
There is one limitation on the binary operators: they can only operate on variables and literal
values, not directly on command return values. For instance, these are legal:

$isTrue = 3 > 1
$isEqual = $name == "Whatever"
But this is illegal:

$isTrue = "Bob" == Prompt Input "What is your name?"

Looping command
While expression
loop body
End
As long as expression is a true value (defined just as in Perl, that is any non-zero value is true, all
others are false including zero or an empty value) the loop body will continue to execute
repeatedly. An example macro that will toggle the superscript of all note references in the
document:

Customizing & Automating Solutions

423

# Reset the selection to the start of the document

Select All
Select Start
# As long as we find note references, superscript them
While Select Next Note Reference
Format:Baseline:Superscript
End
if Boolean test in the Menu Command dialect is limited to testing for integer values and strings,
therefore a Perl block must be used when a While loop needs to test for a real (non-integer) numeric
value, or when any arithmetic calculations need to be performed. The

Comparison warning
In the menu command dialect, comparisons are made numerically if the values being tested are
both numbers and are assigned to the variables without using quotes or are used in a binary
compare without quotes. When a number is assigned to a variable using quotes, or quoted in a
binary compare, it is assumed to be text and any compares will be textual. This is different from
Perl where all values are always stored as text until they are used in a numeric context. Therefore
Perl must use different binary operators for numeric and string compares, whereas the Nisus Menu
Command Dialect uses the same operators for both numeric and string compares.
Additionally, in the Nisus menu command dialect only whole numbers (positive or negative) can be
compared or stored in numeric variables and no arithmetical operations are possible - those must
be carried out in a Perl block.

Document operations
This section details the commands that operate on the documents as a whole. Arguments are
shown in italics.

New [templatePath]
Opens a new document. If a template path is provided will use the given file as a template.
If no template is provided the Nisus New File is used.

Save
Saves the document to its present location. If the document is unsaved then the user is
prompted.

Save As [path]
Saves the document to the specified path. If the path is not provided, then the user will be
prompted. Subsequent simple Save commands save to the specified path.

Save To [path]
Saves the document to the specified path, but maintains its current location, so that the
next plain Save command saves it in the current location. Again, if the path is missing, the
user is prompted.

Open path
Opens the file at the given path in Nisus Writer.

Open URL url

Opens the URL in the most appropriate application. Eg: http://www.nisus.com will open
in Safari (or your default Web browser).

Environment properties
In the following examples, the names of variables on the left of the equals sign, which store the
respective property, can of course, be any names you want. The right side of the equals sign uses
reserved words only.

Macro document values

The following examples illustrate how to obtain the respective macro document (that is, the
document containing the macro code) properties.

$macro_file_name = Macro Property "file name"

The bare file name is, as you would expect, the file name without extension.

$bare_macro_file_name = Macro Property "file name without extension"

$pathToMacroFile = Macro Property "file path"
The file path is relative to the users home directory, that is it begins with "~/"

$path_to_macro = Macro Property "absolute file path"

424

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language

Macros, the Deeper Workings

This is the complete path, starting with the disk name.

User Property "macros folder path"

This returns the full path to the folder where the users macros are stored (in their home
directory).

Current document values

The following examples illustrate how to obtain the current documents properties (that is, the
document whose window is frontmost).

$pathToCurrentDocument = Document Property "file name"

$bare_file_name = Document Property "file name without extension"
$relative_file_path = Document Property "file path"
$path_to_document = Document Property "absolute file path"

Current Nisus Writer application values

The following examples illustrate how to obtain the currently running Nisus Writer Pro application.

$where_am_I = Application Property "file path"

$version_number = Application Property "version"
$detailed_version_number = Application Property "long version"
The following returns the full path to the folder where Nisus Writer Pros Document Manager stores
files.

User Property "document manager folder path"

Current System version

The following example illustrates how to obtain the system version number.

$system_version_number = System Property "version"

Current Home folder

The following returns the full path to the users Home folder.

User Property "home folder path"

Modifying text
In addition to allowing bare menu commands such as Format:Bold, you can also use the Menu
instruction to explicitly invoke a menu:

Menu menuItemPath
This allows for variable menu paths as for example:

$myPath = "Bold"
Menu $myPath
These two lines when executed are equivalent to using the Bold command from the menu.

$myText = "testing text insertion"

Insert Text $myText
Replaces the currently selected text with the text "testing text insertion". The inserted text
uses the attributes that were applied to the selected text. The inserted text remains selected
so you can apply other attributes and styles to it.

Insert Newline
Replaces the currently selected text with a newline (Return character). The inserted newline
remains selected so you can apply paragraph styles to it.

Insert Attributed Text text

Replaces the currently selected text with the text provided. The inserted text will have the
attributes that are applied to the text defined in the macro itself. See Advanced macro
notes on page 429 for some details on attribute handling in strings. The inserted text
remains selected so you can apply other attributes and styles to it.

Selection note
In all three of the above Insert commands, if in the command you substitute the word Insert with
the word Type, the inserted text or newline is not selected and the insertion point is at the end of
the inserted text. (That is for the commands Type Text, Type Newline, and Type Attributed
Text.)

Read Selection
This instruction returns the contents of the currently selected text (eg: for placement into a
variable) as for example $my_text = Read Selection

Customizing & Automating Solutions

425

Write Selection text

Currently this behaves exactly the same as Insert Attributed Text. In the future we
may support replacing a multipart selection with a list variable. Right now it is offered
merely for symmetry with Read Selection.

Insert Table rowCount, columnCount, [style]

Inserts a new table with the specified number of rows and columns. The style argument
can be the string "plain", "row headers", "column headers", or "both headers".

Bookmark
Bookmark As name
The first command creates an auto-named bookmark and applies it to the currently
selected text. The second creates the bookmark with the specified name.

Changing the selection

Select All
Selects all the content in the document.

Select Start
Select End
Places the caret (insertion point) at the start or end of the current selection respectively.
The way to make sure the insertion point is at the start of the document is to first Select All
then Select Start. Similarly for placing the insertion point at the end of the document.

Select Bookmark name

Selects the text with the specified bookmark.

Select
Select
Select
Select
Select

Table number
Image number
Note number
Note Reference number
Page number

Selects the Nth object (eg: table, image, etc) in the document, that is, starting the count
with the very first object in the document, so this is not dependent on the position of the
insertion point or cursor. Eg: Select Image 2 will select the 2nd image in the document.

Select
Select
Select
Select

Next
Next
Next
Next

Table
Image
Note
Note Reference

Selects the next object (table, image, etc) that appears after the current selection. These
instructions return false if there is no next object.

Select Table Cell row, column

Selects the table cell with the given coordinates. If the selection currently rests inside a
table, then the cell is selected in that table. If no table is currently selected then selects the
cell in the first table after the selection.

selected storage length

Returns the number of characters in the text storage (eg: document body, header, table cell,
etc) that contains the first selection.

selection count
Returns the number of non-contiguous selections in the document. Returns 1 if there is a
single selection or a zero length selection (the caret). NOTE: if more than one text storage is
selected (eg: multiple table cells) then this count only includes selections in the text storage
containing the first selection.

selection location
Returns the index (1-based) of the first character in the selection. If the selection is zero
characters in length then this returns the index of the character that follows the caret. This
command optionally takes a (1-based) index that specifies selection's location to return (eg:
the 2nd selection in the document).

selection length
Returns the number of characters in the selection. Optionally takes a (1-based) index that
specifies which selection's length to return.

selection row index

Returns the (1-based) row index of the first table selection.

426

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language

Macros, the Deeper Workings

selection column index

Returns the (1-based) column index of the first table selection.

selection row count

Returns the number of rows selected by the first table selection. This returns at least one,
even if the table cell is not fully selected (eg: only returns zero if the selection is not in a
table). Note: this is the total number ofrows the selection intersects (eg: this command will
return 2 if the caret rests in a cell that spans 2 table rows).

selection column count

Returns the number of columns selected by the first table selection (see details for row
count).

selected table row count

Returns the total number of rows in the first selected table.

selected table column count

Returns the total number of columns in the first selected table.

set selection location

Sets the (1-based) index of the first character that should be contained in the selection. If
the index is out of bounds, raises an error. Does not alter the length of the selection unless
the new location would place the endpoint of the selection out of bounds, in which case the
selection is clipped to be legal.

set selection length

Sets the number of characters contained in the selection. Does not change the location of
the selection. Raises an error if the new length would cause the selection to be out of
bounds.

select relative table cell

Takes two arguments, the number of rows to move forward by and the number of columns.
You may specify negative numbers to move backwards. Returns true if the move is legal (a
valid cell exists), otherwise returns false and leaves the selection unchanged.

set selection
Takes two parameters, the location of the first character in the selection and the number of
characters to include. This raises an error if the requested selection is out of bounds.

Clipboards
New Clipboard name
Delete Clipboard name
Creates or deletes the respective named Clipboard.

Switch to Clipboard name

Makes the named Clipboard the active (current) Clipboard.

Edit Clipboard [name]

Opens the specified Clipboard in its window for editing. If a name is omitted then the
current Clipboard is opened.

Read Clipboard [name]

Returns the contents of the named Clipboard as a string. If name is omitted then the
current Clipboard contents are read.
This means that $my_text = Read Clipboard [name] stores the returned text into the
variable $my_text.

Write Clipboard contents, [name]

Puts contents into the named Clipboard. If the name is omitted, then the current Clipboard
is used.

User interaction
Prompt message, [detail], [defaultButton], [otherButton]
Displays a message to the user. This instruction returns (that is you can assign it to your
variable) either the string value of defaultButton or otherButton, depending on which
the user clicked. If otherButton is omitted, then the user has only one button to click. The
message is displayed in the dialog in bold, as a title and the text in the details is placed in
plain format, below the title. The texts in the defaultButton and otherButton are displayed as
the respective button titles.

Prompt Input message, [detail], [button], [defaultText]

Customizing & Automating Solutions

427

Displays a message to the user and allows them to type in some free-form text. This
instruction returns the text that the user has entered. Only one button is displayed for the
user to click when they have finished.

Prompt Options message, [detail], [button], [option1] [optionN]

Displays a message and has the user choose one from a list of options. The return value is
the option they chose. An example:

$color = Prompt Options 'Favorite color?', '', 'OK', 'Red', 'Green',

'Blue'
If the user chooses Red, the text Red is returned and stored in the variable $color.

Find and replace

Find text, [options]
Finds and selects the given text. Options is a string, each letter turning on a separate
feature. This list is documented after the replace command:

Find and Replace find, replace, [options]

Finds the given text, replaces it with the new text, and selects it.

The list of find options

SDmbol

Meaning of sDmbol

Use options currently set in Find/Replace window. You can still add additional options as you
like.

Copy text/options into the Find/Replace window instead of doing an actual find and replace.

Find or replace all instances, instead of just the very next one.

Search backwards (reverse).

PowerFind expressions

PowerFind Pro Expressions

Case insensitive search, the default setting.

Search reverse (backwards).

Limit search and replace to current selection.

Search is text attribute sensitive.

Replacement text is attribute sensitive, that is takes its attributes from the replace text.

Display the number of matches/replacements to the user (verbose).

Whole word.

Wrap around, that is re-start the search from the start of document when the end is reached,

the default setting.

Table 35
Find/Replace macro option symbols
Each option letter can be preceded with a minus to turn off the given option. By default i and
W (case insensitive and wrap around search) are the only options that are turned on.

Embedding Perl
You can nest Perl instructions inside a menu macro using a Perl block.

Begin Perl
Perl code
End
Just following the Begin Perl command of a Perl block (as illustrated above) you can specify Nisus
Writer Directives the same way as in Nisus Express Perl macros. Each Perl block can have its own
different such directives. These directives specify thelocation from where to get the input and where
to put the output. For example:

428

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language

Macros, the Deeper Workings

#Nisus Macro Block

#source front selection
#destination front selection
#End Nisus Macro Block
The instruction above tells the Perl block to use the front window selection as the default
source (STDIN) and front selection as the destination (STDOUT).
Without any specifications, the default output (all simple print commands) go to a new
document window.
Variables that have been defined by your macro are automatically available as Perl scalars.
Note however that the reverse is not true. That is, variables defined in your Perl code are
strictly local to that Perl block and so are not available outside that block of Perl. However,
changes made inside the Perl block to the variables defined outside the Perl block are
reflected outside.
The following is an example which alters the contents of the current Clipboard, replacing by
'Nisus' all instances of the text you type into the dialog:

$name = Prompt Input 'What is your name?'

$contents = Read Clipboard
Begin Perl
$contents =~ s/$name/Nisus/g;
End
Write Clipboard $contents
The following illustrates how to use a Perl block to have the While loop continue until a particular
string value is obtained:

$continue = 1
While $continue
$response = Prompt "Hello World", "details", "Stop", "Continue"
Begin Perl
if ($response eq "Stop") ( $continue = 0; )
End
End
The above macro will loop until you click the Second Button

Useful blocks for data entry

The following accepts user input of a valid numeric value only and keeps asking for the right value
if the entry is not a correct decimal or whole number. It can be modified for any specified type of
entry value by changing the highlighted portions.

$not_done = 1
$principal = '$120,000.00'
$prompt = "Enter principal in dollars."
While $not_done
$principal = Prompt Input Dollar Principal, $prompt, Done,
$principal
Begin Perl
$principal =~s/[\$,]+//g;#remove commas and dollar signs
$not_done = 0 if (($principal =~/^\d*\.?\d*$/) and
($principal !~ /^\s*$/));#This checks if it is a decimal number and
it is not an empty string.
if ($not_done) # If the entry is correct $bool is zero,
which means false, so this is not executed.
()$prompt = 'Your entry is not a number. Please correct it.';

}
End
End
The above macro block is used in the Mortgage Payment Calculation macro supplied.
The following is the same block but adjusted to accept only alphabetic character strings with other
conditions. Compared to the previous one, the first highlighted line is removed. The second
highlighted line is simplified to check for alphabetic characters and white space characters.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

429

$not_done = 1
$name = 'Your Name'
$prompt = "Enter your name please."
While $not_done
$name = Prompt Input Your Name, $prompt, Done, $name
Begin Perl
$not_done = 0 if (($name =~/^[a-z ]+$/i) and ($name ne 'Your
Name') and (length($name) > 1));#This checks if it is alphabetic and
not the default text and more than one character long.
if ($not_done) #If the entry is correct, $not_done is
zero, which means false, so this is not executed.
()$prompt = 'Your entry must only be alphabetic. Please correct it.';

}
End
End

Advanced macro notes

There is only one Menu Command looping construct at present. It is however very functional
allowing you to nest within it, any number of Perl blocks and Menu Command blocks.
Presently there are no calculation possibilities within a Menu Command block. Therefore all
calculations require a Perl block.
If you want to create a Menu command loop that never terminates until you use Command . to force
it to stop, begin the loop with:

While 1
All text attributes are removed from string variables (e.g.: $message = "Hello World") if any Perl
block changes the value of that variable during its execution. So when attributes are imported to
preserve, make sure the variable is not altered by any intervening Perl blocks before being inserted
into a document.
Remember that the Insert Text command uses the attributes of the selection to insert the text and
the Insert Attributed Text command inserts a string using the text attributes of the inserted text.

430

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language

Macros, the Deeper Workings

Included macros
The following macros are included with the application. More may be added in the future. You can
check the Nisus web site periodically for additional macros.
<http://www.nisus.com/pro/macros/>
Application
Manage Macro File Access
Macros can request access to files outside the sandbox and later
restore that access. This macro allows the user to rescind any
previously granted file access.
Show All Menu Key Shortcuts
This macro produces a document which lists all keyboard shortcuts
(Menu Keys). The macro requires Nisus Writer Pro Version 2.1.
Calculation
Average Column

This macro evaluates the average of the column of numbers,

starting at the current cell and placing the results in the last cell of
the column. Note: empty cells are not counted so they do not affect
the average, but cells with a zero in them are counted and they do
affect the average.
Be sure to have an empty cell in the column otherwise the last cell
will be overwritten with the result. Its contents will not be summed.
Place the insertion point in the first cell of the column to be
averaged.
Average Row
This macro evaluates the average of the row of numbers, starting at
the current cell and placing the results in the last cell of the row.
Note: empty cells are not counted so they do not affect the average,
but cells with a zero in them are counted and they do affect the
average.
Be sure to have an empty cell in the row otherwise the last cell will
be overwritten with the result and its contents will not be summed.
Place the insertion point in the first cell of the row to be averaged.
Average Rows and Columns
Place the insertion point in the first cell, that is the first row and the
first column cell.
Each row and each column of the table will be averaged, with the
rows being averaged first. Each average will be placed in the last cell
of each row and column respectively. That means that the last cell,
the bottom right corner cell, will contain the average of all row
averages.
Those who need the order of averaging reversed can change the
order of averaging in this macro and then the last cell will contain
the average of all column averages.
It is, however, important to note that this macro uses two other
macros: the average row and the average column macros. If you
change either of these, you may stop the functioning of this one.
Evaluate Selection
Evaluates the selected text based on the operator(s) (+, -, *, /, etc.)
in the selection and places the result to the right of and equal sign
following the last item in the selection.
Mortgage Calculator
Calculates the monthly payment on the specified principal for the
given interest rate.
StdDev Column
This macro evaluates the standard deviation of the column of
numbers, starting at the current cell and placing the results in the
last cell of the column. Note: empty cells are not counted so they do
not affect the standard deviation, but cells with a zero in them are
counted and they do affect the standard deviation.
Be sure to have an empty cell in the column otherwise the last cell
will be overwritten with the result. Its contents will not be summed.
Place the insertion point in the first cell of the column to be
evaluated.
StdDev Row
This macro evaluates the standard deviation of the row of numbers,
starting at the current cell and placing the results in the last cell of
the row. Note: empty cells are not counted so they do not affect the
standard deviation, but cells with a zero in them are counted and
they do affect the standard deviation.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

431

Be sure to have an empty cell in the row otherwise the last cell will
be overwritten with the result and its contents will not be summed.
Place the insertion point in the first cell of the row to be evaluated.
StdDev Rows and Columns
Place the insertion point in the first cell, that is the first row and the
first column cell.
Each row and each column of the table will be evaluated, with the
rows being evaluated first. Each standard deviation will be placed in
the last cell of each row and column respectively. That means that
the last cell, the bottom right corner cell, will contain the standard
deviation of all row standard deviations.
Those who need the order of averaging reversed can change the
order of evaluation blocks in this macro and then the last cell will
contain the standard deviation of all column standard deviations.
It is important to note that this macro uses two other macros: the
StdDev Row and the StdDev Column macros. If you change either of
those, you may stop the functioning of this one.
Sum Clipboard
Sums the numbers copied to the Clipboard by interpreting any
white space, including new lines, between numbers as a plus sign.
The result is placed at the insertion point.
Sum Column
Sums the column of numbers starting at the current cell and places
the result in the last cell of the column.
Be sure to have an empty cell at the bottom of the column otherwise
the last cell will be overwritten with the result and its contents will
not be summed.
Place the insertion point in the first cell of the column to be added.
Sum Row
Sums the row of numbers starting at the current cell and places the
result in the last cell of the row.
Be sure to have a last empty cell in the row otherwise the last cell
will be overwritten with the result. Its contents will not be summed.
Place the insertion point in the first cell of the row to be added.
Sum Rows and Columns
Place the insertion point in the first cell, that is the first row and the
first column cell.
Each row and each column of the table will be summed, with the
rows being summed first. Each sum will be placed in the last cell of
each row and column respectively. That means that the last cell, the
bottom right corner cell, will contain the sum of all row sums.
If you need the order of summing reversed you can change the order
of summing in this macro and then the last cell will contain the
sum of all column sums.
It is important to note that this macro uses two other macros: the Sum
Row and the Sum Column macros. If you change either of those, you
may stop the functioning of this one.
Sum Selection
Sums the selected numbers by interpreting any white space,
including new lines, between numbers as a plus sign.
The result is placed on a new line at the end of the selection and
bolded.
Clipboards
Clear All Clipboards
Restore All Clipboards

This clears all Clipboards of their contents.

This reads previously saved Clipboard contents from file(s) created
by Save All Clipboards and places the contents onto the
Clipboards.
Rotate Clipboards
Treats Clipboard 0 through 4 as a circular stack (Clipboard IDs are
from 1 through 5) and rotates the contents of each clipboard moving
them to the next clipboard in a cyclic way. This means that
whatever clipboard you are using, each time you use this macro it
will move the contents of Clipboard 1 to Clipboard 0 and Clipboard
0 to Clipboard 4 and so on, without losing any Clipboard data.
The macro Rotate Clipboards in Reverse moves clipboard contents
in the reverse direction.
Rotate Clipboards in Reverse
Treats Clipboard 0 through 4 as a circular stack and rotates the
contents of each Clipboard moving them to the next Clipboard in a

432

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language

Save All Clipboards

Macros, the Deeper Workings

cyclic way. This means that whatever Clipboard you are using, each
time you use this macro it will move the contents of your current
Clipboard to the next Clipboard, without losing any Clipboard data.
(Contents of Clipboard 0 moved to Clipboard 1, , Clipboard 4
moved to Clipboard 0.)
The macro Rotate Clipboards moves Clipboard contents in the
forward direction.
Saves the current Clipboards in the folder named
"SavedClipboards" in the "Clipboards' folder inside the Macros
folder. In addition this macro must be located within the same
"Clipboards" folder.
Use the Restore All Clipboards macro to put back into the
Clipboard the saved data.

Document
Compare Documents

Compares the two frontmost documents and produces a new

document showing the differences using various formatting cues.
By default this macro assumes the topmost document the newer of
the two. Styles and attributes of the documents are ignored- the
comparison is plain text only.
Compare Duplicate Text Scans the active document for sentences/paragraphs that are
duplicates. For a match to occur, the sentence/paragraph must be
exactly the same, except for punctuation and whitespace. When
finished, a copy of the document will be opened with a list of crossreferences to duplicated content.
Compress Files
Allows the user to select one or more files to compress as a zip
archive, optionally secured by a password. Because Mac OS X can
now decompress even password protected ZIP archives there is no
Decompress Files macro.
Create Email Address List (v2)
Extracts a list of email addresses from the selected text/document.
Create Misspelled Word List
Gathers a list of all misspelled words from the active selection(s). If
there is no visible selection, the macro processes the whole
document.
Create Word Frequency List (v2)
Extracts a list of all non-common words from the selected text/
document and lists their frequency.
Create Word List (v4)
Creates a word list in a new document
Join Files
Creates a new document by joining all documents in a chosen
folder. The macro appends a page break between each file not
already ending in a break.
Save All Documents
Save all open document windows.
Sort Open Document Windows
This macro sorts all open document windows by file properties,
such as Date Modified - newest first, Date Modified - oldest
first, Date Created - newest first, Date Created - oldest first,
Name (A-Z), Name (Z-A) and only affects documents saved to
disk.

Editing
Add or Remove Blank Lines
If blank lines appear in the selection this macro removes them. If
the selection includes multiple paragraphs with no empty
paragraphs between them, this macro adds one return per
paragraph.
Cleanup Punctuation
This macro is a set of find and replace statements that attempts to
clean-up various obvious errors. However, sometimes they may alter
what you want. For example if you use multiple question marks
(????) or exclamation points (!!!!) or periods (.) to make a point,
each such multiple sequence will be replaced by a single character
of that sequence. You can comment-out any line which you do not
want to operate on your document
Convert Notes to Text This macro takes all footnotes/endnotes in your document and
converts them to regular text. The notes will no longer be numbered

Customizing & Automating Solutions

433

automatically or appear in a separate editing area. The converted

document will be opened as a copy of the existing document.
Font Preview Selected Text
This macro takes the text selected in Nisus Writer Pro and shows
you how it would look in a variety of fonts in a new document
window. It also enables you to apply that font to the selected text
from the new window with one click.
Form Paragraph
Combines selected lines (even those non-contiguously selected) into
one paragraph.
Justify Fully Arabic
This macro works on every paragraph in the selection. It manually
inserts kashida characters so the last line of each paragraph
appears fully justified.
Justify Fully Arabic (remove kashidas)
Removes kashidas from the selection that may have been inserted
by running the Justify Fully Arabic macro.
Justify Fully English
Adds spaces to every paragraph in the selection. It manually inserts
space characters so the last line of each paragraph appears fully
justified.
Justify Fully English (remove spaces)
Removes spaces from the selection that may have been inserted by
running the Justify Fully English macro.
Parenthesize Selection This macro places parentheses () around the selection.
Quote Selection
This macro places quotes: around the selection.
Reverse Text
Reverses characters in all selections. Note: does not pay attention to
composed character sequences (for example: base char + accent),
which is intentional because this is likely to be run on Nisus Writer
Classic text.
Zap Gremlins
This macro deletes all gremlins in the selection/document. See the
Glossary (page 481) for a definition of gremlin.
Find

Find All and Show Context

This macro does a Find All on the frontmost document using find
options set in the Find/Replace window and displays the results
along with their context creating a concordance.
If the find mode is set to PowerFind or if Attribute Sensitive is
checked, the macro uses the find expression in the Find/Replace
window.
You can choose a single find result to select it.
You can send all the results to Clipboard.
You can create a new file gathering all sentences containing the
found string.
You can bookmark all the results.
The results are preceded by page number and line number. When
the latter cannot be retrieved, the kind of text object is reported.
Find Ignoring Diacriticals
Uses the current text of the Find/Replace window and finds
matches ignoring Arabic diacritical marks.
Find in All Open Documents
Uses the current contents and settings of the Find/Replace window
and does a Find All in all open documents.
Replace in All Open Documents
Uses the current contents and settings of the Find/Replace window
and does a Replace All in all open documents. Before the
replacement is made, the user is warned about the replacement.
Select By Attributes
This macro will show you a list of character attributes at the
insertion point (or of the first character in the selection).
Check all attributes you need, e.g. Font Size: 12 and Italic: On,
and click Where
Then, you will be asked to specify the find scope. Check all text
areas to be included, for example: body and footnote, and click
Select All.
All text portions meeting the criteria, i.e. Font Size: 12 and Italic:
On in body and footnote, will be selected.

434

The Nisus Writer Pro Macro Language

Select By Font
Select By Language
Select By Style
Templates
Find and Replace All
Perl Macro Header

Macros, the Deeper Workings

This macro will prompt a list of all used fonts, with which you can
select all text portions in a given font(s).
This macro will show you a list of all languages used in the
document, from which you can choose whose corresponding text
should be selected.
This macro lists up all Character/Paragraph/List styles used in the
frontmost document and enables you to select all text portions in
style(s) of your choice.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

435

Writing Perl Scripts

You can write your own macros using the well-known Perl script language. Perl is a very powerful
scripting language, particularly for manipulating text. It includes the full power of Regular
Expressions for finding and changing text based on patterns. Perhaps the most common form of a
Macro simply reads each text line, modifies it where necessary and writes it back to where it came
from.
A Perl Macro cannot work directly on text in a document. Instead, it must first copy the text from a
document, change it and then write it back to the same or a different document. In those cases
where the attributes of the changed text are not important, the results are the same as if the
changes were done directly to the text in the document. However, because Perl Macros are not yet
sensitive to the attributes of text, when the text is copied from the document all attributes are
removed. In practical terms this means if the text being changed has multiple fonts, styles or sizes
before the change, after the change all such attributes will be the same. Although Nisus Writer Pro
provides a way to maintain formatting when changing text in a Perl Macro (through the option of
including the RTF formatting in the copied text) only the advanced Perl connoisseurs will be able to
take advantage of the feature.
Perl scripts are commonly written to read the input from a disk file and write the output to a disk
file. Perl Macros can be written that way too. However, it is much more fun (and lets you see the
results immediately for possible adjustment) to watch the Macro at work on the currently open
document.

The recommended way, to structure Perl Macros

Perl macros are plain text files that contain Perl code.
Along with an optional block of directives that tell Nisus Writer Pro what data to send to the Perl
script and what to do with data sent back from it. Directives are placed, one per line, beginning with
a # character so that Perl will treat them as comments.
Perl uses "<STDIN>" to designate the default input and simple print statement will print to the
default output. If you dont re-define the default input, it is assumed to be the active document
window. The default output (unless you re-define it) is a new document which will automatically
open when there is any output printed by a Macro. You can use the first lines of a Perl Macro, called
the Header to re-define these defaults.
The header can be additionally used for executing Nisus Writer Pro Menu Macro commands. This is
quite useful for preparing for the execution of a Perl macro and for finishing off after a Perl macro
executes.
You can define the default input to be any one of front, next, Clipboard, and none. Front and next
refer to active open windows. Clipboard is obvious and none means that no data will be available as
default input. If you omit the default specification, the contents of the current active window will be
sent to the Perl Macro as the default input. This sending occurs whether you will be using it or not,
and so if you are not going to be needing a default input (for example, you might be reading a disk
file to get your input, or no input is needed) you should declare none as the input.
Define the default input and output as the Clipboard and to use the header to execute the Copy
menu command before executing the Macro and the Paste menu command after executing the
Macro.
Such a macro will work on the selected text, first copying it to the Clipboard, then pasting it back
into the selection.

Perl macros have a file extension of pl.

Learn more about Perl

<http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Perl>
<http://learn.perl.org>
<http://www.perl.org.il/>
<http://use.perl.org/>

Components of a Perl script header

#nisus macro block
This tells Nisus Writer Pro to start reading directives

436

Writing Perl Scripts

Macros, the Deeper Workings

#source ( front | next | none | clipboard)

This tells Nisus Writer Pro where to get the text that will be sent to the Perl Script. Choose one of
the options, e.g. '#source front'. Front is the front document, next is the document behind the front
document, none is no data and Clipboard is whatever text is on the Clipboard.

#destination ( front | next | none | clipboard | new) [replace]

Destination tell Nisus Writer Pro what to do with any data returned from the Perl script. The options
are the same as for source, except 'new' which creates a new document. The replace option is used
if you want to overwrite the destination, otherwise any text returned from the Perl script is
appended to the destination. Replace only has an effect if destination is front or next.

#(send text as rtf | send rtf | rtf | text as rtf)

If any variant of this option is present, then the text will be sent to Perl as RTF. Anything returned
from the Perl script will be treated as RTF and an attempt will be made to convert it back into styled
text before putting it into the destination.

#before execution
This tells Nisus Writer Pro to treat the following lines (minus the leading '#') as menu macros to be
run before execution of the Perl script. Any other directive will stop collection of menu macro lines.

#after execution
This tells Nisus Writer Pro to treat the following lines (minus the leading '#') as menu macros to be
run after the execution of the Perl script. Any other directive will stop collection of menu macro
lines.

#end nisus macro block

This tells Nisus Writer Pro to stop looking for directives.

Customizing & Automating Solutions

437

Writing AppleScripts
Using AppleScripts you can create little stand alone applications that you can use to take
information from one scriptable program and manipulate it in a second one before passing it on to
yet another. You can also create little applications that you can share with other Nisus Writer Pro
users.
AppleScripts are made up of AppleEvents. An AppleEvent is a single command such as Copy or
Print; analogous to a Nisus Writer Pro macro command. Therefore, an AppleScript (an accumulation
of AppleEvents written to perform an action) is analogous to a Nisus Writer Pro macro. There are
several levels of AppleEvent support an application can have.
Nisus Writer Pro supports some of these.
Nisus Writer Pro is Scriptable. That is, using the Script Editor application, to do any of the required
suite of AppleEvents such as Open - a document, Print - a document, Quit - the application, Run the application. Nisus Writer Pro also supports part of the Text Suite and the Do Menu Macro
command.

Integrate AppleScript with Nisus Writer Pro

The argument of the Do Menu Macro can be any Nisus Writer Pro menu command (even the name
of a macro, style, etc.). In addition, you can put almost any Nisus Writer Pro macro programming
dialect command in an argument. A few examples follow.

Write AppleScripts for use in Nisus Writer Pro

1.

Write AppleScripts in Script Editor.

You can find the Script Editor in the AppleScripts folder of the Applications folder.
Applications/AppleScripts/Script Editor
2. Save your AppleScripts as compiled scripts (with a .scpt extension) or plain text (with a
.applescript extension) in the folder
~/Library/Application Support/Nisus Writer/Macros

Have AppleScripts open a new file

tell application "Nisus Writer Pro"

Make at front of documents new document
end tell

Have AppleScript open a file and perform some tasks

This script tells Nisus Writer Pro to open a new file and type Hello World. It then selects all the
text, applies the font Times, then makes it Bold and Red.

tell application Nisus Writer Pro

Activate
Set newDoc to make at front of documents new document
Set text of newDoc to "Hello World."
Do Menu Macro with macro "Select All"
Do Menu Macro with macro "FormatFontTimes"
Do Menu Macro with macro "FormatBold"
Set color of text of newDoc to "red"
end tell

See a list of all the AppleScripts commands that Nisus Writer Pro
recognizes
Drop the Nisus Writer Pro application icon on the Script Editor application icon.
Plain text AppleScripts have an extension of 'applescript' and compiled scripts have 'scpt'

The two most useful commands supported Nisus Writer Pro are:

getting and setting the text of a document

running Nisus Writer Pro menu macros.

Get/set text
You can get the main body text of any open document, or any character, word or paragraph of that
text. You can also set the entire body text or any portion of it. You can also get or set the text color
of any piece of the text.

438

Writing AppleScripts

Examples

tell application "Nisus Writer Pro"

get text of document 1

end tell

tell application "Nisus Writer Pro"

get character 3 of word 1 of paragraph 1 of text of document 1

end tell

tell application "Nisus Writer Pro"

set word 1 of text of document 1 to "Modified Text"

end tell

tell application "Nisus Writer Pro"

set color of words 1 through 4 of text of document 1 to "green"

end tell
Nisus Writer Pro has a limitation when setting the text in that the changes caused by the
AppleScript are not undoable and may cause problems with existing Undo/Redo actions.

Do Menu Macro
You can run any string of text as a Nisus Menu Macro

Examples
set macroString to "FormatSizeIncrease" & return & "FormatFontApple Chancery"
tell application "Nisus Writer Pro"
activate
Do Menu Macro with macro "EditSelect All"
Do Menu Macro with macro macroString
end tell

Other examples

This script will insert the path to the front document at the end of the document

tell application "Nisus Writer Pro"

if exists (path of document 1) then
set thePath to path of document 1
else
set thePath to "No Path"
end if
make new paragraph at end of text of document 1 with data (return &
thePath)
end tell

Putting It All Together

Nisus Writer Pro contains the tools for composing documents of any length. You may already use
many of Nisus Writer Pros practical, time saving tools such as the spelling checker, Menu Keys,
Drag and Drop, Unlimited Undos, to name a few. This part of the Nisus Writer Pro documentation
offers you suggestions on how to integrate the capabilities of Nisus Writer Pro to get the most out of
it.
Handling Correspondence outlines the ways Nisus Writer Pro can help you create letters, FAXes
and forms and includes tips for using Nisus Writer Pro as an off-line e-mail editor.

Nisus Writer Pro and the Community of Connected Applications ........... 439
The Services Menu ....................................................................... 439
Using LinkBack ............................................................................ 439
Nisus Writer Pro and the Internet ................................................. 440
Handling Communications .......................................................... 441

Nisus Writer Pro and the Community of Connected

Applications
The Services Menu
Nisus Writer Pro can use all the tools of the menu Nisus Writer Pro > Services. These are
commands made available by other applications. Depending on what applications you have
installed and what you may or may not have selected in your document. You can also open the
Systems Services Preferences from this menu.
Among the more common (using Mac OS X 10.10) are

Add to Evernote
Add to iTunes as a Spoken Track
Make New Sticky Note
New Nisus Document with Selection (Nisus Writer Pro)
Capture Selection from Screen
Import Image
Tweet

Look Up in Dictionary
Search with Google
New Email With Selection
Many other commands are made available by other applications that you can add to your System.
Nisus Writer Pro adds a command to the Services menu that you can use in any other application
that supports Services: New Document With Selection. Whenever you select text in another
application you can choose this command to create a new Nisus Writer Pro document.

Using LinkBack
In addition to these Services, Nisus Writer Pro enables you to include content from other
applications and then edit that content again with just a double-click.
The LinkBack Framework is an open framework that brings editable objects to Mac OS X. Using
LinkBack-enabled applications, you can paste content created in other applications into a Nisus
Writer Pro document and later edit or update the content from the original application. When
activated, content can be updated automatically by the provider application or the provider
application can display the content for the user to edit. Any changes automatically replace the
original embedded content.
By offering this framework as an open-source project, Nisus Software Inc. hopes to enable a wide
variety of Cocoa-based applications, including Nisus Writer Pro, to integrate more tightly with one
another.
Compare LinkBack with the Link to File capabilities explained in Importing Images on page 150.

440

Nisus Writer Pro and the Community of Connected Applications

What applications support LinkBack

LinkBack is included in a number of fine applications. You can learn the current state of
development at:

<http://www.linkbackproject.org>

Goals and non-goals

The goals of the LinkBack framework are

To enable applications to share data with one another, maintaining a link to the originating
application so that you can edit the data or have it refreshed.

To provide this functionality though underlying technology that is simple to use and requires
minimal changes in an existing Cocoa-based application.
The goal of LinkBack is not to provide for in-application editing of data from another application.
For example, LinkBack does not provide for a graphics application to do graphics editing in a word
processor.

How you might use LinkBack

A user scenario that depicts how we envision LinkBack being used follows.

Use LinkBack with a drawing application

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Create a new image for your research paper with a graphics tool.
Paste the image into a Nisus Writer Pro document.
You decide you need to change the drawing in your Nisus Writer Pro drawing.
Double-click the image in Nisus Writer Pro.
The original application opens and displays the image.
Make your changes and choose Save in the drawing application
This updates the image in Nisus Writer Pro.

Nisus Writer Pro and the Internet

You can insert clickable links to URLs on the Internet using Nisus Writer Pro.

Insert a Link to a Location on the World Wide Web

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

Type the text you wish to have appear in your document.

Select that text.
Choose the menu command Insert > Hyperlink.
Type the URL to which you want to have the text refer.
You can paste in a URL you copied from a Web browser (if you have it in another of the Nisus
Writer Pro Clipboards).
Click Insert.
When you add a hyperlink to your text, Nisus Writer Pro adds a Hyperlink character style to
your document, that is by default blue and underlined, and applies that style to the linked text.
You can modify the appearance of the style, or remove it altogether in the Style Sheet view.
If you do not want your text to show the Hyperlink style but still be visible as a hyperlink, you
can use the Hyperlink Marked text color in the Nisus Writer Pro Appearance preferences as
explained in Determine the color of various aspects of your Nisus Writer Pro working
environment beginning on page 395.
The link and style information is preserved when you save or print your file as a PDF and the
link is clickable in the PDF document. The text marking assigned in the Appearance
references is not.

Open a Document on the Web

There are two ways to open a document on the Web from a link in your Nisus Writer Pro document.
The easiest is to simply click the visible linked text in the document.
Additionally, you can:
1. Press 6.
2. Point your insertion point to the hyperlinked text and click your mouse button or trackpad.
3. Choose Open Link from the contextual menu that appears.

Putting It All Together

441

Copy a Link to a Document on the Web

1.
2.
3.

Press 6.
Point your insertion point to the hyperlinked text and click your mouse button or trackpad.
Choose Copy Link from the contextual menu that appears.

Remove an Inserted Link

1.
2.
3.

Press 6.
Point your insertion point to the hyperlinked text and click your mouse button or trackpad.
Choose Remove Link from the contextual menu that appears.

Edit an Inserted Link

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

Press 6.
Point your insertion point to the hyperlinked text and click your mouse button or trackpad.
Choose Edit Link from the contextual menu that appears.
Modify the URL to which you want to have the text refer.
You can paste in a URL you copied from a Web browser (if you have it in one of the Nisus Writer
Pro Clipboards).
Click OK.

Save a Nisus Writer Pro Document as an HTML Document

1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Edit your document as you would ordinarily.

Use the Styles supplied in the Nisus New File that comes with Nisus Writer Pro to format your
text.
These styles are designed to convert to standard HTML attributes.
Choose the menu command File > Export As of Nisus Writer Pro.
Give your file the name you want it to have and navigate to the folder where you want to save it.
In the Export As dialog choose HTML from the File Format pop-up menu in the lower portion of
the dialog.
Click Save.

Edit an HTML Document in Nisus Writer Pro

Ordinarily, when you double-click an HTML document your preferred Web browser opens it. If,
however, you drag the HTML file onto the Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock, Nisus Writer Pro will
open it, and display it as though it were opened in your Web browser. You can, nonetheless, edit
your HTML documents in Nisus Writer Pro.
1. In Nisus Writer Pro choose the menu command File > Open.
2. When the Open dialog appears select the file you want to open (i.e. click the file name once in
the Open dialog).
3. Click Ignore Rich Text Commands in the lower portion of the Open dialog.
4. Click Open.
When you edit the raw HTML code of your file you must save the file as Text so as not to
embed RTF code in the file. Nisus Writer Pro automatically sets the Save appropriately.

Handling Communications
Email your Nisus Writer Pro files
Most people handle tremendous amounts of correspondence including the simple office memo, the
formal business letter, FAXes, mass mailings and increasing amounts of e-mail. You can write your
document in Nisus Writer Pro and, when you are ready send that document using the commands of
Nisus Writer Pro.
This capability is supported only in Mail.app and Entourage.app.

Send the active document as an RTF file

Choose the menu command File > Mail > Attach to New Message.
Nisus Writer Pro saves the file (giving it a name if it has not yet been given one), attaches the file to
a new email message in your preferred email tool and creates a subject for the email:
Please see attached: FileName

Address your email message and add whatever other information you want to the email and send it.

442

Nisus Writer Pro and the Community of Connected Applications

Send the active document as a PDF file

Choose the menu command File > Mail > Attach PDF to New Message.
Nisus Writer Pro saves (prints) the file as a PDF (giving it a name if it has not yet), attaches the file
to a new email message in your preferred email tool and creates a subject for the email:
Please see attached: FileName

Address your email message and add whatever other information you want to the email and send it.

Standardizing Your Correspondence Stationery

You can give all your stationery a unified look without ordering it from an outside source.
Create your own stationery file with your letterhead.

Insert a header in your stationery file.

Import an image of your logo into your header
Insert a Header or Footer (with your return address information and page number) that
appears only on even pages so that when your letter grows to a second page, the
information in the header will automatically appear.
Modify your primary stationery file for use as memo stationery.
Modify the stationery document to use as FAX stationery.

Import a scanned image of your signature. (Since the file will be seen as an electronically
reproduced image on paper at the other end, no one need know that you didnt sign the
paper you FAXed either by FAX machine or FAX modem.)

Format and Print Envelopes

1.
2.

Choose the menu command File > Page Setup.

In the Page Setup dialog choose the appropriate size envelope you need (#10 Envelope is
common) from the Paper Size pop-up menu and click the Orientation button that matches the
way in which your printer expects to receive paper (as illustrated). Then click OK.

Figure 439
The Page Setup dialog set for a #10 Envelope
3.
4.
5.

Drag the left margin of the body of the envelope as far out as you like.
Drag the top margins of the header of the envelope as far up as you like.
Type your return address in the Header.

Putting It All Together

443

Figure 440
An Addressed Envelope
6.
7.

Put your insertion point the body portion of the document window and drag the ruler in to the
right as desired (as illustrated in the envelope above).
Save the file as a template document, choose the menu command File > Save As.

Figure 441
Saving an envelope template
8.
9.

Type your recipient's address in the body of the document.

Put an envelope in the printer tray and choose the menu command File > Print.

Afterword
If you have any thoughts about how we can make Nisus Writer Pro even better in the future, we
welcome your ideas.

Send Feedback to Nisus Software Inc.

1.

Choose the menu command Help > Send Feedback.

Figure 442
The Feedback Reporter window
2.

3.
4.
5.

Choose the kind of feedback you want to send from the pop-up menu at the top of the dialog.
Report some Unexpected Behavior, a Crash, a Hang, or a Document Import Issue, or to
submit a Feature Request, or some Other matter entirely.
Describe the issue in the area provided.
Please check and Include your email address so we can get back to you if we need more
details (or let you know if something has been done in relation to the matter you raise).
In the Diagnostic Data area click Enable Diagnostics.

The button says Enable Diagnostics only the first time you send feedback. Thereafter it says Reset
Folders as illustrated in Figure 442.
This will enable Nisus Writer Pro to Send crash logs, Send hang logs. and Send console log.
If this is the first time you have sent feedback to Nisus Software Inc. you will see an alert
notifying you that you need to select folders where the diagnostic information is kept as
illustrated in Figure 443

446

Send Feedback to Nisus Software Inc.

Figure 443
The enable collection of diagnostic information alert
a.
b.

Click Continue.
A variant of the Open dialog appears and Nisus Writer Pro automatically locates the log
folder as illustrated in Figure 444.

Figure 444
Choosing the log folder for sending feedback

c.
d.

Click Choose log Folder.

Please check the boxes to send all the diagnostic data:

Send crash logs.

Send hang logs.
Send console log.
If you are a not an Admin user of your Macintosh your experience will differ. Rather than a
checkbox, what was the Send console log checkbox is a button that enables you to Open
Console App. as illustrated in Figure 445 When the Console opens select everything on the
right side of the window, copy the contents and paste that into the Describe the issue textedit area.

Afterword

447

Figure 445
The Choose log Folder version of the enable diagnostics dialog
6.

Send one or more Attachments if appropriate by checking (turning on) the appropriate box.
You can:

Send basic system information and recent crash/issue logs.

Send an open document.
Chances are the issue you want to report has to do with something you experienced in a
document you are currently working on.
Choose the document you want to send from the pop-up menu available to the right of this
checkbox.
Send Application Support file.
Sometimes issues arise because of an oddity in your Nisus Writer Pro Preferences file or
your Nisus New File.dot file.

448

Send Feedback to Nisus Software Inc.

Choose the file you want to send from the pop-up menu available to the right of this
checkbox.
Send other file
There may be a different document that illustrates the issue, or with which you have
problems (open or not).

Click Choose and find the file using the Open dialog that appears.
If you have been working on a particular document and have made changes to it before
choosing Send Feedback, Nisus Writer Pro presents a dialog asking if you want to send the
original (saved) file or the file in its current state.

Figure 446
The Send Changes or Send Original dialog
These documents are for diagnostic purposes only and destroyed when the issue is resolved.

7.

Send an image,
Perhaps you think that a picture is worth a thousand words. You can have Nisus Writer Pro
automatically take a picture of your entire screen. If you have something on your screen
you do not wish us to see, move it out of the way.
a. When you are ready, click Take Screenshot. This automatically checks (turns on) the Send
an image checkbox.
On the odd chance that you are not connected to the internet at the time you want to send your
feedback, click Save Report. An alert, illustrated in Figure 447, appears offering you the
chance to save the report to your hard drive.
When you click Save, a variant of the Save As dialog appears. The file is automatically named
NisusFeedback.zip

Figure 447
The Save Report alert
8.

Click Send Feedback.

All information we collect is kept confidential and will never be sold or shared with anyone else. If you
provide an email address, we will only use it to contact you to follow up on your feedback request. You
can see what information is sent if you click Show Gathered Data.

May All Your Writing nisus Be a Pleasure with Nisus Writer

Pro
The dedicated group of people at Nisus Software Inc. created Nisus Writer Pro as a tool to enable
better communication, worldwide.
Indeed, we hope that we play a small role in helping to unite the peoples of our world through
making a better tool for written communication, and helping you achieve your endeavors.

Appendices
Appendix I
The Nisus Writer Pro Menus
For reference, this section gives a brief description of every menu command in Nisus Writer Pro.
Details on how to use the commands in conjunction with one another to accomplish tasks appear
in later sections of the manual. It is structured by the order of the menus on the Menu Bar; the
commands in the Nisus Writer Pro menu are discussed first, then those in the File, and so forth.

Nisus Writer Pro menu ........................................................................... 449

File menu ............................................................................................... 450
Edit menu ............................................................................................... 453
Insert menu ............................................................................................ 458
View menu ............................................................................................. 461
Format menu .......................................................................................... 464
Table menu ............................................................................................ 472
Macro menu .......................................................................................... 479
Window menu ....................................................................................... 480
Help menu ............................................................................................. 480

Conventions
Every application uses its own menu bar. If a menu command is dimmed, it is not available in the
context of your work at that time. Ellipses () identify commands that require dialog entries. Check
marks () identify selected menu items. If you select a region of text that has more than one font
size and/or style associated with a portion (though not all) of it Nisus Writer Pro displays a dash (-)
beside all those attributes partially represented in the selection. Wedge-shaped symbols ( ) identify
submenus which open to give you access to more commands.

Nisus Writer Pro menu

Choose commands from the Nisus Writer Pro menu that affect the entire application. These include
About Nisus Writer Pro, Preferences, Hide and Quit Nisus Writer Pro as well as the Services
submenu. Nisus Writer Pro is a Cocoa application, any services you add to your /Library/
Services folder are available to you in Nisus Writer Pro. In addition to these standard commands,
you will find
Preferences
Sets preferences specific to Nisus Writer Pro. Customizing Nisus Writer Pros
preferences is discussed in detail beginning on page 371. You can choose Choose
commands from the Preferences submenu to go to the various preferences Nisus
Writer Pro enables. Because these have their own commands you can call them
directly from the keyboard by assigning Menu Key shortcuts to them.
General
Most of these preferences are illustrated in Figure 400 and
described in Set Defaults for the Application on page 371
Doc Manager
The Document Manager and its preferences are explained in detail
beginning on page 61.
Saving
Enables you to determine the various ways your files are saved.
These preferences are explained in detail in the section Choose the
Way in Which Files Save beginning on page 383.
Appearance
Enables you to set various display options for your documents.
These are explained in detail in the section Choose Various Display
Options for Your Documents beginning on page 388.
New File
Use these preferences to design your Nisus New File and your Plain
Text Template and your Macro Template as explained in Set
Defaults for the Application beginning on page 371.
Clipboards
Use these preferences to control various aspects of Nisus Writer
Pros versatile clipboards as explained in Customize Your
Clipboards beginning on page 399.

450

File menu

Menu Keys
Languages
QuickFix

Advanced

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Use these preferences to assign keyboard shortcuts to any

command on the Nisus Writer Pro menus as explained in Assign
Menu Keys to Menu Commands beginning on page 400.
Use these preferences to determine how Nisus Writer Pro works with
multiple languages as explained in Set Your Language Preferences
beginning on page 401.
Use these preferences to choose curly or "straight" quotes,
superscript ordinals, fix capitalization at the start of sentences,
automatically fix various typos and work with the Nisus Writer Pro
glossaries as explained in Determine What QuickFix Fixes
beginning on page 402.
Use these preferences to handle how a document that is not in the
native file format of Nisus Writer Pro (.rtf) opens as explained in
Advanced Preferences beginning on page 408.

Check for Updates

Either presents an alert indicating that You're up to date!, or opens a dialog that
includes the release notes for the new version and offers you the options to either
Skip This Version, Remind Me Later, or Install Update. If you click Install
Update, the new version will be downloaded after which a new alert will appear
inviting you to quit the old version and restart the new one.
Licenses

Opens a dialog that enables you to buy, delete or add a license to your Nisus
Writer Pro.

Buy Nisus Writer Pro

Opens a Web Browser that points to the Nisus Software Online store where you
can pay for the demo version of Nisus Writer Pro you may be using.
Services:Nisus Writer Pro
Because Nisus Writer Pro is a Cocoa application it can use all the tools of the
menu Nisus Writer Pro > Services. These are commands made available by other
applications. Nisus Writer Pro adds a command to the Services menu that you
can use in any other application that supports Services. Other uses of the
Services submenu are described on page 439.
New Nisus Document With Selection
Whenever you select text in another application you can choose this
command to create a new Nisus Writer Pro document.
Quit Nisus Writer Pro
Quits the application. Depending on how you set your preference in the General
preferences of Nisus Writer Pro, you can have all windows open on quitting opened
again when you start the application.

File menu
Choose commands from the File menu to open, save, and print documents in Nisus Writer Pro.
New

Opens a new, untitled document.

New Plain Text File

Opens a new plain text file using the template found in the Templates folder of the
Nisus Documents folder.
Open

Opens an existing, saved document for on-screen reading and/or editing.

Open Recent

Choose commands from the Open Recent submenu to open files you have
recently worked on in Nisus Writer Pro.(customizable in the General preferences of
Nisus Writer Pro).
Clear Menu
Removes all files accumulated in the Open Recent submenu.

Close

Closes the active window. If it contains any unsaved changes you will see a dialog
prompting you to save. Press 4 to close all open windows. If any windows
contain unsaved changes, a dialog prompts you to save them.

Revert To
Use the commands of the Revert To menu to see earlier versions of the file.
Last Opened (time)
Reverts the file to its state when it was last opened (regardless of
how much time or how many changes and saves have occurred
since then).
Browse All Versions Displays all versions of the file in a manner similar to Time Machine
backups and enables you to restore an older version or copy content
from an older version to paste into the current version.

Appendices

451
Save

Saves the active window. If the document has never been saved, Nisus Writer Pro
opens the Save as dialog enabling you to give the file a name, save it to a
particular location and choose a format for the file including formats that might be
considered exporting such as HTML. Nisus Writer Pro saves the current selection
or insertion point position as well as the window shape and position in addition to
the zoom percentage.

Save As

Saves the active window with a different name and/or different folder location.
Format available are Rich Text Format (RTF) (the Nisus Writer Pro default),
Document Template, Microsoft Word Format, Rich Text Format Directory
(RTFD), Nisus Compressed Rich Text, Plain Text, Nisus Macro, Nisus Perl
Macro.

Save Copy As Saves the active window with a different name and/or different folder location and
enables you to continue working on the existing file. The formats available are the
same as for Save As.
Duplicate

Creates a duplicate copy of the active window. In addition the new documents title
in the Title bar is selected for modification.Press < to confirm.

Rename

Activates the files title in the Title bar for modification. Press < to confirm. This
capability is also available by clicking the files name in the Title bar.

Move To

Opens a sheet with a pop-up menu that enables you to move the active file from
its current location to any of the folders you have designated in the Finder as
Favorites, any of your attached devices, or Recent Places. At the bottom of the
menu you can choose Other which displays a variant of the Save As dialog.
This capability is also available by clicking the files name in the Title bar.

Export as PDF Exports the document of the active window as a PDF. It opens the Save as dialog
enabling you to give the file a name, save it to a particular location. This is the
same as clicking the Save as PDF button in the Print dialog (though it saves a
step).
Export As

Mail

Exports your file to a different format such as Microsoft Word Format (binary),
Microsoft Office 2007 XML (Office Open XML), Open Document Format
(ODF/.odt XML), Rich Text Format (for older applications), Plain Text, HTML
and EPUB with a different name and/or different format location.

Choose commands from the Mail submenu to send the active document or a PDF
version of it as an email attachment. These are supported only in Mail.app and
Entourage.app.
Attach to New Message Attaches the current contents of the active document, unsaved or
saved to a new email message.
Attach PDF to New Message
Attaches a newly created PDF version of the active document to a
new email message.

Show Document Manager

Opens the Document Manager which allows you to preview unopened documents.
It also lets you open, move or delete them. This is the same as the menu command
Window > Document Manager.
Open from Document Manager
Choose commands from the Open from Document Manager submenus to access
all the files handled by the Document Manager. If you create any custom groups,
these appear at the bottom of the submenu. The Document Manager is described
in detail in the section Reintroducing the Document Manager beginning on page
61.
All Managed Files
Lists all files in, and managed by the Document Manager folder.
Dropbox
Lists all files in the Dropbox folder (if you have a Dropbox account).
It does not list any files in any subfolders within the Dropbox. You
must first allow Nisus Writer Pro access to the folder.
Backups
Lists all files in either the alternative backup folder, or that are
made automatically in case of a crash.
Currently Open
Lists all files that are currently open (similar to the files listed at the
bottom of the Window menu).
Recently Opened
Lists all files that were recently opened (similar to the files listed in
the menu File > Open Recent.
Recently Saved
Lists those files that were saved. The number of files is determined
by that set in the General Preferences; Keep x documents in Open
Recent menu.

452

File menu

Style Library
Templates

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Lists the Style Library files you have created. Each collection in the
Style Library has a file on disk that stores the relevant styles.
Lists all those files the you have added to it. It always lists the Nisus
New File. Any other files you save to it are, by default saved as
document templates and open as untitled.

Save in Document Manager

Choose commands from the Save in Document Manager submenus to save the
frontmost document and have it managed by the Document Manager. If you create
any custom groups, these appear at the bottom of the submenu.
All Managed Files
Saves the file to the main Document Manager folder that you have
set in the Doc Manager Preferences
Style Library
Saves the file to the Style Library so that any styles in it are
available to other files.
Templates
Saves the file the file special Templates folder and automatically
sets its type to .dot.
Save As in Document Manager
Choose commands from the Save As in Document Manager submenus to save
a copy of the active document with the option of giving the files new names and
have them managed by the Document Manager. If you create any custom groups,
these appear at the bottom of the submenu.
All Managed Files
Saves a copy of the file, with the option of giving it a new name, to
the main Document Manager folder that you have set in the Doc
Manager Preferences.
Style Library
Saves a copy of the file, with the option of giving it a new name, to
the Style Library so that any styles in it are available to other files.
Templates
Saves the file, with the option of giving it a new name, to the special
Templates folder This causes the Save As dialog to default to .dot.
Move to Document Manager
Choose commands from the Move to Document Manager
submenus to physically move the active document from its current location on
disk to the designated folder and have it managed by the Document Manager.
All Managed Files
Moves the file to the main Document Manager folder that you have
set in the Doc Manager Preferences.
Dropbox
Moves the file to the Dropbox folder (if you have a Dropbox account).
You must first allow Nisus Writer Pro access to the folder.
Style Library
Moves the file to the Style Library so that any styles in it are
available to other files.
Add to Document Manager
Choose commands from the Add to Document Manager
submenus to create an alias to the active document so that it remains where it
was saved on your hard drive, but is nonetheless managed by the Document
Manager. If you create any custom groups, these appear at the bottom of the
submenu.
All Managed Files
Adds an alias to the main Document Manager folder that you have
set in the Doc Manager Preferences.
Style Library
Adds an alias to the file to the Style Library so that any styles in it
are available to other files.
Templates
Adds an alias to the file to the Templates group so that it is easily
available.
Properties

Opens a dialog that enables you to enter a wide variety of meta information that
you can insert in your document.

Text Analysis Opens a sheet that displays a number of details about your document including
the number of sentences, the number of words per sentence as well as the Flesch
Reading Ease, Flesch-Kincaid Grade Level, and FOG Index scores.
Merge Document
Merges your open template file with data from the Apple supplied Address Book
application, or your own comma-separated value data document. You can choose
to have your resulting document saved individually, as one file, or printed.
Page Setup

Customize specific printer options and Nisus Writer Pro printing options by
choosing Nisus Writer Pro from the pop-up menu at the top of the dialog. The
options in the Page Setup dialog are specific to the printer selected.

Print

Print all or part of a document and specify Nisus Writer Pro printing options.

Appendices

453

Edit menu
Undo

Reverses the effect of the last action made in the current editing session. Choose
Undo repeatedly to step back through all changes made in the active window.

Redo

Undo an Undo. Choose Redo repeatedly to redo all recent Undos until the Undo
list is empty.

Repeat Command
Allows you to repeat the immediately preceding menu command or palette action
you performed.
Cut

Cut
Append Cut

Removes the current selection and inserts it in the current

Clipboard, replacing whatever was in the Clipboard.
Removes the current selection and inserts it at the end of whatever
is stored in the current Clipboard.

Copy

Copy

Inserts a copy of the current selection in the current Clipboard,

replacing whatever was in the Clipboard.
Append Copy
Inserts a copy of the current selection at the end of whatever is
stored in the current Clipboard.
Copy Text Only
Copies only the text, but no formatting information. This is
especially useful for taking formatted text from Nisus Writer Pro to
another application such as FileMaker Pro.
Copy to Find
Inserts the current selection in the Find box of the Find & Replace
window without activating it.
Copy to Replace
Inserts the current selection in the Replace box of the Find &
Replace window without activating it.
Copy Character Attributes
Copies the font and other attribute information of selected text.
Copy Ruler
Copies the ruler information of selected text.
Copy Shape Appearance Copies, with certain exceptions, the attributes associated with the
selected shape.
Copy Document File Path
Copies, the path to the file, separating each nested folder with a
slash /.
Paste

Paste

Inserts the contents of the current Clipboard into your document at

the insertion point.
Swap Paste
Swaps the current selection with the contents of the current
Clipboard.
Paste Text Only
Pastes the text on the Clipboard so that it assumes surrounding
attributes.
Paste Character Attributes
Pastes the font and other attribute information on the Clipboard
over selected text.
Paste Ruler
Pastes the ruler information on the Clipboard over selected text.
Paste Shape Appearance Pastes, with certain exceptions, the attributes copied by Copy
Shape Appearance onto the selected shape.
Delete

Deletes the current selection from your document. The deleted selection is not
stored on the Clipboard.

Select
Choose commands from the Select submenu to modify and or move the selection.
Select All
Selects everything in that portion of the active document where the
insertion point appears.
Select All Document
Selects all the text in the document (this includes the footnotes,
endnotes, headers and footers as well as any table of contents and
index, but excludes any comments). Comments are considered
additions to the document. They may have been created by others
and are therefore not selected.
Select Word
Selects the word in which the insertion point appears or the word
(or white space) ahead of the insertion point.
Select Sentence
Selects the sentence in which the insertion point appears or the
sentence ahead of the insertion point, unless the insertion point is
at the end of a sentence at the end of a paragraph in which case it
selects the preceding sentence.

454

Edit menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Select Paragraph

Selects the paragraph in which the insertion point appears or the

paragraph ahead of the insertion point. If the insertion point is at
the very end of a paragraph the command selects the paragraph
behind the insertion point.
Invert Selection
Selects everything that is not selected, an excellent way to find
everything that is not x.
Next Selection
If you have used Previous Selection, this command returns your
insertion point to its next selection. If it was a location and not a
selection Nisus Writer Pro flashes the line with the color set for
Flash Selection in the Appearance preferences.
Previous Selection
Moves your insertion point to its previous selection. If it was a
location and not a selection Nisus Writer Pro flashes the line with
the color set for Flash Selection in the Appearance preferences.
Flash Selection
Causes the insertion point or selected area of your text to become
more visible by bringing it to the center of the window and flashing
the line or selection. If there is no selection, but only an insertion
point, the flash narrows to focus on that point. The command works
on the active document even if the Find/Replace window is in front
of it. Nisus Writer Pro flashes the line with the color set for Flash
Selection in the Appearance preferences.
Flash Next in Multipart Selection
Causes the next selection of a multipart selection to flash. The
command works on the active document even if the Find/Replace
window is in front of it. Nisus Writer Pro flashes the selection with
the color set for Flash Selection in the Appearance preferences.
Flash Previous in Multipart Selection
Causes the previous selection of a multipart selection to flash. The
command works on the active document even if the Find/Replace
window is in front of it. Nisus Writer Pro flashes the selection with
the color set for Flash Selection in the Appearance preferences.
Complete

Presents a menuoid that offers words that would complete the word you began to
type. Most useful by using its keyboard shortcut (initially set at 0).

Expand Glossary
Expands Glossary abbreviations created by using the Glossary tools of the
QuickFix preference. This is especially useful for East Asian (ideographic)
languages that dont have spaces between characters.
Convert

Choose commands from the Convert submenu to quickly change the kind of
quotes and/or the case of text in a selection.
These commands are not to be confused with the commands with similar names
that appear in the menu Format > Character Case. The commands here alter the
actual Unicode values (in addition to the appearance) of the characters. If you
copy and/or paste the text only at a different location (either in Nisus Writer Pro
or some other application) the underlying characters will not change.
Plain Quotes to Smart Quotes
Changes all quotes in the current selection to Smart
Quotes (sometimes called curly quotes).
Smart Quotes to Plain Quotes
Changes all quotes in the current selection to "Plain
Quotes" (sometimes called "dumb" quotes).
To lowercase
Changes the current selection to all lowercase characters.
To UPPERCASE
Changes the current selection to all UPPERCASE characters.
To Capitalized
Makes the first letters of all words in the current selection
uppercase characters. If any uppercase characters appear in the
selection (and not at the beginning of words) Nisus Writer Pro makes
these lowercase.
To Small Caps
Changes the current selection so that all lowercase characters are
reduced by approximately 75 percent and then exchanged with their
equivalent uppercase characters.
To Toggled Case
Switches UPPERCASE characters in the current selection to
lowercase characters and lowercase to uppercase.
To Unicode Code Points
Changes the character displayed to its appropriate value in the
Unicode codespace; that is, the range of integers from 0 to
10FFFF16.

Appendices

455

From Unicode Code Points

Changes the character displayed from its Unicode codespace; to its
appropriate linguistic glyph.
Sort Paragraphs
Choose commands from the Sort Paragraphs submenu to quickly change the
sequence of selected paragraphs. A paragraph is any text that ends with a Return
character.
Ascending (A-Z)
Changes the sequence so that selected paragraphs ascend from A Z and from 1 - x.
Descending (Z-A)
Changes the sequence so that selected paragraphs descend from Z A and from x - 1.
Reverse
Reverses the sequence of selected paragraphs so that the last
appears first, etc.
Randomize (shuffle)
Changes the sequence so that selected paragraphs appear in a
random shuffle.
Find

Choose commands from the Find submenu to specify Find and Replace options.
Find and Replace are explained in detail beginning on page 299 through page 332.
Show Find
Opens the Find/Replace window.
Find Next
Finds the next occurrence of the Find Expression in the active
document without activating the Find/Replace window.
Find Previous
Finds the preceding occurrence of the Find Expression in the active
document without activating the Find/Replace window.
Find All
Finds all occurrences of the Find Expression in the active document
without activating the Find/Replace window.
Find Next Selected Text Finds the next occurrence of whatever text happens to be selected
in the active document without activating or putting that text in the
Find what portion of the Find/Replace window.
Find All Selected Text Finds all occurrences of whatever text happens to be selected in the
active document without activating or putting that text in the Find
what portion of the Find/Replace window. This moves the display to
the first appearance of the selected text.
Replace
Replaces the selection with the contents of the Replace Expression
in the Find/Replace window without activating the Find/Replace
window.
Replace and Find
Replaces the selection with the contents of the Replace Expression
and finds the next occurrence of the Find Expression in the active
document without activating the Find/Replace window. If the
selection does not match the find expression, no replacement is
made.
Replace All
Finds all occurrences of the Find Expression in the active document
and replaces them with the contents of the Replace Expression
without activating the Find/Replace window.
Copy to Find
Inserts the current selection in the Find box of the Find & Replace
window without activating it.
Copy to Replace
Inserts the current selection in the Replace box of the Find &
Replace window without activating it.
Scroll to Selection
Scrolls the active document to the location of the insertion point/
selection. This command functions as does the menu command Edit
> Select > Flash Selection. It causes the insertion point or selected
area of your text to become more visible by bringing it to the center
of the window and flashing the line or selection. If there is no
selection, but only an insertion point, the flash narrows to focus on
that point. The command works on the active document even if the
Find/Replace window is in front of it. Nisus Writer Pro flashes the
line with the color set for Flash Selection in the Appearance
preferences.

Spelling

Choose commands from the Spelling submenu to check the spelling of your
document. Spelling and other proofing tools is explained in detail beginning on
page 263.
Spelling Window
Opens the Spelling dialog for you to check the spelling.
Check Spelling
Selects the next misspelled word following the insertion point.
Correct Next Spelling
Moves the insertion point to the next unknown word and corrects
it. If more than one possible alternate spelling exists it opens a

456

Edit menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

windoid with the list of words the dictionary suggests as

replacements. Pressing < replaces that word with the top word in
the list. Pressing an arrow key replaces it with the next (and
continuing) word in the list.
Unlearn Spelling
Removes the selected word to the System User Dictionary. This
command toggles with Learn Spelling depending on the state of the
word selected.
Learn Spelling
Adds the selected word to the System User Dictionary. This
command toggles with Unlearn Spelling depending on the state of
the word selected.
Ignore Word
Causes Nisus Writer Pro to ignore the selected word in the current
document without adding it to the System User Dictionary.
Prevent Check Spelling in Selection
When applied to arbitrary pieces of text or as part of style
definitions, prevents the Spelling Checker from checking. This can
be useful when applied to transliterations or fake Latin (as in
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet).
Check Spelling as You Type
Turns on or off Nisus Writer Pros ability to draw a red squiggly line
beneath misspelled words (as you type).
Speech

Choose commands from the Speech submenu to have Nisus Writer Pro start or
stop speaking the selected text of your document.
Start Speaking
Causes Nisus Writer Pro to start speaking your text from the
location of your insertion point, or the selected text.
Stop Speaking
Causes Nisus Writer Pro to halt speaking your text.

Clipboards

Enables you to create and edit Clipboards as well as determine which is the
current Clipboard. A check mark in the menu indicates the current Clipboard.
New Clipboard
Opens the Clipboard preference dialog and creates a new Clipboard.
Edit Clipboards
Opens the Clipboard preference dialog.
Edit Current Clipboard
Opens the Current Clipboard for editing.
To open any Clipboard to edit its contents press A as you choose
its name from the Clipboards submenu.

Special Characters
Choose commands from the Special Characters submenus to insert various
characters in your document at the insertion point.
Arabic
Choose commands from the Arabic submenu to insert various
special Arabic characters in your document at the insertion point
including: Rial: ; Place of Sajdah: ; Sallallahou Alayhe
Wasallam: ; Ornate Left Parenthesis: ; Ornate Right
Parenthesis: ; Sign Alayhe Assallam: ; Sign Rahmatullah
Alayhe: ; Sign Radi Allahou Anhu: ; Sign Sallallahou Alayhe
Wassalam: ; Sign Takhallus: .
Currency
Choose commands from the Currency submenu to insert various
currency symbols in your document at the insertion point: Sheqel:
; Cent: ; Dollar: $; Euro: ; Florin: ; Baht: ; Rupees: ;
Generic: ; Mill: ; Pound: ; Rials: ;Won: ; Yen: .
Dashes and Hyphens
Choose commands from the Dashes and Hyphens submenu to
insert various dashes and hyphens in your document at the
insertion point: En Dash: ; Em Dash: ; Figure Dash: ;
Quotation Dash: ; Swung Dash: ; Hyphen: -; Non-Breaking
Hyphen: -; Soft Hyphen.
Greek
Choose commands from the Greek submenu to insert various
UPPERCASE and lowercase Greek alphabetics in your document at
the insertion point.
Hebrew
Choose commands from the Hebrew submenu to insert various
special Hebrew characters in your document at the insertion point.
Most of these characters require a pre-existing alphabetic character
to display.
Those that do not require such a character are: Letter Alef Lamed
Ligature ;Letter Lamed Holam Ligature ;Letter Shin with Shin
Dot Ligature ;Letter Sin with Sin Dot Ligature ;Letter Vav
Holam Ligature ;Letter Vav Shuruk Ligature ;Yiddish Letter
Double Vav ;Yiddish Letter Double Yod ;Yiddish Letter

Appendices

457
Double Yod Patach ;Yiddish Letter Kometz Alef ;Yiddish
Letter Vav Yod ;Punctuation Geresh ;Punctuation Gershayim
;Punctuation Maqaf ;Punctuation Paseq ;Punctuation Sof
Pasuq .
Those that do require a pre-existing alphabetic character include:
Point Dagesh Or Mapiq, Point Meteg, Point Rafe, Point Shin Dot,
Point Sin Dot, Vowel Point Hataf Patah, Vowel Point Hataf Segol,
Vowel Point Hiriq, Vowel Point Holam, Vowel Point Patah, Vowel
Point Qamatz, Vowel Point Qubutz, Vowel Point Segol, Vowel
Point Sheva, Vowel Point Tsere, Accent Darga, Accent Dehi,
Accent Etnahta, Accent Geresh, Accent Geresh Muqdam, Accent
Gershayim, Accent Iluy, Accent Mahapakh, Accent Merkah,
Accent Merkah Kefula, Accent Munah, Accent Ole, Accent Pashta,
Accent Pazer, Accent Qadma, Accent Qarneypara, Accent Revia,
Accent Segol, Accent Shalshelet, Accent Telisha Gedola, Accent
Telisha Qetana, Accent Tevir, Accent Tipeha, Accent Yerah Ben
Yomo, Accent Yetiv, Accent Zaqef Gadol, Accent Zaqef Qatan,
Accent Zarqa, Accent Zinor, Mark Masora Circle, Mark Upper Dot.
Math
Choose commands from the Math submenu to insert various
mathematical expressions in your document at the insertion point:
Fraction (1/4): ; Fraction: (1/3): ; Fraction: (1/2): ; Fraction:
(2/3): ; Fraction: (3/4): ; Multiply: ; Divide: ; Plus/Minus:
; Minus/Plus: ; Not Equals: ; Less Than or Equal To: ;
Greater Than or Equal To: ; Infinity: ; Squared: ; Cubed: ;
Square Root: ; Cube Root: .
Misc
Choose commands from the Misc submenu to insert various
arrows, geometric, and other symbols in your document at the
insertion point: Arrow Left , Arrow Up , Arrow Right , Arrow
Down , Arrow Wrap , Diamond , Diamond (Filled) , Circle ,
Circle (Filled) , Triangle , Arrowhead , Arrowhead (Filled) ,
Diamond Pattern , Box , Box (Checked) , Box (Xed) , Moon
, Star , Star (Filled) , Sun , Cloud , Lightning ,
Snowman , Female Sign , Male Sign , Happy Face , Sad
Face , Spade Suit , Diamond Suit , Club Suit , Heart Suit ,
Musical Clef (G) , Musical Note (Eighth) , Beamed Musical Note
(Sixteenth) .
Quotes
Choose commands from the Quotes submenu to insert various
arrows, geometric, and other symbols in your document at the
insertion point: Single Plain Quote ', Single Smart Quote (Open) ,
Single Smart Quote (Close) , Single Smart Quote (High Reversed
9) , Single Smart Quote (Low 9) , Double Plain Quote ", Double
Smart Quote (Open) , Double Smart Quote (Close) , Double
Smart Quote (Low 9) , Single Guillemet (Left Pointing) , Single
Guillemet (Right Pointing) , Guillemet (Left Pointing) ,
Guillemet (Right Pointing) , Corner Bracket (Left) , Corner
Bracket (Right) , White Corner Bracket (Left) , White Corner
Bracket (Right) .
Spaces
Choose commands from the Spaces submenu to insert various
arrows, geometric, and other symbols in your document at the
insertion point: Non-Breaking Space, Thin Space, Hair Space,
Zero Width Space, Non-breaking Zero Width Space, Zero Width
Joiner, Zero Width Non-Joiner.
Writing
Choose commands from the Writing submenu to insert various
arrows, geometric, and other symbols in your document at the
insertion point: Bullet , Lozenge , Copyright , Registered
Trademark , Trademark , Section Mark , Paragraph Mark ,
Dagger , Double Dagger , Degree , Per Mille , Left Half Ring
, Right Half Ring , Ellipses , Inverted Exclamation , Inverted
Question Mark , Interrobang , Broken Bar , Asterism .
Show Special Characters Palette
Opens the Special Characters palette enabling one click entry, with
the mouse or trackpad, of any special character itemized above.
Show Character Catalog
(Supplied by the System.) Opens the Systems Characters palette

458

Edit menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

from which you can choose to insert into your document any special
character or symbol in the System.
Customize Special Characters
Opens a dialog which enables you to modify the any special
characters symbol or name, as well as add new or remove existing
special characters. The changes you make appear in the appropriate
submenu as well as the Special Characters palette.

Insert menu
Use the Insert menu to add objects (images, etc.), formatting elements (page and column breaks,
sections, etc.) and numbering variables, footnotes and/or endnotes, tables of contents, indexes,
images and hypertext links to your document. Details of the total physical pages of this file, the date
it was last saved and printed (as a PDF) are at the bottom of the page with copyright information.
New Style

Commands from the New Style submenu enable you to create a new style for your
document. Using styles to format your documents is explained in detail beginning
on page 102.
Character Style Based on Selection
Changes the view of your document to Style Sheets and creates a
new Character style with the attributes of the selected text.
Paragraph Style Based on Selection
Changes the view of your document to Style Sheets and creates a
new Paragraph style with the attributes of the selected text.
Character Style
Changes the view of your document to Style Sheets and creates a
new character style.
Paragraph Style
Changes the view of your document to Style Sheets and creates a
new paragraph style.
List Style
Changes the view of your document to Style Sheets and creates a
new list style.
Show Style Library
Opens the Document Manager and displays the Style Library group
of files.
Import from Style Library
Presents a sheet that lists all the styles you have created and saved
in your Style Library group of the Document Manager and enables
you to check off those you wish to add to the active document.
Save to Style Library Presents a sheet that lists all the styles present in the active
document and enables you to save any of them to any one of
various style collections in the Style Library.

Special Character
Choose commands from the Special Character submenus to insert various
characters in your document at the insertion point. These submenus duplicate
those of the menu Edit > Special Characters which is described in detail on page
456.
Directionality Marker
Use the commands in the Directionality Marker submenu in bidirectional text to
embed an Implicit Directional Override. The different markers allow the
bidirectional character types to be overridden when required for special cases,
such as for part numbers, addresses and punctuation. These also allow for nested
directional overrides. These characters do not display or have any other semantic
effect.
Reverse Direction Marker
Enters a non-displaying character (that takes up no space) that
forces the following text to flow in the opposite direction from that of
the preceding text.
Left to Right Marker
Enters a non-displaying character (that takes up no space) that
forces the following text to flow left to right in the midst of right to
left text.
Right to Left Marker
Enters a non-displaying character (that takes up no space) that
forces the following text to flow right to left in the midst of left to
right text.
Page Break

Starts a new page immediately following the insertion point.

Column Break

Starts a new column immediately following the insertion point.

Glossary Entry Break

In a Glossary document, starts a new Glossary entry immediately following the

Appendices

459
insertion point. This command is only available in a Glossary type file as
illustrated in Figure 428 on page 407.
Section Break

Commands from the Section Break submenu enable you to start a new section
immediately following the insertion point.
Next Page
A new section begins on the following page.
Odd Page
A new section begins on the following odd page.
Even Page
A new section begins on the following even page.
Same Page
A new section begins at the insertion point on the current page.

Automatic Number
Choose commands from the Automatic Number submenu to insert into your
document numbers that automatically increment and sort.
Page Number
Inserts the number of the current page (of the current section) at
the insertion point in the active window.
Pages in Document
Inserts the total number of pages in the document at the insertion
point in the active window.
Section Number
Inserts the number of the current section at the insertion point in
the active window.
Pages in Section
Inserts the total number of pages in the current section at the
insertion point in the active window. The number of pages in this
little section dealing with the commands of the Insert menu is 2.
Character Count
Inserts the total number of characters in the document at the
insertion point in the active window. The number of characters in
this document is 1087308. This matches the information in the
Statistics palette.
Word Count
Inserts the total number of words in the document at the insertion
point in the active window. The number of words in this document
is 182758. This matches the information in the Statistics palette.
Paragraph Count
Inserts the total number of paragraphs in the document at the
insertion point in the active window. The number of paragraphs in
this document is 15447. This matches the information in the
Statistics palette.
Date and Time Choose commands from the Date and Time submenu to insert various date and
time options
Current Time
Inserts the current time into your document. If you set your time
stamp to display seconds, the the stamp updates approximately
every second. If you set your time stamp to display minutes, the
time stamp updates approximately every minute.
Current Date
Inserts the current date into your document. The date updates daily
after midnight.
Current Date & Time
Inserts the current time and date into your document. If you set
your time stamp to display seconds, the the stamp updates
approximately every second. If you set your time stamp to display
minutes, the time stamp updates approximately every minute. All
other time stamps update approximately every hour.
Fixed Current Time
Inserts the current time, that does not update, into your document.
Fixed Current Date
Inserts the current date, that does not update, into your document.
Fixed Current Date & Time
Inserts the current, static, time and date, into your document.
Document Creation Date
Inserts the date the document was created into your document.
This date does not update.
Document Creation Date & Time
Inserts the date and time the document was created into your
document. This date and time does not update.
Document Last Saved Date
Inserts the date the document was last saved. This displays its date
only when you save the file after insertion. It does not display the
previous time the file was saved. This updates every time you save.
Document Last Saved Date & Time
Inserts the date and time the document was last saved. This
displays its information only when you save the file after insertion.
It does not display the previous time the file was saved. This
updates every time you save the file.

460

Insert menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Document Last Printed Date

Inserts the date the document was last printed. This displays its
date only when you print the file after insertion. It does not display
the previous print time. This updates every time you print the file.
Document Last Printed Date & Time
Inserts the date and time the document was last printed. This
displays its information only when you print the file after insertion.
It does not display the previous time the file was printed. This
updates every time you print the file.
Custom Date & Time Displays a sheet enabling you to customize date and time formats.
Configure Date & Time Formats
Displays a sheet that enables you to access and customize the date
and time formats portion of the System Preferences.
Document Property
Choose commands from the Document Property submenu to insert various bits
of meta-information about your file.
Author
Inserts the author name as designated in the General portion of
the Nisus Writer Pro Preferences.
Company
Inserts the name of the company as designated in the Properties
dialog (choose the menu command File > Properties).
Copyright
Inserts the copyright information as designated in the Properties
dialog (choose the menu command File > Properties).
Title
Inserts the title as designated in the Properties dialog (choose the
menu command File > Properties).
Subject
Inserts the subject as designated in the Properties dialog (choose
the menu command File > Properties).
Keywords
Inserts the key words as designated in the Properties dialog
(choose the menu command File > Properties).
Comments
Inserts the comments as designated in the Properties dialog
(choose the menu command File > Properties).
File Name
Inserts the name of the file as it appears in the Title Bar (without its
extension: RTF, DOC, etc.).
File Name with Extension
Inserts the name of the file as it appears in the Title Bar (with its
extension: RTF, DOC, etc.).
File Path
Inserts the path to the file on the volume (hard drive) on which the
file was saved.
File Size (in Bytes)
Inserts the size of the file (in bytes). The size of this document saved
on disk (in Nisus Writer Pro) is 26263223 bytes.
File Size (in Kilobytes) Inserts the size of the file (rounded, in kilobytes). The size of this
document saved on disk (in Nisus Writer Pro) is 25648 kilobytes.
File Size (in Megabytes) Inserts the size of the file (rounded, in megabytes). The size of this
document saved on disk (in Nisus Writer Pro) is 25 megabytes.
Custom Property
Choose commands from the menu command Insert > Document
Property > Custom Property to insert into your document special
properties that you designate in the Properties dialog (choose the
menu command File > Properties).
Edit Properties
Opens the Properties dialog where you can enter and/or change any
of the properties you have set.
Merge Placeholder
Choose commands from the Merge Placeholder submenu to insert into your
document placeholders that you can use to fill with customized text as well as
merge a template with data. While you can create any merge placeholders you
want, the set that appears in the submenu are among the most common fields
that would be filled from the Apple supplied Address Book application: First
Name, Last Name, Email, Phone, Mobile Phone, Address, Address (street),
Address (city), Address (zip), Address (state), Address (country). Merging files
is explained in detail beginning on page 359.
Merge Record Number Inserts the placeholder for the number of the actual record in the
data document.
Other
Opens a dialog that allows you to choose from any of the fields in
the Apple supplied Address Book application, create a placeholder
of your own design, or create a placeholder that uses the output of
Perl code you create.

Appendices

461

Merge Document

Merges your open template file with data from the Apple supplied
Address Book application, your own comma-separated value data
document. You can chose to have your resulting document saved
individually, as one file, or printed.

Footnote

Inserts a footnote at the location of the insertion point. Footnotes are explained in
detail beginning on page 192.

Endnote

Inserts an endnote at the location of the insertion point. Endnotes are explained in
detail beginning on page 192.

Hyperlink

Use the commands in the Hyperlink submenu to add edit and remove hyperlinks
from your document.
Add Link
Displays a sheet that enables you to enter a URL and the clickable
text to insert in your document. If a URL is on the active Clipboard
that URL appears in the Link destination field.
Add Link to File
Displays the Open dialog enabling you to select a file on any of your
connected hard drives; when the link is clicked, the linked file opens
in the original application.
Edit Link
When hyperlinked text is selected, displays a sheet that enables you
to enter or modify a URL and the clickable text to insert in your
document.
Remove Link
Removes a hyperlink from selected text.

Bookmarks

Commands from the Bookmarks submenu enable you to mark a selection of text
to which you can jump and/or cross-reference. Bookmarks are explained in detail
beginning on page 221.
Add Bookmark
Creates a bookmark using selected text. If or when the bookmarked
text changes, the name of the bookmark also changes.
Add Bookmark As
Presents a dialog enabling you to name a bookmark of selected text.
If or when the bookmarked text changes, the name of the bookmark
remains unchanged.
Rename Bookmark
Presents a dialog enabling you to edit the name of bookmarks
created using Add Bookmark As.
Remove Bookmark
Removes a bookmark from selected text.
Show Bookmarks in Navigator
Displays all bookmarked text in a list to the left of the document
window. Clicking one of the items in the list moves the selection to
that marked text.

Cross-reference
Presents a dialog that enables you to add a cross-reference to the page,
paragraph, line, list item and/or bookmarked text or list item, or table,
footnote or endnote. Cross-references are explained in detail beginning on page
225.
Image

Displays the Open dialog from which you can choose an image to insert in your
document. Working with images in your documents is explained in detail
beginning on page 147. More commands related to creating image shapes in your
document appear in the Tools menu and are described on page 476.

View menu
Choose commands from the View menu to see your file in different ways.
Draft View

Displays your current document as free-flowing text, independent of how it would

appear printed on paper.

Page View

Displays your current document as it would appear printed on paper.

Style Sheet

Displays the various styles in your current document and enables you to edit
them.

Full Screen

Displays your current document so that it fills the entire screen, hiding the Dock
(if it is visible) and the Menu Bar.
To view the Menu Bar and the Dock move your pointer up to the area where the
Menu Bar would be visible. The amount of time required to have the Menu Bar
appear is set in the General preferences of Nisus Writer Pro.
You can continue to use the commands of Nisus Writer Pro by using the Menu
Keys equivalents.
You can also exit Full Screen view choosing another view from the View menu, by
pressing the esc (escape) key or by choosing Exit Full Screen from the contextual

462

View menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

menu that appears when you press 6 or right click your mouse or secondary
click your trackpad in the window.
Zoom In

Doubles the display size of your document.

Zoom Out

Decreases the display size of your document by 50%.

Zoom

Choose commands from the menu View > Zoom to display your document at
various preset percentages 800%, 400%, 200%, 125%, 100%, 75%, 50%, or 25%;
to set your own percentage (Other). In addition
Show Text Width
Shows the maximum width of the text of your document in Page
View, hiding the margins.
Show Page Width
Shows the maximum width of your document in Page View.
Show Entire Page
Shows the entire width and height of your document in Page View.

Rulers

Choose commands from the Rulers submenu to display a horizontal and/or

vertical ruler as well as determine the kinds of units the rulers count in.
Show Rulers
Shows or hides whatever rulers are checked in the portion of the
menu immediately below.
Horizontal Ruler
Displays a ruler (with certain paragraph formatting tools) at the top
of the Nisus Writer Pro document window.
Vertical Ruler
Displays a ruler along the left edge of the Nisus Writer Pro
document window.
Other commands of the Rulers submenu enable you to choose the
units displayed on the ruler. You can choose from among
Centimeters (cm), Inches (in), Millimeters (mm), Picas (pc), or
Points (pt) .

Toolbar

Choose commands from the menu View > Toolbar to customize the display of the
Toolbar.
Show Toolbar
Turns on or off the display of a bar of tools at the top of the Nisus
Writer Pro document window.
Customize Toolbar
Opens a sheet that enables you to customize the appearance of the
Toolbar.
Add Custom Toolbar Item
Opens a dialog that enables you to add any command on the Nisus
Writer Pro menus (and any associated image) to the Toolbar. Adding
a custom Toolbar item is explained in detail beginning on page 410.

Tooldrawer

Choose commands from the menu View > Tooldrawer to customize the display of
the Tooldrawer.
Show Tooldrawer
Turns on or off the display of a drawer of tools to the right or left
side of the Nisus Writer Pro document window (depending on the
side set in the General preferences of Nisus Writer Pro).
Attach on Left Side
Causes the Tooldrawer to display on the left side of the document
window if you have set the General preferences of Nisus Writer Pro
to have it display on the right (or the reverse). This command can
override the preference on a per-window basis.
Show Palette Library
Opens the Palette Library window which allows you to define groups
of palettes for your work.

Navigator
Choose commands from the menu View > Navigator to customize its display.
Show/Hide Navigator Turns on or off the display of a (resizable) pane on the left side
Nisus Writer Pro document window that lists all the bookmarks or
table of contents entries in the document.
Attach on Left Side
Causes the Navigator to display on the left side of the document
window. Toggle this off to have it display on the right.
Show/Hide Bookmarks Causes the Navigator to display or hide the bookmarks in your
document.
Attach on Left Side
Causes the Navigator to display the table of contents of your
document
Comments

Opens a pane on the side of your document window to display whatever comments
appear in your document.

Tracked Changes
Opens a pane on the side of your document window to display whatever changes
have been tracked in your document.
Go to Page

Opens a dialog that enables you to enter any page number of your document to
which you wish to jump. You can choose between the logical or physical page

Appendices

463
number. If you have multiple sections in your document jumping to the logical
page number takes you to that page in the current section.
Go to Header

Moves your insertion point to the closest header area and highlights all text there.

Go to Footer

Moves your insertion point to the closest footer area and highlights all text there.

Go to Note (Text/Reference)
When a footnote or endnote reference marker is selected this moves your insertion
point to the associated note text and selects it. When in the note text, it moves
your insertion point to select the footnote/endnote reference marker.
Page Guides

Choose commands from the menu View > Page Guides to affect the functioning
and display of page guides.
Show Page Guides
When in Page View, displays a that defines the margins in the Nisus
Writer Pro document window. It also indicates where to click to add
text for a header or footer.
Lock Page Guides
When in Page View, prevents dragging the line around the margins
in the Nisus Writer Pro document window.

Show Invisibles
Displays various markings in the text to indicate location of spaces, tabs, inserted
page and section breaks, and Return characters.
Show Paragraph Formatting Icons
Displays small ruler and paragraph icons similar to those that appear on the
Statusbar. These icons contain all the formatting information of the current ruler
or paragraph level style. They can be dragged and dropped elsewhere in your
document thereby applying the relevant formatting elsewhere. Clicking the icon
displays the same menu command as clicking its matching icon on the Statusbar.
Line Numbers

Choose commands from the Line Numbers submenu to cause numbers to appear
in Page View (outside the margin) to the left of each line of text. The commands are
each exclusive of one another. Line numbers are only meaningful in Page View as
there are no hard lines in Draft View and Full Screen View. When in Draft View
choose Show Paragraph Numbers This Section.
Not Shown This Section
Prevents line numbers from appearing in the section where the
insertion point appears.
Continue From Previous Section
Causes the line numbers to display and continue numbering from
the previous section (unless the previous section does not display
numbers in which case the numbers begin again at the number
designated in the Line Numbers palette).
Restart This Section
Causes the line numbers to display (in the section where the
insertion point appears) beginning at the number designated in the
Line Numbers palette.
Restart Every Page
Causes the displayed line numbers to restart numbering on every
page beginning at the number designated in the Line Numbers
palette.
Show Paragraph Numbers This Section
Causes the paragraph numbers (which, depending on the width of
your window, may be the same as line numbers) to display (in the
section where the insertion point appears) beginning at the number
designated in the Line Numbers palette.
Restart Paragraph Numbers This Section
Causes the displayed paragraph numbers to restart numbering in
the selected section.
Show Line Numbers Palette
Opens the Line Numbers palette so you can customize the
appearance and other settings of the line numbers.

Hyphenation

Choose commands from the menu View > Hyphenation to set the way Apples
internal hyphenation dictionary controls the display of your text.
Disabled
Prevents all the text of your document from displaying as
hyphenated based on Apples internal hyphenation dictionary.
Manual
Disables automatic hyphenation and only displays soft-hyphen
characters as needed.
Automatic - Normal
Causes all the text of your document to display as hyphenated
based on Apples internal hyphenation dictionary.

464

View menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Automatic - More Often Causes all the text of your document to display as hyphenated more
often than Apples internal hyphenation dictionary based on the
hyphenation factor, which is dependent on the ratio of used
space on a line as opposed to the amount of white space at the tail.

Format menu
Choose commands from the Format menu to alter the display of text of your document. Using styles
to format your documents is explained in detail beginning on page 102.
Remove Attributes Except Styles
Removes all formatting, except language from selected text except for applied
Styles.
Remove Attributes and Styles
Removes all formatting (both character and paragraph, but not List styles and
not language) from selected text and applies the Normal style to the selection.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any Attributes. In
this instance it functions the same as having the Attribute Sensitive checkbox
unchecked.
Character Style
Choose commands from the menu Format > Character Style to create and apply
styles to your document. This is the easiest way to control the formatting of your
document. The styles that appear beneath the second dotted line are those that
exist in the document (the ones described here exist in the Nisus New File shipped
with Nisus Writer Pro). You can add or remove these styles. The styles are based
on standard HTML editing conventions.
New Character Style Functions the same as the menu command Insert > New Style >
Character Style by changing the view of your document to Style
Sheets and creating a new character style.
Redefine Style From Selection
When applied to a selection the attributes of which are controlled by
a style sheet, any modifications to the attributes are applied to all
text with that style applied.
Remove Style
Removes the Character Style that matches that of the selection.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Character Style. In this instance it functions the same as having
the Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Select Style Range
Selects the entire current range of text with the current attribute(s).
Select All Style
Selects all text in the document with the current attribute(s).
Select Next in Same Style
Selects the next occurrence of text in the document with the current
attribute(s).
Emphatic
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the emphatic style(usually Italic in HTML
documents) to selected text.
Endnote Reference
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes to the Endnote Reference marker.
Footnote Reference
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes to the Footnote Reference marker.
Strong
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the strong style(usually Bold in HTML
documents) to selected text
Paragraph Style
Choose commands from the menu command Format > Paragraph Style to create
and apply styles to your document. This is the easiest way to control the
formatting of your document. The styles that appear beneath the second dotted
line are those that exist in the document (the ones described here exist in the
Nisus New File shipped with Nisus Writer Pro). You can add or remove these
styles. The styles are based on standard HTML editing conventions.
In addition when you add a table to your document Nisus Writer Pro creates a new
style called Table Cell; when you add a comment to your document Nisus Writer
Pro creates a new style called Comment.

Appendices

465

New Paragraph Style Functions the same as the menu command Insert > New Style >

Paragraph Style by changing the view of your document to Style

Sheets and creating a new paragraph style.
Redefine Style From Selection
When applied to a selection the attributes of which are controlled by
a style sheet, any modifications to the attributes are applied to all
text with that style applied.
Remove Style
Removes the Paragraph Style that matches that of the selection.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Paragraph Style. In this instance it functions the same as having
the Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Select Style Range
Selects the entire current range of text with the current attribute(s).
Select All Style
Selects all text in the document with the current attribute(s).
Select Next in Same Style
Selects the next occurrence of text in the document with the current
attribute(s).
Block Quote
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Block Quote style to selected text.
Footer/Header
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Header/Footer style to selected text.
Heading 1
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Heading 1 style to selected text.
Heading 2
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Heading 2 style to selected text.
Heading 3
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Heading 3 style to selected text.
Heading 4
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Heading 4 style to selected text.
Heading 5
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Heading 5 style to selected text.
Heading 6
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Heading 6 style to selected text.
Normal
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Normal style to selected text. This is the
style of text in your Nisus New File when you first start typing in
Nisus Writer Pro.
Title
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Title style to selected text.
Note Style

Choose commands from the menu Format > Note Style to apply styles to your
document. This is the easiest way to control the formatting of your document.
These styles are based on standard HTML editing conventions. These styles only
appear when and if you insert an endnote or footnote in your text.
Redefine Style From Selection
When applied to a selection the attributes of which are controlled by
a style sheet, any modifications to the attributes are applied to all
text with that style applied.
Set Custom Note Reference
Enables you to use an asterisk or other custom character to mark
several or all footnotes or endnotes with the same symbol.
Remove Custom Note Reference
Removes whatever custom character you used to mark any
footnotes or endnotes.
Select All Style
Selects all text in the document with the current attribute(s).
Select Next in Same Style
Selects the next occurrence of text in the document with the current
attribute(s).
Endnote
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Endnote style to selected text.
Footnote
A style supplied in the shipped Nisus New File, applies the user
defined attributes of the Footnote style to selected text.

Language

Choose from available languages to have Nisus Writer Pro check spelling, etc.
according to that language. Those above the first separator line refer to your most
recently used languages. The next list of languages represent those you have

466

Format menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

included in your Languages preferences in Nisus Writer Pro. Below that are user
defined languages. Below Edit Languages you may see additional languages. If
you receive a file with a User Language from someone and that User Language
does not match one you have added to your copy of Nisus Writer Pro, that
Language name appears at the bottom of the Language submenu.
Language is an attribute of your text, not the document. If done correctly,
changing the language of a part of the text changes the input method (keyboard),
dictionary and/or thesaurus (if available) and font (if appropriate).
Remove Language Attribute
Removes any user applied languages, allowing the system language
or languages defined by styles to be used instead.
The command is enabled whenever the selection has a particular
language attribute applied.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Language. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Edit Languages
Opens the Languages preferences dialog in which you can modify
existing or create new language settings.
Font

Choose commands from the Font submenus of the Format menu to apply to your
text any of the fonts you have that your version of the OS can display. These are
generally in any of the following folders
/Library/Fonts
~/Library/Fonts
/Network/Library/Fonts
/System/Library/Fonts
and any fonts in the Fonts folder of the OS 9.x, Classic System Folder so long as
they are not being managed by a Classic font management tool.
Choose a font from the various submenus of the Font submenu to apply it to the
current selection. If you have no text selected, Nisus Writer Pro applies the font
change at the insertion point, and as you type, the text displays in the font you
have chosen.
The fonts appear in the list displayed in their own font (WYSIWYG) if you set your
Appearance Preferences of Nisus Writer Pro to do this (see Choose Various
Display Options for Your Documents on page 388). Displaying the Font
submenus this way causes initial activation of the application to take longer.
Show Fonts
Opens the Fonts panel which allows you to choose from various sets
of fonts or font families, the typefaces they support, and their
various sizes.
Show Typography Panel
Opens the System Typography panel. Depending on the
characteristics of the font of selected text various options become
available. You can learn more at the Apple Support site.
Remove Font Attribute
Removes any user applied fonts from the selection, allowing the
System font or the underlying font defined by styles and/or the
Nisus New File to be used instead.
The command is enabled whenever the selection has a particular
font attribute applied.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Font. In this instance it functions the same as having the Attribute
Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular attribute).
All Fonts
Displays all the fonts you have that your version of the OS can
display.
Nisus Writer Pro lists all available fonts in the submenu which you
can apply to the current selection. A check mark precedes the
currently selected font. If you select a range of text displaying
multiple fonts a dash appears before those fonts which are present
in the selection.
Document Fonts
Displays all the fonts you are using in the active document.
English
Displays all the English language fonts you have that your version
of the OS can display.
Favorite Fonts
Displays the fonts you have added to your Favorites collection using
the menu command Gear > Add to Favorites in the Fonts panel.

Appendices

467

Recent Fonts
Clear Menu
Font Face

Bold
Italic
Outline
Shadow
Size

Displays the ten fonts you have used most recently.

Clears the Recent Fonts submenu.

Choose commands from the Font Face submenu of the Format menu to alter the
display of the selected font.
Displays selected text in bold face.
Displays selected text in italic face.
Displays selected text with an outline.
Displays selected text with a shadow you can customize in the Font
panel (opened by choosing the menu command Format > Font >
Show Fonts).

Choose a point size from the Size submenu to apply that size to the current
selection. If you have text selected, Nisus Writer Pro applies the size change at the
insertion point, and as you type, the text displays in the size you have chosen.
Other
Enables you to set the point size of your text to any point size.
Remove Font Size Attribute
Removes any user applied sizes from the selection, allowing the size
defined by any underlying styles to be used instead.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Font Size. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Increase
Enlarges the size of the current selection in one-point increments.
Increase By
Enlarges the size of the current selection by a specified number of
points.
Decrease
Diminishes the size of the current selection in one-point increments.
Decrease By
Diminishes the size of the current selection by a specified number of
points.

Character Case
Choose commands from the Character Case submenu to alter the appearance of
the case of the current selection. If you have text selected, Nisus Writer Pro applies
the case change at the insertion point, and as you type, the text displays in the
style you have chosen.
These commands are not to be confused with the commands with similar names
that appear in the menu Edit > Convert. These alter the appearance of the
characters but not their Unicode values. If you copy and/or paste the text only at
a different location (either in Nisus Writer Pro or some other application) the
underlying characters will display.
Remove Case Change Attribute
Causes text to display according to the physical settings of the
keyboard (1 pressed or not, etc.).
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Case Change. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Display as lowercase
Causes text to display as lowercase despite the settings of the
keyboard (1 pressed or not, etc.).
Display as UPPERCASE
Causes text to display as UPPERCASE despite the settings of the
keyboard (1 pressed or not, etc.).
Display as Capitalize
Causes text to display with each word capitalized despite the
settings of the keyboard (1 pressed or not, etc.).
Display as SMALL CAPS
Causes all lowercase text to display as if it were in a smaller size of
the uppercase characters of the font.
Underline

Choose commands from the Underline submenu of the to apply and/or remove
various underline attributes to or from selected text.
None
Removes any and all Underline attributes from selected text
whether the underline is part of the styles definition as set in the
Style Sheet view or applied in addition to the style.
Remove Underline Attribute
Removes any additional underline attributes applied to the text that

468

Format menu

Single or Double
Show Underline Colors

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

are not part of the styles definition as set in the Style Sheet view.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Underline. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Draws either a single or a double line under selected text.
Opens the Colors panel enabling you to set the color of the
Underline.

Strikethrough
Choose commands from the menu Format > Strikethrough to apply and/or
remove various strikethrough attributes to or from selected text.
None
Removes any and all Strikethrough attributes from selected text
whether the strikethrough is part of the styles definition as set in
the Style Sheet view or applied in addition to the style.
Remove Strikethrough Attribute
Removes any additional strikethrough attributes applied to the text
that are not part of the styles definition as set in the Style Sheet
view.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Strikethrough. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Single or Double
Draws either a single or a double line through selected text.
Show Strikethrough Colors
Opens the Colors panel enabling you to set the color of the
Strikethrough.
Baseline
Choose commands from the Baseline submenu to raise or lower selected text.
No Super/Sub
Returns the selected Super or Subscripted text to the baseline of the
surrounding text (unless some other baseline attribute has been
added).
Remove Super/Sub Attribute
Returns the selected Super or Subscripted text to the baseline of the
surrounding text (unless some other baseline attribute has been
added).
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Super/Sub. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Superscript and Subscript
Places the current selection five points above or below the baseline
of the surrounding text and makes the text appear smaller (without
changing the actual size).
Remove Baseline Attribute
Returns the selected text to the baseline of the surrounding text
(unless some other baseline attribute has been added).
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Baseline. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Raise Baseline and Lower Baseline
Raises or lowers the current selection in one point increments above
or below the current height.
Raise Baseline By and Lower Baseline By
Enables you to raise or lower selected text by a specified number of
points.
Ligature

Choose commands from the Ligature submenu to cause selected text to use
ligatures (characters (such as ) consisting of two or more letters or characters
joined together). Various fonts support more or less ligatures.
Use Default
Uses the basic set of ligatures built into most fonts.
Remove Ligature Attribute
Removes the ligature attribute from selected text (unless some other
ligature attribute has been added).
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any

Appendices

469

Use None
Use All

Ligature. In this instance it functions the same as having the

Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Prevents any connecting of characters.
Uses the greatest available number of ligatures built into a font.

Kern

Choose commands from the Kern menu to cause selected text to be squeezed
closer or spread further apart. Kerning affects the space to the right of the
character(s) selected.
Use None
Removes any squeezing or spreading of selected text (unless some
other baseline attribute has been added i.e. based on a style defined
in Style Sheet view).
Remove Kern Attribute
Removes any squeezing or spreading of text.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Kerning. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Tighten
Squeezes selected text closer together.
Loosen
Spreads selected text further apart.
Tighten By
Squeezes selected text closer together by a specified number of
points.
Loosen By
Spreads selected text closer together by a specified number of
points.

Paragraph

Choose commands from the Paragraph submenu to control the shape of

paragraphs.
Remove Paragraph Attributes
Removes any attributes assigned to the selected paragraph that are
not part of that paragraphs Style Sheet.
Align Left
Aligns text along the left edge of the line wrap area.
Align Right
Aligns text along the right edge of the line wrap area.
Align Center
Centers text around an invisible line between the left and right line
wrap indicators.
Align Justify
Spreads text evenly between the left and right line wrap indicators
so that it touches both sides.
Natural Writing Direction
Causes text to flow in the natural direction for the language
associated with the text.
Text direction is a function of the language selected. Each language
has a natural direction of its own. You can override this direction
of a paragraph within a section of text designated as being in a
particular language (and therefore flowing in a particular direction)
by using this and the following controls.
Left to Right Direction Causes the primary direction of the paragraph to flow from left to
right.
Right to Left Direction Causes the primary direction of the paragraph to flow from right to
left.
Prevent Widows & Orphans
Causes the text of the first and last lines of a paragraph to appear
with at least one other line of that paragraph if it would otherwise
appear on a page or column by itself. This command only displays
its effects in Page View.
Keep Paragraph Together
This causes the selected paragraph to appear on one page, moving
the entire text of the paragraph to the following page, if as much as
one line of it must display on that page. This command only
displays its effects in Page View.
Keep With Next Paragraph
Causes the selected paragraph to stay with the succeeding
paragraph (if that paragraph must move to the following page). This
command only displays its effects in Page View.
Prevent Hyphenation
Disables hyphenation on a per-paragraph basis. It cannot override
the View menu to turn hyphenation on for a single paragraph, but
can override the View menu to turn hyphenation off for a
paragraph.

470

Format menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Show Paragraph Borders Palette

Opens the Paragraph Borders palette so you can add and modify
borders of selected paragraphs.
Show Paragraph Shading Palette
Opens the Paragraph Shading palette so you can add and modify
shading of selected paragraphs.
Paragraph Spacing
Choose commands from the Paragraph Spacing submenu to cause lines of
selected text to spread themselves vertically in various ways. Line height, known
to typesetters as leading (because of the pieces of lead placed between the lines of
type) refers to the vertical distance between the top of one line and the top of the
following line.
You can achieve more precise spacing by using the Paragraph palette.
Single Space Lines
Spaces the lines so that the minimal amount of leading is used.
1.5 Space Lines
Spaces the lines so that the minimal amount of leading plus one
half line more is used.
Double Space Lines
Spaces the lines so that double the amount of leading in Single is
used.
Triple Space Lines
Spaces the lines so that triple the amount of leading in Single is
used.
Fixed Line Spacing
Toggles on or off preventing selected paragraphs from spreading if
taller characters appear in a line of text.
Increase Space Before Paragraph
Increases the space before the selected paragraph one point at a
time.
Decrease Space Before Paragraph
Decreases the space before the selected paragraph one point at a
time.
Increase Space After Paragraph
Increases the space after the selected paragraph one point at a time.
Decrease Space After Paragraph
Decreases the space after the selected paragraph one point at a
time.
Paragraph Indents
Choose commands from the Paragraph Indents submenu to modify the front and
rear indents of selected paragraphs.
You can achieve more precise spacing by using the Paragraph palette.
Increase First Line Indent
Increases the first line indent of the selected paragraph(s) by
quarter-inch intervals, whether the ruler displays inches or any
other measurement option.
Decrease First Line Indent
Decreases the first line indent of the selected paragraph(s) by
quarter-inch intervals, whether the ruler displays inches or any
other measurement option.
Increase Hanging Indent
Increases the hanging indent of the selected paragraph(s) by
quarter-inch intervals, whether the ruler displays inches or any
other measurement option.
Decrease Hanging Indent
Decreases the first line indent of the selected paragraph(s) by
quarter-inch intervals, whether the ruler displays inches or any
other measurement option.
Increase Both Left/Right Indents
Depending on whether the selected paragraph(s) are left to right or
right to left, increases both the left or right indents by quarter-inch
intervals, whether the ruler displays inches or any other
measurement option.
Decrease Both Left/Right Indents
Depending on whether the selected paragraph(s) are left to right or
right to left, decreases both the left or right indents by quarter-inch
intervals, whether the ruler displays inches or any other
measurement option.

Appendices

471

Increase Right/left Indent

Depending on whether the selected paragraph(s) are left to right or
right to left, increases the right or left indent by quarter-inch
intervals, whether the ruler displays inches or any other
measurement option.
Decrease Right/left Indent
Depending on whether the selected paragraph(s) are left to right or
right to left, decreases the right or left indent by quarter-inch
intervals, whether the ruler displays inches or any other
measurement option.
Remove Tab Stops
Removes all tab stops on the ruler.
Add Tab Stop
Displays the Edit Tab sheet enabling you to add a tab at any
location on the ruler.
Lists

Choose commands from the Lists submenu to cause selected text to have bullets
or various sequences of numbers before it (or to remove those numbers).
Additional list styles you create appear above New List Style. Creating and
using lists in your documents is explained in detail beginning on page 48.
Restart Numbering
Restarts the numbering sequence for every paragraph that is
selected.
Continue Numbering from Previous
Resumes the numbering sequence from the last number or letter
before any break was introduced.
Use None
Removes any of the numbers that have been automatically created.
Select Style Range
Selects the entire current range of text with the current attribute(s).
Select All Style
Selects all text in the document with the current attribute(s).
Bullet List
Uses single bullets to begin each paragraph.
Headings
Uses (European) Arabic numerals (1, 1.1, 1.1.1, etc.) to number and
causes the numbers to appear at the far left (or right in right to left
sections), i.e. along the margin. Designed to be used in conjunction
with the Heading 1, etc. styles.
Lettered List
Uses letters to begin each paragraph.
Number List
Uses numbers to begin each paragraph.
Outline
Makes the numbering sequence like an outline.
Tiered List
Resembles the Headings list, but is not designed to work in
conjunction with the Heading 1, etc. styles.
New List Style
Creates a new list style.
Edit List Styles
Changes the view of your document to Style Sheets and enables you
to edit the selected list style.

Increase Indent Moves the left indent and first line indent markers in at quarter inch increments.
If you choose this command repeatedly, the indents continue in one-quarter inch
increments. If you have your ruler set to something other than inches, the
increment is appropriate for the rulers unit type.
Decrease Indent Moves the first line indent and left line indent out a quarter inch. If you choose
this command repeatedly, the indent and the left line wrap continue in onequarter inch increments (until both are flush left). If you have your ruler set to
something other than inches, the increment is appropriate for the rulers unit
type.
Highlight

Use commands of the Highlight submenu to add highlight color to selected text.
Unlike the Highlight button on the Toolbar, the Highlight submenu does not have
an associated default highlight color. It is primarily intended for assigning
Keyboard Shortcuts to the colors you use most often. The colors available are
None (which clears any highlighting present), Yellow, Pink, Blue, Green, Cyan
and Gray.
Remove Highlight Attribute
Removes any highlighting present in selected text.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Highlight. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Show Highlight Colors
Opens the Colors panel enabling you to change the color of the
highlight to any color you can point to).

472

Format menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Text Color

Use commands of the Text Color submenu to add color to the characters of
selected text. The default colors available are: Black, Brown, Dark Red, Red,
Purple, Orange, Fuchsia, Dark Green, Green, Yellow, Dark Blue, Blue, Teal,
Cornflower Blue, Cyan, Dark Gray, Gray, and Light Gray.
Remove Text Color
Removes any text color present in selected text.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Text Color. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Show Text Colors
Opens the Colors panel enabling you to change the color of selected
text to any color you can point to.

Background Color
Use commands of the Background Color submenu to add printable color to the
background of any selected text in your document. The default colors available
are: Black, Brown, Dark Red, Red, Purple, Orange, Fuchsia, Dark Green, Green,
Yellow, Dark Blue, Blue, Teal, Cornflower Blue, Cyan, Dark Gray, Gray, and
Light Gray.
Remove Background Color
Removes any background color present in selected text.
When in the Find/Replace window this command displays as Any
Text Color. In this instance it functions the same as having the
Attribute Sensitive checkbox unchecked (for that particular
attribute).
Show Background Colors
Opens the Colors panel enabling you to change the background
color of selected text to any color you can point to.

Table menu
Use commands of the Table menu and its submenus to insert and modify your tables in Nisus
Writer Pro. Working with tables is explained in detail beginning on page 197.
New Table

Inserts a new table.

Convert to Table
Converts selected tab delimited text to a table.
Copy Table Text
Copies all the text in selected cells of a table and enables you to paste elsewhere
the information as text (without its table formatting).
Insert

Choose commands from the Insert submenu to insert columns and/or rows to
existing tables.
Column to the Left
Adds a column to the left of the column in which the insertion point
appears.
Column to the Right
Adds a column to the right of the column in which the insertion
point appears.
Row Above
Inserts a row above the row in which the insertion point appears.
Row Below
Inserts a row below the row in which the insertion point appears.

Select

Table
Rows
Columns
Cells
Delete

Table
Rows
Columns
Cells

Choose commands from the Select submenu to select an entire table or various
portions of it.
Selects the entire table.
Expands the selection to include all the rows in which the insertion
point appears.
Expands the selection to include all the columns in which the
insertion point appears.
Expands the selection to include all the text in all the cells in which
the insertion point appears.
Choose commands from the Delete submenu to delete an entire table or various
portions of it.
Deletes the entire table.
Deletes all the rows in which the insertion point appears.
Deletes all the columns in which the insertion point appears.
Deletes all the content from cells in which there is a selection. If an
entire row or columns text is selected, this removes the designated
row or column, not only the text.

Getting Started

[Referenced content is missing.] (Macro menu)

Clear Cell Content

473

Deletes all text from selected cells. If an entire row or columns text
is selected, this removes only the text and not the designated row or
column.

Sort Rows

Choose commands from the Sort Rows submenu to sort the rows of a table based
on a selected column.
Sort By Selected Column Ascending (A-Z)
Sorts rows so that the lowest value appears at the top and highest
at the bottom.
Sort By Selected Column Descending (Z-A)
Sorts rows so that the highest value appears at the top and lowest
at the bottom.
Reverse
Reverses the sequence of selected rows so that the last appears first,
etc.
Randomize (shuffle)
Changes the sequence so that selected rows appear in a random
shuffle.

Merge Cells

Merges selected cells.

Split Cells

Presents a dialog that allows you to determine how you want to split selected cells.

Align Table

Choose commands from the Align Table submenu to set the horizontal alignment
of the selected table on the page.
Align Left
Aligns the table along the left line wrap indicator.
Align Right
Aligns the table along the right line wrap indicator.
Align Center
Aligns the table centered between the two line wrap indicators.

Align Cells
Choose commands from the Align Cells submenu to align the contents of cells.
Align Left
Aligns the contents of a cell along its left edge.
Align Right
Aligns the contents of a cell along its right edge.
Center
Aligns the contents of a cell along its imaginary center line.
Justified
Spreads the contents of a cell so that its contents fill the cell evenly.
Top
Suspends the text from the top of the cell.
Bottom
Rests the text just above the baseline of the cell
Middle
Centers the text evenly between the top and the baseline of the cell.
Distribute Rows Evenly
Resize selected rows so they are all the same height.
Distribute Columns Evenly
Resize selected columns so they are all the same width.
Fit to Contents
Resize the table so that the cells are no larger than they need to be to display their
contents (including padding).
Fit to Page

Resize the table so that the cells expand to fill the entire page regardless of how
much space each cell needs to display its contents.

Tools menu
Choose commands from the Tools menu to add comments to your document, track changes that
you or others make to your document, add tables of contents, indices and bibliographies to your
document as well as add and manipulate various floating shapes (graphics) to your document.
Comments

Choose commands from the Comments submenu to add comments to and

manage comments in your documents. Comments are explained in detail
beginning on page 333.
Add Comment
Adds a comment to your document, opening the Comments pane if
it is hidden.
Remove Comments in Selection
Removes all comments associated with selected text.
Show Comments
Alternately either shows or hides the Comments pane (and any
indication that comments appear in your document).
Show Comments Pane Alternately either shows or hides the Comments pane.
Highlight Comments in Text
Alternately either shows or hides the comments in your text without
opening the Comments pane.
Comment Display Options
Opens a floating windoid that enables you to set a variety of display
options for your comments.

474

Tools menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Go to Comment Text

Moves your insertion point from a selected bit of commented text in

your document, to the Comments drawer (opening it if necessary)
and selecting the appropriate comment.
Go to Next Comment
Moves your insertion point to the next comment in your document,
scrolls the document to display that page and highlights the
commented text.
Go to Previous Comment
Moves your insertion point to the previous comment in your
document, scrolls the document to display that page and highlights
the commented text.
Collapse Comments
Collapses the current comment.
Collapse All Comments Collapses all comments in the document.
Expand Comments
Expands the current comment.
Expand All Comments Expands all comments in the document.
Track Changes Choose commands from the Track Changes submenu to monitor alterations to
and manage changes to your documents. Track Changes is explained in detail
beginning on page 345.
Track Changes
Turns on/off the monitoring of changes to your document and
opens the Tracked Changes pane.
Show Changes
Alternately either shows or hides the Tracked Changes pane (and
any indication that changes appear in your document).
Show Changes Pane
Alternately either shows or hides the Tracked Changes pane.
Highlight Changes in Text
Alternately either shows or hides the changes in your text without
opening the Tracked Changes pane.
Tracking and Display Options
Opens a floating windoid that enables you to set a variety of display
options for your tracked changes.
Review Changes
Opens a window and scans the document for changes, enabling you
to appraise the changes made to the document and accept or reject
them without opening the Tracked Changes pane.
Go to Next Change
Moves your insertion point to the next change in your document,
scrolls the document to display that page and highlights the
changed text.
Go to Previous Change Moves your insertion point to the previous change in your
document, scrolls the document to display that page and highlights
the changed text.
Accept Changes in Selection
Accepts the change in the selection, removing the change highlight
and corresponding note in the Tracked Changes pane.
Reject Changes in Selection
Rejects the change in the selection, restoring the original text and/
or formatting and removes the change highlight and corresponding
note in the Tracked Changes pane.
Accept All Changes Accepts all changes in the document, removing the change
highlights and corresponding notes in the Tracked Changes pane.
Reject All Changes
Rejects all changes in the document, restoring the original text and/
or formatting and removing the change highlights and
corresponding notes in the Tracked Changes pane.
Table of Contents
Choose commands from the Table of Contents submenu to mark text for, and to
create a table of contents of and for your document. Tables of contents are
explained in detail beginning on page 231.
Include in TOC
Marks the selected text for inclusion in a table of contents. You can
mark text for the table of contents to nine levels deep.
Remove from TOC
Removes the selected text from inclusion in a table of contents.
Show TOC in Navigator
Displays all text marked for the current table of contents in a
hierarchical and collapsible list to the left of the document window.
Clicking one of the items in the list moves the selection to that
marked text.
Insert TOC
Generates the Table of Contents using marked text and places it at
the insertion point.
Rebuild TOC
Rebuilds the Table of Contents in your document.

Appendices

475

Configure TOC Styles

Default TOC

Presents a dialog enabling you to determine the attributes of your

Table of Contents.
The command checked beneath Configure TOC Styles indicates
the name of the current Table of Contents among those that exist in
the document. This is the Table of Contents that is active,
highlighted (in the text), and will be inserted when you choose
Insert TOC. The active Table of Contents is the one to which text
will be included when you choose one of the various levels of the
submenu Include in TOC.

Index

Choose commands from the Index submenu to mark text for, and to create an
index of and for your document. Indexing is explained in detail beginning on page
242.
Index
Marks the selected text for inclusion in an index.
Index As
Presents a dialog enabling you to index the selected text (or all
expressions that match it) as a different term.
Additional Index As
Allows you to add an additional Index As reference to selected text.
Index Using Word List
Presents a dialog enabling you to open a word list file. Nisus
Writer Pro then uses the terms of the word list to search your
document. When items in the word list are found every occurrence
is marked for the index.
Remove Indexing
Removes the selected text from inclusion in the index
Insert Index
Presents a dialog enabling you to determine which index to display
and in how many columns. It then places the generated index at the
location of the insertion point.
Rebuild Index
Regenerates the index adding text newly marked for the index.
Configure Index Styles
Presents a dialog enabling you to determine the attributes of your
Index.
Default Index
The command checked beneath Configure Index Styles indicates
the name of the current Index among those that exist in the
document. This is the Index that is active, highlighted (in the text),
and the one that will be inserted when you choose Insert Index.
The active Index is also the one to which text will be included when
you choose Index, Index As, Additional Index As or Index
Using Word List.

Bibliography

Choose commands from the Bibliography submenu to manage the bibliographical

references for your document. These tools are explained in detail beginning on
page 255.
Activate Bookends
Brings Bookends to the font, making it the active application.
Find Reference
Brings Bookends to the font and presents a dialog enabling you to
search your Bookends database for any particular reference.
Insert Citation
Enters the Bookends citation in your document at the insertion
point location.
Insert Bibliography Placeholder
Much like insert Index and insert Table of Contents, this
command inserts a placeholder where the bibliography generated
by Scan Document will be placed.
Scan Document
Looks inside the document text for plain text citations, enclosed in
{curly braces}, and replaces them with special formatted references,
eg: (1) or (Barnes). It also generates a bibliography that matches
each such numeric reference to the citation. If no placeholder exists
(see Insert Bibliography Placeholder, the bibliography will be put
at the end of the file.
Unscan Document
Replaces any special numeric bibliographic references, inserted by
Scan Document with plain text citations enclosed in curly braces. It
also removes the generated bibliography from the document.

Automatic Content
Choose commands from the Automatic Content submenu to control the
way in which automatic content (cross-references, automatic numbers, date and
time variables, as well as various document properties appear in your document.
Update All Stale Content
In order to save your computers processor from constantly

476

Tools menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

recounting the number of words, etc. Nisus Writer Pro permits

automatic content to become stale. This command forces the
application to update all that information.
Update Selected Stale Content
In order to save your computers processor from constantly
recounting the number of words, etc. Nisus Writer Pro permits
automatic content to become stale. This command forces the
application to update all such information in the selection.
Automatic Content Update Preferences
Opens a dialog that lets you determine how frequently automatic
content is updated and whether or not stale content has a highlight,
as well as set the color of that highlight.
Convert to Fixed Content
Converts selected automatic content to normal text.
Watermark

Displays the Watermark dialog from which you can enter and manipulate the
display of watermarks in your document.

Insert Shape

Choose commands from the Insert Shape submenu to create the designated
shape in the active window. Each shape is illustrated beside the text of the
command that inserts it. The submenu has five sections, each with a different
primary use. The first enables you to enter text or callout boxes of different types:
Text Box, Callout, Callout, Accent Edge, Callout, Speech Box, Callout, Rounded
Speech Box. The second section enters arrows and lines: Line, Arrow, Double
Arrow, Block Arrow Left, Block Arrow Right, Block Arrow Up, Block Arrow
Down. The third forms various geometric (and similar) shapes and brackets:
Circle, Triangle, Right Triangle, Rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, Diamond,
Pentagon, Hexagon, Octagon, Star, Seal, Explosion, Bracket Pair, Brace Pair.
The fourth creates a Canvas in which you can add shapes and move them as a
group. The final section consists of more general commands:
Use Selected Shape Appearance As Default
Uses the attributes of whatever shape you have selected as the
model for succeeding shapes (and changes the appearance of the
shapes in the menu accordingly).
Show Shapes Palette
Opens the Shapes palette which gives you one-click access to
additional tools.

Shapes

Choose commands from the Shapes submenu to create and manipulate a wide
variety of shapes in your document.
Select Next Shape
Selects the next shape in sequence in the document. Note this is not
the next shape in the sequence in which they were created, but as
they appear in the document.
Select Previous Shape Selects the previous shape in sequence in the document. Note this
is not the previous shape in the sequence in which they were
created, but as they appear in the document..
Wrap Text Around Shape
Toggles text wrap on or off for the selected image(s).
Text Wrapping
Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shapes > Text
Wrapping to control the way in which the text wraps around your
shapes.
Wrap Box
Wraps the text around the imaginary rectangle defined by the
position of the four blue square handles that surrounds the shape.
Wrap Tight
Wraps the text inside the imaginary rectangle defined by the
position of the four blue square handles that surrounds the shape.
Text Behind Shape
Allows the shape to float above the text, causing the text to appear
hidden.
Shape Behind Text
Allows the shape to appear behind the text, allowing the text to
appear as though written on top of the shape.
No Text on Left Side
Causes all text to appear above, below, and to the right, but on the
left of the shape.
No Text on Right Side
Causes all text to appear above, below, and to the left, but on the
right of the shape.

Appendices

477

No Text on Either Side

Causes all text to appear above and below, but on the right or the
left of the shape.
Bring to Front
Moves selected object so that it is in front of all other objects.
Send to Back
Moves selected object so that it is behind all other objects.
Adjust Anchor When Shape Repositioned
When turned on causes the anchor to which the shape is attached
to move to the paragraph to which the shape is moved.
Group Shapes
Causes selected shapes to be affected as if they were one unit.
Ungroup Shapes
Causes grouped shapes to revert to their ungrouped state so they
can be manipulated individually.
Duplicate Shape
Displays a sheet that enables you to determine a variety of aspects
of how a selected shape should duplicate.
Copy Shape Appearance Copies, with certain exceptions, the attributes associated with the
selected shape.
Paste Shape Appearance Pastes, with certain exceptions, the attributes copied by Copy
Shape Appearance onto the selected shape.
Use Selected Shape Appearance as Default
Causes succeeding shapes created to use the appearance of the
selected shape.
Add Caption to Image Adds a text box to the bottom of the selected image. If the image is
inline, it converts the image to a floating image.
Enter Shape Selection Mode
Enters a mode in which it is easier to click and drag to select
shapes rather than text.
Enter Text Box Linking Mode
Enters a mode in which choose which text box should accept
overflow text.
Show Shapes Palette
Opens the Shapes palette which gives you one-click access to
additional tools.
Shape Metrics

Choose commands from the Shape Metrics submenu to set the alignment, size
and rotation of selected shapes. Some of the matching controls appear in the
Shape Wrap palette; others in the Shape Metrics palette.
Align Left
Causes the selected shape(s) to align along the left edge of the
document window.
Align Center
Causes the selected shape(s) to align along an imaginary center line
through the length of the document window.
Align Right
Causes the selected shape(s) to align along the right edge of the
document window.
Align Top
Causes the selected shape(s) to align along the top edge of the
document window if it is set Position on page of . However if the
image is set as Moves with paragraph the top edge of the shape
aligns along the top of the paragraph to which it is attached.
Align Middle
Causes the selected shape(s) to align along an imaginary line along
the horizontal center of the document window if it is set Position on
page of . However if the image is set as Moves with paragraph
the center of the shape aligns along the top of the paragraph to
which it is attached.
Align Bottom
Causes the selected shape(s) to align along the bottom edge of the
document window if it is set Position on page of . However if the
image is set as Moves with paragraph the bottom of the shape
aligns along the top of the paragraph to which it is attached.
Shift Left
Nudges selected shapes leftward by the amount set in the
Adjustment Settings dialog available when choosing the menu
command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment Amounts.
Shift Right
Nudges selected shapes rightward by the amount set in the
Adjustment Settings dialog available when choosing the menu
command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment Amounts.
Shift Up
Nudges selected shapes upward by the amount set in the
Adjustment Settings dialog available when choosing the menu
command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment Amounts.
Shift Down
Nudges selected shapes downward by the amount set in the
Adjustment Settings dialog available when choosing the menu
command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment Amounts.

478

Tools menu

The Nisus Writer Pro Menus

Increase Size

Increases the size of selected shapes by the percentage designated

in the Adjustment Settings dialog opened by choosing the menu
command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment Amounts.
Decrease Size
Decreases the size of selected shapes by the percentage designated
in the Adjustment Settings dialog opened by choosing the menu
command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment Amounts.
Increase Width
Increases the width of selected shapes by the number of points
designated in the Adjustment Settings dialog opened by choosing
the menu command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment
Amounts.
Decrease Width
Decreases the width of selected shapes by the number of points
designated in the Adjustment Settings dialog opened by choosing
the menu command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment
Amounts.
Increase Height
Increases the height of selected shapes by the number of points
designated in the Adjustment Settings dialog opened by choosing
the menu command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment
Amounts.
Decrease Height
Decreases the height of selected shapes by the number of points
designated in the Adjustment Settings dialog opened by choosing
the menu command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment
Amounts.
Rotate Clockwise
Rotates the selected shape(s) clockwise by the amount of degrees
designated in the Adjustments Settings dialog opened by choosing
the menu command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set Adjustment
Amounts.
Rotate Counterclockwise
Rotates the selected shape(s) counterclockwise by the amount of
degrees designated in the Adjustments Settings dialog opened by
choosing the menu command Tools > Shape Metrics > Set
Adjustment Amounts.
Set Adjustment Amounts
Opens a dialog that enables you to set the amounts by which
shapes are shifted, resized, and rotated.
Show Shape Metrics Palette
Opens the Shape Metrics palette which enables you to set a wide
variety of precise measurements of your shapes.
Shape Fill

Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Fill to affect the style, color,
opacity and shadow of selected shapes, as well as open the Shape Fill palette and
the Shape Shadow palette.
Style
Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Fill > Style to
apply one of a wide variety of styles or patterns to the fill of
selected shapes. These are the same styles or patterns available in
the Table Cell Shading palette.
Color
Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Fill > Color to
add color to the fill of selected shapes. The default colors available
are: Black, Brown, Dark Red, Red, Purple, Orange, Fuchsia, Dark
Green, Green, Yellow, Dark Blue, Blue, Teal, Cornflower Blue,
Cyan, Dark Gray, Gray, and Light Gray.
Opacity
Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Fill > Opacity to
set the opacity of the fill of selected shapes. The available options
appear in 10% increments from 0% (Clear) to 100% (Solid). More
precise increments are available in the Shape Fill palette.
Shadow
Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Fill > Shadow to
set the shadow of selected shapes. The available options are None,
Glow, Normal and Hard. More precise increments are available in
the Shape Shadow palette.
Show Shape Fill Palette Opens the Shape Fill palette which gives you many options for the
pattern (style), color and opacity of the fill of shapes.
Show Shape Shadow Palette
Opens the Shape Shadow palette which gives you the option for
turning the shadow of shapes on or off, as well as determining its
color, opacity, blur and offset.

Appendices

479
Shape Stroke

Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Stroke to modify the perimeter
line of selected shapes.
Line Style
Choose patterns from the menu Tools > Shape Stroke > Line Style
to determine the style of the perimeter line of a shape. These are the
same line options that are available in the Style pop-up menu in the
Table Cell Borders palette as well as all other locations where you
can define a line in Nisus Writer Pro.
Thickness
Choose patterns from the menu Tools > Shape Stroke > Thickness
to determine the thickness of the perimeter line of a shape. These
are the same line options that are available in the Style pop-up
menu in the Table Cell Borders palette as well as all other locations
where you can define a line in Nisus Writer Pro. The options range
from None to Hairline, pt, pt, 1 pt, 1 pt, 2 pt, 3 pt, 4 pt, 5
pt, 6 pt, 7 pt, and 8 pt.
Arrowheads
Choose patterns from the menu Tools > Shape Stroke >
Arrowheads to select from a wide variety of arrowheads available.
These are the same arrowhead options that are available in the
Shape Stroke palette.
Color
Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Stroke > Color to
add color to the fill of selected shapes. The default colors available
are: Black, Brown, Dark Red, Red, Purple, Orange, Fuchsia, Dark
Green, Green, Yellow, Dark Blue, Blue, Teal, Cornflower Blue,
Cyan, Dark Gray, Gray, and Light Gray.
Opacity
Choose commands from the menu Tools > Shape Stroke > Opacity
to set the opacity of the fill of selected shapes. The available options
appear in 10% increments from 0% (Clear) to 100% (Solid). More
precise increments are available in the Shape Stroke palette.
Show Shape Stroke Palette
Opens the Shape Stroke palette which gives you the options of
setting selected shapes line style, color, thickness opacity and (if an
arrow) arrowhead

Macro menu
Use commands of the Macro menu to automate aspects of how you use Nisus Writer Pro. The
Macro menu supports submenus that consist of folders inside the Macro folder. Working with
macros is explained in detail beginning on page 415. A listing of the shipped macros and their
description appears beginning on page 430.
New Macro

Opens a new Untitled document window ready for you to enter the code for a Perl
Script or Nisus Writer Pro macro. When you choose Save As, navigate to the folder
~/Library/Application Support/Nisus Writer/Macros/
Nisus Writer Pro appends the appropriate extension .nwm (Nisus Writer Macro).

Save As Macro
Saves the current Nisus Writer Pro document as a Macro. You should only use
this command if your document contains macro instructions.
Add Macro to Menu From File
Presents an Open dialog that allows you to select a macro to open (load) so that it
appears in the Macro menu.
Show Macros Folder in Finder
Opens the Macros folder in the Finder.
~/Library/Application Support/Nisus Writer/Macros/
Run Selection As Macro
Executes the selected macro commands.
Run Macro From File
Displays a variant of the Open dialog and enables you to choose any Nisus Writer
Pro macro file you have on your connected hard drive(s), even if it is not listed in
the Macro menu.
The name of each macro file appears in alphabetical order in the lower portion of the menu.
Templates

Nisus Software supplies some Perl templates to help you get started. These are
kept in the templates folder inside the Macros folder. You can group and store
other macros in folders in a similar fashion.
Other macros (or folders of macros) may be available when Nisus Writer Pro is
released. These will appear on this menu.

480

[Referenced content is missing.] (Help menu)

Window menu
Choose commands from the Window menu to manage document windows.
The names of open documents appear at the bottom of the Window menu in alphabetical order. If
the document name has a bullet in front of it, the document has changed since it was last saved. If
the document name has a diamond in front of it, the document is minimized in the Dock.
Choosing a document name from the Window menu brings its window to the front. The document
name with a check is the active window.
Minimize

This has the same effect as clicking the Minimize (amber) button, it sends the
window to the Dock.

Zoom

This has the same effect as clicking the Zoom (green) button, it alternates between
the full height and width of the window and its previous display size. The fully
zoomed size differs depending on whether you use Draft or Page View.

Palettes

Choose commands from the Palettes submenu to manage your Nisus Writer Pro
palettes.
Show Palette Library
Opens the Palette Library window which allows you to define groups
of palettes for your work.
Hide/Show Palettes
Alternately hides or shows any floating palettes.
Character, Columns, Headers & Footers, Image, Indexing, Language, Line Numbers, Lists,
Margins, Page Borders, Page Zoom, Paragraph, Paragraph
Borders, Paragraph Shading, Section, Shape Metrics, Shape
Shadow, Shape Stroke, Shape Wrap, Shapes, Special Characters,
Statistics, Styles, Table, Table Cell Borders, Table Cell Shading,
Table Cells, Table of Contents
Alternately displays or closes that particular palette as a floating
windoid.

Bring All to Front

Brings all Nisus Writer Pro documents to the front of all other windows.
Exchange Front Windows
Brings the document window immediately behind the current window to the front.
The current active window becomes the second window.
Next Window

Brings the document window immediately behind the current window to the front.
The current active window becomes the last window.

Last Window

Brings the document window at the bottom of the pile to the top. The current
active window becomes the second window.

Document Manager
Opens the Document Manager which allows you to preview unopened documents.
It also lets you open, move or delete them.

Help menu
Search

Searches the Nisus Writer Pro menus for any text entered into the field provided.
You can use this to learn more about where various Nisus Writer Pro commands
are located as well as (with the new commands of the Document Manager) quickly
find and open almost any document by name. You cannot add a Nisus Writer Pro
keyboard shortcut to this command.

Nisus Writer Pro Help

Opens the Preview application with the Nisus Writer Pro Users Guide.
Release Notes

Opens the release notes document for this version of Nisus Writer Pro. Here you
can learn the details of what has been changed for this version of the application.

License Agreement
Opens the Nisus Writer Pro License Agreement.
Macro Language Reference
Opens the detailed explanation of the Nisus Writer Pro macro programming
language. Approximately 50 new enhancements are added for version 2.1.
Get Support

If you are connected to the Internet, this opens your Web browser and displays the
Nisus Software Support Forum.

Send Feedback
Opens a dialog that enables you to send feature requests or problems directly to
Nisus Software.

Appendix II
Glossary of Useful Terms
This document uses a number of terms that either may not be familiar to the casual user or are
used in a technical way unique to word processing. We offer a small glossary of terms here . If you
encounter other words that you believe should be included, please send them to
<support@nisus.com>
64-bit computing
In computer architecture, 64-bit computing is the use of processors that have
datapath widths, integer size, and memory addresses widths of 64 bits (eight
octets). Also, 64-bit CPU and ALU architectures are those that are based on
registers, address buses, or data buses of that size. From the software perspective,
64-bit computing means the use of code with 64-bit virtual memory addresses.
You can learn more at the Wikipedia article.
ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASCII was used for many years to represent all the alpha-numeric, punctuation,
and similar characters you stored on your computer. ASCII could only display the
standard Roman character set, so, over the years various kludges developed,
among them Apples WorldScript technology which used the upper range (from
128-255) to display non-Roman characters. Nisus Writer Classic worked
seamlessly with this system. However, problems remained when users tried to
exchange documents with more than one script system in them.
In 1986, only two years after the Macintosh was released, engineers at Xerox
started working to create a single font that would display the identical characters
shared by Japanese and Chinese. This lead to early discussions of Han
Unification. Simultaneously, based on issues related to Apple File Exchange,
engineers at Apple began looking into the possibility of a universal character set.
These efforts, and others, lead to the development of the Unicode Consortium.
According to the Unicode Consortium
Unicode provides a unique number for every character, no matter what the
platform, no matter what the program, no matter what the language.
The first 127 codes for Unicode are the same as ASCII.

baseline

In some writing systems (such as Devanagari and formal Hebrew), the letters seem
to hang from an imaginary line, however, in Roman based scripts the letters rest
on, or descend below an imaginary line called a baseline.

Boolean

Named for George Boole, who developed a general method of symbolic reasoning
that lead to the idea that on/off (true/false, yes/no, 1 or 0 circuits with
relays could solve certain algebraic problems. This is the concept that supports
the possibility of digital computers.

dingbat

An ornament used in typesetting, sometimes called a "printer's ornament". Often

used to describe fonts with symbols and shapes in positions ordinarily held by
alphabetical or numeric characters. The Unicode dingbat plane is: U+2700U
+27BF.

file path

According to the Wikipedia <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Path_(computing)>, A

path is the general form of a file or directory name, giving a files name and its
unique location in a file system. Paths point to their location using a string of
characters signifying directories, each path component separated by a delimiting
character, most commonly the slash / or backslash character \, or colon :
though some operating systems may use a different delimiter. Paths are used
extensively in computer science to represent the directory/file relationships
common in modern operating systems, and are essential in the construction of
Uniform Resource Locators (URLs).

Flesch-Kincaid Grade Level and Flesch Reading Ease

Rudolf Flesch was trained as a lawyer in his native Vienna. He came to the United
States in 1938 where he received his Ph.D. at Columbia University. Among his
numerous books are The Art of Plain Talk, Say What You Mean, The Art of Clear
Thinking, and The Art of Readable Writing (published by Harper and Row). This
explanation of how to determine the reading ease of a text was culled from The Art
of Readable Writing. There are two aspects to readability: ease of reading and
interest. The first is determined by the structure of words and sentences; the use
of personal words or personal sentences constitutes the other. The Flesch

482

Glossary of Useful Terms

reading ease score found in the window that appears when you choose the menu
command File > Text Analysis represents the first of these and is determined
by the following steps:
1. Nisus Writer Pro counts the words in the entire document. Contractions,
hyphenated words and numbers (such as dates and dollar amounts, etc.) are each
counted as one word.
2. Nisus Writer Pro then computes the average sentence length, where colons,
semicolons, and newline characters are not considered to terminate/delimit a
sentence.
3. Nisus Writer Pro counts the syllables in the entire document. This syllable
counting uses a special algorithm which, although not perfect, is quite accurate
for the English language. It divides the number of syllables by the number of
words and multiplies by 100 to get the number of syllables per 100 words.
Although the syllable number in numbers and symbols should be counted as if
these were pronounced when read aloud (i.e. 1991nineteen ninety one = 2, 2, 1
syllables) this is not done in Nisus Writer Pro at this time.
4. Nisus Writer Pro multiplies the average number of syllables per word multiplied
by 84.6. The result is the Reading Ease Score. The scale ranges from 0 to 100. The
higher the score, the easier it is to read.
The formulas:
Flesch:
206.835 - (1.015 * averageWordsPerSentence) - (84.6 * averageSyllablesPerWord)
FleschKincaid:
(0.39 * averageWordsPerSentence) + (11.8 * averageSyllablesPerWord) - 15.59
FOG Index scores
This is a reading grade level score. It is calculated by determining the average
sentence length plus the percentage of long words. All of this multiplied by 0.4. A
long word is one with more than two syllables.
Its formula is:
F=((avg. # of words per sentence)+100*(long words per words))*.4
font or typeface According to the Wikipedia <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Font>, a typeface is a
coordinated set of glyphs designed with stylistic unity. A typeface usually
comprises an alphabet of letters, numerals, and punctuation marks; it may also
include ideograms and symbols, or consist entirely of them, for example,
mathematical or map-making symbols. The term typeface is often conflated with
font, a term which, historically, had a number of distinct meanings before the
advent of desktop publishing; these terms are now effectively synonymous when
discussing digital typography. A helpful and still valid distinction between font
and typeface is a font's status as a discrete commodity with legal restrictions,
while typeface designates a visual appearance or style not immediately reducible
to any one foundry's production or proprietary control.
glyph

The shape of the basic unit in any written language. These include letters,
numerals, punctuation marks, as well as Chinese and Japanese characters.

grapheme

The basic unit in any written language

gremlin

Loosely gremlins are any non-printing characters that serve no useful purpose.
Currently Nisus Writer Pro defines the following code points as gremlins:
U+0000 to U+0008
ASCII Null to Backspace
U+000B
Vertical Tab
U+0014 to U+0017
ASCII Shift Out to Unit Separator
U+0082 to U+0083
ASCII Break Permitted and Negation
U+0086 to U+009F
ASCII Start Of Selected Area to Application Program Command
U+E000 to U+F700
Private use area, which is technically from E000F8FF
Apple has assignments starting at F700

GREP

GREP is an acronym which means search globally for lines matching the regular
expression, and print them. The important part here is regular expression.
Using GREP you can search for text patterns (regular expressions: series of
numbers, or series of letters, etc.). Nisus Writer Pro uses a variant of GREP and
makes it available to its users in a menu-driven from that use human language
and visual cues.

gzip

A widely supported compression/archive format.

The new "Nisus Compressed Rich Text" format (file extension zrtf) is a way to
reduce the size of files that NWP saves. Its basically the normal Nisus Writer Pro
RTF, zipped, and saved to disk. No other application understands this, but it

Appendices

483
reduces file sizes by a large amount. However, in a pinch a user can rename a file
from "whatever.zrtf" to "whatever.rtf.zip" and let the Finder expand it into a normal
RTF file
ideogram/ideograph
A graphic symbol like an icon on your Macintosh Desktop, or the buttons you
click in the Nisus Writer Pro interface. These represent an idea, rather than a
group of letters arranged according sounds they might represent in a spoken
language. Some writing systems (notably those of East Asia (and the Hieroglyphics
of ancient Egypt)) are considered ideographic even though many of the symbols
in these systems represent words or small bits of meaning, rather than complete
ideas.
kerning

The process of adjusting spacing letter pairs in a proportional font (see also
ligature and tracking).

leading

During the period of moveable type, small strips of lead were placed between the
lines of text in order to increase the space and readability. This artifact gave its
name to what is now often referred to as line spacing. Leading (which refers to
vertical spacing) should not be confused with tracking, which refers to the
horizontal spacing between letters or characters.

ligature

A complex glyph created when multiple letter-forms join into one, usually
replacing two sequential characters that a common component such as the
ascender of an f becoming the dot of the i that follows it: fi = fi. Not all fonts
support ligatures (see also kerning and tracking).

metacharacter

Any character that has a meaning other than its literal meaning; in particular for
work with GREP.

orphans and widows

The easiest way to remember the difference between and an orphan and a widow
is to remember that orphans are left behind and widows are forced to go on
ahead by themselves just as an orphan or widow in life. Orphans are separated
segments of text at the beginning of a paragraph or sentence while widows are
separated segments of text at the end of a paragraph or sentence.
pathname

See file path.

Sandbox

as in every application (read child) plays in its own sandbox and does not use
other childrens toys. More, from the Wikipedia article Sandbox (computer
security): In computer security, a sandbox is a security mechanism for separating
running programs. It is often used to execute untested code, or untrusted
programs from unverified third parties, suppliers, untrusted users and untrusted
websites.

text attributes

During the days of the Classic Macintosh OS, almost all applications had a Style
menu. The commands of this menu applied attributes to the text. Beginning with
OS X, the standard for applications is to have a Format menu through which a
wide variety of attributes can be applied to the text. These include things that
would have been considered styles applied to individual characters as well as
controls that affect the shapes of paragraphs as well.

text encoding

At its core, the computer recognizes only ones and zeros. In order to display all of
them as text and images in your document and store them appropriately on your
hard drive, as well as send them to others so that they can read what you have
created, the computer needs to convert those digits back and forth between long
strings of ones and zeros and more humanly-recognizable symbols. A variety of
ways of converting your text exist. These are called Text Encoding methods.
Among these are ASCII and Unicode.

tracking

Also known as letter spacing, or character spacing, tracking refers to the space
between all the letters of a word (see also kerning and ligature).

Unicode

All computers know only about numbers. To store letters, you have to assign them
numbers. 1=A, 2=B, and so on. In the old days, you could use different
encodings that assigned different numbers to different letters depending on the
language you were working in, etc. One example of this is ASCII.
Unicode is an encoding just like ASCII, Latin ISO-1, etc. However, it assigns a
number to virtually every letter (and diacritic) for nearly every alphabet on the
planet past or present.
This is really useful especially when mixing characters from lots of different
languages. In Nisus Writer Classic, the only way to store letters from different

484

Glossary of Useful Terms

alphabets is to use different encodings. When Nisus Writer Pro reads in the file
(which can contain only numbers, remember), it first has to figure out what
encoding you used so Nisus Writer Pro can match it to the right letter.
Nisus Writer Classic format decided what encoding to use based on the font you
applied. If your font is not available in the new System, Nisus Writer Pro tries to
guess. Sometimes it works, a lot of times it doesnt. On OS X, fonts sometimes
dont show up or work as they did in OS 9. This is the primary reason people see
garbage text when they try to open Classic files.
Unicode, on the other hand is much better. The number 65 always means capital
A for example no matter what. So your text is better preserved, and its is far
simpler for Nisus Writer Pro to deal with multilingual text.
UTF-16

A Unicode Transformation Format that uses 16 bits to hold the information

about the characters in your document.

UTF-8

A Unicode Transformation Format that uses 8 bits to hold the information about
the characters in your document.

WYSIWYG

What You See Is What You Get

Used to describe something where the content during editing appears very similar
to the final product.

Appendix III
Displaying Fonts and Text
About Displaying Fonts
To display your text, Unicode or not, Nisus Writer Pro must know how to draw the letters on the
screen. A font tells Nisus Writer Pro how to do this. A font contains drawing instructions for
various letters and combinations of letters. These are called glyphs. It also contains information
on how to map letters of text to glyphs.
If you have a Unicode font, that means that the fonts knows how to convert text stored in the
Unicode format (remember, text in a computer is just a bunch of numbers) to glyphs. Thats it.
Nothing special. Because the font understands Unicode, it generally includes the ability to draw
letters from lots of different alphabets instead of just Roman or Japanese or whatever. But that is
not always the case.
Incidentally, mapping your text to glyphs is not always a simple process. For example, usually
its a one to one mapping. The letter A maps to glyph 1, etc. Sometimes, however, it can be
quite complex, as in ligatures or the cursive Arabic characters that have initial, medial and final
forms.
To see an example of this, open Nisus Writer Pro and choose the OS X font Zapfino Now, type
the word Zapfino. As soon as you type the whole word, you will see the whole thing change to
a specialized cursive form. In the following two occurrences of the word Zapfino, the first has
ligatures turned on, the second turned off
! !
The reason for this is that the Zapfino font contains a special glyph that is displayed whenever it
encounters the text Zapfino (with ligatures on), but no other time.

How Nisus Writer Pro Displays Your Text

Whenever you open an existing (or a Nisus Writer Classic) file in Nisus Writer Pro

First Nisus Writer Pro converts the text to Unicode (if it was not already such). No matter what
type of file you open, when your file is open and displayed on the screen, we keep a copy of your
file as Unicode stored in memory. When you save the file you can choose the encoding to use.

Second Nisus Writer Pro determines how to draw each letter of your text. To do this, it uses the
font you have applied from a style, the Character palette, etc. Nisus Writer Pro checks each
letter of your text to make sure the font you have chosen can draw that letter. If not, then a
substitute font is found and used.

Third Nisus Writer Pro places each letter on lines of text. The application may place this text
going left to right or right to left, depending on the direction of your paragraph and the text
involved.

Finally, Nisus Writer Pro must place the lines of text on the page. This depends on your
paragraph alignment.
So you can see, that to take your texteven if it is pure UnicodeNisus Writer Pro must pick
a

font
alignment
other paragraph settings
to display it with. Even if you think there are no attributes applied, there has to be something.
Its a bit like asking for a car with only fuel and no vehicle.

Typing on a Computer
Here are some rules to remember

Type only one space between sentences.

The fractional fonts (in which an m uses more space than an l) that the computer uses make
the extra spacing between sentences superfluous.
Compare a fractional font (11 point Bookman Old Style)

486

Displaying Fonts and Text

The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog. How razorback-jumping frogs can level six-piqued
gymnasts!
With a monospaced font (9 point Courier)
The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog. How razorback-jumping frogs can
level six-piqued gymnasts!

Type @ only to line up columns, not to begin a paragraph with an indentation.

If you want an indent at a new paragraph you use the first line indent indicator on the ruler.

Type < only to begin a new paragraph, not at the end of each line or to double-space.
The Macintosh makes its sound only when you try to do something that it cannot do at that
timenot, as in the days of typewriters when you reach the end of a line.

Typing Unusual Characters

Macintosh provides you with a wide variety of characters. Among these characters you can find
symbols (often called dingbats The19) and characters from almost every written language.
For more information about entering text in various languages see Writing in Multiple Languages
on page 29, and the section Enter special characters into your text on page 25.

While you can type these unusual characters, Nisus Writer Pro supports entering them directly from
the menus and from a special Special Characters palette as explained in Enter special characters into
your text on page 25. All the characters available in the manner are listed beginning on page 456.

Turn on display of the Input (keyboard flag) menu

The following information is based on Snow Leopard (Mac OS X 10.6.x).
1. Choose the menu command Apple > System Preferences and choose (click) Keyboard from
the second row of icons.
2. In the Keyboard preferences click the Input Sources tab on the far right at the top.
3. Click the Plus + button and check any input methods (keyboards) you want to have appear on
the menu.
4. Check Show Input menu in menu bar.

19

Some fonts consist of nothing but dingbats.

Appendices

487

Figure 448
The Input Sources tab of the Keyboard (System) preferences (in Mac OS X 10.10 Yosemite)
5.

Close the dialog.

488

Displaying Fonts and Text

Enter a character using the keyboard

Most of the unusual (Roman based) characters are made by pressing a combination of a key on the
keyboard and a modifier key such as 4. For example, you can also create the symbol 4 then
the 6 as illustrated in Figure 449 below, in the small application called Keyboard Viewer which is
available from the bottom of the Input (keyboard) menu) if you have turned it on.
Other unusual characters are called delayed strike characters. As illustrated in Figure 450 below,
these require you to press 4 and then two keys to give you the character you want. To help you
find these keys (in this instance u which (in the Keyboard Viewer) when you release the 4 key
illustrates all the characters that can have the umlaut above them.

Figure 449
Tiger Keyboard Viewer of the U.S. Extended keyboard after pressing 4

Figure 450
Tiger Keyboard Viewer of the U.S. Extended keyboard after pressing 4 u

Appendices

489
Table 36 below identifies many of these alphabetic characters and how you create them.

TDping Special (ECtended Roman Characters

To type:

press

, , , ,

Accent Grave

4 ` and then the letter.

, , , ,

UPPERCASE Accent Grave

4 `, 1 and then the letter.

, , ,

Accent Acute

4 e and then the letter.

, , ,

UPPERCASE Accent Acute

4 e, 1 and then the letter.

, , , ,

Circumflex

4 6 and then the letter.

, , , ,

UPPERCASE Circumflex

4 6, 1 and then the letter.

, ,

Tilde

4 n and then the letter.

, ,

UPPERCASE Tilde

4 n, 1 and then the letter.

, , , , ,

Umlaut

4 u and then the letter.

, , , , ,

UPPERCASE Umlaut

4 u, 1 and then the letter.

, , , , , , z , etc.

Macron

4 a and then the letter.

, , , etc.

under dot

4 x and then the letter.

Table 36
Typing Special characters using the U.S. Extended keyboard
The computer uses many other (invisible) characters to affect the display of your text on screen
and on paper. Each space, tab and Return is counted as an individual character, a value added to
your file. Additional characters that affect the format of your document include

Page Break
Choose the menu command Insert > Page Break to force succeeding text to begin at the top of
a new page.

Soft Return
Press the 1 and < keys on your keyboard to force succeeding text to begin a new line
without beginning a new paragraph. (This is possible only when using Nisus Writer Pro in OS
10.4 (Tiger) and newer versions of the System.)

Tab
Press the @ key on your keyboard to force succeeding text to begin at the next tab stop.

Space
Press the Space Bar on your keyboard to enter a space between numbers and letters, etc.

Non-Breaking Space
Press 4 and the Space Bar on your keyboard to enter a space between numbers and letters,
etc. that prevents the words on either side from breaking at a line wrap.

You can see how Nisus Writer Pro displays these invisible or formatting characters in Table 32 on
page 389. To turn on their display, choose the menu command View > Show Invisibles.

490

Displaying Fonts and Text

Type special Yiddish characters

1.
2.

1.
2.

1.
2.

1.
2.

Veis ( the Vet with an overline which appears at the beginning of a word)
Type the vet
Type the overline which appears under the Delete key .
Fay ( the Pey with an overline which appears at the beginning of a word)
Type the pey
Type the overline which appears under the Delete key .
irik Yod ( with a dot under it)
Type the Yod .
Press 4 and type the 4 on the numbers row
This displays .
Kaf ( with a dot in it)
Type the Kaf .
Press 4 and type the comma (or when in the Standard Hebrew keyboard, the Taf ;or, when
in the Hebrew QWERTY keyboard, the tilde ~)
This displays .
Pey( with a dot in it)
See Kaf above.

Taf ( with a dot in it)

See Kaf above.

1.
2.

1.
2.
3.

1.
2.

Sin ( with a dot above and to the left)

Press 4 (and with the key still pressed)
Type (using whatever version of the Hebrew keyboard you prefer, that key that produces) the
.
This displays .
Kometz-Alef (
)
Type the Alef .
Press 4 (and with the key still pressed)
Type (using whatever version of the Hebrew keyboard you prefer, that key that produces) the
7.
Tzvei-Yudin ( )Using the Hebrew keyboard
Press 4 (and with the key still pressed)
Type a as illustrated in Figure 451.

Figure 451
Option-modified Hebrew keyboard

1.
2.

Tzvei-Yudin ( )Using the Hebrew QWERTY keyboard

Press 4 (and with the key still pressed)
Type a as illustrated in Figure 452.

Appendices

491

Figure 452
Option-modified Hebrew- QWERTY keyboard

Set up language support on your Macintosh

You can learn more about Unicode and its implementation in Mac OS X from these very old
resources

What is Unicode?
<http://www.unicode.org/standard/WhatIsUnicode.html>
Two Bytes of the Cherry Unicode and Mac OS X (by Matt Neuburg)
<http://db.tidbits.com/getbits.acgi?tbart=06774>
Michael Everson develops fonts
<http://www.evertype.com/software/apple/>
more regarding fonts
<http://www.monotypeimaging.com/isv/uni_scriptmodules.asp>
Alan Woods Unicode Resources
<http://www.alanwood.net/unicode/index.html>
Unleash your Multilingual Mac by Tom Gewecke
<http://homepage.mac.com/thgewecke/mlingos9.html>

492

Displaying Fonts and Text

Enter Unicode text

All text in Nisus Writer Pro is Unicode. You can enter any Unicode character at the insertion point
in your document.
1. Choose the menu command Special Characters > Show Character Catalog at the bottom of
the Edit menu.

Figure 453
The Systems Characters palette
2.
3.
4.

Choose All Characters from the View pop-up menu at the top of the window (when the Toolbar
is visible).
When the Unicode Blocks tab is active, choose the language or character set you want to use in
the left column.
Double-click the character you want to have appear in your document.

Appendix IV
From Nisus Writer Classic to Nisus Writer Pro
The Nisus Men of the Past
In January of 1989, twenty-five years ago, Nisus Software Inc. (then under the name Paragon
Concepts Inc.) released the first version of Nisus (The Amazing Word Processor). It truly was
amazing with features that all current word processors and the Mac OS have finally begun to
implement. Here are some of the images used for the splash screens of those early versions

Figure 454
Early versions of The Nisus Man image

Making the Transition

Concurrent with the release of Nisus Writer Pro, all new Macintosh computers sold by Apple no
longer support the Classic environment. Those people who have used Nisus Writer Classic will need
to bring their files into Nisus Writer Pro.

Open Multilingual Nisus Writer Classic Files in Nisus Writer Pro

Every individual bit of text in a Nisus Writer Classic file has a font (with a particular character
encoding) associated with it. If that font is known to Nisus Writer Pro, it will always use the
encoding associated with that font. However, if the font is unknown, then Nisus Writer Pro needs to
make a choice. You can override whatever choice Nisus Writer Pro might make by choosing the
encoding from the Pop-up menu in the Open dialog.

Choose the appropriate encoding from the Encoding pop-up menu in the Open dialog.
For example, if you know that your document is primarily Japanese text, choose Japanese
encoding.

It is extremely unlikely (perhaps impossible) that a non-Mac encoding was used; after all, you created
the old document using Nisus Writer Classic which is a Mac-encoded file.

Open a Nisus Writer Classic Document with the esreveR style

Long before the days of the Apple Language Kits that supported Hebrew and Arabic with their right
to left text, Nisus Writer Classic offered a style that would display text in esreveR. This was always
imagined as a temporary work-around. Nonetheless, people have legacy files with text using very old
fonts that use this style to display correctly.
Beginning with Nisus Writer Pro 1.3, when you open (import) a Nisus Writer Classic file that has
text in this style, that text is detected and the character sequence is reversed so that the sequence
appears correct on screen.
The macro Reverse Text may help correct the old files

494

From Nisus Writer Classic to Nisus Writer Pro

Open a Nisus Writer Classic Document with a Table

You can open Nisus Writer Classic documents in Nisus Writer Pro. Those files that have tables in
them will open with their Nisus Table Tool tables converted to Nisus Writer Pro tables.

Drag your Nisus Writer Classic file onto the Nisus Writer Pro icon in the Dock.

The vast majority of attributes of the Nisus Table Tool tables convert to Nisus Writer Pro tables. At the
time of release of Nisus Writer Pro, everything converts except for

Borders

Row header widths

Shading
Footnote references
Footnote text will convert and appear at the end of the table
Column header heights.

More Classic
Other aspects of the Classic environment (both on a System level and in Nisus Writer Pro) are
discussed on pages 466 (fonts), 317 (in Find/Replace), 485 (how Nisus Writer Pro determines how
to display your Classic documents text), 408 (Classic Glossary files) and 481, (ASCII vs. Unicode).

Indexes
Subject Index

Symbols (monetary & etc.)

, -PAGE-, -PAGEsearching for, 319

- hyphen as Find/Replace
metacharacter, 324
, 26
, 26
, 26
, 26
[] in Find/Replace, 314
{} in Find/Replace, 319
, 26
, 26
\ backslash as Find/Replace
metacharacter, 326
, 26
, 26
, 26
, 26
, 26
, 26
, 26
+ plus as Find/Replace metacharacter,
324
, 26
, 26
, 26
, 26
searching for, 319
$, 26
as Find/Replace metacharacter,
324
searching for, 319
, 26
searching for, 319
, 26
searching for, 319
, 26
searching for, 319
, 26
searching for, 319
, 26
searching for, 319
, 26
searching for, 319
, 26
searching for, 319
, -PAGEsearching for, -PAGE, 26
searching for, 319
#10 Envelope (paper size), 124
, -PAGE, -PAGE-

A
A3 (paper size), 124
A4 (paper size), 124
A5 (paper size), 124
abbreviation
Glossary, 402, 407408
in Find/Replace, AnySentence, 319
QuickFix, 402
above
in cross-reference, 227228

paragraph spacing, 21, 88

tables, add row to, 204
address
for envelopes, 442443
in bidirectional text, 40, 458
in Find/Replace, 308
after, paragraph spacing, 21
align, 86, 88, 485
as an aspect of styles, 107
columns with tabs, 91, 94
images, 160161
in headers/footers, 139
page numbers in tables of
contents, 235
paragraphs, 86
tables, 201, 209
text within, 201202
decimal point, 203
alphabetize
all words in document, 248
rows of a table, 205
sorting paragraphs, 288289
anchor
display of, 158
in floating images, 158
in floating shapes, 158
moving the, 158
AppleScript, 437
AppleWorks, 60
Arabic, 26, 34, 493
displaying character forms, 485
number format - AbgadHawaz
(Abjad), 53
number formats, 52
numbering, 52
numerals in lists, 51, 471
typing right to left text, 29, 39
arrowheads, 174
arrows
add to document, 173
and the shape stroke palette, 174
block arrows, 174
color of, 173
ASCII, 298, 324, 327328, 330, 332,
481483, 494
Asian
expanding glossary abbreviations
for, 408, 454
space (Unicode U+3000), 388
asterisk (*)
as footnote/endnote marker, 193
as mathematical operator, 430
in calculate macros, 430
in Find/Replace, 329
punctuation character, 328
Asterism, 26
attribute sensitive. See: Find/Replace
automatic
check for new versions, 373
glossary expansion, 408
incrementing numbers, 459
coloring, 395
cross-reference to, 227
footnotes & endnotes, 192
lists, 48, 51, 55
cross-reference, 56

pages, 136138, 141, 143

sections, 141, 191
stop, 471
index
from word list, 248
generate topic, 243
palettes appear, 18, 136
reopen windows, 358
save, 34, 60, 303, 305, 386
naming, 383
style applied, 195
style set to following paragraph,
108
superscript ordinals, 404
table of contents creating, 232
tabs (built in), 91
text, coloring of, 395
view switching, 192, 311
Automatic Numbers, 143
AutoText. See: Glossary

B
B5 (paper size), 124
Baht, 26
before, paragraph spacing, 21
below
in cross-reference, 227228
paragraph spacing, 21, 88
tables, add row to, 204
bibliographical tools, 255
bidirectional
Arabic, Hebrew, Ladino, Pashtun,
Persian, Urdu, Yiddish, 29, 39
directionality marker menu, 458
mixing right to left and left to right
text, 4041
reverse direction marker, 388
Body Text style. See: Normal (style)
Bookends, 255259
bookmarks, 221
cross-reference to, 225226
editing, 222
find original from cross-reference,
229
highlights for, 397
in List Item, 227
in macros, 425
jumping to, 224
moving, 225
removing, 225
see bookmarked text, 225
setting, 221
as something else, 221
use to create table of contents, 238
viewing in list (Navigator)
alphabetically, 224
by location, 224
border
page, 133134
pleading page, 287
paragraph, 292294, 296
table, 213
table cell, 215217
bottom
alignment

496

Subject Index

note reference divider line, 195

of floating images, 160
text in tables, 201
lines in tables, 215
margin, 128
bounding box
of grouped shapes, 180
of lines, 162
shapes and images, 160
bring to front
shapes, 177
Broken Bar, 26
Bulgarian, searching for text in, 315
Bullet, 26
bullet
in this User's Guide, ii
lists, 4951
cross-reference to, 227
highlight coloring, 395

C
Canvas, 184
capitalize
change case, 298
display as, 467
find, 311
caption
automatic numbering of, 55
keep with illustration, 90
caret
(^) in Find/Replace, 327329
selection (insertion point) color, 398
case sensitivity, 242
changing case, 298
Character Case (display)
Commands explained, 467
Convert Commands explained, 454
in Find/Replace, 300301, 308,
311312, 318, 327329
in macros
commands in, 417, 420, 422
options, 427
names, 417
in tables, selecting using keyboard,
200
in the index, 242, 248
section separators, 250
in user dictionary, 270
spelling checker ignores, 268
typing accented characters, 489
cells. See: tables
Cent, 26
center, 86
alignment, 86
decimal tab in tables, 203
note reference divider line, 195
of floating images, 160
tab, 91
tables, 200201
decimals, 203
expansion, 209
text in, 201202
centimeters, 399
character
styles
new, based on selection, 110
Character palette, location of, 18
check mark
in dialog box, 11
menu command followed by, 7,
456, 466

Chinese
numbering, 52
Chinese, searching for text in, 315
Choukei 3 Envelope (paper size), 124
Clipboard, 47
append cut, 46
append to, 45
bypassing in Find/Replace, 299
choosing, 47
contents not saved, 399
copy attributes only, 45
copy text only, 45
copy to, 45
customize, 399400
cut, 46
display contents of, 47
edit contents of, 47
import graphic using, 151
import table data using, 199
in macros, 426, 428
Perl, 435436
menu on the Statusbar, 45
new, 48
paste text only, 47
rename, 48
swap paste, 46
Tag on the Statusbar, 15
tooltip on Statusbar, 47
color, 291
automatic numbers, 395
automatic text, 395
Background, 292
comment author color, 396
comment pane color, 396
cross-references, 395
cross-references, stale, 395
customize multiple aspects, 395
draft background, 396
draft view text, 396
Find/Replace "bubble", 308, 395
footnote/endnote divider line, 195
full screen background, 396
full screen caret (insertion point),
396
full screen gutter, 396
full screen text, 396
Highlight, 291, 471
in styles, 110
highlight
bookmarked text, 397
indexed text, 397
marked text, 393, 398
tables of content, 395
text in the table of contents,
236, 398
in AppleScript, 437438
in line numbers, 286
in macros, 427
in paragraph borders, 295
in paragraphs
shading, 295
in styles, 106, 375
inheriting, 107
in tables, 214, 217
cells, 217218
guides, 216, 397
lines (edges, borders), 215
in the Dropper, 100
in the Styles palette, 104
indexes, 395
invisibles, 283, 397

list items, 395

merge placeholder, 395
Navigator background, 396
note references, 395
of lines, 173
of shape anchor, 397
of shape bounding box, 397
of shape paste spot, 397
on the Character palette, 19
page, 397
page backdrop, 397
page frame, 397
page guides, 391, 397
remove attributes, 289
selection
active, 398
caret (insertion point), 398
check spelling, 398
expand QuickFix, 398
Find/Replace, 300, 398
flash, 398
in spelling checker, 268
inactive, 398
rectangular, 398
shape fill, 180
strikethrough, 468
substituted font, 96, 397
Tag
Background Color on the
Statusbar, 15
Color on the Statusbar, 14
Highlight on the Statusbar, 14
text, 291, 472, 478479
the Colors panel, 195, 217218,
291, 297, 375376, 390391,
393, 398
columnar selection. See: rectangular
selection
columns, 131132
balance text in, 132
Columns palette, location of, 18
create word list for indexing, 249
finding, 328
gutter width, 131
in Classic document with tables,
494
in tables
adding, 204
aligning, 203
equalizing widths, 209
fitting to contents, 211
headers, 198199
merging, 206
number of, 198199
removing, 204
row header, 213
selecting, 200
sorting, 289
splitting, 207
line between, 131
per section, 191
prevent text from breaking
across, 21, 90, 469
rectangular selection, 43
selecting text in, 43
set number of in section, 131
swapping macro, 249
using tabs to align, 9192
using tabs to create, 486
when visible, 282

Indexes
comment, 333336, 343344
add to existing, 343
color of, 396
display particular author's, 344
fade in on approach, 338
hide, 336
highlight in text, 336
history, 335, 337
in macros, 419
location of pane, 338
minimize pane, 341
number of in document, 343
opacity of faded, 339
printing, 344
reposition, 338
review history, 343
show, 336
style of, 464
text received from others, 342
title bar of, 396
contextual menu
Bookmarks, 221
Check Spelling, 266
Copy Hyperlink, 441
Edit Hyperlink, 441
Footnotes/Endnotes, 192
Full Screen, 461
Graphics, 152153
Images, 157158
Index, 249
Open Hyperlink, 440
Table of Contents, 234
Thesaurus, 271
contextual menu, i, 52, 6668, 7374,
7677, 152153, 157159, 192,
221, 231234, 249, 266267, 269
272, 334, 412, 440441, 461
control key, 11
in Menu Keys, 401
copy, 45
append, 47
attributes only, 45
formatted text, 48
graphics, 148
in dialog boxes, 11
in Find/Replace window, 314
styled text, 48
tables, 219
text only, 45
text with attributes, 48
conflicts, 113
to Find, 299
to Replace, 300
Copy Commands explained, 453
Copyright, 26
Corner Bracket, 26
cross-reference
add, 225, 227228
find bookmark from, 229
highlight text in, 229, 395
in indexing, 244245
in the index, 251
to automatic incrementing list
item, 56
use to create table of contents, 238
Cross-reference, 225
curly quotes. See: quotes
currency -PAGEsearching for, 319
cut, 46
append, 46

497
in dialog boxes, 11
Cut Commands explained, 453

D
Dagger, 26
dash. See also: hyphen and/or minus
sign
in menus, 449, 466
leader, 93, 236, 251
Dashes, 26
date
in Find/Replace, reorder pattern,
320
sort by in Document Manager, 387
Date & Time Variables, 143
decimal tab, 9192, 203
defaults
character(s) between note reference
number and text, 195
color of active selection highlight,
398
color of inactive selection highlight,
398
display of Tooldrawer, 387
Document Manager as Save
location, 65
for application and new files,
388. See: templates
format of saved files, 386
groups in the Document Manager,
68
in Find/Replace macro options,
427
in ligatures, 468
in Perl macros, 435
in the Background Color submenu,
472
in the Highlight submenu, 471
in the Text Color submenu, 180,
472, 478479
Index, 475
language of the Nisus New File, 37
length of line separating notes from
body of document, 195
location of the Document Manager
folder, 64
location of the Header/Footer
palette, 136
palette sets in the Tooldrawer, 18
paper size for printing, 124
resolving conflicts between pasted
styes, 113
set for application, 1
set of tools on the Toolbar, 410
settings of the Image palette when
set to Fixed on page, 157
style of heading in Index, 250
style of paragraph levels in Index,
251
styles associated with Table of
Contents, 235
Table of Contents, 475
templates. See: templates
templates and the Document
Manager, 452
user interaction in macros, 426
when setting the baseline, 289
when using ligatures, 290
Degree, 26
delete. See also: remove
attributes from style, 106, 109

Clipboards, 400
files from Open Recent menu, 450
Glossary entry, 407
Glossary file, 408
header/footer, 140
hyperlink, 441
index, 249
keyboard shortcut, 401
license, 450
palette, 17
palettes, 413
saved Find or Replace expression,
306
section break, 143
table of contents, 234
tables, 219
rows and columns from, 204
text, 46
typo from QuickFix, 405
dialog boxes, 11, 449
dingbat, 26, 250, 319, 481
disconnected selection. See: multipart
selection
division (/) sign, in macros, 430
DL Envelope (paper size), 124
.doc, 1, 408
document
insert, total page number of
current, 459
properties, 277, 424
Document Manager
add file to, 67
additional features of, 77
commands of File menu, 451452
create/display
special groups in, 6972, 74
display
and sort files in, 68
file types in, 64
find files using, 63, 75
first use of, 61
folder
default location of, 60
set location of, 64
maintain a style library using, 102,
116117, 122
managing files using, 59
move file to, 65
open files using, 12, 77
open from
Dock menu, 7
Window menu, 8
preferences of, 64
save files
as needed to, 65
automatically to, 5960, 65,
383, 386
with new name to, 65
see preview of file in, 76
set file listing options of, 64
Spotlight with, 71
Style Library commands, 458
using custom Toolbar items with,
410
Document Properties, 143
.docx, 408
Dollar, 26
Double Dagger, 26
double spacing lines, 88
Dropper, 100
dumb quotes. See: quotes

498

Subject Index
E

Ellipses, 26
Em Dash, 26
Empty Page, 138
En Dash, 26
endnote, 192. See also: footnote
bookmarks in, 224
change to footnote, 195
cross-reference to, 226, 228
edit, 192
highlight color of, 395
in tables, 219
insert, 192
line numbers in, 285
marker appearance, 192, 194
Notes Tag on Statusbar, 14
prevent lines from spreading
when using, 88
remove, 195
restart at assigned page number,
196
return to
document from, 192
note from its marker, 192
statistics (word, character, etc.) in,
21
style of, 103, 106
tables in, 219
endnotes
word count in, 275
envelope
format and print, 442443
page setup paper sizes, 124
EPS, 150
EPUB, 60
esreveR, 493
Euro, 26

F
facing pages, 129, 137138. See:
margins
Farsi
searching for text in, 315
Figure Dash, 26
find. See also: replace
Find/Replace, 300301, 303321,
324332
attribute sensitivity in, 301302
case sensitivity, 300301
find all, 300
in tables, 219
index multiple items as one, using,
244
index text patterns using, 247
invisibles in, 299
limit the replace
attribute sensitive, 302
limit the search
attribute sensitive, 301
case sensitivity, 312
here to end, 301
here to start, 301
in selection, 301
whole word, 301
next, 300
Normal Find, 299302
PowerFind, 308312
PowerFind Pro, 312
previous, 300
replace, 300
replace all, 300

replace and find, 300

select using, 45
Flesch Reading Ease, 276
Florin, 26
FOG Index, 276
font, 3. See: font:substitution
adding to your System, 96
changing, 97
check marks on menu, 449
defined, 482
dingbats, 481
Display as Small Caps, 467
Font
menu, 97, 394, 466
WYSIWYG, 96, 394
panel, 375, 466
Tag on the Statusbar, 14, 97, 99
100
Font "Family" on the Character
palette, 19, 97, 99, 110, 394
how Nisus Writer Pro displays, 485
in AppleScript, 437
in style sheets, 102
in the Styles palette, 104
in the User's Guide, ii
index text in, 247
kerning, 483
ligatures, 290, 468, 483, 485
limitations, 19
location of fonts, 96
monospaced, 486
of index, 251
section separator, 250
of Nisus New File, 375
of numbered lists, 55
removing attributes, 112
secondary, 34, 96
substitution, 96
color, 397
Unicode, 484485, 491
using styles, 106
attributes
inheriting, 107
modifying, 110
character, 107
paragraph, 107
writing in multiple languages, 29,
34, 40
Classic, 493
right to left, 40
footers, 135143
and bookmarks, 224
change location of, 139
creating correspondence stationery,
442
deleting, 140
different each section, 138
different first page, 138
Draft View & Full Screen view, 282
editing, 138
even numbered pages, 137
"First Page Special", 138
Header/Footer palette, 136
hiding, 140
images in, 139
in relation to the margin, 128
line numbers in, 285
odd numbered pages, 138
page and section numbering with,
141
Page Guides, 391

page numbering, current and total,

143
palette, 480
location of, 18
pointer variation, 10
same for all pages, 136
shipped style for, 103, 465
tables in, 219
word count in, 275
footnote, 192
bookmarks in, 224
change to endnote, 195
cross-reference to, 226, 228
highlight color of, 395
in tables, 219
index text in, 242
insert, 192
line numbers in, 285
marker appearance, 194
multi-page limit, 195
Nisus Writer Classic files with
tables, 494
Notes Tag on Statusbar, 14
prevent lines from spreading
when using, 88
remove, 195
restart at assigned note number,
196
restart at assigned page number,
196
return to
document from, 192
note from its marker, 192
separator line, 195
statistics (word, character, etc.) in,
21
style of, 103, 106
tables in, 219
Footnote
symbols available, 52
footnotes
word count in, 275
format
characters, 96, 98, 100
font, 96
other attributes, 100
override, 100
size, 99
documents
style sheets, 102, 104, 106108,
110111
conflicts, 113
remove, 112
style library, 114120, 122
import files, 408, 450
lost in plain text file, 60
of numbers, 52
of saved files, 59, 386
paragraphs, 8185, 8889, 91, 94
95

G
Glossary, 402, 406408
Nisus Writer Classic, 494
graphics
restore to original, 152153
Greek, 26
gremlin, 327, 389, 482
GREP, 482
group
shapes, 177

Indexes

499

Guillemet, 26
gutter
full screen view, 396
in columns, 131132
in line numbers, 286287
in margins, 129
in notes area, divider line in
relation to, 195
in notes area, height, 195

H
Hair Space, 26
Half Ring, 26
headers, 135143
and bookmarks, 224
change location of, 139
creating correspondence stationery,
442
deleting, 140
different each section, 138
different first page, 138
Draft View & Full Screen view, 282
editing, 138
even numbered pages, 137
"First Page Special", 138
for printing envelopes, 442
Header/Footer palette, 136
hiding, 140
images in, 139
in relation to the margin, 128
in tables, 212213
line numbers in, 285
odd numbered pages, 138
page and section numbering with,
141
Page Guides, 391
page numbering restart, 142
page numbers, current and total,
143
palette, 480
location of, 18
pointer variation, 10
same for all pages, 136
shipped style for, 465
tables in, 219
word count in, 275
Hebrew, 26, 35, 493
common typing errors, 41
numbering, 52
searching for text in, 315
typing right to left text, 29, 39
highlighting, 395
Horizontal Ruler, 12
HTML, 321
background color saved for, 292
edit documents, 441
export ("save") as, 60, 441
in Find/Replace, 319
view documents, 441
hyperlink, 440441
to file on hard drive, 2
hyphen, 26, 274
and To Capitalized, 298
in Find/Replace
phone numbers with, 324
user-defined wild cards [], 328
in indexes, consecutive pages, 253
hyphenation, 274

I
ideographic languages, Expand
Glossary, 454
images, 147, 152, 161, 182
align, 160
and line height, 148
bounding box, 160
cause inline to float, 157
crop, 153
Cross Hairs in relation to, 10
deleting, 156
edit, 154155
floating, 149, 156
alignment, 160
anchor, 158
contextual menu, 158
text wrap, 161
floating to inline, 165
Grabbing Hand in relation to, 10
import, 150
formats, 150
using
Images command, 461
in tables, 200
inline, 148
contextual menu, 152153
opacity of, 155
resize, 152
text on top or behind, 163164
text wrap around, 157, 161162
import
files of different format, 408
inches, 399
indent, 81
alignment, 86
Block Quote supplied style, 103
computer/typewriter difference,
486
first line, 8183
hanging, 82
in lists, 82
in right to left text, 40
in styles, 107
inheriting, 107
line wrap, 83
markers on the ruler, 81
selecting on ruler, 83
set numerically, 85
set using keyboard, 85
using the button, 82
with differently formatted
paragraphs selected, 95
index, 242245, 247253
all occurrences, 245
case sensitivity in, 242
consecutive page numbers, 253
create, 242
new, 252
cross-references, 245, 251
formatting, 250251
hierarchical, 246
highlighting text in, 249
in footnote text, 242
Index As
additional, 245
internal difference, 243
Indexing palette, 253
location of, 18
inserting in document, 249
mark text for, 242
overlapping entries, 247

remove entries, 249

removing from document, 249
updating, 249
using
Find/Replace, 244
Style Sheets, 247
word list, 248
Index Commands explained, 475
inline image, 148
import, 151, 461
make floating, 156
install Nisus Writer Pro, iii
Internet
getting support for Nisus Writer
Pro, 445, 480
interacting with, 440
macros, 423
register your copy, ix
Interrobang, 26
invert selection, 43
Inverted Exclamation, 26
Inverted Question Mark, 26
invisible, language as an invisible
attribute of text, 29
invisibles
Appearance preferences, 397
characters explained, 489
identified, 388
illustrated
all characters, 389
tab & paragraph formatting, 92
decimals in tables, 203
in Find/Replace, 316
null character, 324
printing, 367
Show Invisibles
as an aid to typing, 41
available in Find/Replace, 299
color customizable, 388
saved with file, 387
iroha, 52

J
Japanese
numbering, 52
Japanese, searching for text in, 315
Jawi, 31
JB5 (paper size), 124
JPEG, 150
justify text, 86, 88
in tables, 201

K
Kanji, 52
numbering, 52
Kanji, searching for text in, 315
Katakana, 52
keyboard
creating PowerFind Pro
expressions, 308, 324
enter
invisible characters using, 489
unusual characters using, 489
Yiddish, 490
Flag menu, 486
in tables
navigate among cells, 200
remove table, 219
select cells, 200
Input Menu, 486
Keyboard Viewer, 488

500

Subject Index

language switching, 29
set up, 37
modifier keys, 11, 401, 488
move tab indicator using, 94
navigate using, 44
in table cells, 200
nudge images using, 160
select text using, 44
in tables, 200
set text wrap area using, 85
shortcuts, 11
and macros, 419
assign, 400401
Complete, 454
conflicts, 401
Expand Glossary, 408
lists, 49
remove, 401
set in Style Sheet view, 104,
106, 108109, 193194
switch languages, 38
spelling
correct using, 266
Spelling window, 269
switch languages, 40
error, 41
type unusual characters using, 488
typing prevented in noncontiguous
selection, 43
Klingon, 31

L
Ladino
searching for text in, 315
typing right to left text, 29, 39
landscape
orientation, 126
language
affect on, when character style
applied, 107
alphabetic characters defined for
Find/Replace, 329
as an attribute of text, 29
Asian, 454
Expand Glossary command, 408
space character, 388
bidirectional, 29, 39
direction markers, 388, 458
Cyrillic, 29
default, 375
ideographic, 29, 454, 483
invisible space, 388
index all words in particular, 247
Keyboard Viewer, 488
Language palette
change using, 17
check spelling, 265266
location of, 17
Language submenu, Commands
explained, 465
Language Tag on the Statusbar, 15
Languages preferences, 2932
of Nisus New File, 375
other than American English, 2
Paragraph Writing Direction
submenu Commands
explained, 469
QuickFix, 402
right to left, 29
romanic, 29
typing unusual characters, 486

Unicode, 29
when character style applied, 107
writing in multiple languages, 29
32, 34, 3742
alternate spelling dictionaries,
273
change, 39
using Language button on
Toolbar, 11, 37
using Language pop-up
menu of the Language
palette, 38
using Language Tag on the
Statusbar, 37
using styles, 102
keyboard, 37
right to left, 2, 3942
direction
alert, 40
determined by language,
375
markers, 388389
mixing, 40
Paragraph palette change
direction using, 20
tables, 42
secondary font, 34, 37
set up Nisus Writer Pro, 29
set up your Macintosh, 491
spelling, 32
thesaurus, 34
word count, 34
Language palette, 270
leader tab, 91
leading, 88
left
alignment, 20, 8687, 469
decimal tab in tables, 203
images, text wrap around, 160
tables, 200201
expansion, 209
text within, 201202
indent marker, 83, 85
tab, 9192
tables
add column to, 204
lines, 215
row header, 213
license, viiiix, 450
line height, 88
line numbers, 285286
commands explained, 463
continue from previous section,
285
continuous, 285
display interval, 286
font/size/style of, 286
format, 286
gutter for, 286
Line Number palette, location of, 18
location of Line Number palette,
480
margins relative to, 285
per section, 285
prevent display, 285
printing, 285
restart per page, 285
start from, 286
line spacing, 88
line wrap, 83
lines

add to document, 173

and the Shape Stroke palette, 173
color of, 173
numbering. See: line numbers
link. See: hyperlink
LinkBack, 151, 439
list
files in Document Manager, 61
font, 99
index using word list, 248
Undo/Redo, 57
lists
alphabetizing, 288
bulleted
styles, 50
cross-reference to, 225228
customize color of, 395
explained, 4950
in the User's Guide, ii
incrementing, 51
demote, 52
figure captions, 5556
promote, 52
restart, 52
resume, 52
indenting, 82
List
button on Toolbar, 49
Tag on the Statusbar, 14, 110
Lists palette, location of, 18
sorting, 288
styles, 48
in Style Sheet view, 106
modify, 55
Paragraph styles override, 107
remove formatting, 289
lowercase. See also: case sensitivity
convert to, 298, 454
display as, 467
Lozenge, 26

M
Macroize, 322
macros
and Nisus Writer Express macros,
419
AppleScript, 437
automatically index using
Analyze Text, 249
Create Word List, 248
calculate using
average column, 430
average row, 430
average rows and columns, 430
Evaluate Selection, 430
Mortgage Payment Calculation,
430
stdDev column, 430
stdDev row, 430
stdDev rows and columns, 431
sum clipboard, 431
sum column, 431
sum row, 431
sum rows and columns, 431
Sum Selection, 431
case sensitivity in, 417
defined, 415
files
deleting, 416
editing, 416
location, 415

Indexes
rename, 416
running, 415
saving, 416
Find/Replace, 307
invalid command alert, 417
"macroize", 307
Menu Command dialect, 420431
calculations, 429
changing the selection, 425
Clipboards, 426
comparison warning, 423
conditional branches, 422
document operations
New, 423
Open, 423
Open URL, 423
Save, 423
Save As, 423
Save To, 423
embedding Perl, 427
environmental properties, 423
current document values,
424
Find/Replace, 427
looping, 422, 429
modifying text, 424
parameters, 420421
text attributes, 429
user interaction, 426
variables, 421
Perl dialect, 435436
process notification on the
Statusbar, 14, 416
saved file format, 60
straight quote required for, 298
typing commands, 417
undo effects of, 416
magnifying glass on the Statusbar, 15
margins, 127129
envelopes, 442
header & footer location, 139
images bleed beyond, 182
indents & line wraps measured
from, 81
line numbering relative to, 285,
463
lock, 128
Margins palette, location of, 18
mirrored, 129
pointer variant, 10
reflected (odd, even pages), 137
138
set by increments, 129
set numerically, 128
set visually, 128
vary per section, 191
viewed with Page Guides, 391
Math, 26
mathematical characters, 26
mathematical operators, 430
measurement, 374, 399
merge, 359361
data document, 361362
display results, 362
highlight color of, 395
Perl code in, 360
print merged document, 365
print results, 362
save merged document, 364
middle alignment (height), text in
tables, 201

501
Mill, 26
millimeters, 399
minus sign
as mathematical operator, 430
button
in Columns palette, 131
in Indexing palette, 131, 253
remove QuickFix typo, 405
in Find/Replace
macro options, 427
mirror margins, 130
mistakes, fixing. See: Undo
modifier keys, 11, 401
mouse, using the, i, xi, 5, 7, 10, 43,
46, 6667, 77, 81, 83, 94, 160,
193194, 199200, 219, 221, 231
233, 261, 266, 335, 369, 392,
400, 412, 417, 419420, 440
441, 457, 462
multipart selection, 43

N
Navigator
bookmarked text shown, 224
alphabetically, 224
by location, 224
table of contents entries shown,
231
Nisus Writer Classic, 493
ASCII explained, 481
esreveR style, 493
file opened in Nisus Writer Pro, 485
open documents with tables, 494
open multilingual files in Nisus
Writer Pro, 493
The Nisus Man, 493
Unicode explained, 483
Non-Breaking Hyphen, 26
non-breaking space, 26
Non-Breaking Zero Width Space, 26
non-printing characters. See:
invisibles
noncontiguous selection. See:
multipart selection
Normal (style), 103, 106108
number, 56
automatic
commands explained, 458
in headers/footers, 137
in sections, 191
Clipboard, choose alternate, 47
columns, 131
footnote/endnote, 192
restart, 195
start, 194
format pop-up menu, 53
in
bidirectional text, 40
cross-references, 238
Find and Replace
finding, 299, 318, 324, 332
Match Set commands, 313
Repeat # commands, 314
Wild Card command, 318
headers/footers, 135
index
consecutive pages, 253
cross-reference, 245
footnote/endnote, 242
format, 250251
Menu Keys, 401

table of contents, 235

location of, 235236
updating, 234
tables, of columns/rows, 198
license, viii
line, 285287
in cross-reference, 227228
line numbers display, 282
line spacing, 88
list item in cross-reference, 227
lists, 4952, 55
commands explained, 471
in styles, 110
note in cross-reference, 228
of
characters, 275
columns permitted, 131
indexes permitted, 252
keys permitted in menu
commands, 400
paragraphs, 275
section, 191
tables of contents permitted,
236
tabs permitted, 92
words, 275
page
in cross-reference, 227
pages
all, 136
display current and total, 143
displayed in the Page palette, 22
displayed on the Statusbar, 14
even, 137
format of, 143
in cross-reference, 227228
in document, 141
in index, 253
in section, 141
in table of contents, 235
multiple sections, 138
odd, 138
restart, 142
restart at 1, 142
paragraph, 285
paragraph in cross-reference, 227
228
paragraph spacing, 89
printing copies, 367
printing page range, 367
section in cross-reference, 227228
sections, 141
size of text characters, 20, 100
sorting paragraphs beginning with,
288
numbers
aligning in tables, 203
columns of, 92
instructions in this document, ii
ordinal, superscripted, 88

O
odd & even pages, 137138
.odt, 408
open
any file as new or Untitled, 387
automatically saved files, 59
Clipboards, 400
default file, 376
existing file, 12
Font panel, 37

502

Subject Index

how files open, 387

in AppleScript, 437
in macros, 423, 426
macro file, 416
macro folder, 479
new file, 1
Nisus Writer Classic documents,
493
Nisus Writer Classic Glossary, 408
Open Recent menu, 373
palettes, 17
template documents, 124, 376
using Document Manager, 387
orientation
of page, 126
envelopes, 442
portrait view, 22
orphan, 21, 90, 469, 483
outline, 239241

P
padding
text wrap around shapes, 162
Page Borders, palette, location of, 18
page break, 280281, 283284, 320,
328
display, 388389
finding, 284, 319
insert, 458
page count, 22
Page Setup, 124
page, empty (what displays on), 138
pages, insert total number of current,
459
pagination, 280
palettes
Apple-supplied Character, 316, 492
Character, 9698, 106, 110, 394,
485
Columns, 131132
create new set of, 413414
display, 17
display different set, 1718
display in Draft View or Full Screen
view, 282
Header/Footer, 136138
hide, 17
Image, 157, 160161
Indexing, 253
introduction to, 18
Language, 3842, 265266
Line Numbers, 285286
Lists, 5051, 55
Margins, 128129
Page, 22
Palette Library, 413414
Paragraph, 42, 8690, 95, 106
remove, 17
reposition, 17
restore, 17
Section, 130, 138, 142143, 191
Sections group, 128
Styles, 102104, 106107, 110112
Table, 201, 204, 212213
Table Cells, 201202, 206207,
209214
Table of Contents, 237
paper size, 124, 127128, 442
paragraph
alphabetizing, 288

automatically incrementing lists,

5152
bulleted lists, 50
cross-reference to, 227228
floating images move with, 156
formatting character, 389
how Nisus Writer Pro displays your
text, 485
in AppleScript, 437
in Find/Replace, 318319
end of paragraph position, 317
neighboring duplicate, 321
start of paragraph position, 317,
329
the Return character, 316
trailing spaces, 324
in macro instructions, 419
indent using the tools on the ruler,
25
index as, 242
invisible character, 389
mixing right to left and left to right
text, 40
number of in entire document, 275
number of in headers/footers, 275
number of on Stats palette, 17
Paragraph palette
alignment, 86
bidirectional text, 42
location of, 18
using, 21
press return only to begin
paragraphs, 25
quadruple-click mouse to select, 43
Ruler Tag on the Statusbar, 14
shading, 295
sorting paragraphs, 288
structuring paragraphs, 81
alignment, 86
in tables, 201
indents, 81
keep together, 90
keep with next, 90
line spacing, 88
same for multiple, 95
tabs, 9192
leader, 92, 94
moving, 94
removing, 95
text wrap, 83
using styles, 102103
applying, 106
removes attributes, 107
widow/orphan control, 90
styles, 102
determine style of next, 108
format index, 250251
format table of contents, 235
inherit attributes, 107
new, based on selection, 110
on Styles palette, 104
on the Statusbar, 14
remove attributes from text,
112, 289
select text with, 111112
use for index, 247
use for table of contents, 232
paragraph border
padding, 295
paragraph borders, 294
Paragraph Borders palette, 293

Paragraph Mark, 26
paragraph numbers
printing, 285
Paragraph Shading palette, 293, 295
Pashtun, typing right to left text, 29,
39
paste, 46
attributes only, 47
formatted text, 48
graphics, 139, 148
in dialog boxes, 11
in Find/Replace window, 314
in Glossaries, 407
in tables, 199
ruler, 453
swap paste, 46
tables, 219
text only, 47
text with attributes, conflicts, 113,
373
PDF, 2, 4, 150, 344, 370, 440, 442
.pdf, 1
Per Mille, 26
Perl
in merge, 360
macros
and new Nisus Writer Pro
macros, 419
embedding in Nisus Writer Pro
macros, 427
pre-defined variables, 421
writing, 435
Persian
searching for text in, 315
Persian, typing right to left text, 29, 39
picas, 399
PICT, 150
Plain Quote, 26, 298
Pleading Page, 287
plus (+) sign as mathematical
operator, 430
PNG, 150
pointer
choose table size, 199
exit Full Screen, 461
tooltip displayed, 15, 47, 192
variations, 10, 128, 208
points, 399
portrait
orientation, 126
show page width, 22
PostScript
create document, 370
opening files, 1
Pound, 26
PowerFind, 308, 310314, 316321
PowerFind Browser, 311
PowerFind Pro, 324325, 327332
preferences
Appearance, 96, 216, 388
Automatic Text, 395
Document Views, 396
Invisibles & Guides, 397
Marked Text, 397398
Selection, 398
Show Invisibles, 388
Show Page Guides, 391
Clipboards, 47, 399400
customize
Tooldrawer sets, 413
Doc Manager, 64

Indexes

503

General, 60, 113, 292, 371372

automatic saving, 386
on activation, check for updates,
373
pasted style conflict resolution,
373
text encoding of saved file, 373
Languages, 29, 37, 39
Measurement, 399
Menu Keys, 400
remove, 401
New File, 289, 371, 374376, 378
381
opening files, 387
QuickFix
Glossaries, 406408
smart/straight quotes, 298,
404
superscript ordinals, 404
typos, 265, 404405
save preferences, 414
Saving, 384, 386387
System Preferences, 38
Appearance, 292
International (languages), 31,
37, 39, 486487
Print & Fax, 124
set paper size, 124
print, 4, 366
custom paper size, 127
envelopes, 442
Highlight color, 292
image beyond the margin, 182
in AppleScript, 437
in Demo period, viii
in reverse order, 367
line or paragraph numbers, 285
margins, 127
mirror page placement, 130
non-printing characters, 330, 482
number of copies, 367
odd pages, then even, 368
options in System Preferences,
124
orientation of printed page, 126
output of Perl, 428, 435
page guides and invisibles, 367
printer limits, 128
range of pages, 367
reduce or enlarge printed area,
126
to PDF, 4, 370
to PostScript, 370
punctuation
characters in Find/Replace, 328
searching for, 319

Q
QuickFix, 34
automatic Smart Quotes, 404
fix typos, 404405
Glossary, 406
superscript ordinals, 404
quit, 4
AppleScript command, 437
Clipboards, 48, 399
during demo period, viii
Glossary files, 408
open windows, 358
Preference file, 414

recent Find/Replace expressions,

303
saved Find/Replace expressions,
305
Quotation Dash, 26
quotes
block quote style, 103
convert
automatically, 298
plain to smart, 298, 454
smart to plain, 298, 454
in Find/Replace, 319
text between, 329
in macros, plain required, 298

R
reading ease, 481
recent
in Find/Replace, 303, 305, 310
keyboard, 37
language, 34, 465
open file, 2
tooldrawer behavior, 374
rectangular selection, 43
reference management, 255259
reflect margins, 130
Registered Trademark, 26
Registration, viii
remove
attributes
using Statusbar tags to, 1415
background color, 292
bookmarks, 225
cells, rows or columns from tables,
204
color from text, 291
comments, 334
contents from a cell, 219
custom Toolbar item, 412
entry from index, 249, 253
entry from table of contents,
232, 234
extra blank lines, 319, 329
footnote or endnote, 195
from selection, 45
Glossary entry, 407
highlight color, 291
hyperlink, 441
in Document Manager
file, 78
group, 78
search criteria, 72
in Styles
attributes from, 109
from document, 113
from text, 112
index from document, 249
keyboard shortcut, 401
macro from menu, 416
page breaks, 320, 328
page guides, 391
palette from Tooldrawer, 17
palettes, 413
records in merge, 363
saved colors from the Colors panel,
296
section divider, 143
selected text, 46
style attributes from text, 289
tab indicator, 95
table from document, 219

table of contents from document,

234
trailing spaces, 329
typo from QuickFix, 405
replace
Find/Replace. See: Find/Replace
spelling, 266, 269
requirements for Nisus Writer Pro, iii
Return character, 318
and section break, 143
in Find/Replace
PowerFind, 316319, 321
PowerFind Pro, 327330
invisible, 389
list item number, 227
sort paragraphs, 288
Reverse, style from Classic, 493
Rial, 26
right
alignment, 20, 86, 469
decimal tab in tables, 203
tables, 200201
expansion, 209
text within, 201202
gutter controlled in columns, 132
indent marker, 83
no "margin" in Draft View & Full
Screen view, 81
tab, 91
tables
add column to, 204
lines, 215
row header, 213
right to left, 29, 40
direction marker invisible
character, 389
enter text, 39, 4142
mix with left to right, 4041
invisible characters, 389
line wraps and indent dialog, 85
numbered lists, 51
paragraph invisible character, 389
Paragraph palette, 20
ruler, 40
tab invisible character, 389
tables, 42, 199
right-click. See: contextual menu
ROC 16K (paper size), 124
Romanic, searching for text in, 315
.rtf, 1, 408, 450
.rtfd, 1
ruler
copy, 453
display with different formats
selected, 95
indents, 81
line wraps, 83
measurement unit displayed, 374,
399, 462
paste, 453
right to left, 40
Ruler Tag on the Statusbar, 14
show/hide, 462
structure paragraphs, 81
structuring paragraphs
same for multiple, 95
tabs, 9193, 95
Rupee, 26
Russian, searching for text in, 315

504

Subject Index
S

save
as
different format, 61
macro, 416
PDF, 370
PostScript, 370
automatic, 386
automatically, 4
to Document Manager, 60
without Save As dialog, 386
Find/Replace expressions, 304305
first time, 3
formats, 5960
in macros, 423
indicators on
Title Bar, 8
meta-data saved with file, 358, 387
methods, 59, 383
preferences, 414
rename an existing file, 61
templates, 124, 376
text encoding of, 373
untitled file, 61
screen, 163, 293, 295
scripts
in Find/Replace, 315
section, 191
break in Find/Replace, 319320,
328
break, invisible character, 389
cross-reference to, 227
footnote/endnote, 228
list item, 227
table, 228
header/footer (first page special)
per, 138
insert
new, 191
number of, 459
number of pages per, 459
page number of current, 459
section break, 459
mirror margins for, 130
number in headers/footers, 136
numbering, 191
Page Setup per, 126
restart numbering for, 142
restart numbering pages for, 142
Section (#) palette, 130
location of, 18
set margins manually for, 129
set margins numerically for, 128
129
x as an aspect of
columns, 131
footnotes/endnotes, 194195
header/footer, 138, 140
line numbers, 285286
margins, 127
paper size, 124
Section Mark, 26
select. See: invert selection
everything, 43
multipart, 43
next/previous shape, 177
rectangularly, 43
remove from selection, 45
shapes, 176
text, 43
text, all in document, 43

using the keyboard, 44

selection
column, 43
next, 262
noncontiguous, 43
previous, 261
rectangular, 43
send to back
shapes, 177
sentence
in Find/Replace
end of sentence position, 317
start of sentence position, 317
triple-click mouse to select, 43
Shadow, 20, 106
shadow, 467
of shapes, 181
Shape Fill palette, 180
Shape Metrics palette, 182
Shape Shadow palette, 181
Shape Stroke palette, 173
shapes, 147, 149, 167, 175
add to document, 175
adding, 167
adding captions to, 172
anchor, 158
bounding box, 160
bring to front, 177
Canvas, 184
canvas
paste spot, 184
copy appearance of, 186
deleting, 156
duplicate, 187
fill, 180
general rules, 167
group, 177, 180
kinds of, 167
modify, 176
move precisely, 182
multiple selected, 180
opacity, 180
palette, 167
paste appearance of, 186
resize precisely, 183
rotate, 183
select next, 177
selection mode, 176
send to back, 177
set preferred appearance of, 185
shadow, 181
shadow of, 181
text wrap, 161
text wrap around, 162
ungroup, 177, 180
Sheqel, 26
Simplified Chinese, searching for text
in, 315
slash (/) in To Capitalized, 298
smart quote, 26, 298, 404
soft hyphen, 26, 274
sort
paragraphs, 288
rows of a table, 205
Spaces
insert various, 26
spacing, 88
Special Characters, 27
spelling, 265270, 273
alternate dictionaries, 273
attribute of Nisus New File, 374

check as you type, 266, 374

Commands explained, 455
correct using
keyboard, 266
mouse, 266
spelling checker, 267
activate, 269
add word to dictionary, 269
find next error, 270
replace misspelled word,
269
skip all, 269
skip flagged word, 269
start, 267
start point, 268
stop checking, 270
Language palette for, 17, 38, 265
thesaurus, 265
preferences, 266
QuickFix autocorrect, 265
selection highlight color, 398
setting up languages for, 32
user dictionaries, 270
edit, 270
Spotlight, 71
stationery, 1, 376
Statusbar
Background Color Tag, 292
Clipboard menu, 45, 47
Copy, 45
Cut, 46
edit, 47
Paste, 4647
Color Tag, 291
edit styles, 104
Highlight Tag, 291
Language Tag on, 37, 41
Notes Tag, 192, 195196
Styles Tag, 106, 111112
stepper
illustrated, 20
style library, 115116, 118, 122
style sheet, 102
Style Sheet view
as default view of document, 374
styles, 102104, 106113
add or modify attributes for, 110
and the Dropper, 100
apply to text, 106
assign keyboard shortcut to, 108
attributes overridden, 107
change name of, 107
control overall appearance of file
with, 3, 102
copy & paste text with, 48
create new, 110
determine style of next
paragraph, 108
display of on Statusbar, 14
format index, 250251
format table of contents, 235
multiple various, 236
in Find/Replace. See: Find/
Replace:attribute sensitive
index as an attribute of, 247
inherit attributes, 107
languages, 273
QuickFix as attribute of, 402
leader tab, 93
lists, 48

Indexes

505

auto incrementing, 51, 5556,

82
bullets, 50
modify, 107
Normal, 103
of footnotes/endnotes, 192195
of Nisus New File, 375
of tables, 198
lines, 216
shading, 217
remove attributes from, 109
remove attributes from text, 112
remove from document, 113
resolve conflicts between, 113, 373
select
all text with, 111
next text with, 112, 196
range of text with, 111
special "styles", 289, 291292,
467
Style Sheet defined, 102
Style Sheet view, 104
Styles palette
illustrated, 103
location of, 17
table of contents as an attribute of,
232
text attributes, 483
various kinds supported, 106
Super B (paper size), 124
Swung Dash, 26
Syriac, 31

T
Table of Authorities, 252
table of contents, 231234, 236238
commands explained, 474
create new, 236
designate text for, 231, 237
display in Navigator, 231
format, 235237
highlight
inserted, 236
text in, 232
insert into document, 233
jump to heading, 232
remove entry from, 232
remove from document, 234
see text included in, 231
Table of Contents palette, location
of, 18
update, 233234
use styles to apply, 232
tables, 197, 199201, 203204, 206
219, 294
add cells to, 204
adjust cell padding, 214
alignment, 201
of text in, 201
along decimal point, 203
Borders palette, location of, 18
cells
add, 204
lines,edges, borders, 215
merge, 206
navigate among, 200
padding, 214
remove, 204
select, 200
shading, color, 217218
split, 207

Commands explained, 472473

create, 198
from pre-existing text, 199
headers, 212
row header, 213
titles, 213
cut, copy and paste, 219
determine size of new, 198199
enter graphics in, 200
enter text in, 199
equalize
column widths, 209
row heights, 210
Find/Replace in, 219
insert, 198
Insert Table sheet, 198
lines, edges, borders, 215
color, 217
determine which, 215
style, 216
thickness, 216
merge cells, 206
navigate among cells, 200
palettes, location of, 18
remove, 219
cells from, 204
resize
cells, 208209
to fill page, 212
to fit contents, 211
right to left, 42, 199
select cells of, 200
Shading palette, location of, 18
split cells, 207
statistics (word, character, etc.) in,
21
Table button, 198
Table Cells palette, location of, 18
Table palette, location of, 18
Tabloid (paper size), 124
Tabloid Extra (paper size), 124
tabs, 9192, 9495
leader, 93
templates, 1, 376
text and callout box, 170
add captions to images, 172
adding caption to, 172
adding to the document, 169
enter text, 169
expand button, 168
link button, 168
linking boxes, 171
text and callout boxes, 168
general rules, 168
text box. See: text and callout boxes
text encoding, 483
Thai
searching for text in, 315
thesaurus, 270272
Nisus Thesaurus, 270
Thin Space, 26
title page
exclude header, 138
, 26
Tok Pisin, 31
Toolbar, 1112
Tooldrawer, 1618
top
alignment
note reference divider line, 195
of floating images, 160

text in tables, 201

margin, 128
tables
lines, 215
text drawn on images, 160
track changes, 345348, 351353,
355, 387
accept, 352
accept or reject, 352
copy & paste, 347
determine how changes display,
350
determine kinds of changes to
track, 348
hide & show highlighted changes in
text, 348
hide & show pane, 348
introduction, 345
of particular author, 348
reject, 353
review changes by paragraph, 353
review changes by sentence, 353
review changes options, 354
selecting changes, 351
start, 345
stop, 347
view & review, 347
trackpad, using the i, xi, 5, 7, 43, 46,
6667, 77, 81, 83, 94, 160, 193
194, 199200, 219, 221, 231
233, 261, 266, 335, 369, 392,
400, 412, 417, 419420, 440
441, 457, 462
Trademark, 26
Traditional Chinese
searching for text in, 315
typewriter, 25

U
Underline
Commands explained, 467
leader tab, 93
index, 251
table of contents, 236
using the Character palette, 20
ungroup
shapes, 177
Unicode, 29, 298, 324, 327328, 330,
332, 388, 454455, 467, 481,
483, 485, 491492, 494
searching for Private Use Area
characters, 319
units
measurement, 85, 94, 182, 187,
374, 387, 399, 462
update
automatic bookmarked text, 224
automatic content, 276
Check for Updates, 450
linked imported images, 150, 154
options on rebuilding a table of
contents, 234
receive notification of application
update, ix
stale automatic content, 143
table of contents illustrated, 238
UPPERCASE
convert to, 298, 454
display as, 467
Urdu, typing right to left text, 29, 39
US Legal (paper size), 124

506

Subject Index

US Letter (paper size), 124

V
view
change using the Toolbar, 11
customize, 396
displayed (or not) in various
columns, 131
footnotes/endnotes, 192
headers/footers, 135, 138
images, 156, 167
line numbers, 285
page breaks, 283
section numbers, 191
Draft View, 282
Full Screen, 282
magnify, 22
new file preferences, 374
Page View, set margins in, 128
saved with file, 387
Style Sheet options, 104, 106109,
113

W
watermark, 368370
widow, 21, 8990, 469

windows
aspects saved with file, 387
Clipboard, 47
close, 358
determining active, 358
drag and drop to/from, 46
expand to full size, 358
in macros, 435
minimize, 358
Palette Library, 413
PowerFind Browser, 311
redisplay minimized, 358
tour of, 67, 1012, 14
Untitled, 376
Window menu
using, 358
working with multiple, 10, 358
Won, 26
word
count, 275
location of Stats palette, 17
in Find/Replace
end of word position, 317
start of word position, 317
WordPerfect, 1

writing in multiple languages, 29,

35
dictionaries, 273
right to left
direction markers, 458
WYSIWYG, 96, 394, 466, 484

Y
Yen, 26
Yiddish
searching for text in, 315
typing right to left text, 29, 39
typing unusual characters, 490

Z
Zero Width Joiner, 26
Zero Width Non-Joiner, 26
Zero Width Space, 26
zoom, 22. See also: magnify
Commands explained, 462
magnifying glass on the Statusbar,
15
Page Zoom palette
location of, 18
percentage saved with file, 358
Window menu command, 480

Commands & Screen Messages

Symbols

- (minus sign) ii, 28, 72, 113, 131, 225,

253, 277, 324, 328, 334, 405,

430
- (hyphen) ..................................... 456
- (non-breaking hyphen) ................ 456
(figure dash) ............................... 456
(en dash) ..................................... 456
(em dash) .................................... 456
(quotation dash) ......................... 456
(swung dash) ............................. 456
,
............................................... 52
!=
............................................. 422
?
............................................. 329
??
............................................. 329
(in the Tooldrawer) ........................ 17
(
.............................. 324, 329331
(
............................................. 328
(?:
............................................. 329
()(\.|,) ........................................... 331
([;])(["]) ......................................... 329
(["])([.,]) ........................................ 329
)
........................ 52, 324, 329331
[
...................................... 325, 328
["].+?["] ....................................... 329
[]
............................................. 328
[^!-~] ........................................... 328
[^]
............................................. 328
[^] ............................................. 328
[] ............................................. 328
]
...................................... 325, 328
@
................................ 20, 321322
*
...................................... 329, 430
*?
............................................. 329
/
............................................. 430
\
...................................... 326, 328
#
............................................... 53
^
...................................... 328329
\(([^(]|\n)+\) ................................. 329
[^[:alpha:]_] .................................... 327
[^[:alpha:]] ..................................... 327
^[[:alpha:]]+ ................................... 329
[^\s]* .................................... 330331
[^\t]+\t ......................................... 328
[^a-z] ........................................... 328
[^abc] ........................................... 328
[[^abc]||[\n]] .................................. 328

............................................. 401

............................................. 328
+ (plus sign) .. ii, 2728, 31, 6972, 98,
104, 110, 131, 221, 231, 251,
253, 277, 324326, 329, 343,
405, 430
+?
............................................. 329

............................................. 457

............................................. 457

............................................. 457
<
4, 5051, 74, 106, 232, 269, 327,
422, 451, 456
<= ............................................. 422

............................................. 457
== ............................................. 422
>
............................................. 422
>= ............................................. 422

............................................. 457

............................................. 457

............................................. 457

............................................. 457

............................................. 457

............................................. 457
............................................. 401
............................................. 401
............................................. 456
............................................. 456
...................................... 324, 456
............................................. 456
............................................. 456
............................................. 456
............................................. 456
............................................. 456
............................................. 456
............................................. 456
............................................. 456

0 - 9 (digits / numerals)
\0 ...................................... 324, 328
0 or 1 .................................... 314, 329
0 or 1 Shortest ............................... 314
0-9 ............................................. 328
[0-9] ............................................. 327
0% (Clear) ....................... 180, 478479
0+ .............................. 311, 314, 329
0+ Shortest ................................... 314
1
...................................... 138, 171
\1
...................................... 329331
1 pt ...................................... 393, 479
\1 ...................................... 330331
1.5 Space Lines .............................. 470
(1[\x20\t]*-?[\x20\t]*)?(\(?\d\d\d\)?)?
[\x20\t]*-?[\x20\t]*\d\d
\d[\x20\t]*-?[\x20\t]*\d\d\d\d 332
1/2 pt ................................... 216, 294
1+ ....... 314, 319, 321, 324325, 329
1+ Shortest ................................... 314

............................................. 457
pt ............................................. 479

............................................. 457

............................................. 457
#10 Envelope ................................. 442
100% ............................................ 462
100% (Solid) ................... 180, 478479
1 pt ............................................ 479
12
............................................. 325
125% ............................................ 462
2
............................................. 171
\2
...................................... 330332

............................................. 457
2 pt ............................................. 479
2 pts ............................................. 393
\2\1 ...................................... 329, 331
\2\4\1\2\3\3\4\1\2\1\4 ............... 327
\2\4\5\1\2\3\3\4\1\5\5\2\1\4 ..... 326

............................................. 457
\20 ............................................. 329
200% ............................................ 462
25% ............................................. 462
\3
............................................. 330

............................................. 457
3 pt ............................................. 479
3 pts ............................................. 393
3/4 pt ................................... 216, 294
\3\2\1 .......................................... 330

............................................. 457
pt ............................................. 479
4 pt ............................................. 479
400% ............................................ 462
5 pt ............................................. 479

50% ............................................. 462

6 pt ............................................. 479
7 pt ............................................. 479
75% ............................................. 462
8 pt .............................. 216, 294, 479
800% ............................................ 462

A
a
...................................... 330331
A text (CSV) file .............................. 363
[a-f] ............................................. 328
[A-Z] ............................................ 327
[a-z] ............................................. 327
[A-Za-z] ........................................ 327
[A-Za-z0-9] .................................. 327
[:a] ............................................. 328
(AB)(?:[[:upper:]]+?)(EF)\1([[:upper:]]+?)
\1([[:lower:]]+?)\1\4\2 ............. 326
(AB)([[:upper:]]+?)(EF)\1([[:upper:]]+?)
\1([[:lower:]]+?)\1\5\3 ............. 326
(AB)+ ............................................ 326
[abc] ............................................. 328
About Nisus Writer Pro .................... 449
Above or Below .................. 227228
Accent Darga ................................. 457
Accent Dehi ................................... 457
Accent Etnahta ............................... 457
Accent Geresh ................................ 457
Accent Geresh Muqdam ................... 457
Accent Gershayim ........................... 457
Accent Iluy ..................................... 457
Accent Mahapakh ........................... 457
Accent Merkah ............................... 457
Accent Merkah Kefula ..................... 457
Accent Munah ................................ 457
Accent Ole ..................................... 457
Accent Pashta ................................ 457
Accent Pazer .................................. 457
Accent Qadma ................................ 457
Accent Qarneypara ......................... 457
Accent Revia .................................. 457
Accent Segol .................................. 457
Accent Shalshelet ........................... 457
Accent Telisha Gedola ..................... 457
Accent Telisha Qetana ..................... 457
Accent Tevir .................................. 457
Accent Tipeha ................................ 457
Accent Yerah Ben Yomo ................... 457
Accent Yetiv ................................... 457
Accent Zaqef Gadol ......................... 457
Accent Zaqef Qatan ......................... 457
Accent Zarqa .................................. 457
Accent Zinor .................................. 457
Accept ........................................... 352
Accept All Changes .............. 352, 474
Accept Changes .............................. 355
Accept Changes in Selection .. 352, 474
Accept Tracked Changes in Selection .. 15
Accessibility .................................. 392
Activate ........................................... 77
Activate Bookends .......................... 475
Active palette title tint .................... 396
Active Selection .............................. 398
Active Style .................................... 237
Add ......................................... ix, 461
Add Bookmark .. 43, 221, 224, 397, 461
Add Bookmark As ........ 221, 224, 397
Add Caption to Image .............. 172, 477

508

Commands & Screen Messages

Add Caption To Image ... 152153, 157,

159
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add

Comment ........... 15, 333334, 473

Custom ..................................... 31
Custom Group ........................... 69
Custom Toolbar Item ................ 410
Custom Toolbar Item ..... 410, 462
Files ......................................... 67
Files to Group ................... 67, 78
Filter Group ............................... 71
Folder Group ............................. 70
Group ................................. 6971
Item ....................................... 411
Link to Bookmark .................. 229
Link to File ............... 2, 229, 461
Link ..................................... 461
Macro to Menu from File ........ 416
Macro to Menu From File ........ 479
new entries and remove stale entries

234
Add or Remove Blank Lines .............. 432
Add Pasted Styles ........................... 114
Add pasted styles to the destination
document ............................... 373
Add pasted styles to the destination
document ............................... 373
Add styles to a new style collection .. 115
Add styles to an existing style collection

............................................. 118
Add Tab Stop ........................ 92, 471
Add to Document Manager . 67, 116, 452
Add to Evernote ............................. 439
Add to Favorites ....................... 98, 466
Add to iTunes as a Spoken Track ...... 439
Additional Index As ...... 245, 247, 475
Address ................................. 360, 460
Address (city) ......................... 360, 460
Address (country) ................... 360, 460
Address (state) ....................... 360, 460
Address (street) ............................. 460
Address (zip) ......................... 360, 460
Adjust Anchor When Shape Repositioned

...................................... 159, 477

Advanced ....... 234, 377, 379, 381, 450

Advanced Search .............................. 63
Advanced Search ........................... 75
After ....................................... 21, 295
age Number ................................... 138
Agree ............................................. viii
Al Bayan .......................................... 34
Align Bottom .................................. 477
Align Cells ............................. 203, 473
Align Center ................... 469, 473, 477
Align in Gutter ............................... 195
Align Justify ................................... 469
Align Left ....... 201203, 469, 473, 477
Align Middle .................................. 477
Align Right ..... 201202, 469, 473, 477
Align Table .................................... 473
Align Top ...................................... 477
Alignment ...................... 160, 165, 370
All ........................................ 71, 367
All Authors ............. 336337, 348, 353
All Characters ................................ 492
All Fonts ............................ 19, 98, 466
All Managed Files ......... 6568, 451452
All Sections .................................... 127
[[:alnum:]] ...................................... 327
[[:alnum:]] ..................................... 327
[[:alpha:]_] ...................................... 327
[[:alpha:]] ....................................... 327

([[:alpha:]]\s)(\.\.+) .................. 330331

Also switch font size ........................ 35
Always ask me what to do ....... 113, 373
Always Closed ................................ 374
Always Open .................................. 374
AND ............................................... 72
and Work Address (country) ............. 360
Any ........................................ 71, 318
Any Attributes ........................ 301, 464
Any Baseline .................................. 468
Any Break ....................... 284, 319320
Any Case Change ............................ 467
Any Character Style ........................ 464
Any Currency ................................. 319
Any Double Quote .......................... 319
Any Font ........................................ 466
Any Font Size ................................. 467
Any Highlight ................................. 471
Any Kerning ................................... 469
Any Language ................................ 466
Any Ligature .................................. 468
Any Paragraph Style ........................ 465
Any Private Use Area ....................... 319
Any Punctuation ............................. 319
Any Single Quote ............................ 319
Any Space ...................................... 319
Any Strikethrough .......................... 468
Any Super/Sub ............................... 468
Any Symbol ................................... 319
Any Text Color ............................... 472
Any Underline ................................ 468
Any Whitespace .............................. 319
AnyArabic ...................................... 315
AnyCharacter ......................... 318, 321
AnyCyrillic ..................................... 315
AnyDevanagari ............................... 315
AnyDigit ........................ 318, 320, 327
AnyDigitAnyDigit ............................ 320
AnyGreek ...................................... 315
AnyGujarati ................................... 315
AnyGurmukhi ................................. 315
AnyHan ......................................... 315
AnyHangul ..................................... 315
AnyHebrew .................................... 315
AnyHiragana .................................. 315
AnyHTMLTag ................................. 319
AnyKatakana .................................. 315
AnyLatin ........................................ 315
AnyLetter ...................................... 327
AnyLetterOrDigit .................... 318, 327
AnyLowercaseLetter ........................ 318
AnyParagraph ........................ 319, 321
AnySentence .................................. 319
AnyText ........................................ 318
AnyTextCharacter ........................... 318
AnyThai ........................................ 315
AnyUppercaseLetter ........................ 318
Anywhere ........................................ 72
AnyWord ....................................... 319
AnyWordCharacter .......................... 318
Appearance .................... 398, 449, 454
Appearance ............................ 454455
Append above or below after number.

............................................. 228
Append Copy ..................... 45, 47, 453
Append Cut ........................ 4647, 453
Apple ............................ 124, 392, 486
Application .................................... 430
Apply .................................... 368, 370
Apply Changes ........................ 235237
Arabic ....................... 26, 34, 386, 456

Arabic - Abjad (,,, ).................... 52

Arabic - Indic (,,,) ........................ 52
Arabic - Indic Eastern (,,,) ............ 52
Arabic (01,02,03,04) .......................... 52
Arabic (1,2,3,4) ................................. 52
Arabic (Windows) ........................... 386
Arrow ........................................... 476
Arrow Down ................................ 457
Arrow Left ................................. 457
Arrow Right ............................... 457
Arrow Up .................................... 457
Arrow Wrap ................................ 457
Arrowhead (Filled) ....................... 457
Arrowhead ................................. 457
Arrowheads ................................... 479
As Performance Allows ................... 144
Ascending (A-Z) ..................... 289, 455
ASCII ............................................. 386
Asterism .................................... 457
Attach on Left Side .... 16, 221, 232, 462
Attach PDF to New Message ..... 442, 451
Attach to New Message ........... 441, 451
Attachments .................................. 447
Attribute Sensitive 148, 301, 397, 433,

464469, 471472
Author ............................. 71, 372, 460
Author #1 Comments ...................... 396
Author #6 Comments ...................... 396
author name .................................. 374
Author Name .................. 334, 351, 374
author name and date ..................... 374
Author Name and Date .... 334, 351, 374
Author Name, Date and Time .. 334, 351,

374
author name, date and time ............. 374
Automatic .............................. 368, 386
Automatic - More Often .......... 274, 464
Automatic - Normal ................ 274, 463
Automatic Content ... 143145, 276, 475
Automatic Content Update Preferences

...................................... 144, 476

Automatic Number . 136, 138, 141142,

191, 276, 395, 459

Automatic Numbers ................ 144, 395
Automatic Text ............................... 395
Automatic topic .............................. 253
Automatically check for new application
versions. ................................ 372
Automatically check for new versions 373
Automatically generate topic from text

...................................... 243244
Automatically named bookmark suffix 395
average column .............................. 430
Average Column ............................. 430
Average Row .................................. 430
average row ................................... 430
Average Rows and Columns ............. 430

B
\b
............................................. 328
Background Color ................... 292, 472
Backups ........................... 69, 385, 451
Baht ............................................. 456
Balance Column Text ....................... 132
Based on ............................... 107, 194
Based on Selection .......................... 104
Baseline ................................. 289, 468
Basic ............................................. 234
Batch by ........................................ 353
Beamed Musical Note (Sixteenth) .. 457
Before ..................................... 21, 295

Indexes

509

Before page number ....................... 250

Before Text ...................................... 56
Between Paragraphs ....................... 294
Bibliography ................... 255259, 475
Birthday ........................................ 360
Black ............................. 472, 478479
[[:blank:]] ............................... 324, 327
[[:blank:]]+$ ................................... 324
Block Arrow Down .......................... 476
Block Arrow Left ............................. 476
Block Arrow Right ........................... 476
Block Arrow Up .............................. 476
Block Quote ........................... 103, 465
Blue ....................... 471472, 478479
Blur ............................................. 181
bold ...................................... 243244
Bold 20, 106, 289, 370, 375, 418420,

424, 467
Bookends ............................... 255258
Bookmark ............... 226227, 238, 461
Bookmark As ............................... 461
Bookmark Name ............................. 221
Bookmark ................................... 461
Bookmarked .................................. 397
Bookmarked (autoname) .................. 397
Bookmarked Text .................... 227, 238
Bookmarks ............. 221, 224225, 461
Bottom ........... 128, 182, 195, 202, 473
Bottom Edge .................................. 294
Bottom of Page ............................... 194
Box (Checked) ............................. 457
Box (Xed) .................................... 457
Box ............................................ 457
Brace Pair ...................................... 476
Bracket Pair ................................... 476
Bring All to Front ............................ 480
Bring to Front ......... 158, 177, 179, 477
Broken Bar ................................... 457
Brown ............................ 472, 478479
Browse All Versions ..................... 450
Browse ................................ 363364
Bullet ......................................... 457
Bullet List ................................ 50, 471
Buy License .................................... ix
Buy Nisus Writer Pro ....................... 450

C
Calculation .................................... 430
Callout .................................. 169, 476
Callout, Accent Edge ............... 169, 476
Callout, Rounded Speech Box ... 169, 476
Callout, Speech Box ................. 169, 476
Cancel 27, 74, 114, 127, 307, 366, 368
Canvas .................................. 184, 476
Capitalize{} .................................... 319
Capture ......................... 320, 326, 329
Capture () ...................................... 321
Capture Selection from Screen .......... 439
Capture() ............................... 313, 321
Captured1 .............. 313, 320321, 329
Captured10 ............................ 313, 329
Captured2 ..................................... 320
Caret blinks on/off ......................... 393
CDGHabcdABCDEFEFGHABabcdabcdCDAB
GH ......................................... 326
Cells .............................. 200, 204, 472
Cent ............................................. 456
Center .............. 91, 195, 201202, 473
Centimeters (cm) 85, 94, 182, 187, 374,

462
Central European ............................ 386

Central European (ISO Latin 2) ......... 386

Central European (ISO Latin 4) ......... 386
Central European (Windows Latin 2) .. 386
Change Tracking ............................ 348
Character ......................... 27, 344, 480
Character Attributes ....................... 112
Character Case ....................... 454, 467
Character Count ..................... 276, 459
Character Level ....................... 111112
Character Style102, 104, 106, 110112,

114, 458, 464

Character Style Based on Selection .. 110,

458
character width .............................. 393
CharacterInSet[] ............................. 314
CharacterNotInSet[] ........................ 314
Characters Only (large size) ............... 26
Characters Only (medium size) .......... 26
Characters Only (small size) .............. 26
Check for Updates ....................... 450
Check mark ................................... 352
Check Spelling ........................ 270, 455
Check Spelling As You Type ............. 266
Check Spelling as You Type ..... 374, 456
Choose .................................. 383384
Choose log Folder ........................ 446
Choose an icon for the toolbar item .. 411
Choose Folder ............................ 64, 70
Choose Folder ............................. 385
Choose Image File ........................ 411
Choose .. 64, 70, 255, 369, 379, 385,

448
Circle ............................................ 476
Circle (Filled) ............................... 457
Circle .......................................... 457
Circle Numbers ( .............................. 52
Clean up Your room ........................ 415
Cleanup Punctuation ....................... 432
Clear All Clipboards ........................ 431
Clear Cell Content ................... 219, 473
Clear Menu ............................ 450, 467
Click and drag to draw the new shape.
Click
Click
Click
Click

...................... 149, 168, 175, 184

and drag to select shapes. ....... 176
for Footer .............................. 141
for Header ............................. 141

the destination text box where text

should flow ............................. 170
Click the destination text box where text
should flow. ............................ 171
Clip drawing to line ........................ 148
Clipboard ................................... 4547
Clipboards ....... 47, 399, 431, 449, 456
Close .................................... 358, 450
Cloud ........................................ 457
Club Suit ..................................... 457
Code Tables ................................... 315
Collapse All Comments ............ 335, 474
Collapse Comments ................ 335, 474
Collection ........................................ 98
Color ...... 101, 291, 370, 375, 478479
Colors .... 20, 195, 217218, 291, 295,

375, 390391, 393, 398, 468, 471

472
Column Break ................................ 458
Column to the Left .......... 204, 213, 472
Column to the Right ........ 204, 213, 472
Columns 131132, 198, 200, 204, 472,
480
Command .......................................... ii
Comment ....................... 103, 334, 464

Comment Display Options ... 336, 396,

473
Comments ..... 333336, 342343, 395

396, 460, 462, 473

Comments show ............................. 374
Company ....................................... 460
Compare Documents ....................... 432
Compare Duplicate Text .................. 432
Complete ................................. 43, 454
Compress Files ............................... 432
Configure Date & Time Formats ..... 460
Configure Index Styles .. 250252, 475
Configure TOC Styles .... 235236, 475
Contains .......................................... 72
Contains Word ................................. 72
Content ........................................... 71
Continue .................................... x, 446
Continue From Previous Section 285, 463
Continue numbering across document
content .................................... 55
Continue Numbering from Previous .. 52,

240, 471
Continue Throughout Document ........ 49
Continuous .................................... 196
Control the Application ................... 371
Convert ............ 48, 298, 404, 454, 467
Convert Notes to Text ..................... 432
Convert to Endnote ......................... 195
Convert to Fixed Content ................. 476
Convert to Fixed Content .............. 145
Convert to Footnote ........................ 195
Convert to Table ..................... 200, 472
Copies .......................................... 367
Copy .... 45, 4748, 77, 145, 151, 219,

276, 299300, 320, 400, 418,

435, 437, 453
Copy Character Attributes .... 45, 47, 453
Copy Document File Path ................. 453
Copy Link .................................. 2, 441
Copy Ruler ............................... 48, 453
Copy Selected Citations ................... 257
Copy Shape Appearance . 158, 186, 453,
477
Copy Table Text ..................... 219, 472
Copy Text Only ............. 45, 48, 77, 453
Copy to Clipboard ................... 307, 322
Copy to Find ........... 299, 400, 453, 455
Copy to Replace .............. 300, 453, 455
Copyright ...................................... 460
Copyright ................................... 457
Corner Bracket (Left)
................... 457
Corner Bracket (Right)
................. 457
Cornflower Blue .............. 472, 478479
Correct .......................................... 269
Correct All ..................................... 269
Correct Next Spelling ...................... 455
Correct Spelling .............................. 266
Correct Spelling & Add to QuickFix ... 266
Count by ....................................... 286
Count words in this language ............ 34
Crash ............................................ 445
Create ............................................. 55
Create a new document ................... 372
Create Email Address List (v2) ......... 432
Create Misspelled Word List ............. 432
Create Word Frequency List ...... 248249
Create Word Frequency List (v2) ....... 432
Create Word List (v4) ....... 248249, 432
Cross-reference ............................. 395
Cross-reference separator ............... 251
Cross-reference ... 225, 238, 395, 461

510

Commands & Screen Messages

Cross-References ........................... 144

Cube Root ..................................... 457
Cubed ........................................... 457
Currency ................................. 26, 456
Current Date .................................. 459
Current Date & Time ....................... 459
Current Time ................................. 459
Currently Open ................. 68, 412, 451
Cursor Size .................................... 392
Custom Character(s) ............... 236, 251
Custom character(s) .......................... 93
Custom Date & Time .................... 460
Custom Group .................................. 65
Custom Palette Groups .................... 414
Custom Property ............................ 460
Customizable Color ........................ 398
Customize Special Characters .. 2728,

458
Customize Toolbar ............... 410, 462
Cut ... 4647, 145, 219, 234, 249, 453
Cyan ....................... 471472, 478479
Cyrillic .......................................... 386
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5) ....................... 386
Czech/Slovak/Lithuanian ................ 404

D
d
...................................... 330331
\d
.............................. 324, 327328
Dagger ....................................... 457
Dark Blue ....................... 472, 478479
Dark Gray ....................... 472, 478479
Dark Green ..................... 472, 478479
Dark Red ........................ 472, 478479
Dashed(---) ..................... 93, 236, 251
Dashes and Hyphens ......... 26, 274, 456
date and time ................................. 374
Date and Time 334, 351, 374, 395, 459
Date Created .............................. 63, 71
Date Created - newest first .............. 432
Date Created - oldest first ............... 432
Date Created, newest first ................. 72
Date Created, oldest first ................... 72
Date Modified ............................. 63, 71
Date Modified - newest first ............ 432
Date Modified - oldest first .............. 432
Date Modified, newest first ................ 72
Date Modified, oldest first ................. 72
Date Opened .................................... 71
Decimal ................................... 91, 203
Decrease ....................................... 467
Decrease Both Left Indents ................ 82
Decrease Both Left/Right Indents ..... 470
Decrease By ........................ 100, 467
Decrease First Line Indent ............... 470
Decrease Hanging Indent ................. 470
Decrease Height ..................... 183, 478
Decrease Indent ............................. 471
Decrease List Level ................... 52, 241
Decrease Right/left Indent ............... 471
Decrease Size ......................... 183, 478
Decrease Space After Paragraph ....... 470
Decrease Space Before Paragraph ..... 470
Decrease Width ...................... 183, 478
Default format ............................... 386
Default Index ................................. 475
Default Leader Tab Settings ............ 93
Default Note Text ........................... 195
Default paper size in Page Setup ...... 124
Default TOC ................................... 475
Degree ........................................ 457

Delete46, 77, 204, 219, 234, 249, 306,

400, 408, 453, 472

Delete Glossary .............................. 408
Delete Permanently ......................... 412
Department ................................... 360
Descending (Z-A) ................... 289, 455
Describe the issue ................... 445446
Description .................................... 310
Deselect All ............. 215216, 293294
Diamond ....................................... 476
Diamond (Filled) .......................... 457
Diamond ..................................... 457
Diamond Pattern ......................... 457
Diamond Suit ............................... 457
Different First Page ......................... 138
Different Footers ............................ 138
Different Headers ........................... 138
Directionality Marker ........... 4041, 458
Disabled ................................ 274, 463
Display .......................................... 392
Display as Capitalize ....................... 467
Display as lowercase ....................... 467
Display as Small Caps ..................... 467
Display as UPPERCASE ..................... 467
Display Options ............................. 348
Display Text ........................... 228, 238
Display text ................................... 227
Distribute Columns Evenly ....... 209, 473
Distribute Rows Evenly ............ 210, 473
Divide ........................................... 457
Divide Records with ........................ 365
Divider line .................................... 195
Do not ask again for this document as
long as it remains open. ........... 114
Do not change the font ................ 34, 36
Do not change the keyboard .............. 37
Do not show this message again box 156
Do nothing ............................. 372373
Doc Manager ............................ 64, 449
Doc Reference Style ........................ 195
Document ...................................... 432
Document Fonts ............................ 466
Document Content ............................ 75
Document Creation Date ................. 459
Document Creation Date & Time ....... 459
Document Fonts ............................... 98
Document Import Issue ................... 445
Document Last Printed Date ............. 460
Document Last Printed Date & Time .. 460
Document Last Saved Date .............. 459
Document Last Saved Date & Time .... 459
Document Manager2, 59, 61, 6971, 73,

122, 387, 451, 480

Document Properties ........................ 72
Document Property ......... 372, 395, 460
Document Template .. 59, 377, 381, 451
Document Views ....................... 16, 396
documents in Open Recent menu ..... 373
Does Not Contain ............................. 72
Dollar ............................................ 456
Dont Backup .................................. 385
Done ............................................. 410
Dotted () ....................... 93, 236, 251
Double .................................... 20, 468
Double Arrow ................................. 476
Double Dagger ............................ 457
Double Plain Quote " ....................... 457
Double Smart Quote (Close) ........... 457
Double Smart Quote (Low 9) .......... 457
Double Smart Quote (Open) ........... 457
Double Space Lines ......................... 470

Draft ............................................. 108

Draft background ........................... 396
Draft text ...................................... 396
Draft View ...... 140, 282, 303, 374, 461
Draw behind text ............................ 165
Draw Floating Shape ....................... 149
Draw floating shape ................ 167, 169
Draw over text on page ................... 370
Dropbox ................................. 451452
Duplicate ............................... 187, 451
Duplicate Shape ................... 187, 477
Dutch ............................................ 404

E
Edges to modify ............................. 293
Edit 2, 7, 15, 2628, 4348, 57, 63,

77, 145, 151, 195196, 199, 203,

219, 234, 249, 257, 261, 266
267, 269270, 275276, 284,
289, 298300, 310311, 315316,
321, 335, 398, 404, 408, 455,
458, 467, 492
Edit Clipboard ................................ 400
Edit Clipboards ............................ 456
Edit Current Clipboard .............. 47, 456
Edit Custom Note Reference ............. 194
Edit Glossary .......................... 406408
Edit Languages ............................ 466
Edit Line Wraps and Indent ................ 85
Edit Link ......................... 2, 441, 461
Edit List Styles ............................. 471
Edit Properties ............................ 460
Edit Styles ................................... 104
Editing .......................................... 432
editing locations for Previous/Next
Selection menus ...................... 373
EFabcdABEFGHGHabcdABEFABabcd ... 327
Either .............................................. 75
Ellipses ...................................... 457
Em Dash ........................................ 456
Email ..................................... 360, 460
Emphatic ....................... 103, 107, 464
Empty Trash .................................. 408
En Dash ......................................... 456
Enable Diagnostics ......................... 445
End of Document ............................ 194
End of Paragraph ............................ 317
End of Section ................................ 194
End of Sentence .............................. 317
End of Word ................................... 317
Endnote 103, 192, 195, 226, 228, 395,

461, 465
Endnote Reference .................. 103, 464
Ends With ........................................ 72
English .............................. 42, 98, 466
Enter ............................................... 19
Enter License .................................. ix
Enter Shape Selection Mode ... 176, 178,

477
Enter Text Box Linking Mode .... 171, 477
Entire Document ............................. 369
Entire File .............................. 312, 320
EPUB ....................................... 60, 451
esc ............................................. 461
esreveR ......................................... 493
Euro 456
Evaluate Selection ........................... 430
Even only ...................................... 368
Even Page .............. 138, 142, 191, 459
example ........................................ 404
Exchange Front Windows ................. 480

Indexes

511

Exit Full Screen ............................... 461

Expand .......................................... 168
Expand All Comments ............. 335, 474
Expand Comments .................. 335, 474
Expand Glossary ..................... 408, 454
Expand glossary entries as you type . 408
Expand Mac OS X system-wide text
replacements as you type ......... 405
Expansion ...................................... 187
Explosion ...................................... 476
Export as PDF .......................... 4, 451
Export As ...................... 59, 441, 451

F
\f
............................................. 328
Face ............................................. 101
Family .................. 19, 9798, 375, 394
Favorite Fonts .......................... 98, 466
Favorites ......................................... 98
Feature Request ............................. 445
Female Sign ................................ 457
Field code ...................................... 397
Figure Dash ................................... 456
File vi, 14, 7, 59, 61, 63, 65, 67, 71

72, 79, 116, 122, 124, 126127,

143, 255, 276277, 358, 361
362, 366, 368, 370, 372, 376
377, 379380, 387, 410, 412,
417, 441443, 449451, 460, 482
File Format ... 322, 361, 377, 381, 417,
441
File Formats ................................... 386
File Name ................................ 71, 460
File name template ......................... 364
File Name with Extension ................. 460
File Path ........................................ 460
File Size .......................................... 71
File Size (in Bytes) .......................... 460
File Size (in Kilobytes) ..................... 460
File Size (in Megabytes) ................... 460
File Size, largest first ........................ 72
File Size, smallest first ...................... 72
File Type ......................................... 71
Filename ......................................... 75
Find 63, 257, 284, 299300, 310311,
321, 433, 455
Find & replace ................................ 398
Find All ... 45, 300301, 307, 312, 320,
433, 455
Find All and Show Context ............... 433
Find All Selected Text ...................... 455
Find and Replace All ....................... 434
Find Ignoring Diacriticals ................ 433
Find in All Open Documents ............. 433
Find Next 268269, 300, 307, 322, 455
Find Next Selected Text ................... 455
Find Previous .......... 300301, 307, 455
Find Reference ............................... 257
Find Reference ............................ 475
Find what244, 301, 305306, 309311,
320322, 327, 330332
First Name ............................. 360, 460
Fit to Contents ................ 210212, 473
Fit to Page ............................. 212, 473
Fix capitalization at the start of
sentences. .............................. 404
Fix Margins .................................... 366
Fix typos ............................... 265, 404
Fixed ......................................... 8889
Fixed Current Date .......................... 459
Fixed Current Date & Time ............... 459

Fixed Current Time ......................... 459

Fixed Line Spacing .................... 88, 470
Flash Next in Multipart Selection ...... 454
Flash Previous in Multipart Selection . 454
Flash QuickFix ................................ 398
Flash Selection ................ 398, 454455
Float the palette .......................... 373
Florin ............................................ 456
Folder ............................................. 63
FollowedBy() ........................... 313314
Font 19, 9699, 101, 286, 369, 375,

394, 466467
Font Face ....................................... 467
Font menu shows previews ........ 96, 394
Font missing .................................. 397
Font Preview Selected Text .............. 433
Font substituted ............................. 397
Footer ................................... 103, 128
Footer/Header ............................... 465
Footnote 103, 192195, 226, 228, 395,

461, 465
Footnote & Endnote References ........ 144
Footnote Reference ................. 103, 464
Footnote Symbols ............................. 52
Footnote Symbols (*,,,) ................. 52
Force Quit ......................................... 7
Forget ........................................... 270
Form Paragraph .............................. 433
Format 8, 3840, 48, 5052, 82, 86, 88

90, 92, 9598, 100102, 104,

106, 111112, 114, 142143,
191, 193194, 196, 241, 274,
286, 289292, 301302, 322,
344, 395, 454, 464468, 483
Format:Strikethrough:Single ............. 420
Format:Underline:Single ................... 420
Formatting for ............................... 251
Found .................................... 313, 322
Found # ......................................... 310
Fraction (1/4) ................................. 457
Fraction: (1/2) ................................ 457
Fraction: (1/3) ................................ 457
Fraction: (2/3) ................................ 457
Fraction: (3/4) ................................ 457
From ............................................. 367
From Unicode Code Points ............... 455
Fuchsia .......................... 472, 478479
Full Screen ..................... 140, 282, 461
Full screen background ................... 396
Full screen caret ............................. 396
Full screen gutter ........................... 396
Full screen text .............................. 396
Full Screen view uses ...................... 373
Function: ......................................... 19

............................................. 456

G
[G-Z] ............................................ 329
Gear ii, 2728, 98, 104, 111112, 115,

118119, 122, 221222, 224,

231, 244, 284, 303304, 306
309, 311, 321322, 334, 336,
348, 411, 466
General 2, 255, 292, 358, 449450, 461
462
Generated TOCs and Indexes ........... 144
Generic ......................................... 456
German ......................................... 404
Get Info ................................. 124, 376
Get Support ............................ iii, 480
Glossary Entry Break ............... 407, 458

Glossary Files ................................ 408

Glow ..................................... 181, 478
Go ............................................... 32
Go to Comment Text ............... 335, 474
Go to Footer ........................... 139, 463
Go to Header .......................... 139, 463
Go to Marked Text .......................... 335
Go To Next Change ........................... 15
Go to Next Change .................. 351, 474
Go to Next Comment ....... 335, 343, 474
Go To Next Comment ........................ 15
Go to Note (Text/Reference) ............ 463
Go to Note Reference ...................... 192
Go to Note Text ...................... 192, 196
Go to Page .......................... 230, 462
Go to Previous Change ............ 351, 474
Go To Previous Change ..................... 15
Go To Previous Comment .................. 15
Go to Previous Comment . 335, 343, 474
Go to QuickFix Preferences ............. 34
Gray ....................... 471472, 478479
Greater Than or Equal To ................. 457
Greek .............................. 26, 386, 456
Greek (ISO 8859-7) ......................... 386
Green ..................... 471472, 478479
Group Name .................................... 69
Group Shapes ................. 177, 180, 477
Guess ............................................ 269
Guillemet (Left Pointing) ............... 457
Guillemet (Right Pointing) ............. 457
Guillemets ..................................... 404
Guillemets with Space ..................... 404
Gutter ................................... 129, 131
Gutter Height ................................. 195
Gutter width .................................. 286

H
Hair Space ..................................... 457
Hairline ......................... 216, 294, 479
hairline ......................................... 393
Hang ............................................. 445
Happy Face
................................ 457
Hard ...................................... 181, 478
Header .................................. 103, 128
Header Margin ............................... 133
Header/Footer ............................... 138
Headers & Footers .......................... 480
Headers and Footers ................ 137138
Headers or footers .......................... 373
Heading ........................................ 108
Heading 1 ...................... 101, 103, 465
Heading 2 .............................. 103, 465
Heading 3 .............................. 103, 465
Heading 4 .............................. 103, 465
Heading 5 .............................. 103, 465
Heading 6 .............................. 103, 465
Heading B ...................................... 116
Heading C ...................................... 116
Heading D ..................................... 116
Heading format .............................. 250
Heading paragraph style ................. 250
Headings ................................. 51, 471
Heart Suit .................................... 457
Hebrew ........ 26, 35, 41, 386, 456, 490
Hebrew QWERTY .......................... 490
Hebrew (,,, )................................ 52
Height ................................... 183, 187
Help .......................... 3, iii, viii, 8, 445
Here to End .................................... 301
Here to Start .................................. 301
Hexagon ........................................ 476

512

Commands & Screen Messages

Hidden Footers ....................... 138, 140

Hidden Headers ...................... 138, 140
Hide ......................................... 7, 449
Hide Navigator ............... 221, 224, 231
Hide Others ....................................... 7
Hide this highlighting ..................... 398
Hide/Show Palettes ......................... 480
Hides file extensions ......................... 64
Highlight ....................... 291, 397, 471
Highlight changes .......................... 354
Highlight Changes in Text347348, 350,

474
Highlight changes in the document text

............................................. 350
Highlight Color #1 .......................... 397
Highlight Color #6 .......................... 397
Highlight Comments in Text .. 336, 338,

473
Highlight comments in the document text

............................................. 338
Highlight stale content on screen using
color: ..................................... 144
Highlighters ................................... 397
Home Address ............................... 360
Home Address (city) ....................... 360
Home Address (country) .................. 360
Home Address (state) ...................... 360
Home Address (zip) ........................ 360
Home Email ................................... 360
Home FAX ...................................... 360
Home Phone .................................. 360
Horizontal ............................. 162, 295
Horizontal Offset ............................ 370
Horizontal Ruler ....................... 13, 462
HTML .............................. 60, 441, 451
huge size ...................................... 394
Hungarian ..................................... 404
Hyperlink ........... 2, 229, 397, 440, 461
Hyperlink to target when saved as PDF.

...................................... 228229
Hyperlink .................................... 440
Hyphen ......................................... 456
Hyphenation .................... 34, 274, 463

I
Icelandic ........................................ 386
Icon & Text .................................... 410
Icon Only ....................................... 410
if
............................................. 422
If not blank, then append: ................ 360
If not blank, then prepend: ............... 360
Ignore ........................................... 269
Ignore Case .................... 300301, 312
Ignore Rich Text Commands ............ 441
Ignore Spelling ............................... 266
Ignore Word ................................... 456
Image ........................................... 480
Image .......................... 148150, 461
Images .......................................... 373
Immediately ................................... 144
Import ........................................... 122
Import From Style Library ............. 122
Import from Style Library ...... 104, 458
Import Glossary ............................. 408
Import Image ................................. 439
In Group .......................................... 71
In Selection ............................ 219, 301
Inactive selection ............................ 398
InAlphabeticPresentationForms ........ 315
InArabic ........................................ 315
InArabicPresentationFormsA ............ 315

InArabicPresentationFormsB ............ 315

InArmenian .................................... 315
InArrows ....................................... 315
InBasicLatin ................................... 315
InBengali ....................................... 315
InBlockElements ............................. 315
InBopomofo ................................... 315
InBopomofoExtended ...................... 315
InBoxDrawing ................................ 315
InBraillePatterns ............................. 315
InBuhid ......................................... 315
InCherokee .................................... 315
Inches (in) .. 85, 94, 182, 187, 374, 462
InCJKCompatibility ......................... 315
InCJKCompatibilityForms ................. 315
InCJKCompatibilityIdeographs ......... 315
InCJKRadicalsSupplement ................ 315
InCJKSymbolsAndPunctuation .......... 315
InCJKUnifiedIdeographs .................. 315
InCJKUnifiedIdeographsExtensionA ... 315
Include comments in PDF as annotations

............................................. 344
Include copy of Image in document ... 150
Include copy of image in document ... 150
Include in index .............................. 397
Include in index (auto) .................... 398
Include in TOC . 231232, 398, 474475
Include page numbers ..................... 235
Include Text at ............................... 237
Include your email address .............. 445
InCombiningDiacriticalMarks ........... 315
InCombiningDiacriticalMarksForSymbols

............................................. 315
InCombiningHalfMarks .................... 315
InControlPictures ............................ 315
Increase ........................................ 467
Increase Both Left Indents ................. 82
Increase Both Left/Right Indents ...... 470
Increase By .......................... 100, 467
Increase First Line Indent ................ 470
Increase Hanging Indent .................. 470
Increase Height ...................... 183, 478
Increase Indent .............................. 471
Increase List Level .................... 52, 241
Increase Right/left Indent ................ 471
Increase Size .......................... 183, 478
Increase Space After Paragraph ........ 470
Increase Space Before Paragraph ...... 470
Increase Width ....................... 183, 478
Increment ............................... 141143
InCurrencySymbols ......................... 315
InCyrillic ........................................ 315
InCyrillicSupplementary .................. 315
Indent ............................................. 82
Indents ...................................... 21, 85
InDevanagari ................................. 315
Index ............. 242252, 395, 397, 475
Index 1 .......................................... 251
Index 9 .......................................... 251
Index as topic ................. 242, 245247
Index As ...... 242247, 249, 397, 475
Index Heading ................................ 250
Index Using Word List ........... 248, 475
Indexes ......................................... 395
Indexing ................................ 253, 480
InDingbats ..................................... 315
InEnclosedAlphanumerics ................ 315
InEnclosedCJKLettersAndMonths ...... 315
InEthiopic ...................................... 315
Infinity .......................................... 457
Information Stamps ........................ 144

InGeneralPunctuation ...................... 315

InGeometricShapes ......................... 315
InGeorgian ..................................... 315
InGreekAndCoptic ........................... 315
InGreekExtended ............................ 315
InGujarati ...................................... 315
InGurmukhi ................................... 315
InHalfwidthAndFullwidthForms ........ 315
InHangulCompatibilityJamo ............. 315
InHangulJamo ................................ 315
InHangulSyllables ........................... 315
InHanunoo ..................................... 315
InHebrew ....................................... 315
InHighPrivateUseSurrogates ............. 315
InHighSurrogates ........................... 315
InHiragana ..................................... 315
InIdeographicDescriptionCharacters . 315
InIPAExtensions ............................. 315
InKanbun ....................................... 315
InKangxiRadicals ............................ 315
InKannada ..................................... 315
InKatakana .................................... 315
InKatakanaPhoneticExtensions ......... 315
InKhmer ........................................ 315
InKhmerSymbols ............................ 315
InLao ............................................ 315
InLatin1Supplement ........................ 315
InLatinExtendedA ........................... 315
InLatinExtendedAdditional ............... 315
InLatinExtendedB ............................ 315
InLetterlikeSymbols ........................ 315
InLimbu ......................................... 315
Inline with text ....................... 148, 165
InLowSurrogates ............................ 315
InMalayalam .................................. 315
InMathematicalOperators ................ 315
InMiscellaneousMathematicalSymbolsA

............................................. 315
InMiscellaneousMathematicalSymbolsB

............................................. 315
InMiscellaneousSymbols .................. 315
InMiscellaneousSymbolsAndArrows .. 315
InMiscellaneousTechnical ................ 315
InMongolian ................................... 315
InMyanmar .................................... 315
Inner ............................................. 128
InNumberForms ............................. 315
InOgham ....................................... 315
InOpticalCharacterRecognition ......... 315
InOriya .......................................... 315
InPhoneticExtensions ...................... 315
InPrivateUseArea ............................ 315
Input Sources ................................. 486
InRunic .......................................... 315
Insert .... 7, 2628, 4041, 43, 55, 104,

110, 119, 122, 126, 136138, 141

143, 148150, 191192, 198,
204, 212213, 221, 224226, 228
229, 238, 249, 274, 276, 281,
285, 311, 319320, 328, 359
362, 372, 389, 395, 397, 407,
440, 458460, 464465, 472, 489
Insert Bibliography Placeholder 257, 475
Insert Citation ........................ 256, 475
Insert Hyperlink ......................... 2, 229
Insert Index ......... 249, 251, 395, 475
Insert Reference to .......... 226227, 238
Insert Shape . 149, 167, 169, 173, 175,
184, 186, 476
Insert TOC ...... 233, 235, 395, 474475
Insertion point (caret) width ............ 393

Indexes

513

Inset from Margin ....................... 85, 94

Inset From Page ............................. 182
Inset from Paragraph ...................... 182
InSinhala ....................................... 315
InSmallFormVariants ....................... 315
InSpacingModifierLetters ................. 315
InSpecials ...................................... 315
Install Update ................................ 450
InSuperscriptsAndSubscripts ........... 315
InSupplementalArrowsA .................. 315
InSupplementalArrowsB .................. 315
InSupplementalMathematicalOperators

............................................. 315
InSyriac ......................................... 315
InTagalog ...................................... 315
InTagbanwa ................................... 315
InTaiLe .......................................... 315
InTamil ......................................... 315
InTelugu ........................................ 315
Interface Language (menus, dialogs, etc.)

............................................... 32
International Curly Quotes ............ 404
Interrobang ................................. 457
InThaana ....................................... 315
InThai ........................................... 315
InTibetan ....................................... 315
InUnifiedCanadianAboriginalSyllabics 315
InVariationSelectors ........................ 315
Invert Selection ........................ 43, 454
Inverted Exclamation ..................... 457
Inverted Question Mark ................ 457
Invisibles ............................... 390, 397
Invisibles & Guides .......... 390391, 397
Invisibles color ............................... 390
InYijingHexagramSymbols ............... 315
InYiRadicals ................................... 315
InYiSyllables .................................. 315
Is Exactly ......................................... 72
Italic ........ 20, 106, 289, 370, 375, 467
italic ...................................... 243244

J
Japanese ................................ 386, 493
Japanese (EUC) ............................... 386
Japanese (ISO 2022-JP) ................... 386
Japanese (Shift-JIS) ......................... 386
Japanese (Windows, DOS) ................ 386
Job Title ........................................ 360
Join Files ....................................... 432
Justified ......................... 202203, 473
Justify Fully Arabic ......................... 433
Justify Fully Arabic (remove kashidas) 433
Justify Fully English ........................ 433
Justify Fully English (remove spaces) 433

K
Kanji - decimal ( , , , ) ................ 52
Kanji - formal ( , , , ) .................. 52
Kanji ( , , , ) ............................... 52
Katakana - iroha ( , , , ) .............. 52
Katakana ( , , , ) ......................... 52
Keep ............................................. 373
Keep together .......................... 21, 90
Keep all new documents without asking
me ........................ 5960, 65, 386
Keep in Dock ..................................... 7
Keep Paragraph Together .......... 90, 469
Keep with next ........................ 21, 90
Keep With Next Paragraph ......... 90, 469
Keep x documents in Open Recent menu

........................................ 68, 451

Kern ...................................... 290, 469

Keyboard ....................................... 486
Keyboard Layout .............................. 37
Keywords ................................ 71, 460
Kind ......................................... 55, 63
Korean .......................................... 386
Korean (Windows, DOS) ................... 386

L
Language .... 15, 3740, 375, 465466,

480
Language Sensitive QuickFix For: ...... 402
Languages ............................... 29, 450
large size ...................................... 394
Last Accessed .................................. 63
Last Name .............................. 360, 460
Last Opened (time) ......................... 450
Last Window .................................. 480
Latin-US (DOS) ............................... 386
Leader ............................... 91, 93, 251
Learn ..................................... 269270
Learn Spelling ................ 266, 269, 456
Left ........................ 91, 182, 350, 372
Left Edge ....................................... 294
Left Half Ring ............................... 457
Left Indent marker ............................ 83
Left to Right Direction ..................... 469
Left to Right Marker .................. 41, 458
Length .......................................... 195
Less Than or Equal To ..................... 457
Letter Alef Lamed Ligature ............ 456
Letter Lamed Holam Ligature ......... 456
Letter Shin with Shin Dot Ligature . 456
Letter Sin with Sin Dot Ligature ..... 456
Letter Vav Holam Ligature ............. 456
Letter Vav Shuruk Ligature ............ 456
Lettered List ............................ 51, 471
Level 1 ................................... 231232
Level 9 ................................... 231232
Level Format .................................... 53
Library ............................................ 32
LibreOffice (more complete) ............. 408
License Agreement ............... 3, viii, 480
License Number ................................. ix
Licenses ............................... viii, 450
Ligature ................................. 290, 468
Light Gray ...................... 472, 478479
Lightning .................................. 457
Limit to x documents ........................ 72
Line ........................................ 88, 476
Line Between Columns .................... 131
Line Number ........................... 227228
Line Numbering .............................. 285
Line Numbers ................. 285, 463, 480
Line Numbers Palette ...................... 285
Line Style ....................................... 479
Link ............................................. 168
Link destination ............................. 461
Link To .......................................... 255
Link to File ............. 150151, 154, 439
List ................................ 48, 111112
List cross-reference ................ 244245
List Item ................................ 226227
List Item Number .................... 227228
List items ...................................... 395
List Items / Bullets ......................... 144
List page number .................... 243244
List Style .......................... 55, 110, 458
Listing formatting ................... 243245
Lists 48, 5052, 111112, 395, 471,

480

Load file importers in the background

after Nisus Writer starts. .......... 408
Load Macro ................................. 415
Location ........................................ 227
Lock Page Guides ............ 128, 391, 463
Locked .............................................. 9
Logical Page Number ...................... 230
Logical Page Numbers ..................... 230
Look Up in Dictionary ..................... 439
Loosen .................................. 290, 469
Loosen By ........................... 290, 469
Lower ............................................ 289
Lower Baseline ............................... 468
Lower Baseline By ................ 289, 468
[[:lower:]] ....................................... 327
Lowercase Alphabetical (a,b,c,d) ......... 52
Lowercase Roman (i,ii,iii,iv) ................ 52
Lowercase{} ................................... 319
LowercaseLetter ..................... 311, 327
Lozenge ...................................... 457
Lucida Grande ................... 34, 418419

M
\m ...................................... 330331
\m(\w+)\s\1\M ............................. 329
\m(a)([^\s]*)(d)\M ................... 330331
(\m\w+\M) .................................... 330
(\m\w+\M)(\s+)(\m\w+\M) ............ 330
Mac OS X (faster) ............................ 408
Macro . 8, 248249, 410, 415417, 479
Macro Language Reference .............. 480
Macro Template ............................. 378
Macroize ............................. 307, 322
Mail .............................. 441442, 451
Main document body ....................... 373
Make Active ................................... 400
Make New Sticky Note ..................... 439
Male Sign .................................... 457
Manage Custom Sizes ..................... 127
Manage Macro File Access ............... 430
Manual .......................................... 463
Margins ......................... 128129, 480
Mark ...................................... 243247
Mark All ........................................ 245
Mark Masora Circle ......................... 457
Mark Upper Dot. ............................ 457
Marked text ............................... 2, 440
Marked Text ................... 228, 397398
Markup additions and deletions ....... 354
Match ... 244, 310, 313, 320322, 324,

326, 329
Match All/Any of the following criteria 71
Match Case ............................. 301302
Math........................................ 26, 457
medium size .................................. 394
Menu Key ...................................... 449
Menu Keys ................ 44, 400401, 450
Merge Cells ............. 206, 212213, 473
Merge Document .......... 362, 452, 461
Merge Placeholder . 359360, 362, 395,

460
Merge Placeholders ......................... 395
Merge Record Number ..................... 460
Microsoft Office 2007 XML (Office Open
XML) ................................ 60, 451
Microsoft Word Format ...... 59, 386, 451
Microsoft Word Format (binary) .. 60, 451
Middle ................................... 202, 473
Middle Name .................................. 360
Mill ............................................. 456

514

Commands & Screen Messages

Millimeters (mm) 85, 94, 182, 187, 374,

462
Minimize ............................... 358, 480
Minimum after hyphen ...................... 34
Minimum before hyphen ................... 34
Minus .. ii, 28, 72, 113, 131, 253, 277,

334, 405
Minus/Plus .................................... 457
Misc ........................................ 26, 457
Misspelled ..................................... 398
Mobile Phone ......................... 360, 460
Moon
......................................... 457
More Palette Groups ....................... 413
Mortgage Calculator ....................... 430
Most Recent ................................... 374
Move Files ....................................... 66
Move Files to Group ................. 66, 78
Move to Document Manager 65, 116, 452
Move To ..................................... 451
Moves with Paragraph ..................... 149
Moves with paragraph ............. 157, 165
Multi-page Length .......................... 195
Multi-page Threshold ..................... 194
Multiple ............................. 8889, 148
Multiply ......................................... 457
Musical Clef (G) ............................ 457
Musical Note (Eighth) ................... 457
My Comments ................................ 396

N
\n ...................................... 326, 328
N - M Times ........................... 310, 315
N Times ................................. 310, 315
Name ...................................... 4, 9, 27
Name (A-Z) .................................... 432
Name (Z-A) .................................... 432
Name Ascending (A-Z) ...................... 72
Name Descending (Z-A) .................... 72
Name Suffix ................................... 360
Name Title ..................................... 360
Natural Writing Direction ................. 469
Navigator ............... 221, 224, 232, 462
Navigator background ..................... 396
Navigator pane font ........................ 395
Navigator text ................................ 396
New vi, 1, 77, 79, 124, 143, 236, 252,

376, 379380, 387, 400, 450

New Character Style ..................... 464
New Clipboard ............................. 456
New Document ............................... 266
New Document With Selection .......... 439
New Email With Selection ................. 439
New File 109, 289, 377, 379, 381, 387,
399399, 449
New Glossary ................................. 406
New List Style .............................. 471
New Macro ............................. 417, 479
New Nisus Document With Selection . 450
New Nisus Document with Selection
(Nisus Writer Pro) .................... 439
New Palette Group ....................... 413
New Paragraph Style .................... 465
New Peninim MT .............................. 35
New Plain Text File ..................... vi, 450
New Style . 43, 55, 104, 110, 119, 122,

458, 464465
New Table ........................... 198, 472
Next ............... 284, 300301, 312, 354
Next Page ....... 126, 138, 142, 191, 459
Next Selection ......... 262, 398, 410, 454
Next Style ...................................... 108

Next Window .................................. 480

Nisus Compressed Rich Text .... 60, 386,

451
Nisus
Nisus
Nisus
Nisus
Nisus

Macro ..................... 60, 417, 451

New File ............................... 377
New File.dot .......................... 447
Perl Macro ............... 60, 417, 451
Writer Pro ... viii, 4, 7, 29, 44, 60,

64, 255, 265266, 344, 367, 371,

377, 383384, 386, 398401, 404
408, 439, 449450
Nisus Writer Pro Help ................. iii, 480
No Super/Sub ................................. 468
No Text on Either Side ............. 162, 477
No Text on Left Side ................ 162, 476
No Text on Right Side ..................... 476
no titlebar ..................................... 374
Non-Breaking Hyphen ............. 274, 456
Non-Breaking Space ....................... 457
Non-breaking Zero Width Space ....... 457
None 50, 93, 181, 216, 236, 251, 294,
383384, 467468, 471, 478479
Normal . 101, 103, 108, 169, 181, 198,
368, 465, 478
Normal Find ........................... 300, 311
Northeast European ........................ 404
Not Equals ..................................... 457
Not Shown This Section ........... 285, 463
Note Number ................................. 228
Note Reference Style ....................... 195
Note references .............................. 395
Note Style 112, 114, 193194, 196, 465
Notes ....................... 14, 192, 195196
Notes Style .................................... 112
NotFollowedBy() ............................. 314
NotPrecededBy() ............................. 314
NotPrecededBy() ............................ 314
Number ........................................... 53
Number Format .............................. 195
Number List ................................... 471
Number Restart ...................... 195196
Numbered ....................................... 55
Numbered List ................................. 51
Numbering ............................. 138, 143

O
Octagon ........................................ 476
Odd & Even Pages ................... 137138
Odd only ....................................... 368
Odd Page ............... 138, 142, 191, 459
Offset ........................................... 181
OK 28, 72, 85, 92, 94, 100, 126127,

183, 193194, 230, 250252,

277, 289290, 305, 413, 416, 441
442
On application activation: ................ 372
On application launch restore previously
open documents. .................... 372
On Style conflicts ............................ 373
One Note Per Line ........................... 194
Only update the page numbers ........ 234
Opacity ... 155, 173, 180181, 478479
Open 2, 61, 7677, 150, 255, 363364,

369, 379, 383384, 387, 408, 441

as New File ............................ 387
at Login .................................... 7
Console App .......................... 446

Open
Open
Open
Open

Document Format (ODF/.odt XML)

............................................. 451
Open For Editing .................. 377378

Open from Document Manager 122, 412,

451
Open in Default Application ......... 76, 78
Open Link .................................. 2, 440
Open Recent ......... 2, 61, 410, 450451
Open With ..................................... 150
Open ................ 1, 61, 387, 441, 450
OpenOffice.org XML (OASIS Open
Document) ................................ 60
Options ................................. 7, 1920
OR ............................................... 72
Or ...................................... 244, 313
Orange ........................... 472, 478479
Organization .................................. 360
Orientation .................................... 442
Ornate Left Parenthesis ................... 456
Ornate Right Parenthesis ................. 456
Other .................................... 373, 445
Other .. 100, 360, 451, 460, 462, 467
OtherCaptured ....................... 313, 329
OtherFound ................................... 310
Outdent ........................................... 82
Outer ............................................ 128
Outline .................... 51, 106, 467, 471
Owner .............................................. ix

P
Padding ......................... 162, 214, 295
Page ....... 108, 138, 142143, 230, 283
Page backdrop ............................... 397
Page Borders .................................. 480
Page Break .... 138, 281, 319320, 328,

389, 458, 489

Breaks ................................... 365
color ..................................... 397
Edge ...................................... 133
frame .................................... 397
Guides ................... 128, 391, 463
guides ........................... 391, 397
Number . 141142, 227228, 238,
459
Page number range mark ................ 251
Page number separator ................... 251
Page Order .................................... 368
Page Setup ..................................... 126
Page Setup ........... 126127, 442, 452
Page View 128, 138, 283, 344, 374, 461
Page Zoom ............................... 22, 480
Pages ............................................ 367
Pages in Document ......................... 459
Pages in Section .............. 141, 143, 459
Pages to Print ................................ 368
Palette Library ................................ 413
Palettes 18, 22, 26, 128130, 137138,
237, 253, 275, 285, 480
Pane Background ............................ 396
Paper Handling .............................. 368
Paper Size .............................. 127, 442
Paragraph 88, 90, 274, 344, 353, 469,
480
Paragraph Alignment ........................ 86
Paragraph Borders .......................... 480
Paragraph Count ..................... 276, 459
Paragraph Indents ... 82, 86, 92, 95, 470
Paragraph Level ...................... 111112
Paragraph Mark ........................... 457
Paragraph Number .................. 227228
Paragraph Shading ......................... 480
Paragraph Spacing .............. 8889, 470
Paragraph Style ..... 102, 104, 106, 110
112, 114, 458, 464465
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page

Indexes
Paragraph Style Based on Selection . 110,

458
Paragraph Text ............................... 227
Parenthesize Selection .................... 433
Paste2, 43, 4648, 145, 151, 199, 203,

219, 320, 435, 453

Paste
Paste
Paste
Paste

Character Attributes ............... 453

From Clipboard ...................... 411
Ruler .............................. 48, 453
Shape Appearance 158, 186, 453,

477
Paste Text Only ................... 4748, 453
Path ............................................... 63
Pattern ........................... 217218, 295
PDF ............................................. 370
Pentagon ....................................... 476
Per Mille .................................... 457
Perl Macro Header .......................... 434
Pervious Selection .......................... 398
Phone .................................... 360, 460
Physical Page Number ..................... 230
Picas (pc) ... 85, 94, 182, 187, 374, 462
Pink ............................................. 471
Place ............................................. 194
Place of Sajdah ............................... 456
Placeholder for Address Book contact
property: ................................ 360
Placeholder for the property with the
name: ..................................... 360
Placeholder that uses the output from the
following Perl code: ................. 360
Placement ....... 148149, 157, 165, 176
Plain Quotes to Smart Quotes . 298, 404,

515
Prevent Widows & Orphans ........ 90, 469
Preview ......................................... 365
Previous ........................................ 354
Previous Selection ........... 261, 410, 454
Print .............................. 283, 368, 437
Print & Fax ..................................... 124
Print As Is ...................................... 366
Print invisible characters ................. 367
Print page guides ........................... 367
Print pages in reverse order ............. 367
Print4, 143, 285, 366, 368, 370, 443,

452
Printed .......................................... 365
Printers & Scanners ........................ 124
Printing ......................................... 124
Properties 7172, 277, 372, 452, 460
[[:punct:]] ....................................... 328
()[[:punct:]] ................................... 331
Punctuation Geresh ....................... 457
Punctuation Gershayim ................. 457
Punctuation Maqaf ........................ 457
Punctuation Paseq ........................ 457
Punctuation Sof Pasuq . .................. 457
Purple ............................ 472, 478479

Q
QuickFix ................. 265, 404408, 450
Quit ............................................. xi, 7
Quit Nisus Writer Pro ........... 4, 449450
Quotation Dash .............................. 456
Quote Selection .............................. 433
Quotes .................................... 26, 457

454
Plain Text ........................ 60, 386, 451
Plain text encoding ......................... 386
plain text only ................................ 394
Plain Text Template ........................ 378
Play a sound whenever a file is autosaved

............................................. 384
Play a sound whenever a file is saved 383
Plus ii, 2728, 31, 69, 7172, 98, 104,

110, 131, 231, 253, 277, 343,

405
Plus/Minus .................................... 457
Point Dagesh Or Mapiq ................... 457
Point Meteg ................................... 457
Point Rafe ...................................... 457
Point Shin Dot ................................ 457
Point Sin Dot .................................. 457
Points (pt) .. 85, 94, 182, 187, 374, 462
Position on Page of ...................... 176
Position on page of .............. 149, 157
Position on Ruler ........................ 85, 94
Pound ........................................... 456
PowerFind ..... 305306, 311, 319, 321,
324, 433
PowerFind Bubbles ......................... 395
PowerFind Commands ............. 310311
PowerFind Pro (regex) ............. 312, 324
PrecededBy() ........................... 313314
Preferences .... 255, 344, 377, 447, 449
Preferences 29, 44, 60, 64, 265266,
371, 383384, 386, 398401, 404
408, 449
Press the escape key (ESC) to cancel . 170
Press the escape key (ESC) to cancel. 150,
168, 175, 177, 184
Prevent Check Spelling in Selection ... 456
Prevent Hyphenation ............... 274, 469
Prevent widow/orphan ................ 21, 90

R
\r
............................................. 328
Raise ............................................. 289
Raise Baseline ................................ 468
Raise Baseline By ................. 289, 468
Randomize (shuffle) ................ 455, 473
Randomly (shuffle) .......................... 289
Rebuild Index ......................... 249, 475
Rebuild TOC .................................. 234
Rebuild TOC ........................ 233, 474
Recent Find ............................ 303304
Recent Find Expressions ... 305306, 310
Recent Fonts ............................ 99, 467
Recent Replace ....................... 303304
Recent Replace Expressions .... 305306,

310
Recently Opened ............... 68, 412, 451
Recently Saved ................. 68, 412, 451
Rectangle ...................................... 476
Rectangular selection ...................... 398
Red .............................. 472, 478479
Redefine Style From Selection . 104, 464

465
Redo ....................................... 57, 453
reference manager .................. 255258
Registered Trademark ................. 457
Reject ........................................... 352
Reject All Changes ............... 353, 474
Reject Changes .............................. 355
Reject Changes in Selection ... 353, 474
Reject Tracked Changes in Selection ... 15
Release Notes ................................ 480
Remember ..................................... 373
Remind Me Later ............................ 450
Remove ........................... 74, 225, 461
Remove Attributes and Styles ... 289, 464
Remove Attributes Except Styles 104, 464
Remove Background Color ............... 472

Remove Background Color Attribute . 292

Remove Baseline Attribute ............... 468
Remove Bookmark .......................... 225
Remove Case Change Attribute ........ 467
Remove Character Style ........... 104, 112
Remove Color ......................... 291292
Remove Comment ............................ 15
Remove Comments in Selection 334, 473
Remove Cropping ........................... 153
Remove Custom Note Reference ....... 465
Remove File .................................. 78
Remove Font .................................. 112
Remove Font Attribute .................... 466
Remove Font Size Attribute .............. 467
Remove from Dock ............................. 7
Remove from TOC .................. 232, 474
Remove From Toolbar ..................... 412
Remove Group ......................... 73, 78
Remove Highlight ........................... 291
Remove Highlight Attribute ...... 291, 471
Remove Indexing .................... 249, 475
Remove Item .................................. 412
Remove Kern Attribute .................... 469
Remove Language Attribute ............. 466
Remove Ligature Attribute ............... 468
Remove Link ...................... 2, 441, 461
Remove Paragraph Attributes .......... 469
Remove Paragraph Style .......... 104, 112
Remove Strikethrough Attribute ....... 468
Remove Style .................. 112, 464465
Remove Super/Sub Attribute ............ 468
Remove Tab Stops .................... 95, 471
Remove Text Color ......................... 472
Remove Underline Attribute ............. 467
Rename ............................. 74, 78, 461
Rename Bookmark .......................... 223
Rename Bookmark ....................... 222
Rename ...................................... 451
Repeat .. 310312, 314315, 319, 321,

324325, 329
Repeat Command ........................... 453
Replace .......................... 300, 322, 455
Replace & Find ........................ 300301
Replace All .... 300301, 303, 307, 320

322, 433, 455

and Find ............................ 455
Attributes .................. 148, 302
in All Open Documents ........ 433

Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace

line breaks in marked text with

............................................. 235
Replace Next .................................. 307
Replace Previous ............................ 307
Replace tab characters in marked text
with ....................................... 236
Replace With .................................. 270
Replace with .. 269, 301, 305306, 309

310, 312313, 321322, 327, 330

332
Reposition changes in the pane while
working ................................. 350
Reposition comments in the pane while
working ................................. 338
Reset Folders ................................. 445
Restart At ............... 142143, 191, 196
Restart At: ..................................... 138
Restart Every Page .................. 285, 463
Restart Numbering ................... 52, 471
Restart Paragraph Numbers This Section

...................................... 285, 463

Restart This Section ................ 285, 463
Restore All Clipboards ............. 431432

516

Commands & Screen Messages

Restore Factory Settings .................. 381

Restore Original Proportions .. 152, 159,

176
Restore Original Size ....... 152153, 159
Return ...................... 19, 316, 319321
Reveal In Finder ........................... 379
Reverse ................................. 455, 473
Reverse Direction Marker ..... 4041, 458
Reverse Text .................................. 433
Reversed ....................................... 404
Revert To ...................................... 450
Review Changes ................... 353, 474
Rial ............................................. 456
Rials ............................................. 456
Rich Text Format (for older applications)

........................................ 60, 451

Rich Text Format (RTF) ...... 59, 386, 451
Rich Text Format Directory (RTFD) .... 59,

386, 451
Right ....................... 91, 182, 350, 372
Right edge ..................................... 294
Right Half Ring ............................. 457
Right to Left Direction ..................... 469
Right to Left Marker ........................ 458
Right Triangle ................................ 476
Rotate ................................... 174, 183
Rotate Clipboards ................... 431432
Rotate Clipboards in Reverse ........... 431
Rotate Clockwise ............ 174, 183, 478
Rotate Counterclockwise .. 174, 183, 478
Rotation ........................................ 370
Rounded Rectangle ......................... 476
Row Above ..................... 204, 212, 472
Row Below ............................. 204, 472
Rows ..................... 198, 200, 204, 472
Ruler Units ................. 85, 94, 182, 187
Rulers ........................ 1213, 399, 462
Run Macro From File .................... 479
Run Selection As Macro ................... 479
Run together all topic sub-entries on the
same line. ............................... 251
Run together sub-entry separator .... 251
Run together topic suffix ................. 251
Rupees .......................................... 456

S
\s
............................................. 328
(\s)() .......................................... 331
(\s)([[:punct:]]) ................................ 331
[\s\t] ............................................ 327
(\s+) ............................................. 330
Sad Face ..................................... 457
Sallallahou Alayhe Wasallam ............ 456
Same Page ..................... 142, 191, 459
Save 34, 27, 59, 61, 116, 119120,

305, 322, 362, 365, 370, 377,

381, 417, 441, 451
Save All Clipboards ................. 431432
Save All Documents ........................ 432
Save As ............................................. 3
Save As in Document Manager 65, 116,
452
Save as Macro ...................... 307, 322
Save As Macro ..................... 417, 479
Save as PDF ................................... 451
Save as PDF ................................. 370
Save As 3, 59, 61, 77, 361, 377, 380,
386387, 417, 443, 451
Save Copy As .............................. 451
Save document as ............................. 61

Save duplicate copy of each file to

another location ................ 69, 385
Save Expression ............................. 304
Save in Document Manager 59, 65, 116,

452
Save
Save
Save
Save

PDF as PostScript .................... 370

Report ................................. 448
Search As Group ..................... 72
to Style Library ... 104, 115, 118

119, 458
Saved Expressions .................. 306, 310
Saved individually to ....................... 364
Saved to one file ............................. 364
Saving ...................... 60, 383386, 449
Scale ............................................. 126
Scan & Bib ..................................... 258
Scan Document ....................... 258, 475
Scandinavian .................................. 404
Scroll to Selection ........................... 455
Seal ............................................. 476
Search ........................................... 480
Search Type ................................... 324
Search with Google ......................... 439
Secondary font ................................. 36
Section .......................... 130, 191, 480
Section [2] ..................................... 138
Section Break 126, 138, 142, 191, 319,

328, 389, 459

Section
Section
Section
Section

Breaks (Next Page) ............... 365

Breaks (Same Page) .............. 365
Mark ............................... 457
Number ..... 141, 143, 191, 227

228, 459
Sections ......................... 135, 138, 191
See: ............................................. 245
Select 4344, 200, 261, 275, 335, 398,

453, 455, 472

Select All 43, 101, 112, 195196, 216,

293294, 335, 418419, 453

All Document .......... 43, 275, 453
All Style ........ 112, 464465, 471
All With Style ................ 104, 112
All .................................... 433
By Attributes ........................ 433
By Font ................................ 434
By Language ......................... 434
By Style ................................ 434
Next in Same Style 112, 196, 464
465
Select Next in TOC .......................... 232
Select Next Shape ............ 177179, 476
Select Paragraph ............................. 454
Select Paragraph Invert Selection ........ 44
Select Previous in TOC .................... 232
Select Previous Shape ...... 177179, 476
Select Range ........................... 111112
Select Range With Style ............ 104, 111
Select Sentence ......................... 44, 453
Select Style Range .... 111, 464465, 471
Select Word .............................. 44, 453
Selected Section(s), All Pages ........... 369
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select

Selected Section(s), All Pages Except First

............................................. 369
Selected Section(s), Even Pages ........ 369
Selected Section(s), First Page .......... 369
Selected Section(s), Odd Pages ......... 369
Selected Sections ............................ 126
Selection ................................ 393, 398
Selection caret ........................ 393, 398
Selection caret color ....................... 393
Send an image ................................ 448

Send an open document .................. 447

Send Application Support file ........... 447
Send basic system information and recent
crash/issue logs ...................... 447
Send console log ..................... 445446
Send console log. ............................ 446
Send crash logs .............................. 445
Send crash logs. ............................. 446
Send Feedback ............................... 448
Send Feedback ............. 445, 448, 480
Send hang logs .............................. 445
Send hang logs. .............................. 446
Send other file ................................ 448
Send to Back ........... 158, 177, 179, 477
Sentence ........................................ 353
Services ......................... 439, 449450
Services Preferences .................... 439
Set ............................................. 401
Set Adjustment Amounts 183, 477478
Set Custom Note Reference ...... 193, 465
Shadow ............ 20, 106, 181, 467, 478
Shape ............................................ 167
Shape anchor ................................. 397
Shape Behind Text ........... 162163, 476
Shape bounding box ............... 160, 397
Shape Fill ....................... 180181, 478
Shape Metrics 174, 182183, 477478,

480
Shape paste spot ............................ 397
Shape Shadow ................................ 480
Shape Stroke ................... 174, 479480
Shape Text ..................................... 169
Shape Wrap, ................................... 480
Shapes .. 148149, 157, 162163, 165,

171172, 176180, 186187, 373,

476
Shapes, Special Characters ............... 480
Sheqel ........................................... 456
Shift Down ............................. 182, 477
Shift Left ............................... 182, 477
Shift Right ..................................... 477
Shift Right, Shift Up ........................ 182
Shift Up ......................................... 477
Shortcut ......................... 108109, 194
Show ............................................. 410
Show All Menu Key Shortcuts .......... 430
Show Apple File Browser ................. 372
Show Background Colors ................. 472
Show Bookmarks ............................ 224
Show Bookmarks in Navigator .. 224, 461
Show Changes .................. 15, 347, 474
Show Changes Pane ........ 348, 350, 474
Show Character Catalog .................... 27
Show Character Catalog 315, 457, 492
Show Comments 15, 334, 336, 342, 473
Show comments made by ................ 336
Show Comments Pane ..... 336, 338, 473
Show comments pane along side the
document or not ...................... 338
Show Document Manager ................ 451
Show Entire Page ...................... 22, 462
Show File Extensions ........................ 78
Show Find .... 63, 284, 299300, 310

311, 321, 455

Fonts ....................... 98, 466467
Gathered Data ....................... 448
Header Heights ...................... 129
Header Insets ........................ 129
Highlight Colors ..................... 471
in Finder ........................ xi, 7, 78
Input menu in menu bar .......... 486

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show

Indexes
Show Invisibles 41, 152, 158, 171, 203,

299, 388, 463, 489

Show invisibles (tabs, newlines, page
breaks, etc.) ............................ 388
Show Line Numbers Palette .............. 463
Show Linked File in Finder ................... 2
Show Logical Page Numbers ....... 14, 230
Show Macros Folder in Finder .......... 479
Show Missing & Trashed Files ............ 78
Show Navigator ...................... 224, 231
Show Nisus Document Manager ........ 372
Show Page Guides ... 128, 138, 391, 463
Show Page Width ...................... 22, 462
Show Palette Library ............... 462, 480
Show pane on Left .......................... 338
Show pane on Right ........................ 338
Show pane on: ................................ 350
Show Paragraph Borders Palette ....... 470
Show Paragraph Formatting Icons .... 13,

374, 463
Show Paragraph Numbers This Section

...................................... 285, 463

Show Paragraph Shading Palette ....... 470
Show Physical Page Numbers ..... 14, 230
Show PowerFind Browser 308, 310311
Show Rulers ....................... 1213, 462
Show Shape Fill Palette .................... 478
Show Shape Metrics Palette .............. 478
Show Shape Shadow Palette ............. 478
Show Shape Stroke Palette ............... 479
Show Shapes Palette ................ 476477
Show Special Characters Palette 26, 457
Show Strikethrough Colors .............. 468
Show Style Library .................. 122, 458
Show Style Library ....................... 104
Show Table of Contents ................... 231
Show Text Colors .................... 291, 472
Show Text Width ....................... 22, 462
Show TOC in Navigator ................... 474
Show Toolbar ................... 11, 342, 462
Show Tooldrawer ...... 17, 275, 413, 462
Show track changes pane along side the
document ............................... 350
Show Typography Panel .................. 466
Show Underline Colors .................... 468
Show/Hide Bookmarks .................... 462
Show/Hide Navigator ...................... 462
Shows files that are missing or located in
the Trash ................................. 64
Sign Alayhe Assallam ...................... 456
Sign Radi Allahou Anhu ................... 456
Sign Rahmatullah Alayhe ................. 456
Sign Sallallahou Alayhe Wassalam ..... 456
Sign Takhallus ............................... 456
Simplified Chinese .......................... 386
Simplified Chinese (Windows, DOS) ... 386
Single ...................... 20, 101, 468, 470
Single Guillemet (Left Pointing) ...... 457
Single Guillemet (Right Pointing) .... 457
Single Plain Quote ' ......................... 457
Single Smart Quote (Close) ............. 457
Single Smart Quote (High Reversed 9)

............................................. 457
Single Smart Quote (Low 9) ............ 457
Single Smart Quote (Open) ............. 457
Single Space Lines .......................... 470
Size .................. 63, 99101, 375, 467
Size Scaling ................................... 369
Skip This Version ........................... 450
Small Caps ....................................... 20
small size ...................................... 394

517
Smart fade out inactive changes while
working ................................. 351
Smart fade out inactive comments while
working ................................. 339
Smart Quotes to Plain Quotes . 298, 404,

454

Snowman ................................... 457

Soft Hyphen ................................... 274
Soft Hyphen ................................... 456
Soft Return .................................... 316
Sooner .......................................... 144
Sort By Selected Column Ascending (A-Z)

205, 473
Sort By Selected Column Descending (ZA) .................................. 205, 473
Sort Open Document Windows ......... 432
Sort Paragraphs ...................... 289, 455
Sort Rows ...................................... 473
Space ............................................ 316
Space or Tab .......................... 312, 316
Spaces ..................................... 26, 457
Spacing ...................... 21, 88, 148, 187
Spade Suit ................................... 457
Spanish ......................................... 404
Special Character ................ 2628, 458
Special Characters ..... 2628, 274, 284,

310, 315316, 319321, 456,

458, 492
Special Positions ..................... 310, 317
Speech .......................................... 456
Spellcheck ..................................... 398
Spelling ............ 32, 266267, 270, 455
Spelling Window ..................... 267, 455
Spelling ...................................... 269
Split Cells ........................... 207, 473
Square Root ................................... 457
Squared ......................................... 457
Stale automatic text ........................ 395
Standard ....................................... 404
Star ............................................. 476
Star (Filled)
................................ 457
Star
........................................... 457
Start from ...................................... 286
Start of Paragraph .......................... 317
Start of Sentence ............................ 317
Start of Word ................................. 317
Start Speaking ................................ 456
Starting Number ..................... 194, 196
Starting Page ................................. 143
Starts With ....................................... 72
Statistics ............................... 275, 480
StdDev Column ....................... 430431
StdDev Row ............................ 430431
StdDev Rows and Columns .............. 431
Stop Speaking ................................ 456
Stretch text to fit entire page ........... 370
Strikethrough ................... 20, 289, 468
Strong ................................... 103, 464
Style ...... 180, 198, 216, 294, 478, 483
style formatting ............................. 394
style formatting, limited height ........ 394
Style Library .. 6566, 68, 116, 122, 452
Style Name .............. 235236, 250251
Style Sheet55, 102, 104, 107108, 113,
115, 118, 232, 236, 247, 251,
344, 374, 461
Style ........................................... 404
Styles .................................... 394, 480
Styles in the Stylesheet view ............ 373
Styles palette shows previews using . 394
Subject .......................................... 460

Subscribe ......................................... xi
Subscript ......................... 20, 289, 468
Sum Clipboard ............................... 431
Sum Column .................................. 431
Sum Row ....................................... 431
Sum Rows and Columns .................. 431
Sum Selection ................................ 431
Sun ........................................... 457
Superscript ...................... 20, 289, 468
Superscript ordinals (1st, 2nd, etc.) ... 404
Swap Columns ............................... 249
Swap Paste .............................. 46, 453
Switch to chosen keyboard ................ 37
Switch to group with palette ......... 373
Switch to last palette group ............. 373
Switch to last used font ..................... 34
Switch to last used keyboard ............. 37
Switch to palette group ................ 373
Switch to palette groups ............... 373
Switch to secondary font ................... 34
Swung Dash ................................... 456
Synchronize existing entries ............ 234
System Preferences ...... 124, 392, 486

T
\t
............................................. 328
Tab .................... 19, 91, 93, 203, 316
Table .. 8, 79, 198, 200201, 203204,

206207, 209213, 219, 226,

228, 472, 480
Table Cell ...................... 103, 198, 464
Table Cell Borders .......................... 480
Table Cell Shading .......................... 480
Table Cells .................................... 480
Table cells ..................................... 373
Table guides .................................. 397
Table Header ................................. 198
Table of Contents .. 231233, 235237,
395, 398, 474475, 480
Tables of content ........................... 395
Tags ............................................. 4, 9
Take Screenshot ............................. 448
Take this action ............................. 373
Teal .............................. 472, 478479
Template File .......................... 377378
Templates .... 65, 67, 69, 434, 452, 479
Text ............................................. 361
Text Analysis ............... 276, 452, 482
Text Behind Shape ........... 162163, 476
Text Box ........................ 167, 169, 476
Text Color .............................. 291, 472
Text in TOC ........................... 226, 228
Text Margin ................................... 133
Text Only ...................................... 410
Text wrap .............................. 161, 165
Text Wrap Around Shape ................. 165
Text Wrapping ................ 162163, 476
The name of the new toolbar item .... 410
Thesaurus ....................................... 34
Thesaurus Window ....................... 270
Thickness .............. 173, 216, 294, 479
Thin Space ..................................... 457
Tiered List ............................... 51, 471
Tighten ................................. 290, 469
Tighten By .......................... 290, 469
Title ...................... 103, 108, 460, 465
Titlebars show ............................... 351
To
............................................. 367
To Capitalized ................ 298, 417, 454
To lowercase .......................... 298, 454
To SMALL CAPS .............................. 298

518

Commands & Screen Messages

To Small Caps ................................ 454

To Toggled Case ............. 298, 417, 454
To Unicode Code Points ................... 454
To UPPERCASE ........................ 298, 454
TOC ............................................. 236
TOC 1 ........................................... 235
TOC 9 ........................................... 235
Toolbar .................... 11, 342, 410, 462
Tooldrawer ......... 1617, 374, 410, 462
Tooldrawer Side ............................. 372
Tools . 8, 143145, 148149, 157, 162

163, 165, 167, 169, 171184, 186

187, 231233, 235237, 242
252, 255259, 276, 333336, 342
343, 345, 347348, 351353,
368, 396398, 461, 473, 476479
Top .............. 128, 182, 195, 202, 473
Top Edge ....................................... 294
Topic formatting ............................ 245
Track Changes . 15, 345, 347348, 351
353, 474
Track changes made to styles, eg: in the
Style Sheet .............................. 348
Track formatting changes ................ 348
Track text insertions and deletions ... 348
Tracked Changes .................... 348, 462
Tracked Changes show ................... 374
Tracking and Display Options 348, 474
Trademark ................................. 457
Traditional Chinese ........................ 386
Traditional Chinese (Windows, DOS) . 386
Triangle ........................................ 476
Triangle ...................................... 457
Triple Space Lines .......................... 470
Try Again ...................................... 385
Turkish ......................................... 386
Turkish (ISO Latin 5) ....................... 386
Tweet ........................................... 439
Typeface ................................. 98, 375

U
U.S. Extended ................................... 37
Underline . 20, 93, 101, 236, 251, 289,

467468
Undo ....................... 57, 145, 416, 453
Unexpected Behavior ...................... 445
Ungroup Shapes ............. 177, 180, 477
Unicode Blocks ............................... 492
Units ..................... 129, 182, 374, 399
Unlearn ......................................... 269
Unlearn Spelling .............. 269270, 456
Unscan Document ................... 259, 475
Update .......................................... 234
Update all content .......................... 234
Update All Stale Content .. 143, 276, 475
Update page numbers ..................... 234
Update Selected Stale Content 144, 276,
476
[[:upper:]] ...................................... 327
Uppercase Alphabetical (A,B,C,D) ........ 52
Uppercase Roman (I,II,III,IV) ............... 52
Uppercase{} ................................... 319
UppercaseLetter ..................... 311, 327
Use All .................................. 290, 469

Default ............................ 290, 468

Default Baseline ....................... 289
Existing Styles ......................... 114
existing styles in the destination
document ............................... 373
Use Facing Pages ............. 130, 137138
Use None ....................... 290, 469, 471
Use paragraph style ........................ 251
Use Selected Shape Appearance as
Default ................................... 477
Use Selected Shape Appearance As
Default ................... 158, 186, 476
Use Small Icons .............................. 410
Use Smart Punctuation (Includes curly
quotes) .................................. 298
Use Smart Punctuation (Including curly
quotes) .................................. 404
Use Style ....................................... 375
Use tabs to align page numbers ....... 235
Use the following topic ................... 244
Use topic ....................................... 253
Using ............. 300, 311312, 319, 321
UTF-16 ......................................... 386
UTF-8 (recommended) .................... 386
Use
Use
Use
Use

V
\v
............................................. 328
Vertical .................................. 162, 295
Vertical Offset ................................ 370
Vertical Ruler ........................... 13, 462
View 8, 1113, 1617, 41, 104, 108,

113, 115, 118, 128, 138140,

171, 192, 196, 203, 221, 224,
230232, 236, 247, 251, 262,
266, 274275, 282283, 285,
299, 303, 315, 342, 344, 374,
388, 391, 399, 410, 413, 461
463, 469, 489, 492
View by Location ............................ 224
View by Name ................................ 224
View Options ................................. 399
Vowel Point Hataf Patah .................. 457
Vowel Point Hataf Segol .................. 457
Vowel Point Hiriq ............................ 457
Vowel Point Holam ......................... 457
Vowel Point Patah ........................... 457
Vowel Point Qamatz ........................ 457
Vowel Point Qubutz ........................ 457
Vowel Point Segol ........................... 457
Vowel Point Sheva .......................... 457
Vowel Point Tsere ........................... 457

W
\W ............................................. 328
\w ...................................... 327328
Watermark from image file: .............. 369
Watermark with text: ....................... 369
Watermark ................... 368369, 476
Western (ISO Latin 1) ...................... 386
Western (ISO Latin 3) ...................... 386
Western (Mac OS Roman) ................. 386
Western (NeXTStep) ........................ 386
Western (Windows Latin 1) ............... 386
When Printing / Saving PDF ............. 144

When the selection changes to: ........ 372

Where .................... 4, 9, 301, 320, 433
White Corner Bracket (Left)
.......... 457
White Corner Bracket (Right)
........ 457
Whole File ...................................... 320
Whole Word .................... 301, 312, 314
Width ............................ 131, 183, 187
Wild Card ........ 310312, 320321, 327
Window2, 8, 18, 22, 26, 59, 61, 6971,

73, 122, 128130, 137138, 237,

253, 275, 285, 358, 387, 410,
413, 451, 480
Won ............................................. 456
Word Count ............................ 276, 459
Word processor .............................. 255
Work Address ................................ 360
Work Address (city) ........................ 360
Work Address (state) ...................... 360
Work Address (zip) ......................... 360
Work Email .................................... 360
Work FAX ....................................... 360
Work Phone ................................... 360
Wrap Box ............................... 162, 476
Wrap Text Around Image ......... 153, 157
Wrap Text Around Shape 148149, 157,
476
Wrap Tight ............................. 162, 476
Writing ............................ 26, 275, 457

X
[\x00-\x07\x09-\x0c\x0e-\x1f] ..... 327
[\x00-\x0c\x0e-\xif] ...................... 327
\x00-\xff ...................................... 327
[\x00-\xff] .................................... 327
([\x020][\x020]+) ........................... 332
[\x020]+\. ..................................... 329
\x20 ............................................. 332
([\x20])(\n) .................................... 332
([x20\t])\1+ ................................... 329
[\x20\t]+$ ..................................... 329
[[:xdigit:]] ....................................... 327

Y
Yellow .................... 471472, 478479
Yen ............................................. 456
Yes ................................................. x
Yiddish Letter Double Vav ............ 456
Yiddish Letter Double Yod Patach .. 456
Yiddish Letter Double Yod ............ 456
Yiddish Letter Kometz Alef ........... 457
Yiddish Letter Vav Yod ................. 457
your screens width ........................ 373

Z
Zap Gremlins ................................. 433
Zapfino ......................................... 485
Zero Width Joiner ........................... 457
Zero Width Non-Joiner .................... 457
Zero Width Space ............................ 457
Zoom ............................. 299, 462, 480
Zoom In ......................................... 462
Zoom Out ...................................... 462

Index of Figures and Tables

The 0 or 1 PowerFind expression

Figure 338 ---------------- 313
The + (plus) portion of the Languages Preferences
Figure 34 ------------------- 30
The 1+ PowerFind expression
Figure 340 ---------------- 313
The Accept Tracked Changes alert
Figure 380 ---------------- 351
The Add Bookmark As sheet
Figure 250 ---------------- 219
The Add Custom Toolbar Item dialog with a custom icon added on the right edge
Figure 431 ---------------- 410
The Add License dialog
Figure 11 -------------------- ix
The Add New Palette Group dialog
Figure 435 ---------------- 412
The Add styles to a new style collection sheet
Figure 127 ---------------- 115
Adding a custom group to the Document Manager
Figure 67 ------------------- 68
Adding a filter group using a date criterion to the Document Manager
Figure 72 ------------------- 72
Adding a filter group using a file name criterion to the Document Manager
Figure 69 ------------------- 70
Adding a filter group using content criteria to the Document Manager
Figure 71 ------------------- 72
Adding a folder group to the Document Manager
Figure 68 ------------------- 69
An Addressed Envelope
Figure 440 ---------------- 442
The Adjustment Settings dialog
Figure 210 ---------------- 182
The Advanced portion of the New File preferences pane showing a different Nisus New File selected Figure 408 ---------------- 379
The Advanced portion of the New File preferences pane showing default location of the Nisus New File
Figure 406 ---------------- 377
The Advanced preferences of Nisus Writer Pro
Figure 429 ---------------- 408
The Advanced setting of the Rebuild Table of Contents dialog
Figure 262 ---------------- 233
Aligning text inside the footer area
Figure 160 ---------------- 141
Alignment buttons on the Character palette
Table 3 ---------------------- 85
Anna Sewell sends her comments to her publisher
Figure 374 ---------------- 345
Another version of Nisus Writer is already running
Figure 13 -------------------- xi
The Appearance Preferences pane
Figure 414 ---------------- 387
The Apple App Store application icon
Figure 1 ---------------------- iii
Assigning a Menu Key shortcut in the Style Sheet view
Figure 117 ---------------- 107
Assigning text to appear before a numbered list style
Figure 57 ------------------- 55
The attribute bubbles of the Style Sheet view illustrated in Figure 118 above with Line Spacing selected
Figure 119 ---------------- 108
The Automatic Content Update Preferences dialog
Figure 162 ---------------- 143
The automatic page break in Nisus Writer Pro
Figure 299 ---------------- 279
Automatic renumbering in the Table of Contents Navigator
Figure 269 ---------------- 239
The Basic setting of the Rebuild Table of Contents dialog
Figure 261 ---------------- 233
Black Beauty after having been edited by too many people
Figure 376 ---------------- 348
Black Beauty displaying the changes of only one editor
Figure 377 ---------------- 349
The Bookends application icon
Figure 280 ---------------- 253
The Bookends Preferences dialog
Figure 281 ---------------- 253
Both Highlight changes and Markup additions and deletions checked
Figure 387 ---------------- 356
The bounding box drawn around lines with various text wrap options
Figure 181 ---------------- 160
Building the PowerFind expression
Figure 335 ---------------- 311
The Bullet pop-up menu in the Lists palette
Figure 51 ------------------- 50
A Canvas ready for shapes
Figure 211 ---------------- 183
The Capture any paragraph followed by a return repeated once one or more times PowerFind expression
Figure 352 ---------------- 320
The Capture any paragraph followed by a return repeated once PowerFind expression
Figure 351 ---------------- 320
The Capture any paragraph followed by a return PowerFind expression
Figure 350 ---------------- 320
The Capture any two digits followed by a slash PowerFind expression
Figure 347 ---------------- 319
The Capture any two sets of digits separated by slashes PowerFind expression
Figure 348 ---------------- 319
Cells selected to merge
Figure 230 ---------------- 205
A change annotation showing formatting changes with the check to accept highlighted
Figure 379 ---------------- 351
The change direction of document dialog
Figure 44 ------------------- 39
Change Line Height (with show invisibles turned on)
Figure 97 ------------------- 87
Changing the text and paragraph formatting in Style Sheet view
Figure 118 ---------------- 108
The Character palette enlarged
Figure 109 ----------------- 96
The Character palette in its smallest format
Figure 108 ----------------- 96
The Character palette showing the Font pop-up menu
Figure 110 ----------------- 97
Characters with special meaning in PowerFind Pro
Table 31 ------------------ 324
The check for updates on startup dialog
Figure 12 --------------------- x
The Check Spelling dialog
Figure 290 ---------------- 267
The Choose Document Manager folder dialog
Figure 6 ---------------------- vi
The Choose log Folder version of the enable diagnostics dialog
Figure 445 ---------------- 446
Choosing a custom palette group
Figure 437 ---------------- 413
Choosing styles to add to a Style Collection with the Styles palette open
Figure 134 ---------------- 119
Choosing the log folder for sending feedback
Figure 444 ---------------- 445
A citation {Coll, 1998, etc.} entered from Bookends into a Nisus Writer Pro document (selected after insertion)
Figure 283 ---------------- 256
The Click for Header/Footer areas of the Nisus Writer Pro window
Figure 153 ---------------- 135
The Clipboard menu on the Statusbar without, then with the Option key (4) pressed
Figure 47 ------------------- 44
The Clipboards section of the Preferences dialog
Figure 423 ---------------- 398
The Color Picker tool of the Table Cell Borders palette
Figure 247 ---------------- 216
The Color tag and its menu
Figure 307 ---------------- 290
The Colors panel
Figure 404 ---------------- 375
Column text balanced
Figure 148 ---------------- 131
The Columns palette
Figure 147 ---------------- 130
Comment added by Author #1 on his/her computer
Figure 372 ---------------- 342

520

Index of Figures and Tables

A comment added to a document

Figure 360 ---------------- 332
The Comments button indicating the number of bits of text with comments associated with them
Figure 370 ---------------- 342
Comments highlighted in text (light blue) without the Comments pane displayed
Figure 365 ---------------- 338
Comments of Minna Hale with the Comments pane displayed and comments highlighted in the text Figure 366 ---------------- 339
Comments of multiple authors displayed
Figure 364 ---------------- 337
The Comments Options dialog
Figure 362 ---------------- 336
Comments with text and graphic minimal opacity and Comments pane on the right
Figure 367 ---------------- 340
The Configure Indexes dialog
Figure 277 ---------------- 249
The Configure Indexes dialog with a new index style
Figure 278 ---------------- 251
The Configure TOCs dialog reconfigured for a new table of contents
Figure 264 ---------------- 236
The Configure TOCs dialog
Figure 263 ---------------- 234
The contextual menu in the Groups pane of the Document Manager
Figure 74 ------------------- 73
The contextual menu with a resized but not cropped floating image selected
Figure 179 ---------------- 157
The contextual menu with an un-resized or cropped inline image selected
Figure 176 ---------------- 155
Continuing footnote or endnote numbering across consecutive files
Figure 220 ---------------- 195
The correct spelling (and much more) contextual menu
Figure 289 ---------------- 266
The correct spelling menuoid
Figure 288 ---------------- 265
The create word list on entire file? Macro Prompt
Figure 276 ---------------- 247
Creating a colorful double-headed arrow using the Shape Stroke palette
Figure 201 ---------------- 172
Creating a linked Text Box
Figure 195 ---------------- 168
Creating a numbered list style
Figure 56 ------------------- 55
Creating a table from the Insert Table button
Figure 223 ---------------- 198
The Cross-reference dialog; bookmarks sorted by location in the Navigator pane and by display text in the Cross-reference sheet
Figure 256 ---------------- 225
Cursor Size as an aspect of the Universal Access System Preference
Figure 417 ---------------- 391
The Custom Footnote Character sheet
Figure 218 ---------------- 192
The Custom Paper Size dialog of the Page Setup dialog
Figure 142 ---------------- 126
The Custom Properties portion of the Properties sheet
Figure 298 ---------------- 277
The Customize Toolbar sheet
Figure 430 ---------------- 409
Customizing the appearance of the insertion point portion of the Appearance preferences
Figure 418 ---------------- 392
Customizing the Special Characters palette
Figure 32 ------------------- 27
Date & Time Variables and Document Properties in headers and footers
Figure 163 ---------------- 144
Date & Time Variables and Document Properties in headers and footers filled in
Figure 164 ---------------- 144
The Default Leader Tab Settings sheet
Figure 104 ----------------- 92
Default Leader Tab underline pop-up menu
Figure 105 ----------------- 93
The default location of the Nisus Documents folder
Figure 7 --------------------- vii
Default location of the Nisus New File in the Finder
Figure 407 ---------------- 378
The default page setup dialog
Figure 138 ---------------- 124
Deleting a paragraph with an anchored shape
Figure 174 ---------------- 154
The Deselect All button
Figure 243 ---------------- 214
The discard document formatting warning
Figure 59 ------------------- 59
The Doc Manager preferences
Figure 63 ------------------- 63
The Document Manager showing All Managed Files
Figure 62 ------------------- 62
The Document Manager showing the Style Library windows with nothing in it
Figure 125 ---------------- 114
The Document Manager sorted by date created with the contextual menu options showing
Figure 66 ------------------- 67
The Document Manager with a Style Collection and its associated styles
Figure 128 ---------------- 115
A document ready for bibliographic scanning
Figure 284 ---------------- 257
A document with styles saved to the Style Library of the Document Manager
Figure 130 ---------------- 117
The Draft View in Nisus Writer Pro
Figure 301 ---------------- 281
The Draft View in Nisus Writer Pro with an inserted page break found
Figure 303 ---------------- 283
The Draft View in Nisus Writer Pro with an inserted page break
Figure 302 ---------------- 282
Dragging a line to cause the cell to fit the contents
Figure 240 ---------------- 210
The Dropper with nothing in it (before clicking in text), then with something in it (after clicking in text) Figure 112 ----------------- 99
Early versions of The Nisus Man image
Figure 454 ---------------- 493
The Edit Line Wraps and Indent dialog in a left to right section
Figure 89 ------------------- 84
The Edit Line Wraps and Indent dialog in a right to left section
Figure 90 ------------------- 84
The Edit Special Characters window
Figure 31 ------------------- 26
The Edit Tab sheet
Figure 102 ----------------- 91
Editing a Linked to file image in Preview.app
Figure 172 ---------------- 153
Editing the name of a group in the Document Manager
Figure 75 ------------------- 74
An empty, unused, Document Manager
Figure 60 ------------------- 61
An empty, unused, iTunes
Figure 61 ------------------- 61
The enable collection of diagnostic information alert
Figure 443 ---------------- 445
The End of Word PowerFind expression
Figure 344 ---------------- 316
An example of a index word list table
Table 28 ------------------ 247
Example of Center Justification (with show invisibles turned on)
Figure 94 ------------------- 86
Example of Full Justification (with show invisibles turned on)
Figure 96 ------------------- 87
Example of Left Justification (with show invisibles turned on)
Figure 93 ------------------- 86
Example of Right Justification (with show invisibles turned on)
Figure 95 ------------------- 86
Expanding the height of a cell in a table
Figure 235 ---------------- 208
The Family portion of the Character palette showing fonts WYSIWYG in various sizes
Figure 419 ---------------- 393
The Feedback Reporter window
Figure 442 ---------------- 443
The Find 2 or more Returns PowerFind expression
Figure 346 ---------------- 318
Find/Replace macro option symbols
Table 35 ------------------ 426
The Find/Replace window of an Untitled document
Figure 320 ---------------- 298
The Find/Replace window with the find and replace expressions created
Figure 354 ---------------- 321
The Find/Replace Windows Find What menu
Figure 333 ---------------- 309
The First Line In/Outdent marker relative to the Tail Line Wrap Indicator (flush)
Figure 79 ------------------- 80
The First Line In/Outdent marker relative to the Tail Line Wrap Indicator (indented)
Figure 80 ------------------- 80

Indexes

521

The First Line In/Outdent marker relative to the Tail Line Wrap Indicator (outdent or hanging indent) Figure 81 ------------------- 81
The First Line Indent in various positions relative to the Left Indent marker
Figure 84 ------------------- 82
Floating image alignment options
Table 5 -------------------- 159
Floating image drawn behind and in front of text
Figure 183 ---------------- 161
The floating image of Figure 177 on page 160 changed from floating to inline
Figure 188 ---------------- 164
Floating image text wrap options
Table 6 -------------------- 159
A font file icon
Figure 107 ----------------- 95
The Font panel
Figure 403 ---------------- 374
The font substitution alert
Figure 106 ----------------- 95
The Footnote area of the Style Sheet in its shipped state
Figure 219 ---------------- 193
The Footnote tag pop-up menu
Figure 217 ---------------- 192
The Format portion of the New File preferences pane
Figure 402 ---------------- 374
Full Screen view in a retro look
Figure 421 ---------------- 395
The Gear menu in the Fonts panel
Figure 111 ----------------- 98
The Gear menu of the Navigator pane displaying bookmarks by name
Figure 254 ---------------- 223
The General section of the Preferences dialog
Figure 400 ---------------- 371
Glossary files location
Figure 428 ---------------- 406
The Go menu in the Finder with 4 pressed enables access to the users Library folder
Figure 37 ------------------- 32
The Go to Page field on the Statusbar
Figure 259 ---------------- 229
The Go to Page sheet and its pop-up menu
Figure 258 ---------------- 229
A group of paragraphs with a 5 pt border (yellow of Highlight color HTML EBFF64) & shading (yellow of background color HTML
FFFF00; pattern set to 45% shading) padding set to 6 pt all around and a line between the paragraphs using HTML color
D68A9C
Figure 318 ---------------- 295
The Header area of the Nisus Writer Pro window activated with the Tooldrawer open
Figure 156 ---------------- 136
The Header/Footer palette appears when you click in the header or footer area
Figure 154 ---------------- 135
The Header/Footer palette
Figure 155 ---------------- 136
Heading styles indicating that they are automatically included in the table of contents In Default TOC, Level #
Figure 260 ---------------- 232
Hebrew text written in English
Figure 46 ------------------- 40
Highlight a page occurrence in the index
Figure 271 ---------------- 242
The Highlight button and its menu
Figure 308 ---------------- 290
Highlight changes turned off but Markup additions and deletions turned on
Figure 386 ---------------- 356
Highlight changes turned on but Markup additions and deletions unchecked
Figure 385 ---------------- 355
Highlight color palette in Microsoft Word 2004
Figure 311 ---------------- 292
Highlight color, Background Color and Paragraph Borders with Paragraph Shading compared
Figure 310 ---------------- 291
The Highlight tag and its menu
Figure 309 ---------------- 290
Hyphenation illustrated: (from upper left to lower right) Disabled; Automatic - Normal; Automatic - More Often; prevented in the
last paragraph
Figure 295 ---------------- 274
The image in Figure 168 resized (smaller) with aspect ratio maintained; then (larger) without aspect ratio maintained
Figure 169 ---------------- 150
An image, inline, not selected with Bounding Box shown; then selected; then floating & selected with Show Invisibles turned on
Figure 168 ---------------- 150
The Image variant of the Open dialog with Link to File checked
Figure 167 ---------------- 149
The Independent Drag First Line Indent marker
Figure 85 ------------------- 82
The Index As dialog set for a cross-reference
Figure 273 ---------------- 244
The Index As dialog
Figure 270 ---------------- 241
The Indexing palette
Figure 279 ---------------- 252
The inline image of Figure 166 on page 151 with a caption added
Figure 198 ---------------- 171
An inline image with Clip drawing to line turned on, then off
Figure 166 ---------------- 147
The Input Menu showing two input methods (keyboards) for the current language in Nisus Writer Pro Figure 43 ------------------- 38
The Input Sources tab of the Keyboard (System) preferences (in Mac OS X 10.10 Yosemite)
Figure 448 ---------------- 487
The insert and delete buttons of the Table palette
Figure 228 ---------------- 203
The insert and delete buttons
Table 13 ------------------ 203
The Insert Table button
Figure 221 ---------------- 197
The Insert Table sheet
Figure 222 ---------------- 197
An inserted page break
Figure 300 ---------------- 280
The installer requires your administrator password
Figure 4 ----------------------- v
International Smart or curly Quotes
Table 33 ------------------ 403
Interpolated String Literals
Table 34 ------------------ 420
Invisibles
Table 32 ------------------ 388
Jarrolds changes to Black Beauty
Figure 375 ---------------- 346
Kerning options compared
Table 29 ------------------ 289
Landscape orientation
Figure 140 ---------------- 125
The Language button on the Toolbar
Figure 40 ------------------- 36
The Language palette in check spelling mode
Figure 286 ---------------- 264
The Language palette in Nisus Thesaurus mode
Figure 287 ---------------- 264
The Language pop-up menu in the Language palette (shows the Thesaurus when a word is spelled correctly)
Figure 42 ------------------- 37
The Language tag on the Statusbar
Figure 41 ------------------- 36
The Languages portion of the Preferences dialog
Figure 33 ------------------- 29
Left and right (along the period) aligned lists
Figure 53 ------------------- 53
The Licenses dialog
Figure 10 -------------------- ix
Line number display problem caused by narrow gutter
Figure 305 ---------------- 286
The Line Numbers palette
Figure 304 ---------------- 285
The Lines menu as it appears from the Lines button on the Shapes palette
Figure 199 ---------------- 171
Linked text boxes with altered ruler and font
Figure 196 ---------------- 169
A Linked to File image in a Nisus Writer Pro document
Figure 171 ---------------- 152
The List button on the Toolbar
Figure 49 ------------------- 48
The List Style portion of the Style Sheet view (with the Lists palette)
Figure 55 ------------------- 54

522

Index of Figures and Tables

List Styles explained

Figure 54 ------------------- 53
The Lists palette
Figure 50 ------------------- 49
The Lists submenu of the Format menu
Figure 48 ------------------- 48
The LookAhead PowerFind expression
Figure 336 ---------------- 312
The Macroize sheet in the Find/Replace window
Figure 330 ---------------- 306
The margins beyond the printer limits dialog
Figure 396 ---------------- 365
The Margins palette showing the header and footer heights and insets for the current section of this document
Figure 145 ---------------- 128
The Margins palette showing the margins for the shipped Nisus New File
Figure 144 ---------------- 127
Match the secondary fonts size to that of the primary font
Figure 39 ------------------- 35
The Menu Keys section of the Preferences dialog
Figure 425 ---------------- 399
The Merge Cells button on the Table Cells palette
Figure 229 ---------------- 205
The Merge Document dialog
Figure 392 ---------------- 362
Merged cells
Figure 231 ---------------- 205
Merging a document with a CSV (comma separated values) text file selected
Figure 393 ---------------- 363
Methods for removing a table
Table 27 ------------------ 218
Minimizing the Comments pane; lines draw to indicate presence of comments
Figure 368 ---------------- 341
The Missing Backup Folder alert
Figure 413 ---------------- 385
The More Palette Groups menu
Figure 434 ---------------- 412
The move shape from floating to inline alert
Figure 187 ---------------- 164
Moving a file to the Document Manager (after)
Figure 65 ------------------- 66
Moving a file to the Document Manager (before)
Figure 64 ------------------- 65
Moving a portion of a document using the Table of Contents Navigator
Figure 268 ---------------- 239
Moving the Conjoined Drag First Line Indent marker
Figure 86 ------------------- 82
Moving the custom icon from the repository to the Toolbar
Figure 432 ---------------- 411
Moving the inner edge of the footer margin
Figure 158 ---------------- 139
Moving the outer edge of the header margin
Figure 157 ---------------- 138
The Multiple Sections Page Setup sheet
Figure 141 ---------------- 125
Multiple style collections with many styles
Figure 136 ---------------- 120
My Comments from Figure 360 on page 333 when opened by another user
Figure 371 ---------------- 342
The N - M Times PowerFind expression
Figure 341 ---------------- 314
Naming a Document Manager search filter
Figure 70 ------------------- 71
Naming a Nisus Writer Pro macro
Figure 357 ---------------- 322
Naming a saved expression
Figure 327 ---------------- 304
Neither Highlight changes nor Markup additions and deletions checked
Figure 384 ---------------- 355
The new paragraph style based on the selection
Figure 120 ---------------- 110
The Next/Previous arrow buttons with the Comment History count in the Title Bar of a comment
Figure 361 ---------------- 334
The Nisus Thesaurus
Figure 293 ---------------- 270
The Nisus Writer Pro application icon
Figure 5 ----------------------- v
Nisus Writer Pro at the Apple App Store
Figure 2 ---------------------- iv
The Nisus Writer Pro document icon
Figure 9 ---------------------- 1
The Nisus Writer Pro Horizontal Ruler in Page view showing inches
Figure 24 ------------------- 12
The Nisus Writer Pro icon, and its menu, in the Dock
Figure 17 --------------------- 7
The Nisus Writer Pro installer package
Figure 3 ---------------------- iv
The Nisus Writer Pro License Agreement
Figure 9 -------------------- viii
The Nisus Writer Pro Menu Bar
Figure 18 --------------------- 7
The Nisus Writer Pro portion of the Print dialog
Figure 397 ---------------- 366
The Nisus Writer Pro Statusbar
Figure 26 ------------------- 14
The Nisus Writer Pro Title Bar (Untitled, Saved and Edited) Mac OS X 10.10
Figure 20 --------------------- 8
The Nisus Writer Pro Title Bar (Untitled, Saved) Mac OS X 10.8
Figure 19 --------------------- 8
The Nisus Writer Pro Toolbar
Figure 23 ------------------- 11
The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer at first startup
Figure 27 ------------------- 16
The Nisus Writer Pro Tooldrawer palette group selection buttons
Figure 28 ------------------- 17
The Nisus Writer Pro window opened to full height
Figure 16 --------------------- 6
The Nisus Writer Pro window when first opened
Figure 15 --------------------- 6
Normal Find Replace Attributes (after)
Figure 322 ---------------- 301
Normal Find Replace Attributes (before)
Figure 321 ---------------- 301
The Normal style in Style Sheet view
Figure 116 ---------------- 105
The Notes Reference Styles area of the Style Sheet
Figure 216 ---------------- 192
The Number Format pop-up menu
Figure 52 ------------------- 52
Option-modified Hebrew keyboard
Figure 451 ---------------- 490
Option-modified Hebrew- QWERTY keyboard
Figure 452 ---------------- 491
Original table
Table 14 ------------------ 204
Original table after selecting the four cells beginning with France (pink or Cathy column); note the sequence in the Row Headers
Table 16 ------------------ 204
Original table after selecting the four vertical cells beginning with Italy (yellow or Evelyn column); note the sequence in the Row
Headers
Table 15 ------------------ 204
The Other Merge Placeholder dialog
Figure 390 ---------------- 360
The OtherCaptured PowerFind expression
Figure 337 ---------------- 312
A padded cell
Table 23 ------------------ 213
The Padding portion of the Table Cells palette
Figure 242 ---------------- 213
The Page Border palette buttons
Table 4 -------------------- 131
Page Border set at Header Margin
Figure 152 ---------------- 133
Page Border set at Page Edge
Figure 150 ---------------- 132
Page Border set at Text Margin
Figure 151 ---------------- 133
The Page Borders palette
Figure 149 ---------------- 132
Page Guides (with Click for Header) showing
Figure 415 ---------------- 390
Page Guides not showing
Figure 416 ---------------- 390
Page number display and its menu
Figure 159 ---------------- 140

Indexes

523

The Page pop-up menu

Figure 257 ---------------- 229
The Page Setup dialog set for a #10 Envelope
Figure 439 ---------------- 441
Pages from two sections spanning a section break
Figure 161 ---------------- 141
The Palette Library with an empty palette
Figure 436 ---------------- 412
The Paragraph Border palette buttons
Table 30 ------------------ 293
The Paragraph Borders palette
Figure 312 ---------------- 292
Paragraph formatting icons
Figure 25 ------------------- 13
The Paragraph palette with Indents selected
Figure 91 ------------------- 85
The Paragraph palette with Spacing selected
Figure 92 ------------------- 85
The Paragraph Shading palette
Figure 314 ---------------- 294
A paragraph with a 5 pt border (yellow of Highlight color HTML EBFF64) & shading (yellow of background color HTML FFFF00;
pattern set to 45% shading) padding set to 6 pt all around
Figure 317 ---------------- 295
A paragraph with a border line thickness set to 5; (yellow of Highlight color HTML EBFF64) padding set to 6 pt all around, but no
shading
Figure 315 ---------------- 294
A paragraph with no border, but shading (yellow of Background color HTML FFFF00; pattern set to 45% shading) padding set to 6
pt all around
Figure 316 ---------------- 294
The Paste Spot
Figure 212 ---------------- 183
The Pattern menu of the Table Cells Shading palette (in three parts) set for the bottom row, fourth column of Table 25 above
(More)
Figure 249 ---------------- 217
The permission to access the Nisus New File for an existing Nisus Writer Pro user.
Figure 8 --------------------- vii
A photographic image screen behind text
Figure 184 ---------------- 162
A plain colored screen behind text
Figure 185 ---------------- 162
Pleading Page or Pleading Paper document A
Figure 306 ---------------- 287
The pop-up menu in the Macroize sheet
Figure 355 ---------------- 321
Pop-up menu indicators
Figure 22 ------------------- 11
Portrait orientation
Figure 139 ---------------- 125
The PowerFind Browser
Figure 334 ---------------- 310
A PowerFind expression that changes the wording of a repeated phrase with a variable
Figure 353 ---------------- 320
A PowerFind metacharacter
Figure 331 ---------------- 308
PowerFind Replace Attributes (after)
Figure 324 ---------------- 302
PowerFind Replace Attributes (before)
Figure 323 ---------------- 302
A PowerFind replace expression changing a sequence of captured text
Figure 349 ---------------- 319
Preset tabs above the ruler (with show invisibles turned on)
Figure 100 ----------------- 90
The Preview portion displays the first few lines of text
Figure 77 ------------------- 75
The Preview portion of the Document Manager with a graphic file selected and the contextual menu showing
Figure 78 ------------------- 76
The Print dialog in Leopard
Figure 395 ---------------- 365
The Printing portion of the Print & Fax System Preference pane of Yosemite
Figure 137 ---------------- 124
The QuickFix preferences (lower portion controls the glossaries)
Figure 426 ---------------- 402
A range of paragraphs after clicking the Indent button
Figure 83 ------------------- 81
A range of paragraphs with the indents set at the far left, along the margin
Figure 82 ------------------- 81
The Recent Find submenu of the Gear menu in the Find/Replace window
Figure 325 ---------------- 303
The Reject Tracked Changes alert
Figure 382 ---------------- 352
The remove filter group alert
Figure 73 ------------------- 73
The remove icon from toolbar dialog
Figure 433 ---------------- 411
The Remove Multiple Bookmarks sheet
Figure 255 ---------------- 224
Removing a saved color in the Colors panel
Figure 319 ---------------- 296
The rename bookmark dialog
Figure 251 ---------------- 221
Renamed bookmark
Figure 253 ---------------- 222
Renaming a bookmark
Figure 252 ---------------- 222
Renaming a Clipboard
Figure 424 ---------------- 399
Renaming a Nisus Writer Pro document from the Title Bar
Figure 21 --------------------- 9
Renaming the novel Black Bounty to its new working title Black Beauty
Figure 14 --------------------- 4
Repeated text patterns
Figure 358 ---------------- 325
The resized image in Figure 169 cropped from two vertical sides
Figure 170 ---------------- 151
Result of choosing Fit to Contents
Table 19 ------------------ 210
Result of choosing Fit to Page
Figure 241 ---------------- 211
Result of pressing various confirm keys in Nisus Writer Pro palettes
Table 1 ---------------------- 19
Reuben Simon and his fictional co-workers in the Show comments made by pop-up menu
Figure 363 ---------------- 336
The Review Changes window scanning the changes made to Black Beauty
Figure 383 ---------------- 354
The Right Indent marker
Figure 87 ------------------- 82
The right to left ruler and Indent/Outdent buttons
Figure 45 ------------------- 39
A right to left table
Figure 224 ---------------- 198
The ruler indents of a text box showing Expand and Link buttons
Figure 191 ---------------- 166
The same document as in Figure 284 above with the bibliography inserted
Figure 285 ---------------- 258
The same table with cell widths equalized (notice the word common)
Figure 239 ---------------- 209
The Save As dialog for a Nisus New File
Figure 409 ---------------- 380
The Save As dialog pointing to the Macros folder of Nisus Writer Pro
Figure 356 ---------------- 322
The Save Expression sheet
Figure 326 ---------------- 303
The Save Report alert
Figure 447 ---------------- 447
The Save to Style Library button in the define styles area of the Style Sheet view
Figure 126 ---------------- 114
The Saved Expressions submenu
Figure 329 ---------------- 305
Saving a file as a document template
Figure 405 ---------------- 376
Saving a file to the Style Library of the Document Manager
Figure 129 ---------------- 116
Saving a recent expression
Figure 328 ---------------- 304
Saving an envelope template
Figure 441 ---------------- 442
The Saving section of the Preferences dialog
Figure 410 ---------------- 382
Saving the data document as Text
Figure 391 ---------------- 361

524

Index of Figures and Tables

Saving the merged document to one file with records divided by page breaks
Figure 394 ---------------- 364
Searching in a filter group of the Document Manager for specific text
Figure 76 ------------------- 75
The Section palette showing Page, then Section numbering options
Figure 146 ---------------- 129
The Select/Remove Character Attributes tag on the Statusbar
Figure 121 ---------------- 111
A selected floating image beyond the margin
Figure 209 ---------------- 181
A selected floating image selected showing its anchor
Figure 177 ---------------- 156
Selected shape determines appearance of inserted shape
Figure 213 ---------------- 184
Selecting a particular Style Collection to which to add styles
Figure 135 ---------------- 119
Selecting a Style Collection to which to add styles
Figure 132 ---------------- 118
Selecting a style to add to a Style Collection
Figure 131 ---------------- 117
Selecting text using the keyboard
Table 2 ---------------------- 43
Selecting the reference to cite in the Nisus Writer Pro document
Figure 282 ---------------- 255
The Send Changes or Send Original dialog
Figure 446 ---------------- 447
Sequence of shapes in multiple paragraphs each shape anchored to the paragraph in which it appears Figure 203 ---------------- 176
Sequence of shapes in multiple paragraphs each shape anchored to the paragraph in which it appears in Figure 203
Figure 204 ---------------- 176
The sequence of shapes in one paragraph
Figure 205 ---------------- 177
Setting the background and foreground colors
Table 26 ------------------ 217
Setting the line Between Paragraphs
Figure 313 ---------------- 293
Setting the margins visually
Figure 143 ---------------- 127
The Shape Anchor: on the left, at the beginning of the paragraph and, to its right, at the end
Figure 178 ---------------- 156
The Shape Bounding Box with shapes selected and text wrapped around the bounding box, wherever it is transparent, then text
behind shape
Figure 180 ---------------- 158
The Shape Fill palette
Figure 206 ---------------- 179
The Shape Metrics palette link buttons
Table 8 -------------------- 180
The Shape Metrics palette with the Width and Height dimensions linked and highlighted
Figure 208 ---------------- 180
The shape of Figure 214 after a default duplication
Figure 215 ---------------- 186
A shape ready to duplicate
Figure 214 ---------------- 185
The Shape Shadow palette
Figure 207 ---------------- 179
The Shape Stroke palette
Figure 200 ---------------- 172
The Shape Wrap palette default options when set to Position on page of
Figure 175 ---------------- 155
The Shape Wrap palette with settings for a screen behind text
Figure 186 ---------------- 163
The Shapes menu as it appears from the Shapes button on the Shapes palette
Figure 202 ---------------- 173
The Shapes palette
Figure 190 ---------------- 165
The Shortest 0 or 1 PowerFind expression
Figure 339 ---------------- 313
Shows Table 20 above with row made into a header (in this case the title)
Table 21 ------------------ 212
Shows Table 21 above with a column made into a header (in this case row headers)
Table 22 ------------------ 212
A simple PowerFind expression
Figure 332 ---------------- 308
A sound selected for explicit saves & the pop-up menu open, ready to choose a sound for autosave
Figure 411 ---------------- 383
Space After (Below) Paragraph (with show invisibles turned on)
Figure 99 ------------------- 88
Space Before (Above) Paragraph (with show invisibles turned on)
Figure 98 ------------------- 88
A special language Character style set for inclusion in an index
Figure 275 ---------------- 246
The Special Characters palette displaying the Misc (miscellaneous) set
Figure 30 ------------------- 25
Special Positions set of Find/Replace expressions illustrated
Figure 345 ---------------- 317
The Spelling folder in the Finder with alternate (ancient Greek, Hebrew and Latin) dictionary (and hyphenation) files added
Figure 38 ------------------- 33
The Spelling window when it is active has a highlighted edge (in this case beside the Correct button) Figure 292 ---------------- 268
The Spelling window when it is not active does not have a highlighted edge
Figure 291 ---------------- 267
The Split Cells button on the Table Cells palette
Figure 233 ---------------- 206
The split cells sheet
Figure 232 ---------------- 206
Stale cross-references and other automatic content displaying their borders
Figure 165 ---------------- 145
A standard business letter
Figure 388 ---------------- 358
A standard business letter with Merge Placeholders
Figure 389 ---------------- 359
The Standard Properties portion of the Properties sheet
Figure 297 ---------------- 276
Star shape settings from left to right: box wrap and no padding, box wrap and 22 pts padding, wrap tight and no padding, wrap
tight and 22 pts padding
Figure 182 ---------------- 161
The Start of Word PowerFind expression
Figure 343 ---------------- 316
The stepper in the Size portion of the Character palette
Figure 29 ------------------- 20
A Style Collection with added styles
Figure 133 ---------------- 118
The Style conflict sheet
Figure 124 ---------------- 113
A style for a table of contents
Figure 266 ---------------- 237
The style is currently used dialog
Figure 123 ---------------- 112
The style is not currently used dialog
Figure 122 ---------------- 112
The style pop-up menu of the Table Cell Borders palette
Figure 246 ---------------- 215
The Style Sheet view
Figure 115 ---------------- 104
The Styles palette enlarged with its menus showing formatted and unformatted previews; compare Figure 420 on page 394
Figure 113 ---------------- 102
The Styles palette showing formatted and unformatted views
Figure 420 ---------------- 393
The Styles Sheet portion of the View button
Figure 114 ---------------- 103
Sub-topics for a hierarchical index
Figure 274 ---------------- 245
The System's Characters palette
Figure 342 ---------------- 315
The Systems Characters palette
Figure 453 ---------------- 492
The Tab menu
Figure 101 ----------------- 90
Tab stop justification (with show invisibles turned on; with and without leader)
Figure 103 ----------------- 91
Table 17 above with cells heights distributed evenly
Table 18 ------------------ 210
The table cell alignment buttons
Table 12 ------------------ 200
The Table Cell Borders palette buttons
Table 24 ------------------ 214
The Table Cell Borders palette
Figure 244 ---------------- 214
The Table Cells Shading palette in its most simple form
Figure 248 ---------------- 216

Indexes

525

The Table of Contents Navigator displaying a hierarchical outline

Figure 267 ---------------- 238
The Table of Contents palette
Figure 265 ---------------- 236
The table of Figure 239 above with pronouns made larger (taller)
Table 17 ------------------ 209
The Table palette indicating the table alignment options with left selected and center and right beside it
Figure 225 ---------------- 200
A table showing horizontal and vertical gradients as well as shading
Table 25 ------------------ 216
A table with a row added at the top
Table 20 ------------------ 211
A table with a wide cell due to a longer word (notice the words common and but)
Figure 238 ---------------- 209
A table with cell widths equalized (notice the words words and common)
Figure 237 ---------------- 208
A table with images
Table 11 ------------------ 199
A table with unequal cell widths before equalizing
Figure 236 ---------------- 208
Text aligned by decimal points (color coded) in a table
Figure 227 ---------------- 202
The text alignment buttons of the Table Cells palette
Figure 226 ---------------- 201
The text analysis sheet
Figure 296 ---------------- 275
Text and Callout Boxes
Figure 194 ---------------- 168
The Text Box and Shape buttons on the Toolbar
Figure 189 ---------------- 165
The Text Box menu as it appears from the Text Box button on the Shapes palette
Figure 192 ---------------- 167
A Text Box ready for text
Figure 193 ---------------- 167
Text in Klingon
Figure 35 ------------------- 30
The Text portion of the Keyboard System Preferences
Figure 427 ---------------- 405
The Text Wrap area
Figure 88 ------------------- 83
The Thesaurus (and much more) contextual menu
Figure 294 ---------------- 271
The Thickness pop-up menu of the Table Cell Borders palette
Figure 245 ---------------- 215
Three change annotations showing text changes with the Reject button highlighted
Figure 381 ---------------- 352
Tiger Keyboard Viewer of the U.S. Extended keyboard after pressing 4
Figure 449 ---------------- 488
Tiger Keyboard Viewer of the U.S. Extended keyboard after pressing 4 u
Figure 450 ---------------- 488
The Toolbar customized with the Comments button (indicating the presence of comments in the document)
Figure 369 ---------------- 342
The Tools buttons on the Shapes palette
Table 7 -------------------- 174
The Track Changes button on the Toolbar inactive, activated, active and indicating the number of changes tracked, then inactive
and indicating the number of changes tracked
Figure 373 ---------------- 344
The Track Changes Options dialog
Figure 378 ---------------- 350
Typing Special characters using the U.S. Extended keyboard
Table 36 ------------------ 489
Uncaptured text patterns
Figure 359 ---------------- 325
The Undo and Redo paths
Figure 58 ------------------- 56
The unknown macro command alert
Figure 438 ---------------- 417
The updated Linked to file image in the Nisus Writer Pro document
Figure 173 ---------------- 153
Using Or to index multiple terms as one
Figure 272 ---------------- 243
Using a custom language icon in the Nisus Writer Pro Languages preferences
Figure 36 ------------------- 31
Using linked Text Boxes to create a document with a form of marginalia
Figure 197 ---------------- 170
The variant of the Open dialog with a sound selected for autosave
Figure 412 ---------------- 384
The various units of measurement options on the ruler
Figure 422 ---------------- 398
A very long table
Figure 234 ---------------- 207
A very simple table
Table 9 -------------------- 196
The View portion of the New File preferences pane
Figure 401 ---------------- 373
The Watermark dialog when first opened
Figure 398 ---------------- 367
The watermark dialog with settings for the watermark on the Disclaimer/Acknowledgements/Copyright page of this document
Figure 399 ---------------- 368
When to use tables
Table 10 ------------------ 196